Complete Electrical Design Course in Electrical Engineering

1. Electrical Design Course Content: Hi, and welcome everyone to our course for electrical design. Is that only cause our zeros that will help you learn everything you need to know about with electrical design. I'm Maddie and electrical power engineering. And in this course, you will learn everything you need to know in order to work as an electrical design engineer. Let's start by learning what are we going to get from this course? The course starts with the basics of lighting design. So what does this mean? If I would like to design the lighting of one, I would like to select that luminaires required in order to provide that required lacks insights. We will learn what does that mean? How does we calculate or how do we calculate the flux inside App room? And how to design the lighting system inside out using that manual calculations. And we will start going into that by Alexey. Bikes eve will help us to design the lighting system. Inside at venting. We will understand how can we do this is a lilacs evil. Then we will go to that dialect Surette. Also it is an additional component inside is a course that will help you learn. How can you do this same process, IX evil in that direction. Okay? Then we are going to talk about with an important program, which is a AutoCad broker. So we will learn about AutoCad, which will help us to design or form Zan building or in order to why are our equipment. So we will learn the basics of autocad. How can we work with it? And how can we import drawing representing the building itself? And how can we start wiring? Is that low in ears and sides that autocad rock. Then we will talk about different types of sockets that we use in our electrical system. And how can we add them to the electrical drawing and how can we start wiring them using AutoCad broker? Then we are going to talk about it as panel schedule, which will help us to divide the loads on our different phases. So we'll have an Excel sheet that will help us understand the idea of a schedule to help us balance that loads between the three phases. Then we will start talking about, after doing all of these different steps, we will talk about how can we select this as circuit breakers and diffuses in our electrical systems according to the different electrical cords. Then we will start talking about how exact single line diagram. And we will also talk about the rise or inside a delta T. We will see two different drawings for the single line diagram of the building and how can we understand them? Then we are going to start talking about with that load estimation, which is a very important step in the electrical design, will understand how can we do the load estimation of a building using Electrical Codes? How can we select this app by dimensions of a generator role? How can we select this other dimensions for our transport Monroe? Then we will have another course or how it cables. We will understand everything about our cables. This includes the different types of cables that sizing of the neutral sizing of the nursing care conductor and much more. So we will learn about the different cables and we will talk also about exaggerating effect. Then we will have over the example on the design or selection of cases. Then we will start talking about the design. So we won't discuss that main concepts regarding Sourcing Systems or types of sing systems, Zach components of sourcing system. And how can we design an operating system using calculations or manual calculations? Then we will start learning how can we do the same good design is the ITA broker. Then we will talk about with our lightning protection system, which is used to protect that bowling or our edit trick and equipment. Again, just as a lightning strike will learn everything you need to know about e.g. injection system. Then we will go to that UBS section. We will discuss as a UPS or uninterruptible power supplies. We will discuss the different types and how can we selected them. Then we will talk about with Zao power factor correction, how can we use that capacitors in order to improve our own factor, e.g. in a factory. How can we do this? And how can we select Zach capacitors using tables? Then we will have an extra explanation on circuit breakers and fuses in our system, we will talk about what is a medium voltage circuit breakers and how can we select them. We will also talk about with ZAP been on board design or some final bolt construction. And it's a tight, we will also have several Soviet examples on the panel boards. We will understand how can we select the cables, fuses, bus bars, and sore. Not only this, but we will have Amazon course. Another three goals when you join us, which is a light current systems or the low current systems. What I mean by this, you will learn about exam MAT V systems. You will learn about with Zack and telephone systems. You will learn about the fire alarm systems, that cctv systems, sound system, and the monster moves. You will learn about them and how can you design them? Not all lasers, but you will have another additional free course, which is the ITA course. You will learn how exact ITA whole system simulator from scratch without any previous knowledge, you will learn how can you do as a voltage drop analysis, solve the circuit analysis or a flagship store this Zach multiple starting that harmonic analysis, harmonic filter and much more. So you can see all of these content in one course. So tell me where you'll find this large amount of content or large amount of lessons. If you are looking for one course that will help you in learning all of these content. This course is for you. I hope to join me in our course. And if you have any question, zoster sending me a message. Thank you and see you in our course for electrical. 2. Electrical Distribution Project Parties: Welcome, everyone to our Course four Electrical Distribution Design. This video, we will to cap out the electrical distribution project parties, the different parties that are involved in any electrical project. So first, in any electrical project, we have four main parties or four main players. Number one, we have the owner. We have the consultant, the contractor, and the supervisor. So starting with the first one, which is our owner. So the owner can be just one person who owns a land, or can be a group of people or can be a company or even a group of companies. Let's assume for simplicity that we have one owner, one person that owns land, land like this one. This owner would like to construct building here. Let's say or a project here, this project can be. This project can be a residential building, a commercial building, or a hospital or anything else, et ce. Let's say, for example, let's say that this owner would like to construct here a commercial, a commercial building. The first body that we have in any electrical project, we have number one, the owner. The one which own a certain land, and would like to construct a project on this certain land. What does owner will do? The owner will go to the second partner or the second part of this project, which is the consultant. So the owner would go to a consultant company or a consultant, which we call it a consulting company or a consultant in order to provide for us or provide for him the required drawings or required design drawings for the project. So the owner goes to a consultant company, what this company will do. They will provide him with the required drawings. What are the design drawings we are talking a poet? Number one. We are talking at the autocat drawing for the building, autocat drawing for the building. We are talking also a poet, the electrical design of the building, which is related to our course. Electrical design here means that lighting design, load estimation, selection of cables, selection of breakers, preparing the panel schedule, preparing a single line diagram, and et cetera. All of this will be discussed inside our course. So all of these projects or all of these steps are related to electrical design. Now, another party that you will find inside the company or another sector that you will find inside the consultant company or consulting company, and the mechanical engineers, which are responsible for mechanical design for fire fighting system, bombs and each vax system, each vax system, which is heat, ventilation, and air conditioning systems. In addition to a civil engineers, which will be responsible for the structured design of the building. So we have four rules that you will find inside a consultant company. Consultant company can be one consultant company or can be a group of companies. Each one is responsible for one of these steps. So we have number one auto gt drawings for the building, which means we need architect to do this step. So we have architect, and we have electrical design engineer. We have a mechanical design engineer, and finally, we have a civil engineer. So we have one, two, three, and four sectors. So the consultant company or the consulting company can consist of four sectors, these sectors, or it can be several companies. If we are talking about small companies, then each company will have just one of these sectors. If we are talking about a large consulting company, it will contain all of these sectors together. So we have now autocat drawings. We have electrical design, mechanical design, and our owner now is happy and has all of the required drawings. What will he do next? He will go to the third party of our project, which is the contractor. The contractor is used to turn the project plans or the drawings into reality, converted the drawings which are designed by the consulting company into real project. It goes to this one, which is a contractor or the company responsible for turning the drawings into rail project. Now, the contractor is responsible for what for physical construction and the execution of the project. They oversee the day to day operations, manage the construction crew, and ensure that the project is completed within the Si time frame and budget. The contractor is also responsible for poying the required equipment. Like the transformers, sable, circuit breakers, here we are talking about just the electrical sectors. Of course, it he will poe all the required equipment for all of the other sectors. Okay. Such as palms, elevators, and et cetera. Now, we talked about three parties here. Number one, owner, which the one which own the land. We have the consultant that will provide electrical drawings, civil drawings, autocad drawings, and mechanical design. Then we have the contractor or the contractor that will convert these drawings into rail project or provide the rail construction. Now, the final part here is the supervisor, the supervisor or the supervision company, which is used to make sure that the project is built and constructed as intended or as designed by the consultant company. Usually, usually in almost all of the projects, the supervision or the supervisor or electrical supervisor is usually a part of the consultant company. The construction supervisors are used to oversee the construction of projects and monitor activities at work sites. They manage crews, ensure health and safety codes are observed and the work is complete to schedule. Now, in almost all of the project, as we said, the supervisor is usually part of the consulting company. However, there are some rare cases in which it will be a separate company. Now, what are the electrical engineering positions or the electrical engineer positions that we will find in these three companies or these two companies? So we will have number one in the consulting company, the first one consultant or consulting company. There will be electrical design engineers that are responsible for designing the electrical system. As we said before, the low estimation process, the cable selection, circuit breakers, single line diagram, riser of the building, selection of transformer, sizing of transformer rooms, generator, UBS, and many many other processes that we will talk about inside our course for electrical design. The second part, which is electrical supervision engineers, which are responsible to oversee the work of the contractor and make sure that the work done is performed as intended by the consulting company. So we have this position, electrical design engineers, and electrical super vision engineers, which will be electrical site engineers. The contractor company on the other side will have electrical executive engineers, which are used to execute the plans given by the consulting company. They will be site engineers that will make sure that the job is completely done. They are different from electrical supervision engineers. And we have also inside a contractor company, we have technical office engineers. They are used to or they include the procurement engineers. Procurement engineers are responsible for obtaining the required materials. So procurement engineers are used to contact contact the different suppliers. So they are used, let's say, for example, if you are talking about the electrical engineers, we will need cables, breakers, transformers. So they will contact or contact the suppliers and get the required materials from them. So they are specialized in contacting the different suppliers, like S means ABP, and Schneider, and these companies and obtain the required materials for our project. And we have also the chop drawing engineers, that chop drawing engineers are part of electrical design engineers are used to prepare the chop shop drawing autocad drawings. So they are different from electrical design engineers in the consulting company. We will learn in the next lesson. That we have different types of drawings. We have the design drawing, electrical design drawing or that concept drawing. And then we have another one, which is the shop drawing shop drawing, and we have also as built drawing. We have three types of drawings. We will talk about them in the next lesson, and you will understand what the difference between this electrical design engineer and this one. They are almost very, very close to each other, except that there is a small difference between their design or their drawings or their auto cad drawings. So in this lesson, we talked about the different parties that we have in an electrical project. And we learned that we have electrical design engineers, electrical supervision engineers, electrical executive engineers, technical office engineers, and we'll learn that using this course, this electrical course, you'll be able to work in these different categories. In the electrical design engineers, can be electrical supervision, can be job drawing engineers. Okay. So let's go in the next teleson. We will start talking a poet, the different types of drawings. 3. Electrical Drawings and Project Coordination: Hi, and welcome, everyone. In this video, we will top out the electrical drawings and the project coordination between different sectors. So we took that in the previous lesson, we took that out the different parties that are exist in any project. Now, we would like to first understand the difference between different types of electrical drawings. We said before we had electrical design drawing in the consultant company or consulting company, and we said that we have another engineer for job drawing, which exists in the contractor company. So let's understand the difference between these drawings. So, first, let's understand what are the drawings we have in any electrical distribution project. So if you look at any car or any building or any equipment, you will have different views for this building. This is very important. So if you look at this, if you look at in this side, it means that you are looking it on the side side view. If you look at this, it means that you are looking it in the front view. If you look at here, it means that you are looking at back view or back of the car. Now, this is very important. If you look on the upper view from upward, it means we have the plan plan view. That is the one that you will find always in the electrical drawings. So when we have a drawing for any building, we will look at it from the plan view from upward. Not from the front or back or side, we will look at it from upward, which we call the plan view. For example, if you look at this one, this is a plan for a building, floor, for example, floor number one, first floor, floor or forest floor. If you look at this floor, you will find it's consisting of different parts. These parts are number one, you'll find that this one, this one is considered as a room. This one is a room. This one is another room. This one is another room. And if you look at any room, you'll find that this simple. What does this simple mean? This simple representing the door. So if you would like to go to the room, you go from this door. Now, remember, we are looking at the room from the plan view. Okay? Now, here if you would like to go to this room, you will go through this door. Okay? This is our room. Another room, you can see here office. So let's just zoom in. You can see here a room. And you can see the samples. What does these samples mean? These samples represent the lighting fixtures or the luminars, that is used to provide light to our room. It's used to lighten the room. We will talk about the lighting design in the course. When we go to the lighting design part of the course, specifically, when we talk about dialxy v, we will learn how to view this dialog evo in three D. You will understand how the room looks like in three D view. So this view is called the plan view. I'm looking from upward. So each of these are rooms like this, and we have here this corridor, which you can see corridor, as you can see here, and this representing our stairs, either going up or going down. And you will find here more rooms. So here you can see toilet, store, lobby, and different types of rooms. Okay. Now, when we go to the electrical or lighting design for each room, we will learn how to select the lighting fixtures for each room and what the locks required, and we will understand. What does Locks mean in electrical design. Then we are going to know how to add switches. You can see here. If you look carefully here, at this room, you can see this sample. You can see this sample, which is here to, and here, this is a one is a switch that turns on and off these lighting fixtures. This plan is representing a lighting circuits, lighting circuits or lighting plan. Because it involves only lighting. There is another plan which will contain the sockets, different types of sockets, like our sockets, to be more specific sockets, power sockets, and lighting sockets, for each room, and we will understand how to divide them and how to form our circuits. Okay? But for now, we understand that this is representing a plan that will be constructed by the architect. So it is not our rule. Our rule is to add these electrical parts like lighting fixtures, switches, power sockets, sockets, light sockets, and lighting power sockets, and normal sockets and emergency sockets, and all of these symbols, okay? Now, for us, for the architect, the architect is the one which you can instruct the main drawing, this drawing, for rooms, for doors, and so on. So remember this because we will need this information in the nexus slides. In general, when we talk about electrical design, we have three types of drawing. We have conceptual design drawing, which is concept design drawings. We have chop drawings, and as built drawings. We will understand what the difference between these three. So first, let's talk about the concept or conceptual design drawings. This is related to the electrical design engineer, which is in the consultant or related to the consultant or inside the consulting company. Okay, what does he do? He prepares that drawing, that drawing that we need. These drawings are prepared by the electrical design engineer of the technical Office of the consulting company. Now, this is an example. You can see here, this is one room. Okay. Let's say bedroom for residential building. This is one room. And this room is consisting of how many lighting fixtures, one, two, three, and four. So what is the purpose or what is the rule of the engineer or the electrical design engineer here. Number one is to put these luminars. He will select the luminars based on the orzo ighting fixtures, which we will understand later in the course. He will select these fixtures depending on what, depending on the luck required C, which is the intensity of light in any room based on the cod. So the engineer selects how many luminas are required in a room and distance between it and the walls like this here and here and here, the location of these luminas, to provide the required lacks or light required in any room. That is the first rule. Second rule is that he will add these connections. You can see this is a wire between here and here. And here and here. This wiring comes from the distribution port inside or distribution panel, which is found in the floor. That is his rule number one for lighting system. This is one of the drawings, fixtures, what factures we need to use, how many lighting fixtures or lighting umines, and the wiring between them. It provides information about lighting circuit like this one, and there will be another one that we will talk inside the course, which is power circuits, which involve the power sockets and normal sockets. F articural projects. Now, what else? This electric do you can see existing of simples, lines, and sometimes dimensions or dimensions and notations, like this one. Now, this is a first one which is designed inside the consultant company. What does the consultant company do after doing these drawings for electrical, for mechanical, for any field, they will send these drawings or these concept design drawings to the contractor. The contractor will take these drawings and will execute them inside the site. But before he execute them, he needs another type of drawing called the chop drawing or executive executive drawings. These drawings are required or provide more details than these drawing. For example, if the contractor take this one and try to apply this to the site, he can't why he can't number one. He doesn't know the distance between here and here. Here and here between the center like this from here to here. It doesn't know the distance from here to here. I don't know the distance between the center of this lighting ture and the center of this one. It doesn't know what is the wiring type, the conduit here, how many wires cross sectional area. All these details are not visi here. And do not only this, but I don't know the connection or cable routing from here to the distribution port. So there are many details that are missing from this drawing. For example, if we look at here, let's just delete all of this and look at the chop drawing. These are drawing prepared by the engineer of the technical of what of the contractor or the contracting company. Like this, you can see more details have been added, like dimensions from here to here, from here to here between each luminus, should be added from here to here. The lens from here, here also added from here to here. Here, for example, you can see this wire is a BBC, conduit contains three multiplied by three able. It means that we have three of three wires, which are line or phase, neutral and sing, and the height of this wire or conduit is 3 meters. All of these details are important when constructing or providing or executing this drawing in rail life. Not only this, but I would like to know how I was going to connect these Luminus and it can be even more as we will learn how to connect these to the distribution port, how I'm going to do this. All of these details are found to be using the shop drawing, and that's why they called executive drawing, the one that we will use to execute our drawings. Now, there are different reason number one, which I have just said, that the concept drawings lack many details necessary for implementation like these dimensions. Number two, the second reason is that in any contract, you will find a clause. This clause say that no work can be carried out without executive executive drawings approved by the consultant. So what you can see here that after doing this job drawing. After doing this job drawing, what will happen that the contractor or the engineer of the technical office of the contracting company will send these drawings after adding these details back to where back to the consult back to the consulting company or consultant. And the consultant will see these drawings after adding these details, and he will approve it or not. Okay, so it must be approved by the consultant before executing in that site. Now, number three, when when executing this executive drawings or the chop drawings. What will happen in that in reality, there could be some changes. They will not be implemented exactly as the chop drawing. Why? Because for many reasons, for example, in reality, the owner can say, I don't like these Luminars, I would like to change them. I don't like these lighting factures, I would like to change them. So number one, the lighting factures can be changed. The sockets themselves can be changed for any reason. The supplier cannot have any more this type or this type of sockets or type of lighting fixtures, and we need to change them. There could be many reasons. Even in construction itself, it could be much easier to go from this side like this or putting this distribution port instead of here, putting it here. There can be many details that can change. So due to the conditions of the site, it requires the execution engineer or the executive engineer to carry out the work slightly different from the shop drawing for more than one reason. So it can be like this. This is after tru. After trusted of having distribution pot here, it is better according to the executive engineer. He sees that it is better to pot it here. It is much easier to install it here instead of here, or The cable routing, it should be from the side instead of the site. Y for any reason. According to the conditions of the site, or it make it easier for him to implement the work. Now, another thing can be also due to a modification, which we have said before like changing lighting fixtures by the owner, he didn't like these fixtures and would like to replace them with any other with any other type, or he find that these lighting fixtures are very expensive, whatever it is, o. So a contractual reason that after after repairing or after construction of the site, We have to prepare another drawing. Another drawing which we call as built. This drawing, which you can see here is called as built drawing after instruction. Why after k instruction? Because number one, here, this one, it changes from chop drawing, from this one. Locational panel and connection, change it. So we have to add these details or have document or drawings, which represent what actually being built. Because it is very important for number one, important for engineers, operation engineers who are going to do maintenance of this project in any time. So we are talking here about larger building. So we must have the drawings that represent the actual wiring of the system. Okay? We cannot depend on another wiring which does not reflect the reality. What you can see here is that let's say if someone depended on the shop drawing and he saw that the distribution board exists here and the connection was like this. Then he can break the wall here and he will not find anything. Why? Because he depended on this drawing, which is false one. That's why we need a document or a drawing that represents what has been built. That's why it's called as built, as built drawing, representing what has been built. Okay. So it's one of the documents that must be handled, in which the owner can do the operation and maintenance of the project. And we are not talking about a small project, like for example, like a residential building, we are talking about large building, commercial building, very large residential building, a hospital, a hotel, and so on. In short, the as built drawings are almost close to the shop drawing. However, there could be change any change must cabin from the shop drawing, must be added to as built drawings. Another thing here that you will find is that if you look at this figure, you'll find that these lumines are these are shifted to the left, these are shifted to the right. Different from this one. If you look here, you'll find that they are having more distance away from the wall. Now, why this will happen? For example, there could be here in after construction. The engineer found that there is a duct here, moving like this or I found anything related to the civil engineering like this. He found that I should move this to the left like this to avoid the contact between this and this. That is another thing that can change has built drawings from the top drawings. So we learned about the different types of electrical design drawings. We learned about the conceptual conceptual or concept drawings. We learned about chop drawings, we learned about as built drawings. Now, since we talked about these types of drawings, we need to talk about something which requires a project coordination. So here I'm going to talk about the coordination between me and other engineers, like Architect, civil engineer, mechanical engineer, and so on. So here I'm going to talk about Architect. Now, first, when we are having any project, first step I'm going to do in any project is for electrical engineers is something which we call the load estimation. Load estimation process is a very important process or a very important or extremely important step in electrical design. This step helps us understand Number one, the cost of the project, number two, how much power or how much energy we would like to get how much power we need from the electrical grid. Number three, if we need a transformer inside our building, or we can just take low voltage directly from the grid. So we have two options, either to take low voltage directly from the grid, or we can take medium voltage and convert it into low voltage using a transformer. Another thing in low estimation, we have to understand if we need a generator inside a backup generator inside our building, Do we need a UBS system? All of these are important. Why? Because if you if you need a transformer room or a generator room, You have to tell the architect that I need a generator room with dimensions, four tab by four as an example. We have to tell him that I need also a transformer room, which will have these dimensions, lengths and widths and height, and so on. If you need electrical rooms, another room that you will need is a room for electrical panels. So I have to tell him that I need a room for this, a room for this, and room for this. Why? Because to make the architect reserve these rooms for me to install the generator in a room, install a transformer in a room, and install our panels in another room, and so on. That is the first type of coordination, which we say that we have a room like this in let's say first to floor, consisting of a transformer. We have a transformer here. This transformer needs a certain clearance. We will learn a this when we go to the loot destimation part, we will learn how to select the transformer room dimensions. So depending on the dimensions of the room, I will tell the architect, I need a room with how how many dimensions, lengths and widths, I need for the transformer, the minimum requirements, okay? So we have a room four transformer, room four generator. We can have UBS in the same room, but we can have it separately in a third room and another room for panels of the building itself. Okay. So that's the first one. If the building needs a transformer and pack up generators, then we need two rooms for these equipment for this equipment. So we need to coordinate with the Arctic to reserve two rooms for them. Now, another thing that you will find in electrical system or another thing that you will find in project coordination between us and Arctic is the lighting design. Remember that the lighting design or selection of fixtures, lighting fixtures, or lumines R or lighting design in general is related to electrical engineers. So we have to do coordination with the Architect in order to select suitable or suitable lumines or suitable lighting fixtures. That is suitable for the decoration inside the building. For example, you can see, these are type of lighting fixture, that can be used. We can use also this long one. The long ones or the floor recent, all the floent lamps will give a bad decoration for this room. So the architect will say, no, I don't need. I don't want this. I want you to use these type of lighting fixtures, and you will be able to select then the distance from here to here between them and where exactly on this wall. Great. Another thing that you will find is the sockets, the sock power sockets or normal sockets like here. For example, if you look at this, we have here an office. So we need to add sockets or normal sockets, clo close to the disk, the disk at which is the employer or employee will start working on. So we need here if you look carefully here. Let's magnify here. You will see here, this, and these are normal sockets. These normal sockets are used to provide electrical power to any equipment like PC, computer, printer, whatever it is fax, whatever it is. Okay? We need to add this, this one. This one close to that's why the furniture, which will be done by the Arctic is important in the electrical design. If we don't have this furniture, we will need to add, we will put in on the walls at a certain distance, depending on the, the cod or the electrical code will provide us with the distance between these lumines. No Luminar, the sockets. Now, sects design based on furniture. That is what I just have just said. Now, second coordination, which is project coordination between us and civil engineer. Now, we said in the previous step, we need rooms for transformers. We need rooms of four generator. We need four panels. Now, transformer and generator, representing a structure loading or this or this equipment, represent loading on our building or structure due to their heavy weight. That's what is important to tell the civil engineer about the weight of this equipment or these different equipment that we are going to use inside our building. So I have to give him the weight of the transformer weight of the generator because all of this will affect the structure. Not only this. Usually, these are installed on the first floor, right because they have a heavy weight, so we would like to put them on the first floor to reduce the heavy loading on the structure. However, in very tall buildings or in very large buildings, there could be another transformer and another generator that will be installed in higher floors. So it is very important to tell our civil engineer that we have generator and transformer on first floor. And if we have a very tall building more than 50 floors, We could have, for example, another one, another generator and another transformer. I have to tell him that you have to make sure that the ceiling on the fifth floor, 50 floor, or whatever can withstand this heavy weight. The last one which we lead coordination with is our mechanical engineer. So, remember the mechanical engineer is responsible for selection of bombs, HVAC system, selection of fire fighting system or design of the fire fighting system, and much more, right? So we have to coordinate between us and the mechanical engineer. Why? Because remember that we have in our electrical system cable trays. What does cable trays do, they carry wires. So our wires or cables can be inside our wall, or can be mounted on cable trays and divisible to everyone. So these cable trays will be mounted on the ceiling. And on the ceiling itself, we could have water pipes. We can have chiva ducts, we can have fire fighting system. So we have to coordinate between us and the mechanic energies so that we prevent installation of or the same equipment in the same line or on the same line. In addition to the lighting fixture, let's see this. Other things that we have is fire fighting systems. Now let's look at these figures, that will help us understand. You can see this can be a ducts, can be pipes moving here, and you can see this one, this one here, representing what, represent representing our cable trays. These cable trays must be must not move in the same direction as these HVAC or the ducts. For example, I cannot install it like this in the same direction. It is very hard. However, we moved it in another direction or parallel to it, as you can see here. I wouldn't know that this is a correct installation, except if if I didn't look at the mechanical engineer design or where did he put these ducts. Another one like here, you can see this is our cable group of cable trays, and you can see we have a lighting fixtures. These lighting fixtures will be suspended from the ceiling. We can have here ducts that interrupt our lighting fixtures or our cable trays. So we have also to look at these important parts. Another thing, this part is our cable tray, this one is exactly this one. What does it do? We put our cables here. They carry our cables. They are suspended from the ceiling. Another one here or another example, you can see this is a duct, as you can see here, for Vac system, and we have here our wires. Again, and we have here also lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures, as you can see here. If I didn't know that there's a duct here, I could install it here. I could but this here, which is wrong. Without coordination with mechanical engineer, I wouldn't know that here, I shouldn't install my lighting fixture. Another thing here, you can see again another duct, and we have here lighting fixtures. So Pi coordination, I have known that I cannot install them here. Last one, you can see here in this ceiling. We have our lighting fixtures for us. We have fire alarm system, so there can be a light current system or a light current engineer who designed this light current system. And it can be the same person like me, the electrical engineer, design fire fighting system, and design the lighting fixtures. However, if you look carefully here, we have these which are used in fire fighting system. So I have to know where these are located to prevent the installation of these lumines on them, right? So by knowing that their positions, we will be able to select the right positions or light installation point for lighting fixtures and fire alarm system, okay? So I hope you now understand, number one, the difference between electrical design drawings, and you now understand the importance of project coordination between Artect, electrical engineer, and mechanical engineer and civil engineer. Now, in the next part of the course, we have to go to the first step in any electrical system. We have to go to what we call the load estimation, load estimation for our project. We need to estimate how much of power that our building requires because it is a very important step before even designing our project. 4. Electrical Design Steps: Before we go to the low estimation part of the course, we have to understand first, what are the steps that we are going to follow in order to design the electrical system. What are the steps? Number one, we will do the low estimation for our project and we will understand what is the benefit of the low estimation, and why do we do it? Number two, related to low estimation, we will also see if we would like a transformer or a generator room. Because if we need a transformer engenerator room, we need to size there. If we need a transformer or a generator, we need to size their rooms. We need to find the dimensions of these rooms. In order to reserve our rooms for the transformer engenerator, when we tell the arctic about them. Next step in this course, we will learn the basics of concepts related to lighting design. How do the basic concepts, like C, what does lax mean? Luminar, what are the difference types of Luminar or lighting fixtures? And how can we select the required C in each room depending on the cout? That is the first thing. Then we're going also learn how to do the manual calculation for lighting design. This is, of course, does not happen in reality, but this is for your own knowledge. In reality, we use the dialect evil program in order to design our lighting in our plan. So we use this program in order to distribute our lumines in each room. After this, we are going to learn the basics of the autocad program. Autocad program is the very important program that will help us in drawing or drawing the wiring in our system, adding the sockets and prepare our plan, that will or draw our electrical design or prepare the concept drawing. And in the same time, this can be used in the chop drawing procedure. Then we are going to add the sockets to our plan, then wire both both of them along with the luminars. Then we are going based on our design. We will design the power and lighting circuits, power and lighting circuits. Then we will design our panels or perform the panel schedule. This is an important process which we are going to select circuit procs wires, and we are going to try to palance our three phases. You will see all of this when we go to these steps. Then we're going to learn how to draw the riser of the building. Then we will discuss a single line diagram for a large industrial area and how to do something like this and its content. Then we will learn how to do voltage drop and short circuit calculations using E tap program. Not only this, but you are going to learn almost everything related to E tap, not only volt drop, short circuit, you'll find many other lessons related to E tab program. Then we will learn also about Earth system design. Then we will learn about lightning protection design. Here, I don't know if I'm going to add everything related to lighting protection or I'm going to make it a separate course. Currently, we have a lesson related to lightening protection. However, I think it's better to discuss the lightning protection in a separate course because it is a very large topic. Then we have a cables course. Then we have a panel parts course or a panel distribution parts course. We have UBS systems, how to size the UBS system. There's also how to si the generator back up generator. Then we have also the power factor correction, power factor correction, how to select the suitable capacitors in an industrial area. We have also the light current system design how to design the MATV system, the fire alarm system, the telephone system, data systems, and much more. Not only this, but in the future, we are going to add the POQ or the pill of quantity, which is important process in electrical design. In the end, we need to identify the quantity of our equipment or quantity of Luminar's, wires, that we are going to need in our project. This is just an overview about the course. I know this course is very large. I took lots of years in preparing this course for you and I keep updating this course. Make sure to come back from now and then because you will find more updates are going to be added to this course. I hope you benefit from this course and I hope everything will be clear for you. 5. Reading Architectural and Electrical Drawings: Hey, guys, and welcome to another lesson in our course for electrical design. In this course or in this lesson, we will learn how to read the architectural drawing and the electrical drawing. This is important because it will help us in the electrical design of any building. What we are going to discuss number one, you will see these different plans that we are going to see in this video, and we will understand the difference between them and what are these symbols here. Let's go to our presentation. How can we read an architectural and electrical drawings? First, we have this plan, which can be ground floor, first floor, second, third, and fourth, and, et cetera. They are provided from the architect in the form of autocad drawing like this one. I would like to understand what does this sample mean? What does this simple x mean and et cetera. Now let's go and see these samples. Number one, the sample of stairs. They are presented in the form of parael lines and numbered. They are usually like this. You can see them these parallel lines representing stairs. For example, if you like this, as if you are going from down, l67, 75, ft three, what does this mean? We start from here. Y from here, because as you can see, sex six, 67, so it means that we are going up like this, and then we go like this and continue to the next floor. So we go from the lower number and go until the upper number. We will see this in the drawings. There are other forms, you can can be like this a sirs at which you will go like this up and there is a flat surface, and then you can continue to the next floor. There is another one like this one. All of it is stairs, but rotating stairs, you are going like this in the same direction of the R. For example, if you have these numbers, you will understand that we go 66-67 to 68, and et cetera, like this, this is a direction. If I don't have these numbers, we will have something like this Rs that gives us the direction of stairs. Like this. It can be like this, means this is a lower point, and this is upper point. We go up like this and like this, and like this, and et cetera. Okay? So these are the samples of stairs. Now, let's go to AutoCAD program and see them. Okay, so let's look at each plan. So this is a first plan that we have. You can see these stairs here, one, two, three, four, five, six, 78. What does this mean means that we are going from down here and going up up up to 11, then a flat surface and continue like this. Now, of course, you can add a alumina here, if it is one floor. However, if it is a several floors, you can't add it here. You can simply take this alumina from here, activate orthogonal like this and put it here, a? It will be put in this flat area, here. Now, if you look here too, you will find this is the entrance of the building. As you can see, there are takest in each of the plan representing each room. You can see here, these are the boundaries of our building. You can see this is the boundaries of our building, and you can see the building or each floor to be more specific, is divided into rooms. You can see this is one room like this, then we have this room like this and another one. If you zoom in like this, you can see workshop like this. This is a room for workshop. You can see here of a room for office. Then we have this part which is entrance. You can see stairs. It means we are going from one, two, three, it means our direction from here, going up like this to enter this building, a The stairs like this going up. Great. Now, if you look here, these are different rooms. Great. Now let's look at the next plan for vela. If you go down here, Like this. This is another view. Let's go here. Here, for example. You can see here, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten. This is a representation of the stairs. You can see here up, going like this, like this. You can see even this arrow that shows you the direction of stairs. You go from here like this and like this, F one, two, 11. Okay. Here the same idea. You can see here. 12 Shree fort means we are going like this and going up like this to the next floor. Great, another plan like this one. You can see here stairs, even one, two, three, four, you can see going down, then the flat surface and end up using numbering, or using this r, you can see the same direction of increasing of the numbers. All of them are the same building, here residential building, you can see goes from here, gives you the arrows. It means you are in this floor, and I would like to go to the next floor, simply go with the R. These are the stairs that you will find in different plans. You can see I think it is clear right now. Here again, the same idea, one going like this, and et cetera. And this is another building and administration building, you can see here. Here, even give you the arrow representing direction of stairs, here the same I. Now, let's look at the second important part. The second important one is our elevators elevators, which are used to it's clear what is elevator is right. Elevators or left, depending if you are talking in the US or a new K accent. So elevators are usually close to stairs. How they are look like, they are having the simple, you can see, and even the architect will type elevator next to them. Like this, or they can have these samples or these samples representing elevator. And this one, also the sample representing an elevator can see it is beside the stairs. All of these are representing elevators. Here again, you can see this stairs and elevators here. And this one to, all of these samples, which are representing like a square with additional parts or additional figures. All of these are representing elevators at which we go in and out. Let's see them in the architectural drawings. As you can see, this is a residential building, and as you can see next to the stores, we have these two elevators with their own doors. Of course, the rtect usually, of, all the time, add the text to these points. So for example, it says, this one is a bathroom, for example, or this part is a bathroom. This one is a living room. It says exactly each room. However, this plan does not contain these texts. Okay? So let's go to another one. This one administration building. If you look carefully here, you can see this one stairs, and you can see this is simple for elevator. And this is outro or this is the entrance to the elevator. If you go here, you'll find this simple, and this one is also another elevator. If you go here to next floor like this, the same two samples, and et cetera. Now, if you look at ally usually the Architect, if we have a large building, it gives you the different floors. For example, you can see here P, this plan, representing what representing pasement. You can see pasement, if you go close here, you'll find that we have here parking area. You can see this is a symple of cars. If you don't know dlick on it, you can see cars, which means that this part is parking area, a parking area. Here, this one is our pavement. If you go here, G means ground floor, then first floor, then second floor, third, fourth, if you go down here, you will find even. We usually use these in electrical design. If you are doing, lightening protection design, then you will need these elevation. You can see this are different elevations. As, for example, this is main elevation. Different view for the building. This one, for example, is from the site. I remember east, East elevation. This one is from back elevation. This one is west. You can see here west elevation, this one here. Main elevation. However, this is a stction, so it takes the main elevation and cuts a section off it. Take the main elevation, I can see gives you an inner view of the building itself. Usually, when we are doing lightening sign, what is important for me if the height is the height of this building it effect is the lightening protection design, okay? So you can see basement, ground first, second, third and four. Now, another thing that you will find here is the scale. So if you go me here, you will find here in this one, you can see ground the floor, similar to not this one here, G, which means ground the floor, as you can see here. Let's just remove this unnecessary parts, like this. You'll find here project name, the name of this project that we are working with. You'll find here the date for this project. This is a very old project. But anyway, what we would like to learn is how to understand this drawing. You'll find here the scale. What does the scale mean? One, 250. What does 1/50 mean? It means that for each 50 meters, they are converted into 1 meter here in the drawing or or Each 1 meter measured here, you can see here, 5.18, or let's say 5 meters. This is intracisa drawing, 5 meters. In reality, this 5 meters are five multiplied by 50, which is 250 meters. That is what's meant by scale. Each al value is divided by 50. That is what's meant by scale. If it is 1200, for example, it means that each 1 meter or each hundred meter in reality, representing 1 meter in this drawing. Okay. That is what these scales really actually mean. We have pavement ground. These are the different floors, and we have just seen the elevators in them. Now, another part in the architectural drawing, which is the shaft or the open area. You'll find it in the simple of x inside that drawing. This shaft can be in two ways. This is a simple that you will find usually in autocad and X, This X means that we are not going to design any thing inside it. We are not going to put any luminar any power sockets or normal sockets or any thing like this. However, this is a very important part, as you will see right now. This shaft or open area has two types, open air and double height. The difference between them is that open air, this is the simple for the same part, open air is available in every floor. If this simple just available for one floor, then it is double height. Okay, so X means available in every floor, in each plan, it means it is an open air. If it is existing on one floor, it is double height. What does this even mean? Let's go to the drawing and understand. So if you look at this drawing for the administration building, if you go like this, the exist, you can see this is an elevator, and beside is a shaft, the X sample, right? So this is an open area. Now, if you look carefully, look at this one here, beside the stairs. If you go to the nester floor, the same simple, to next floor, same simple, to the next floor like this, same simple, and et cetera. It means that this one is an open air. It means that we have a large gap that extends from the basement to the highest floor. Now, this open area or this open area is very important as we are going to put the riser of the building through it. So the riser of the building will go through this open area, and it will supply electricity to all the panels in each floor. This can be for riser off the distribution boards, or it can be for light current system, and et cetera. So that is the benefit of open air area. Very important for cable tras for riser off the building, okay. Now, if it just existed for two floors, if we look at this one here, if you look at this one, this is a ground, you can see here in this image here. You can see here, you can see in this one This is ground. Now let's go to a next floor. Next to floor, first, you can see there is an x here, which means you don't design anything here. Why? Because this x, which is in this region is similarly in this region. However, it just existed for one floor. If you look at this area here, and this one and this one. X only appeared for one floor. What does this mean? It means that this part extends to the next floor. So for example, if this part is 2.5 meters, then this x part is double the height. It means that it is two x or it is 5 meters. So if this part is 2.5 meters or any part 2.5 meters, then this part is double height. Y double height because there are some application that requires double height. For example, this one is 3 meters or 2.5 meters. This is a theater, for example, or a stage. This stage requires double the height requires 6 meters, 7 meters, whatever. In order to satisfy this condition, we extended this roof of this one in instead of 3 meters or 2.5 meters. It is extended to the nexst floor, which is first. Then after this, you can see it disappeared completely, which means that this one extends from ground to first floor. Now, let me show you another trick, which will be helpful in electrical design. Let's say, for example, I would like to select this one. Skip like this. Let's say I would like to select this part. Or let's say, for example, I would like to change the color or all of these. All you have to do is right click like this and select similar to select similar plaques like this one. If you go back like this, you can see this part is the only one selected, so you can change its color from here like this or make it yellow like this, for example, this is a very helpful trick as it will help you to select a similar object or even delete other obs. For example, if you'd like to select all colors, you simply click on this block, right click, and select similar, if you would like to delete them all or just change their color or whatever. Okay? Great. We learned about the double height and open air. Let's continue. Now, also we have in the architectural drawing, we have furniture, doors and windows. Furniture will look like this. These are furniture. These are the sample of chairs. This one is a table or a meeting table. You can see this one representing the doors. This one is a single door and double door. What does this door even mean? If you look at this symbol, it means that our door here when it is completely opened, at this position. If you would like to close the door, it will go to this side. So it means when it is completely open, it will be like this, and when it's completely closed, it will be like this, flat like this. So the curve representing the motion of this door. Now, this double door, it means that this one goes from here, can be closed like this, be completely closed here, and this one can be closed like this. So it becomes opened in this position and closed in this position. Why this is important? Because when we add, let's say, the sockets or when we add the switches, the lighting switches, We have to make sure that they are not behind this door. Then we have this one. What does this simply represent? Is this simple representing this very narrow rectangles representing our windows. If you look at this plan, for example, you can see, this is a mat like this. Like this, and this is a sofa, for example, this is a table, chairs. You can see this is a decoration tree. You can see this is similar to TV when you look it from the plan view, you can see here this one is a door, that is completely opened, and here when it's completely closed, another door. Here you can see this is exactly a bathroom. As you can see, these are let's magnify this. You can see this part. As you can see, it is almost exactly like this one, this one. Representing windows. So we have here windows here, another door, furniture, and et cetera. Great. Now, let's see them inside the plan. Now let's look at them. You can see this is a plan. You can see this is an entrance. So any entrance has two doors or one door. You can see this is completely open, and when it's completely closed, it will be in this position. It will be like this. Let's clear it for you. It will be rotate like this and let's use F eight, deactivate orthogona. So you can see this is a open position. When it is completely closed, it will move like this and be in this position. So if we apply the same strategy to this 12 like this and rotate it like this, this door in the closed position, and when it's completely open, it will be right like this. This is when it is completely open. So I think that this is clear for you. And this hatch part, you can see it across all of the plans, you can see here this one. This is related to the construction columns of the building itself. All of these hatchet parts are led to the construction pillars or construction columns of the building. So when we are doing the design, we try our best to be away from this. What I mean by this. So for example, if you have a switch, you don't add it here, you add it, for example here away from this, Great. So we have these doors, as you can see here. You can see there is also the text inside each of these rooms, WC. You can see this is representing WC. Okay. Let's look at another one. This is a Villa, for example, a dining room, sitting room, and et cetera. If you look carefully here, this is also clearly a door a different type of doors or a broken line due to a problem inside a cat problem. Yeah, it sometimes happen inside the auto cat. And instead of having a smooth curve, it sometimes becomes a broken line. Like this. You can see here x, which we have talked about. Here, for example, it says left. So we understand now that this x is not an open area. In this case, it is a left or elevator, and this is the door of the elevator. It depends on the architect, what does Architect say? You can see a bathroom with every component, as you can see, a bedroom here, You can see also the simple representing the window dining room with a window window, here stairs, a door here, as you can see, and et cetera. The same ID. If you go to the apartment, you can see here, this is our apartment. Here, you can see this is a bedroom, as you can see, a bed here, and this is representing here, Here, for example, TV, Yeah, TV here, this one representing a wind, this one. Of course, I will know all of this from the architect itself. Let's use another plan that shows exactly this. If you look at this plan, which is a good one for understanding, you can see here, D six or D nine. What does this mean? It means door. Okay? You can see here, W five. What does this mean? Window? So if you do I'm not sure, simply if you just click like this, you will see here window. Okay. Thanks to the Arctic. If you click here like this, door. If you look at this, you can see here these are an office. This is an administration building, so it consisting of office. You can see some decorations here, decoration plants, and you'll find here a chair with an office computer, as you can see here. Very clear, right. If you look at any building from the plan view, you will see all of this. You can see windows here as the Arctic to have Said, If you select this one, let's see if it gives us, you can see here elevators. So thank that to the architect. It gives us. If you click on this one, it gives you stairs. Let's see, not stairs here, like this one. We can see stairs, okay? Like this. You can see here some chairs, group of chairs, and meeting table, right? So this is all about the architecture plan. Now, let me show you a complete design for a villa, which is this one in order to help you understand how can you read this plan. You can see this is the original plan, representing location of the plan. You can see scale, one, two, 1,000. It means that each 1,000 meter will be divided by one or each or each 1 meter will be converted into 1 millimeter, each 1 meter, representing 1 millimeter in this drawing. Now you can see here this is a view for the roof from the whole building. You can see here this are cars or a parking area. You can see here parts of the roof. Now let's go and continue. You see this is electrical design for the whole veal. For this part, if you zoom in like this, you can see we have two floors, ground floor, one to 100 meters. This is a scale of this drawing. Each 100 meters in reality, representing 1 meter in this drawing. If I measure 1 meter here, it means it is 100 meters in reality. So this is a ground floor. If you go here, first to floor. We have one plan for ground, one plan for first. Now, you can see here that we have this part. This is very important called the electrical legend. This legend will help us to understand, what does each of these components mean. If I go like this, zoom in in any part, you can see here, for example, let's choose, for example, a bedroom like this, you can see these symbols, these symbols. What does this even mean? If you click on them, you can see this is simple like this, what does this even mean? From my understanding, of course, it's representing what, since we have here, the sample, the simple representing a switch, that turns on and off light. And as you can see it's connected to these lumines. So these are lumina, and this one is a switch. If I would like to make sure of this, simply go here, like this, you can see here, this one, you can see surface or ceiling top hang light, which means it is aluminu as I've just seen. Now, the other one, one way switch, this one, the one which is used here. This one. There is also another one. You can see here is your spleton it for the air conditioning system. You can see here the simple, which are representing a power socket or a normal socket. This one is also. If I go here like this, You can see here, this one is a 13 pair, switched socket, and this one is double pull four water pump. This one is a 13 ampair, double pull, um ford water pump. So this is another socket here, this one and this one. This one is a twin, it means it has two outputs. If we go like this, you can see here there are some switches. So in order to understand this electrical drawing, we have to look at this one. You can see here. This one representing the main switch port, this one which supplies electrical power to distribution ports. This one is a distribution ports. These are chandler. You can see here handler, which representing a large Luminar. This is a wall mounted light, and et cetera. By looking to this, we can understand what does this simple mean? What does this one mean, and et cetera. These lines are representing the wiring, of course, in the electrical design. We put our luminars in different lighting circuits, as we will see inside the course, how to do this. And we divide them into group of circuits. Similar to this, we have these normal sockets and power sockets have also contained the same idea. They are added to power circuits. This is how you can read an electrical drawing. Now you'll see the same idea for these floors, you'll find in penthouse floor plan, and you'll see the same idea for luminars and the switches that we have. Now, there's another plan. What is this plan? We have We have Luminar or lighting circuits, and we have power circuits. The third thing that we have in electrical design, which is the panel schedule. When we are each of these distribution ports, is a three phase distribution port, which contains dulo blue or the three phase ABC. Dular blue, that's three phase. Now, we are in each one, we have circuits, one for lighting, one for lighting, one for power circuits, and et cetera. So we design each circuit contains a group of lominers, or group of normal sockets. Then we try what are we going to do in panel schedule is that we try to balance between these phases. So for example, circuit one, will be in red, circuit two, will be in yellow, circuit three, and et cetera. Or we divide them into group of group of louds in each of these phases. Whatever it is, you'll understand this when we go to a panel schedule part. So we have for each distribution port, you can see distribution port one for ground floor, distribution port two for ground floor. So in the ground floor, we have two distribution ports. For third and four, for the first floor, we have DB three, distribution port three, distribution port four, for first floor. If you go here to ground, you'll see that we have DB one and DB two. If you go to second floor, DB four, and DV three. Okay, the panel schedule can be done inside the toca drawing or usually like what I would do, I will make them in an Excel file, which is makes it easier for me to do it. Then the last part, which is Risor and single line diagram. We usually say this one is a single line diagram, which shows you here, for example, we have this main distribution board which can take electricity from a transformer or from the electrical grid like from a distributor. We have this one. Which will provides electrical power to the distribution ports. You can see all of the distribution ports in our building are supplied from this. So you can see, for example, DB one for ground the floor, ground the floor, DB one, DB two, the rating, they are taken from the first floor from the distribution or the main distribution port. This pent house and another one, D TV six, and other accessories that we have. Here we can see and we have a left or elevator inside this building. We have a cooler, heater, and et cetera. All of this are separate loads that takes electricity directly from that distribution port. Now, of course, we will learn how to draw this inside the course and how to do or select the cables, suitable for each of these. Cables and circuit breakers. You can see here, molded case circuit breaker like this. And you can see this part representing each of the loads that each of these distribution ports take. That is an overview about the electrical design, how to read the electrical drawing and architectural drawing. 6. Demand Factor and Diversity Factor: Hi, and welcome everyone. In this lesson, we will talk two important or two critical factors that we are going to use in the load estimation part of the course in the panel schedule. These factors are very important because they will affect the selection of circuit breakers, selection of cables, and they will also affect our loud estimation process. Let's start by talking about the demand factor and diversity factor. So First, in order to understand this, let's talk about our electrical system. Let's look at this image here. This is part of autocad drawing that we will see inside our course. This representing a part of our apartment. This appartment here or this drawing here, representing what. Let's type it with our pencil. This one, representing an apartment. This drawing here representing the power circuits. So we will learn inside the course after learning a lighting design and et cetera. We will find that we have electrical drawings, electrical drawings, the four lighting circuits, one drawing for lighting circuits, and another one for power circuits. When we say power circuits, we are talking a poet, the power outlets or power sockets, and we also took a poet, the electrical heater, the split air conditioning system, and et cetera. So what you can see in this image here on this drawing or to add drawing part of the apartate. You can see we have this room, this one, and we have another room here. And the rest of other room. You'll see this shape here, this one, representing our electrical panel. That you will see in any apartment. If you look at near the entrance of any apartment, you'll find here a panel poured like this, contains a group of circuit breakers, like this, which you can switch on and off group of circuit breakers. Now, each of these circuit breakers will go to a certain circuit. It can be a lighting circuit, which provides electrical power to group of luminars, and it can be a power circuit which provides power to conditioning power to group of sockets or outlets, and et cetera. So this is our distribution port that will give electrical power to all of these circuits, the sample here. Representing our normal socket. Like what exactly this normal socket, like this. Let's just delete all of this. Like this one. You can see this, this power outlet that you see in the walls. This power outlet, we call it normal socket. This one has this simple. So this one here, This representing one power socket on this wall. If you look at this room, you can see power socket here, then after a certain distance, another one, another one, another one, another one, and et cetera. Now, we have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten. These ten, these ten sockets are connected together. You can see this wiring between them. It means that they are connected together or taking the electrical power from the from the same circuit breaker or from the same line, same circuit. Remember that our distribution port consisting of group of circuits. One of them is this one. You can see, this is the name of the circuit. Okay, we will learn about this when we go to how to add circuits in our drawing, how to draw the luminars, how to wire them. So don't worry. I'm just explaining this because we are going to talk up our demand and the demand factor and diversity factor. So this is important in understanding how it works. Now, we have the first definition, which is called the connected loud. This is a submission of all of the louds in the electrical system. So we have, let's say, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, 19. These sockets, let's say, they have a power off, let's it 2000 volt ampair. Now I'm going to ask you, are these acts are all of these sc are used in the same time or not? Are they will be used in the same instant or not, actually, in reality, they are not going to be used in the same time. Because if you look at any room or any any apartment, you will never find these sockets working at the same time. I can, for example, connect to here, my on charger for my mobile phone or for my computer, and the rest will be not used, right? Another way I could be connecting here, a refrigerator, for example, I can be connecting a microwave, and et cetera. So not all of these circuits will be used at the same time. That's why we have, not all of these brains. That's why we have when we design, we have to consider something which we call the demand the demand factor. Why demand factor. Okay. Now, remember, if we design our let's say 2000 circuit number one, circuit, number one, Then I'm going to choose a cable, that will be able to provide 2000 volt pair or the equivalent current, and I will choose a circuit breaker that will also withstand this value. However, this will lead to higher cost of the system, since I'm selecting an oversized breaker, oversized cable for the circuit here. Because in reality, they are not going to be working at the same time. That's why we have demand factor. We take this value and multiply it by certain value, let's say 80%. What does 80% mean? It means that only 80% of these sockets will work, right? Not all of them, just 80% of these sockets. Now, in this case, you will have a lower value, which means lower circuit breaker size, lower cable, leading to lower cost. So let's identify or provide the definition for the demand factor. So this demand factor is actually applied for what applied for, lighting circuits and power circuits. Power circuits like this one. And the four lighting circuits, for example, you will find that in this room, let's say we have one, luminar two, three, and four, five, six, seven, eight, and here, for example. All of this, for example, connected like this together. So not all of these will be worked together. So we have also a demand factor for lighting circuits. So this when we do the panel schedule, we will have to multiply this by demand factor, since not all of them are working at the same time. What is exactly the demand factor? Demand factor is simply the maximum demand of a system divided by total connected load on the system. What does this mean? Let's say we have an apartment, an apartment with total connected all of the Luminars, plus all of the sockets, everything in the apartment. Let's say, it is equivalent to ten kilo volt ampere. However, this apartment will have a maximum demand. Maximum amount of power taken, let's say it will be seven kilo volt amp, because not all of these Lots in our apartment will work at the same time. So it will be seven divide a 0.10, so our demand factor is 0.7. So only maximum demand, maximum amount of louds that will be working at the same time will be just 70% of the total loot. That is what we call demand factor. Now, lighting in my design in this course, I assume 100% demand factor and the four power circuits, I assume 85%. What I say about power circuits, I'm talking a normal sockets here. For air conditioning and for electric heaters, I assume a 100% demand factor. Now, these values can change from one code to another from one country regulations to another. From one standard to another. For example, you'll find in IEC values, different from NEC, different from Trob E and so on. Depending on what standard are you are following, you will design based on it. So I'm giving you the outline or the plan which you are going to follow or the steps you are going to follow and based on what code you are following or electrical code you are following, you will do these steps. As we said, this values, these values are critical when we select cables and precurs. Now, the demand for demand factor in IEC. We have demand factor in general, this is a term that I'm talking about. In IEC, will find it factor of maximum utilization and denoted by KU. In IEC, if you're looking for demand factor, you look for factor of maximum utilization. This is exactly this one part in IEC. It is written in a different form. Now, also in mechanical systems, such as QVC system, and so on. The, the mechanical engineer can give you values of utilization. We have utilization factor, utilization factor, utilization factor for machines. So this values similar to demand factor in electrical system. However, the demand factor, this utilization factor will be given by mechanical engineer. If you don't have it, you assume it with unity. Okay? Now, usually, demand factor is less than or equal to one, as we have seen here because it is maximum demand, which will never exceed the total connected load. Now, this is also, again, what I have just said that this demand factor is considered for main loads such as lighting, air conditioning, and sockets. That's why you will find in the panel schedule that we will learn in the course, that I select lightening as 100%, air conditioning as 100% and sockets as 85%. So we have here lighting. If we look at this panel schedule that we will learn inside the course after designing our circuits for lighting, for power, and et cetera, you'll find we have this these louds and their equivalent connected kilowatt. Here we have them in kilowatt, and we will divide each pi power factor to convert them. So we divide, let's say, for example, if we'd like to get these lighting in volta empire because we are dealing in the end with vault empire, We take the connected loot 1.2 divided by its power factor 0.8, so it will give us how many volt and bear. This is what? This is our connected loot. Submission of all of the power of the panel of the lighting circuits, all of the power of the lighting circuit, and then divided by z 0.8 to convert it into volt empire this is the maximum or total connected loot. Now, lighting circuit, we will divide it by dF or demand factor, which is one or unity. So we take this and moto light by one, give us how many k volt empire, which is 1.5, which is exactly this. Now, similarly for sockets or the outlets here, You can see we have all of their power 7.7, divide it by 0.8 power factor, you will get connected loot, then multiply by demand factor of 0.85, you will get how many volta pair. Similarly, in the end, you will find that we have how many kilovolta empire, and in reality, that total connected loot is 25 kilo volta pair. So that total demand factor is just 95%. Very close to unity, okay. Okay. Now what? So we now have this value. What does this value? We call? We call it the demand loot, demand loot. Not the connected but demand lot. This is the value of our panel. Now, the next step, you will have this riser of the building. We can have a single line diagram, and we will have riser of the building. What does riser of the building mean? We have this building, which is a building with four floors in addition to the ground. Okay? Now, in this building, we have two apartments in the ground floor, and we have in each floor two apartments. You can see this is our ground floor. We have one to each of these representing panels. Let's say magnify. You can see here. This and this one and this one. Each of these, representing what, representing a panel, such as the panel which we talked about, 25 kilo volt empire, 25 kilo volt empire, the one which I'm just talked about. Okay, which is that 24 kilo volt empire, the one the demand value, okay? Each panel, representing demand loot. Okay, so we have one, two apartments. Then on the first floor, we have an apartment on the right side, apartment on the left side, another one here, another one, and et cetera. Now, you can see we have main distribution port. This distribution port, which can be at the entrance of the building itself, it is used to provide electrical power to what to these panels, go from here and go to this panel and this one. Then we have this riser. Sf is going up to the four floors to provide electrical power to these four apartments, and another riser going to the building and supplying electrical power to these loots. Or these panels. We have how many panels, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, 910, ten distribution panels. I would like you to think carefully. A these apartments will work at the same time, or they will not work at the same time. They will not work at the same time. Not all of these apartments will have the maximum demand at the same time. That's why we will have to apply another factor. This factor is called the diversity factor. Diversity factor representing the diversion between different loots. Diversion between different loads. The demand factor is applied between similar loads, such as lighting circuits demand effect, power circuits demand effect, air conditioning demand effect, and et cetera. For the loads, for different panels, differentiation port, we apply what we call the diversity factor. This will help in sizing our transformer and sizing our cables here. Under size. Now, after this step, we will have a large group of panels. We will take those panels and multiply them by the coincidence factor or divide them by the diversity factor to get the coincident loot or diversified loot. What are the difference between them, nothing different. In different codes, they say we have diversity factor, which is exactly in other codes like IEC, they call it the coincidence factor. So what is exactly that diversity factor? It is the ratio of the sum of all of the individual maximum demands. You have here all of these panels. 205-20-5205. Add all of these. We have ten apartments. So we will have ten multibil by to 25, since each one is 25 kilo volt, demand lot, and not connected demand loot. So it will be 250 volt and beer, right? Like this. Okay. Now we have 250 kilowatt. This is a maximum summation of all of the individual maximum demands of the various subdivisions of the system. To what to the maximum demand of the whole system? Now, all of these pendants would not have the maximum demand at the same time. Let's say this system will have a maximum the maximum time at which all of these will take power. Let's say it will be 100 or let's say 200. So that is the maximum demand of the whole system. So it will be what it will be 250/200. It will be 1.25, if I remember click correctly. So A with the diversity factor is always greater than one, greater equal to one or greater than one. Demand factor is lower than one. Okay? So in order to get the power of this distribution pan, it will be total demand, which is 250 divided by diversity factor. To get 200, which is the lower number. In other codes, we have coincidence factor. Now, coincidence factor or simultaneous factor or simultaneous factor. All of this representing the same. It is exactly equal to simultaneous factor or the coincidence factor is equal to one of diversity, diverseft. It is the reciprocal of diverse factor. That's why these factors are less than one. That is the correct definition of all of these. Now, in different codes, you'll find that in some countries, you'll find that demand factor is treated exactly as diversity factor. In other codes, they say they treat diversity factor as less than one As if it is a simultaneous factor. Depending on what values given, I will be able to design my system. You will see what I mean in the nexus slides. You see in diversity factor in IEC, they call it the simultaneous factor or coincidence factor, which is the inverse of diverse factor. You'll find this factor if you would like e values in IEC 61439. And it was always greater than one. Now, the demand factor boy experience, usually po experience. Without it could, we usually find that in lighting, we use from 0.9 to one. Four sockets, it will be from 0.5 to one, four air conditioning between 0.75 to one, and demand factor before we go to this, demand factor, this is according to our experience, from different project that we have done before. However, if you'd like to follow the cods, look at the Nist two slides. Number one, for I trouble E, Frobly here gives you the connected loot and the maximum demand loot. Here, how many what pare feet square? So if you have a shoe store or a department store or drug store or whatever restaurant, what I'm going to do, that if I would like to know the loot of the restaurant, what I'm going to do, let's say I have let's say how much. Let's say 11000 feet square, let's say 1,000 feet square, restaurant. I would like to know its loot, 1,000 feet square restaurant. How can I get a solute? You can see connected loot? What bare feet square? What bare feet square? I'm going to say, go to restaurant, and 15.9. It's connected load will be 15.9 what pare feet square. What I'm going to do is that I will take this value to moatult by the space of the restaurant. It will be 11000 feet square. It will give us 15.9 kilo? That is the connected load of our restaurant. Since all of these loads are not going to work at the same time, then the demand factor. According to E, for this application, restaurant will be 0.45. When I design my panel or when I design my transformer for a building consisting of a restaurant. F restaurant alone, I will take this load and multiply eight Pi 0.45. To get what to get the demand loot. That's how you can apply this. Now, another thing, this table also can be used for loot estimation, for estimation of the loot in the building, restaurant, restaurant, bakery, candy shop, and et cetera. We will see how can use something like this in the next lesson of the loot estimation. Now, demand factor according to the NEC. So the NEC is that if you have a lighting loot demand factor. So if you have a dwelling unit and its power in vault empire, vault empire, for lighting loots is 3,000 or less, take it at a 100% demand factor. So what does this mean? If you have a dwelling unit, It's power, let's say 5,000 vault empire. Okay. Load of lighting. I would like to know the demand factor. It says what, hey, if you have 3,000 or less first, first 3,000, or less than 3,000, take demand factor as 100%. So this 5,000 can be divided as 3,000, first 3,000 plus 2000. So first 3,000, multiplied point demand factor, 100%, multiplied 0.1. Then it says 3001-101, use demand factor 35. That is the rest higher than 3,000. It will be plus 2000, multiplied by its demand factor 35. It will be 0.35. You will get what demand loot For lighting. This can be used in designing our panel. So you can see that in the panel schedule or in the beginning of the lesson, I used lighting as a demand factor of 100%. If you would like to follow the code of NEC, then using this rules for a dwelling or a residential apartments, you will be able to design the lighting circuit correctly and specifically according to the code. Okay by using this ads. Now, if you have a hospital, hospitals, hotels, warehouses, storage, all of these, then follow these according to power rating for lighting and demand fact. Very easy, right? Following the code. Now, this is not only the part in NEC, there is more related to different loads in NEC. So in N EC, I'm going to leave you a DF file containing the demand factor for NEC. Okay. Now, what about the simultaneity factor or the coincidence factor, which if you don't remember, it is the reverse of diversity factor. Okay? This is from IEC 61439. You can see here, simultaneity factor for distribution ports. Here, if you have how many circuits, two and three 2-3, take the factor as 0.29. 4-5, take it like this, between ten and more, take it like this and et cetera. For lighting circuits, hey, if you have a lighting circuit, tick it one. If you have a heat and air conditioning, in take it one, this is what we have used. In outlets and socket outlets, you can see here it is very small, 0.12 0.2, and it says that if you are in industrial in installations factory, for example, then this value will be higher. For us, we selected between 0.5 and one, and in the course, I selected as 85%. This is exactly similar to the demand factor that we talked about from IEC. Now, what about this? This is very important as it will help you in doing this. This is one of the projects that we will discuss in the course. We have a large area. This area consisting of several residential buildings, we have administration building, we have a factory. Okay? Now, all of this, let's zoom in. You'll see how to do this in our course, magnify from here. So you can see this one. We have how many distribution ports, one, two, three, four, and five. So we have five distribution port. Each of these representing what demand loot or diversified loot. If you are talking about, each of each of these after applying that diversity factor in each building. If you remember in first building, we had 250 kido volt, and there for example, Then after applying a diversity factor, we obtained 50 kilo volt and p or 150 kilo volt, and pL, whatever it is, depending on what project we are dealing with, as we will see in the rest of the course. But anyway, we have this distribution port, main distribution port for the building. All of these pots are taking from a transformer connected to the power grid. Great. Now, these are 29725500. Now, of course, since we have group of panels, then we will apply diverse effect. Other codes, they consider diversity factor as demand effect. So here you can see it is demand factor, 80%. We can say to be more specific diversity factor or to be more specific coincidence factor. B here, you can see that according to this, you can see here, if you have between how many circuits or how many feeders or how many distribution ports. If you have 4-5, take it 0.8. If you look at here, we have one, two, three, four, five. So we took it as 0.8. This one, representing the diversity factor or the simultaneous factor to be simultaneous factor to be more specific. Now, remember, there are some codes that they consider, these are diversity factors. Even if we know that diversity factor is greater than one, over some codes, confuse it and use it as leather than one. Okay? Now here is another one. You can see here we can see from IEC it's called what simultaneous simultaneous factor, let than one. You can see here in IEC. Here you can see diversity factor. This is obtained from from the French code. You can see here this one from French code. Both of these French code following the IEC, they have the same one. This is from Schneider Electric, and according to them, this is also obtained from French code. That is based on the IEC code. But they say diversity factor is accepted that. Despite that we said before, that diversity factor is greater than one. But any way neglect these definitions, you already know that diversity factor greater than one, and simultaneous factor or coincidence factor than one. That is the correct definitions. However, in the end, what we call it, we will use these values in design. Let's see how. We have these panels. You can see one panel, another panel, and another panel. This this panel provides electrical power to two panels. Then between them, there will be diversity factor. Now, this panel provides for three consumers. This one provides for four consumers. Then between these, we will have a diversity factor, and between these, we will have diversity factor. You can see at each level or at each stage, we add diversity factor. Now, in the end, this depends on what depends on the code you are following. Some codes say, Hey, don't do this, don't add diversity factor here. Add it at the transformer part. Hey, other code will say, Hey, at every stage, add demand factors and add diversity factor. Okay, so it depends on what code you are following. Let's say for this example here, what we are going is that. First, we have three consumers. Between them, there will be diversity. So diversified loot of first panel, this one will be total loot 101112/1 0.11, which is a diversity effect. Okay. So we divided by the great number or multiply by a number than one. So we have how many pants, one, two, three. According to the IEC, how many panels two to three, use this one. If you take, this is one, this is less than one, so it will be simultaneously, factor. What I'm going to do take ten plus 11 plus 12, which would be 33 and multiply it by simultaneous effect, 0.9, or take the third three and avoid it by diverse defect. What is diverse factor? It is one over coincidence factor, which is 0.1 1/0 0.9. So one of 0.9 will give us 1.11, which is this value, like this. So this will give you 29.7. If you would like diversity, then divide by 1.11, give you the same value, okay? Now, what about for the sec, we have one, two, three, four, four and five, use 0.8. 0.8 for simultaneous factor or coincidence factor. Four diversity will be 14.8, which is 1.25. So it will be total connected loot, divided by diversity factor, or total connected loot, multiplied by the coincidence factor. Both of them are the same. Anyway, in order to avoid any confusion, all you have to do is take the total load and multiply it by a number, that will make it smaller. That's it. We are trying to make this number smaller. That's all what we do. So we have these two loads, and we have diversity between them of 0.9, which is 1.11 again. So we will have 42 kilowatt power rating of this Another one here, simultaneous factor, K coincidence factor, IEC, same one. We have this part. This is from the French code. You can see French standards. This part is applicable for apartments, without electrical heating. Without it electrical is very important, okay? Now, you can see the same table here. You can see diversity factor used in French standard. Here in the IEC, they say simultaneity factor, which is the more correct term. Now, how many customers we have 2-4 use value of one, 5-9, 0.78, and et cetera. So you can see here we have this example. Let's do this in the next slide. We have this example on simultaneity. So we have these floors around the floor, floor one, two, three, and four. We have here six consumers. We have four consumers, five, six, four. Now, if you have, if you apply, If you say that, you have a building with only six consumers with only six consumers. Then what factor are you going to apply 5-9, use this one? So if you have only six, use 0.78. Now, let's say if I have these two, six and four, ten consumers, then I will use 0.63. If you have all of these consumers, six plus four plus five, 15, then I will use 0.53. If you have all of these, then you will have 21, use 0.49. If you have four another four consumers, then you will use between 2,529.46. That is what this example would like to say to you. According to how many consumers, each consumer can be an apartment, one apartment to apartments three. Six consumers means six apartments. Depending on number of apartments, we will select the suitable number of consumers downstream. Let's this. Okay. So let's say we have this melting. What factor I'm going to use? We have how many consumers six, four, five, six, and four. How many consumers ten, 15, 21, 25? So I'm going to use 0.46. So I'm going to add all of these demand los demand loads, and avoid on the metabolize by what motazm by 0.46? You can see here, add all of all of the demand lot, not connected demand loot for each panel, 150 kilovolt pair. Take this one and multiplied by how many consumers 2,050.46, multiplied by 0.46, you have gotten the apparent power of the supply or transformer or amount of power needed for the building, 69 kilovolt pair. You can see there's a big difference between them. Big difference. Why this big difference? Because as number of consumers increase The possibility of them operating at the same time is much lower. You can see by applying the diversity factor or simultaneous factor, you now have much lower power required, which means very, very low very low amount of cable rating, and very low circuit breaker rating compared to the 150. Now, as you can see, diverse fails apply to every group of different louts, such as distribution or sub distribution, as we have seen in the previous example. You can see here, these are main distribution. Then we have sub distribution that provides two different panels. At each stage, we apply diversity factors. Okay? Great. Now before we end, we have another one. Let's say, how can we use this in transformer sizing of our building? Now, let's say we have four individual feeders, with connected lows of 250, 200, 150, and 400. And each of these panels, each of these feeders have a demand factor of 90 87 func. Use a diverse factor of 1.5 to size a transformer. Now, first, we have connected loots. First, we convert them or these feeders or these distribution ports into demand loot. How by multiplying each by their demand factor, right like this, 250, multiplied by 90, 200 multiplied by 80, 150 by 75, and et cetera, like this. Great. Now, not next, next step that we will add all of them to get the total demand factor, demand loots, which is eight c 7.5. This is our total demand loot. Now, if we size our feeder and unity diverse defect, which means all of these lots or maximum lots are always occurring. Or there is a possibility that all of these will have the maximum, demand at the same time, which is in reality is not will never happen. So it's 7.5. If we size our transformer based on this, you'll find that we will look for a trans 150 kilo volt. Pair. If you find it, however, in reality, you will find a 1 mega volt and pair transformer. Now, let's apply our diversi factor, which is say that these feeders will never have their maximum demand at the time. So I will take this add them together and divide them by diversity factor to get that diversified loot. Divided by one point, you can see 558 kilovolt. You can see the difference between them, very large difference between these two. This large difference will lead to lower size of that transformer. You can see here, for a diversify one point, a 600 kilovolt and per transformer could be used. Compared to with 150 you can see how much difference between these two That's why these demand and diversified diversity factor or simultaneous factor are very important in sizing our transformer and sizing our able in even that low estimation as we will see in the next less. Finally, the simultaneous factor that we use in different buildings. Residential, you'll find between 0.62 point s because we have many, many customers or lots of apartments. That's why it will be low compared to commercial 0.62 0.8. In industrial, all of the buildings are operating at the same time or having their machines are working. So it will have a high simultaneous factor. And for agriculture buildings, it will be 0.921. I hope this lesson was helpful for you. And understanding a very important concept in electrical systems, which is the demand factor and the diversity factor or simultaneous and coincident factors. 7. What is Load Estimation and It's Importance: Hey, everyone, in this lesson, we would like to discuss something which is called load estimation. Load estimation is really important in electrical design. We will learn in this lesson, what is meant by load estimation, and why do we need load estimation? In the next lesson, we will have an Excel sheet in order to know how can we do load estimation using it. First, we have to understand what is load estimation. Load estimation is simply means identifying the amount of load required in a building. Before we start any project, we start with load estimation in order to know how much electrical energy is required for a certain building. In order to do this, we do something which is called loud estimation. This is just an estimation at the beginning of the project before we design anything. It is used to identify nearly how much electrical power is required. It should be closed to what we will have after designing. It is just an approximation or estimation for the load which we need in our system. Now, there are several reasons why do we need load estimation? The first reason is that the architect needs to know what I need as an electrical engineer from rooms. How many rooms do I need as an electrical engineer and the minimum area of this room. We need as an electrical engineer in our building, for example, we need electricity room for panels, generator room, and transformer room. We need room for panels in each floor and one generator room and one transformer room for the whole building. So we have to in another video, we will discuss the transformer enginertor room sizing. In order to give information to the arctic of the area required as an electrical engineer. How much area do I need from the arctic to save in order to both the panel, the generator, and transformer if we need a transformer. Also, we need to estimate how much electricity required in the building, how much kilo voltm be or mega voltam B in order to know how many rooms and the size of the room required. Also so that the artect will know all of the information about the electricity sector. Another reason is that the owner needs to contact the electricity company before building the project, and know if it is possible to provide this amount of power or not. The owner before it makes a contract with the electricity company, it should know how much electricity will require inside the building. For example, if I need 1 mega volt beer in my own building, then the owner will need to contact the electricity company and see if it is possible to provide this amount of power or not. L et's say you start designing, you neglected the low destimation part, and you started designing and identifying everything required in the building, such as panels, cables, plans, rooms, generator, transformer, and everything. After all, you found that you need two mega vault and pair of power as an example. Then the owner or you started contacting the electricity company and they told you that it is not possible to provide this amount of power. You need for your own project to make a volt and B after doing everything from panels, the cables, and all of this. Now, after contacting it told you that it is not possible to provide this amount of electricity, In this case, you have consumed time, money, energy in designing. The most important thing is money and time. In the end, you will not be able to build this project because you cannot have this amount of power from the electricity grid. Before we started designing and drawing all of this, we have to estimate our loot, so that we don't consume or waste our time money and energy in designing. In order to avoid all of this, we start estimating the amount of load required before we design our project. Another reason is that we need to know what type of voltage required. Do we need in our project low voltage as a supply or medium voltage as supply. The low voltage and medium voltage depending on the loot itself. The amount of loot required. Because in case of a low voltage, then we will take our electrical power from the grid directly. However, if it is a high amount of power, then we will use medium voltage, then we will need to have a transformer in our building. All of this is done using the loud estimation. A Also we need to know if we need a transformer or not, and this will depend on the electricity or the load required. Now, small projects, all loads less than 400 kilo volt and beer will take power directly from the low voltage without any transformer. However, if we have a large projects or loads greater than 400 kilo volta beer, then we will take our power from medium voltage. In this case, we will need a transformer in our building, which means we will need a transformer room. We have to do all of the load estimation in order to know what type of loot, how much electricity required, the transformer room, a generator room sizing. Also, if it is a small project or a larger project to identify if we need a transformer or not, is it a low voltage or medium voltage, and so on. All of this is done by using load estimation. Lod estimation will help us to know all of this information. We are going to do in the next eteson, the load estimation according to codes and standards. 8. Load Estimation Different Methods: Hey, everyone, in this lesson, we will talk about the load estimation, different methods of load estimation. How can we estimate the loot requirement in a building if we need a transformer or not? First, let's discuss some concepts in the beginning in order to understand how can we do load estimation? We have some concepts regarding area. If you look at any area, let's take the pencil here. Let's have a piece of land like this, like this. This piece of land, let's say it is 2000 feet square. And I build a residential building like this here. Here? In an area, let's say, for example, 1,000 feet square. What is my question exactly? That when we do the loot estimation, do you think that when we would like to estimate the loot inside a building? Do we do we take this area of the building or do we take the whole area of the land? Of course, by logic, we take the area at which we build our building. So for example, if our building takes 12 volt and pa pa feet square, estimated loot in residential building, then what I'm going to do? I'm going to take that 12 volt and multiply it by 1,000 feet, not 2000 feet feet square, 1,000 2000, 12,000 because this value for what four residential building. Due to the difference between this area and this area. We have now a new concept for area. We have three types of areas. Number one, the plot area, the plot area is the area of the entire project, plot of the land. So we have this land, all of this land, all of this, representing the plot area. Let's just draw it. You can see this All of this, if you go down here. All of this. All of these are called blot area. So this is area that includes our building. It includes the garage. It includes the gardens, and et cetera. And also, it includes the built up and unbuilt up areas. What does built up mean? Built up it means, we are building a building a residential building or a commercial building. We're adding floors. We're adding the front levels. Pelt area, the area at which we don't build anything. Like here, guards does not have any type of buildings, except this area, this area here. This area, representing the pelt up area with the different levels. Now, the fit footprint area, it is the area. Use the fork construction. It is just part of the project to plot. What does this mean? You can see this part here. This is the area at which we are going to build our project, so you can see here, this area here, all of this, like this, go down here, like this, like this. That is what we call the footprint area. So the whole land is called the plot area or plot area, the area at which we build our building, this area, is called the footprint area. Now, the total area, which are representing this area, in addition to the floors we are building, is called the built up area. This is equal to the ground floor, you can see here, and in additional floors we add. So when we design our electrical system or when we estimate the electrical system, we use the built up area. Let's see this concept in another way. You can see this is our land. A, all of this representing our plot area. Now, the region at which we are going to build our building is B here, which is a footprint area, this one. Now, pelta area representing P plus C, which is a pelt floor plus D, the other floor, and et cetera. So it representing the area of the building plus all of the floors. So for example, if we have a footprint area, let's say 1,000 feet square, and we have five floors. So our pelt area, which representing the area of the total area of the building will be five floors, multiplied by 1,000. That is what we use in the loud estimation. Okay, so not the total area. It is the ground plus first floor plus second floor. Now, assuming all of them are equal to each other, so it will be 1,000 Multi blood by number of floors, a, which is exactly this ground floor plus area of all of the floors. Because we are adding y, all of the floors. Because in each floor, we will have lighting, we will have power power circuits, we will have evac system or air conditioning system, and et cetera. Great. Now, when we talk about methods of lid estimation. The first method and the simplest method called the overall method. Sometimes it's called also the building area method. Both of them are similar to each other. How many volta and pair per meter square. So we take the total area or pelt up area and multiply by a specific number. For example here, this is, for example, from my own regulations in my own country electricity company regulations. You can see here. It says, for example, if you have a luxury housing or a real estate luxury estate or luxury housing. Then for each hundred meter square, take six kilo volt for each 100 meter square. What does this mean? It means exactly like six kilo volt a pair, p me bare 100 meter square. Which means if we take this kilo and will be 1,000, 1000/100 gives us in the end 60 volt and pair pa meter square. Let's say if you are going to build a luxury building. Luxury building, residential building like this. I bet a drawing, so I'm sorry for this step drawing. This is our building. Let's say consisting of six floors. And this building will be in a luxury area or a luxury housing or a luxury real estate. What you are going to do, if I would like to estimate the loot in this building, what are you going to do? Just take 60 volt ampare. Multiplied by meter square, the total area. Now, let's say the area of one floor is let's say 500 meter square. For example, and we have six floors. Total area will be 500 area of one floor, multiplied by total floors gives us three and meter square. This is what we call bilt up area. We will take this total area and multiplied by 60. Like this. So it will give us mota 18 012 approximately 18 kilo volt pare. This is very low anyway. Okay? So let's say 18 kilo volt empire. Sorry, 180 kilo volt and pair, 1840, 180 kilo volt p. That is more realistic. So this is a power that is required by the building. Now, without considering any factors like demand factors or diversity factors, leave them for now. This is what the electricity company says. Now, if you have affordable housing, live then the luxury housing, it will be four kilovolt and bere for this and the commercial and administration building, it will be ten kilovolt and bere for each hundred meters square. You can see very simple method. All you have to do get the total area, total built up area, number of floors, multi b by area of one floor, Then multiplied by the number given by the company. You will get the amount of power required. Now, this is what we call building area method. Why? Because we have building area, built up area, and multiplied by volt and pair perimeter square over all method. Now, the company also says take a diversity factor of 0.8 a transformer pillar and substce. You can say that we can take this number. Here, the connected loot, multiply it by 0.8, you will get the demand or the diversified loot, like this. That is the value at which we will design our transformer. If the building require a transformer. However, since the loot here is 400 kilo voltamber, then we don't need any transformer. Great. Okay. So as you can see, very simple method, however, how accurate is this method. It has low accuracy. Okay, not all buildings are built the same. Also, some buildings can contain H VAC system. Other can contain a split or window air conditioning system instead of H VAC. This will greatly affect the value of power. Also, if you have a fire alarm system or a light current systems, if you have how many elevators we have in a building. Many, many factors that can affect these numbers. Okay? So there is more accurate method. Here is there is also an overall method, according to Saudi Arabia cod, as you will see right now. Then we will go to the other methods. So what you can see here from Saudi Arabia quid, it says, it divides it into categories. We have C one, C two, C three, and et cetera. In C one, we have normal residential dwelling, which means normal residential building. Here, commercial shops, here, furnished flats, we have residential building with furnished furniture or furnished flats. Here we have hotels. Here we have malls, we have restaurants, offices, schools, and et cetera. You have also indoor parking, parks and garden, and et cetera. Now, look carefully. Here it says, if you have a normal residential dwelling, we have louds including like lights, air conditioning, power sockets. So it has the three main categories, like lighting, air conditioning, and the power sockets. So these three, it says, hey, if you have a building, take volta and pair perimeter square as 145. So if we apply this to our previous example, you'll see that if we have a building of six floors, With a a total built up area, let's say a total built up area. Equal to all of the area of the building, Let's say 3,000 meters square for simplicity. What I'm going to do is simply in order to estimate the load inside the building, take 145 volt and p per meter square, and to multiply it by the total built up area, 3,000. You will get the estimated load of the building. Now, there is another factor we will talk about, but leave it for now. If you have this number includes what lights, air conditioning, and power sockets. Not all of these loads are individually or separated, they are included in one number. It also has lower accuracy than the previous method. Now, if your residential building contain guards and parks like this, you see here, if you get back, you can see this residential building. Consisting contains here, you can see this, these gardens, and we have a parking area. What are we going to do? We take this area, we measure it in the Autocad program, this green area, and multiply it by the factor of the code for gardens. If you have a parking area like this parking area, then you will take this area and multi py parking area factor like this. You see here. So we have this number for the building. You can see parks and garden. If you have outdoor parking and garden here. So I outdoor parking, it says five. So I'm going to say, here, this is a number four building. Then we have outdoor parking. It will be five vault and per. Multi blood boy area of the outdoor parking. Remember, we don't have any floors here. Give us a number. Then we have the garden, four volt empires, we'll say, four volt empire, multi blood by area of the garden. Here, it is much better than the previous method of the electricity regulations, right? It divided our louts into more categories, gardens, parking area, residential building, and et cetera. So this will give you another number here, right. We have the loot estimate for building for outdoor parking for gardens. Now, remember, these values representing the connected connected loot. You have to multiply these numbers a py demand factor or diversity factor. Okay? So this or this depending on the code you are working with. Now leave this for now. Now, another thing that you will find inside the Saudi Arabia code, that there are tables that you will have lights plus power sockets only, lights plus power sacks, and air conditioning is removed. Now, why is this? Because because you may have in the building and e vac system? Or you can you can have an air conditioning, not an HVAC system. You can have air conditioning coming from something which we call district cooling. Okay? That's why if you have a building being cooled by a district cooling, then you will never have an air conditioning. You don't need air conditioning. You need only lights plus power sockets and any additional loots, like it says here, such as elevators, bombs, and so on. What does district cooling represent? This distributes cooling capacity in the form of a chilled water or other medium from a central source to multiple buildings through a network of underground bipes. If you look at this figure here, you can see we have several buildings. You can find this in several regions like Saudi Arabia and many of Gulf countries. So here we have this one which provides cooling pipes, cooling water or shelled water through pipes. These pipes go through this building and comes outside. This these pipes or the function of silt water is to cool down our building, provide cooling for the building, okay? Then since the loading is in this district cooling system. Here, we don't need any air conditioning system. That's why in this building, we will need only power sockets and or normal sockets and the lighting system, in addition to any extra loads like palms, elevators, and et cetera. But we don't need any air conditioning system. This is very important in load estimation. So you have to understand how the building will operate. Now, that's why you'll find in some codes like Saudi Arabia code, here the same normal residential dwelling, C one. However, now, you'll find that we have lights plus power sockets only. It's a 65 volt amp. We will do the same steps, except that we will remove air conditioning from our calculation. Or if you are if you are using air conditioning in the building, but from an H va system, from an H vax system. Then you can estimate the load using by asking the mechanical engineer who is designing this H vax system. He will give you numbers related to vax system, so you can use this table in addition to H vac or air conditioning from him to provide more accurate results. Then using this one directly. If you don't have any air conditioning system, this table here. And follow the same steps. Now, here we said we have demand factors or diversity factors here, which will be multiplied by these loots. The diversity factor in the Saudi Arabia cout, you will see that. It says if you have C one, then multiply by diversity factor of 0.6 hotels, 0.75, restaurants, this, and et cetera. What you are going to do is that if you have a hotel, then you have Total loots total built up area, multiply it by this number, then multiply it by this factor here to get the total demand loot or total diversified loot. Depending on this factor, if it is the demand factor or diversified factor. For each type of loots, you will multiply by the equivalent demand factor in order to get the total demand loot, which will help in estimating the required power or the required transformer. Now, that was the first method. The second method is called loud breakdown. Actually, this one, when you are dividing these loads, you are approaching the blood breakdown. But you will find that the loot breakdown here is more accurate consisting of more details. This one is used to provide more accuracy in loud estimation by dividing lighting, power sockets, each, each one has its own numbers. Not just one number, volta and paper mid square for all of the three loads, we have for each one number. Sometimes we estimate the lighting and sockets and then look at the estimation for mechanical HVAC and take the estimated number for him, exactly what I have said in the previous slide. Now, for example, you can have the stable, let's say we have banks. Lighting will be this value, small sockets, as value, air conditioning, this value, you divide each loot into with different numbers. We don't have banks, for example, equal to, for example, equal to, let's say 100 volt and Baber meter square. No, Lighting has a part. Small sockets has a number. Air conditioning has a number, and et cetera. Okay. So this is based on type of application. Another load estimation is based on this one is based on type of on that type of space, type of the place itself, banks, computer center, and et cetera. Another one which you can find is load estimation based on type of application. In each space, for example, if you have a basement, then we will take a certain number. If it is a residential floor, take a number. If it is an administration floor, take another number, clinic floor, another number, and et cetera, okay? I know you are confused right now and saying, Hey, where are these values, where I can get these values? You can get them from different codes. We will see I trouble E, we will see NEC and IEC codes. Let's start with I trouble E. Here, it talks about lighting part, lighting part for the building. As you can see here, this table from t says, hey, building type or space activity? If you have a food service area, if you have a large mall or an office or whatever. Depending on the type of application, you will use these numbers. For example, if you have an office, an administration building, for example, if you have an office, says if you are between, if the space of this office 0-2 thousand ft square, use this number 1.9, what per feet square? So it will be let's say our office is 1,000 feet square. Then, hey, use this part. What number 1.9 as effect, 1.9, what per feet square? It will be this number, multiplier 0.1 0.9, what per feet square? It will give you the value of what estimated value of what section for lighting lighting. A required in the b. If you are between 2000 10,000, use this number. If you are between this and this, use this number and et cetera. Okay. So that is the first thing. So let's say you have acation for food surface. You know that this floor or the area at which we will have a cafeteria or a fast food, then you will use numbers and multiply it by the corresponding area of the fast food inside the building. If you have a garage inside the building itself. Here a garage, then you will use depending on the area of the garage, you will see this one, you will use this one or this or this or this, and et cetera. So here it divides you into different areas and different applications. So what do you think this is, of course, more accurate than one number for everything, right? Now, another thing that you will notice here is that as the space increase, as the speed increase, you can see that the number itself, how many what per feet square, what happens? Actually, it starts decaying. You can see from 1.5 to 1.3 from 1.9 to 1.5. So as the area increase, surprisingly, it starts decreasing. Now, why is this? Because when you have a larger area, it means you will have more corridors, more toilets, more locations like this, which means they will require less lighting. Compared it to a small office, that most of it will be offices. However, in a large area, you will have more area like kitchens, like toilets, like corridors, like stairs, and et cetera, leading to less requirement of lighting pair feet square. Okay? You can see we have more corridors, pantries, toilets, which will lead to less requirement of flumin compared to small buildings. Now, the same 1 ft square here, however, in meter square if someone needed in meter square, hey, you can use the staable instead of feet square, depending on what country you are in. Now, what are power sockets and occupancy? So sockets here depends again on this one. Again, depending on the application, is it a hospital? Is it an office school, size, and et cetera. And depending on the application and how much is occupied the building. If it has a low occupancy, high occupancy, and average occupancy. So depending on the occupancy of the allocation, you will be able to determine which of these value is suitable for your application. So if you have an office building with an average occupancy, then you use one, one, 1 volt empair per feet square. F what four plug N, for typical or general purpose receptacle loots. This representing the normal sockets. It doesn't include the vac system or heating systems or heat equipment. Now, the same table but in meter square, Another one here for apartments. It says, Hey, if you have an apartment load, then in an apartment, you see how much load this apartment needs. Lighting and convenience outlet for lighting and outlet, use this number. Volta per per meter square. Kitchen use this one. If let's say you have already the plan of the apartment, a room for kitchen, another one for bedroom, reception, one room for dining, one room as an office for yourself, if you work from home, another room for bedroom, a toilet, for example, here, like this, and et cetera. So depending on these areas of the building, you can take, hey, you need a kitchen, This one is a kitchen. Take the area of the kitchen and multiplied by 1.5 kilo volta pair. Or it says 1.5 kilo volt pair for each kitchen. So we will say this estimated load will be 1.5 kilo volta pair. Hey, you have a microwave, at 1.5, hey, you have a freezer ad. So you can see load breakdown gives you more flexibility and gives you more options. It is harder, but it can give you more accurate results. Another one here y for the connected loots, except for air conditioning. For air conditioning on, you can estimate how much air conditioning power required in an area, depending on the application. If you have a bank hey, it says you need volta pair per meter square, 77.8, volta pair per meter square. If you have a hotel, use 66.7 volta pair per meter square, if it as an office use less and et cetera. The same one but in feet square. This one is in meter square, and this one is in feet square. On other tables here for central air conditioning. Here, this one is for conditioned area for split or window here. This one here is for central air conditioning, H vac system, large air conditioning systems that will provide heating, cooling for the whole building. So again, you can see here, four corridors, you will take this four banks. Depending on the area, each area, multiply it by the corresponding value from tables. More applications here the same table but in feet square. Here this one is four pumps, acquired for water pressure or providing power two higher floors. Here you can see depend on application. If you have an apartment, and we have ten apartments per floor, how many floors five or ten or 25 or 50. Depending on which one is suitable for your application, you will select the number, how many kilowatt required. If you have ten floors and ten apartment in each floor, you will need 15 kilowatt as a power requirement. Four pumps. Here are another one. You can see typical power requirement for electric, hot water or heating system. Here you have an apartment, 20 apartments, then you will need 30, 30 kilowatt, and et cetera. Another one for fire palms in feet square and in meter square. Here we have four commercial kitchens in a restaurant in a hospital, depending on the area of the dedicated for the kitchen inside the restaurant or a hospital, you will be able to estimate the loot. Why? Because this is very important? Because there are some restaurants that works with gas cooking, another one works for electric cooking. The difference between them will lead to difference in power. You can see gas is almost half of the power required in electric cooking cooking. Now, there's also low estimation based on IEC. Here are some tables. You can see average power required in each application with the equivalent simultaneity factor or diversity factor. Here, simultaneity is a more corrected term. Diversity will be one of this factor. You take the area, multiply by this value, and then multiply by the simultaneity factor. Simultaneity factor. You have more tables like this, for different applications, different areas, and here also for roadway, roads, highways, office work, offices, machines, machine shop, painting workshop, and et c. All of these tables will help you in the end in giving a good load estimation. Now, based on the NEC co or the national electrical code, here we have four lighting. You can find more inside the NEC. Here it says if you have a bank, then you will require how many volt empire per square for general lighting, for lighting only. So for banks, you will have 39 volt empire per square meter here in feet. So give you in meter square and in feet square and et cetera. Of course, you will find more tables. That is related to general power or sockets, and you'll find four other applications. So those are two methods that are used to load estimate the load estimation of the building or find the load estimation for a building. Another method is the exact method. What do we do in this one? We look at the previously created project that we have already done in our company. So of course, when you work in any company, it is not the first project that they do. They have done lots of projects before. So based on the previous projects, you can estimate how much power do this application required. So based on this project, we can estimate how much of volt be required in a hospital or a hotel or any other projects. This is a most accurate miss, of course, but you'll need large database of previous projects with their characteristics. Of course, that is one way. Another ways to go to the electricity company related to your area. Remember, for example, in our code or in my country code, we have volt and pair perimeter square four different areas. Let's say if you are in New York City, then take the number like this and if you are in Texas, do like this and even inside each state. Here I'm, I'm not talking about US, but I'm talking in general. According to the electricity company, related to your area. Okay, which serves your area. Go and ask them for load estimation. Number for the building you are like the one you are constructing. They already have data base for previous project. That is another way you can do. So these are the different methods you can use in load estimation. You can use overall method. Provide lower accuracy, but it can be used. Then since it is already provided by the code you are working with. So you have to use it. In my opinion, you have to use it. You can also if you are following the NEC, use the NEC cod, if you are our standard, if you are following IEC, follow and use the values given by IEC, and et cetera. So all of these can be used in estimating the load in your area. Okay? Now, in the end by estimating the load you will understand if you need a if you need to take electricity in the low voltage form, or do you need the electricity in the medium voltage, like having a transformer in your building? And if you have a transformer or you need a transformer, then you need to ask the Arctic to reserve a room for you for that transformer. Remember, this is just an estimation. In the end after finishing the project, we have to get numbers closer to what you have estimated for the building. Okay? 9. Load Estimation Using an Excel Sheet: Hi, everyone. In this lesson, we will top out the loud estimation Excel sheet. How can you do the lou estimation process using an Excel sheet? Now, this Excel sheet, I'm going to provide it for you so that you can use it or modify it based on your own code, or on electrical code or the standard you are following. So here for example, I'm going to use the Saudi Arabia code in order to give you an example in how can you use a loot estimation Eel sheet in order to estimate the loot inside the building, okay? So we have these parts that we have seen in the brevis lesson inside our code for Sediba, right. Now, for example, let's say we would like to design or not design. We'd like to estimate the loud inside residential building. So we would like to build a residential budding. So we have could see one normal residential dwelling. Now, this is our building. We'll have an air conditioning system separately in each apartment, or we will have an e vac system. Actually, in a residential building, we will have a separate split air conditioning system, and we will assume that we don't have any district cooling. So we have apartments with their own lighting, with their own power sockets, and with their own air conditioning. What I'm going to do that I'm going to use C one, which contains lights, air conditioning, and power sockets. The first thing we have, lighting loots, power sockets, and air conditioning. What is a value 145 volte pair for each meter square? I'm going to hear first one, we have several loots here. Let's say the first one, 145 volte p meter square. That is a value from the ot and what is our building? Our building how large is our building? Let's say we have for example, like this, 500 meter square, 500 meter square building with, let's say six floors. So 500 meters square and six floors, like this. So the total built up area of this building will be 3,000 right, 500 meters square, Mt blood boy, how many floors? So it will be here, 3,000 like this. 3,000 Great. That is the first step, which is the loading of our building. Number two, do we have a demand factor, since we are looking for if we would like to need or if we need a transformer or not. We need to apply demand factor or diversity factor depending on the cod. Here we have dF equal to, four C one, we have 0.6 demand factor. We will use this as 0.6, I'm going to do here. It means that 60% of the building will take electric power. Maximum demand of the whole building. Great. So what does this excel sheet will do? It will take this number, built up area, multiplied by volt and per perimeter square, multiplied by demand factor. So I will give you as you can see here. I'll give you 261 kilo vault and pair. That's the first part. Now, the second part is that let's look at our building. Does our building have gardens around it? Does it have a garage around it? That is the first thing. Let's look at here. For our building, let's say we have let's say how much, 100 meters square barks and gardens. 100 meters square. I would say 100 meters square, that is a second one, four gardens, like this, and what is the volta empire perimeter square, four volt empire permit square four parks and goats. Let's say here, four volt empire perimeter square like this. Great. What is the demand factor? If we go here four C 16, go down here, 0.8. I'm going to put it here as 0.8. Okay. Now if you have a garage, you can add it here, you can add more columns to this table and you modify it as you would like in order to do the load estimation, okay? Great. That is the first part, lighting, power sockets, and air conditioning. Now we have additional louts. Like light current system, does our building have a light current system, yes or no, number one. Number two, does our system have water pumps? Does it have fire alarm, does it have elevators, and et cetera. So for example, you can add any additional loads in here in this columns and add each loot type, then the demand factor, and then a vault and pair of the loot, and you will get the estimated loot by getting the multiplication of these two numbers. So let's say in our building here, we have elevators. These elevators, how many elevators I have two elevators. I'm going to here. I say two elevators. Now, what is the loot of the elevator? Of course? This will be determined by the architect, number of elevators and their type. Then we will be able to know the amount of power that is required by these elevators. Okay. Now, as an estimation, we can say elevators can be 15-25 kilowatt. So I can assume 20 kilowatt for the elevator. An average value, of course, this will be given by the architect according to the elevators selected by him. So I'm going to say two elevators multiplied by 20 kilowatt. It will give us 40 kilowatt. Now, of course, I will need to divide by power factor to convert the kilowatt into kilo volt empire. Remember we are dealing with volt empire. Divide this by 0.9, you will get 44.4. Let's go up here. 44, as you can see, I already added it here, 44 for four, which is 44 kilo volt. K volt empire. Now, what the demand factor, these two elevators in a building will be, of course, will be at any instant, they can be operating at the same time. So their demand factor will be one. So one to blood by this gives estimated load of 44 kilo volta. Great. What about palms? Palms here will be determined also by the mechanical engineer. It's something related to his field. So he will give me the estimation four palms. If the building has water palms, fire palms, it will be estimated like this five kilo volta. Beer and 15 kilovolt. That is just an estimation. In reality, we get them from the mechanical engineer. So I will go here and say how many and, of course, water palms How many water pumps we have. So let's say the mechanical engineer said that we will have three water pumps. We will have how many water pumps, three water pumps. Let's go like this. Three water pumps and and water pump, five ko volt, then it will be 15 ko volt, okay? So I can say 15 kilo volt likes. Okay. However, however, the demand factor of these pumps. Now, from what I learned from the mechanical engineer that is working on the residential project, he told me that hey, the water palms, three of them or two out of three will be working. So it means that there are two main water palms, and the third one is spare. So the third one doesn't at any instant, only two water pumps will be operating, not all of these three. So what I'm going to do in that I will say demand, the factor will be 1/3, right on, not 1/3, 2/3, because two of the pumps out of three will be operating 0.66 like this. We have the demand factor for our loud. It will be 0.66, which is 2/3 because two of the water pumps will be breathing out of the three. Great. Now, what about it, the fire pump. F four, fire pump, you can see here 2/3, blood by this, gives us this value. Let's see. Here this one will be equal to sum like this. This one and like this and this one. So it added to sorry multiplication. So we can say product, product, like this. Of these two and enter. It multiplied these two valleys together, 999. Now, what about fire palms? Fire palms? Let's see. Fire palms, 15 kilo volte Ba. Let's say we have two of them, so it will be 30 kilo voltee Bair. Multiplied by demand factor, they will be walking together. So it will be 30,000. It will be equal to product or we can do another thing, which is take this and put it like this. If you'll double click, it multiply automatically. Great. Okay. Now you can see here, elevators, water palms, fire palms, and et cetera. Great. Now, look at here, we have our building, lighting power and sockets for building, for parks and garden or gardens. Then for the zo loots, if you have zo loots, you can add them here. And in the end, this one added these loads together, and the total estimated load for the building, this value, summation of these two plus this number, divided by 1,000 to convert into kel volteer. You can see here, double click, this plus this plus this, divided by 1,000. Okay. Now, as you can see, total estimated load for the building th 145 less than 400 kilo volt. It means that we are we are not going to need a transformer. You can see that if we need a transformer for oi transformer, it will be like this. Divided by 80% loading of that transformer. It means that our transformer will be for 132, which is the nearst value of 500 kilo volt ember. However, since 350 less an 400 kilo volt, then we don't need a transformer. Again, this information can change from one cod to another. This is very important. So, let's say, for example, to make it clear for you, let's say, if the building area increase to 4,000 for any reason like this. So we have 432 right, which is greater than 400 ko volt ampere. So it means we need a transformer, right? So if I'm going to use an oil transformer, it will be 432.754. The oil transformer is loaded by 80%. So I will divide by 0.8 to oversize my transformer to be loaded only by 80%. So the nerest value, 540 volt. Now you need a higher one. You can see 500 kilovolt, 800, one mega, 1.25, and, et cetera. So you can see, I cannot choose 500. I will have to choose the closest next 800 kilovolt and bear despite being very far from 540. However, I don't have any choice. I can't undersize that transformer. I have to oversize it. However, if you use andro transformer, it can be 432.74 54. The droi transformer can be looted by between 90% to 100% depending on the manufacturer. So if you assume that the dry transformer can be looted by 95%, then we can get that 500 kel volt empire, and it will be much better than the 800 kilo volt empire oil transformer. Okay. That is how you can do loud estimation using an excel sheet. You can, of course, modify this Excel sheet, depending on the code you are following and depending on the loads you have in your own project. I hope this lesson was clear for you and you understand, how can you do loud estimation using Excel sheet? 10. Transformer Room Dimension Sizing: Hey, everyone, in this lesson, we are going to discuss, how can you size transformer room, or how can you identify or sepify the dimensions of a transformer room? In the previous lesson, we discussed the loot estimation and we were able to get the estimated loot for a building as an example, bank anything. Using the NEC code or the national electrical code. Now, the next step after knowing the transformer, we would like to know the dimension of the room used. First, we have to understand that we have a transformer here. This transformer, which we are going to install in a building. And we have this room. This room which our transformer will be in, in case of a medium voltage transformer or our loading greater than 400 kilo volt and bear. We would like to find the dimension of this transformer length and width, and the dimension of this room, length of the room and width of the room. Also we will know the dimension of the door itself, the widths of this door. How can we do this? The first step is that we need to know the dimensions of the transformer from the catalog itself, the catalog for transformers. There are many catalogs for transformers. According to your own country, you will find different catalogs. As an example, I'm going to use the ABB transformers catalog in order to get a transformer, which will help us in this process. Now, you have to understand that the minimum width of the door, this minimum width should be at least equal to the widths of this transformer. So that we can let the transformer enter the room. When this transformer goes inside the room like this, when we take the transformer and carry it into the room so that the widths of this door should be at least equal to the width of this transformer, so that the transformer can go into the room. But usually we will increase the widths of the door greater than the widths of the transformer. Let's start. First, we have to understand something which is really important. We have to understand the working spaces. This table is from the NEC code or the national electrical code. This representing the minimum working space between equipment. As an example, as you can see here, we have an electrical equipment, which can be panel, can be transformer, can be anything. There should be a minimum distance between the electrical equipment and For example, no life or grounded parts. Here, we don't have life or a grounded grounded parts. There will be a minimum distance between them. They cannot be close to each other. There will be a distance between them. In this case, this is known as condition one. Condition one inside the NEC cod or the national electrical cod. The minimum distance here, Condition one is a distance between our electrical equipment such as panel transformer anything, and here with something which is not live, and it is not grounded. No live and not grounded. In condition two, we have electrical equipment such as transformer panel, and we have a distance between them and the grounded part. The grounded part here can be, for example, a wall or a grounded panel as an example. Here we have an electrical equipment opposite to another electrical equipment, transformer and another transformer. There will be a minimum distance between them known as condition number three. As you can see, we have, according to what we have here as an example, insulated material, which is no life or grounded part. Second condition grounded parts, Third condition two electrical equipment or two live exposed parts. Exposed part and another exposed live part. The distance between them depends on what depends on the voltage. Let's go to the cod as an example here. The nominal voltage to ground, if the phase voltage or the voltage between phase and ground is 0-150 volt. What will happen in this case? In case of condition one, condition one, in this case, no or grounded parts and the electrical equipment. The distance between them will be three feet or 900 millimeter. In condition two, in case we have an electrical equipment and grounded part. In this case, we will have a distance of three feet in case of this range, and In condition of two electrical equipment, then it will be three feet also. However, you will find that in higher voltages, as we go high 151-600, or 601-1 thousand, you'll find that the values starting becoming different. As you can see here, three feet, four feet, and five feet. As you can see here, condition one, which is same as here and here. Live parts one side as a transformer, and insulated or ungrounded parts on the other side. Condition two, life parts one side, grounded part on the other side. Condition three, life parts on both sides of the work space. Transformers two transformers, for example. Now let's get back and understand how this will help us. Now, the door itself is insulated or not grounded, insulated or not grounded. In this case, we are going to use condition one here. Let's clear all of this like this. The distance between the transformer and the door itself, is condition one. S one or condition number one, because it is a distance between life part, which is a transformer and insulated or ungrounded part, which is the door. But the distance between transformer and the wall of the room here, or here. Or here. All of the other, three distances, the three clearances. This is C two, y B is between transformer and wall or between a transformer and grounded part. In this case, if we have one transformer in a room, then we are looking for two important points or two clearance inside the catalog or the code. The first one is condition one and condition two. Condition one and condition two. Because it's a distance between insulated material such as a door, and second one is between grounded parts such as the wall. That's the first point. Now, if we go to the catalog for medium distribution transformer, oil type medium voltage transformers. You'll find this in the attached files in this video or class. You'll find here that kilo volt and beer, which you have selected in the previous lesson of flue estimation, and you'll find here different properties or specs of the transformer itself. As an example, the one which we are going to use, we would like 1 mega volt and bear, as an example, 1 mega volt and bear. As you can see, there are many mega volt and bear. There is a 35 kilovolt, 21 kilovolt, 15.7 kilo volt, ten kilovolt. For example, according to the code in your own country, for example, in my case, I will choose that 21 kilovolt. As an example. This will step down the voltage 21-400 volt. And you can find here vector group, bedens, no losses, load losses, all the specs of the transformer itself here. Now, what is important for us is that in our project, for example, we have a 20 1 kilo volt, 20 1 kilo volt, this one. Now, what are we looking for? Let's see row itself, all of this like this, like this, this one. This one. As you can see, what we are looking for is as you can see length width and height of transformer. Let's say lengths of transformer. Lengths go down here. You'll find that the lengths crores bonding to the 21 kilovolt and 1 mega volt and Bair. You'll find it is 1170 millimeter or 1.97 meter, and the width of the transformer is 980 millimeter or 0.98 meter. If we go to the second page, transformer room s. Let's say we choose a medium voltage of 1 mega volt and beer, and the voltage is 20 1 kilo volt. Kilo volt and not kilo volt and beer. It is here kilo volt because it is a voltage and not power. The transformer is 1 mega volt and beer and 20 1 kilo volt. Now, from the previous catalog here, you will find we chose 1.97 and on a 180. It will be n, this transformer, has length of 1.97 and the widths of 0.98. Let's type the spec here. The transformer here has a length. This length is 1.97. The length of the transformer. And the widths of the transformer, widths of the transformer, this widths is 0.98 meet. Meter meet. We now know the length and width of the transformer. Now, what we would like to know is the clearance here between the transformer and wall and clearance between transformer and the door. This depends on the clearance from the NEC code. Condition one and condition two. If we get back here, you'll find that this is a complete table for the different voltages. Condition one, condition two, condition three, or A, B, C, sometimes condition A, condition B, condition C. You will find that if the voltage to ground, V phase or voltage to ground is this range of values. As you can see, you will find a corresponding minimum distance in condition one or between no or grounded part or ungrounded part, or no grounded, whatever, and here between live and grounded part and here between electrical equipment and another one. Condition one, we need condition one and condition two. What is the voltage which we are working with? Which we are working with 20 1 kilo volt on the high voltage side. This is the highest voltage. Not the low voltage, but the highest voltage, which is the high voltage size, 20, 20 1 kilo volt. Now, is the 20 1 kilo volt phase or line to line. It is the phase and line to line. Y, because as you can see here, Delta y, dy, Delta y. It means that the primary or the high volt site is 20 1 kilo volt, which is Delta connection. Since it is Delta connection, it means that the phase is the same as line to line voltage. Anyway, we are going to use that 20 1 kilo volt or 21,000 volt. What range we are going to use? We are going to use this range, this one, like this. This range, which is from nine kilovolt to 25 kilovolt. Since 21 is between them. In condition one, we need five feet and in condition two, condition one is between transformer and door. Condition two is between transformer and wall. We are going to use the six feet. Just to remember this, you will find that the feet 1 ft or 1 ft, whatever is equal to 20.3 048. Meter. You can convert five feet into meter by multiplying this by this value. Now, you can five multiplied by this value and six multiplied by this value. If we get back here, you'll find that from the table at the range of nine to 25, you will find that condition one, five feet is approximately equal to 1.524 meter, and the condition two, six feet equal to 1.8 88 meter. We have here condition one and condition two, Condition one is the distance here. This distance between transformer, transformer and door is condition one, which is 1.524 meter. Condition two, which is between the transformer and wall here. 1.83 or 288, whatever. Between here is also 1.883. Here also is also 1.83 because it is a distance between transformer or live part and the grounded part, which is the wall. Now, what is the next step? Now, from the dimensions, as you can see here, we can get the dimension of the room. As an example, the widths of the room, widths of the room is 1.83 plus 0.98 plus 1.97, and the widths of the room is 1.83 plus 1.97 plus 1.524. This is the length and the width is 1.83 plus 0.98 plus 1.83. As you can see, length is here 1.83, 1.83, length is here, this one, the vertical one, 1.83, 1.83 plus 1.97 of the transformer, 1.97 of transformer, plus distance between transformer and door, 1.524 or the condition one. We will have lengths of 5.32 28 meter. For the widths, we have 1.83, 1.83 and 0.98, 0.98, 1.83, 1.83, which is 4.63 76 meter. This is the length of the room and the widths of the room. Now, the dimension of the room is 5.32 28, multiplied by this 4.63 76. This is the minimum dimensions of the transformer room, and you have to remember something which is really important. That the length is not less than 5.32 28, and with not less than this value. It can be higher but not lower. It can be an instead of 5.3, it can be 5.56 meter seven meter, whatever it is. This is the minimum dimensions. For the widths, 4.6, it can be five, it can be six, it can be whatever, but not less than 4.6. Now, what about the, the door, you can see that the width of the transformer, 0.98. We can say that the door is minimum of 0.98, or you can make it larger, such as 1 meter or 1.2 meters, not less than 0.98. This is how can you select that transformer room or how to size a transformer room. But before we end this lesson, you have to remember something, which is really also important. If you have two transformers in the room, a transformer, Another transformer. To transformers means live parts. The distance here between the two transformers will be condition number three, and the room, this is the rest of the room, for example, It will be here C two or condition number two, condition number two, and so on everything as it is condition two, condition two, But between the two transformers, two live parties is condition three. We will have here two doors, then the distance between each transformer and the door is C one, same as C one here, same as what we just discussed. The difference is that between the distance between two transformers or a transformer and banner transformer and motor, whatever, Distance between them should not be less than C three or the condition three from the national electrical code. I hope this lesson was Helbe fol for you. 11. Generator Room Dimension Sizing: Hey, everyone in this lesson, we are going to discuss how can you size the room of the generator. Standby generator or emergency generator. We discussed in the previous lessons, the low estimation for a project, and we have also done the transformer room sizing. Now we would like to discuss how can you do the generator room sizing? We would like to find the lengths and widths of the room of which our generator will exist if we have a generator in the building. At the same time, we would like to find the lengths of the door. Let's see what is the specs or how can we do this? First, you have to know that the sizing of the generator room depends on the manufacturer specks. It depends on the manufacturer itself or the catalogue of the manufacturer itself. As an example, this is a catalog from one of them manufacturers. You'll find the link, this link. It will lead you to the website where you can download all of the catalogs catalog of this generate. This one and catalog or the specs of each generate. As you can see for different mini mini types of generator, you will find here the generator lens generators generator height, and you will find that the door size here with the height, and you'll find the generator room type. ABC. Now, how can we understand this? Let's say you would like to have a generator of 1 mega volt ember. 1 mega volt ember. I have to understand that in the model itself, there are two numbers. First number and second number. The first number here, for example, represents the kelwat. Second number representing the kilovolt and bear. This representing the rated votage of the generator, and this one representing the rated kilovolt and bear of the generator. If we need 1 mega volt and bear, then we need 1,000 kilovolt and bear, so we will choose this one. If we need, for example, 500 kilovolt and bear, then we are going to select this one. This one is 500 kilovolt and bear or 400 kilowatt. Now, as an example, if we selected, for example, the 1,000 here, this one, we need 1,000 kel vault ember or one mega vault ember. You'll find here the dimensions of the generator itself and door size, and you'll find here the generator room type. You'll find we have ABC. Let's say we selected this 1,000. You will find that it is generator room C, which means in this part, in this part, you will find here type ABC, C, which is this one. Representing the generator room size. For Se, the length will be 5,700 millimeter, and for the width will be 3,750. As you can see, if we selected the 1,000 kilo voltam beer or one mega voltam beer, then we'll choose type C, which means the room size will be number C, which is length of 5.7 meter, and 3.75 meter. Very easy. That is all what you have to do. Really easy and direct. Another example, how we can select this a generator. You'll find we select it according to the manufacturer catalog, and you'll find each a generator, as you can see here, and the corresponding room dimension, if it is A B C. Now we have to know that in practical, usually the load of the emergency will be 25% of the total loot. But for safety, and extra loot, we assume 50% of the loot. 50% of the loot. If we have a project of 1 mega volt and bear loot, which we have taken or reduced from the loot estimation, then we will assume 50% of the loot in which our emergency generator will supply, which is 500 kilovolt and bear or 0.5 mega From this table, 400 to 400 kilowatt or 500 kilo volt beer, 500 kilo volt ember is that we would like to have. As you can see, this one is type B, the dimension will be 4.7 and 3.25. As you can see, we selected from generator C 400 500. This generator, stripe B so the dimension will be 4.7 multiplied by 3.25 lengths and widths. Very easy. Now, if we go to the generator, as you can see, this one is a standby generator. As you can see here 400, you can see here two outputs in this generator. One which is a stand by output, the other one which is a prime output. If you don't understand what's the difference, you can go to the sizing of the generator and understand the types of the generator, prime generator, standby emergency, and all of this. In this model, what is the difference? The difference is that you will find here the stand Pi model and prime model. The difference between them is that the standby output. It will produce this one produce 440 kilowatt or 550 kilo voltem beer. For the prime output, it gives us 400 kilowatt or 500 kilo voltame beer, which we need. Now, what is the difference between prime and standby? What is the difference between them? You will find that the prime power is available for unlimited number of annual operating hours. What does this mean? It means that this one primary or prime output, 400500 can provide electrical power or full loot, 100% for unlimited hours. However, for the standby, there is a 10% of loot capability available for a period of 1 hour within 12 hour period of operation. As you can see here, the prime one, the prime here, which is this one for 100500 kilovolt time where this can provide this amount of power for unlimited time. Unlimited operating hours. However, this one, the standby mode of this generator will have will allow 10% overload for a period of 1 hour within a 12 hour period of operation. This one, as you can see here, the difference between them is 410% of the 400 is 40, 40 plus 400 is 440, the 10% overload, 500, 10% of 500 is 50, 50 plus 500 is 550. This mode This one provides 500 kilovolta and be for unlimited hours. 550 kilo volta and bear for a period of 1 hour within 12 hour period of operation. Okay? This is a difference here. As you can see, 400 500 means the rated 500400, which we are looking for. 500 kilowat bear is the one which we are looking for. This number representing the 500 kilovot and be and this one representing the kilt. You'll find here more specs of this generator. We understand now that we select the room according to the generator type from the catalog of the generate. 12. Starting Autocad and Changing Background: Hi and welcome everyone to this part in our course for electrical engineers for learning about AutoCad program. So in this section of our course, we will learn the basics of Autocad in order to draw our electrical system or in order to do the wiring, adding electrical components, et cetera. So the AutoCAD program is used by electrical engineers, used by mechanical engineers, civil engineers, and of course, architects. So let's start by the first step, which is opening our AutoCAD program. So when you install the AutoCAD program, it can be 2016, 2017, 2013, whatever the version, you are using all of these versions are almost exactly similar to each other. So in this course, we can start with 2013 and any version above this. If you have 2013, it is okay, and it will work just fine. Okay? So the first step, we will open our Autocad program like this. Here on this course, I'm using autocad 2021. Okay, so we will wait for it. Okay, so this is our interface for the program. And the first step is that we would like to start drawing. So we'd like to open a plank file, start drawing like this, and we will have this interface for our Autocad program. So let's start step by step by learning what are these tools and how can we use them in electrical design. So the first thing that we have in electrical or in autocat is this menu. You see this a simple, this one. This is called the application menu. So you'll click on it and you'll find it different options. So if you'd like to open a new file, a new electrical or a new drawing for ourself, we can say new then drawing to open a plank file, here, open for opening an existing file. Here, save and save to save our autocatsle. For example, if you have this drawing and you click on Save As like this and go to desktop like this, we can save our drawing, and you will see here the type of file. So for example, I'm using 2021, right? So if I know someone that uses that uses 2013, how can I export the file for him? If you go down here, you can see autocat 2018, Virgin, or Autocat 2013, 2020, et cetera. So I would like it in DWG. DWG is the drawing that we use in all of our files. So we would like to save it as DWG to 2013 for him. I'll select this option and the name of the drawing, I'll save it on desktop. Then save like this. So if I go down here, you can see this is a drawing for Autocad program, DWG, this is extension that we use in our drawings, and this one is suitable for 2013. So if someone has 2013, it will work on their PC completely, okay? Now, you will find that all of the files inside the course are all 2013. Okay, so it can be suitable for any of you that are using older versions. Okay, so that is so this is the application menu and you'll find here publish them to an email, print, et cetera. We will learn about more commands when we go more deeply inside the autocat section. So that's the first one. This is also called the Quick Access menu. You can see here, save open a new drawing exactly the same option that we had here. Okay, now this part is called we have different menus home insert a parametric view, manage, output, and et cetera, different menus. Forget about them for now. We will get to each of them when we need them during the section or when we learn about the spot. Now, this menu is called the Quick Access part. This is called Quick Access pore. This is used to give us some commands quickly for our program. For example, if you'd like to draw a line, you can simply click on like this and go anywhere and draw it like this. Keep clicking like this. Click, click for each one. Okay? Okay, so this is called the first, this one is a quick access por. This is one of the options to draw, for example, a line we will learn about it or how to draw a line and the other options in the next two lessons, okay? Then we have another part called the command part, this one. If you go up like this, like this, you will see all of the options that we have done, save. Then you can see here we had erase, we deleted the lines, and then before it, we had a line. You can see a line, then next point, next point, et cetera, all what we have done. So let's put this for now down here. This is important as when we do anything, for example, line, you can see here. Selected the command line, it says, SbfyFPoint. I would like to select the first point in our program like this. Then it says, Hey, subs fy next point. So I will go like this, select this. Then says next point like this, and then you have undo to reverse what you have done or close. Okay? So we will get to this when we go to line drawing. For now, click on escape to get out of all of this. Then we have this par which we call the status par. This one has some options that will be helpful for us, and we have the spar which is called the layout. The model which we are working on and we add all of our wiring. We have other types of layout, as you can see here. Leave them for now, we will learn about them when we need them. Okay? This video is just for an introduction on AutoGtH it looks like. Okay. Then we have this, this is called for elevation. Then these are some of the mouse commands. Okay? Now, as you can see here also, we have drawing one. You can add another drawing by clicking here. It will open another drawing. Then we can open another one like this and et cetera. So what is the benefit of this is that we can do click like this to open a new drawing, or you can say, click on new like this or open an existing drawing. So what is the benefit of something like this? Let's say you have our electrical drawing and we have another drawing for mechanical system, another drawing for civil engineer. So we have to look at them in order to install our luminars in the right location. For example, if we have some luminars let's draw our rectangle, rectangle like this, rectangle, and we wrote like this. Okay. Now, in this drawing, let's say we have our civil engineer draw another rectangle like this, like this. Okay. So this is a room, for example, and this one is a part of the construction of the room. So it means that if I would like to install my own luminars, I can't install anyone here. I have to move it to the right and left away from this construction part. So I wouldn't know this if I didn't see this part from the civil engineer. So I will go to my own drawing and model one, and here I will put my own luminars in another location. I can just so we can, for example, copy this one from here and go to here and at pate here. We will learn about this in the next lessons. Okay? So this will help us in drawing or adding our luminars in the correct position or editing our drawing. Let's say if I would like to change the options or the display or the background. What I'm going to do simply will click on right click. Then click on options like this. Then I'm going to display like this and go to colors colors. Then if I would like to change this background, we usually use the black background. For example, if I would like to use the white background, I will just click here and choose any color I would like or white like this, then a lined clothes. You can see our background change it into white. Then I will go back. We usually use the black one because it's clear and helps us, okay? In older versions of AutoCad, we can also go to options by right click and options in all of the versions. In older versions, we can find it here in Autocad. Then you can find here options down here or here like this. It was exactly here. You can click here and you will go to the same menu. Okay. So this is well just an introduction to AutoCad program. 13. Mouse Commands and Selection Methods: Hey, everyone. In this lesson, we will to cap out with the mouse commands in Autocad. So we would like to learn how to use our mouse and its benefits in Autocad program, and how to select different ways to select elements inside AutoCad, okay? So the first step, as you can see, I had this large drawing. Okay? So if I would like to zoom in like this and zoom out like this, you see inside the mouse, we have the roll, right? The role that is used to zoom in and zoom out. Using this role inside the mouse itself, we will be able to zoom in and out. That's the first thing. Second thing here is that we can also use the role of the mouse in order to move through and through a drawing. Okay? So how can we move through a drawing? Simply click on the roll and keep clicking and drag. I click like this, Long click like this, you'll see this hand tool. By moving like this, my own mouse, I will be able to move through the image. So I can go like this, go like this, like this. You can see. I click for a long time until the hand appears, then I drag using the mouse drag like this. Okay. That is the second thing that we can do. So we have zoom in and out and we have the drag tool. The things that we have, let's say, you can see in this figure, we have a line circle, rectangle. We have a group of rectangles here and on a rectangle. Let's say I zoomed out like this, crazy like this and went way, way far like this. Okay? So if I want to go to the circle, where the circle did I draw? I don't know where are the rectangles. I don't know. So what I'm going to do, how can I get back to the drawing the circles, lines and rectangles? How can I get back to them? In order to do this, all you have to do is double click on roll. So if you double click on the roll, you remember this drag. Now, double click like this. You can see everything back. You can see the screen now contains all of the elements that we have drawing like this. Okay. Now, another way like this. Now, we learn it roll in order to zoom in and out, drag, and in order to get back or extend or get back to our original drawing. The same three functions, we can do them using the tools. You can see ban or hand tool like this. You can like this very easy, right? If you'd like to return back to mouse, simply click on escape on the keyboard like this. So we have our tool again. Another way that you can zoom extends. What is the benefit of this? It is used to get back to this. Remember the double click on the roll to get back to all of the drawing. The same idea. Click one click here. Hey, everything is back in one screen like this. Okay. Great. And another way you can click on this one. You can see Zoom extends. You can zoom in and out like this. Click and click Okay, so you can zoom and zoom in and out using this instead of the role inside the mouse. Okay, great. Now, that is the first part of this lesson on what are the different usages of the mouse? And we have seen that I can use these tools in order to do the same functions. Great. Now, second thing that we would like to learn is the selection. So how can I select components? The first and very basic method is to click on any shape, you can see, it starts to becoming more light or giving more light you can see. Okay, so click on it. You have selected this rectangle. You can click on this one, select it to click like this, you selected it. Okay? Now, click on Skip to cancel the selection. Like this. Great. Now, what else? There are two ways to select using the mouse. How can I select Select using like this? Click One click like this and drag like this. Okay, and click like this. You have selected the figures. Another way, you can click like this and you will have it like this. Okay, so someone will ask me what's the difference between the green rectangle and blue rectangle. So if I click and go from right to left like this, you have green rectangle. If you go from left to right, you will have blue rectangle. So what's the difference? Okay. The difference is that if you use the green one, just by touching a small part of rectangle or any figure, just by touching it like this and click, you have selected the figure. However, if you choose the blue one like this, click and like this, you can see it is not giving any light so if I click like this, nothing happened. Why? Because in the blue rectangle, you have to select the whole figure like this. You can see when I selected the whole figure, you can see it gives light. It means I can select it. I like this. However, if I just go part of it, it will not be selected. If it is a whole figure, it will be selected. Okay? So you can see if I do it like this, you can see it will select what it will say to only the line because this blue rectangle covers it all like this. However, if I use this one, the green one like this, you will be able to select it even if you just touch it. Okay? That's the difference between this method and this method. Now, how can I use something like this. If you go here, you can see the figures group of rectangles. If I would like to select just these lines, you can just click on them like this or you can simply go like this and cover them like this. You can see they are the only two that gives the light. So they have been selected. If I would like to delete them, click on Delete on the keyboard like this. You have deleted or erased the figures. I can select like this and delete. You can select a figure like this. And delete. Okay? Great. So we can delete all of this. Nice. So that is how you can use the mouse and how can you use it to in order to select different figures. In the next lessons, we will start talking about drawing the drawings commands. We will too at the modification commands, and we will also took apet the measurement and dimensions, commands, general commands and layers commands. You can see these are drawing commands. Here we have dimension for measurement. We have layers. The part very important in drawing of the figures. We have general like adding to the figure. We have some modification like trimming the figure or hatching it, et cetera. So we will learn about this in the next lessons. 14. Drawing a Line: Hey, everyone. In this lesson, we will first learn how to draw a line with different options. So let's lead all of these drawings first because we don't need them at all. And let's start. So first step, how to draw a line. The first one is use these short cuts, which we call the pon here or these short cuts can help us in doing several commands easily without using other method. So for example, if I would like to draw a line, just click it on here like this, and it says, SetifyF point, select the first point. Okay? So you can see here that you see these axis, X and Y. If we go here and draw the line here, you can see almost zero right like this here, zero, right? Zero point at this. When you increase to the right, X x is increase, length of X increases. If you go up, length of Y increase. And this is similar to the axes that we have in the coordinates drawing, okay? For now, it doesn't really we don't really care about it. What we have to do is that if we would like to draw a line, just click on here, first point, then I would like to subspy second point. Then I click like this, then we draw a line. You can see it still gives you more options to draw more lines. However, if I would like to stop like this and I don't need any more of this I will simply click on space, click on space par on the keyboard or click on Escape on the keyboard. Both of them will lead to the same solution. They will end this command. Okay, so let's delete this, simply click and select this and delete, like this. Okay, now, that's the first way to draw a line. Let's see another one. We can do it by typing in the keyboard. So I will go to any location like this without clicking anything at all, I will have to just say or type line L you can see L gives you what option you have Line, and there are many other commands here. So I will click on line like this. So to say again Spy first point like this, second point, third, fourth, et cetera. Now, let's say I would like to undo what I have done. How can I undo this last line? I will click Control Z. That's the first one. Control plus Z on the keyboard. Control Z. Or you can simply go down here. You can see undo. Okay, undo click Lx s. It will undo the last action. Undo, undo last action. And you can also see here, you can see that it says undo starts with, U here. So I can say U on the keyboard and Enter like this. So it will undo my last action, and enter undo my last action. So there are many options, okay? Now, we have this shape, right? Line, another line. And if I would like to close this shape, what I can do is simply click on this close. It will close my own shape like this. Okay. So we learned that we can add a line using the pon, this one, Quick Access menu or apo not quick access, but pon port, this one. Okay? And we learn that we can write it on the keyboard, and let's learn more about it. Let's say I would like to draw a line. Like this. We usually as a source cut, we say enter, like this. L enter, L plus enter. Great. Now, we collect like this. I would like to draw a line. Let's say I would like how long or the length of this line. Let's say 10 meters. Like this, 10 meters. Like this, and then enter, draw a line with 10 meters like this. Of course, 10 meters or 10 millimeters depends on the dimensions specified inside the program. We will learn about this later, of course. But for now, you can see, let's say this is a ten meter line. Great. Now, let's say I would like a ten meter line with an angle with an angle 15 degrees. Ten meter line. I will first enter like this. So we have our line. You can see when I change, you can see angle changes. You can see 51 degrees 49, 19 degrees, eight degrees. And at the same time, you can change length and the angle, right. So let's say I would like 10 meters. So I will say 10 meters like this and click on tap on the keyboard to log on the dimension specified. So I will click on tab on the keyboard. You can see now 10 meters is logged right now. So I can do it easily the angle I need, okay? Let's say I would like an angle of 15 degrees. I would say 15 and then enter like this. So we draw a line with an angle, ten meter line, with an angle skip ten meter line, with an angle with respect to the horizontal line of 15 degrees. Okay? So let's lead this. Another thing that we would like to learn in this lesson is the orzogalO say, ortho orthogonal. So what does orthogonal mean exactly is that we would like to draw with 90 degrees. So let's say I have a line like this, L again. Like this. And I would like to draw rectangle. In order to draw rectangle, we need 90 degrees. I need zero, then vertical 90 degrees, then zero degrees to clothe this. So it is really hard to do this like this go like this, zero degrees and then go like this 90 degrees like this and then go back like this. Really difficult, right. So there is another way to do this that you can see here an option. If we go down here, here exactly, you see this option called Or through mode or by clicking FeightFeight on the keyboard or Ortho mode. If I click on Orth mode like this, what will happen is that? You can see or on or on. What does this mean? It means we are drawing with 90 degrees. So if I click line like this, you can see line can see what happens vertical and horizontal only, right? Okay, you can see it much easier like this. Mm hmm. Like this, like this. Okay? So you can see now we can draw vertical and horizontal lines easily with zero degrees 90, 180, 270, et cetera. If I would like to disable this, you can simply click on F eight on the keyboard. So now we have a free line, or you can simply if we have also like this, we can click here to remove it. Okay? So we learned in this lesson how to draw a line, also command, how to draw a line with a specific angle and lens, and some really useful tools in Autocad program. Okay? 15. Drawing a Rectangle: Hi, and welcome, everyone. In this lesson, we will learn how to draw a rectangle inside the Autocad program. So in order to draw our rectangle, we have two methods, number one, you can see here, rectangle like this, click like this and says, specify first corner like this, and then you can drag it like this and click. Now you have a rectangle. Great. That's the first method. Method number two is to type REC, R C. You can see and enter rectangle like this. Then again, give the first corner point and the second corner point like this. Great. Okay, now let's type again rectangle and see the other options. Let's click here like this and we have our rectangle. Now, let's say I would like to have a rectangle with a certain area or certain dimensions or with a certain rotation. So you can see here down here area, dimensions and rotation. So if I would like area, for example, what I'm going to do is simply type A and enter. So it's selected area. Okay? So it says Enter area of rectangle in current units. So let's say I would like a rectangle of 50 meter square like this. Now, remember that we have a rectangle. This rectangle has length and lengths and widths. So we need to find if you have the lens, it will automatically get the width. We have a 50 meter square rectangle. Let's say it's lens, for example, is um let's say ten, 10 meters and enter. So you can see we have our rectangle right here. So this rectangle is 50 meters square, with a length of 10 meters, and width will automatically be five. So if you would like to make sure of this, all you have to do is use the dimension like this, and we would like to go like this, select it like this. And you have the dimension of the leng. Similarly, you can go here and drag it like this. You have dimension of the width. You can see 10 meters multi blood by 5 meters, gives us 50 meter square rectangle. Okay? Now, skip to go out and then Control A to select every thing in this drawing, Control A, and then delete like this, okay? Now let's type rectangle once more and click like this. You'll find here the other option dimensions. If you'd like to put the lens and width. How can I do this? Dimensions like this. Specify length of rectangles or four rectangles. I will say that the lens, let's say, 5 meters square. Then it says specify the width of rectangles or four rectangles. Let's say the words is 7 meters. Then enter like this. Here you have your own rectangle. Seven meter. You can put it the corner. If you'd like to draw it like this or like this or like this in any location, let's say like this. So you'll have like this, seven meresns widths or lens, and here this one for the width, like lens and width 7 meters and 5 meters. Great. Okay, now let's say I would like to draw the rectangle like this. However, the first corner is like this. Okay? That's the first point which I must add to the brogra. Now, we would like to rotate this rectangle. So this rectangle here is with zero degrees, okay? So if I would like to rotate it like this, rotation like this, click here, and you can see you can rotate it as you'd like. So you can click anywhere to draw the rectangle or add the angle. Let's say specify angle of rotation, you can see zero angle. I would like, let's say, ten degrees and enter. Now our rectangle is inclined by ten degrees like this from the X axis or the horizontal. Like this, you can see Okay, so we draw our rectangle like this. And if you would like, you can see here, this rectangle is inclined from the horizontal by ten degrees. So if you draw another rectangle like this, you will see the program give the zo again the same angle of inclination. What I'm going to do is that I will go to rotation like this and make it zero degrees to return everything to the default value like this. So we have now a zero degree and ten degrees rectangle. Okay? So this is how to draw a rectangle inside the autocad program with different methods. 16. Drawing a Circle: Hey, everyone, in this lesson, we will learn how to draw a circle. How can I draw a circle? We have different ways. Number one, again, with the quick aces, not the quick axis with the pon par by clicking on circle like this and put the center for the circle. Center will be like this here, for example, and then you can extend like this. To draw your own circle and click left click on the mouse, you will get the circle. That's the first message. Great. Second message, type C, Enter. You can see C refers to circle and enter. We have our circle here. Again, we will click like this and we can draw. Now, after clicking on it, we can add the radius five radius of the circle. Let's say our circle is 10 meters in radius. Like this. We draw a circle with a ten meter radius. Now, let's say if I would like to draw another circle like this from the same point. Let's say here, for example, let's say, I would like to add the diameter diameter of the circle instead or diameter of the circuit instead of radius. So I'm going to go down here. You can see diameter of the circle, click on it and add the diameter of the circle. Let's say diameter is five, for example, so we draw a circle with a diameter of five meter. Okay? This one is with a radius of 10 meters. Okay. Great. Now, let's see more options. Circle like this, and you can see here it says, specify center for circle or. So the first meso is that I click on center and draw by adding radius or diameter or any way. Now, the second option is three P, which means three points and two points and ten, ten radius. So what the difference between these? Let's start with this one. Let's draw a line like this or let's draw a rectangle like this. Okay? And then what does circle like this? Let's say three point. What does three points mean? It means we will draw a circle that passes through three points that passes through three points. I would like a circle that boss through this point, this one, and this one, I would click three B like this. Then I would like it to pass from here and through this and through this. Now, actually, you can see it is very hard to get the corner, I have to zoom in like this in order to get the corner precisely, right? So instead of doing this, there is another way. The other way is to use something which we call the Object Snap tool or O Snap, which is done using F three on the keyboard or you can see this 10 Snap, you can see F three. So click on it like this. Look at the options. Now, if you have a line, it will give you the two end points. If you have these are helpful points that help you in electrical design and in drawing or using these commands, we will see how it will help us right now. So you can see geometric center. It has a click beside it. Now, I have to click on it like this in order to activate it. So we activated the Snap, you can see Snap Cruiser two D reference points is on Okay? So how it will help us, we have now that geometric center of any figure. So if you can see if you go like this, you can see it gives you the geometric figure or the center of the rectangle. You can also activate all of the snapping tools. For example, if you have a line like this, like this and skip. Let's say I would like the endpoint and endpoint and midpoint like this, I click on them. Like this. And if you go like this, let's use any command like this. You can see the end point, midpoint and the beginning point or the two end points of the line and the mid so you can click on it. So we have now the center of the line itself, like this. You can also use a line like this, and let's go here to the snapping tools. We can do another thing object snap settings and select all like this, okay, Okay, so you have now the center of the circle like this. You can see, as you can see here, it gives us the midpoint of this or the center of this graph. So it is sometimes happen due to the bugs inside the program itself. So if you have a circle like this, you can see if I would like line, you can see it doesn't show. If I go down here like this, it appears. Okay? So it happens due to the error inside the program itself. You can see gives us here doesn't show. Now we choose, okay? So it happens due to error in Sa Zap. However, the object snap, this one is very helpful in drawing several points. Now, okay, now let's lead this, delete all of this, and let's get back to our rectangle. So again, we forgot about circle, C enter. And I would like three points. I would like a circle that passes through this point and this point and this one. You have a circle that pass through this and this and this. That's what we call three points. Now, if you would like a circle that passes through two points, what I'm going to do is that I would draw a line L and enter like this. Like this and skip. And if I would like a circle, see enter that passes through these two points. I will say to P, which is two points like this and select first point and second point. So we have a circle that boss through two points. So the whole idea is two of these two, three points and two points. Now, the last 110, ten radius. So it means ten is an abbreviation for tangent and radius. So we have to we would like two lines at which the circuit these two lines will be tangent to this circle with a certain radius. Now let's see this to understand the idea. So let's say we have a line like this. Skip and another line like this like this, and skip. So we have these two lines. I would like a circle, which will be drawing here, and these two lines will be tangent to it. So what I'm going to do is type C, enter, circle, then 1010 radius, specify the first tangent of circ. That is the first ten. This line will be tangent to the circ. You can see selected the first one. Specify point on object for second tangent. This one is a tangent for circle. Okay, so we have this line and this line. Now, the last requirement is radius of circle radius of circle. So radius will be, let's say, I would like a circle with 2 meters or 5 meters and like this, you can see, we have a circle with five meter radius, and these two lines are tangent to it. Okay. So we have we learned in this lesson about the different commands regarding the circle and we learn it also about the snap tool. Remember, you can turn it off while clicking like this and you can turn it back on by F three like this. F three on the keyboard. Okay? 17. Drawing a Polygon: Hey, guys, in this lesson, we will learn how to draw a polygon inside the autocad program. In order to draw a polygon, simply, if you remember, polygon is simply a shape that has equal amount of size or equal length of sight. For example, if we have a square, this is four sided polygon. It has four sides which are equal in which have the same lens. And if you look at hexagon, which is side, six sides figure, it has six equal sites. Okay? That's what we call a polygon. So how can we draw a polygon inside the Autocad program? Simply type polygon. Pool, BL, and Enter, which is polygon like this. So it says for inter number of sides, how many sides of this polygon. So let's say if I would like to draw a square, I'll just click on Enter because it gives us it has, you can see, default value for four sides. So if I click Enter, it will draw a polygon of four sides. Now, then satisfy center of polygon. An shape has a center. So polygon itself, similar to rectangle, similar to a circle has a certain center. Let's say I will say the center is here, click like this. Then it will ask you inscribed inside a circle or circumscribed a a circle. What's the difference between these two? Inscribe inside the circle, it means the figure can be inside a circ. We have a circle and its sides or the edges or the intersection points of the sides will be touching the circle. Circumscribed circle, the circle can be drawn inside the polygon. Don't worry, I will show you this right now. Let's say, for example, inscribed in a circle like this. We have a four side, a square. You can see we can draw it as we would like. Look at this radius of the circle. Let's say radius of circle is 100 like this and enter. So if you look like this, you can see we draw it square inside a circle or inside a circle with 100 radius. So someone will ask me, Okay, where this circle or what the meaning of inscribe it about circle. Let's say. So if you look at here and we activate also already we activate it like this. Okay, you can see this point, okay, center of this figure. And let's say we have 100 radius that we selected for this polygon and enter. You can see that inscribed in a circuit inscribed in the circle, the first option that our figure is touching a circle of a radius 100. So the first option of drawing this figure is by using a circle, and we will draw a figure that touches it. That's what we call inscribe in a circle. Let's use the second option, BOL and Enter. Let's say four sides again, now let's say the central, let's say here two, and let's use the circumscribed about circle. It will be the circle will be inside it. So if you click like this and specify radius again 100 as before and enter, so we have the same figure. But the difference is that if we type circle like this and we selected the point like this and type 100 and enter, you can see in this way circle is touching the sides of this polygon. Inscribed in a circle, it means that the polygon inside the circle and touching it, this edges point is touching the circle. Circumscribed around a circle or about a circle, it means that the circle is touching the sides of that figure. Okay? That's how you can draw a polygon. Now, another way, polygon like this, and let's say six sides for this time hexagon specify center of the polygon which we have done or edge. What does edge mean? It means we will just draw one side and the autocad will draw the rest of these sides or the rest of this figure. So it will be like this first point edge, first, like this and specify first point of edge like this, and you can increase the lens as you would like. So you can draw it like this as you would like. Freely, like this. I will make it like this. You can choose, of course, the lens if you would like. And the angle. So if I would like lens, let's say, for example, 100 or 300 like this, and if I would like it with a certain inclination with a certain angle from the XX, I will click on tab to switch it to angle. So I will click on tab on keyboard like this. It will be 300 and what angle of inclination, I would like it to be inclined by 30 degrees and then enter. So we have this angle of inclination is 30 degrees from the horizontal. Okay. So we have our figure one, two, three, four, five, six, hexagon, six sides, all of them are equal to each other and inclined by a certain angle from X axis. Okay? 18. Drawing a Polyline: Hey, guys, let's do in this lesson. Let's draw the polyline. And let's see the difference between line ordinary line and polyline. So for example, if we use a line like this and draw like this, tick, tick, tick, tick, tick, tick, tick. Okay. Then click on Escape and Pline like this, Tick tick, tick, tick, tick, tick, like this. What's the difference between them? You can see that in line, if you click on any of these, you can see you just select one line of these lots of line. However, in Polyline, if you click on any, you are selecting the whole ship. This is very important. Why? Because in some in electrical engineering or in electrical drawing, we could have a building that I would like to see its area. I will go like this, I will use a polyline and go like this, go like this for a certain building. Okay, like this, this, this, let's say this is our area, for this building. So if you right click and go to properties like this, you can see down here the area of this figure. According, of course, this large value is dependent on the units inside the program. If it is in millimeter, then it will be divided by 1,000 or this is a very large scale in general. So neglect this in any way, you can get the area of the building by doing this trick. Okay, by using poly line though polyline is very important in our electrical systems or electrical drawings. For example, we can use it in lighting design, lighting design or lightning protection design because the area of the roof or area of the building will be very important in the risk assessment of the building. You will learn about this in our course for lightning protection. Okay, so we talked about polyline. Let's see the option that we have. That's the first slope point in polyline. You can see we have arc wd length, undo width. Again, like this, you can see undo, which we learned before, like this, it will reverse or undo the last action. Great. What about arc? Instead of having this line, we can click on arc to have an arc like this, like this, have an arc. An arc like this. Okay? If I would like to get back to line, simply go like this and click on line like this. Okay? That is the first thing that we have in this one. Okay, poly PL, again, this is polygon. Um like this. Okay, now we have width and length, and half width. So let's start with widths. What does this mean? You can see this line this line has a certain width, right, certain widths. Okay. So we can control the width of this line by using the weds here. So if I click on weds here, and it will say, you can see here, we start with a certain width and we end at certain widths. Okay? Someone will tell me, A, what does this mean? Okay, if you say width equal to zero, for example, as a starting point and the end width of this line will be, let's say, 2.5. Like this, we click on enter. You will see what will happen. Nothing changes. If you zoom in like this, let's just zoom in. You can see the change like this. Okay? You can see we started with zero weds and we ended at weds equal to two, like this and skip. You can see zero weds and then we have weds of 2 meters or depending on 2.5 meters or depending on the unit we used in the program. If we draw another polyline like this, polyline, B line, you can see it still have the same width that we talked about. However, this time, width is equal to lens. What I'm going to do is if I would like to return it to the original, we will make it zero and zero like this. We return it back to the original polyline. Great. Let's delete all of this and polyline on more like this. However, this time we'll see the lens. What does the lens do? It is completely useless. You can see here 50. If I say 50 like this and enter, it will give you a lens of line equal 50. The same idea. If you click on lens here and say 15 like this, it will give you 50 inside the same direction. So if you go like this, 50, like this, you can see it gives you 50 at the same direction that I satisfied. So if I go like this and say 30 like this and enter, it will give you line in the same direction. That is the benefit of lens. Okay? Okay, so in this lesson, we learned about the polyline and how to do it. 19. Drawing an Arc and an Elipse: Hey, guys, in this lesson, we will learn about the arc, how to draw an arc and how to draw an ellipse inside or to cat program. In order to draw an arc, you have several options either to click here to draw an arc or just type A and Enter. You can see A arc, and Enter. The first way to draw an arc is that we have two points of an arc. Let's say we have a straight line or we have two luminars for example, that I would like to connect between them or wire them in a form of an arc. So in order to do this, let's say we have this box is our first luminar so I will connect to this one and this one, this and this. I will say like this and connect to this one, right? But in the form of an arc. So if I click another click, you'll see an arc like this. Okay? You can see this arc. Great. As you see here, like this. So, let's say we have a luminar here and another luminar here, and we connected between them using an arc wiring. Great. So that is the first way in arc. Another way is that we can say arc or E only. Then we can see we have center. So we can draw. Remember that the arc is simply a part of a circle. So we can draw an arc with the usage of center of a circle. So let's say we have a circle like this and this is its on center, and we will have, you can see a circle, right. So let's say we will start from here and we can draw any arc we would like like this as if we are drawing a part of a circle like this. Okay. So if I would like to draw an arc like this, I would simply click here. So we have our arc. Now, let's say if I would like to do the reverse, I would like to do an arc dow in word like this. So if I click on arc like this and I do the same way center and then click here, and then if I start clicking here, look carefully here. If I try to draw a board, it is drawing a board correctly. Hover if I try to draw it downward, I can't. You can see it draws a whole circle. I can't draw an arc downward. Now, why is this B inside the autocad program, the arc is drawing in the anticlockwise direction in the anticlockwise. You can see in the anticlockwise like this. That is the only way anti clockwise. I can't just draw that down part. So how can I solve this issue simply by clicking on A, arc, and then again center. But you are drawing in the anticlockwise. I can start instead of clicking here and drawing like this, we can click like this and draw on the other side like this. Sorry, Arco and center, then click here like this and from here, you can see I now can draw the other part like this. Of the arc. Great. So if I would like to draw upward, I will go like this anticlockwise. If I would like downward, I will start from here, click the second point from here, and then start drawing. So that is how you can draw an arc and it's very useful in wiring of luminars and components in electric circuits. Another way or another thing that we would like to discuss is the ellipse. How can I draw an ellipse, simply say EL, which is ellipse, like this. Now, in order to draw any ellipse, you know that the ellipse has two diameters or two radii or two radiuses, two radius or two high. So let's say we have horizontal and vertical, right? So let's start with horizontal. So if I try to draw the horizontal axis, we will collect like this and the horizontal part will be like this distance 32.5 meters or whatever the scale we are using like this. You can see the horizontal part here, this horizontal axis has 32 meters in length. Now for the wed or the vertical part, you can see we can control the radius of the upper part of the vertical part. I can control it by typing any number I would like or just click Au xs to draw the elapse. Okay, so we draw the ellipse with the diameter of the horizontal and the radius of the vertical. Great. Another way EL enter like this is that you can see here using center. So by using center of the ellipse. So if I click here, we have an ellipse. This is its own center, and this is the horizontal. For example, radius of the horizontal like this. Okay, so we can control the horizontal radius, the horizontal radius, and then by going like this, we can control the vertical radius, and we draw our ellipse. So we draw our laps using the diameter of the horizontal port and the vertical line or vertical radius. The other way is use the center and put the radius of the horizontal end radius of the vertical. Great. Another thing regarding ellipse is that we can draw an arc using an ellipse. What I mean by this, remember that ellipse is close to a circle, right? So we can take a part of the ellipse and consider it as an arc. How can I do this? After clicking on Ellipse, you click here on arc like this. Then we put the center specify first point or we draw the ellipse by clicking on center or just draw it normally by horizontal end vertical like this. I draw an ellipse like this, like this simply as we did before. But the only difference is that we have an additional part. It says specify start angle. I will say I would like to start to draw the arc from here till here. So I will click like this. And like this. So we have taken part of the ellipse as our arc, okay? That's why I added arc and ellipse in the same lesson because they are related to each other. Okay. 20. Drawing a Point and Construction Lines: Hi, and welcome everyone. In this lesson, we will talk about the point. Point is very helpful in our electrical drawings. We will need it sometimes. So I will show you how can you put any point in a drawing. Assembly is very easy, so type B, which is point like this and put the point anyway. Let's say here like this. You can see the point is very, very small. However, this point is very helpful. Now, if I would like this point to be more visible, what I can do assembly, go to utilities here. And then go down to point style like this. So you can change the style of the point instead of having this dot, we can make it like this X or can make it like a plus sign, or we can make it like this. Let's say, for example, we use this and say, Okay, you will see that our point is now more visible to us. If I do the same action again like this and with another point, you can see by default, every point will be like this. If I would like to return back to the original form, I will simply click on this and okay, so we return to the previous form. Another thing that we would like to discuss in this lesson is that the extension lines or extension lines or construction lines or constructing lines, whatever it is. So how can I do them? You will understand right now. Simply type L L, which is extended line like this, and we have many options. Okay, so let's start with the first option. Which is clicking using the mouse like this. If I click like this, you can see it gives us a very large or a very long extended line like this. If I click anywhere like this, you will have lots, lots of extended line. You click on space or Skip to get out of this. You can see here very large, that covers the whole scale of our drawing, very large line. Okay? Let's delete this. Let's get like this once more and excel, again, we have here horizontal lines. If I would like to draw horizontal line, so I click on horizontal and draw like this horizontal lines. Scape or escape in order to escape from the keyboard in order to get out or click on space on the keyboard. If you would like to repeat the same command in any autocad drawing, simply type Enter. If I click on Enter, you can see it repeated the last action, which is extended lines. Click on vertical, gives us vertical lines. Like this. Then escape from the keyboard and Control A, then delete like this. Now, let's repeat again, XL like this into, and we have with a certain angle like this. So we can draw a line certain start from here. And if I would like it to be inclined by a certain angle like this. So we'll have this line, as you can see, inclined by a certain angle. That's the benefit of angle. Great. Delete this l. We have also Psect. What does Bisect do? It helps us to draw two bisecting lines. So if I click on Psect like this, it will say, Hey, draw the first one. So it'll be like this. Then draw the starting point like this. Okay? You can see starting like this. Then if I click, you can draw the second line like this. So now we will be able to draw several bisecting lines at the same Z or bisecting at the same point. Then skip Control A, delete, then XL, lost action. And this one we will look at offset. Offset, what does it do if let's say I have a line like this, let's control like this. Let's have XL, draw any line. Horizontal, for example, like this, and then skip. Now, the benefit of offset is that if I would like to take this line and move it a little bit upward or move it a little bit downward, but with a certain specific distance, let's say I would like to move it 10 meters upward or 10 meters downward. How can I do this? Simply say Excel, and then offset like this. Satisfy the offset distance. If I click from here until here for, let's say, 1,000 like this, enter. I requested an offset of 10,000 from this line. Then it says, Hey, selected the line object. I selected this line. Now subfi side to offset. You can offset the line from here to 1,000 meters in this side or 1,000 meters in this side. I will say this side, for example, like this. So you can see that it is offset by 1,000. If I would like to repeat this, then select the same object like this and offset downward. Select the object and offset here, and so on. So it is offset by 1,000. If I would like to make sure of this, sim click on this and this and look at here. So if I go down here, here the scale is very large, actually. Skip like this. Okay. Alright. Like this, make it 1,800. Okay. So as you can see, the scale is very large. That's why this texxt is very large like this, okay? So we can make it more like this. Nos 500, for example, like this, you can see the distance, this distance is one sod, okay? 1,000 meters as we have seen from the offset tour. Okay? Don't worry, we'll learn about dimension and the text and its properties in the next lessons, okay? So in the end, we learn it in this lesson how to do extended lines. It can be helpful in electrical drawings, and we learn how to do a horizontal vertical bisection and um vertical lines or extended lines with a certain angle. 21. Hatch and Rotate: Hey, guys, and welcome to another lesson in Autocad drawing. In this lesson, we will learn about the hatch command, the hatch command, and the rotate command. So before we start this lesson, I would like to show you a small trick that you will face. Okay? So let's say we have a rectangle like this, rectangle. And we draw it like this. Now, when you select a rectangle, you click like this and select right. Some of you will do this we click and drag. We will have this weird shape. Sometimes you can do this, it will be very weird. In order to prevent this from happening, all you have to do is go to options and then selection where selection here exactly, and you would go to this one Allow press and drag on object, allow press and drag for lasso, you would remove the stick like this and click Apply and Okay. Even if you drag it like this, click and drag, nothing will happen as before. I'm clicking and dragging if you see me what I'm doing right now. That's the first trick. The second thing that we would like to learn is the hatching process. So you can do hatching by clicking here or simply by clicking edge and Enter Hatch, like this. So before we go to hatching, let's just draw a line to separate this like this, and skip. Then we go to Hatch g and Enter or just use the command from here. Okay, great. So what I'm going to do is I would like to hatch this area. So we have different hatching. We can hatch as a solid, for example, a solid color as you would like, Okay? The solid current is white. So if I click here, it will be hatched or be colored completely with white, as you see here. Okay. Now, if I would like to make this with another one like an angle and the click here, you will see it should be an angle with this blocky shape, but it is giving us this white. If you zoom in very large, it will appear. So it will not appear like this. Okay, the scale is very large. Let's make this one equal to 100, for example, like this. So you can see 100. You can see this plox start appearing right now. Like this. Then skip. You can also select it like this and delete it like this. You can use Hatch once more and you'll find different chips here. You can see blocks, this cross and dots and this one. Some of these figures like this one, is very helpful in hatching some of our elements in our electrical drawing, such as the electric heater, as you will see or the fuse of electric heater or the outlet of electric heater as you will see in next lessons. When we go to electric drawing, you can see here this one this one, for example, if you select like this, gives you this hatching shape, right? You can change its sickness by making this as a ten and Enter, you can see hatching like this. Okay? And you can also change color. So you can see here instead of Pi layer and we will see the layers in autocat program. We can select any color we would like. So let's say blue, this magnet, this SN, this green, this yellow, as you would like. Okay? That's all for hatching. So this is how you can do hatching inside the autocat program. Great. Now second thing that we would like to learn is rotation. Let's say we have let's say at rectangle, for example, like this. Let's draw it like this. I would like to rotate this rectangle. I would like to rotate it, let's say for 30 degrees, inclined from X axis by 30 degrees. How can I do this? Simply, you can say rotate or O on the keyboard, rotate like this and click on Enter like this. Or you can find it here, rotate from here. Then it will tell you select object, what objects you would like to rotate. I would like to rotate this one, so I select it like this. I say select objects one fund. So I selected one object. Is there any other objects you would like to select? No. I will type Enter on the keyboard or provide Enter on the keyboard. Now, when you are rotating, you are rotating around a base point, around a certain point. So for example, if I select this point and you'll understand what I mean by this, this point is our point of rotation. We will rotate this figure around this point. So you can see our figure is now rotating around this point. So if I say, I would like to rotate it by 45 degrees and enter, you can see it is rotated from X axis around this point by 45 degrees. That's how you can use rotation. You can also have a circle, not a circle, let's say rectangle like this. One rectangle here, and let's say we have a line like this and Skip and I would like to rotate both of them like this rotate and then select this one and this one and enter. You can see select object two total objects selected, and Enter. Then what is the point of rotation? Let's say I would like to rotate it in here like this. You can see they are rotating around this point. Then click anywhere, it has been rotated. Okay. Great. So this is for rotation. Another thing that let's say we have a rectangle once more like this and we selected the rectangle from the beginning. Like I selected it. If I click on rotate, I rotate like this. You will see say is directly satisfy base points. So the program understand that you need to rotate this one since you selected it before providing the command. So I will put this point and rotate like this. Okay? So when you select first and put the command, it will be able to or it will understand that you would like to rotate this. Okay? So that is how you can do hatching and rotation inside the Autocad program. 22. Trim and Extend Commands: Hey, guys, in this lesson, we will learn how to do the trim and the extend commands inside the Autocad program. How can I do this? What is the benefit of these commands that we use a lot in electrical drawings or in our electrical design? Okay, let's say we have these line enter like this and enter once more like this and enter, and we have a line like this, line and enter again, and entro like this and like this. Now, the first one which you would like to learn is extend. So what does extend mean? I would like to extend this line to this line. Extend this one to this one, this one to this one. How can I do something like this? Sembly type extend that Ex, which refers to extend or abbreviation for extend like this. Then it says select object to extend. What object you would like to extend? I would like to extend this one so you can see here when you go near to it, says extend it to this one. Now, if you go onto the other side, it will extend to this one. If you go in the middle, it will not extend it to anyone exactly the middle, okay? However, it's very difficult to do this. Anyway, if you are in the right side, it will go to the nearest line to it like this or from here like this. If I click here, it will extend to here. If I click here, it will extend to it. If I click another one, you'll see it extended to this one, like this. If you collect this object, it will extend it to the nearest line like this. Okay? That is a very helpful thing to do. You can see this one does not have any line to extend to, okay? Okay, now Skip and Control Z like this. Okay, great. So that is the extend command in order to extend a line to another one or extend a line to anywhere. Okay, now, there is another way or another one which would like to learn, which is the trim. So skip like this. So we have this line, and we have this line. Let's say I would like they are intersecting with each other, and I would like to remove this part only, this part. So how can I do this? I will use a trim from here, trim from here or simply type T or four trim like this. Then it says, select object to trim. Okay? So what object you would like to trim? Okay. So if you go like this, you can see Mm hmm. You can see this two intersecting with each other. So click like this, trim this part. Okay? These two are intersect. You can delete this one, can delete this. You can delete this as you would like. You can even delete a complete line. Okay? Now, that is how you trim. You can click like this to trim any part like this by using trim. Okay, great. Skip and Control Z to get back. Now another thing that we would like to do is that you can switch between extend and trim. You can switch between these two. How can I do this? Let's say you would like to do trim. Okay. So trim means I will cut any of these. Now, let's say I would like to switch from trim to extend. So how can I do this? You can see that it says, select object to trim or Shift plus select to extend. So if I click Shift on the keyboard, like this and by clicking shift, I switch it from trim to extend. So you can see if I go like this, it will extend instead of trimming. If I remove Shift from the keyboard, it will trim. If I click on heft like this, it will extend like this. So if I click like this, it operates as extend despite using the trim. Now, if I'd like to move like this and like this, okay, as we would like, great. Okay, another thing that we would like to do that control Z like this and extend, again, it says the same exact thing. You can see select object to extend or Shift plus select to return to trim. So if I click on heft on the keyboard, if I click like this, we have the extend the normal command. If I click on heft on the keyboard, you will switch it to trim. Okay, so it means that if I'm operating on trim, click on Shift, then you will be switch to our hold shift on the keyboard in order to switch to extend. Okay? If you are using extend, you can click on shift for a long time and you'll be able to trim. Okay? So you can switch between these two commands together by using the shift on the keyboard and holding it. Okay? You have to hold shift. If you remove your hand from shift, it will be operating normally. Okay? So we have the trim like this or the extend. If I would like to trim, you can see trim shift, I will trim like this, trim like this, okay? Extend like this and like this. Okay? So in this lesson, we learned about the extend and the trim commands in Autocad program. 23. Adding Text to Autocad: Hey, guys. Welcome to another lesson. In this one, we will took a poet, how to add a text to the Autocad program. So how to add a text simply you can see, Tet from here, you can take here to add text or simply you can click on text like this T, which is text like this. And you have to know that the texxt is ddt in rectangle. So I will put it like this. So I would like my own text to be in a rectangle like this and click. Okay. Now, what I'm going to do is that I will say, let's say, med courses Hadija Academy. Okay. Okay, so that is our text. That's the first thing. Number two. If I would like to change a site Let's click anywhere like this. Okay, you'll find that here we have our text, which is very, very small. So what I'm going to do is that I double click on the role, as we learned before or click on Zoom extends to how our text. Now, if you'd like to adjust the size of ticket, you can simply double click like this. You will get back to these tools for the ticket. Number one, if you'd like to change its size, simply select all of the text like this and go here. And let's say, instead of 0.2, let's say, 200 and click on Enter on the keyboard like this. So now you can see that ticket size became very large combed two before. That's the first part. Number two, if I'd like to make it bold, simply click on here, if you'd like to make it italic like this, if you'd like to add an underline like this and et cetera. Number two, if you'd like to change the color of this text from white, you can see pie layer or simply you can change the color as you would like. Let's say I would like to have it in the green like this. So we have a green color number two. There is also the adjustment, adjustment or alignment of the text like this, you can see it can be in the middle like this in the middle of this chap which is very large. You can see it is now in the middle or on the right side or on the left side, et cetera. Okay. Another thing that if you would like to say, let's say, area equal to 25 millimeter square or meter square. How can I add the square? You can find it in samples here. You find degrees Delta, phase angle, and et cetera. You can see squared like this, you'll have the sample of square. You can find here all of the settings or the options that we have in the Word and Excel. So that's how you can add a text in Autocad program. 24. Copy and Erase Commands: Hey, everyone in this last one, we will to a copy and copy and paste and the erase function. Let's say we have a figure like a rectangle like this, rectangle like this, and I would like to copy this rectangle. Or let's make it much easier. Let's say I would like to draw a circle like this, circle, I would say the center of the circle is here. Like this. Now, what I would like to do is that I would like to copy the circle and put it here. So how can I do this simply by using the copy option inside or copy command inside the Autocad program. So copy is simply CO and Enter, CO and like this. It says, select objects you would like to copy. I would like to copy the circle. And then this is the only object that I would like object I would like to copy, right? So I would click on Enter, like this. Number two, specify Base point. So Base point, it means the point at which I select in order to move my own shape. For example, when I select here, I can move my shape anywhere as I would like, from the same point I select. Okay, like this, like this and skip. However, I would like to make the center of the circle at this point, and I would like to copy this circle and make this point its center. So how can I do this? Simply copy again like this and select the object or object and enter, and then specify base point, which is the center of the circle like this. Then take it and put it here at the same point like this and here. And like this. Base point is a point at which I take my own figure and move it. Okay. So that is a copy command inside the Autocad program. Now, let's say I would like to delete simply, I will select any of these shapes or just like this selection and click on Delete on the keyboard, or you can simply type ER, which is or E only erase, E, click on Enter and select objects or objects you would like to erase. I would like to delete this one, like to delete this one, this one, this one, and then in the end, click on enter on the keyboard like this. So you have deleted the objects, and as you can see, it is much, it takes more time than the other messages. The easier was is to click like this and delete. Okay? So these are the copy and the erase commands inside the Autocad program. 25. Block and Explode Commands: Hey, everyone. In this lesson, we will choke a poet, then the block and explode commands inside the Autocad program. So Block is simply a very important feature that we will use a lot in electrical drawings. So what does this even mean? Let's say you have a power outlet power outlet for heater. So for example, it will be like we have a rectangle or EC enter like this. We have this shape like this, and we will hatch it. So I will say H enter like this and make it like this, select enter. But I will make it sc let's say, Okay, let's make it blue or yellow, for example, red, red, red, red and make its own sickness. Let's say it is two and enter like this or let's make it, and close hatchet creation like this. So we have this sample which is hatchet like this, o, with a certain color. This or you can, let's say, double click again and let's make it, um let's make it white. Okay. And then skip like this. We have this hatchet chap like this, and I would like to add more like this, a line at this point. Then if eight for all like this, Okay, and like this F eight, cancel it like this, and then escape. So we have this shape. Let's say this shape represents a power outlet for an electric heater, power outlet that we add inside our electrical drawing. Okay? Now, what I would like to do is that I would like to use this plug inside a drawing. I can use it several times. So instead of just clicking like this, and copying it, we would like to form it or make it one plug. You can see if you click here, we have a block for line plug for this, a block for hatching, and there's a block of the rectangle itself. Okay? So we have different blocks. I would like to connect all of them together into one block. So in order to do this, we will use a block function. So we will say P, which is Block and enter like this. Okay, the block definition. So let's say cancel first. Let's select like this and P for Block like this. Okay, Enter. Okay, so we select the object and we like to form a plock. So let's say it is electric heater, E H electric heater Outlet, EHO electric heater outlet. Okay? Then you can click on it. Okay or just select Pickpoint. Pickpoint is a point at which I use to move this object. So let's say Pickpoint, let's say, for example, here, add the middle, and then click on Okay. So what will happen is that we have now one plug. So if you click on it like this, anywhere, you will have one plug. You can see if you click here, you can move it as you would like. Move it like this, click here and drag to move. So we have one plug that we can control and move anywhere we would like to do. Okay? Now, let's say I would like to copy this plug and you'll understand why right now. So which one I would like to copy this and enter, subscribe this point. I'll select this point and copy it here and here and here and here. Lots lots of locations inside a large electrical drawing, okay, like this. So what's the benefit what is another benefit of the plog? Someone will say, Hey, we can just copy each of these together in every location. However, the plug feature helps you that helps you to edit all of these separate plogs in one move. So let's say you would like to change this plug. And when changing this plug, everything inside this drawing will change. That is the biggest advantage of using the plug. So what I mean by this, if I would like to edit this block for any reason, let's say I would like to edit it. I will double click on it like this. I will say dit block definition and then click on Okay. You'll be switching to a different view of Autocad program. So what this view this view is used to edit block edit this view is black. You can see there is nothing else except this block. So let's say I would like to change it, I will click on the hatching, for example, like this and make the color or change the hatching pattern. Let's change it as you would like. Go down here. Go up any one of these, I will select for installation that say, this one, this one, and we can change its size, let's say, one and enter. Let's see for now. Close hatch Enter. Okay, so the hatching is very small. Okay, so let's double click again like this and make it 300 like this. Okay, so the hatching now appears like this and skip. So we have a new hatching, okay? Let's say I would like to change its color to its color to anyone. Let's say, make it blue, for example, okay, like this. Okay? And let's make it like this, and close hatch. We edited this one. It is weird. I know it's weird, but anyway, we edited. Okay. Now we would like to let's say, I would like to have this block and I would like to save it. I will close do like this and save changes to EH or electric heater outlet like this. What you see that when we change this plock, every block inside the drawing itself will change it to another one. The benefit of the block is that we can change one outlet or edit one pluck and it will edit every other plug. This is also helpful if you have a luminire that used in one room, and this luminire you covet it and use it in lots of rooms inside the same building. So by changing one or editing one inside the block, you will be able to change everything inside the building. Now let's say, for example, if you would like to separate these blocks from each other. We will use the oblode command in order to separate these elements from each other. If I would like to separate, just click on it and exoblod like this. Exublod you can see oblote and click. So what will happen, you can see the line alone, this line alone, and this one alone. However, if you look carefully here, double click here and change it into any color. Let's make this one non or white. This one to be like this. Okay, closes like this and skip, you can see this one, you can see. If you zoom in, it will appear at the white and blue. However, since the scale is very large, it doesn't appear here. It appears at a white, however, it is blue and white. So anyway, you can see when we edit this one, all of the other blocks are the same because they are related to one block. However, this one is exploded, so it is separate from them. So explode here can help us to take this. Take this one, put it out here, take this one and move it like this. Take this one and stretch it like this. You can see all blocks doesn't care about it. That is how you can use Explode and block commands in Autocad program. 26. Insert, Scale, and Mirror Commands: Hey, guys, in the last lesson, we took the poet the commands regarding the block and Explode. Now remember that in the last lesson, we had the block, the block that we have made. Let's say we deleted all of these blocks and if I would like to get it back, how can I get it back simply by using the command insert? So if I say insert, I enter like this, insert. Okay. And it will show you the recent blocks. You can see this one, which is here, EHO which is electric heating, so I click on it like this and put the insertion points like this. Okay, so this is the insert command in order to insert an element that you already have done or a block that you already have done in Autocad program. Okay? So that's the first thing. Number two, I would like to do the mirror. So the command number two is mirror. What does mirror do? Let's say we have a circle like this and let's say we have a rectangle like this, I would like to mirror mirror this. How can I do this? Simply by using a command MI, which is mirror? What are the objects that you would like to mirror like to mirror this and this and this? Then enter It says specify first point of mirror line so we have an object. So we have an mirror that we are going to use to mirror the object. So let's say also F eight like this and click here, let's look at it. So you can see this is our mirror. You can see every object on the left side is mirrored on the other side. Okay? So that is the mirror command. If you close or or through command or orthogonal command from Fight, you can see I can mirror it in different ways like this by moving this. So if I click like this, I will mirror it. Okay? Now, the last thing that the autocad will ask you is that you would like to erase source objects or not what does this mean if you click on yes? It means that it will delete this part and leave the mirror part. Like this if I say yes, then it will delete the original and keep the mirror part. If not, like this, selecting them and MI mirror like this, specify first point. So if you selected the object before putting the command, it will skip the object selection part. And like this, and then we do like to as no, I don't. So it will keep the original and the mirror part. So we learn until now about insert command and the other command which is mirror, great. Now, we would like also to learn about another one which is lb Okay, what is it? Let's just delete this and delete this. This command is called scale. If I would like to scale something, makes it bigger or smaller. I would say as C, which is a scale like this and select my own object like this, select this one. Then enter. Then s five base point. What is the point at which you are going to scale your own object from here or here or where? If I select here, for example, like this, you can see, I can scale it, make it bigger or smaller as you would like, like this. Then click anywhere and the object will become bigger like this. Another way is to simply select it like this and scale SEC like this enter, and it will say satisfy base point. Let's see the difference. If I click here, it will become bigger and smaller around this point, similar to rotation, like this. Okay. Another thing that you will see is that instead of just making it randomly like this, you can put a scale factor. You can see specify scale fact. So if I say ten means that it makes it bigger ten times and enter, you can see that it's scaled by ten times. Okay? Okay, so that's for this. If I have a text like this, I'll go to text like this and say, Magi like this, okay? And we have our text, right? So if I go like this, I can't see it at all. If I extend, you can see it is very, very small text. So if I go like this, I can't even see it. Okay, so no problem at all. So let's just zoom here and type text like this and type anything like this. Okay. Now, if I would like to scale this, so I can select it and if I would like to scale, how can I scale it? Simply double click like this. And as you can see, you can select the size from here instead of 0.2, let's say 200 like this and enter. I will become, as you can see, bigger, as you can see, another way is to just select it and type scale SEC like this and five B point, let's say, from here, and then you will be able to scale it upwards and downwards like this. So this is another way to scale an object. So let's just delete all of this like this and keep this one. Okay? So we learn it about insert, we learn it about mirror, we learn it about skill, o? Great. 27. Move and Align Commands: Hey, everyone in this lesson, we will have more about the commands of autocat. In this lesson, we will have another one, which is I would like to move this object. In order to move any object, simply if you select it like this, you will see a point, which is a pick up point or the pick point that we selected before. If I click on it like this, I can move my own object anywhere like this. Okay, that is the first way. Let's say if we have several objects like this circle. We have a line like this and Skip and I would like to move all of them. Simply, we select them all and click M and Enter, which is move move command, like this. Great. Now, specify base point exactly similar to scale, similar to rotate. What is the base point that you are going to use to move this object? Let's say, for example, this is our base point. So if I click on it like this, I will be able to move all of these together. Okay. Similar to here, if you look at this, we have this point. If you drag it like this, you can move this object for the circle like this. Okay? So this is object or not object, move command inside to cat, in order to move any object as you have seen. Now, another one that we would like to discuss is to align an object. Let's see what does align do. So let's say we have a rectangle like this. Okay? Like this representing room, okay? This room that I would like to, I would like to add this outlet. Let's say, it is a power outlet for electric heater, and I would like to wit it on the wall here or here or here. So in order to do this, the first option is to simply like this. Okay, C O to copy like this, copy from here, and then paste like this. Keep it like this. Now, the first option in order to, let's say, I would like to align this on the wall here, for example. I will move it like this and zoom in like this and put it here, right? Great. Now, let's say I would like to put it here on this wall. How can I do this?embly I will go like this, and then I will type RO to rotate then I would like to rotate it like this. We will activate or Tubnal like this to rotate it in 90 degrees like this, and then move once more like this and put it here, right? So you can see how many steps I did I did move, then rotate, then another move, in order to align it here. Now, the question is, is there any way which is easier to align something like this or an electric heater on this wall in a much easier way. Actually, yes, how to do this is very easy. All you have to do is align. So I would like to align this object on this wall, I would like to put this side on this wall, right? So what I'm going to do is simply type a line like this. Then select object you would like to align or would like to align this one. Okay, and enter. Spy, first source point. So this is my own first point. I'd like to move this here, right? Spy second source, but I like to move this point. Here. Then sfythd source point you would like to. But any other point, no, these two are enough for me. Now, if I click on Entro like this and it will say scale object based on alignment points, I will say no, and you will see why right now like this, you will see that this object is now aligned on the wall easily without any kind of difficulty compared to the first method. Control Z like this. Now, if we do that second option, let's do this and line which is AL, like this. Sus why first point like this, second point like this. If you don't see this green points, you have to activate the OSNab method which is F three. OSNab you have to activate and you have to take all of these helper full points, okay? So we select this. I will select I click on Enter continue like this. Okay? Do you would like to scale the object? Yes, and you will see the difference right now. So you can see the object now becomes bigger than before. Why? I will show you right now. Let's control Z like this. You can see that when I say a line, AL, select this object. And when I say this point from here to here and this one from here you can see this distance here is much bigger than this one. That's why gives me this distance here, greater than this dimension of this figure. So that's why it says to me, if you would like to scale it based on the alignments point, you would like to make it bigger to be aligned with the points or not. If I say yes, if I say no, it will take this and put it here with the same dimensions. If I say yes, what it will do, it will make it bigger to make it suitable for the two points that I select. Usually, we say no, we keep the shape as it is because all of these outlets will have the same size in any electrical drawing. Control Z like this. Now, what if I would like to align it here? How can I do this simply the same way? Select it like this. Let's move it first, like this and A align. Now look carefully. If you do like this, if you select this point and say, I would like to align this here and this point, and I would like to align this here, what it will do like this and enter Enter, it will align outside, not inside, because it's aligned like this. If I would like it to be inside, all you have to do select this and AL, which is align and specify this point, make this point here, and make this point here, reverse it. Enter, Enter, you can see it is now aligned correctly as I would like. This is a small trick that you will face when aligning an object in autocad program. Okay? 28. Join, Offset, and Break Commands: Hey, guys, in this lesson, we will have some commands regarding two modification commands regarding or regarding with the lines. Number one, if we have a line like this, remember the line when we draw a line like this, convert to pul the line like this. Okay. And enter. Remember, pulley line is considered as one big, one big block, right, one big block, right, like this. Okay? However, each one is considered as a separate line, right? Now, we have a command in Autocad that makes one line joined with another one. How can I do this simply by clicking on Join like this. Okay. So we will select this one to be joined with this one and this one. So these three will become one big line, similar to the block feature. So if you go like this, you can see all of them became one plock. They are not exactly block. However, they are now continuous or joined together. Okay, similar to a poly line. That's the first thing that we can do using join. Anuther one that I would like to discuss let's say I have a line like this, let's activate the orthogonal like this and draw this line and enter. And let's draw, for example, um like the circle like this, I would like to offset this object. What I mean by offset? Offset means that I would like to move this object as it is form a copy of it with a certain distance. Let's say 10 meters upward. How can I do this simply select it like this and type offset offset, like this. Specify distance. So you can add the distance that you would like to add. So let's say 500 and enter, then it will tell you specify point on site to offset. You would like to offset this object here or here. Let's say I would like to offset it here, like this. Select object to offset, this one, like this. Okay? So if you go up here like this, I'll show you why you can see it like this. You see, these three are offset to each other. Why does it very small like this? Because the scale itself is very large. If I go down here and select this object to offset upward like this, you can see it offset, select it like this and offset, select and offset, et cetera. Okay? The scale is just very, very large. Okay? Similarly, if you have a circle like this and you would like to offset it, you can simply say, offset or F, and satisfy the distance, you can put it as you would like, or you can just add the distance or you can simply say what distance you would like. For example, I would like it like this. This distance as an offset. It gives you the distance as you would like. I would say I would like to offset by this one like this and enter. Click on the mouse, sorry. Then select the object to offset. I see this one that I would like to offset. Okay. It says like this. Inside, it can. Outside, it can like this. You can select to offset like this. Offset like this. Okay. So now you are offseting the object outside as you would like. If you go to this, you can offset like this. Okay? That is an offset feature that is very helpful in our drawings, okay? Okay, so that's what we call offset. Okay, great. Let's delete all of this. Skip and Control A, then delete. Okay, the next thing that we would like to do. Another option that we would like to do is that, let's say that we have a room like this. Okay? This is a room, and I would like to make a door here, okay? So first step that we have ra rectangle, right? So if you go like this, it is a complete plug, right? One complete plug or plug. So let's just explode this one. This can be exploded into four lines. So if I select it like this and explode X, like this, you can see that this rectangle is now separate for one, two, three, and four. Now, let's say I would like to this one, I would like to cut a part of it. In order to form a door, a door at which we enter this room and go out from it. So how can I form a door here? Simply, you can simply do this using something which we call break break like this, break like this. Select the objects that you would like to work with this one, ok? Now, we will click here to select the first point like this. So I would like to select from where I would like to make a door from here. To like this to here. So what you can see it now makes you an open area so that you can make a door here. Okay? So now you have a door that you can go through. So again, break so let's use a line, a normal line to understand this. So we have a line like this and skip. And if I would like to cut part of it, click on break like this, select the object, you can see that at the point of selection, it forms the break, right. However, if I don't need this one, I need a different point. I simply click here first point, then select any point I would like I'd like from here to here like this. That is what we call break inside the autocad program. Okay? 29. Divide, Fillet, and Chamfer Commands: Hey, guys, and welcome to another lesson. And this one we will discuss the Divide, fill it and Chamfer commands inside the Autocad program. So first, let's say we have a line like this. Align like this, like this one, and enter. Now, we would like the first command that we will learn is divide. So if I would like to divide this line into equal sections or separate sections, without even separating it, I would like to let's say, I would like to divide it into three equal parts, and I would like to see these three equal parts. So in order to do this, we will use divide or DIV, which is divide like this and it says, select objects that you would like to divide. I would like to divide this one, click on it. Then it says, Enter the number of segments or plug. How many segments that you would like to divide? I would like to divide this, let's say, into six parts. I would say six parts and then enter. So you can see, now this line is divided into six parts. However someone will say, Hey, where are these six parts? I can't see anything. Where are these parts? So in order to see them, all you have to do is that it is divided into six parts using points. So how can I see these points I have to go to scape like this? Go to utilities and point style like this, and make it instead of a dot. Let's make it, for example, an X like this. Okay. So if you look now, we have the points that divide this line into equal parts. You can see one, two, three, four, and five and six parts. Okay? That is order or the command divide inside or cat, okay? Okay, so let's leave this. The second one which we would like to discuss too in this lesson or two commands that are related to each other, fill it and Chafer. Let's say we have a line like this, like this. Let's activate the orognal like this, like this orthogonal, like this. Okay, like this and then enter. Now, what I would like to do in this lines, you can see we have group of lines connected together, and I would like to form a fillet between them. You know what fillets simply an arc like this. You can see these two lines, I would like to connect them in a form of an arc and instead of these two straight lines like this, I would like to be connected like this, Arc connect here, and I would like to F, cancel Fight and like this, I would like to form a fillet between them like something like this. But more accurate, so I can move this like this and skip and then use trim tool to enter once more to trim this and trim this. So we have this curvature or this arc. That's what we call the fillet. Okay? That is one way to do it. But as you can see, it takes a long time and several steps to do it. So instead of doing this, there is another way. How can we do this using Fillet command? So if I type Fillet, F and enter like this, then I would like to form a fillt between this object and this one. I will select the first object, then select the second object, which is this one. And then it will apply a filllet between them. Now, someone will say, where the fillet? I can't see anything here. Let's try fillet again and you will understand why. First, fillet, look at the current settings. Mode equal trim and radius equal to zero radius. The fillet that we are going to make is zero degrees. That's why this fillet didn't appear. What I'm going to do is that I will change radius. Let's say five like this and enter. So I would like to make a fillet of a radius equal to five. Now, let's try again and select the first object and second object like this. You can see fillet radius is too large. It means that this scale is very, very small. Okay, so let's skip F enter like this and radius, let's make it one and enter. Select first object, and again, fillet read is very large. A scale here, is crazy, fillet radius, make it 0.1 or 0.1 like this and enter, then select first object and second object like this. Now, you can see, we have formed a fillet between these two, right like this. That's what we call fillet. Now let's go to the other options. If we click F and Enter, you'll see that we have radius which we have just seen. And let's say I would like to fill it for this one, then this one, then this one. Now, when I do this one, let's say this and this, you can see we are out of the command. We can do more fillets. We have to say enter again to repeat the command, and then we select first object and second object. Now we can use an option called multiple. What does this do? It simply makes you do several times like this click this and this, fill it. Click here and here, another fillet. Click here here and here, another fillet, here and here, another fillet, et cetera. So that is radius in order to control radius of the fillet, multiple in order to do the fillet command several times. Now the last two is undo to undo the last action like this, similar to previous steps like this, undo undo all of these fillets like this. And then Skip that's the lost part. Now, if we do fill it on small like this and we selected Trim, what does trim do? It says that you would like to trim or no? You can see that here. When we do when we do any fillet like this, we had original line. It was like this, connected like this. If you choose to trim, it will delete this excess part and de keep only the fillet. Now, if we say, no, I don't need to trim like this, let's see what will happen. This part will remain as it is. So if I click here and here, you can see the fillet is now drawing and the original lines are also drawing. So in this case, the original line is skipped as it is, and we have an additional fillet. Of course, in reality, when we do fill it, we would like to do that trim all the time, like this. So when we select these two corners like this, it will delete this excess part. Okay, great. Now we have the last action. Okay, so let's control Z like this to undo all what we have done or this fillet, like this. Now, let's say we have a polyline and I would like to do a fillet. So you can see the are individual lines, as you can see here. If we use a polyline like this with too many corners like this, you can see it like this. Okay. And I would like to, let's say, enter, and I would like to do fillet for all of these corners here without going to each one individually. So how can I do this? Simply do fillet and select a polyline like this. Then select radius. So you can see if we select a radius of one like this, and this can happen to you. If you go like this, it says no lines can be filleted. Why? Because one radius for this scale is very large. What I'm going to do is that I'm going to choose radius of smaller 0.1 as we have done in the beginning like this. Then if we select the shape itself, you can see it does polylines, or it does fillets in every corner, as you can see, if I click on it, you can see all of it was now filleted. Now, you can see this is an individual lines. So how can I do the same trick for poly lines for individual lines? All you have to do is that you select this and type join, as we have learned in the previous lessons. Now you have one polyline, so you can apply the same trick. So fill it and then polyline and then select two D poly line like this. Okay? So that is how you can fill it to your own drawing. Okay. Now, what about Chamfer? What does hAFor mean even? ChenFR is like this. Let's do a line like this. So what does the chamfer do? Instead of connecting this corner in the form of polyline, it can form a connected line. So it can be connected like this. It can be like this, let's remove or th like this. So we will have this line and this part will be trimmed like this. Okay, like this. Okay. Now, how can I do something like this? Without using these two? You can use ChamFR like this CHA A, which is HAMFR like this and select the first line you would like to chamfer. This one, select the second line, which is this one. Like this. You can see again, it didn't do anything. Why? Because we need to adjust its own sitting like the chamfer. Then specify distance. You can see distance 10 and distance 20. What does this do mean? I will explain right now. You can see this two have a connected distance like this, if eight, like this, right? So when we say hNFR, distance one representing distance from here to this point and distance two from here to this point. Okay? So because these two distance determine where we are going to draw this line and what part will be trimmed, okay? Okay, so how can I do this? Simply chamfer like this again once more like this and select distance. Specify first champ distance, let's say from here to, let's activate orthogonal like this, if eight from here to here, and specify second point from here to here like this. Okay? So we satisfy the two distances right now, we can see distance two, and you can see distance one. So if we go down here like this, you can see here, specify as first one and first two. You can see very small values. Anyway, we will see right now the effect of what we have done. So then we are going to select the first line and second line. You can see we have made a ham between them like this. Okay? The same idea if I'd like to do a chamF for let's do it like this, a chamF like this for multiple, if I would like to do it here and here, then here here and here, then here and here. If you go down here, you can see very one did here and another one here. It didn't appear because the scale is very small, or the values are very small here we didn't do it like this, et cetera. If you'd like to make it a little bit bigger, you can do it easily. So let's say Control Z, Control Z, and Control Z. Or skip first, Control Z for that chamfer. So for what we have already done. Let's say if I would like to make it bigger, chamfer once more like this and choose here like this. Choose this distance like this and specify the first one like this. And second distance like this to make it more bigger. Then select let's select multiple again and first and second one like this, so it becomes more visible than this one. So like this, you will have the second one. Again, you can also choose the polyline if you have a polyline, let's say like this. Like this and skip, and I would like to do the same trick. I will say ham for like this and choose polyline and select our polyline. You can see all of the corners are now ham ford. So that is how we can do fill it, chamfer and divide inside the Autocad program. 30. Drawing Properties and Match Command: Hey, everyone. In this lesson, we would like to learn about it properties and match. So if I have, let's say, a rectangle like this, if we have line like this, and skip. And I would like to edit the properties of this too. What I mean by editing the properties. Let's add another circle like this. And if I would like to edit their properties, what I mean by this, you look at here properties, you can see this part is what I'm talking about. You will see different properties here. Number one, pie layer and Pi plot. Leave this for another lesson. But for now, using the first one, we can change color of any um for any line or any circle or any black as you would like. For example, if I click on this and I would like to edit this line and change its own color. Simply, you click here and change it as you would like, as you can see here. Let's say we make it red like this. And skip, you will find that the line is now red. If you would like to change, however, if you draw any new line like this, it will be similar to original color, which is white. You'd like to make any new one or any shape with a color of red, simply click here and choose red. It means that any one or any shape or any part that I'm going to add, it will be in red. So if I have a circle like this, it will be red circle. If I have a line, it will be red line like this. Okay? So this will change everything that you are going to draw. So let's return it to default like this and delete these two. The second property that you can do is this one, which is the sickness of line. If I select anyone from here, it means that any line I will draw will have this sickness, this thickness. Now, let's say this one, if I click on it, and I would like to change its own thickness. So simply click here and you can see as I increase like this, you can see the sickness will increase. Let's say two, for example, and skip now, someone will say, Hey, nothing happened. Now, you will think that the sickness which does not appear here, you can see two millimeter, it doesn't even appear. Why? Someone will say that this one is due to a bug inside the program. However, this is very important as you may face this one in your own program. There is an option inside the autocad in which you can display the sickness of the line or not. Or to be more specific line weight. So how can I do this simply type L W. You can see L W display, LW display. Click on it. So it says what it says that the LW display is off. What does this mean? It means it is not operating? This is representing line weight display, displaying the light weight inside the drawing. It is currently off so I will say on like this and enter. Now you will see the line sickness is now appearing. Okay? This is very important, as you will face this problem when you are dealing with Autocad. If you'd like to turn it off, you can say, LW display like this and say zero or off, and it will be completely stopped or completely deleted from the brogra. So this is how you can change the sickness of any line. You can see now thicker than before. Another one, which is line type if you would like to select other and you will see what I mean Pi line. So and click on Lute like this to choose different types of lines. You can make this line as dashed. You can make a dash dot, dashed only, divide, center, all of these different chips for the line and any other figure. So if we select it, for example, dash do like this and click on, Okay. Okay? And I select it then. So we added new line called dash to our line type manager. So if I click on Dad like this and okay like this, click here on this one and make the line dash do like this. So now our line is dashed as you can see here. Okay? So one for color, one for thickness or line weight, and one for line type. Okay? Now you can access more properties by clicking here like this and white click and properties. You'll find all the properties of this thickness here. Okay, so this is how to access properties. Now, the second property is match. Let's say we have this property dashed and with a certain color, and I would like to apply the same properties to rectangle or a circle. So what I'm going to do is to choose match properties like this and say, Hey, select our object would like to copy from. I would like to copy from this line and where the destination object, this one. I will make it like this. I click like this. So we make this object similar to this one. Same line type, line weight, and et cetera. Okay, now, what about this one, the circle. Another way is to do M, which is MA, match properties like this and enter. Then select source object like this and go to the circle and you will make it more thick than before. Okay? So these are properties and match inside the autocad program. 31. Distance, Area, and List Commands: Everyone in this lesson, we will learn about measuring commands like how to measure distance, how to measure area, how to measure list or not less, how to learn about less. Okay? Okay, so the first part is, let's say we have a line like this, like this one. I would like to measure this line. So how can I do this simply by using the distance DI, which is distance and enter Supify first point. This is the first point. And then it says Subcfy second one. You can see 15.65 meters or centimeter depending on the scale of this drawing like this. And it will say, Hey, if you go up like this, if you go up like this, you'll find here distance 15.65 87. Here it gives you in axis, how many lens in X axis in Y axis and in Z. We don't care about this because we need only the distance this number. We don't deal with coordinates in electrical drawing. Okay? So that is how you measure distance between two lines. Now, let's say we have a figure like this one, a rectangle, circle like this. A random shape like this. Not like this Control Z, like this and deactivate orthogonal like this and close this shape. I would like to know the area of these figures. All you have to do is type AA, which is area, then specify the first con so I will draw the figure this, then the second point, then this one and this one. Now we have this green area, which are presenting the area that I need, right. So I click on Enter it will say area equal 51 and parameter is equal to 29. If this menu goes away or this message you go away, you can just put this command like this and you'll find the area and perimeter of this figure. Now, another way to get area, let's say would like area of this circle. Now, if we go point by point, like in this shape, if I say AA and then go to each point like this like this, it will take very long time, like this. Okay, and enter, you will get area like this. So what about a figure like a circle? How can I draw a circle like this or get area of circle? You can simply say AA area, and then select by object like this. I select the object, this one. Hey, your area is 60 and circumference equal to 27.6. If I say AA like this and by object, select it, you will have area as you can see. Now, what about this one? Let's say AA Enter and object if I go here, it will select the object area, 129. It is much easier to use AA and select object to get its own area. Now, that is the second command, we learned in this loss. The third one is called st Ali or ist. What does this do if you click on Th rectangle, it will give you all the properties about it. Select it and Enter. It will give you, for example, if you go here, like this, you can see area perimeter and every point XXXX, X equal 23. Each of these coordinates of the corners of this rectang. Now let's see it for another figure like this st I for a circle like this, you can see, we have selected circle. It will say, Hey, you have center point, center of the circle is at X equal to 42, Y equal to 12, radius of the circumference of the circle 27.6, AA equal to 60.7 and et cetera. Again, I enter select object and enter again, gives you the area, length of this line or the perimeter and each of these corner points that form the shade. That's another way you can get area, lens four different figures, and it will be very helpful in some of our applications that we are going to learn. 32. Adding Dimensions and Styles: Hey, guys, and welcome to another lesson. This one, we would like to learn about dimensions or how to add dimensions to any figure or any object we have and the different styles that we can do and how to edit it. So let's start with, let's say, for example, we have a line like this and horizontal line, and let's repeat it like this, enter, and make another one vertical like this, and another one enter. Which is horizontal. So let's deactivate orthogonal like this and make it like this. Okay. Let's say we have another two lines like this, like this and enter. Let's say we have a rectangle. Let's say we have a circle. Okay. Let's say we have an arc to like this. Okay. And I would like to add dimensions for these figures. So first step, you go to nutate like this, and the options that you will find is that when you click down here on dimensions like this, you will have several options, okay? Or let's say instead of here, or we simply we can click here. You can see this arrow sign like this. You'll find these are the options that we have. Number one, if you have a linear line, a horizontal or a vertical line. So measure that. You can see creates a linear dimension with a horizontal or a vertical dimension line. So for example, if I use a linear like this and you go here, click the first point and second point, and you can see this is our dimension, 12.7 meters or millimeter depending on the units we are using. Okay? So that is the dimension for this figure. Again, we have a horizontal line. We have a vertical line, so we can say linear two, select the first point and second point and the second measurement. Now, if we have an inclined line, this is very important and this is also helpful in some applications. If you choose linear here between this and this, what does it do? It measures the vertical distance from here to here. Okay, vertical distance from here to here. It doesn't measure the distance of this line or the length of this line. It measures the vertical distance. Okay? In some applications, it is very helpful to do using linear. Okay? So it measures vertical from this point to here, vertical distance. Now someone will say, I would like it, I would like to measure the actual length of this line. So I will read this and go to here. You will find a line. This one used to give the lens of an inclined line like this. So I will click on this and then this, and as you can see, gives you the actual lens 14.99. Okay. However, the first option gives us the vertical distance, linear gives us vertical distance and horizontal distance. The third option we have is angular. What does angular do? It measures the angle. So it says, Hey, select arc, circle, line or whatever. I will select this too. So I selected this and second line. So here we have the angle between them. As you can see, 65 degrees between these two lines. So that is the option that we have linear lined and angular. Then we have arc lens, if you'd like to measure the arc length. So if you have an arc like this, simply click on it like this and you can write its lens like this. You can see here, length of the arc, 37 point, you can see length of the arc 37.893. Okay, great. That is for arc, arc lens. Okay, great. Then we have radius. If I have a circle and would like to measure its radius, I'll select arc or a circle. So if we select the arc like this, it will measure the circle that's form. The circle is 10.8, you click like this, it will say radius of this arc or the circle that forms this arc is 10.8 or radius 10.8. We can apply this to the circle like this, radius, select the circle like this and like this. Radius 8.44 37. You can use the same trick if you would like to measure the diameter of the circuit. Again, select the arc or a circle like this and put the dimension. You can put it outside like this. You can see Pi equal to this value, or you can simply do it inside like the select circle and then put it like this. Pi 16.8 and radius 8.443 diameter and radius. Okay, another one is that we can have this jagged line in order to add dimensions four circles and arc. So we can use this and select it like this and specify center location. We can go like this and select here. So you can see we have we can add this line that shows us the center of the circuit using a jagged line like this. Different way in showing our circle or our dimension. Okay? The last one which is ordinate, ordinate, ordinate, what does it do? It gives us the coordinates of any points. Let's say, remember that we have X and Y axis. All of this figure is on X and Y axis. So if I want to know this point with respect to X and Y, this point, for example, if I click on eight like this, and if you zoom in like this, it will tell you that 40 points 38. Now, this representing the dimensions like this, Okay, let's just skip like this. Let's do it again, ordinate, select the point, and it says X or Y. For example, if I say X, it will give us X 14.0 485. If I say Enter once more, so like the point and if I say Y, it will give us 40.308, which is our Y. Again, if we read the same action like this and enter and click, you can see. Here if I go down here, it shows us the here, Y axis. And if we go like this, shows us the X X. That's the difference between it goes down, Y and this X. Again, select this point and say, I like the Y. Okay? So chose us the Y distance. Okay? Shows us how much Y distance, 40.3 and 14 is the X X. Okay? That is the coordinates part. Okay, great. What else? So let's delete all of this. Delete. Let's zoom in like this and let's say another line, for example, line and orthogonal like this, if eight skip and let's add dimension for it. You can click here dimension like this. Like this. Okay? That's for line quickly here. Or you can simply select it from here. Great. Now, what I would like to do that I would like to change this style. I would like to change the font size, the colors, these extension lines. How can I do this simply? All you have to do is click on it like this and double click. Okay, by double clicking, you can change the text and et cetera, similar to any text. However, that is what I don't want. I would like to change its style. So what you can do is that you select it and its style is standard like this. As you can see, dimension style, standard, click on this one, and then manage dimension styles like this. Now, you have in one dimension style which is standard. If I would like to create a new one, I will click on New like this. Let's say New And if I would like to modify the existing one, I will just click on Modify to change the properties of standard. So let's say I will say style that, for example, and then continue. You can see start with what style I would like to start with standard, the same style here and continue now it will open this window, which will help you to change the style such as lines, samples, arrows, text, and, et cetera. You can see this is the current style. Now, let's say I would like to change the lines. These lines, you can see here lines here, I would like to change its color. So we can change, let's say it's color to, let's say red like this. You can see these arrows or these lines will now be changed into red. Now, line type I can make it dazzle like this for the line itself, or you can make it continuous or any other value. Okay? Now, line weight, you can change even the weight of this line, making it more thick like this or making it smaller like this. Okay? Now, what about extension lines? These two lines, you can see these lines, these are called the extension lines. If I would like to change them, we can change its on color like this and make them, let's say, blue, for example, for the extension lines, and you can also change their offset from origin. You can see when I increase it like this, let's make it 0.1, for example, instead of 0.07, you can see it's now getting far away from the figure. Okay? So if you make it one, for example, you will see, look at this distance. It will become very far from it. So let's get back at 0.1, for example, like this. That's what we call offset from origin. Now, extend beyond dimension lines. You can see there is an extension of 0.18 above this one. So if I make it let's say two, you will see what I mean. You can see this line are extended by two above this dimensions. If I make it zero like this, it will be exactly on this line or this arrow here. So let's make it 0.5, for example, a little bit higher, like this. Great. And you can also change type of line line weight and et cetera from here. Now, for about samples and arrows for arrows here, I can change it. Instead of having this shape here, we can make it like this, an architectural take like this. Okay, a tech like this. Okay? You can find here also the size of the R. You can make it much bigger as you can see or smaller. It appear when I make it two, for example, you can see very large Rs. So let's make it just 0.2 and see what will happen like this. So that is the size of the R. So here we can play with samples and Rs. Now for the text itself, we can change the style of the text. So you can see this is a standard text, which is this phone type. If I go down here and make it times new Roman, let's see it times times TIM like this and like this. And you can make the font bold, for example, and you can change the height of it and apply. And close, you can see now the font change to the style of the times new Roman. There's also the alignments here, the placement of text, the text color. You can change it, for example, to green, if I would like, like this. You can also make or change color fill color that fills the text itself. Let's say, for example, yellow, it will fill this text. Of course, we don't use this feature. And you can also change the text height, which is a size of sticks. If you make it two, you will see what I mean or 1.5 and enter. You can see text became very large than before. So let's make it one, for example, like this. Okay. Then we have primary units. Here we can change the units. You can see four, six, five, eight to four disimal places. If you'd like to change it to two dismal places, it will be like this. We'd like to increase that decimal place sizes. So we can most likely we will use just two or three, Okay? Okay, now, also, that's all for it, okay? You can also find more styles here if you look carefully and play with these settings. Then, okay. Okay. So now you can see this is the original style. This style Z and close like this. Now, nothing change it. Nothing change because this style is used for any new drawing or any new dimension. So if I use this dimension, for example, from here to here like this, you can see, this is a new style that I have just made. Okay? I'd like to change this one, let's skip and select this one. And I'd like to change it. I would select the new style that I did. Okay. That is about the style and how you can do it. Now, there are some features that can help us too in the dimensions. So let's say I have a group of parallel lines. Let's say I have a line like this, vertical line like this, and enter. And then I would like to copy this one C O, Enter. And this is a base point, move one here, one here, one here, one very close, one very far, one very far like this, and skip. Now, what I would like to do I would like to find the dimensions of all of these with one click. I would like to find the distance here, here and here and here. If you have prallel lines, there is a small feature that can help you, which is called quick o, creates a series of dimensions from selected objects. Okay? It can be a series of baseline or series of circles and arcs, et cetera. Let's see, for example, let's say we have let's start with this quick like this and select objects. Let's say I would like to select all of these, okay? Then enter like this and then subsfy dimension line or position. I would like them here. The position of this dimension and click, you'll have now all the distance that you have already done. You can see distance from here to here to here to here, et cetera. Okay? Great. That is a very good feature that can help you in this one. Now, another feature that we can use to scape like this. Let's say, for example, I would like to I get dimensions, you can use also this one. What does this one do? You will see right now. So if I say quick like this and selected these two objects and enter like this and like this, we obtain this dimension, you can say continue like this, and it will continue like this, like this. Like this. What does it do? It continue? What you have done? It measures the distance between each two as you would like. Okay? So as you can see, it measures the distance from here. You can see this one is from here to here. Let's just leave this. This one from here to here, this one from here to here, here to here, this one here, et cetera. Okay? That's continue. Now, another feature, let's control Z like this. Now, another way or another feature that we have here is to quake again this one, this one, and enter, and what the dimension. Instead of saying continue, I will choose baseline like this. What does it do it measures distance from a certain baseline to anywhere. So here, for example, you can see it to this point to here, and then to here, and then to here, and then here. So what did it do exactly? It measured distance from the baseline. This is our base to here, and then from here to here, and then from here to here and et cetera. Now, let's do it again. Control Z like this. Control Z, skip, Control Z like this. Now, if you would like to make these lines from here to here, to measure from here to here, then from here to here, then from here to here, et cetera, not from here. Simply, you can click on quick like this once more, select this one and this one and enter, draw this dimension. Okay, great. Now, the second step is to click on base line like this. You'll see it says baseline from this point right from here to here. No, I would like it from here. What I'm going to do is go down here and click on select to select Base dimension. So I will click on this one like this and it will measure from here to here, like this. You can go like this, like this. Like this. Okay? So it measures from this point to the end. Okay? So these are the properties or the dimensions, how to add dimensions in autocad and the different styles and how to do this. 33. Layers in Autocad: Hey, guys, and welcome to another lesson regarding the Autocad program. This lesson we would like to discuss the layers inside the Autocad program. So layers are a very important feature that you will find here inside Autocad. So what does layer do? They arrange the drawing. So let's look at this one first at this drawing that we have inside our files of the course. You'll find that this is an apartment, as you can see here. This apartment consisting of a group of rooms, as you can see here. We have our luminars this one, this one, and this one, all of these are luminars. This one is also another luminiar, another luminire et cetera. And we have also the wiring itself, you can see, there is a wiring of these components in the program or in Autocad. This is our wiring. We have also the switches that's used to turn on and off these luminars in each room. And we have the architect itself. Here we have a balcony, this or the walls, and this is the architect drawing. Okay? And you can find here also the ticket representing for each of these elements. Now, of course, when we are working inside autocad with any kind of drawings, we don't just draw like this quickly and without any arrangement. Actually, what we do is that we have a layer four or a group of layers for the drawing or the architectural drawing, and we have a layer for these luminars as you can see here, a layer for the wiring, a layer four switches, a layer four text. And a layer for every thing inside our drawing. So where I can find these layers, I will show you right now how can you do layers. So let's get back to our drawing and we will understand these layers later in this video. So first, you will see here inside home, you will find here this tab, which is layers, this part, which is related to layers. Now, let's say we have if we look at here, we have zero layer, which is a default layer, for the program. So if I draw anything, let's say rectangle like this, o, like this, Okay. So this is our default layer. It takes the properties of the layer. So you can see this is our layer. These are the properties of this layer. You can see Pi layer, pi layer, play line weight, line type, and color, all of them pi layer. Okay. Great. So let's see if I would like to edit these layers or do anything in them. So let's say if I say L A, which is layer and enter like this, it will open this window for the layers. So if you just make it like this, let's expand this step like this, like this, like this, okay, like this, okay? Okay, like this. Okay. Let's make it bigger like this, like this. Okay. Now, you can see the default layer is layer zero, and you can see a tick beside it because this is a layer that we are currently working on. So for example, I would like a layer for architect, a layer for the luminars, a layer for wiring, to understand this idea. Order to add any layers. Now, you can see here you can see this one, new layer like this. I will make a new layer for you. Let's say this one is architect, architect or arc representing the architect drawing. Now, we will click on it and you can see these options which we will too, leave them for now. F three main options that we have color, line type, and line weight. So we can choose this color for the architect. Let's say it as red, for example, or let's make it black like this or this gray color like this. So this layer will have the gray color for the architect itself. Okay. Now, what about the type of line? I will make this line continuous or I can add any type of line. The line weight, I would like to make it thick like this. Okay. So we have this first layer for the architect drawing itself, the dimensions or the boundaries of our building. Number two, I would like another one. So you can say right click and a new layer or simply click here for a new layer. So right click and a new layer like this. Let's say another one for luminars LUM luminars. Okay? These luminars I would like them in let's say I would like them in color. Let's say yellow. Okay. I would like their line weight. To be like this, a little bit thick, a little bit, than this one, and we would like another one new layer. And let's make one for wiring to understand this idea. Luminars L or LU for wiring. Okay. Thus wiring, I would like it in red, line thickness, let's make it a little bit smaller or a little bit thick than before, like this. So we have three layers, Architect, domineers and LU for wiring. Now, let's start with the first one. Let's say I would like to get the architect. I will click here, Double click like this. We will select Double click. Double click to select the layer that you are working with. So now we are working with the architect, right? So if I close this one, you will see architect. That is the one which we are working with right now. You can see all of the ers architect, Luminar wiring and Luminar. So first, I will start with architect. So I will draw rectangle like this. Like this. Okay? Now, the line weight here is thick. However, it doesn't appear because we disabled line weight display. So line weight display like this and make it on and enter. So now you can see, these are the dimensions for this room, and we can make a door here. Let's use first brick like this and brick this object. Let's make a door like this, a door here. So we have now our building which you can have. We have a layer for it. We need the luminar, right? So I will go to a layer of luminars and start drawing my luminar. Let's say we have a circle and let's put it here like this. So you can see the circle has the same characteristics of the layer. You can see same thickness, same line type, and same color for the layer. Then I will just see O to copy like this, copy here, and put it here, then skip copy this two CO and Enter, then copy like this and put it here. Skip, then copy like this and take them here. For example, o? Of course, we don't do this in reality. We use the DalexEvO program in order to do the Luminar distribution inside a room. Okay? This is just for illustrating the Luminar, the layers. Then we are going to do wiring. I'm going to go here and say, line, Enter, like this, between these two points, I will wire them, then enter to go out of this command, then enter once more like this to draw the wiring, enter, enter again like this and enter. You can also use space, okay? Space can do the same function as Enter, space to go out and space to repeat the last action like this. Okay, and this waring will go to a certain circuit to the distribution panel. We have this wiring for this group of luminars like this, as you can see here, and we have our door. Now, let's learn what the benefit of these layers. Now we have a group of layers, three layers, one for architect, one for wiring, one for luminar. Now, using these three, you can see this light bulb, this one, which is freeze, this one, which is used to lock and unlock a layer. Let's start with the first one. So let's talk about what we are currently on. If I would like to choose anyone, I will click on it like this. Like this. Let's start with luminars. Let's say I would like to hide these luminar. What I'm going to do is simply I will go like this and next to it, you can see this pulp, I will turn on and off a layer like this. It will tell you, Hey, you are currently on luminous layer, you would like to turn it off, yes, turn it off. Okay, like this. So you are currently hide this layer. So if you get it back, you can click here. I will come back as you can see. Okay? The second option, if you have a aluminum like this, you can hide it like this and you can get it back. Okay? So that is what a layer on and off do. It simply hides and shows the drawing the layers itself, okay? The second option, which is freeze, now, if we have lumines like this and I would like to freeze this one, similar as the turn on and off, it will do the same function. So if I click on freeze like this for wiring, you can see it is heading, similar to what similar to turn on and off of a layer, right? Okay, great. However, what the difference. If I click here, it will do the same function and this one. However, there is a difference actually. Okay, let's first hide this layer like this. We hide our luminars wiring, keep the current layer like this. We turn this one off. Now we are working with it and it is off. If I just draw a circle like this, remember, it is currently our layer is wiring and it is off. If I draw anything like this, you'll see nothing happened. If I draw a rectangle, like this, you can see nothing happened. However, in reality, these two have been drawing. How, if you click here like this, congratulations. These two appeared, okay? So even if you hide these layers using turn and off, you can still add some objects which you can't even see. You can modify or add more elements to this drawing. Okay? So that's what we do, okay? It turns on and off. Okay? Now, what if I choose freeze? Let's see what freeze will do. So let's say logs like this and choose freeze like this, select this layer. So what the problem here is that if you choose freeze, what does freeze do? You can't modify this layer. It will be hidden and cannot be modified. Okay? However, turn off it, it will hide it, but you can change in it. So usually, if we have the architect building, we usually freeze it. We usually not freeze it. We use lock and unlock, okay? But anyway, freeze, clothed or hide the drawing and prevents it from being changed. However, this pulp will turn on and off, but you can modify in the drawing without seeing it, okay? Okay, so let's see the last action, which is lack. So let's say I have locked this layer, layer for Luminars. And if I click on it like this, we have selected this Luminars and we logged it. Okay? So if I go like this and select this one and delete from the keyboard, nothing happened. I would like to delete this. You see, there is a sample here that representing that this layer is lacked. You can't edit it, okay? You can see, you can't do anything. If I would like even to draw something like this. Let's say, rectangle. Like this, you can see a rectangle has been added, but it is completely locked. Why? Because this layer is locked. So if I would like to edit it once more, I will unlock like this and select this and delete. So what do we do actually in the drawing? What we do is that we lack this. So if we go to any layer like this, we like what we the architect. Why? Because if you click on anyone, if I click on the architect like this, it will be automatically switched to architect. Okay. However, sometimes I would like to just click like this and delete anything I have done. However, in order to do this, you can simply go like this, log this architect because you are not going to edit anything inside it. And then if you would like to delete this object, you can simply like this and delete, it will just delete the unlogged object. When we are working with architect here like this, you see this is architect. We should have selected this and then go here. Like this, this is a layer for this balcony here. So we are going to just lock it like this, to prevent any modification to it. If you try to modify anything, you can't, right? Even it's calorie change it. Okay? So let's skip like this, you can see you can select it like this. However, if you delete, nothing will be deleted, okay? So if I just like this and delete, it will delete just the object. Okay? So we usually use lack for layers that I'm going not to use. Okay? So for example, this one is a layer of wall. I will just go here for wall and lock it, like this. Okay, now, we learned about how to add layers. We learn how to turn them on and off and now if I would like to, let's say, for example, I would like to select this one and I would like to show this layer for luminars and hide everything else. How can I do this or lock everything else? All you have to do is click here on this pattern, isolate like this. It will lock all of the other layers. You can see logged, logged, as you can see here, all of them are locked. If you'd like to reverse this action, simply click here, which is isolated like this, everything is back to normal. Now, for example, if you would like to let's say we are working in Luminar layer, okay? And there are large number of layers. Let's say, for example, let's go here. Let's say I would like to, for example, I would like to work on wiring. However, there are large number of large number of layers. And instead of searching for this layer, I would like to do a wiring. For example, I would like to do a wiring, and I don't know which one of these layers is related to wiring. So what you can do is simply click on it like this. And click on Make current. If you make current, you can see wiring is our current layer. Let's do it for another element. If you click here like this, and this is related to Dialex and let's make current layer like this. You will see the current layer we are working with is Dalek layer. Now, if you click here, for example, like this, on this element related to wiring, if I click on Skip, it will return back to the Dialecld. So in order to keep or select a certain layer, you simply click on it like this and then make it the current layer like this. Okay. What else? So this is helpful in what? So if you look at this here, if I would like to, let's say, I would like to hide. You can see here there's dimensions. If I click on it like this, you will see the dimensions inside the drawing itself for the rooms itself, as you can see here, you can hide it like this. Then the current layer of where the dimension, this is a dimension. Let's click on it like this. We will hide these elements. Four dialects, click on it like this to return it back. You can hide using this. These are the elements that helps you in. If you'd like to show something only, you can do it like this. Now you can find here the layer architect here. You can see this tab in order to edit the layer properties, you can find LA and enter, you will get to this window, or you can simply click on layer properties to act this. Using this, you can also delete a layer or set a current layer, if you can select this one and click on this, it will make luminear the current layer. Now, when I try to delete a layer, let's say, I would like to delete this one, I will give you this error because this layer containing objects, you can delete it. So if you go back like this and select this wiring like this, deleted all of our wiring like this. Now, the layer, Luminar wire does not contain any objects. I can select it like this and delete it. So it will be successfully deleted. That is all a layers. One last thing that you will see that you can match a layer. I change the layer of selected object to match a destination layer. So if I click on it like this and selected an object, I would like to make this object part of this layer of the architect. So if I select it like this and select and enter, then select destination. This is our destination. I would like to make it like this. It will be a part of the archive. If you click on it like this, it will become architect. Okay. So that is all about the layers inside of cat program. 34. Multi-Spiral Lines and Leaders Commands: Hey, guys, and welcome to another lesson. And this one we will discuss the multi spiral line or spiral line or how to do a smooth curve inside or to cad, and we will discuss the multi later. First, we will see multi spiral line. This is very easy. All you have to do is type SBL, which is a spiral line like this. And you can make this look at what will happen exactly like this. Okay, like this. So this is called the spiral line. It can be helpful in some situations. Some engineers use this in wiring instead of straight lines, but I prefer these straight lines. So that is the spiral line. The second thing which is important, which is leader commands inside autocat program. So let's say we have this wiring here which you can see, Okay? And I would like to say, Hey, these six luminars will be going to line number one or line number three in the panel itself. We will understand this when we go much deeper inside the course. But for now, let's say, I would like to say that this wiring represent or these linears are on lightening circuit or lighting circuit, number three. So how can I do something like this? So in order to do this, all you have to do MLD, which is a multi leader like this. And what I would like to do is to put the arrow. Where are you going to put the leader? So I would like the arrow to be here. So I will click like this and drag it like this. You can see if you zoom in like this, you can see this arrow. I zoom if you make it very close, the arrow will disappear. You have to give it some space. Okay? You have to give it some space. So if you get like this and go like this and say that a one panel number one, lightening circuit number three or three. Thus representing the panel number and lighting lighting circuit. We can add also the floor number. There are different methods to write this annotation. Again, you can do it in the reversal direction like this. You can also instead of MLD, you can go to annotate and then multileader, select it like this and you can see you can write it. A one L three. Okay, like this. Okay? That is how you can add a leader to your own room. This is very important, as we will need it a lot. Okay, so what if I would like to edit these settings or this style or this style? So remember that dimensions when we had style like this and we click on dimension styles. Another way to do this in dimensions, you can see this small arrow here, click on it, and you'll find that dimension style manager. Similarly for leaders, you can see here leaders. You can click here in order to open the different styles you have or from here, manage multileader style. Both of these will lead to the same solution. So let's click here on leaders. And let's say I would like to add a new leader. Let's say new copy of standard, let's say panels, for example, or circuits, whatever it is, for example, and continue. We have a new style called circuits. Now let's look carefully here. Number one, we have leader format. You can see this is a preview for one of the styles. This is called the left attachment. We will see right now. So we have leader format, leader structure and content. So we have number one leader format. This is the format of this leader here. Number one, you can select its type, type of this line. You would like it straight line, or you would like it a spiral line. So if you look at this setting, a spiral line like this. You can see gives you a spiral shape. Usually, we choose a straight one. Number two, what color you would like? I would like, for example, green. So you have this color green. As you see here, you can also change line type and weight of this one. However, we leave them as default as you can see here. Also you can change the simple of arrow. So for example, you can log here for a dot like this. You can make it a small dot, you can make it a px and et cetera. Usually, use that close the field as it is, okay. Also, you can change the size of the arrow head. For example, if you make it 5.5, look at the size of this head, becomes very large. Let's make it 0.1. Okay, now you will see also here content for texxt here. You can see this is a multileader type text, Texas style, you can change the style of text from here. You can see standard or you can click here and you'll find other types of fonts. For example, you can see bold, Italic. No, I would like it, let's say, bold only. I would like it, for example, in a set of times New Roman, let's say, for example, um Okay, like this. And you can also, okay, italic or regular for Franklin. Okay, no problem. You can also change here size and more thing. If you click on Apply and clothes like this, you can see, take a stick, change it with respect to what style you have chosen. Okay. You can also change color. So you can see here if I would like to make this one, let's say, blue, it will be blue. If you'd like to make it yellow, it will be yellow as you would like. Also, this will change the size of text. You can see look at this one, let's say five and enter. Can see text became very large compared to line. So let's return it back to the default value. You can also find here leader connection. This depends on how you are connecting the leader. You can see leader here is on the left, as you can see here on the left. Okay? So we have left attachment. If it is on the right here, it will be right attachment. Okay? Now, we have two attachment here. We have this one left and right. Let's see their settings. Each of these have their own settings, okay? Settings for this one, you can also change the leader connection, vertical or horizontal like this, as you can see, as you would like, Okay? And you can also change the location of this one on the line center, center like this, depending on left or right. So there are many theings here as you can see, landing gap, lending gap between these two, if you make it, let's say, two, and you will see the difference. You can see gap increased between them. Let's make 0.0 minus before, like this. Now, for this part, left attachment, this one is left attachment. So we can control the location of this text. You can see if I choose, for example, bottom of top line, the text will be above like this. You can see it is above. You can also say, um n theline text like this, you can make an underline for all the text. For example, medal of the text like this. Okay, not this one. Medal of text for the left like this, which is the default, you can see medal of text, you can see the arrow and the medal of text. Here you can see bottom of top line. Okay. Let's make it, for example, top of top line. What does this mean? Look carefully here leader connections. You can see the connection of leader to the texest here at the top. You can see. You can make it also at the bottom, or you can make it at the middle. What does this even mean? It means the connection between text and this one. So let's choose someone for the left like this one, and for the right, let's make it bottom of top line and see the difference between these two. Close like this and then select these leaders and make them in this style. You can see that this one is middle of text because it is left attachment. You can see it is on the left of texxt and this one is right attachment on the right. So in the right attachment, you can see connection point in the bottom and the connection point here in the middle. You can see here, manage, modify, You can see here left, which is this one, middle, and right in the bottom of top line. So this is how you can control the style of the multileader, okay? This is for multileader, okay? You can see here, for example, this drawing here, we have, for example, let's say, the circuit, you can see here Luminar, luminous, fluorescent, and this one is another fluorescent, another one, another one, all of these are connected to the same lighting circuit, and we have a panel called A, for example, you can see that when we connected them all together, we added a leader that says A, the name of the panel and the circuit number, L one, which is lighting one. Okay? You can do this using a multileader or you can simply do it like this. You can make it a line like this, not a list. Enter, like this. Make a line like this, F eight, and enter like this. And again, like this. And if it like this and like this. And then you can hatch, etch and enter this one like this and ski. Then you can add here any text like this, here, for example, and a one like this. So you can make the same style like this one as here. And you can also change the size of this one. You can scale it, for example, like this, make it smaller like this. Okay, like this. Okay? So all of this is possible. You can delete this, take this one, move it. Move it like this, not stretch point, enter, and move it like this. Okay, we can go like this and M move and select the piece point, connect it to this one, and you will have exactly similar to leader. You can also change the color, for example, like here, make it. Let's say, yellow as before, this one, too, make it yellow. Okay, et cetera. This one, which you have seen takes a long time. However, using leaders, it makes it much simpler. Some people use the style gives an arrow, and then text, others use the style takes from the circuit, arrow outside and type that circuit on it. Both of them are correct, depending on depending on the office and the company you are working with, okay? 35. Purge Command in Autocad: Hey, guys, and welcome to another lesson. In this one, we will discuss the Burge command inside the Autocad program. So what does Purge do inside Autocad? The Purge function is used to remove unnecessary or wanted styles, unwanted blocks, unwanted features, unwanted layers inside Autocad to make it, or to lighten the drawing itself. So if you look carefully here, let's say we have layers like this, and we added group of layers, new layer like this, several new layers that are completely useless, okay? And let's say we have also four plugs. Let's say we have this plug, circle, enter like this, and we added line enter like this, and trim, remove the sport, enter, line, enter, and select at this point like this orthogonal and like this and enter. And then hatch like this and hatch this sample. Let's say that is representing our socket that we use in electrical drawing. Now, let's convert this one into block, for example, Okay, and say Power PS or pow socket and pickpoint like this, o then delete this one from here. So first thing that you see here that we have group of useless layer that we don't have anything inside them. We have a useless ploug that you even will find when we click on Insert. Like this, you'll find here our plug. However, these layers and this plug, I don't use them anymore. I would like to remove unnecessary or unused objects from my own drawing because it makes autocad lighter than before. In order to do this, we use a feature called Burge purge like this. Dent. You'll see that name items not used. So we have items like plaques, like dimension and styles, layers, materials, et cetera. So if we selected all items or burge all, what does it will do? It will remove unnecessary or unused items. It makes the autocad much faster and lighter than before. So we have Tixel style, stable style, chips, plugs, layers, dimension styles, et cetera. So if I click on Burge all like this, do you would like to burge the plug box? Yes, Burge all okay like this. Then close like this. Now, let's see what will happen. Number one, let's look at layers. You can see the unused layers, unnecessary layers or unused to be more specific have been removed. If we look at insert for object, you can see that BS is now not a value. We can see. You can't even add it anywhere like this. Okay. So that is a benefit of using perch perch helps you to remove unnecessary sins, unnecessary dimensions, unnecessary layers that wasn't used inside our drawing. 36. Changing Drawing Axes: Hey, everyone. In this lesson, we will discuss how to control the axis. You can see here axis, X and Y, this X and Y, these axes have a certain direction, X in this direction and Y in this direction. So if you draw anything like this, a rectangle, for example, you can see that if I click anywhere like this, you can see the rectangle like this, you can see it's formed in X axis direction, and Y X direction. Like this room. So we have this room. And if I would like to add any luminars let's say circle like this, o, and intra another one like this. Okay. Skip move this one, and entro like this. Let's move it like this. Okay. Let's say like this or to be much easier. Copy this one, this object and enterro and copy it from the base point here like this. Skip then copy like this. And like this and like this, okay? And these luminars will be on layer that we call luminars. Okay. Skip, this one is on layer, arctic and skip. Okay? And if I would like to do the war, I will do it like this easily, right? Of course, we don't do this. We don't add them manually. We add them using the Dex EVO program, as we will learn in the electrical design course. Anyway, what I would like to show here that you can see we add them easily with a certain distance, and we do the wiring easily, right? Now, in some cases or in some plans, we can have something like this. Let's cop this one like this. Okay. Skip, and then take this one here and rotate like this and F eight like this. Like this. Okay? Now, if I would like to let's say this is an inclined room inside the building. So let's say we have a line, another line. I'll enter like this. Um, I eat like this, okay? Enter. Okay, and enter once more like this, Enter. And like this skip trim like this and enter, and then select this one and add it to the architect layer. Okay, great. Great. So let's say we have this is a horizontal room or a corridor or whatever, and this is an inclined room. So if I would like to add objects like this one, if I would like to make it circle like this, if I try to copy it like this, and ensure. Now, if I try to copy it like this, you can see orthogonal, I can't do it. It is going vertical and horizontal like this axi x axis and Y axis like this in YX. Now, if I would like to make it parallel to it in this direction, you will have to use F eight like this to remove it. And you don't know precisely how it is like this. Okay? If you would like to make it like this and copy like this, you can't just make it actually precisely, okay? And if you try to do wiring, it is much more difficult. Now, this is a case in which we have a circle is much easier, right? We can do it, but it is more difficult. If we use luminars, let's say we have a rectangle like this. Okay, very hard. You have to make this rectangle parallel to this one. So I have to rotate it like this. Like this and try to make it parallel to this one and then copy this one like this. Okay. Then take this and copy. So it is not really precisely, okay? So how can we make it easier for us? All you have to do that instead of having, let's say, move entro like this, moving this object in orthobonal you can see it moves up, Yaxs and XX. I would like to change my own axis to B Y axis and X x. So how can I do this? So we have these axis like this Xaxis and Y axis. In order to change these axis directions, you have to use U SC, UCS, UCS, like this and enter, remove or signal like this, and we have this one. Our axis, we can control it right now. So specify origin of the axis, I would like our origin to be this point like this, and then specify point X axis. I would like X to be here like this. Specify point on X Y plane or accept. I will say enter like this, and you will see that all of your own drawing now change its direction, all of these squares, its directions or their direction, it changes to Y in this direction and X. Now, how something like this will help me. Okay. Let's say we have a rectangle. Now look carefully when we draw a rectangle. It will be drawing in this direction. So if you look like this, you look like this, you can see the rectangle is not drawing to horizontal and vertical, it is drawing parallel to the axis. If I click on it and copy like this, if I move it like this, you can see it moves freely. If I use orthogonal, you can see they move parallel to Y axis, up and down like this to the new axis and X axis like this, as you can see here. So if I go down like this, can skip then copy this CO and enter. Copy them, you can see you can move in the same direction of the drawing like this, then skip. You can see it is much easier to control or to draw several objects in an inclined drawing by changing these axes. You can take them, of course, like this to prevent them or prevent them from interrupting us and give them away like this, okay? Great. Now, what if I would like to return back to the original form or original xs. You see like this and Enter. Now, what are we going to do? Simply, we will click here. You can see these are our Xs. I will click on view like this. And everything will be back to normal. So if I draw anything like rectangle like this, and you can see the rectangle is now drawn into X and the new axis, like this. So this is very helpful in some situation when we have an inclined building or inclined room. So I would like to modify it easily. All I have to do is to change these axes with respect to this room. Okay, great. 37. Drawing Fluorescent Symbol and Replace Block Command: Hey, guys, and welcome to another lesson. And this one we would like to learn or learn how to draw the fluorescent sample. Okay? A simple four fluorescent lamp, it is not all the lamps will be represented like this. However, this is just an illustration or an application of what we learned. So in order to do this, all you have to do a rectangle like this. This is just for practice. Like this, very large. Make it rectangle like this, smaller rectangle. Let's go here like this. Then draw two lines, line like this and enter, and then another enter to repeat the action or space and then enter, then a circle like this. Okay. Then I would like to remove these lines. I will use trim, TR, and enter, delete this object or these parts. Then I would like to use hatch, H to hatch, and I would like to hatch them using this one. For example, let's say, um, any type of hatching, like this one, for example, let's say here. Okay, just one line. Okay, so let's make it more smaller than before, let's say, 0.1 and enter. Let's make it 0.01. Okay? Like this, hatching appeared, and then hatch it once more here also. You can see here. And then I would like to change the color. Let's make it green, for example, like this. Like this and skip. Okay? And then we will say, this is a fluorescent type a tickst like this, add this text here. Okay, floscentlow Fluorescent. Um Okay, like this, let's say three X, for example, 30, what? Okay? For example, right? I don't know, actually the so we can move it like this. Okay? We can also double click like this and make it in the center alignment and center. Okay. Then take this one like this. Skip. Okay. So we can also take this one. Instead of here, let's make it down here, for example, like this. So let's say we have the simple for a fluorescent lamp. But before anything before converting this into a block, I will make them on one layer, let's say, a layer zero, for example, like this, and then use a plock Okay. Let's say F fluorescent, Luminar like this, and make a point. Let's choose any point like this. Okay. Okay, so I don't know why the hatching changes. Let's edit this block like this. And delete this hatching. Do it once more like this, edge, and enter like this, here and here, and then close. Block save changes. And now we have our block for the fluorescent lamp, okay? But first, let's make this one more different block like this. Let's say line, Okay? Like this and enter another line like this, any random object, okay, like this. Delete this one, delete this delete this one, two, this one, and this one. Okay, let's make these two as color off. Let's make tread, for example, or like this, okay? Let's say, for example, this is a linear. Make it a block like this. Okay? Circle luminar, okay? And pick a point, this one, okay. Okay? So we have this one as another block, and let's copy it like this. Okay? If it like this, like this. Skip, Cup is a swan to from here to here like this and like this, okay? Now let's say I would like to replace this one, this plug with this one. How can I do something like this? You can use a function which I didn't explain, plug, replace like this and enter. It will tell you the exa plug you would like to replace. I would like to replace the circle luminar. Okay? And SelexaPloq to replace this one. I would like to replace it with FLU okay. Okay, Burge on reference item when finished, to Burge on used like this. So as you can see here, now, this block replaced all of these blocks, for this luma, this can be helpful in some applications. Instead of going take each alumnus and get back each alumia make it back, it will be much easier to use this replace function in order to replace each object with another one. 38. Printing Options of an Electrical Drawing: Hey, guys, and welcome to another lesson. This one we took about the branting of our Autocad drawing. So we have this drawing. Let's go to another one. You can see this one is an electrical drawing consisting of luminars as you can see all of the luminars inside our drawing like this. Different rooms. Like this, each has their own luminars. You can see these luminars which can be done using Dalek EVO or Dalek red programs. Both of them will lead to the same stuff, and you can see this representing the circuits, different circuits, and the panel, as you can see here. We will talk about the architectural drawing or how to read this drawing in the next lessons, don't worry about this point. Okay, so you can see there are power circuits like this, and we have miners, as you can see here. And this is our legend. Now, let's say, for example, I would like to let's move all of this. Move anywhere like this, put it here. Okay? Now, first, I would like to brnt this drawing. In order to pnt this drawing, you have two options. Either to use Control B, Control P, or plot like this, plot. And enter. It will give you, Hey, you are opening multiple drawings or layouts. You can see one, two, three. Would you like to patch a plot to plot or plot multiple drawings at the same time, or you would like to plot single sheet? For now, I would like to plot a single sheet as you can see here. Now, you will see these options when you open any print or if you would like to print any drawing. Number one, here, if you have an already setup page setup that you have already done before, the setting that you would like to do when you print this one. We'll see these are the setting that you have currently in plotting or in printing. The first one, which is printer, which printer you would like to use to brnd this stuff, you would like to print this DWG drawing. So choose a printer that's suitable for you and connect it to the PC to print this drawing. So for now, I would like to make it as a BDF. So you will choose the option DWG to BDF like this. This will not print in the printer, but it will convert this one into PDF. Number two, you will see here paper size. So we have different types of paper that are used in different types of drawing, not just electrical, but all types of drawing. We usually use a A, A two, and a one. So for example, I will choose a drawing. You can see two types of A, this one and this one. What's the difference between them? Let's see. So if I choose A one, 420 multiplied by 297. L. Lens, multiplied by weights you can see here. This is as an image you can see here, 420 like this and two lines of xs. If I choose a second option like this, it will be 297 and as if it is rotated. Don't worry it will never matter because we are having the portrait and landscape orientation which will help us to identify this. So for now, let's say we will choose this one Okay, so this is for people size. Number two, plot area. What area do you would like to plot? Okay. Now, here we have several options. We'll talk about three of them right now. Number one, display. What does it do? If you select it to plot display, what will happen? It will plot the current display. So if you look at the display right now, this is our display, which you see right now, it will plot it as it is, okay? So if you click on here on preview like this, you can see it plotted the exact what we have just seen. Okay? Now, for example, click on escape to get out of this. Now, let's say, let's say, for example, if I selected, okay. So if we zoom in like this, okay? And then we do plot one more like this. Okay? And you will see this is our display, right? Now, plot two display again. Now, let's make this to BDF like this. Now let's review our drawing. If you look at this, this is what we see in this drawing. Now, another option here which we always use centers of lot to center this image to the printer, you can see, what we see on the display is centered here. If we remove this option, scape like this, remove this option and review once more, you can see it is not centered. Okay. Okay, that's the first option. This play, what we have just seen right now. The second option, which is extends it to everyone. So if we click on Preview, it shows you the extent of your own drawing, everything inside our drawing. Okay? Now the option which we usually use, which is very important, which is Window. What does Windy do? It selects a specific part. Let's say I would like to print this drawing on. So I'm going to select it like click and select the area I would like to print, this one. So if I click like this, like this, we selected this area, right. Now let's look at the review once more. This. You can see the selected area is now being blotted. However, there are some parts that are cut out. So I'm going to go back here and centers a plot like this. This is very important and review. You can see now the selected part is shown in our printer, as you can see here with their own colors. Okay. Great. Okay, number three, so we learned about this type of printer, type of people sizing, what to plot. Here, this window is very important. Select what part to be drawing. If we select this like this review, it will just print this legend part. However, you can see the yellow color is not appearing, right? Yellow color is not appearing. This is a common problem when we pnt these figures. So if I would like to, let's say, I would like to change this any any yellow color inside the drawing into let's say plaque. I I would like to change it into black, how can I do something like this? So the first step that we have here, several styles of printing. Okay? We use usually the swan ACAT and monochrome. The ACAT gives us colored output, Monochrome gives us a black and white output. Okay? The rest are several degrees and several options. So for example, let's say ACAT and see what will happen, like this and preview Look at here, all of the drawing is colored, nothing changed, right? However you choose the monochrome like this. This and the preview, you can see everything in our drawing became black and white, everything now black and white. Okay. Now, let's say if I would like it colored like this. However, however, I would like to replace let's select Window first like this, all of these, like this. Let's say I would like to replace every yellow color with black without editing in my own drawing. What I'm going to do is simply go here. You can see I selected the colored, then click here to edit. Then the color yellow, I would like to change it to what is object color which is yellow. No, I would like to replace each yellow with plaque. Now, if you look at the other colors, you can see all of them use object color. So if it is red, it will be red. If it is purple, it will be this one. If it is purple, it will be purple. If it is pink, it will be pink, et cetera. For yellow, it will be black. Now, let's see what will happen exactly. Look at the drawing for each of these yellow color. And let's say review like this. Look at the yellow colors. All of yellow colors change into black, and you can see these plugs were yellow, changed into black, and the rest of colors are the same. That's a very helpful option inside the drawing of at cat. Now, quality let's make it maximum. You can change the quality of DBI as you would like. It will affect the size of the BDF file, since we are converting it into BDF and selected window. Now, we have two options here, portrait and landscape. So we have seen landscape like this, and let's look at it. You can see this is our drawing and in landscape, right? Okay, now, let's say if we choose a portrait like this, you can see it changed. Let's look at the preview. You can see our drawing became portrait. You can see. It doesn't fill the whole paper. You can see some space here, some space here. Other drawings can be in portrait direct direction, so I will change them in a portrait. Okay? Now, for now, let's look at landscape like this. You can see it fills the whole paper. Let's just make it more smaller like this. Like this. Okay, and click another one. And review like this, you can see it is now feeling more this drawing, okay? Okay, there is another option which you can see here, plot object line weights. Let's look at the BrevewOce more. You can see there are objects which you have light weight, and these are more visible, right? There are lightweight and heavy line weight. So if you'd like to make them all similar to each other, we can disable line weight, plot object line weight like this, and Beview like this. Now look carefully what will happen. You can see all of the colors are now having the same weight. If you look at here, you can see they are all having the same weight, like this. Okay? If you choose the first option, which we use sometimes like this, you can see the different weight is now shown in the figure. Okay? Now, if I would like to save this style, we have saved this one. I will just click on ad like this and make it set up, let's say, electrical one. Okay? This is a setup electrical elect call one. Okay? This is a setup for any future drawings. Okay? So it is now saved here. Okay? Now, if I click on Okay, remember that if we click on Okay, it will print. However, we don't have any print right now, so I can change it DWG to BDF. So if I click on Okay like this, go to desktop like this and floor Okay, so now we have our BDF file or BDF drawing. Close this one. Okay. We can zoom in like this, and we have everything that we are looking for, as you can see here. Okay? The same drawing but in BDF format. So in this lesson, we learned about the printing options inside the Autocad program. 39. Autocad Menu Bar and Autosave Feature: Hey, guys, and welcome to another lesson. And this one, we will discuss two important features inside autocatPgram. One of these features was in the previous versions of Auto CAT. Okay. So the first feature that I would like to say that in the older versions, we had some tool pars like this tool par on the side, toolbar here, which makes it easier to draw or modify our drawing. So someone will say, Where are these tool parts? In order to activate these tool pars, number one, you have to type menu, pa like this, Menu par, as you can see, and then Enter. It will tell you Enter a new value for menu par. It is currently zero, okay? That's why we don't have here any settings for tool pars or menu par. So if you click one, and enter look carefully what will happen in this part. Okay? Look carefully on this part. You will see a menu par will appear. So click one, you will see this menu par which was hidden, okay? This one contains lots of features that are very helpful. Okay? You can see you can do insert. You can see layers. You can see here tools, draw, all of the drawings that we have discussed, polygon, polyline lined ray. This one is also helpful ray, which can be like this. Let's activate all s gona like this. Like this, you can see it goes to infinity, Control Z like this. You can see here different types construction lines, multilines, polylines, arc circle. Even with their onset you can see circle, if you would like it with center and radius, center and diameter, two points as you would like. Here you can see a plug to make a plug, hatching. You can see it is very easy instead of typing the command here, you can do it directly from here. Also, you can see here dimensions. Linear, aligned or cleansed, ordinate, et cetera. Okay? And you'll find here all of the modified tools like moving, rotating, scaling figure, trimming, break, join, chamfer, fillet, et cetera, okay? Okay, so also there is another one. Not only this menu, we can go to tools here, which appear, and you go to tool pars, then select Autocad Look at carefully at draw. You can find this par here, which is for drone, you can see here. You can find here line structure lines, a polygon, rectangle, arc circle, et cetera. You can also add another tool par, which is for modification like this, modify you can see some helpful tools like skill like move, rotate, et cetera. You can see very easy. And instead of typing, you can simply click like this and draw the line that you would like to do like this. Okay, very easy. There's another one too, which you can add also that dimensions. If you click on tool parts or to cat and dimension like this, you'll find here's a tool part. You can drag it and move it like this. For tool part like this, which you can have. For every dimension you can choose this one to measure the lens of any figure like this, and you can choose even the style from here. Okay? Or this method helps us in simplifying our process or our modification or our drawing inside the Autocad program, ok? So if you'd like to disable all of these, all you have to do is go to tools like this. And you can see here tool parse and then deactivate each of these figures like this, tool parse and deactivate. In order to hide this one, simply type menu por once more, enter and this time, make it zero in at of one like this and you will see the tool par or menu p has been heading. That is the first feature that I would like to discuss in this one. Another feature which is also important and helpful. Now we talked about saving, right? We said save in order to save our file. Now, if I would like to save it in a location, you can use save as like this or from here. You can see save as here or simply from here. If you click on save as, you can save the file as you would like with the extension depending on what version you are using or even if you would like to prepare the drawing for older versions like 2013. Okay? And then in the end, click on Save. Great. Now, there is another one which is auto save feature. It helps you to auto save the drawing, even if you don't do anything. Okay? I saves every 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, and also creates a pack up, okay? So that if you're on Autocad program frozen or suddenly closed for any reason, you will have a pack up of what you have already done. So someone will say, Hey, how can I do something like this? Simply, you can right click here and click on options or simply click on this one and options here. Okay? Both of them will lead to the same option. Then we go to open and save like this. And then if you go down in, you can see automatic save. You have to take this one and activate it and make two, let's say, 1 minute let's say 0.5. If it is possible, no, it can't give than 1 minute. Let's say 1 minute as a pack up and also take this one, create a pack up copy with each save. Even if you save, it will create a new copy. As a pack up, if this copy has any issue, okay? So then you click on apply to do this. And then another one if you would like to choose, you can also choose what extension you would like to save in, save as 2018, and even you can see here in files, and then to save, let's see, automatic save file location, this one, you can see this is a location at which we which contain the save or the backup or automatic file location. So if you'd like to change it, you can simply click on brows like this and choose what location you would like to save Okay, now for now, we will click on Okay like this. Okay? So it's already saved in this location in local temporary and et cetera. Okay, so if we enjoy anything like this inside the program, let's say we do something like a room or rectangle like this, make this rectangle on a layer of architect, okay? Then let's add some luminarsRctangle, like this. Okay, and make this one in luminars like this, and then copy it. So and enter, copy it from this space point like this. Okay? Scape and CO and copy from this base point like this. Okay? Then we can move it a little bit like this. Okay? Of course, we will learn how to do the exact design for luminars inside the electrical design course. Okay? Okay, so let's see the commands here. You can see automatic safe to see. Let's see what will happen after some time. Let's do some wiring like this and line. Like this and enter enter once more, like this. Enter, enter once more, like this. Enter, Enter once more, another one, like this. Okay? Great. So we have done what we would like to do, and 1 minute has been passed, I think, 1 minute. So let's go to here and options. Okay, let's see the file location here. Okay, so it is in C users, application data, local temporary. Okay, so let's see it like this. Let's go like this. Okay. Go to C and then users invest and then application data, application data, this one. You can see application data is already hidden. So if it is not available for you, you can simply go to folder options view and then show hidden files and folders. Application data, local, I think, Autodesk right, local temporary, okay, temporary. Um, here, go down temporary like this. And okay. Okay, drawing one, you can see this one. Okay. Great. So what we are going to do is say cancel from here. Okay, you can see automatic safety as drawing one underscore one under school one, seven, 87, right, like this. That's what has been done right now. Okay? So if you look at the file, drawing, drawing 1178, this is our file. Okay? The same name as this one. Okay? Okay, so let's say, for example, we didn't click on Save Right. We didn't save anything as you have seen, right? So if I click on Task Manager and prog the program suddenly, ACAT, A CAD, there's one, and in disk, you can see you would like to save. Okay, it's automatically closed suddenly using this one. So if I click Double click here, now you can see in your previous work session, the program terminated unexpectedly. You can restore unsaved changes from a pack up file by using the drawing recovery manager. Okay? So you can see here pack up from here for the drawing, we can see one, two, and three. This is the original drawing. You can see we added here a part of the drawing, which doesn't appear right here. However, this one is our backup that contains this. If I double click on it, congratulations. You get the backup file for your own autocat. Okay. So this one, then what are we going to do? Simply, I will close this recovery manager and save as, go to desktop and save it with other file like this. Okay? This is open. Okay, so let's close this one. Like this and save this one S, go to drawing one. And yes, okay? So this is our drawing number one is now saved even if the program crashes. Okay? This is a very important feature to prevent losing of your own data, or your own drawing suddenly without any warning, okay? 40. Organizing and Preparing Architectural Drawings for Electrical Design: Hey, guys, and welcome to another lesson in our course for electrical design. And this lesson, we will learn how to prepare an architectural drawing for electrical design, and also we will learn how to organize our folders for any electrical project. Okay? So we would like to know the initial steps or the organization step for our project or any project in general, okay? So, number one, when we are working on a new project, we need to have separate folders. So for example, we have number one, a folder with the project name. Let's say you are working on 20 projects or certy projects, you would like to separate them with a folder name. So we have each project with a certain name. So we have first main folder consisting of group of folders inside it. So we have the project name folder, the main folder. Then inside this one, we will have separate folders. We will have an input folder, an output folder, and a draft folder. The input folder, it means that any input to yourself or any input given to you. What I mean by this input given to you. For example, when we are working on any project, we will have architectural plans, we have mechanical plans. We have low current plans that are designed by low current engineer, or it can be designed by an engineer like me. Then we have another folder for client requirement and another folder for interior design. So we have these plans, architectural plans that I'm going to use in design, and also the mechanical plans in order to see where the HVAC is installed or any mechanical parts to avoid any conflict as we learned in the previous lessons inside our course. Then we have low current plans that's consisting of, which is designed by o current engineer. These contains the fire alarm system, the CCTV system, METV system. And the sound system and et cetera any related low current systems, including also telephone systems, data systems, et cetera. Then we have another folder for client requirements. If the clients required special requirements for electrical system. Let's say, for example, he needs certain types of sockets, certain types of luminars, certain types of, for example, HVAC or AC split system, whatever it is any requirements of the clients, I will put them in this folder. Then we have interior design. So for example, we have an engineer which is related to decorations, right, responsible for decoration of the building itself or the system that we have. So this engineer will have specific requirements, or it will give you specific luminars that you are going to use in the DalexO DalexRd in order to design the lighting system. So with cooperation with this engineer, you will be able to select the right luminars and you will have discussions with him in order to satisfy his requirements for the decoration, okay? So all of these are considered as input from other sectors. Then we have output, what I'm going to do a folder consisting output of this design. So my responsibility will include number one, lighting design, lighting system design, adding luminar formation of luminars inside or adding luminars to DalexevO. Then we are going to do the wiring, adding of switches, depending on what gang, as we will learn inside the course, also in addition to wiring, in addition to formation of circuits of lighting systems. Then we have power system, which is power circuits, which includes the sockets, the H air conditioning systems, the electric heaters, et cetera. Then we have panel folder for panel schedule in order to balance between the three phases, selection of breakers, selection of cables, as you will see inside the course. Then we have single line diagrams showing the whole system when it takes from the main distribution port and going to each apartment or going to each part of the building. Then we have pill of quantity in order to understand how the quantity required inside our project and specification of this or specs for this project. Now, for lighting system, this includes a number one DalexRport. Remember that we are going to design the lighting system using DalexEvPgram or Dix red program. So when we have the result or lax report from DalexPgram, I will need to give it to the client, so I will add it to this folder. Of lighting system. Number two, the lighting design itself, adding luminars autocad drawing, adding wiring, adding switches. All of this is inside this folder. Okay? Then we have another folder called draft. What does this folder contains? This folder contains any old design. So for example, if I did the initial design for all of this and then after I send it to the site engineer or the engineer related to the constructing company, then this engineer tells me that we need to modify something inside the drawing. So after modification, we need to again change all of this to new design. So any old versions of designs or any revisions that are done on this project, we have to add it in a draft folder called a draft inside it, we have revision one, revision two, and these revisions will have their own date. Let's say the first revision, revision one, like this, revision one, let's say, for example three, 1020 to 25, for example, we have first folder. I know that the first revision occurred on this date. And if the engineer or any engineer, let's say we have different revision, let's say ten revisions, Okay? So if the engineers, hey, we reversed our decision and we don't need this revision. Let's get back to Revision eight or Revision nine and use this design. So you have to keep a folder for a draft or any older designs or any revisions because this is important, okay? To prevent repeating any kind of design. Okay, so you don't need to have to do this design once more. Okay, like this. Number two, we have in this draft, remember that in DalexPgram, this Dalexs program will give us will contain a project with the extension of DalexEv or DalexRdPgram, DalexEV or DalexRdPgram, and we will have also an AutoCAt file coming out from DialexEV All of this we will leave it inside a folder CAT file from DalexEV and DalexEvPject. In addition to the CAT file that we have added originally to DalexEVO DalexRd. Okay. So we don't use them later. However, these files are important. In order if we need any kind of modification, we can get back to this project. Okay? So this is just an overview about the folder. So let's get out from this presentation and see this in real life. So if we look at here, let's say we have a project, new capital project 20 certi five, for example, okay? This is a project that we are working with. If I double click on it, you will find what I'm talking about. We have an input folder, out folder, and draft. Number one, input folder. You can see architectural plans, client requirements, interior design. Low current plans and mechanical. Any of these plans or any of these BDF files, we will add them here. Okay? Architectural plan, this is the administration building that we are working with, like this. Then number two, you will see here Abbot. Here we have lighting system design, pine schedule, pol system, single line diagram, BOQ et cetera. And we have this for draft or any additional or any revisions, as we have said before in those slides. Okay? So this is how you can organize any project you are working with. The step number two is to do these following steps. Okay? Let's go and see them. Step number two is preparing the architectural drawing for our project. So number one, if you look at any project, you will find that we have, let's say, one DWG file, which is Autocad drawing file. This drawing file can contain floors. Let's say if you are talking about a administration building. This administration building will contain first floor, second floor, third and fourth, et cetera. So each of these floors, the first step that we will take this DWG file and divide it into four DWG files. So we will put each floor in a separate DWG file to make it to cat fast and we don't do all the designs in one cat, but we divide them. So for example, we will take the first floor in a folder, second floor, in a folder, not folder in a DWG file, et cetera. So each of these is in a separate file. Okay? That is the first step. Number two, we will convert. You will see that each of these drawings, the auto cat drawings in the architectural drawing, they have different colors. So we are going to change the color of all of these drawings into gray, gray with a code eight inside autocat program, or Code 25, two. This can be done by exploding the blocks inside autocat program or changing the colors of layers. We will see how to do this right now. Number three will find in these drawings, we will have different axes. These axes are helpful in the construction process of the drawing. Not for me but for the site engineer. What I'm going to do that I will take these axes and hide them inside the drawing. Number four and the final step is to lock the architectural layers to prevent any modification to it. So after changing it into gray and hiding these axes, we will just all of these in order to prevent any kind of modification to it by mistake. Now let's go and see how are we going to do this. Okay, so we have let's double clock here, and you will see number one input. This is the architecture so I'm going to take a copy like this, and go here to AbuT Lighting system, and paste. Like this. Number one, I'm going to double click on it like this. Okay? So I have opened. Let's close this one. So I have opened the project and you see one, two, three, four, five, six. So how many projects we have a basement or how many floors, basement, ground, first, second, third, and fourth. Okay? So we have one, two, three, four, five, six floors. Okay? Now, you'll find this plan that fives, okay, fourth floor and third and second, first, ground, all of them are identical to each other in this building. You can see here this architecture plan, exactly the same as this one, exactly similar to this one. So what are you going to do in these floors, and the basement is the one that is different from them because it contains a parking area and et cetera. Forget about the basement for now. Now let's focus on the important part, which is these floors. Now, you will see that ground, first, second, third and fourth, all of them are similar to each other, right? Okay? Now, what I'm going to do is that I'm going to design lighting system and the lighting system, number one, number two, the power system, number three, the panel schedule for one floor, and I will just say that all floors are typical. Typical means that all of these are similar to each other. The design here is similar to this one, similar to this one because they are similar to each other. So I'm going to take just one floor, which is, for example, ground and work with it. Okay? So the first step is that I'm going to take this. Like this, and you have two options. Number one is to control C like this, to copy and then open a new drawing like this, like this and control V like this. Okay? So we'll have the floor as you have seen like this, and it will take the same plug. So we say, Okay. Now this is our plan that we are working with, right? Now, I'm going to save it like this. And here, let's say, ground ground floor like this, okay? And safe. Then let's get out from here. You can see here, ground the floor, okay? Now, this ground floor, we are going to take a copy like this. Go to panels go to not panels KiuG to power system and leave it here because it's the same drawing. Now go to lighting system here. We have ground, then you can copy this. So let's maximize this. The second step is to change the color the of all of this drawing into what into the gray. Now, how can I do this? You can see that each of these, you can just do like this and keep changing each color. What you have to do assembling like this. Go to layers LA and like this. You'll find here all of the layers in this architectural building. Next step is that click on any of these and control like this to select all then click on any color of this. Let's say, for example, this one, and change this into 252 like this or color eight. If you go here to color here, this is color eight, inside the drawing, or you can see here 25, two. They are almost very close to each other. To gray colors. T or this will be suitable. Click on it like this. You can see all the colors here. But someone will say, Hey, I'm looking for color eight, it's very difficult to find it. Let me show you something which is easier than looking it here. You'll see that here, you can type the name. Let's say if I type color, this one is 90, right? So if I type 90 and okay like this, you'll see all layers changed into green, right? Now, if I'd like any color, such as color code two, five, two or eight, simply eight and okay like this, all of them change into gray, right? So the first step all layers, it changes into gray. Now, you will find that most of these drawing it changed into gray. However, there is still some which is like this one, for example, which is not gray. This one is not gray. So I'm going to do that, I'm going to select them like this and then choose color to be gray like this. Now, if the color does not change, also, if you click like this, it doesn't change. Let's see, it doesn't change. It means that this one is a black. So what you are going to do is simply like this, go like this. And explode like this, okay, several times, Explode, like this, like this. Okay? Let's say three times because there are some blocks which are inside other blocks. And then click on them like this. Okay, like this, and you can even change it here by layer like this. And skip like this. Now, let's see. You'll see that these colors change into gray right, as we have just seen. However, these samples didn't change. So it is a black. So if we double click on it like this and okay and then we select this one and changed its color here into layer like this and close save changes. Now look carefully at the drawing. All of the drawing changed into gray. This is very helpful as it will help us in design drawing. So then we are kicking into save to save what we have just done. That is step number two, if I remember, step number three is to hide these axis. So how can I hide them? Simply, if you click on them like this, like this, you will see its layer is aces. So I will go here and turn it off by clicking on this button or simply you can click on Freeze to prevent any kind of editing on it. So freeze is much better solution like this. So it will hide all the axis of the building. So you can see the building itself, you control Z like this, control Z. Like this, nothing happened to the building only these axes have been frozen like this. Okay? Great. It is helpful for other engineers which are going to work on this project. However, for me, it will not differ at all. Okay. Now, what the next step is that I don't need these dimensions for now. So I will click on this one. You can see xs name. So I will froze them like this to remove all of this. You can see here this one, dimension out, freeze like this. And you'll see this or lead to layer zero. If I freeze it like this, it can't be frozen. Okay? So this is a part of four dimensions. Okay? So I can simply control like this one, two, this one. If I frozen like this, it will remove all walls. Okay, we can't remove this one. What we have to do is just select them like this and remove this, two like this and select this, like this. Zooming here. Okay. Like this. Now, as you can see, we have cleaned our plan. You can see it is very clear right now. You just have to remove these samples if you find any interruption when you are doing the drawing design or the electrical design. If you don't need them, just delete them. You have this gray plan which is clear for us right now. Now, what are you going to do simply just take a new layer, LA name it as architect architect like this and enter. And then what you are going to do is simply select all of these like this, add them to architect, and then lock this layer to prevent any kind of modification on it. So we have added this layer you can see it is very light color Cos you can see all of this is locked. So if you try to delete anything, nothing will happen. I try to delete anything, you can see nothing happened at all. Okay. So this is how you prepare a plan for your projects. 41. Introduction to Lighting Design: Hi and welcome everyone to our course for electrical design. In this lesson, we are going to discuss the lighting design steps. Okay, so in this section of our course, we need to understand the steps required to design our lighting system. Lighting design steps are following. Number one, we have to select the luminaires in rooms. And what I mean by luminaires, symbol definition is lamps, okay? It is not basically only lambs, but lambs, enclosure and diffusers. Okay? So luminaire is assembly is the one which we use to light our room. So we need to learn how to select this luminaires. Okay? Now, the selection, of course of luminaires, we need to understand some concepts. And also we need to understand the different types of luminaires. Their selection of Lumiere is done using a manual calculation or dialects, a program or dialects evil program will find in the course of diuretics and dialects evil programs, usually the manual calculation exhaustive for knowledge. We don't use the manual calculation. We use our dialects Eve, okay, so when we select our luminaires inside any room, okay, we will add that result on to blend inside the auto CAD program. And why do we need AutoCad? Autocad program is used for wiring the luminaires, add wires to this luminaires, also adding lighting switches in rooms, also using AutoCad. And then we are going to calculate all the loads in our lighting system. We will add all of our elements on order to understand or to get the total value of fluids and do the panel schedule. And also we will then be able to select as a circuit breakers and the cables are required in our electrical system. Okay, is this assembly is a step so which we are going to do. So first in this section, we will learn about different types of luminaires, selection of luminaires, czar, concepts in lighting design. And then we are going to do some manual calculations for knowledge. Then we're going to do go to the bile XORed and by Alexi. Okay. 42. Construction of Lighting Fixture: Hi and welcome everyone to this lesson in our course for electrical design. In this lesson, we are going to discuss the construction of the lighting fixture or that luminaire. The lighting fixture or zoom-in here is the one which we use in lighting our system. If it is a building, if it is factory, if we are talking about the street lighting and so on. So any lighting fixture which is used to produce light, have or has some components. So what is the construction of a lighting fixture? Here's an example, as you can see here is this is called a lighting fixture. As you can see, it contains inside IT group of lamps, lamps and z enclosure outside and consisting of something called the distributor inside it. So the lighting fixture has three components. The first one is the lamps, and we are going to discuss the types of lamps in the next lessons. And second thing is the enclosure, which is this, which contains all of our components such as lamps. And also find that the distributor, that distributor is something here below, is lamb, which is used to distribute the light. Okay? So the distributor simply helps us in defining the polar curve. The polar curve we are going to discuss it in the lesson of polar curve. Okay? So anyway, it's a polar curve representing the distribution of light. So as you can see here, e.g. we can have a distributor like this. We have a lighting in this direction, focused in this direction and below and on the side and in-between them. Small light. Okay. Or we can have something distributed like this or it is something focused on one location. Okay. Or it can just focused on beneath the lighting itself and so on. So as you can see, all of these are different types of distributors. Okay, so let's set a beautiful defines the direction or the distribution of the lighting fixture, okay? Or the distribution of light itself. It helps us in defining their polar curve, which we are going to discuss in another lesson, which is called the polar curve. Okay? 43. Types of Filament Lamps: Hey everyone. In this lesson, we are going to discuss the types as types of lamps, or the first type of lamps, which is called the filament lamps. Okay? So the filament lamps is one of the types of lamps which are used in our lighting fixture. Okay. So what does a filament lamp mean? Okay. So simply add filament lamp. It means a lamp which consisting of all has the lamp has a filament. This one, this is small wire is called filament. Okay? So as an example, in this lesson we will discuss the types of filament lamps. So we have larger category or that tree which has two main branches. The first one is the filament lamps. Second one is a gas discharge lamps, and we have also the LED lamps. So the filament lamps is the one which we will discuss in this lesson, which has many types. The first one is called desire incandescent lamps. The incandescent lamps is the first type of filament lamps, which is shown in this figure or in this images. As you can see here. All of these are called filament lamps or incandescent lamps are type of a filament lamp called incandescent lamp. This type of lambs, how does it work? It's simply an incandescent lamp or bulb or based on the principle of incandescents. Okay, what does this mean? It means is that the light, this slide produced from our lamp or our pulp is produced the two tools, the basis of heat or heat energy. So in an incandescent bulb like this one, e.g. on the right side. And electric current is passed through as sin metal filament. This is our metal filament. So the current we have supposed to have and the negative, the current deposits through this filament. So what will happen? This filament will be heated. It will have large heat energy. So this will lead to, it's glowing. And in the end production of flight like this. So again, assemblies adds up. The current flow is through this thin filament is a send metal filament leading to that glowing of this filament and producing light. Like here. This type of lamps have a CRI or color rendering index of 100 and a yellow color, only one color, which is the yellow color. And what does the color rendering index is? This will be discussed in another lesson. You will find it in the course. And let's open up our color rendering index. Okay, so having a value of 100, what does mean it is the highest value. What does this mean? Simply, it means it will show us all of the objects with its own a rail colors. So hundred means the highest Visibility, All the best visibility of the colors of an object. Okay. Now, this type of lamps is used usually in decorations like Chandler's inside our home. However, remember that this type is he has, or this type of lamps has high consumption of electricity, high consumption of electricity. So we usually don't use it in projects because it is, it will lead to high cost of energy. Okay, So we don't use the filament lamps or incandescent incandescent time in their home or in our home. So second type of the filament lamps is called is a halogen lamps, which is like this. You will usually find it also in your own home. Okay? So this halogen lamps, simply, they are known for reserve high efficiency and the quality of light and the high rated life convert to the regular incandescent lamps as far as the previous one. In the typical incandescent lamp is a tungsten slowly evaporates from the burning filament. The thin filament here. As you see, this send metal filament is made of tungsten, okay? So due to the presence of electric current here, is this metal salt is a vibrating with time. And this evaporated tungsten, where it will go, it will go on the glass itself. It will give us a black color on the gloss, which will lead, of course, to lower lifetime of the device. Or that lamp. Okay. So however, in the halogen in the halogen pipe, something which is different, what is it, as you can see in the normal incandescent lamp? This will lead to black meaning of the lab because all of that Augustine is evaporated, will accumulate on the glass itself, which will reduce the light output and reduce as a lifetime. Now in the halogen lamps, procedure is different than a tungsten filament evaporates again by releasing particles or tongue Gaston vapour. Okay, same as the previous LAM. However, here we will have inside this ball or inside this lamp, we have a halogen gas. We have a halogen gas. This gas inside the glass envelope will lead to creation of tungsten halogen molecule so that evaporated tungsten combines or Jew, a chemical reaction with the halogen inside this ball. Okay? What it will do, or what it will lead to. This will lead to formation of a molecule called the tungsten halogen molecule. Wins the halogen goals Darwin. When you turn it off and cools down, the halogen itself is a halogen gas cools down. That Angostura molecules. Well, tungsten halogen molecule will separate from each other so that tungsten itself or the evaporated tungsten will return back to that filament. Okay? It will migrate back to that filament, which will lead to eliminating blackness of the glass envelope. So again, what is the difference? The difference is that inside that incandescent lamps, that evaporated tungsten accumulates on the glass itself. However, here in the halogen, the evaporated tungsten, well combined with that, they've overwritten. Tungsten will combine with the halogen gas, leading to the formation of something called a tungsten halogen molecule. When we turn off the light and the halogen goals down or the temperature decreases, they will separate from each other and the tungsten will return back to the filament. It will not accumulate on the gloss. Okay. So all of this will lead to strengthening is a filament extending the life of the Lamb. And the halogen gas is then free to start the cycle again. Now, this type also have a CRI or color rendering index or 400 and yellow color, same as incandescent lamps. This type is used where it is used, it is used in automotive headlamps, head lamps, under cabinet, lighting, work lights, gallery, shop, and landscapes. So it has many applications. Now, here are our images for the halogen time. As you can see, all of this or halogen pipe or the filament lamps, called the halogen lamps. The type of the filament lamps is called czar afflicted lamps, as you can see here. The light inside it or the lamp itself produces light on the ceiling itself, leading to illumination of the room itself. Okay? So that illumination of zeros or lighting of the room is done by using the reflection. The light goes through the ceiling, leading tools or elimination, or the lighting of our room. Here, as you can see here, as the light goes through the ceiling, or it is directed to the ceiling, this reflection will lead to lighting of the room. Here also is a light is exposed or directed to the ceiling. And reflection will lead to the elimination or the illumination of the lighting of the room itself. So as you can see, it's called game that reflected. Why it's called reflected because the lighting is done using the reflection of light. This type of course is used in declaration. So in this lesson, we discussed the pipes of the filament lamps. We'd Scott does the incandescent lamps as a halogen lamps and reflected labs. 44. Fluorescent and Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Hey everyone. In this lesson we are going to discuss second type of lamps, which is gas discharge lamps. So in this lesson, we will discuss as a forester type of gas discharge lamps, which is a fluorescent lamp. Of course, we all know about words are fluorescent lamp which has all of these fingers. You can find a fluorescent lamp which is in the linear shape like this. And they U-shaped, U-shaped fluorescent lamp. And we have that circular fluorescent lamp. So those are the three different shapes for a fluorescent lamp. Now the question is, what is a fluorescent lamp, how it works? Where do we use it? So the first thing is that the fluorescent lamps work by the principle of ionizing the mercury vapor inside a glass tube. So as you can see here, this is our fluorescent lamp. We have the cathode and anode. Okay? So due to the presence of a potential difference between the cathode and anode. When we connect the AC supply, there will be a potential difference or a difference in voltage between Zach acid and the anode. This will lead to the emission, emission of the electrons from the metal caseloads from the castle itself. Electrons will be released y due to the presence of a potential difference between anode and cathode. So this is the first thing. Second thing is that our tubes are fluorescent. Tube contains mercury vapor. Mercury vapor. So what will happen is that these electrons moving from the cathode to anode, we'll hit zoom mercury vapour. Okay, we'll hit it. So since the electrons has energy, the electrons have energy. They will transmit this energy to the mercury vapor because it hits it. So since it's a mercury vapor or atoms takes energy, they will be excited or ionized or unionized or excited. Now when this mercury vapor after ionization Wednesday, you return to the ground state. From the basics of physics. They will release electrons. They will release electrons. This electron. So we'll hit that phosphorus coating, which is on the cylinder itself, which will lead to and it will emit electrons are, but it will emit photons. These photons will hit as a phosphorus coating, leading to emission of light like here. So again, the first step is that the electrons are released from the castle, which are collides with that mercury atoms or mercury variable, which will lead to the transfer of energy causing ionization of the mercury atoms. When the electrons in the excited mercury atoms return to the ground state, what will happen is that these electrons senses they go to the lower level or the ground state. They will emit photons as they were released their own extra energy in the form of photons at a frequency of ultraviolet frequencies. So this photons, or ultraviolet light or photons will hit that phosphor coating on the inside of the tube, leading to cause a conversion of the ultraviolet light into the visible light. Now, this type of fluorescent lamps are used in commercial lighting, industrial lighting, classroom lighting, and retail lighting. Those hours application of the fluorescent lamp. And of course, as they produce white color, as you can see here. Okay, white color and zeros, those are the obligations of the floors antonym. Now, that second type is called the compact fluorescent lamp. So what does the difference? They are the same principle of operation. The difference is that this type is compact, which means it will save energy. So this is used for saving power with same color, white color. And this comes back to fluorescent lamp, which is CFL, compact fluorescent lamp. Cfl has two types. The first type is called the Integrated, and second type, non integrated or integrated, which is the screw base. And some unintegrated is a blog base. So let's see it. As you can see, this is a comeback to fluorescent lamp as our, in our home. And this is also a compact fluorescent lamp. As you can see, this is called the first one is called Integrated. Second one is called the non integrated. Why? Because as you can see, the first one is called or has a screw base. Screw base. As you can see, this is called a screw. You can plug it directly, okay, by rotating this lamp. Second one is called the black base. As you can see, there is a block here. It needs to be plugged inside that socket. Okay? So that is the difference between these two types. This one, the first one is a screw by rotation, second one is black. Now it's a compact fluorescent lamps are used in residential applications, which are places that incandescent and halogen lights. Okay. As you can see, it's a comeback. This type of the compact fluorescent lamps is used in some spots, okay, in buildings. As you can see, all of this are called in, are used. Comeback uses a compact fluorescent lamps, as you can see this lamp. And so as a spot is the same lamp, not the first one, but Zan non integrated time. As you can see, we can add it here. Okay, in the end it's not visible like this one. In the spots. They use the non integrated time. As you can see, all souls are non integrated type is used in spots. So those are the first two types of the gas discharge lamps, the fluorescent lamp and the compact fluorescent lamp. 45. High and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps: Now let's discuss another type of gas discharge lamps, which is called the high pressure sodium lamps and the low pressure sodium lamps. So the first one is called the high pressure sodium lamps, or HPS. This type of lamps are a part of the family which produces high intensity of light that is used or produce large amount of light. And they are used in the outdoor lighting, such as street lighting, longer tunnel lighting, and security lighting. And as you can see, this is a image of for the high pressure sodium lamp. And as you can see, they are used in the streets. They are used in the streets. Longer tunnels, and security lighting. Okay? This type of lambs reduces an orange white light, which is, of course, as you can see it as in the street lights. Now, this lamp has a low value of CRI, or color rendering index of 25, which means that we can not see that objects, which was its own rail colors because it has a low color rendering index. Color rendering index is of course discussed in another lesson. Okay? Why 25? Why is our lower value? Because it is not important to see all of these objects in its own rail colors. The most important thing is that we should see the street. We need light only. We don't need to see every single is its own details. Okay. So the first one is called the high pressure sodium. It is also a type of gas discharge lamps working with the same principle as the fluorescent lamps. Now second type is called the low pressure sodium. This type LBS, low pressure sodium is used in the lighting of sub streets, the main streets, but substrates, outdoor lighting of parking areas and the bridge underpasses. All of this is an application of the low pressure sodium usually is a high pressure and the low pressure used in the street lighting lighting and security lighting. As you can see, this is an image of Ford is a low pressure. And this are the two low pressure sodium lamps. Now, this one has a CRI, also lower value of CRI or 45 per cent. However, it is higher than the high pressure sodium, which means it gives a little bit better visibility then the high pressure sodium. 46. High Pressure Mercury and Metal Halide Lamps: Now let's discuss another type of gas discharge lamps, which is called as a high pressure mercury and the metal halide lamps. The first one is called the Tsar high pressure mercury vapour. This one, as you can see here, it gives white light, very high white light, as you can see here. This is an example of the high pressure mercury vapour, which is also a type of gas discharge lamps. This one is used in the lighting applications in the streets, parking lots, landscape lighting factor, factories, gymnasiums, and so on. As you can see, this one also has a white color, not like czar. Sodium, high pressure sodium. On the low pressure sodium, most of them have yellow colors. But high pressure mercury vapour has as CORREL color rendering index of 45 per cent and white color. The other one has a yellow color. The metal halide lamps are used in lighting applications in factories as bold this area, as you can see, all of this uses metal halide lamps and stadiums. This is a metal halide lamps. Okay. They can be used as spots in the internal lighting of buildings such that such that the height of this room itself is a height inside the building itself, or does our rooms shall not be less than 5 m. So it too is a large area, e.g. in a factory, large area in a factory with minimum height of 5 m. This type of lamps has white color with CRI color rendering index of 70 to 90%, which is a very good colour rendering index, high value. Okay? So it provides white color similar as the mercury type, but the color rendering index here is a lot higher. 47. LED Lighting: Now, the last type of lamps is the LED lighting lamps. So the LED, which is standing for light emitting diode. Light emitting diode. This one. What does this mean? It means diode. Diode produces light when the current passes through it. Okay? Or the diode emits a light when the current passes through it. So as you can see, which produces light bypassing the electric current through a semiconductor semiconducting material, or semiconductor material, which is our diode, which will produce or emits photons or light through the principle of electro luminescence. Okay, so as you can see here, this diode when the current boss, Rosa cathode and anode it will make this diet produces light. As you can see, all of this, our LED, okay, so as you can see all of this, we have the LED lighting that light emitting diode have or has all of the colors. You can find it in all colors. Of course, you can find it in every shape, e.g. you can find LED in the form of the fluorescent lamps, is this one, is an LED is not a compact fluorescent lamp. The incandescent to shape. You can find LED, which is this one in LED incandescent lamp. Also, this one is not a floors and it is an LED and so on. Okay, So in the end, they use LED or a light emitting diode means that we are using the bytes are for producing light. Now, this one, LED lights does not depend on heat to produce its satellites, which means it runs cooler and it is much more energy efficient than an incandescent light bulb. Now, let's discuss some advantages of using the LED lighting. First, the thing is that comparing incandescent comeback the fluorescent lamps and LED, as you can see, that incandescent energy used, the incandescent is the highest one. Zap compact fluorescent lamp is lower and elated provides the lowest amount of energy used or is the highest energy efficient. Second thing is that the life span for the incandescent 1,000 h for combat the floor central atom thin cells and hours. And for LED 25,000 h, which means it has the highest life, fine. Also, as you can see here, it has all of the colors. The LED lighting has all values of colors or bright, cool. This of course, this values in Kelvin, as discussed in the color temperature lesson, if you didn't see it yet. Okay. As you can see, the comparison between candlelight, incandescent, compact fluorescent lamp, LED. As you can see, the highest efficiency is the LED combines the two, compact fluorescent and the incandescent. Their life span is the highest of the LED. The colour rendering is a visibility which is the highest. And also in LED. As you can see here in Cannes, doesn't halogen compact fluorescent lamp a lady. This is at least efficient, and the most efficient is the LAD. And after it's a compact fluorescent lamp. So as you can see, for bright, the value of the brightness or the light intensity. For 150 lm, 800 lm, 100,000, 101,600 lm. The lumen is simply the unit of measurement of the light intensity. So the higher value means, it means that the higher the light intensity. Okay? So as you can see, a food like 450 lm, incandescent needs a 40-watt Halloween 29, combat the floors and 11 LED is nine watts. So as you can see from 42, only nine What of LED. Now, as you increase the brightness, you can see 100-watt halogen, 70 to combat the floors and 23.20, which is faves, this value faves as is value. Okay? So as you can see, the LED is a most efficient type of ball, okay? Now's a lifetime one year, one to three years, 16 years, and 15 to 20 years. So as you can see, a lady is the most efficient one. That's why the incandescent, which is the least efficient, we don't use it in projects. Incandescent and allergen. We don't use it in residential e.g. and commercial projects. We usually use the compact fluorescent lamps and LED of course is really, really great. However. However, the cost or the initial cost of LED or the cost of LED compared to the other bulbs is really, really high. Okay? That's why LED. And the choice of using LED or another type of bulbs, depending on the owner itself. As a budget of the owner itself, if he is our can afford is the LED or he would like something sheep. Okay. So we discussed in this lesson the LED lighting. 48. Types of Luminaires: Hi and welcome everyone. In this lesson, we are going to discuss types of luminaires in our lighting system. Okay? So we discussed before there are different types of lamps. Now we will discuss the types of luminaires. The first subtype of luminaires is called the surface mounted illuminate. This type surface mounted means that the luminaire will set directly on the top of the surface. You are mounting two. So as you can see, this one is a luminaire, and as you can see it on the top of the surface, which is mounted to, which is the ceiling. As you can see here is a sealing. The luminaire is mounted on it. Okay, on this one is the easiest mounting options because it is easy and add it to the top of the concrete ceiling. Remember it's concrete ceiling, not false ceiling. This is used when we have a height of the room less than 3 m. Now, if you don't understand, again, let's first discuss types of ceilings. So let's say we have our own like this one. This is a big room. And we have here e.g. a. Desk. Okay? Now this surface, the ceiling, the ceiling is called Zafar Khan create ceiling. When we add that luminaire above the ceiling like this to provide light to our row by exist like this one. And this one. This is called the surface mounted luminaire. When it's added on the top of the concrete ceiling. Now, there is another type which is called the resist mounted luminaire. Okay? So first, let's delete this. Okay? Then use pen again. Now here, this is called the concrete ceiling. Right? Now, as an example, in building an office building, e.g. we have an air conditioning system and we have cable tray, and we have mechanical systems and so on. All of this system, that h of x is Tim cable tray. All of this is both under this ceiling legs us. In this region, we have that h of x, h of x system. To cool our building. We have cable tray to provide electricity and so on. So all of this is placed under Zach concrete ceiling. Now, of course, we don't use, as you can see in any building, you don't see the HVAC system or cable trays. Why? Because it is hidden under another saving called false ceiling or racist ceiling. Okay. It's a false ceiling or receives the ceiling is assigning under their concrete sealing. Between these two surfaces to ceilings. There is h vexes them, cable trays and so on. Now, in this one, in this surface is called the resist surface. We have a luminaire like this, inside it, like this. So it is hidden inside this surface to provide light to our room. Okay. So the surface mounted is mounted on the concrete surface is the original ceiling. However, racist mounted and mounted owns a false ceiling or the races the ceiling, like this. Mounted luminary, means that the aluminum is mounted directly to the false ceiling or the receipts, the ceiling, as you can see, when we have here squares inside the building. As you can see, squares, the squares. This means that we have a false ceiling. This one is also a false ceiling. As you can see, all of this is mounted inside the scene itself, as if it is a part of the ceiling. As you can see. You can see this long year is not suspended or surface mounted like this one. It as it is as if it is a part of the ceiling, actually tease apart of the ceiling, as this ceiling is called a false ceiling or resist ceiling. The ceiling you will find h of x is Tim cable trays and so on. So as you can see inside that resist mounted surface like this, we add the aluminum exist inside it like this. Okay. Only the visible part is the lighting or the lamp lighting source. And the rest of the luminaire inside the ceiling itself like this. Again, like this. Mounted above the concrete ceiling. Mounted like this connected hold it like this. Connected here. This is called desert surface mountain. Here if we are talking about the results, the sailing, it will be like this mounted like this from the sides, connected here and connected here. And provide light like this one. This is a difference between a surface mounted and resist mounted luminaire. Another type is called vessel splendid mounted luminaire. So as you can see, it is the luminaire itself. As this luminaire is suspended, not on the ceiling or not on the concrete ceiling. What is the resistance in, but it is suspended, suspended by a wire. Like this one. This type is used in applications which have a height greater than 3 m, such as in factories and the males. That resists the type and surface mount. It is used when height less than 3 m or a maximum of 3 m. Now, the surface mounted here or the suspended mounted, as you can see here inside the factory suspended. Suspended not on the scene itself as a ceiling here is above part here. It is suspended, same as here inside a male. You can see it is suspended by Uighurs. So it's bended, not on the ceiling itself. Now, why do we use this? Why do we add wires added directly to the ceiling? Okay, Now, let's see, as an example, we have a large room like this. This room, e.g. have a height of 7 m. Okay? Now, if we, if we would like to illuminate this room, e.g. this is our work space. And we would like to illuminate all of this. What are we going to do? We are going to assembly to add if we have a ceiling lights, this is a concrete ceiling or the receipts, the ceiling e.g. we will add e.g. for luminaries like this, 1234 so that it will provide light to this room. Okay? Why? Because, why for luminaires? Because the height is very large. So as light goes down when it's suffer from losses. So we need more illuminators to provide lighting. Okay? Now, what if we use the suspended system like this? Lie exist? If we use a suspension system, we will add a wire like this exists, Amazon wildlife exists. And we will add one luminaire here, another one here, which will be enough to eliminate all of this. So instead of using four aluminums, we now use to suspended luminaires. And instead of for surface mounted, we can use only two suspended luminaires. Why? Because it will, as you can see, it, the height is smaller. Here. This height, e.g. 3 m, 3 m instead of 7 m. So lower height means that we will have lower losses. And it means that we will need a lower amount of luminaires, which will mean we will save more money in our project. Okay? So this is the types of cells bend it mounted, illuminate. The force. A type is called the cell wall and the floor mounted luminaires. As you can see, this types are used in decorations. Wall mounted, e.g. is the one which is mounted on the wall itself, like this one. This one and this one. It is mounted on the wall, installed on the wall itself. This type, those are all mounted has three types of wall mounted or the down pipe, up, downwind luminaire. What is the difference between them? The difference is the direction of flight or the direction of illumination. So as you can see here, this is illuminating our boards like this up giving light abort. This type is called the wall mounted up blooming near this time, e.g. second one, as you can see, provides lights down or lighting downward. So this is called the Darwin illuminators. This one is providing up and down, so it's called up-down luminaire. Okay. Now, the floor mounted, all of these three are called wall mounted. Now, what about the floor mounted? Floor mounted like this one. It is mounted on the floor itself, as you can see on the floor itself. So this type is used for decoration. And of course, this type should withstand that. If someone moves above it or both, or pressure above it, it showed with the stanzas pressure. So this type of luminaires is different from the surface mounted or receives the mounted or suspended pipe. Okay. This one should stand someone walking about it or hitting it or anything. Okay. So those are the four types or the five types of luminaires. 49. Types of Diffusers: Hi and welcome everyone. In this lesson we are going to discuss is our third thing which is types of diffusers. Okay? So we discussed in the previous lessons the types of lamps, incandescent or fluorescent lamps, LED lamps and so on. And then we discussed these are type of illuminators according to the enclosure itself, such as the surface mounted resist and so on. And lastly, we would like to discuss that diffusers, the types of diffusers or that distributor. Okay. Diffuser or distributor. So that if user or distributor have three main types, which is a prismatic or Bill and parabolic or mirror diffusers. Okay? So there are three main types. Prismatic, oval and a parabolic or marrow diffuse. Now what is the benefit of the diffuser that the fuser assembly use the to define the shape of the polar curve. Okay? Now what is the meaning of polar curve? You can go to the lecture of polar curve would understand the meaning of polar curve, okay? Or don't make it really simple. As you can see, this tribute or, or diffuser. It simply it is used to distribute the light, defines the shape of distribution of light. Now, the first one is called the arithmetic diffuser. This type, as you can see, this is a type of the glass. All of this are prismatic diffuser. As you can see, as if is there are many, many plasmas are present, much converters or light into colors, seven colors. You can see as if there are many, many plasmas here. Prism, as you can see. Now, this type, when do we use this type of diffuser? This is used in applications that needs protection against the dust and moisture. So this type has a high IB or ingress protection. Now what does this mean? As our IP protection or index of protection? Is this representing as a protection against solids and liquids? We have a separate lecture where we discussed it. Okay? Prismatic diffusers are used for standard lighting applications as they are flame resistant and suitable for every commercial and domestic lighting applications. Second type is called opal or oval diffuser. This one why it's called open, because it is made of opal gloss and have a milky white color. As you can see, milky white color. Okay. Now this one, opal diffusing glass can be used to achieve a near lumbar region distribution. And what does this mean? When you go to the polar curve and understand it, you will find that this a type of luminaire distributors are light like this, have, if this is a source, it will have something like this. Which means it will distribute light here and here, and here, and here like this. Okay? So this is called a Lamborghini and shape. Okay? Okay. Xy level of diffusion in Zao opal gloss. Opal gloss causes a large amount of scattering losses. Okay? So we have different types of diffusers. And you will understand when we go to the selection of luminaires, you will understand more how can we select it that serve the type is called parabolic or mirror diffusers. This one is called the parabolic, as you can see this metal, because you can see that as if there are mirrors and you can see that lamps inside this type of diffusers, this type is simply used to distribute light and you will usually find it in office, e.g. usually found in office buildings, banks, and so on. Okay. So those are the types of diffusers. 50. What Is Color Rendering Index CRI ?: Hi and welcome everyone to our lesson in lighting design. This lesson is about one of the factors which we are going to use in selection of our luminaires. This is known as colour rendering index or CRI. So what does the color rendering index? This one is one of the factors which we need to understand when we select the luminaire. As we know that the visible light is the light which we can see or our human eye can see. It was its own different colors. Okay? If the wavelength is lower or higher, such as in the ultraviolet X-ray, gamma, infrared, microwave, radio. All of this we cannot see, however, only a certain wave lengths or a certain frequency of the light, which we can see. Now, how do we see objects? I know that many people will tell me now, what are you talking about? What we already know? How can we see objects? But there is one thing which is important about seeing objects, which will help you in understanding the color rendering index. So e.g. we have our son. This son produces light or the day light. When the light falls on an object, the light will reflect from this object and then our eye will see the object. Okay? Now remember that our light, our day light consisting of all of the colors, okay, with its own wavelengths us. Now, as an example, what exactly happens when white light, which consisting of all of the different colors with its own different wavelengths as the only color or colors will be absorbed by the object except as a one-color, which is the object colour. So as an example, if it falls on a leaf, we only see that green color because the green color is the only one who she is not absorbed by the object. That's why it is reflected to our eye and sees this object as green. Now as an example, is a black color, is a black color since when we see an object, black, it means none of the colors are reflected. All of the colors are absorbed by an object. Okay? Now the rate e.g. red object means that the red color is the only one or the only wavelengths which is reflected from an object. That light object, or as a white object means that all of the colors are reflected. So we understand now in order to see an object, the actual object, this color should exist in the light source. So as an example, the light source, which does not have the color of an object. So we have here two objects which are green. This object and this object are green in color. Okay? So if our white color falls on them, white color falls on them, what will happen is that we will see that green color of the object. Why? Because this y source have green color or has green color. Now, if we have a green source falling on, is this object, we will see this as green sensors. That source have the same color as our object. But let's assume in this tool, first two cases we see is the object with its own rail colors. Okay? However, is the last one. If we have a red color, this red color, which is falling on an object does not have green. That's why we will see it as another color, not the actual color. Okay? So in order to see the object with its own array of colors, we have to have the source as the same color, or the source or the white source having their color itself. Which asked for examples or why it have or has green color. Now, as you can see on the red light and white light, we see the object with its own rail colors because the white light contains all of the colors that are red. One does not show us the real color of an object. Now, this will go, will lead us to that color rendering index. So what does this mean? By definition, it is quantitative. Measure of the ability of a light source. So it is the ability of the light source to reveal the colors of various objects faithfully in comparison with an ideal or natural light source. So we have a light source. This light source have a certain color rendering index. This value is 0-100. Okay? So the closer this source, the strength of the source closer to the white color, a white light source. It will be, it's rendering index will be 100. Okay? So the higher CRI, it leads to higher quality of light. Okay? So we'll see some examples showing the difference in, in light sources with different CRI. So as an example, if we have a light source, lighting fixture or luminaire with a 50 CRI, that index is 50. And this one is another source with, AT, another source with greater than 95. So as you can see, is the object of colors, the colors of an object. As the color rendering index increase. As this value increase, we can see is the object which always it's on a rail colors. So comparing the 50s, CRI and 95 see IRR. As you can see, we can see this object with its own rail colors compared to a lower value of CRI of 50. Another example here we have an apple, this is red color. Now, if we have a light source CRI, or color rendering index of 97 here, 90 here, 80, here 70. As you can see, as we lower that color rendering index, we will have a poor quality of light. We cannot see the object in rayon. It has pure, poor quality of light, converted to a higher value of color rendering index, which means that we can see our objects, which is its own rail colors. Now, the color rendering index is 0-100. Hundred means it is close to the white color. From 8,200 considered as excellent, 6-7 acceptable, and less than 60 is low quality of light. Here's another example. Natural white light gives us a real color of the object. As you can see, a red apple, since it has all of the frequencies or of that color ranges with its own wavelengths. As we can see, the value with its own rail color or the object with its own rail color. Compared with our light source with a low CRI, it does not have all of the wavelengths or a poor quality of light, which will give us not a real color of the object. Here is another comparison. If we have an object like this painting and another painting, as you can see here, there is a difference between them. Using the sunlight, which is hundred CRI or hundred color rendering index, means that we can see that object with its own original color. However, LED, LED light with a lower CRI converted to the sunlight, will give us a render, the color. As you can see, the color of the painting, it is not visible, same as here. Why? Because this source have a low CRI. Here's another example, as you can see here, as we go to the right higher CRI, which means we can see the color of the object in rail, rail colors of the object. However, low CRI gives us poor quality of colors. Here is a comparison between different light sources or light fixtures or luminaires. As an example here have a high pressure sodium fluorescent LED and so on. Here is the opposite value of that color rendering index. Another one, as you can see that the incandescent and halogen have 100 color rendering index as the highest value of color rendering index or close to that white color. And as you can see here, we have metal halide fluorescent, mercury, high pressure sodium, and so on. So as you can see, each of these have a lower amount of color rendering index. As you can see, each of them with its own opposite color rendering index. So as you can see, it's a lower, low pressure. Sodium has the lowest value of the color rendering index, which means that warmest lighting source. Here's an example for the daylight incandescent lamp, fluorescent lamps, halogen, cold white LED, warm white LED. As you can see here, representing the intensity here representing the CRI or the color rendering index. So as you can see that they light almost at most two colors. It is, have a high value. Okay? As you can see here, incandescent have a high value for the red colors and lower values for the other ranges. So it means that the red color can be seen very well. However, the blue objects will not be seen very well. A fluorescent, as you can see at certain colors very well and add the others almost zero. Here is a halogen and provides a good amount of CRI in this colors. If the object to have these colors, add the other colors here, very poor. Here, acceptable. Here, another cool white and warm white and their own distribution. So this is a definition of the CRI. More rendering value means that we will have high-quality of lighting and we will see the object well. 51. Polar Curve of Luminaire Fixture: Hi and welcome everyone to this lesson in lighting design. This lesson, we are going to discuss this as secondary factor in selection of luminaires or lighting fixtures, which is polar curve in fixture selection. Okay? So we would like to understand the meaning of the polar curve and how can we select it. So first, the polar curves are used to show that level of intensity of the light bulbs are luminaires at any given point. So simply is a polar curves helps us to understand or identify the intensity of light at any point in our plane. Polar curves till the end. Engineer how light bulbs are luminaires is spread light across our own or a surface. This distribution has many types. It can be narrow, wide, indirect, or direct. Polar curve. The graph also can be referred to as a polar luminous intensity graph. Both of them have the same meaning. So the curve term curve is a visual guide to the distribution of light from that luminaires, the lines coming out from the fixed point to represent this distribution. Okay? So the lines are coming out from our luminaire, helps us to understand the distribution of lighting. So in the end, to make it very, very easy as a polar curves helps us to understand that distribution of light or the intensity of light at any point. Okay, so we will have some examples so you can understand it well. First thing, as you can see here, we have a light source. This is our light source. As you can see, this light source have its own polar curve. This is called as a polar curve. This polar curves means that the light, this is a light and the lines coming out of it. So as you can see, this region is the region at which our luminaire will light as this area only. Okay? So in this area and this area, we have our light, as you can see here, is a similar a polar curve in actual location like this. Here. This shape is the same as the polar curve. So this is a polar curve representing the distribution of light. Okay? So as you can see, this type of polar curve, e.g. it is focused downward, focused in a small region and downward. However, here, on the right side and the left side, it is almost zero. So as you can see, dark all on the left and on the right, Dark. Only that location on the luminaire is the one which is on, okay? Another type is this luminaire. Is this Lanier have distribution upward and downward. So it provides light up ward and provides slide downward. As you can see on the sides, zero, no lighting on the sides. So it is our board and downward, if we see is a polar curve as you can see, our board, okay? Lighting our board and lighting down mode. And as you can see here, on the right side, and the left side is equal to zero. Okay? So as you can see here, Our board, downward, upward, downward. So as you can see, this polar curve representing where the light is distributed or as a function of the lighting fixture. Okay. Here's another one. As you can see here. It is focused downward. As you can see, it has the same figure focused downward, however, owns a right side and the left side, right side, left side zero. Here is also another example. This one have a larger distribution, takes laws or area like here, as you can see here, a larger area. Now, how can we select as a polar curve? Each fixture has its own polar curve, what you will see inside the catalog. So the polar curve is selected according tools application. So as an example, in an office, in an office I would like to do's or lighting or expose all of the important objects, such as the office itself, the table itself, a Chairs. And here e.g. is our solver, e.g. and here owns are right on the left side, okay? That's why it's a distribution is a forecast downward, focused only on this location. The floor is not important for us. Only the table or the meeting table, e.g. and any object should be visible. That's why this curve, this luminaire, is selected for a curve to provide light in that owns the object directly on the floor. As you can see, it is a little bit dark. However, all of the objects is clearly visible. Another example is a polar curve in a supermarket, e.g. in supermarket, we would like to, you can see, we would like to make all of this objects or the grocery ex-post. We would like to see it well. So on the right side and the left side is our floor is not important for us. So as an example, if we selected a luminaire, this distribution, this polar curve, this will mean that the floor is very, very bright as a floor is very, very pride and the lighting on the sides is lower than the floor. Okay. So it is not correctly, you will see that the floor will be very, very bright. And grocery or any shop components will have low visibility. Okay? So when we select our elements, we should select it like this. We should select a lighting fixture which is focused on the shop components or the grocery. And so on the right side and the left side and low visibility on the floor. Okay. So this one so it will make sense that floor a little bit dark, which is the one which you would like to do. Not very bright as the first case. The second one is correct. So by choosing another type of Lumiere, we will have the correct lighting for our store. So in this lesson we'll discuss is a polar curve which shows the distribution of lighting. And we should select it according to the application which we have. 52. What Does It Mean When A Luminaire Has Multiple Polar Curves: Hey everyone. In this lesson we are going to discuss something really fast, which is two polar curves. Sometimes when you open the lighting fixture catalog or any website, you can sometimes find it too polar curves for as certain luminaire. What does this even mean? Now, as you can see here, e.g. this one, as you can see it have an apple shape. You can say a heart or apple tree or whatever it is. You can find here, here something here 00-180 and CNI two to 270. You can see find here are solid line and dotted line. What does this mean? It means 0-108. We will have as a solid shape. Okay? And 9-2 to 170 degree, we will have the voltage shapes, although the chip here is the same as the solid shape, that's why they are above each ours. Now what does this mean? We have the lighting source here, as you can see, lighting source. Now, as you can see, 0-180 degree is this area, which is this one and donate denoted by this rectangle. This is an area like this, this one. The shape of the polar curve in this area is red one, this one, this area is 0-180 degrees. Remember, we are not dealing with a 2D object. We are dealing with a 3D object. That's why in every direction it has two polar curves, are different. Polar curves usually. Or two polar curves, as you can see, 0-180, it has this solid one and 90-100270, this direction, which is this one. Like this, have this as our apple shape, which is a dotted one, are the same but it has an ulcer polar shape according to the angle. Okay. Okay. Now, let's see this one e.g. is this one e.g. as you can see, we have 0-180, like this one from here, this area, this one. We have a red polar curve. Okay. So we can have a lighting fixture like this, e.g. 0-180, like this? It can be something like this. Okay. Like this. And the other one which is the blue one, is 9-270, which is e.g. in this region like this, it will have a curve like this because it is a 3D object. So 0-1, as you can see, 0.100 degrees this line, this area gives us the polar curve, which is the red one, and 9-270, or you can see it as a 3D is this rectangle. You will have it like the blue one. So as you can see, this is a 3D view. As you can see that as one here, which is this representing the orange one representing 0-180, and yellow one representing from 92, 207. So as you can see, two polar curves. So you have to, when you install luminaire itself, you have to put it inside in the form of an angle which provides you with that person or that required view or Zout acquired lighting lux. Okay. 53. Color Temperature of a Lighting Fixture: Hey everyone, In this lesson, we would like to discuss this. Assert the factor affecting the selection of luminaires, which is Zach, color temperature in fixture selection. So what does the meaning of color temperature? So when you look at Zach catalog, in the catalog itself about the different luminaires. You will find. It has different temperature in Kelvin. So as an example, what does this mean? This temperature doesn't mean the heat, but it representing the color itself. So from 2,700 to 3,700 Kelvin, temperature, representing the warm white like this. So as you can see at 1,000 Kelvin, very yellow color, a little bit lower than 3,000, a little bit brighter, them 4,000 brighter, and so on. As you can see, each of these color and its own opposite temperature. So as you can see at 10,000 Kelvin, which is close to day light, or very cool white. So as you can see, is a warm, moist. When we say is that our luminaire is a warm white, it means that it is in the range 2700-3100 Kelvin. Also daylight white is 4200-4500 here in this range. And the cold white is 5500-7 thousand Kelvin. Okay? So what is the importance of this? Is the important of this is that that temperature gives us a certain color. And this color is as a selection of this color or the color temperature depends on the application itself. So as an example here, we have 2,700 Kelvin, 3,000 Kelvin, thousand 504,000, 5,000 and so on. So these temperatures gives us opposite colors. Warm, moist, soft white glow until crystal white glow. Ok. So each of these colors, with its own color temperature, help us, us in different applications. E.g. the warm white is a warm white which is 2,700 Kelvin. This one is used in homes. In our home, can be used in libraries, can be used in restaurants. So if you are doing is our lighting design for home, for low-light battery for our restaurant. Then you will select a luminaire fixture in the range of warm white, which is 2,700. Now, if you would like to have another applications such as also homes, can be thousands of 100 to 3,000. Hotel rooms, lobbies, retail stores. All of this can be used in 3,000 Kelvin, okay, for 3,500 or neutral glow. This can be used in office. Executive also offers reception areas. So one market for thousand is used in office, classrooms and show rooms and so on. Also, the last one, which is 5,000, is used in galleries, hospitals, beauty salons, and so on. Okay. So how can we select the color temperature depending on the application? E.g. if you are doing lighting for an office, then we're going to select the fixture of 4,000 Kelvin to provide a good lighting for our office. Okay. That's it, e.g. in home, then we will choose 2700-3 thousand. So this tool can be used in home applications and so on. So in this lesson, we discussed the Zak color temperature and how can we select it? 54. Difference Between Lumen And Lux: Hey everyone, In this lesson, we would like to discuss an important definition called lux and luminous flux. We would like to understand the difference between them as we will find them a lot in catalogs. And you will always hear about them. The first thing is called the luminous flux. Or LEO means what does this even mean? Simply that luminous flux and its assembly as far as same as the electrical flux. Okay? But instead of electrical flux or magnetic flux, we have now luminous flux. It is amount of antenna stoves or light emitted by a lighting source such as a lamp, or received by a surface irrespective of direction. Okay? So this is representing the intensity of the light, of the light source. Luminous flux representing intensity of the light source. And we measure, we measure this light intensity in ionic called a lumen. And abbreviation is L M. As an example, if we have 100 watt incandescent lamp, this emits about 1,200 lm. Okay? So 1,200 lm are representing the intensity of the light produced by this hundred watt. Okay? So we have light source produces amount of light measured in ligaments, 1,200 lm intensity of light. Now, the other factor is called Ze, a luminous or illumination. What does this means? This is measured in it called lux. Lux is equivalent to Leo Mintz, bear meter square. Leo means that per meter squared. So we have Leo men, which is the intensity of the light source itself, produces a constant number, 1,200 humans. Now, that illuminance, this has measured in Luxor, which is lumen bear meter squared or pair unit area. So it's this sort of presenting assembly, the light intensity pair unit area. So as you can see, we have our light source here. Okay? Now, if this area, if it produces e.g. a, certain amount of humans. Okay, now add this area. At this area here, we will have 344 lux. What does this represent? This representing their Leo Mintz is a constant amount of lumens produce the bizarre light source divided by the area, area here, 0.6, 0.6 meter. This is what, this is a diameter. So we can say boy or square like this. So this representing area, area of the circuit by r-squared. Ok? So this is a humans, let's say x e.g. lumens produce the pies or light source. So as you can see, if the area is small, that source providing a humans to a small area. We will have e.g. as 3444 lux. Okay? Now, if this light source provides to a larger area here with a diameter 1.2, then as you can see, the area here will increase, which means that the illumination will be reduced, right? And instead of 0.6, we have 1.2. So the luminous intensity or the light intensity per unit area will decrease, as you can see, became here eight to nine. As the area increases. As you can see, it's Alex is reduced. Okay, according to that area at which our poll will illuminate. Okay? So this will why it is important to understand the human and deluxe. Because lux is used in order to select our luminaires. How simply you have to understand that the lux, representing the requirement of a room or an area. As an example, you will get these values from, from the code, the electrical code. As an example, you can, you know that apart from e.g. needs 100 lux. So according to the area of the room, according to the area of the room, area of the room. And Luxor required, lux, required. We can know how many luminaires are required, and they're Lieberman. So as an example here, as you know that you know, the lux, lux is how many lumens per unit area? So the area of the room. And do you know the Luxor required according to the code? Bathroom e.g. needs 100, lux, kitchen needs 300, overs, needs to 500 and so on. So we have, we can get from here as well, humans how many lumens are required? And we can know how many sources do we have? How many sources are light sources? We will have, we have four e.g. then you will take the humans divided by number of luminaires put inside the room. Okay, in addition to some factors are for losses, very easy. So simply it's a lux. Help us ask to know how much light intensity required in our room per unit area. According to this value and the area, we can know how many luminaries are required and Liam and the intensity of the source itself. Okay? So this is a difference between locks and humans. 55. Utilization and Maintenance Factors: Hey everyone, In this lesson, we are going to discuss two important factors are when we are designing our lighting system or when we are selecting our luminaires. This two factors are known as utilization factor and the maintenance factors. Utilization factor and the maintenance factor of two factors are really important. Now what does a utilization factor mean? Utilization factor assembly, that issue of the total humans are received owns a working plan to the total lumens emitted by the light source. Okay? So simply like this, if we have a bulb like this light source producing light. So add here e.g. at this point, it produces four cells until humans. Humans. And here we have our workspace, here we have a desk, e.g. so when's a light? When the light from this source travels all of this distance and reaches to our desk, e.g. to eliminate it, you will find that the Romans here is e.g. became zero hundred and 3,800 lm. Lumens emitted by the source. When it reaches that work is space. During its travel, it suffers from losses. Okay? So the losses here is represented by utilization vector, representing the ratio between Lehman's received on the working blend here, which is 3,800 divided bys and humans out of luminaires from the source itself, which is 4,000. So we will divide Syria zero hundred thousand 800/4000. We can get that utilization fact. This value we usually take it between, you have to know that between 0.4 and 0.6 in this range. Second factor is a maintenance factor, which is the ratio of illumination under normal working condition to the illumination Whenever zinc is clean or new. Okay. So the maintenance factor, simply what does this represent? When we have a new pulp and when we put this pulp in our work space, okay? So this is our issue which is illumination in normal conditions when you add it in our own or in streets or whatever tools or issue when it is completely clean and new. Okay? So this maintenance vector representing a depression inside there, bulb itself or the Lambda itself. Okay? This is due to the aging of lamp, okay, maintenance vector representing aging of lamp in addition to weather conditions which affect the illumination of the ball. So we need to add this factor because due to the presence of different weather conditions, dust, all of this and aging of lamp, all of this causes that lambda to produce a lower amount of lumens. Okay. The maintenance factor is the illumination under its normal working conditions, the current condition divided bys Illumination. Everything is clean and the pulp is new, not aged, no dust, nothing. Okay. So this factor is usually between 0.6 and 0.8. Okay? So usually when we design, we take into consideration the utilization factor and the maintenance factor. Usually we take the multiplication of the utilization factor and maintenance factor there multiplication is usually taken as buoyant force. Okay? So what does point for mean? It means that when we design our system, we need to add more percentage or higher amount of lumens. So as an example, when we require e.g. I. Would like here on my own work space. E.g. here, I need 4,000 till humans. This is required. Okay, so when I get up all basalts, I need to have a power source which produces 4,000 divided by utilization factor and maintenance factor. Why to give us high value greater than 4,000? So when e.g. it gives us 4,800 as an example. Okay. So when I add this 4,800, due to the presence of dust, aging and losses when it travels through air. All of this will lead to finally, when it reaches a workspace, it will give us 4,000, which is required. Okay? So this is the important of or the importance of utilization and maintenance factor. 56. IP or Ingress Protection for Luminaries: Now let's discuss another concept called Zara IB or ingress protection. This is sometimes known as IB, ingress protection index, protection protection number, and so on. Okay. So what does an IP protection mean? The IB code is defined in the IEC standard. You will find it in the ISO standard number 65 to nine. This color suffice that degree of protection of an electrical enclosure and mechanical casing and so on. So as you can see, this gives us that degree of protection of mechanical casing or electrical enclosure against solids and OT. So this sort of presenting the degree at which our enclosure can with stand solid particles and water. You will understand more. Now. The rating of this ib protection is consisting of letters having two digits that IB likes us. So as an example, we have an electrical component having an IB 68. Okay? So as you can see, all AB, which is ingress protection. And six, this is the first digit. Second digit is eight. So as this number or this number is higher, means Hello, better protection. Now what does the firstname bar mean? And what does the second number mean? That first number, or the first digit representing the protection of an enclosure. That degree of protection of this enclosure against solid particles, solid particles. Now, this 18 for the second digit representing the protections, that degree of protection of an electrical enclosure against that water. Okay. So as you can see here, sometimes a number is replaced by x, which means the enclosure is not rated for that specification. So what does this mean? Or sometimes I be six, e.g. it means here, this one is unknown. Okay. It has no rating. We don't know the degree of protection. Now the first digit, okay, Here. The first digit representing the protection against solids. This one have a value 0-6, okay? Second digit representing the degree of protection of this enclosure against liquids, 0-8, okay? Now there are some times it can be asserted the digit or a, B, e.g. 687 e.g. the third one is the protection against mechanical vibrations. This can have a value 0-9. So what does this all mean? First? 68, mine is the highest values, which means the best protection. So as an example, if we have this enclosure, this electrical enclosure having e.g. or maybe 686. It means what means the highest protection against solid particles? This, it means highest protection against water. Which means we can take this enclosure and the boat it underwater for a very long time without any issue. Now, let's understand this why ib is important, because every luminaire e.g. is needed in a certain application. If e.g. this luminaire installed in an office building, then the degree of protection should be low. It is not important to have a high degree of protection. However, if this luminaries installed the outdoor in weather conditions, we need to make it protected, highly protected agonist so doest against water such as rain. And so now let's see what does an IB, e.g. I. B6 survives the first number and second number. The first number, which is protection against solids. We have 123,456.4 water 1-8, Okay. Now we can have 00 means that we don't have any protection. Now, the first one, e.g. for solids one, what does one mean? Ib1. What does it mean? It means it can be protected, again as a solid objects greater than 50 millimeter in diameter. So as an example, my own hand have a diameter of 50 millimeter or higher. So if I touch it with all of my own hand. This object will not suffer from N Sync. Okay? However, if e.g. an, a large object like 100 millimeter also will not suffer from anything. However, if it is a smaller object such as 12.5 millimeter, then this one will suffer from something. This will affect it. So IB2 means it can be protected against solid objects are from 12.5 millimeter to higher. Okay? So as an example, one means it can be protected against from 50 and higher. However, two from 12.5. And the higher higher diameters, such as 12.5, such as my finger. Now three e.g. means solid objects greater than 2.5. If I get a screw, e.g. this one e.g. will be 2.5 and higher. Okay? So on until 2.5 and higher than this value, then it can with stand any problem. Okay? Now, here for means 1 mm, five does the prediction and thus the proof. So as you can see, a small amount of dusty here in five small dust. However large dust, it is protected against state not a no value or there is no amount of orders, there is no dust will enter this inside this inclusion, okay? So it is fully protected agonist by particles from dust and above. Okay. That's why six is our best protection. Now, second one, which is water as the first one is spraying liquids on the device from my vertical angle like this, as you can see, small drops vertically like this. Okay? Now this 12 means a protected also against the liquids, an angle z 0-15. So it can be a little bit inclined like this. A little bit like this. It will be still protected north or will enter it. Three means 0-60, something like this. Higher angles, it can be protected against it. As you can see, the air drops are more inclined here for means it can protected against splashing liquids. Owns that was from any direction. So as an example, if we have a luminaire like this, from here or here or here drops, it will not be affected. However, five what does five-minutes flashing liquids, lots of rain, lots of liquid from any direction like this, from this direction, from this direction. From heavy liquids, it came with a standard. This one is heavily flushing liquids. So much water. As an example bubbles a value like this. It will extend and to be protected against as this water. Now seven, what does seven mean? It means that we can take the aluminum here, e.g. aluminum like this. And we have here our water and devoted under the water for our time less than 30 min of sinking into it. Okay. 30 min maximum. It means it's can be continuously thinking into order. We can put it under odor for as long as we would like. So as an example, this one which has the highest IB for water when we use it, we can use it e.g. in swimming pools, right? Swimming pools because there are luminaires which are immersive underwater. So boating this can, so we have IBA, it can be used in an application like swimming pool. Now, here's our IB standards for luminaires as an example numbers. And when we use it as an example, ib, ib to zero. As used in general applications, like in office buildings, residential application, and so on. So when we are selecting our luminaires, we select the alumina of IB 20 when we are working in an office or residential application. Ib 43 or 44, when we use it with a little moisture applications, this is moisture like kitchens, due to the presence of variables or water vapor. I be 54 or 55 used in application with more moisture like bathrooms and toilets. I be 6767 used in outdoor applications like garage, landscapes, streets, and so on. Which means because, why higher degree? Because an outdoor applications we are exposed to wind, dust, rain, and so on. Last one, which is IB 68, is used in underwater applications like swimming pools and so on. Okay? So this is the meaning of ib. Ib is important and some of the applications with numbers in order to select our luminaire. So we select our aluminum according. One of the factors is according to the IRB. The IRB application. 57. How To Obtain Lux Required From Electrical Code: Now the question is, how can we obtain Luxe from goods? Okay? So we said before that the locks, e.g. for our bathroom is 100, 400, 500. How can we get this assembly? We can get the value of HHS Alex from the code or the electrical code. You can find many, many electrical cords. As an example, you can find for your own country, it has an electrical code. And inside this electrical code of your own country, you will find a section about lighting and Locke say required in the room. Okay, if it is an office, If it is a kitchen, if it is a restaurant, and so on. So it's Aleksey can be obtained from the I is equal e.g. what does an IEC mean, which is an international standard? It's called the International Electrotechnical Commission, IEC standard, important sunlight and you have to know it. Another code which is called the National electrical code in EC, or from your own country electrical code. Here is an example. This is a and national electrical code or the N easy. You can Google it and download this code. You will find it from it. Everything about electricity, okay, and what I mean about electricity, like this, inside this electrical volt, e.g. or any electrical code, you will find that this is an adoptable standard for save installation of electrical equipment and Wyoming and establishes as a basis for electrical safety and industrial, commercial, and residential building. That is what does the code do? You will find how to install electrical equipment, how to wire it, how to select the k was held, select transformers and so on, every sink. Including of course, the lighting design. That's why the electrical code is important. And you'll find according to the NEC, that I is equal to I Tripoli. All of this we form our country code. As an example, my own country, which is the Egyptian code. Okay. Now, according to the CCC, I ECC, which is the International Energy Conservation, good. This is one of the gods which you can use in getting their lighting. Luxor quiet. Okay, How many locks are required? As an example, you can see inside this room type, light level, light level in lux and foot candles and IEC 21 lighting power density. What's the pair? Square feet. Now, what does this mean? Let's take an example. You can see here is that cafeteria, because this one requires our light level lapse, 200-300. This is Alex required. Okay. Now, as you can see, light level, food, Kansas, what does food? Candles, imine foot candles means that Ford candidate is Leo men's bare feet to square. As you know that there are countries which use leo men per meter square, such as my own country, which is equivalent to LAX. And other countries use a feed as their unit of measurement. Feet. No means a perfect square is equivalent to four candles. Okay, is equal, is means ileum is a perfect square. Now, in order to understand something which is good is that we have here lux equal to Leo men's bare meter square. And food candle, food candle is Leo men's bare feet square. Okay. Now in order to convert from Luxor to vote candle like this, you can feel where you can see we have meters squared and we have feet square. So each, each meter square is consisting of 10 ft square. Okay? So each meter square is equal to 10 ft square. So simply we have Alex and would like to convert it to food candle. Then remove meter square and add 10 ft square. So it will be here 10 ft square, which means that we will divide the value of the Lux by ten to convert it to lumen per feet square. So as you can see, 200 lux is converted it to 24th candles. Okay? So assembly divide this by ten and you will get the number. Okay? So the difference between this two is that one uses a feed, those erroneous meter square. Here you can see lighting power density, power density assembly power divided by area which is here, square feet. Okay? This is just a number indicating how many power for each square feet. An average value. Now as you can see, e.g. cafeteria, 200 to 300 lux classroom surrounded to 500 office e.g. whereas our office here, as obvious is 500, where we are, where? Here, as an example, the lobby, lobby of an office is 200-300, library 500 lux kitchen, e.g. as you can see, kitchen can be from zero hundred to 750 and so on. So you can have an error range of the values, range of values. So as you can see, all of this you can get, you can see what application you have such as a corridor, Azure, magnesium, and so on. According to the application, you will take the value of flux from e.g. from a museum 300-500. I can choose the minimum is 700 and the maximum five pounds. So any value between them is acceptable. Okay. Now here is another one. As you can see, mechanical electrical room requires a slugs and offers e.g. 100 to 500. Remember in the previous lesson, I selected it as 500. As a toilet, e.g. 100-300, I usually select it as 100 because usually nobody will stay long time in toilet or read and so on. You can find here values for other. Okay. So according to this good or the IEC code, National electrical code, whatever the code they are using. Usually you use your own country good. And according to our own country code, you can select the locks intensity or the lux amount of Luxor required for each room. Okay. 58. Lighting Design of a Room Using Manual Calculations: Hi and welcome everyone to this lesson in lighting design. In this lesson, we are going to discuss how can you do a lighting design using man wild calculations. Okay? So what are the steps required to do the lighting design? First step, we need to find the value of flux in each room, okay, using the electrical code. Okay? And we said before, meaning of flux, which is light intensity per meter squared. Okay, it's a light intensity to give it a very simple definition, it is a light intensity. Light intensity, light intensity per meter squared per meter squared. Okay? So of course we said before that each room requires amount of flux. How can we obtain this value of flux or the light intensity in our room? We can obtain this using the electrical code we said before. We can get it using the National electrical code and easy. We can get to through the IEC. We can get it from the i, i, e, c, C and many other codes. Okay? So each one will give you values of flux required in every room according to their application itself. If it is an office, If it is Anna kitchen, if it is a bathroom, and so on. Okay. So that is the first thing we get lux according to the room. Second step, let's delete all of this. We will start selecting our luminaire, okay? And we said before, there are many, many different types of luminaires. And how can we select it? It depends on many factors. Number one, type of room or type of application, the height of room, we said before, there are types of luminaires itself as there are surface mounted resist the mounted that is also suspended and so on. So the height of the room will give us the required application or that required luminaire. Do we need it suspended or we need it resists the surface, or it says the mounted or surface mounted and so on. So depending on the height, as we discussed in the course, also, the CRI or the color rendering index, which we discussed before. We said that we usually e.g. in office, e.g. we will need at least eight value of eight. Cri of eight. Also color temperature. We said we have warm yellow until white. So the color temperature, we said before, according also to the application. And we saw it when we use or how to select this value. Also the IB, which is index of protection or ingress protection. Okay? This gives us the degree of protection of our luminaire against solids and liquids. And also we discussed the value of IB required in every application, as you will see in this way, do. The final is a polar curve. Polar curve is the shape of the light as our type of lighting inside our room. Okay. We said that we or how's the light is distributed in our room. We said we do this using the diffusers such as, such as a prismatic as the opal and finally, marrow or parabolic. Okay? All of this we discussed in the lessons where we discussed each of these elements. And finally, when we select our luminaire according to the application, we will get the number of luminaires are required. Okay? So how can we get the number of luminaires? Finally, N, which is the number of luminaires, is equal to E multiplied by a, which is area. E is luminous flux divided by f multiplied by utilization factor and the maintenance factor. And we'll discuss this two factors, maintenance and utilization. And we said usually their multiplication is equal to 0.4, taken as 0.4 for this is luminous flux, or this E is required in the room. A is the area of the room, area of our room. F is lumens produced. By each lamp, for each lamp, or the total lumens, total humans, not each lambda, total Liam is produced by all of the Lambs. Okay? So as you can see here, N is the number of lamps required, which is this n. E is illuminance level, or the Luxor required in our room. A is the area of the room itself. F is the total luminous flux from the lamps. Total flux and luminous flux, or total humans are produced by our lamp. Uf is that utilization factor and MF is and maintenance fact. Okay? So we have maintenance factor and utilization factor multiplication. As an example point for f is elements are produced by our lamp or our luminaire. We will get eight when we select our low near. The orthologs are required depending on the type of room and the area is of course, a given area of zero. Now, let's just start step-by-step. So we would like to design the lighting, the lighting for an office room. This office room having a dimension of ten meter length multiplied by ten meter width. So it is a square. This is stupid square, but anyway, ten meter multiplied by 10 min, okay? Something like this. Okay? Then multiplied by 10 m, this is our room. Okay? So we have an application which is an office. Okay, With zines are lighting foreign office. And we said the first step is we need to define Zona, as Alex said, required in the room. So according to the i e CC nodes IEC, but i e c, c, this is another good, okay? The International Energy Conservation. Good. This one gives us as our lighting or the Luxor required in every room. We discussed this in another lesson about what's Alex okay. When we discussed this before about the codes, anyway, e.g. in an office, we need a Luxe 300-500. Okay. Use one. Is Alex in office taken as the higher value, which is 500. So we say that the locks in on office between surrounded by pondered, usually we select it as 500 lux. So ie E here is selected as 500. Okay? That is the first step. And the area is then multiplied by ten, which is 100 meter square, right? Utilization factor multiplied by maintenance factor is 0.4. The only factor remaining, which is F, is the total lumens from lamps. How can we get this when we select our luminaire? Now, let's see each step in selection. The first step is the IRB. Remember that we discussed the IB or ingress protection in another lesson of IP values. We said that in an office e.g. we need RIB of 20. Ib of 20 is used in general applications or like an office building. Okay? Why? Because a higher small value of mechanical protection or solid protection, which is 2.0 protection against water. Okay? Because it is not important to have a protection against liquids. Because we have an office. Usually there is no rain or water or whatever. So usually we select the IB2. Okay? Now, second thing is color temperature. How can we select as a color temperature we'll discuss is the color temperature before. And we said we have many ranges in Kelvin. Okay? Usually in an office room, as you can see in the slides which we discussed before, office is equal to 4,000 to Kelvin. So we need at least 4,000 and the higher is also okay. So we will need 4000-5 thousand Kelvin. Okay? The color temperatures or color is white, so we can see all of the colors clear. And also we need a value 4000-5 thousand Kelvin. Also the CRI or the colour rendering endings in an office shall not be less than eight in order to see objects with their rail colors. Okay? Now, the last thing which is a polar curve, we would like here we have an office and would like a polar curve like this, which we can focus on their desk itself. Something like this. This curve or this polar curve. Can be achieved using Illuminate or oval diffuser and also marrow or parabolic diffuser. Okay? So polar curve has the following shape can be obtained using opal or mirror diffuser or the parabolic diffuser. Okay? Now, remember that we have an important route. We would like to understand that type of enclosure. And when we talk about with the type of enclosure, we are talking about, is it a surface mounted or it is our reserves the mounted or is it suspended, e.g. and so on. So usually in an office, office, in an office building, we have an H of access them in an office building. So we will need we have a concrete sealing concrete ceiling and we have another ceiling called is a false ceiling. Again, we discussed this before, but just as a reminder, we will have another ceiling called the resist or the false ceiling. So usually why we have another ceiling, because between them we will add here that h of x system, vec system and cable tray between them. Between the concrete, here is we have the concrete and here we have the races. Okay? So usually we use a resist type, the type luminaire. Okay? So remember all of the other factors which we discuss, the colour rendering that embrasure. All of this is effectors are our factors in selection of lonelier. Another factor is what is the type of the enclosure? We said it is a racist. And as you know, that in an office or office building applications, we will need is a fluorescent lamps or LED lamps depending on the budget of the owner. So usually we will select that fluorescent type. We said that the floors and is used in these applications. Now, let's go and select a luminaire itself from the catalog. Here, I'm going to select a from that Philips catalog. And I'm going to provide you with a link to this catalog. Okay? Now, insights are Phillips catalog. You will find many, many types of luminaires, okay? You will find folders. One folder containing catalogs for indoor lighting, one for outdoor, and another one for other applications. E.g. here, since we are dealing with office, it means indoor lighting. You will find the twin T BDF. Each of these BDF containings type of lighting which is used in indoor, which usually can be used in our case. As an example, one of them which is most famous is this one. It is 60 meter multiplied by 60 centimeter length multiplied by weights, which is dbs 1625. Okay, this one, Let's understand in the catalog, what does this mean? The most important elements for us. So as you can see this 11234, it contains four lamps. For lamps, as you can see here. Tbs one-sixth 5g4 multiplied by TLR5. Tlr5 usually mean fluorescent lamp. Tlr5 usually fluorescent lamp, as you can see, four multiplied by TLR5, 14. What, so what does this mean? It means we have four lambs, 123 for each of these lamp has a 1414 pieces of lamps. Each one of these is 14. What? The total wattage is, 14 multiplied by four. That is the first thing. Second thing, as you can see here, the color code, it hundred 70 here, not in Kelvin, but a color code. Okay? There is a difference between them, color-code and Kelvin. The white is 4,000 Kelvin. However, color-code is something else. As you can see, warm white as required in my own application. Now, as you can see, it is a parabolic, okay? Which will provide us with a polar curve which is suitable for our application. Okay, Now, let's see more. As you can see more respects here, light source color or 830, warm white. As you can see, the ingress protection could be 20, which is as I selected, same as the one which I need for my own application. Now, let's go down. You will find the heads-up I mentioned of the luminaire itself as the lengths and widths. And the second is the height. And you can find here more information. Now as you go down here, you can see this one. Okay, Let's go here like this. Okay? Legs as zooming in. Now we will find here something which is really, really important for us to think. You will not see or four multiplied by 1,200 Leo Mintz. So what does this mean? We have four lamps. Each lambda produces 1,200 lm. So format the blood binds up by 1,200 is 4,800 lm. So we will use this value to substitute in our equation to get number of luminaires. So this value is the one which we need to obtain the light intensity. Okay? So as you can see, it is given inside the catalog itself. Second thing is the polar curve. We said in our course, we have to, as you can see here, we have two polar curve, depending on the angle which we install our luminaire. We said that 0-800 gives us this polar curve. And from 92, 270 degree gives us this as our polar curve. If you don't know this, go to the lecture of the two polar curve or why do we have multiple polar curves? Okay? So this shape is the one which I need in my own office. Okay? So this type of luminaire can be used in my own application of office, okay, it has IB 20. It has a warm white with a high color rendering index, and it has a polar care for required and so on. Okay, so let's get back. We said that the selected luminaire is TBS one-sixth, so five, this one which we selected and with 1,200 lm, that as you can, and remember four multiplied by 1,200 lm. So a fluorescent lamp, one lambda inside this luminaire is a 14 watt lamp and gives us between 841,400 lm. Where did I get this value from this table? As you can see here, this one is aluminum, which I select. This table gives you an overview and average value about humans per watt for each type of lamp. So as you can see, it's a fluorescent tube lamp, or fluorescent tube from 6,200 lm for each one. Since we have 14, What multiply 14 pi 60.14 by 100. You will have from 841,400 lm inside the catalyst, it is given directly is that value means of this one for each lamp is 1,200, which is in this range. So the total humans provided by this this one, what does this mean? It is a luminaire. This denominator gives us a total of four multiplied by 1,200, which is in total gives us 4,800 elements. Okay? Now what does an extra step? We have our room then multiplied by ten. And we will use this equation, number of luminaires required in the office room. Okay? Remember that all of these steps we don't do, we simply use the elixir program is a program gives us all of the values easily, okay? Now, the E or the Luxor required in the room is 500. And a is the area which is 100 m squared. F is the total humans are produced by one luminaire, which is 4,800 lm. Utilization factor 0.5, maintenance factor 0.8. There. Multiplication gives us 0.4. Okay? So by taking all of these values and substitute here, we will have an ampere of luminaires that required is 23.1, which can be approximated to is our 23 or 24. Okay. But usually, usually when you are dealing with approximation, try to get an even number or not a prime number, not a prime number. So 24 is the one which you are going to use. 2.3 is a prime number, so we'll use 24. Okay? So this is a number of luminaires are required in this room, 24 luminaires. Now, we would like to know how many luminaires I will install in their widths and how many I will install insulins. So there is a law which helps us target number of luminaires in length and the number of luminaires in weights. So length is equal to square root of n, n, which is a total number of luminaires, which is 24, multiplied by widths, which is then multiplied by a lens which is ten. Okay? So the square root gives us 4.9, which means nearly five luminaires required. Okay? Now number of luminaires in wet, same law, but instead of width, it will be learned so far widths. So it will give us same value since the lens is equal to the width. So it will be five. Okay? So as you can see, we have five luminaires in length. Five luminaires in width, which means that we will have, instead of 24 luminaires, we will have 25 luminaires. Okay? Now, how can we draw this? It will be like this, 1,234.5 and also here 12, 34.5, and so on. You will repeat this here and here, and here, and here. Okay? So we will have five multiplied by five, which is 25 luminaires. Now that we finished, know, we have to do a two checks. First one, we have to make sure that distance between two luminaires is grid, double the distance or double the distance between the aluminum and the wall. Okay? So this distance, d is equal to two x to x, where x is the distance between luminaire and the wall like this. That is a first check. Second check is that space is base to height ratio. Height ratio is less than one. So what does this mean? Is space is a space between two luminaires. Space between two luminaires. Too high, it means divided by the height. Height of z is less than one. Remember that the height of the room here is 3 m. The space we would like to get some space now and make sure it is less than one. And make sure that this is base is double that distance between it ends award. So let's see. This tensor between two luminaires in lens. And lens is the total length divided number of luminaires in length. So we have total lens which is ten. And how many luminaires in length. So we have 12345, which means W1 divided by five is 2 m. This tensor between luminaires in which is width divided by number of luminaires in width. So since they are the same, so it will give us also to meters. So what does this mean? It means distances between each luminaire is 2 m here, also 2 m. Here we will have 2 m, and here we will have 2 m. Now we would like to get x here. This x, okay? So two plus two plus two plus two gives us 8 m, right? And the total is 10 m. Total is 10 m. Okay? So we have x and we have another x. So x is equal to ten minus eight. So the total is 10 m from here to here is 8 m. So ten minus eight gives us x plus x, which is two x. So our x will be 1 m. Now as you can see, distance between two luminaires is double that distance of between aluminum and all. So that is a first check. Second one is that as base to height ratio, which is base, which is two, divided by the height of the room less than one. So this design is correct. Okay? Now, some important two nodes here we have space and height are from high, it means height to the working plane. Okay? Usually, Usually, Usually this height is height of the room minus eight is ultimate, 0.8, which is a working plan. This, this is 18 centimeter. Okay. So the first thing is that the spacing to mounting height ratio, SHRM is a spacing between luminaires, between two luminaires divided by their height above the horizontal reference. A plan which is divided, divided bys or height above the working plane. We have to make sure that recommended value is half. Okay, So S divided by the height is 1/2 and also can be satisfied by the manufacturers. Usually we need to make sure that if not exceed unity it is less than one. And the space between luminaires, that's the second district, should be double the distance between aluminum here and as Award. So this is how can you design that lightening of a lower lighting, not lightening lighting of our own by using manual calculations. Again, we don't use this in lighting design. We usually use dialects or by Alyx Eve. Okay. Thank you and see you in another lesson. 59. Work Space and Type of Lux: Hey everyone. In this lesson, we are going to discuss two important concept in lighting design or inside the lighting itself, okay? Once you understand them, they will help you a lot as they are really, really easy. So we are talking in this lesson about the war kept blend and different type of flux. Okay? The first thing we would like to understand what is the meaning of war kept blind. Okay, so the worker blend assembly, as you see here, we have our own this is our room. And as you can see, it is 3 m in height. We assume from the concrete to the ground is 3 m. Okay. Let's say this is an Office, Home Office Rome was height 3 m. Okay. Now, if we install e.g. our luminaires here in this region, then we're going to eliminate all of our room right there. We said that in office e.g. from the code, office is equal to 500 lux, an office room. So where do we would like to achieve the 500 lux? Do we would like to have 500 lux on the floor here, e.g. we would like here to 500 lux, or we would like to achieve it on the desk. Of course, we would like to achieve with our 500 lux here on the desk. So as you can see, the height here at which our luminaires will go and reach here. This height will be this from here, from this point to the war plans, this is called our work blends, a plan at which we are working. So this is our distance we wish we would like to cover. So when we are going to use the dietetics program, we are going to use the height from here, which is considered as from the concrete or the luminaire. They are the same very small distance. So we can say from here to here to the worker blend. So this distance will be the height of the room minus the height of the war complain. Okay? So this will be equal to 3 m minus height of the walker blend. Remember that the worker blend inside an office is nearly 0.8 m. Okay? So we can select this as 0.8 m, this height, the height of our old coupling. So three -0.8 gives us 2.2 m, which will be put inside our program. Here. At this point at tier, we will achieve the 500 lux. However here we could have e.g. 450 lux. Okay? So you have to understand where you would like to achieve that require the lungs. You would like to achieve it here. Owns a walker blend. Okay, so we'll have 500 lux at this here. Okay? Now, if we're talking about a corridor, we don't have any worker plans or corridor, but something like this and would like to eliminate it. So we don't have the workout plans. Work plan would be equal to zero. And also inside. Okay. So that is the definition of the worker blend. Now we would like to have another definition about the average Alex, the maximum lux and the minimum lux. Remember that here we have this room then multiplied by 10 m, then in length and then in width, a square room. So as you can see this and this, and this, all of this, or, or this small squares or our luminaires. Okay? They provide illumination to our room to provide 500 lux. Okay, this is our goal. Now first thing is that you will find insides of the elixir program. Average Alex, maximum locks, minimum blocks, uniformity and so on. So what does an average galaxy mean? Average Alex is the average flux in our room. Okay? So it is the average value in all of our rooms. In all of our room, okay, 500 lux. So as you can see, we have maximum, we have also minimum lux. And what does a maximum flux, maximum value of flux in our room. As you can see, the maximum value is obtained under the illuminate itself here and here, and here and here. This is the maximum value of flux. This value, e.g. can give us e.g. 600 lux. And the locks inside our rooms, the average value is 500, 600 is the maximum value. Obtain the pie is aluminum, e.g. inside the corner. So e.g. we have the minimum lux, which is e.g. 450. Okay? So this is the meaning of average maximum and the minimum. So when we are talking about the code, as an example, we need 500 lux in the office, or we need 100 lux in the corridor or 100 lux in our bathroom. What does this mean? This means the average value, average Alex, inside our room. The maximum lux is the maximum value obtained in the room and the minimum, maximum, minimum value of flux and so on. So as you can see, it is donated denoted by E. Minimum is the minimum value of flux in minimum, minimum value of flux in the room a maximum is the maximum flux in the room. E average is the average flux in the room. Okay? And this value is Alex, which is found inside the code. Now, there is another important factor which is called the uniformity. We would like is a distribution of light inside our own to be almost uniform. This is equal to the minimum lux inside our room, which is 450 e.g. divided by the average value, which is 500 lux. Okay? We need this value to be between 0.5 to one. This is the acceptable range if the value after we design our system, if it is less than 0.5, then the solution will be wrong. So it should be at least 0.5 Y to avoid something called the glare. Okay, Zack layer. This is reduced when this value or the distribution of light is not uniform. Something really bright and other region really dark. Okay? Another thing is the average value, which is 500 lux, be equal to z e required from the code up to 15% of each require the value. So as an example, we would like e.g. an office, 500 lux. Okay? So when we design the lighting for the room, it should be from 500 lux up to 500 plus multiplied by 1.15, which means plus 15%. So if we have E average in this range, 500-5 fundamental blood 1.5, 15, then this design will be acceptable. If it is less than 500 or greater than 500 multiplied by 1.15, then it is not acceptable. Okay? So you have to make sure that the lux is in that range from that require the value up to 15%. Okay? So this are the definitions which help us in the electrical lighting design. Now, we will have to know that inside dialects evil, you will have all of these values, red. Okay, you don't need to open the code. You will find templates which already, if you are talking about an office, If you are talking about a pulse room, if you're talking about accorded or of anything, you will find it inside dioxane for, and you will see this when we design our lighting system, okay. 60. Introduction to Dialux Evo: Hi and welcome everyone to this class for DalexEvo. In this class, we are going to discuss the DialecEvO and how can you use it in order to do the lighting design? Not the lightning but lighting design. So first, when you open the DalexEo you will find here three sections. The first one is create a new project, edit existing project and other topics. The first part, which is create a new project is the one which it is important for us. You'll find here the outdoor sizing or outdoor planning and you'll find indoor planning. You will find also street lighting. You will find also room planning, and you can also import an autocat plan. Okay? So the outdoor, for example, is anything which is outside our building, such as a landscape or whatever. Also, the indoor, which is important for us, such as the lighting of a building. Okay? The street lighting is the lighting of the street. How can you design it using the DalexEvO? And room planning is also with indoor planning, okay? So here in the existing project, if you have any project which you have done, you can select it from this menu. Okay? Or you can click on Loud project and select this project like this Loud project. Then select what project you will have to direct IVUoFle and the other topics such as manufacturer for the lighting used or the alumnre used. We will see also help Forum, YouTube videos, and so on. So neglect this part. What is important for us is create a new project and edit existing project. If you are starting with Dex IV, then we are going to create a new project. Now, let's see how can we do this in the next lesson. 61. How to Import Autocad Plan into Dialux Evo: Now let's learn how can we add a blend into our DalexEvOPgram. So as you can see, we have import blend into our DiexEvO. Click on this one in order to add any Autocad bland. So as you can see here, we have Autocad first floor, this one. Okay, this one which we are working on, click on open like this. It will open the autocat file inside the Dalexa program. As you can see here, this is our plan which we are talking about in the complete course of electrical design. So as you can see, we have office, kitchen, store, workshop, room, transformers, room of the transformers, battery room, ACDC room, and so on. Okay, stirs entrance, stairs, and so on. So we are going to design the lighting for this plan. So before we do anything, you have to do one step, which is, as you can see, we cannot click on any of the menus. As you can see, we cannot click on anything here. Like this, clicking or anything is not working. Why? Because as you can see first, you have to draw the origin for the plan. The origin is a point. If you'd like the plan as it is, then you are going to click like this and you can see you can one click and rotate. If you would like to cancel this, you click on Skep like this. Click again like this. Then if you would like the plan inclined like this, for example, inclined by a certain angle then click, you'll find that the bland is now inclined. Now, if you don't want like this, you would like to be as it is. You can first cancel here. Then loud plan, select the plan again, like this. Then add the point at anywhere like here. Then you will find here, suddenly becomes horizontal like here. Click like this and you'll find that the plan is now as it is, and this is the point of origin of the plan itself. Second step is selecting the units. And what I mean by units, is the plan defined in inch or foot or yard or mile, millimeters, centimeter, meters, kilometer. This is knowing from where from the plane itself, from the autocad plan, the unit used, is the unit here, the measurement here, meter or millimeter. Okay? What is the unit of the measurement? So as an example, if I don't know, or I would like to check. Let's say I think it is meter, which is wrong, but I will select meters. Okay? Now, check lens like this. So we will go at any room to check lens like here, click from here to here. Okay, like this. 6,225 meters. So the room itself or the length of the room is 6,225 meters. So, of course, there is no room of 6,000 meter. So the logic number is that it is 6,000 millimeter. Okay? 6,000 millimeter. So we click on Skep like this, then click on back. Next, then we would like to know the lens. Okay? Cancel like this. Okay, selecting a blend again. Okay, selecting the point like this. Then units we will select, for example, meters, not meters, but millimeters. Okay. Then click on finish. Okay. Now we'll find that the units here, unit of measure is millimeters. How can you check if you go like this, zoom in, like this. And you would like to measure this or this of any room, any room you can use here the tab, this tab measure, click on it. Then go at any area like here, for example, from here to here. Click here like this and go, you'll find, as you can see, 7.725 meters, which is logic, a room of seven meter length or width, whatever, 7 meters is reasonable reason or logic. Okay. Another one. Let's say from here to here, as you can see, 6.226, which is, of course, logic. Okay? So here we have measured. We have added a plan. In this lesson, we added a plan, and we selected units and the point of origin, and then you can see we selected the scale or the unit of measurement, which is millimeters. Okay? In the next lesson, we will discuss about this menus, okay? 62. Tabs in Dialux Evo: Now in this lesson, we are going to discuss the different tabs here, and this one tabs and sub tabs in this DialexEPgram. So as you can see, we have here this representing the steps. So first step is the project. Here you can add a name of the project, a brief description for the project, the address, and the date of the project, and you can add description. Okay, you can add also image and more information here. Okay? This is not really important for us. Anyway, it's not important in designing of the project. You can add this information according to the project which you have. Anyway, the most important steps is the construction, then light, then calculation objects, then export, then documentation and manufacture of luminar itself, okay? So, no, starting with construction, okay? The construction, as you can see, the plan. You can load any plan or replace a plan or whatever you would like, Okay? The autocad plan. And as you can see here, we have the first step is the construction itself of the plan. And you can find here some tabs or some sub taps. Site, for example, as you can see here, building construction, you will find here also spaces, rooms, ceilings, roofs, and so on. Okay? All of this we will discuss in details. When we, as you can see here, draw a room, you can specify or identify the rooms which you have in the plan, this room, this room, and this room. So that when you started signing, you would like to design this room with a certain lax. So the program will know you would like to design inside this room, okay? Or this room, or this room, and so on. Okay? So first, we define the rooms of the blends. Then we start the lighting design, as you can see here, different options for umires. Then after this, we do the calculation part of the Daleks even in order to identify the x in each room and more details. Then we start exporting our plan with Lumars the form of auto cat file. Then we have finally documentation or just a brief report or a report for the plan which we are working with. Okay. So the steps is construction, then lighting, then calculation of the objects, then exporting and documentation. Okay? So let's go to the next lesson and understand more about DalexEvO 63. Plans in Construction tab of Dialux Evo: Everyone in this lesson, we are going to discuss the construction or the construction tab inside the Dialex program. We discussed the tabs here, then we are going to discuss the construction in this lesson and the plans tab. First, we learned how to import a plan into the Dialex program. Now, let's see what is the plans. The first step here inside the construction is the plans. First one is loading a plan. If I would like to load a plan into our Autocad. As an example, if I click here loading plan and selected, for example, this one, this one. As you can see what happened here is that we have another plan inserted or added to the Daleks program. If we do the same steps, next, first, we have to identify the origin point like this. Then we select the units and we said before that our plan is in millimeters according to the plan itself and your knowledge about the plan, you can know if it is in millimeters or centimeters or in meters. In my own case, the plan is in millimeters. Then click on finish. As you can see, the two plans are above each other. We can move if I would like to add more than one plan, I can move this plan to the right, for example. As you can see, we have two plans here, one and two, same plan, but two copies of the same plan. So if I would like to move one of these plans to the right. Let's say this one, then we can move plan from here, move plan, click on move plan. Then come here at any space, click, then drag. How much you would like to move this plan, 11 meters. What distance you would like to move? For example, let's say 10 meters. As you can see, still close to each other. Let's move it more. 12 meters, for example, as you can see, now the two plans are separate from each other. As you can see, this is the position of the second plan. This is the X, this is Y, and this is Z. X and Y, as you can see, with respect to this or them point. The coordinate system here, this is the X and Y of this plan with respect to this coordinate system. The distance from here to here is 25 in X axis and Y X is negative 0.4. Okay. Now, what if I would like to change this coordinate system position? Simply, as you can see here, set coordinate system to select a new position for the coordinate system, this one. Click on this and select anywhere. For example, I would like to make it here, for example, like this. Like this. As you can see, this is a new axis. As you can see our plan with respect to this origin point, it is negative 0.85 with respect to X and negative 0.6 meter with respect to Y. Now, what if I would like to delete this plan? For example, you can select it and right click and remove or select it and click on delete on the keyboard like this. Remove plan including all users, okay. So as you can see, this plan removed. Now, if I would like to get back the coordinate here, for example, here like this. Here this is our coordinate system and this one, it's a position with respect to this coordinate system. Of course, you can choose the unit of measurement, millimeters, meters, you can change it back from here. As an example, if I select meters, you can see it is very large if I choose meters. Let's say millimeters as we selected. If it is like this, we can do something. If it is, for example, very small or something, you simply click on this one, Zoom to entire scene like this. As you can see, we can see our plan again. Now, what if I would like to replace this plan? Remove this one with another one with the same settings or the same configurations. Simply, you can click on Replace plan like here and select what you would like to replace. This one is auto cat first floor. Let's say this one, floor one. As you can see, we replaced. You can see the autocad one is removed and we added floor one, which is this one. With the same configurations as you can see the unit of measurement, millimeters, the same coordinate system and everything as it is. That's the first step loading a plan to load a plan to the project. Replace plan to replace a current project with another one. Let's return back to the original one, for example, this one, Okay. And here we have the plans which are available. You will see them here. You can switch between them. As an example, floor one. As you can see the above each other. Select the point here, for example. With respect to its system, you on its millimeters, finish, okay. Then as you can see, select, when we select any of them or to add this one, its position with respect to the coordinate system is five and negative 0.6. For the second one floor, floor one, you can see it's position negative 0.1 and 0.9 with respect to this coordinate system. Now let's remove this one, remove, okay? So now we have one plan. Now we discussed this one and the scale and positioning and move how to move a plan. Now the layer. Layer, what is layer representing? Layer representing the layers in the autocat file. Remember in the Autocad program which we have discussed in our course for electrical design, we have said that our autocad has different layers. The layers in autocat is available also here in BiexEvO as you remember from our class or our course for electrical design, we said that in the dalexs or the red dialex it does not have this option. You cannot control the layers inside the Dialex program. However, in DialexE has a more advanced option where you can control the layers inside the autocad inside DalexE. As you can see here, this is the text, as you can see layer of text, you can show it or hide it like this. Same as Auto click here, hide all of the text. You can show it back by clicking here. You can also see that text have a color of yellow. You can replace this with plaque, for example. As you can see, all the text became plaque. Or we can choose blue, for example, like this. Here you can see the doors. Door is in yellow. These doors, you can hide them by clicking here like this, show them back. And as you can see also, all of this, you can control all layers from here. Window, for example, this is Windows window. You can click here and hide the windows if you would like, and so. You can control everything here. Same as the Daleks, same as the AutoCAD program, which helps us a lot in editing our autocat file. Here, this icon, which I haven't explained. This one is used to make this one small. If we have many plans, you can large this icon so you can see it or make it small. That is what it does. Now, we have discussed the layer, positioning, scale. All of this. The last option is safe options, embed plan in project. What does this do? Okay. In the next step, we are going to do the construction and identifying identifying 1 minute, identifying our rooms, the size of the rooms and our building. When we do this, this is still an image. This one is an autocat file and the dialex doesn't know any rooms or anything. Okay. So when we identify our rooms, everything inside the building, if we save and close the program, you will find that this original original image will be removed. However, if we take this one like this, what does this mean? It means that this plan or this image will still be available as a reference for us. Okay. When we save and close the program, when we open it again and we have already identified our building, you will find that we still have this background. We can use this as a reference if you would like to know the rooms, for example, and so on. This was another lesson on Daleks Eve. 64. Drawing the Building Outlines in Construction Site tab Dialux Evo: Hey, everyone in the last lesson, we discussed the construction tap and specifically the plans tap. The next step inside the construction after we loaded our plan, added the unit of measurement, identified our coordinate system, and all of this stuff, the next step is that we have to go to site. What does site do? Site simply site is simply used to do or identify the outline of our building. We have to identify for our Dialex program the building which we are working with. As you can see, we have this plan for Dalexe hey the program sees this plan as an image, and we need to identify for it the boundaries or the outline of our building. You can identify the building by the free draw new building with a free line or draw a rectangular or a circular or a polygonal or a anyway, if you have a circular, for example, the building in a circular form, then you use circular. If it is a rectangle, then use a rectangular form. If it is a polygon, such as octagon, hexagon, and so on, you can use all of this feature. But for me, we usually use free tool, draw new building. To identify the outline or the building contour. What we are going to do is that we are going here to the outline. The outline of the building which is starting from here like this. Then click, then click, click click here, then go like this, go down here like this. So you identify the outline of the building itself. Click, click, and so on. What you are doing is just we identify the outline of the building itself. We can neglect, of course, the doors, all of this one line like this. Take this one here. Okay. Okay. Mm hmm. Like this. Then go here and here. 1 minute, okay. Like here. Then in the end, you go to the first point which you started. Click on this point like this and you can see you identify the building right now. As you can see, all of this are the points which I selected, this point, this point, this point, and so on. You can find here each point it's X and Y with respect to the coordinate system. And you'll find the length of each line, the distance between each point and the next point. Here as you can see zero and zero, this one is 0.025 and negative 1.69. As you can see the difference between the large difference is 1.69 in the Y axis, and so on and if it has a certain angle, it will be shown here. In the end, what you are going to do after doing all of this, you will have your own building. You can then like this, click on anywhere, you identify the building which you have. Now you can say what is this building which you have identified. If it is a floor or anything, you can say in this example, it's floor number one. Floor one, you can also add the description for this building and if it has height thickness, and so on, you can add it here. As you can see after we draw our building, you can see that the program automatically goes to the next step, which is here story and building construction. If we get back here to site, you can see what is the name of this site, which we have done here. What is the name of this site? This site is known as floor one. Floor one and you can add a description for it if you would like, floor one. Now, as you can see, you'll see here the maintenance factor in the lighting design. You can see it is taken as 0.8 and we can change it or we can change it when we are designing our lighting system in the next lessons. You can see also the side alignment. What does this do? You can see here the time zone of your own location of the building. You can also add the longitude, latitude of the building, north alignment of the building itself, and you can choose the location of the building where it exists. This feature is used for the lighting sign in case if you are depending on the sunlight. The sunlight itself, if you are depending on the sunlight, then you are going to take in consideration the location of the building itself. As you can see during the daylight, the sun light will go through windows and light our office. In this case, we will need lower amount of luminars However, in our design, we neglect the sunlight. We assume that we are designing based on the night, not based on the sunlight or the morning, but we design based on the night case. We will neglect this part. If you would like to if you are going to take in consideration the light effect or the sunlight effect, then you are going to add the location here. Okay. We add our building the outlines of our building and you can see the next step here is that we are going to add room. Rooms, we will define the rooms in our building in order to design the lighting for each room. In the next lesson, we are going to identify the story and the building construction or drawing the rooms. 65. Drawing Rooms in Dialux Evo: Hey everyone. In this lesson, we are going to discuss how can you start drawing the rooms inside DalexE. In the previous clause, we draw inside the site tab in construction. We have drawing our building. As you can see, you can see the outline or the contour of the building itself. Okay. Now, you can see this is called the floor plan or the two D view. If you would like to see this building in a three D view like this, click here, and as you can see, click and drag. You can see this is our building in three D, you can see it as one lock, one complete block, and as you can see, we did not define our rooms yet. With the next step, we get to the floor plan view, then go to the story and building construction like this. Now what are we going to do now? In this lesson, we are going to design our rooms or identify the outline of our rooms for the autocad or the Dialects program. Okay, not autocad but dialex program. First, as you can see here the story height, this is the height of the rooms. As you can see, it is 2.8 by default and the thickness of the floor itself is 0.2. Now, I'm going to make this, for example, 3 meters, the height of the rooms and as you can see, this is the height, 3 meters and thickness of the floor, as you can see, thickness of the floor is 0.2. Okay. Now let's draw the rooms. How can we start drawing our rooms simply by clicking on draw New room. Let's zoom in like this and start identifying our rooms, draw new room. Then we're going to do same as the building, identify the dimensions of the room or the outlines of our room. We will go like this, select this point, come close here like this and move here like this and here. Then right click and close polygon. As you can see, this is the room which we have designed. Now, as you can see, there is a small problem here, this should go to the left, we can select it, click on it, then drag like this. As you can see, this is our room number one. Defined inside the Dalexy program. Now let's see this in the three D view. As you can see room number one, like this. You can see empty space inside the building which representing the room. Get back to the floor plan view. Now we have the kitchen. Let's draw new room like this, select this point, go here like this. Like this and this right click and close polygon. Let's see. Uh huh. Like this. As you can see, this is a room of the kitchen. Now, you can see we have WC here, draw new room, select like this. Close polygon. You can see it is a little bit to the left, so we are going to click on it, drag it like this, like this. As you can see, Room one, two, three, which is the office, kitchen, WC, and so on. Here we have the store, draw new room. Click on the corner here, then here, then here, and here, click Close polygon, define another room, and so on start doing all of this to all of the rooms. Why? Because we would like to define the rooms for the DalexEV same as what we did in the course of electrical design in the red dialec or the Dalek red. Let's take this one here. Okay. So we can take the swan, delete, draw. As you can see, we have a column here, so we are going to do like this, go down here. Like this. Click los polygon. As you can see the room and we here, identify the column here. Auxiliary room transformer like this. Mm hmm. Closed polygon. So as you can see, the room of transformer, the second room of transformer here. Okay. Get it here like this. What if I did a mistake? Let's say I did like this and I would like to get back to the last step. Simply, click on Control and Z, Control or Control Z, like this. Return it to the previous point. I can do like this and click Close polyco hmm. Okay. Draw a new room like this, this. Okay. Close. Mm hmm. Okay. The room of number nine. Let's take this one here. Like this. Take the upper part. There's a corner here. Okay. Okay, we can delete this and do another one like this. Okay. Control Z L here. Um close polygon. Let's see. Okay, now it's a lot better. Okay? We can move this one to the left like this. Okay. Okay, great. Now we have this room too. Okay close polygon. I can move this a little bit upward like this. If we would like to neglect this is a very small part instead of drawing like this, we can neglect this really small part. It is not really effective in drawing. Till now, we have drawing all of our rooms. Let's see as a red view like this. As you can see here the rooms all of our rooms. As you can see here you will have the entrance here if we have an elevator or stairs and between them, there is a corridor here. We need to define the corridor to add the lighting to it. Let's get back to the bland view or the two d view. Then we can do this draw new room. Consider what we are talking about now is the corridor. Consider the corridor as one room, like this. Okay. I exist. Uh huh. Go up here and here. All of this one block. Like this, and right click Close Blicon. As you can see now, all of this is a corridor, one complete block. If we look at this D view like this, you can see here room 12, which is a corridor. And this is the entrance and stairs. Neglect them for now. As you can see, we have drawing all of our rooms and the corridor one block of corridor. Now, we have to identify something here. Let's say, if we have if, for example, a room here, a room inside the corridor itself. How can I show to the Dialex program that there is here room in this location. Inside the corridor itself, there is a small room between them. This room, I cannot add lighting to it or if it is a separate room, then we have to show the Dialex program that there is a room here. Okay, inside the corridor. We can do this by doing something which is called the contour or draw new out like this. Let's say a room here, like this. Like this. You can see what will happen when I do this. Close polygon. The Dialects program know that there is a room here in this location. Now, if we look at the three D view, you will see that here. Uh huh. Like this. We draw a room here. As you can see, as you can see inside the three D view, you will see a block here. As if we draw a building inside the corridor. This one representing a separate room. We can do if we have a small room and we can do all of the lighting with one step or if there are several rooms or several large rooms, then we have to consider this as a separate building or a separate block. This block representing as an example a room. Then you can do this dialects program. Now, let's say you would like to represent the room, this is a room, okay? So let's say we have the inner dimensions like this. This is the room itself. Closed polygon. The Dialex program understands that there is a room in the middle of the corridor. If we look at this three D view, you will see now it is there is a room here, okay? Now this will happen if we have a large corridor and inside this large corridor, there is a block inside it, such as a room or something. Now, if I would like to delete this, select this and delete like this, select this and delete on the keyboard. Now, three D view, you will see now the corridor only. In this lesson, we have learned how you can add rooms inside the DialexEV program. Okay? 66. Drawing Doors and Windows in Dialux Evo: Hey, everyone. In the last video, we discussed how can we add rooms inside our building? We added the dimensions or the outlines of the rooms inside our building. As you remember here in the three D view. What are we going to do in this lesson? In this lesson, we are going to add the apertures or the openings inside our building. What I mean by this, I would like to add doors and windows. Okay. So how can I do this? As you can see, you can add after clicking on this four step, bit, you will find here the window. You can click on select here and you can select what type of window and door you would like to add. As an example, I would like to add a door like this one, door Okay. As you can see, this is the shape of the door, as you can see here and you can find also the dimensions of the door. As you can see, this is the dimensions of the door, 0.92 meters height and 0.075 as depths. As you can see, 2.9 and depths. You can control the height and the width and depth of the door from the settings. Now, let's say I would like to add door, let's say here in this room. If you look at the three D, for this room, you can see that this room, room number one, it does not have any door, as you can see here. Like this. Let's door number one, this one. Does not have any door. How can I add a door like this? Simply, we would like to add a door here. This is our door, click and drag like this and put it inside the wall. As you can see, we cannot put it inside any space because the program or the dialect program understands this is a space of the room. You cannot add a door here or here. However, you can add a door inside the room itself or the wall of the room itself. I can put it in any wall here. Let's say put it here like this. So as you can see, this is our door. You can see this is the beginning and the end of the door installed. However, as you can see here, this door starts from here to here. Remember that before we continue, remember that the doors and windows are not essential. They don't affect the lighting design. This is just an extra step if you would like to add doors and windows. I'm showing you how can you do this? Simply click on it. Then using the keyboard, move using the arrows in the keyboard, click on the right one like this. You can move this one by clicking on at first, move at first, like this, then clicking on the R of the keyboard, you can see it moves. As you can see here. Now, the second option, move, you can also use the scale to increase the size or decrease the size of the door or you can use the dimensions here. Let's say if you increase the width, for example, to for example, 1.9, just as an example. You can see that the door became very large. Let's get back to 0.9 like this. You can control the dimension of the room of the door itself from here. Okay. Now, can we scale it like this and you can scale from this side or the other side? Let's say from this side, when these two s appear, click and drag like this. Like this. As you can see, the size of the door increase. You can click like this and make the door really small like this, or you can return it back click and drag. Like this. Click and till here. As you can see the start of the door, the end of the door in the two D. As you can see, we added a door into the Dialect EV program. Now, what if I would like to see this in the three D view? Click here, as you can see, this is room number one, and as you can see, this is the door. We add a door to the room. If we rotate like this, like this, you can see here the room number one and its own door. Okay. Let's try another one, you can understand. Let's say this one. For example, select the door, click and drag into the wall like this, then zoom in. Like this, select it and move. Uh huh. Like this. Here, for example, let's see this is the beginning, this is the end, it is accurate door. Let's see the three D view like this, the second room. You can see the door here and the door here. Okay. So we added here two doors. Now, what if we have a double door like this one? You can simply add more from the Internet. You will find more different types of doors. Or we can simply use this door two times like this click like this and add another one. We can take this one and drag here like this. Take this one and move, then drag it like this. Like this. As you can see, two doors in front of each other beside each other. If we see the three D view, you see the two doors, the doors are not same as each other. They are opposite to each other. We can do this, select this one, for example, and rotate, rotate, rotate one time, like this, rotate another time, like this. You can see now the two doors are similar to each other. If we see the three de view, you will see the two doors are same as each other. Okay. Let's see the other side like here, same as echos. You can also find more different types of door on the objects. You can download it from the catalog, for example. Now we have seen how can we add rooms to our building? What about windows? As you can see, we have window here and another window here. Okay here. Same as doors, but we click on Select and select any type of window. You can see an Archid window, you can see a rectangular window. As an example, I select the rectangular. Then take the window and add it here. Inside, of course, the wall itself like this. We can set the dimensions starting from here. The window start from here to, for example, here, we can select scale, then go here. As you can see the length 1.547, it appears, you can move it like this till the end, like this. We have a window here. We can change the height of the window itself and of course, the other dimensions as you can see here. Now, let's see this one in the three D view like this. Uh. This is room number one, the door, and this is our wind. Our winds get back to the other side, you can see the wind. Okay. Now let's add another type of window to the room. To this room, for example. This room has two windows combined to each other. I don't know how, but anyway, we will add one window as shown here. Let's go here, select. Select the ArchidO for example. Add one here and add a small one here. Just to make it clear. This, click and drag here like this, then scale like this. Can add another one here, a small one, for example, scale, make it small here and make it small until here. We have here two windows, two archd windows. Let's see them in the SD view. You can see here, this is a kitchen. A small window, you can see here another window inside WC itself, small window, very long window, but anyway, this is just for illustration. You can just get back here, select as this one, for example, decrease the height, make the height 0.5. 0.5. And this 1.5, 0.5 and make some space between scale between the window and the wall here to scale, make it a little bit smaller like this and see it in the three D view. You can see in very small window. Let's make it 10.5 is really small. You can make it one and this one is also one. Instead of 0.5, three d view. It is more logical window like this. Small window here, small window here. Okay? Okay. Now if we get back to this window, you can find here this is a position of the window itself in XY Z, and this one is also the position of the window itself. In this example or in this lesson, we discussed how can you add doors in the DalexEV and how can you add windows in DalexE? Okay? 67. Spaces in Dialux Evo: Hey, everyone in this lesson, we are going to discuss the spaces tab inside the construction in Dialect CV. In the previous lesson, we discussed how can you add doors and windows to Dale if. Now, let's see another tab. We have discussed the plans, we have discussed this one which is side story and apertures and all of this, we have discussed them before. Now, if you go down here to spaces, you will find here, what does the spaces do? Spaces show with you the spaces which you have designed inside the DalexEvOPgram. As you can see the spaces which I have done, as you can see Room Number one, room number two, Room three, and so on. All of our rooms. All of these are considered separate spaces inside DalexEvO in addition to the corridor, you will find it here as Room Number 12. Okay. As you can see, we have Room one, two, three, four, and we would like to name the rooms. How can I do this? Simply, you can select any of these rooms like this one, Room one. If I click on it, what will happen. You will see Room Number one. You will see the properties and the work blend of the room number one, which is office. Office is written inside the original autocat file. The first step we can name our rooms. We have here office, so we can name this as Office like this. As you can see, instead of room one inside Dalek it became office. You can see the height of the room itself is 3 meters and you see here the working blend, which is, of course, important in the lighting design, which we have discussed in the design in the dies red or the red Daleks in the previous sections in our course for electrical design. Let's see the other rooms. If I click on any room, I can change its name, the second step Rename each one. We can also then after doing this, we can remove our autocatPO hide the autocatF. Here we have the store, okay. Like this, this one is workshop, work, hop. This one is auxiliary transformer, auxiliary, transformer transformer. So we will copy all of this and go to this one. This also auxiliary transformer, like this. And this one is battery room battery Room. This one is AC DC room, AC to DC room. This one is the Corridor. D. We can also add the entrance. We haven't done the entrance and we haven't added the asters. You can add them also inside Dalexy. But let's focus more on the interior parts here or interior rooms. So let's see the options here. We have named all of our rooms inside the floor itself. You can see we have different views here. You can see we have office building. This is all of our project, the complete project. You can name it from site. From site here, you can name the office building, which we are working on representing all of our site or all of our building. If we have a building with a garden and all of the things or all the interior design, you will find it here inside the office building, which we have named here. Second part is that we can have a building one building of many buildings. This building will be building one. This one, which you can find here inside the story. You will find here floor one, which is a part of building one. Building one representing whole building. If we have more than one floor, you will see all of them above each other. The plan as one plot. The floor representing each floor. If we have more than one floor, we will see a menu here where we can select different floors. You can see here this one is rooms. We start with large area, having more than one building, for example, then we have a group of building where we select which building, and as you can see, we have only one building. Then you will select what floor you would like, but we still have one floor only, and here we select rooms. If you click here, you will find all our rooms which I just named. As an example, battery room like this, you will find it focuses on the battery room only. If we click like this, it will give us the floor only. If you click like this, gives us the whole building and here the whole site. Now, what if I would like to see them in different views? Let's see, this one is d view or the floor plan view which we have seen right now in three D like this. This which we have seen before. Okay? This is a three D view of the whole. If we have more than one building, then you will see all of them here. Now here, building one, it will give you one building only. If we have more than one building, we will only see the selected building only. Here, floor. The selected floor only, as you can see, this is the floor which we have done. It is the only floor. That's why we don't have another floor here. It shows you all of the floor and the rooms inside it. If we select a room like this, the battery room, you will see that the Daleks Evo gives us only one room, which is a battery room. Select another one from here, auxiliary transformer, like this. Okay, building one like this, then we will go to the two d view like this and office building, everything here. Now, as you can see that here we have entrance, which is a name in the autocat file and you will see office a small office behind the office of the DalexE. You can see here kitchen, which is behind the large kitchen here, and so on. Now, after we have done all of our spaces, as you can see from spaces here, you can see after we have done all of them, named all of the rooms, we would like to and we have done all spaces or all of the rooms. Now I would like to remove the file or hide the autocat file. How can I do this? Simply, we can see here at this one display plans, click here. And untick the plan. We have only one plan which I obtained from autocad, which is autocat first floor. Now, untake this one like this, you will see that we hide the original file or the original autocat file. As you can see, rooms which we have designed inside the DalexEU you'll see the names which we have added. Of course, we need to add the stirs and entrance. That's why I'm going to do this right now so we can complete our plan. First, let's add it like this. Then go down here, get back to story like this. Let's draw the entrance like this, select this one here, Which we have done in the lesson of how to draw, how to draw rooms inside the Dalek Evo like this, take this one, get here, here. Uh huh. Closed polygon. As you can see, we have drawing room number four, which is entrance. Like this, we can move it a little bit here. This is the building itself. We can move it like this, like this. Then we can go to this part, which is stairs, drawing room, go here, like this. Okay. Closed polygon. Let's see the rooms building one, entrance, small space between them. Let's go to spaces like this, name this one as stairs name this one as entrance. As you can see, we have done all of our plans store shop, transformer, battery room, stairs, corridor, entrance, and everything. We can save it like this and we have discussed all of these icons. This is to give you a zoom to the entire scene, as you can see here. This is used for measurement to measure anything, and this one is to set the coordinate axis of this point the reference point. Okay? 68. Adding Ceilings to Dialux Evo: Everyone in the last lesson, we discussed the spaces and we discussed the spaces inside the rooms in DalexE. Now, we are going to discuss another feature inside the construction tab of DalexE. As you remember we discuss the spaces. Now, as you can see, we have two more tabs here. One of them is the room elements which are representing the columns, which can be added to the rooms. Of course, this is something which is related more to the this one is related to the architecture engineer, not to the electrical engineer. It has its own certain calculations, we will beams, so we will neglect all of this stuff. Also we have here roofs, which you can add it to. If it is a lost floor, you can add also a roof and also it is not related to electrical engineers. It's not important in the lighting calculations. Now, the feature which we would like to discuss in this lesson is the ceilings. So as you know that inside the building inside the floors, we have a ceiling. If we look at the three D form of the building like this, as you can see, we have here a ceiling, concrete ceiling, as you can see here. Now, this ceiling is the ceiling of the building or the ceiling of each floor. Okay. Now, as you know that there are some types of rooms or sometimes of floors, which have a suspended ceiling. Or sometimes we have suspended luminars. As you can see here, for example, this is a photo of a room, and as you can see, there is an extra layer of ceiling, this ceiling. Now, we add the luminars here, for example. This extra layer of ceiling reduces the height the height here reduces this height at which from the luminar or from the luminar to the ground. This means that we need to add this ceiling for more accurate results. Another example if you have air duct, for example, as you can see the luminars here. This is of course a bended luminar. This can be added, of course, to the Daleks program. But assume that we have an extra ceiling under the original ceiling and we attach to it or add to it the surface mounted luminars. In this case, we should add this extra layer of ceiling. Another one like here, we have an extra layer of ceiling. Above this ceiling, there's air ducts, for example, or HVAC ducts. This, the distance from luminar to the ground is less than the distance from ground to the original ceiling. How can we add this to the dialects program? Now let's see our floor. Let's say we would like to add a ceiling, another ceiling to the office. As you remember that the height of the room itself from the ground to the ceiling is 3 meters. We would like to add an extra layer of ceiling. Extra layer of ceiling of 0.5 meter as an example. How can I do this? Simply, as you can see in the ceiling stab, you will find insert ceiling into room. Click on it and you'll find which room you would like to select. You would like entrance, stairs, a CD to DC room, whatever you would like to select. As an example, we said we would like to have another ceiling or another layer of ceiling in the office. If I click on the office like this, you'll find that here when we select the office like this, you'll find this is an extra layer of ceiling. This one has a ceiling void or the layer or the ceiling height, this extra ceiling is 0.3 meter. What does this mean? It means that the distance from this ceiling to the ground is 2.67. There is also the ceiling sickness, 0.03. If you would like to see this in two D form or three d form like this, as you can see, if we go like this, you will find here. This ceiling. This is an extra ceiling. As you can see the distance here, this distance is 0.3. Let's see exactly here in ceilings, this one, as you can see the ceiling void or this distance, this distance, small distance is 0.3. This distance. As an example, if I make it 1 meter to understand the idea, 1 meter, for example, like this, you will find here this void increased. If we look into our room like this, you will find that the height here from this ceiling to the ground from ceiling to the ground is what is 1.97. Okay, 1.97. Remember that 1.97. Where did we get this? This distance is equal to this distance plus 0.03, which is the ceiling thickness, the ceiling itself has a small thickness of 0.03, and we have the void, which is the ceiling itself, the distance of the ceiling is 1 meter, so 1 meter plus 0.03 of the thickness plus 1.97, which is this distance, gives us three meter of the height from the ground to the original ceiling. As you can see, we have here an extra layer, this layer, you will find that we attach the luminar, we add the luminars here in the second ceiling. The luminars will have a distance or a height from here to here from this new ceiling to the ground. If we don't have the ceiling, then we will have distance from the original one here. From the highest point to the ground, which is 3 meters. This is how can you add ceiling to the dalexy program. As an example, 0.5. Let's make it 0.5 meters, like this. As you can see, this one is 0.5. This is an extra layer of ceiling. Let's go inside the room like this. Let's make it like this. Zoom in, like this. As you can see, this is a ceiling. Here the new ceiling to the ground. This ceiling to the ground is 2.47, its height. This is the height which our lumiers will see, this lesson is how to add an extra ceiling to the auto cat file or the Dialects program. Okay? 69. Quick Lesson on Cut Out Tool in Dialux Evo: Hey, everyone in the last lesson, we discussed some features in Dia such as how can you add doors, windows, and so on. We said before that it is not important for us as electrical engineers. But the important feature, which is the ceiling which we have discussed before. Now, we would like to discuss a quick tab here or a quick tool here which we can use in DalexEV it is also not important as an electrical engineer. Let's see that three D form like this. Order to understand how can we do this? Like this. We have this room, which is a battery room. Now what we would like to discuss something which is called the cut out. If I would like to form a cut out inside the walls or I would like to form a cut out on the ground. How can I do this using the cutout tab? You can simply choose any type you would like rectangular, circular, polygonal, and so on. As an example, let's choose a rectangular on the ground. Let's see what will happen when I'm going to do a cut out in the floor on the floor or on the ground, like this. Select the first point, second point, and so. The rectangular form like this. You will see we have formed. Let's use another tab like this one. For example, as you can see, we have made a cut out inside the ground or the floor itself. This one, which we can control, get back here, we can control its parameters such as size, rotation, position, and so on, from the parameters. So as you can see when we select our cut out, as you can see here, you will see the size, lens width, and thickness and you'll find here the cutting depth, the depth of cutting. As you can see 1 meter. So this is how can you do a cut out on the floor? As an example, let's delete this one by selecting it and clicking on delete on the keyboard like this. Now, can we make a cut out on the wall? Yes, choose any of these forms. As an example, circular cut out like this, like here, and then do your own circle like this. Choose the radius of circle as an example, 1.001 0.077 like this. As you can see, we have made a hole or a cut out inside our wall. Let's choose any other view like this. As you can see, we have made a cut out inside the wall itself, like this. If we get back here, if we select this one, we can control the depth here, as you can see 1 meter, you can see, its size, and you can control its position as you would like. Here you'll find XYZ. As you can see the X and Y and Z. As an example, instead of 1.8, let's make it this 1.9 like this. As you can see the z or the position, you change it. Let's make it 1.2 again. Like this. Now, someone will ask me why do we do this? Is it important for electrical engineers? No, I'm just showing you this feature in Liv. You can understand what is the benefit of the cut out. That's the purpose of the video is just to show you how can you do a cut out inside a wall or a ground? Just an extra knowledge for you. There's also an option which is cut out, this one, which can help you to make a polygon shape like this. Like this. You can then we click and click on close Bollgon. As you can see story, you can see another irregular shape like this. You have many options that circular, rectangular and bolygon shape. This was another lesson on DalexeH can use cut out inside Dalex 70. Adding Furniture and Objects to Dialux Evo: Hey, everyone in this lesson, we are going to discuss how can you add furniture and objects to our plan. In the last VD, we discuss the cut out. Now this lesson, we would like to discuss the furniture and objects, which is of course in the construction tab. Click first on furniture and objects. Now, at first, let's say you have the autocat file and you already have the furniture of the plan, and you would like to add the furniture to Dalexv. You have to remember that the furniture is not really important in the lighting design. However, I would like to show you how can you add furniture to the Dalex file. Let's say we have this store. This store, we will consider this one for this lesson as not a store, but room, a meeting room. To make it really, really easy for you. As you know that in the meeting room, we have a table in the middle of the room and we have some chairs around it. We would like to add a table and some chairs to understand how can we do this in DialxE. First, as you can see active objects, we will click on Select like this in the furniture tab and go to catalogs like this and then click on DalexE. Double click like this. You'll find that it is reading faster at the beginning when you start clicking on this one. It will load all of the furniture and objects which are in Deluxe EV. As you can see, we have objects in general, all of the objects which you can select from Idelx EV and you will see we have home furniture, office furniture, and so on. As an example, we said this one is a meeting room, so it is an office. Let's go to office furniture like this. You'll find here tables. If we double click like this, let's get back. If you click on Office furniture like this, you will find all of the objects, all of the objects used in office. However, you will find here another RroO. If you click on this one, you will find the subcategories, which is table, the shares, and so on. Let's say we need a table, click on table and you'll find all of the tables which are available in Dialecf. Many different types of tables. Let's say we would like to select one for this lesson, let's select one of these. Okay. Let's go here like this. Um, go down here. Let's say this one, for example, this one. What we are going to double colt like this, click Apply and then close like this, you will find the table here. Now, what are you going to do? Just take it like we did before indoors and windows, click on this and drag it like this here. I'll find here we have our table. If we move it like this inside the room, we have our table. Let's see in the three D view in three D view like this, you will find here a really small table. Like this, this one is really small. We can increase the size of this table. Like this, we would like to increase the size. Let's go to the two d view, select this one, and then go to scale like this. You will find here two arrows which appear, click and drag like this and to the other side like this and like this and like this. We have a large room here. We can drag it like this. Okay. So if you look at this three de view, you will find a table like this, this table. Then of course, the room here is really small. We can instead of using it here, we can add it in the battery room and consider this one as a meeting room. We can click it and drag to DVewGt like this, then you move, take this one here. Just to see how it looks like, like this. View like this. This one is a larger room which we can use. Click on E and scale to increase its size like this and like this. Large table in the middle of the room. We can move it like this. Like this. Now, what are we going to do next? We would like to add some chairs. First, we click on Select, same as before. Then click on the Dalex catalole click and you'll find it is loaded already. You don't have to wait every time. Then we go to office, then click on the RO, go to chairs. We would like any type of chair, you find many types of chairs. Let's say I would like this one of the chair, this one. Click on Apply, like this. Close, you'll find that chair here, take it and drag it anywhere you would like like this. You'll find here the chair like this. Let's see it in the three view like this, you will find here a small chair. We can take this one, move a little bit to here, like this. We can see here table and share not the best thing, but just to give you the idea how to do this inside Dialee. Now, if I would like to add more chairs, you can simply take and drag or just right click copy, then right click and paste, then drag this one here. Like this. We'll have two chairs. Now, instead of doing this, you can add another type of way, another type or another way to add miniatures as an example instead of just doing right click copy and paste and all of this. You can simply delete both of these chairs. And you'll find here many types of arrangement which you can use. We already discussed the arrangement in the red Dalek in our course for electrical design, and you can understand the same idea. Instead of having arrangement of luminars, you will have arrangement for the chairs as an example. Let's say I would like to see how it looks like a rectangular arrangement like this, go to the storeroom here. And I would like group of shares from this point to here this group of hairs here. You'll see here we have two chairs. Like this, if we select, we have chairs in this region, in this rectangular region, two chairs. Now, if we go down here, you will find that we can control number of objects. How many chairs you would like? Let's say I would like 60 chairs. Let's see if it is possible or not. Like this, six chairs. This is the position and this is in Y position. Let's say I would like three Y in the Y axis direction like this. You'll see one, two, three, three rows and six X x which is the columns one, two, three, four, five, six. If we click on anywhere and go to the three D view, not this one like this. This one here like this. You'll find here the arrangement of chairs. You can use this one in college, for example, when we need many chairs beside each other. This is one of the arrangement. Rectangular, there's also polygon, there is a circular and so on. We can select this one and lead. Now if I would like to have line of chairs here and another line of chairs, how can I do this? Simply, you can choose draw line arrangement and then you would like where you would like the line from here to here, like this. From here to here, like this. You'll find two chairs only. Now, how many objects I would like? As you can see here, we can control number of objects. Let's say I would like six chairs. Let's see, six chairs beside each other. So this is our line, first line. I would like another one here on the other side, let's see in the three D, huh. This one is looking not to the table but outside. Let's do something else like this, right click and copy, paste. Take this one here to the sit like this and take this one and then use rotate, same as what we did in the previous lesson of doors and the chairs. Now then like this and rotate like this. If we look at the three view like this, you'll find here a table table and group of chairs. Now we can add another chair here and another chair here. Go to the d view, take one chair here, then rotate like this. I think to this side, let's see, not the side, rotate like this. Then move like this. Let's see in the three D, a chair, group of chairs, take this one copy. Then we can add in this side, but it is not necessary. We added a table and we add a group of chairs. Now let's see if I would like to add a sofa, for example, select double click here, home furniture like this, go down here. Something like this, like this one. Apply. You'll find it here, close, take one of these and add it here. This one is on the left. Let's move the swan This is a lift one. Here you will find a bathroom. This is the battery room. Neglect this one. Neglect this part from the original battery room. Let's take this one here. Just assume this is a meeting room, an assumption. Let's see in the three D view, you will find here a small couch, like this. We can scale it like her go here, select this one, go to scale, then drag it like this one, like this. View. Something like this. We can add another one here, select, go to Dix here, home furniture, go down here, and find another one which is the right one, this one, apply, then close like this, drag it here. Like this, I scale a little bit like this. Okay. Let's see. Something like this two sofas, you will see how can we add them? Of course, the room is a lot bigger, should be a lot bigger, and of course, the door is a lot far from the sofa. Let's add, for example, a table here, to d view. It is the best to add in the two deview. To d view is much more easier. For example, any table, any small table, like this one, for example, apply, take this one here, take it here, then scale, select and scale like this. A small tip. Then we can select and move this close to this one. Let's see in this review, like this, something like this. It is a long table. But anyway, you can find many other tables which are better than this. I'm really bad at decoration, so don't judge me, please. As you can see, a group of chairs. Like this, you can see here group of chairs, table, group of chairs, to sofas and we have here a small table like this. As you can see, this is how can you add furniture to DalexEFle. Simply you can click on Select then click on this one, the catalog here, or if you have a folder with Diet files of other types of furniture, you can select them from here. Then after this, you select any one you would like like this. Click on Apply. You'll find here it changes. Then you simply click and drag to add any type of furniture. This was another lesson on how can you add a furniture to Dex EVO program? 71. Materials and Colors in Dialux Evo: Everyone in this lesson, we are going to talk about the materials and colors inside the Dalek. We discussed all of these previous tabs in the previous lessons. Now in this lesson, we would like to discuss this tab, which is materials and colors. As you can see here, materials, and you'll find it inside it, materials and colors. As you can see, we have this room, which we have discussed for this room named before. Its name was battery room. I have changed this room into a meeting room to be more easy to understand. As you can see, we added a table here as we did in the previous lesson from the furniture, and you can see we have group of chairs and some sofas. As you can see in this CD like this, as you can see, here table and some chairs and for sofas and you can see here a large container. Now, let's start. First, let's start from here. First, we would like to do the material and colors. First step is that you click on select like this. Then you will find here inside catalogs. You'll find here material catalog and you'll find Color catalog material catalog and color catalog. So first, as an example, we would like to change the color of our elements. We will choose the color catalog like this. Double click. As you can see, we have all of our colors. We have yellow, orange, red, violet, blue, green, and so on. As an example, yellow, you'll find in yellow, all of the different degrees of yellow you can use, you can find here orange and it's degrees, you can find violet, green, for example, like this. Brown gray, plaque or white, and so. Let's choose, for example, the violet, for example, like this, the violet. As an example, I would like this color. I will selt it like this. And click on Apply. You can see here the color, change it. Now, let's close this window. Then where I would like to apply the material. I would like to apply the material to this table, for example, select the stable, click on it. If you'd like the sofa, then you will click on sofa like this. You can change every part of this sofa, as you can see here. You can choose, for example, the doors. You can choose the container, for example, like this, you can select the chair, even some parts of the chairs like this, you can choose the other sofa, and so on. You can also click like this to choose the floor and you can choose all of the walls like this. If you would like to remove the cancel, click anywhere like this. Again, we will choose the color like this and said violet like this. This color, for example, this one, click on Apply Okay, this one. Now, apply material, click on Apply material to change the color of any element. Let's say I would like to change the table. I go to the table and click like this. As you can see the table color change it. What if I would like to change the color to something else like this? You can see here, you can choose also here, any color you would like. Let's say, for example, u this one, this blue. This blue as you can see here. Then click on apply material like this and click. As you can see, we have a blue table. Now, what if I would like? As you can see here, the sofa the sofa have a color. Okay. Now, what if I would like to select this color and make the table with the same color? How can I do this? How can I select this color and make this table with the same color? Simply would click on pick material like this, then go here and click on the color you would like to select like this one. As you can see, this color is selected. Now click on Apple material, go to this table and you can see that the color of the table became the same as the sofa. Okay. Now, what if I would like to change the chairs? I go to select now you can also choose color or you can use a material. Let's choose this time material. As you can see, we have indoor, outdoor. For example, we are working indoor. I will select indoor like this and click on this arrow like this. You can see floor, ceiling, window furniture, doors, wall, and so on. We are doing furniture like this. As you can see, you can change the furniture to any color you would like any material you would like. Let's say, um as an example, this one, double click. You will see it changes here. Now, we will click on Apply material, then go to let's zoom in. Go to a chair, like this. Apply material, like this. Okay? So that you can change the color of the chair. The same as the material like this. Mm hmm. Let's go here, for example, to this one. Okay. Let's zoom into this share. Go to materials, then apply material like this. You can of course select like this. Big material, this one, then apply material here. Um You still do all of this like this, select this one, this upper part like this, pick material, this one, apply material here, then pick material like this, apply material there like this, and so on. You keep doing all of this to every element inside your plan. We have changed the color of one of the chairs. As you can see here, you can do the same to all of the other chairs. Now, as an example, if I would like to change the color of the door, okay? So we will click on select like this, go to material. You will find here in door like this, click on this arrow, choose doors. You will find here material for the doors. Let's say, for example, I would like to see this one. Double click on this one, close this window, then click on Apply material like this, then go to this door, then apply material, go to the other door. As you can see, we changed the color of the doors. Two wooden door wood, as you can see here. For example, let's see if you would like to change the C as not the ceiling. The walls, for example, on select, save. Then go to select material indoor. Then wall like this here, you can choose even more different type of doors of walls, concrete or wood or plaster or wallpaper, brick, and so on. As an example, let's choose a this one, for example, this one, this one, double click, close, then apply material, then go to the wall like this. Then apply material to the other wall, then apply material to this wall. Let's rotate like this, like this, apply material to this wall. As you can see, we changed all of the doors as you can see here. Okay. Very nice. You keep playing with all of these materials or colors according to the room itself. Of course, this is not important for electrical engineers. However, I'm just giving you a small hint on how can you do this. Usually we do the lighting design without furniture. Let's choose, for example, the floor. Material, then indoor, then floor, where is the floor floor here. Okay. So you can choose any type of floor you would like to see. All of these are types of floors. Okay, here, for example, here, concrete tiles. Let's see this one, to see how it looks like. Then apply material, then go to the floor, click. So as you can see, it is a weird design. But anyway, this is how it looks using this material. Let's choose another one. Indoor floor. Okay. For example, this one, let's see this one. Okay? Double click Close, then apply material and click. So as you can see, this is how the room looks like now. You keep doing all of this and as you can see, all of this will affect the lighting design. The furniture with its own colors and materials will affect the lighting design. In this lesson, we learned how can we change or apply material to different objects inside the Dialex EV. 72. Adding Catalogs to Dialux Evo: Hey, everyone in the previous lesson, we discussed the furniture and objects or we discussed the materials tab, the last thing, which is the materials and color tab. We learned how to construct our rooms, how to add furniture, how to add colors, the materials, and so on. The next step in the lighting design using Dix IV is going to the light tab. Okay. So the light tab contains the luminars which we are going to install in each room. So we are going to do the lighting design for each room. So the first step is that we need to add the catalogs for luminars the luminiars which we are going to install in each room. So how can we add luminars? As you can see, we have selected the tab of luminiars this tab, as you can see, first, second one is lamps, but the first one is luminars which we are using our electrical design. In the luminres tab, we are going to go to select. Select as we did in the construction tab for any element. Now, we are going to go to catalogs. You'll find one default catalog which we don't use, loom search, which we don't use. We are going to use other catalogs. In order to add any catalog, what are you going to do? You're simply going to click on additional catalogs like this. Okay. As you can see here, as you can see this are all of the companies which deal with Dialecf. You can add all of these catalogs for these different companies to the Dale Save. As an example, how can we do this? Let's choose one company which is famous, which is Phillips. As an example, Phillips, click on it, one click. You have to be connected to the Internet. Okay? As you can see here, the website is loading. This website, of course, contains all of the catalog for the Phillips, different types of lumiers of Phillips. Now, how can we download the catalog? Simply, we are going to click here. As you can see, we have download catalog you will click one click on it. It will open the website on your own browser, as you can see here. Then you go down and download Phillips product selector plugin. Click on this one, like this. You'll find you are going to download the plugin or the Phillips catalog. We'll start downloading and then we will see what are we going to do. Now, after downloading the Phillips catalog, you'll find this file, so we will extract it like this. Okay. Then we are going to click on setup to install this Philips catalog. Then next accept next, complete English. Okay. Okay. Then click on finish. So we installed our catalog. What is the next step? Next step is that we will go back to the DalexEV then close the program like this. Then open the file again like this. Not like this, open with Daleks. Okay. We opened our file again. Now let's go to Light, then select, then go to catalogs and you will find now the Phillips catalog. This video, we learned how to add catalogs to the DalexE. 73. Selection and Adding Luminaries to Dialux Evo: Hi, and welcome everyone. In the last lesson of DialecEV, we discussed how can we add catalogs to DalexE. Now, we would like to understand how can we select or add luminars from a catalog. Okay? So as you can see here, we have light tab, the first one. You will see that here, active Luminar. We said that when we click on Select, we can go to the catalog the tab, and then you can add additional catalogs, download it from the Internet as we did in the previous lesson. Now we would like to go to Phelps catalogue we will double click on it like this. Since we downloaded it and installed it, now, as you can see, this is the interface you will have when you open the Phillips catalog. As you can see here, we can choose your own country. For example, I choose international, and as you can see, there is France, there is UK, and so on, depending on the country also you can choose the language you would like. Okay. So I'm choosing the international region and the English language. Now, as you can see, we have two options, import from database and import from file. We are now working one single mode, one luminiar. We would like to add one luminiar. Mult multiple means more than one luminar at a time. I would like to add one luminar from the database. As you can see first step, you can choose between indoor and outdoor. As an example, since we are working in an office, such as in the previous example, in the manual calculations, we said we are working in an office. Therefore, we will use the indoor. If you would like to choose the luminar of outdoor, you simply click on outdoor likes. Okay? But since we are dealing with indoor, we will click on indoor. As you can see, we have CLO and CLO. What does CLO mean? It means a constant light out. Special function in luminars which produce a constant amount of lumens. Anyway, it doesn't matter for us. We would like we will choose both of them, then and with this function. It's not important for us. Now, how can we select alumina or how can I choose lumina? We selected the indoor application. Then the first step, as you can see here is the first filter. You would like how we would like to select the alumina according to code or name or whatever. So in my case, I would like to select it according to light source. The type of source. If we choose it, you will find here everything LED, you'll find here TL five, and so on. As you see most of them in this update of Phillips, most of these luminars are LED. And there is only two which are fluorescent, okay? You can also choose according to luminar category like this and select. As you remember, the luminar category is enclosure category. Is it a surface mounted? Is it recessed mounted? Is it suspended? Is it wall mounted, and so on? According to the application, we discussed almost all of these types. As an example in an office and we have an H vx system, then I'm going to choose recess type. Okay. Now, second step, click here. You will find here also according to family code name driver, and so on. Now here, this time, I would like to select according to light source. Now remember that we are dealing with indoor and recess the type. We have only two types. We can have an LED or lead type and we can have a fluorescent lamps since we are dealing with indoor. In this case, I'm going to choose, as you can see here, we have only the LED type. Any type of them such as this one, LED module, having luminous flux of 1,500 lumens. You can see that different types of different omens. The higher the omen the lower amount of modules required. So when we have more flux of each module or of each luminar, it means that we will need lower amount of luminars. As an example, if I choose 5,000, I need, for example, two luminars if I choose 1,500, I need five linears. Lower amount means higher number of luminars required. This is an example we choose the 1,500. Now, as you can see, then we are going to choose, for example, using the family code like this and you can select the code if you already know what is the code. Now, as you can see here, this is the family code and family name like this, many many types, and according to the driver itself, as you can see, many many types. Whatever it is this type, you can see here the optic here representing the diffuser, the shape of the diffuser. As an example, I will choose this one and choose this one. For example, this is a cod. Each one of these have its own type. As you can see when I selected a random one of these, you can see that LED, 15 S. What does this mean? 15 and at two zeros, gives us the lomens. 15 means 1,500 lomens. As you can see, 1,500 loms. Let's see as an example, another one. We click reset all to remove all of this. Choose another one like this one, for example, and this one and this one. As you can see, 15 S is also 1,500 lm. Since I selected the 1,500 lumens, 15 S. Let's choose another one, 3,600, you will find here 36. Let's see, like this. Select a random one like this. Like this, as you can see, 36 s Y because 3,600 units. As you can see, this source have a color code 840 representing the color code. As you can see here, the color here it is none. However, 840 means the color code is 840. As you can see, this is the specs of the source. As you can see the source produces 3,600 lumens and at the same time when it reaches working space, it has the same value, it does not suffer from any losses. The power of the luminre itself is 29 watts. This one has one luminar or one lamp, made of LED. This LED having 3,600 lumens and its color is 140. Now, what is the value of colors? What does the color mean? We learned in the course about the codes or light codes in the color codes in color temperature or the color code in Kelvin. Now it 140 is a color code. What does this mean as you see here? This is what it means. We learned about Kelvin. Values. This is the equivalent color of this LED is 4,000 kelvin, for example, is 840. 6,400 kelvin means 865, 3,000 kelvin or warm white color, having a code of 830. When we have here, when we have here, as you can see it 140 as a value of the color code color, it means it is coal white, 840, which is 4,000 Kelvin. Now remember that we said before when we discussed the manual calculation and the different factors affecting the selection, we said that room room any room such as an office, for example, the office requires 4,000 Kelvin at least 4,000 kelvin, which means it 114 code. This one is suitable for our application. Okay LED at 140 and this is a polar curve. This is a polar curve of this luminar. As you remember, we have two polar curves as we discussed in the lesson of two polar curves, we said that one of these is a angle 0-90 degree and the other one is from 9,270 degrees. According to the installation angle, Now, for example, if I would like for example, if I selected this one and I would like to export it. As you can see here, this is an image for the LED lamp. LED luminar use. Now, for example, I click on dataset like this and I'm going to choose it as a general uniform lighting. That is my own purpose, not a spot. Then click on Create dataset like this. And you will have your own datasheet. For this product, you can see the polar curve, the wattage, that I mentions, 60 Multi bla by 66 centimeter six centimeter, which is used in office and number of omens lumens out one lamp LED, 3,600 lomens and 840 as a color. Now, this one can be used in office. If you are working with an LED using LED in your own project, you can use this one. Since LED or the light emitting diodes is providing lower amount of takes lower amount of power and provides higher amount of lumens. This type can be used if you have a large budget. If you can afford the LED, we said that LED is much better than fluorescent. However, the owner requires or according to the owner budget, you can select either LED type or fluorescent type in the project such as in an office building. As an example, we can here click on file and see the print review and so on. Now, anyway, so this is how we can select it from the base. This space is a Phillips space. This is inside the DalexEvOPgram. Now, let's say, for example, I would like a fluorescent type. As you can see in the cetype and you can see here, there is no LED type. Now, let's see, for example, the surface mounted like this and we select a TLive which is a fluorescent lamp. You can see most of them are LED. Now, for a fluorescent like this, you can see different types of fluorescent as you can see here and the optic which provides different polar curves, and this is the light source itself. As an example, I'm working with one, not one. Let's see another one, two multiblite by 28. To multiblite by 28 means we have two fluorescent lamps value each one of these is 28 watt. Each lamb is 28 watt so this is the one which have to meta blood by 28, two lamps or two floors and lamps. Each one is 28. Now, let's select the optic and you will see the difference now. Optic representing the polar curve, which is the distributor inside our luminar. The distributor can be C six, D six, M two, and so on. All of these gives us different polar curves. Now, if we select any of these, you will see the polar curve produced here. As an example, C six like this, you can see this is a polar curve produced. Okay? As you can see here, this one have the source of flux, light source of flux is 5,250 and suffer from losses getting to 3,500 lomi. As you can see, we use two multiblod by 28, what? Now, if we use only one luminar multiblod by 28, one multibla by 28, we will have half of this value. Remember, 5,000 and 3,500. If we click on reset all like this and select one multiblod by 28 like this. C six. You can see 2625 and 1969. As you can see, lower value. Now, we can select, as you can see, optic representing the polar curve. As an example, C six gives us these two polar curves. D six gives us another polar curve. OG, for example, gives us a different polar curve. A, for example, as you can see, gives us a focus in one region. The polar curve is focusing on one region or the lighting itself focusing in one region. If you don't remember anything about polar curve, return back to the lesson of polar curve. It's simply representing the distribution of light. As you can see, the optic here gives us different polar curves. As an example, if we select C six, this one, for example, for illustration, we will click on Ed like this. You will see close. You can see this Luminar active luminire. This one is the one which we selected. If I click on Select and click on history, for example, you can see this is a luminire which we selected and then we can use it in our plan. That's the first thing. Second thing, let's say if I would like to add the fluorescent lamp, which is not available here. I would like to add type of luminre which is not available in the program. What can I do? In this case, you are going to choose import from file. Let's say we would like to get aluminre for our project. What I can do? Simply, for example, we said before about TBS 165 is the luminre or the fluorescent luminre which we choose or we select it in our project. Now, what if I would like to add this Liner, which is not available here in this database to the program. What can I do? Simply, you are going to go to Google like this and type TBS 165 Blugin download. Click like this. Now you'll find here Lighting Philips, go to their official website like this. You can see this is luminre or the fluorescent lamp which I selected in the manual calculation. Usually this type is used in most of the projects. Really important um fluorescent Luminar, which is used in every or almost every project. We're going to use this in our project. Now, as you can see, this is TBS 165, which we used in manual calculations. It is four multiplied by 14. Okay, four multiplied by 14, which is four lamps, one, two, three, four. Each one of these is 14, what? 840 representing the color code, as you can see here, 840, which is 4,000 Kelvin is coal white, which is good for our office. Now, as you can see, you can see other respects, everything about it. But I would like to take this one and add it to the DalexyEV. What can I do? Simply if you go down here like this and you can see software plugins. As you can see here, there are different types of software plugins according to the program. Here you will find relax another program for lighting design. You are going to select LDT, this one, and click on it like this, then download it. We'll download this compress the file. Start to download. Now, after you download it, when you open the compressed file like this, you will find this one. This one, this LDT file is the file for this luminiarF this fluorescent lamp. Now, how can I add it to the program? Simply open the Dialece like this and then you go to here LuminireT when we open the catalog, then click on Import from file. Then click on prose. Select the folder at which the file exists. My file exists in compressed like this here. Click on, like this. As you can see, here is our file. This file is the same as this one. Okay. Now, what are we going to do? Assembly click on it like this. You can see this is our LM t 514 W, which is a floor cent 14 W four multi blood by 14. The luminous flux which we used in the manual calculation, 1,200 lumens. As you can see this rear representing the shape of the polar curve which is this one. Now I would like to add it to the Dalexe click on add like this. You can see it is added to the daleve. Close this window. As you can see, select, you can find here this luminar history. This is luminre which is a fluorescent lamp. L five, format blight by 14, what? Now we can use this one in our project like this. In this lesson, we discussed how can we select the luminar from catalogs inside the Dex EV and how can we add it to our? 74. Adding Room Settings in Dialux Evo: Hey, everyone. In this lesson, we are going to edit or select our room settings. In the previous lesson, we learned about the Luminar or Luminar catalogs and how can we add them in dialet. The next step is that we would like to select our rooms and satisfy the locks for each room, as we did in the manual calculation. Now, as you can see in the light tab, you can go to rooms or spaces. You'll find all of the spaces which you have created inside the Dialec as we did before in the very beginning lesson. As you can see, we have entrance, office, corridor, office store, WC, kitchen, meeting room, two auxiliary transformers rooms or transformer rooms, office stairs, and so on. What are we going to do? Simply, we are going to select any room. Let's say, for example, entrance like this. If we go here to spaces, you will find here entrance. Okay, this is the name of the room itself, which is an entrance. Second thing, you will find the height of the space. What is the height of this room? We said that the height is 3 meters. Now, the next step is click on edit. Y in order to select the type of room so that the directs will give you a default value for the lax without going to the code. We click on edit you will find here the template selection. As you can see, you will find here all of the types of the room. As you can see here, general areas inside the building, rest areas, office, health care, as you can see all types of rooms, industry. If you go down here, you'll find places of public assembly and so on. So as an example, we can choose, for example, general areas, as you can see, you will find here the entrance halls, or the entrance room, and you will find here ticket office, waiting room, and so on. I'll choose the entrance like this. You'll find that when I select the entrance inside **** Ivo, if you go down here, you'll find here the visual task. This is the average value of the lax produced inside the entrance, which is depending on the code, which is 100 lax. As you remember, we discussed before also the uniformity. Uniformity here since it is not important the lighting itself inside the entrance or to see everything with its own real light or provide a good lighting to entrance. So as you can see, the default value for the uniformity is 0.4. We said before when we discuss this value should be between 0.5 and one. However, since entrance, as you can see always in entrance, you will find a very private area which is the entrance itself and very dark areas after it. So it doesn't matter you just put the default values, which is 100 lax and 0.4, depending on the program itself. Okay? Okay. You'll find also additional settings here if you would like to do it, but it is not really important. The most important thing for us as an electrical engineer is the amount of flux in the room itself or the entrance or any room and the uniformity. Okay? Okay, so as you can see, now it is a space type general areas and the application is entrance room. Now, second thing is a work blank. We plan. Do we have any work plan in this room? No, we don't have any work plan. In office, we have a work plan. However, there is no working plan. The height of the worker blan is equal to zero, right? So we will neglect create Weblan. We will remove this like this. So now we don't have a work plan inside the entrance room. Now go to the maintenance. Here you'll find the maintenance factor. You can see it is a default value of 0.8, as we said before. Inside the indoor, we select it as 0.8. Now, if you go to the detailed values, you'll find here you can add the number of years at which you would like our luminar to have and the conditions it is clear or clean or very clean or normal or dirty and so on. As you can see, very clean, normal, and dirty. According to this value, it will produce a certain maintenance factor. However, we will usually put it as a fixed value of 0.84 simplesty. This is the first room which is the entrance. Now, let's go to the office and do the same thing. Name office, the height of the space is 3 meters. Now, remember something which is important here. Here is the type of the office itself. Is it a resist or surface mounted? We are talking about type of linear. Is it a surface mounted linear or a mounted linear? Now, remember that we set inside our office building, we will assume there is a recessed mounted building or as mounted luminars used. Why? Because we said we can have an HVAC system or cables and so on cable tray, as we discussed before in the section where we talked about the different types of fluorescent lamps and so on, types of diffusers and so on. Now, anyway, we have an office. This office, we have a recessed mounted surface or accessed surface or falls ceiling. We will have for example, let's say, for example, cert sometimeter representing the recessed space. Okay? So as you can see here, as you can see, this is a three view of this room. So this is a ceiling itself, the concrete ceiling. Now, let's say we have here another ceiling in order to this ceiling because we have a recessed ceiling. Okay, like this. So we will both the height of the space. For example, we have a 30 centimeter, so we would like to install the luminar here. So we'll say 2.7. Like this. As you can see this height representing our room or the rest room. Okay? Okay. Now the next step so we have height of the room itself is 2.7 now. The luminre is mounted at 2.7 meter height because the additional 30 centimeter is used for adding cables, HVAC and so on. Now, let's click on Edit and select the template. We have here an office. As you can see, we have here offices or office. Then we can select archives or cad or cupping or reception desk, and so on, any type. Let's say usually when we are talking an office, we say writing, typewriting, reading, data processing, and so on. As you can see, we have the same value of the code, which is 500 lax. And as you can see the uniformity, which is important in an office, we select it as 0.6, okay? By default, of course. You can see other factors down below. Now, let's go here. You can find here office and application writing, typewriting, and so on. Now, let's go to walk plan. We have a worker plan inside our office. Yes. What is it site? As you can see default, 0.8. This is our work plan. Now, maintenance factor also 0.8 by default. Now we are going to do all of this for the other rooms. Let's say, for example, the WC, and the height of the since we have a recessed floor, 2.7, not for recessed ceiling, click on Edit, then select a template, and we have an office or we have a WC so as you can see here, this room which is called this type of template, which is called the rest, you'll find here inside the rest, you will find here bathrooms, bathrooms, toilets, and so on. So as you can see here, what is the type of the room, restrooms, you can see the restroom is 100 lax, which is the same value which is required. You can see also here bathrooms and rooms, you can put the default values of 200 lacks. Usually we use 100 lax. Usually we use 100 lax. For the bathroom itself. Now we will have a store, edit and go to the store. Store is defined in here, storerooms and cold stores. You can find here a store and stock rooms. As you can see, normal lux is 100 lax and uniformity is low 0.4. Okay. Well, let's see the meeting room which is also an office conference and meeting room 500 lacks, Uniformity 0.6. Okay. Stairs, for example. Of course, all of this will be 2.7, 2.7 as a height. And the Weblan we have a work plan and same maintenance fact. Here an office, also same value. Here, office and writing, typing, and so on. We have a work plan, we have the maintenance factor. We have the corridor. We didn't select it yet. We have also 2.7, and then we have here, the corridor, you can find it below inside the traffic zones inside buildings. You'll find here circulation area and corridors. You can find here left stairs, like this. We don't have a working blend since it is a corridor by default, as you can see, zero meter. It says create a working blend with zero meter, as if it does not exist. Maintenance factor 0.8, go to the stairs, for example. Here we will have also 2.73 meters. We don't have cables or anything inside stairs. Stairs, you will find it also in the traffic zones. Then you will find here stairs. Okay? We don't have a worker plan also zero and maintenance factor. This office, we say past then here. All you are going to do is just going to each room and select the settings for this room. Worker plan, 0.8, maintenance room, transformer can be also 2.7 and edit. Transformer can be found in control rooms. We can say it is a switch gear room. Since it is having a transformer with circuit breakers, fuses, and so on. It will be switch gear room. 2.7, here we have a working blend in order to eliminate our electrical component, here taste control room, switch gears, same working plan, maintenance factor. This offer 0.8 store. The store itself is also 2.72 0.7, and it has a working blend too. Stairs, we have selected the stairs. We have selected the corridor, we have selected the stairs. We almost did everything inside our plan. Now the last thing is kitchen, Kitchen, you can go to here working blend 2.72. Then you can go here to the kitchen, kitchen, kitchen. Where can we find kitchens? I think we can select it as inside restaurants and hotels. You can see here kitchens, as you can see here and their own locks. Okay? So we selected all of the values for the lax for our plan. Now the next step is adding the luminars and starting the design for these rooms. Okay? 75. Adding Luminaries to Rooms in Dialux Evo: Hey, everyone in this lesson, we are going to discuss this lesson in DalexE we are going to discuss how can we start adding linears inside our rooms in order to satisfy the required lax in each room. As you can remember, in the last lesson we had the spaces, we add all of the settings for each room, such as the lax and the work plan height and all of these settings. Then we're going to go to the Luminar step then we are going to start designing for each room. Let's start, for example, for an office, this office. Remember that we said before in the previous lesson that the office requires 500 lax. The first step is that we are going to select our luminire. In the previous lesson, we added this luminire as you remember this one TVs 165, we add it in the last lesson. Now we would like to add it into our program. Okay? So when we double clcont it is already selected. You can see active Lumire TS 165, which is the one we are using. Now, we have an office here. We would like to design it. Now, inside the luminar you will find many options here, as you can see all of these options. Okay. Now, you can see automatic arrangements for spaces. You can find rectangular, polygonal, circular line, and so on, and individual. Now, in the diet red or the red version of dialec we discussed all of these settings. We had them in the red dialec and we will just give you a small or a quick reversion on them. So when we select a rectangular arrangement like this one, I'm going to make a rectangular arrangement using this luminary to satisfy the lax required. As you can see how we can do this. Simply, you are going to draw a rectangle one click for the lens and like this and then select how we would like. Like this, for example. As you can see, we designed the lax for an office, we have 48 luminars. Okay? So as you can see, this is called manual calculation. As you can see using the rectangular, bologonal circular line, individual. All of these are manual settings. Now, usually we use the automatic. The program does the best calculation for you. Now, let's see, we have eight luminars. If you go down here, down here in arrangement, you will find you can choose different arrangement for your own luminiars and you can see here the name. We have eight multiplied by Phillips, TBS 165. This is the one which you can use inside the legend itself. We are using eight luminars one, two, three, four, eight luminiars of TBS 165, okay? As you can see, number of luminars, we have X X, which is in the X axis, we have four in the XX. You can see this is X axis and the green one is the Y axis. As you can see in this one, in the red one which is Xx, you can see one, two, three, four, four luminars in the X axis and in the Y axis, you can see one, two. You can see two luminars inside the YX. You can choose as you would like, and this will change the lax in the room. How can we see the lax, the estimate calculator? You can see here estimate calculator. This gives you the lax inside the room. As you can see, the required lax in an office is 500 lax. However, the current one produced by using this eight luminars, we have 881, which is pretty pretty large. Why? Because we chose the rectangular, we chose it manual calculation, not automatic. Now as you can see, for example, you can choose different arrangement. Let's say, for example, this one. Let's see what will happen. You can see the spaces increased between them, this one, and so on. You can choose as you would like. Now, let's say, for example, since we have large lox, let's say instead of four, four each axis, let's say for example three, like the three. You will see now the ux is 663, right close to the 500 but still pretty large. Let's say for example two. Like this, you will see 447, which is lower. Let's say, for example, against ring, you will find it again large. This is a rectangular. This is manual. Now, let's select it like this, like this. Select it like this and then click on Delete. Here and then delete. Like this. As you can see, when you click on any of them, it will select Z lunar itself. Now, as you can see, like this, delete. Now, what about the polygonal? This gives you a polygon shape like this. For example, click. I would like a shape like this. Then we CletF example, and close polygon. You'll find gives you a random shape according to the polygon you select. You can see down here, same setting 669, which is pretty large. All of this is manual. I'm just showing you what it will do. Okay? Now the circular, it will give you a circle like this. Click and for example, here like this. As you can see gives you a circle of luminars. Let's delete this one. You can find also line arrangement like this in the form of line. Click one click, then drag and form a line like this. We have a line arrangement, as you can see line arrangement, how many luminars you would like, for example, two, the number of luminar as you can see, two luminar you can choose four, for example, like this and so on. As you can see, the calculator itself is a estimated calculator gives you an estimation for the zign itself. Now, let's read this like this, then let. Now, what if I choose the automatic arrangement? Also, there is an individual. Individual makes you put individual ones like this, individual like this, select and put like this and so on. This is a manual design. You are just booting it randomly or you can boot it in a certain order as you would like. In the end, when you do the calculation, you will find if it is satisfying or not. However, this is just showing you the different options. However, the best option here is the automatic arrangement, as you will see here. Automatic arrangement, then select, you click on automatic arrangement. Then you would like to select the room you would like to sun for example of like this. As you can see, we'll find here the estimate calculator here, the estimated value. As you can see, 626. This is the closest thing it can do to the 500 lax. For example, let's choose for example three, let's see what will happen. You can see lower amount of lax. If we choose four, it will be higher, if we choose one, it will be very low. As you can see, according to the Luminar you selected, this is the best case. This is the best thing it can do. It can give you 662 or 26, which is greater than 500. This is just an estimation. No actually, it will be 600. You will have to do the calculation in the end of the program or after designing all of this. Anyway, you can see it, you can't reach close to 500. This lumnre produces a very large amount of flux. What we can do here is that we can select another one, okay? Simply we can go to Select, then go to catalogs and go to Phillips like this. Then we are going to again do the same settings when we selected the first luminar. As an example, we select the Luminar category, then go to the resist. Then you can find here the types which is available, which is an LED. There is no fluorescent lamps. The only option here inside Felipsi catalog is the LED. Now, if you are choosing another catalog depending on your own country, you can find, of course, fluorescent or LED types. It depends on the catalog you are using, depending on the options you have. Let's say, for example, I'm going this one, 2,500. Something producing 2,500 lacks. Let's see which one we have. As you can see the LED, 930, this is a color code. As you can see, this is a very large value. Remember here, this color code when we discussed it before, we said in an office, we need for about 4,000 kelvin which is 840. As you can see the 930 is very white color. Very white color, which is very large kelvin. So we need something in this range. We need something to satisfy 840 white color. Let's see the 2000 lomens. You can see also the same case. Let's choose 2,800. As you can see in 2,800, you will find here another options, 830, 800 hundred 40, 130, and so on. 840 is the one which we are looking for 840 as a color code, which was 4,000 Kelvin for the office. This is the one which we are looking for. Now, as you can see, all of these are different options. You can see this is 3,120 sect, sect. What does this mean? This means, as you can see, width and lens. As an example, if I choose sect sect it will give you sect, width sect lens. As you can see, 0.6 meter width and 0.6 meter lens. Okay? So this, for example, luminre which we just selected gives you the 60 60 shape and at the same time gives us the color required and it is a resist and it is used for indoor applications. This is the one which we can use. Click on ad here in order to edit in the program, then close. Now, as you can see, this is the active lumire If you go to select here and history, you can find here RC 400. This is the one which you are currently using. Now let's see if we design it using it inside the office. Well, we have a close value to 500 or we need another type. We select automatic arrangement which using this active Luminar, which RC 400, go to office like this. Let's see how much we will have. You can see 558, which is pretty close to the 500. Increase by 10%, which is acceptable. Remember that when we had before the previous one, which is TBS 165 or the value of the lax using the fluorescent lamp, we had a value of 626, very large lax. However, here, in this case, we have only an excess amount of 10% which is acceptable. Okay. So now let's see it in the three D view like this. Like here, you can see here in the three D view. You can go also inside the room itself. Like this. You can see it inside the room like this. Okay? Okay. Now, let's go. We have the office here. Now let's do the other rooms which have the same lux which we can use the same type of luminar. We can use this meeting room in office in a store in corridor, in entrance, stairs in transformer rooms or the control rooms or the switchgear rooms. All of this can be used by the same luminire here. Let's say, for example, automatic arrangement, select the meeting room like this. And we'll see how MetLx 528, which is close to the 500 required. Here, for example, automatic arrangement, select as a transformer room. Let's see. You can see 200 required and we have 294, pretty large almost extra 50%. For example, we can make it if we make it one, I don't think we can reach it. You can see it is lower value. So as an example, we can do something else. We can say, this one, select it and delete, leave these two transformers room for now, automatic arrangement for office, close to the required value, automatic arrangement for office. 550. This store, this is an old value, automatic arrangement for the store, 100 and 148. For the store, it is nearly 50%, so we can choose another one, Glit automatic arrangement. You can see the corridor, like this. Let's see, the ux is almost 101, okay? Another thing about the corridor before we leave it, you can divide it in two regions. You can use this region and another region here. H as you can see, delete, draw rectangular arrangement like this here like this. You can see 152 lacks draw rectangular arrangement like this. This is for the corridor. Let's see 158, which is a pretty large value. As you can see, sometimes sometimes we can have something in the middle between the corridors, such as stairs or left or elevators. In this case, we need to divide our region in our corridor into two different sections. If we have something inside the middle, in the middle of the corridor, such as a lift or stairs or elevator. Okay, if we don't have something like this, we can simply do as we just it. We can simply use automatic arrangement and click like this. Okay? So it gives us the hundred one, which is pretty pretty close to that target, okay? Another thing, let's see the trance like this. 171, this is a minimum amount since we have target 100 lax and you can see only one provides more than 100 lax. Let's leave it this for now. We may change it or delete it for now, automatic arrangement, stairs close to what is required, which is 118, for the store. Store 148, large value. Let's delete this. Now, let's choose the other one. For example, this floor and am and automatic arrangement in store. Let's see 148 also. Same as here, I think it will be the same 171. The same liner, it doesn't matter. We need another luminar if you would like to produce a value close to 100, not very excess amount of lax. You can use another type of luminar. You can start going to the catalog and choose something with lower amount of lumens. For now, we can just say or accept this value of the fluorescent or the lead type. Okay. So we can do this. And here. Here, we can delete this, then delete this one. You can see it is really, really easy to use the automatic arrangement. Automatic arrangement makes it really easy for you. You can just click on any weare. You can just design it really, really fast. Just by selecting the luminre, it will provide you with the best configuration for the luminars. Now, let's see, we have now the kitchen N WC. This two needs a weatherproof or waterproof type. Okay, you can choose this Luminar, have a low IP, not the high IP required in the kitchen and WC. What we are going to do are going to go to select, then go to catalogs, then go to Phelips again. Okay. Now, we would like to select here in this application, we need waterproof. Then you can select any one you would like. Let's say, for example, the 1,800 oms this low value. Then you can see here the 840, it doesn't matter the color code. As you can see, this type is a floor LED type can be used in the kitchen and everywhere. Why? Because it is a waterproof. It can be used in kitchens, bathrooms, and so on. Now, let's click on add like this. And close. Let's design this inside the kitchen automatic arrangement for kitchen. As you can see here, the ax is 500 and it gives us 549, which is acceptable. Also, you can choose this one for the bathroom like this. Okay. As you can see, gives us 188, which is a pretty large. Now, as you can see, the kitchen itself one, two, three, four, eight luminars the WC two luminars. We can do something else. You can see we selected this one in order to reduce the number of luminars required, we can choose a higher lomen type. As you can see, this type which we selected is 1,200 lumens, as I remember, okay? As you can see, we selected the 1,800 lumens. We can choose, for example, 2,300 like this. You'll find that when we choose higher lomins it will lead to lower amount of luminars required. As you can see, for example, any one of these like this one. Let's choose another shape. This one, this one may be acceptable. You can see 2,250 omens, some losses inside it. This one, let's choose this one, for example, and see what will happen. This is also weather proof which can be used in application like this one. This one provides us eight luminars eight luminars gives us 550. Two luminars gives us 180. Let's delete this one and delete this one. Let's see what will happen we selected this other luminar. This one having higher lax, I expect higher lumens, I expect we have lower value. Instead of six luminars we will have lower amount of luminars required. Let's see. You can see eight luminars. This one, not we didn't change it. Well, let's see, this one, this one. This one is 141,800 lumens. This one, we didn't change the luminar itself. Let's delete this. Automatic arrangement like this. You can see we have now six luminars Not eight luminars, not as previously, we have now six luminars. This provides us with a value close to 500. Let's see if we use in WC, we need only one. One gives us a value close to 200. As you can see, this is more accurate design. You are reaching close to the target, which is 100. Remember in the luminar we need two luminars Two luminars gives us 180. However, only one luminar gives us close to 127. This type is different from the other one, as you can see, according to the design, you can become close to this target, depending on the luminre which you are using, as you can see, this is in the three D view, as you can see, all of the luminars inside our plan. This is, for example, in the kitchen, like this. Okay. As you can see here. Like this. You can also choose by room, for example, like this office. However, it doesn't show the luminars here. Anyway, as you can see, this is how does the plan looks like when we add all of our luminars. As you can see, when you start selecting alumina you try to become close to the target as you can see, and we usually use the automatic arrangement as you have seen also. Okay? So in WC and kitchen, we use a weaarpof type and office entrance, all of this we can use a fluorescent type, LED type, which have a low IP. I hope this lesson was helpful for. 76. Lighting Calculations in Dialux Evo: Hey, everyone in this lesson, we are going to go to the next slab, which is calculation objects. In the last lesson, we add the luminars to all of our areas to satisfy the lack required. Now, as you know, when we select any of these rooms, when we did the lighting design itself, such as in an office, for example, you can see here in the estimate calculator gives us 550 locks, which is close to what is required. Remember that this one, this is just an estimation, not the actual calculation, just an estimation. Now, what should I do now? Now we are going to do the next step which is calculation in order to make sure that our luminar satisfy the conditions required. How can we do this? Simply, we can go to the calculation objects like this. Then if you would like to do the entire project, simply click on entire project to start calculation like this, click here and you'll see here starting the calculation for all of our areas. When this finishes, we will see the values of lax and the uniformity in each room and we have to make sure that all of the Rooms satisfy the lock required and the uniformity required. Let's see here. Now, as you can see this is the results over view when you click on it like this, you can see the results produced. As you can see here, the green one means that everything is good. Everything is good in this location. Okay. As you can see here, for example, the transformer rooms, as you can see, 290 lacks, which is close to what is required, and as you can see the uniformity is at least 0.5, greater than 0.5. The transformer rooms here are correct design. Okay. The corridor as you can see, of course, satisfy the same lax, 126 lax. However, as you can see the uniformity is less than 0.5. There are some reasons which are dark and other reasons which are bright. We need to start designing the corridor again. Remember, why do we need to design it because of the uniformity? As you can see this area, this area is darker than here. Okay, this is really, really far. As you can see if we come close here, you can see the lax 50, 50 lox here and here, as you can see, 125, 150, here, 200. As you can see the difference between minimum and the maximum is very large. That's why the uniformity is pretty low. We need to design the corridor once more. Okay. The kitchen, the problem with the kitchen, of course, 0.5 larger than the required uniformity. However, the kitchen lax is less than 500, we need to add more luminars. For the meeting room, this meeting room, 5,000.5. Good. All of this uniformity are good. This is the lax required. Stairs work plan of the store, you can see the uniformity is low, so we need more luminars. Here the WC is close to 0.5, it does not really matter as you a WC not important to see every object. It's pretty close to 0.5, so we can accept this one, okay? So as you can see the problem or ke blind in the store. Here, we need to increase the uniformity. Here the kitchen, we need to increase the locks and corridor. Let's start solving this problem. The first one is the store. Let's go here to this store in the light tab, select this one. Then increase the quantity instead of two luminars we will have three in the XX, like this. Okay, the results will become invalid. The result which is produced, then click yes because you are going to change it. As you can see, the ax is higher, but don't worry, are going to do this calculation again. Now for the kitchen, for the kitchen, we can make it if we make it three, for example, like this, we will have very large locks. What can we do here for this kitchen? What we can do is that we can choose the previous one if you remember it. Here we can select it and click on like this, click on Delete. Uh huh. Like this, click on delete. Then this is the active luminar, select another one. These two are waterproof. This one, as you can see, 23, this one is eighteens. Let's choose eighteens like this. Then automatic arrangement, choose kitchen. Same as what we did in the previous lesson. As you can see the aux 550, we will see the uniformity first and the lax, okay? Now let's see the corridor. Here, the uniformity is low. Why? Because there is a here, very dark region, very dark region and very bright region here. What we can do simply we can delete all of this. Then choose a rectangular arrangement for this area like this. Okay. Using the TBS, here we will have a 654 very large lacks we can make for example, one like this, no, three, and this one is one like this. You can see 200. We will see it now after we do the calculation. Rectangular arrangement here like this in this region, choose here one, for example, let's say two, like this. Here x 180. Let's make this one, the same point. Here, make it two instead of one, like this, 150 lax. Now, we divided the corridor into this region and this region this region does not become a dark and this region does not become dark. We will see if this will satisfy the uniformity or not. For the kitchen, we increase the number of luminars using a lower lax and here we increase using lower lomins and here we increase number of luminars. Let's do the calculation again like this entire project. And see what will happen. Now, let's see the results. As you can see here for the transformer, the same corridor, you can see the corridor having 150 locks. It doesn't matter. The most important is uniformity. As you can see, it increases before. It was before 0.2. Now we have it as 0.6, which is acceptable. Of course, the excess amount of lax not really important in the corridor. The most important is uniformity. The meeting room, how about the store? The store this one store 193 lax. However, the uniformity is still pretty lower. We need it close 2.5. We need to solve this one, the store again, and the kitchen. Kitchen still need more lax. Okay. Let's close this one, get back here. As you can see, start designing like this. Four multiplate by two, let's make it multiblod by three to increase it by just one luminar Like three multipla by three. I increased 611. Here for the store. The problem is uniformity, hundred lacks 1093, here this one, what can we do? In this one, can choose another one or another type. Why? Because as you can see one, two, three, three luminars they produce nearly double Zalax number Zalax and does not satisfy the uniformity. We can use more number of luminars with lower lumines. As you can see, this is 28. How about this one? This one is as I remember 1,200. Let's first take this one and let like this and then select this other one The n automatic arrangement like this, only 250 locks using TBS. Let's make it three, for example, three gives us 217. Let's see this first. Then we will see if this is correct or not. Now let's see here. Let's see first. You can see all of them are green because the lax is satisfied in all of the region. However, you can see also in the store still 214 lax and very large lax and at the same time low uniform. Okay. So we need another one. Another type. You can leave it as it is. You can say it's close to 0.5, but we would like to make it more accurate. So how can we do this? Let's choose another one. Let's take this one and delete. Now let's go and select catalogs Phillips. We try to satisfy the requirement as we can. Here resist, then we are going to choose an LED with lowest amount of flux like this. For example, choose this one like this. This one having 1,500 iomans Let's see this one. Let's see this one. We click on Ed, then we start design using it. We'll see automatic arrangement here in the store. We have only three. This three gives us 124. Let's make it four, for example, like this. Okay. As you can see here in the X axis, Y axis, 163. Let's see this. Let's see this first. Then we will see the uniformity. Let's see now here we are looking for the store. You can see also the store still point to the uniformity, y? Because as you can see, we need to make it in the X axis. We need to make it in the X axis. That's what we have to remember. We select this again and make it two Y and make it another here too. In this case, we will choose, for example, three multi blade three. Let's see what will happen. Very large lax. Let's make it three multi blood by two. Like this and see what will happen. Now, let's see. You can see here that the store became 0.5 and at the same time 218 lock which is pretty close to what we need. 0.5 is acceptable and 218 is also acceptable. This is the only solution which I have using this I luminars. Okay. You can also use a higher amount of lax or higher amount of lumens, lower amount of luminars in order to satisfy this requirement of 150 lax or 200 lax. You have to do this or do the trial and there. The most important thing you should not be less than the required lax. As you can see, all of them are green, it means we are satisfying all of the requirement. Okay. In this lesson, we learned how to do the calculation inside Daleks. You want to make sure that everything is correct, okay? 77. Exporting Results to an Autocad File in Dialux Evo Part 1: Hey, everyone. In the last lesson, we have done the lighting calculation and we have done everything we need inside DalexEv. Now the next step is that, you would like to save, save now. I just remember something when it wanted to save. You can see after we added all of these umnirs you can see in the three D view, you can see all of the rooms now. With the light, turn it on. After you add everything. As you can see, this is the meeting room which we have added. You can see all of the colors, almost white in every single room. Okay. So this is how your own room will look like after you add all of the loners. Okay? So this is just for illustration. Okay. Really nice. Okay, what is the next step? Next step is that we would like to export this one into an autocat file. Okay? So we start doing the connections at everything we need, and so on. So click on Export. Okay. Now we will find here in export three options. We need this third one, which is the plans in order to export it into an autocad file. Now, this is the layers which you can add into the Daleks into the autocad file. What is important for me is that first is the lumina list, the list of luminars which I have used and their quantity. Also, you will find here these two first options such as room inations here window on doors not important, objects are not important, calculations are not important. This is just the three options which is important for me. Now, also you can find here what you would like to do. What version of autocad you would like. Usually, I use 213 because I have 2013 and 2018. Also most of my own students have 2013. This is the unit of measurement which is meters. Now let's export it. We will export it to an existing file, which is the plan, export to existing file. You can see this is the plan which are using floor one lighting. This is the one which I'm using. This is a pure autocad plan for this room, which I give you the link to it of this building or the floor of this building. The first floor of this building. I would like to add the luminar and this plan to this autocad file. I'll double click on this one. And you can see it exported and ended supporting. Now, what are we going to do? You can see this file here where it is, where this file, where where where This is the autocat file, floor one, lighting DWG. This is the one which I've just added to it this plan. Now we can simply double click on it like this, double click on this one, and we can open it inside autocat. But I'm going to show you another thing. You already know how to open autocat from the course but I would like to show you how can use Autocad for free because many of my students are looking for free version of AutoCad or would like to use AutoCad without any license. There is a method here. This website, web dot AutoCAD. This is related to the AutoCad website. This gives you an access web.autocad.com. This gives you an access by just creating an account. You will have an access to use the AutoCad program for free. Okay, you don't need to download the AutoCAD program, you can use it for using this website. This is just an extension of Autocad web dot AutoCAD. Now, simply will cltonUload to upload our file. Okay, autocatF floor, lighting, where is it? This one. We will first upload it and start opening it inside this web autocat. Remember that you learn it in the course. How can you use the downloaded version of Autocad this we are going to learn quickly how can I use the online version? Just we are waiting for the uploading of the file. Now the file is uploaded. Simply we'll go to floor one, click on it like this. You can see initializing autocat as you can see, we have opened our Autocad file, as you can see here. This our file. It is pretty close to the autocad which you are using in the desktop. Now, this is a plan which I have used in the design, right? Now what is the problem? Problem is that as you can see here, where is the Dialex file? Where is the luminar we have these luminars Where are these luminars? Where we have only the plan. Now, if you look carefully, you will find here a small yellow part here. This yellow part is the file added by Daleks. If you zoom in like this, you will see this poor guy. You can see here the luminiar list Okay, building one floor one. Here is the index one, two, three, four. This is the index for the lumini used. We used five types of Philips. The first one is DBS 165, second one is RC and so on. The last two is wear proof. You can see here there how many lamps used inside this luminar luminous flux, the maintenance factor, the loud, this lute, how much power it is using, and the quantity we used from this type, nine, used from this one, 35, we use from this one, one, use from this 19, and so on. Okay. So as you can see here, the lumina have index two, what does to mean? Besides the lumina itself, two means this type or C 400 B, and one means this type, which is TBS 165. This is the lumina list which you can use in the lighting legend and the Pell quantity. Now, what are we going to do? We would like to resize this one. We would like to make this one a little bit bigger. We can use it in the other room. We can say scale. Like this. As you can see, scale, don't worry. The program itself is slow, not my own computers website itself is slow. Here what you would like to scale. For example, I would like to scale this one. All of this like this and all of this and how we would like to scale. Let's say, for example, Let's say pays point like this one, and how much you would like to scale. Let's zoom out. So as you can see, you can see the program, my own computer is really fast. However, the website itself is really, really slow. So anyway, we are not going to use this because the video will be very, very long. I'm going to use my own autocat program in order to do this. The website is a good alternative to all of this. However, it is really, really slow. I'm going to open my own AutoCAD program and start doing the rest of what we are going 78. Exporting Results to an Autocad File in Dialux Evo Part 2: Hey, everyone, and welcome back to our course for electrical design. And this lesson, I'm going to show you how you can export the project in DWG format and show you the format in Autocad program. Now, I'm going to show you first, we are going to do similar as we did in the previous lesson, but I would like to show you an extra part. So step one, we would go to Export like this, and then we are going to see all of these options. Some of these options will be helpful for you if you would like to show it in Autocad program. So for example, I would like to keep this furniture, for example, and the windows. So if you would like to do this, all you have to do is that you can simply click on Object and you can see the color will be in the format of blue as you can see here. So the objects like this furniture here, this one, and this one, and these chairs will be having a color of blue. Then we can see that the windows and doors here in this autocad will have the color of gray if you would like to change it. Let's make it, for example, like, this color here. That's the first thing, number two, and it's very important. This part is pretty important that when you are looking at luminars like this, we have different types of luminars that we have used. Now, actually, you can make for each one a separate layer inside autocat when we discuss autocat, settings, you will understand how it is very important to have a separate layer for luminar. So Luminars here are all of these lighting components, and we can make one layer for all luminars. All of these will have all of these will have one layer in autocat or we can select one layer for product type. For example, this one will have a layer of its own and this one will have another layer, et cetera. This will be helpful when we try to change the object. Now, you can say, for example, one layer for product type, and we will see how can we use this later inside the course? Number two, you can say, Hey, what kind of version you would like to export this autocat? I'm using in this video, I'm using 2021. So I'm going to use autocat Version 2018 as an export. Then we have the scale, and this is pretty important. What kind of scale does your drawing have? So if I get back to Autocad here, this is the original drawing for our system or our floor number one, you will see that this one, according to the architect, this drawing here is in the millimeters scale, millimeters scale. So when I export, I should select millimeters, so it will be very helpful to me when I copy this into this one as you will see right now. So for example, I would like to millimeters, okay, and then export to a new file like this. And desktop, I will call it, let's say, project, let's call it for floor one DalexE so that I can know this is the pure file of Dalexy. So if I open this file here, let's delete this one. If you open it like this and click here, you'll find that this is let's remove this one. This one, as you can see, we can see we have luminal list, all of the luminars that we already used in our drawing. That is the first thing. Number two, you'll find that here. You'll find all of the information about different rooms. You can see stairs, corridor, office. Each one has its own minimum locks and maximum locks, and the average locks in the room. And all of this information can be helpful at the report for the lighting system design. So let's give it like this and extend it like this. And let's take this one, too. Okay, both of them are the same. So let's delete this. Let's take it like this and put it like here. Take this two and move it like this. Take this one, too, and put it here. Okay, so you can see that here, we have you can see the furniture in Blue. You can see the windows having the color that we selected in autocat and the doors the same color. And you can see all of our luminars having this yellow color. And you can see each room with its own name and everything that we need. Okay, so step number two, we have this original drawing. Now I'm going to show you how this is pretty helpful. So I'm going to select all of this. Then I'm going to zoom in here. And for example, I will select this specific point here, this one here, this corner point of this office room, which is exactly similar to this corner point. Now, you'll understand what I mean by corner point here. So when I copy this, and we will learn everything about autocat in the autocat section. So when I copy this to this drawing, all I have to do is that I will say C O, which is copy, but I will choose copy pase. So it means that I'm going to copy all of this shape from a certain specific point. So I'm going to say, Hey, I would like it to be here. Like this. Now, you may ask me how this even held buffal you will see right now. When I say Control V, like this, you'll see this is our drawing. You can see I am moving like this, moving with me everywhere. Now, you can see if you look carefully, I am moving using this specific point that I selected. Now, if I would like to put this on this drawing, all I have to do is that I will go here like this and go to the same exact point like this. You can see we are above the same point in the same original or in the Daleks Evil fine. If I click like this, you will see both of them are now above each other. Now, there's one thing that we have to correct that this one here, like this. Let's first remove this. If I click on it, you will find that it is inside a layer, this one, so I'm going to click on this button to turn it off and remove it. And we have this number two, three, four and five. You can see different types of luminous, Luminu number four, luminu number five, lumium number three, and two, and one. Now I will keep this for now because each of these is corresponding to these parameters. You can see one, this one, two, this one, and I'm going to use this in the legend of our drawing. Now and you can see here, we have our furniture. I keep the furniture as you can see here, and we can do another thing actually. We can click like this, select this furniture. And it like this. Okay? So it doesn't move with me. Whenever I do if I click here, I do I can't move it, because I logged this layer, which contains all of these objects so that I can concentrate on our original drawing. And if I would like to hide it, is pretty simple. All you have to do is that you can simply click Turn layer off so that you cannot see it when you are drawing your own light if it is confusing for you. Now for this specific one, and I'm going to select it like this on the other side so that we can let's see. Like this. So you put this one, put it here like this. So we put it here because it is a very convenient place. Here, it can't be placed actually in the real drawing of this system, we can't add it here because we have stairs going up and then here, and then we have a continuous stairs. And this continuous form, we can't add it here. So I'm going to put it here on this horizontal area. Here, we can place it actually in reality here. So you can see we have now our drawing. Now the next step that we will see how can I? So this is saved in autocatF floor lighting. Okay? So when you start working on it, you will find now autocatFlo lighting and let's save it like this. This one is floor one for Dalekv I don't need it anymore. So you'll find here two files in the course. Let's, um Okay, so we have one, which is auto cat first floor. This one without any kind of drawings. Any kind of luminars or anything the pure one. If you double click on it, you can see the pure drawing. Then we have one from Dex Evo. This one came out from Dalek Evo, which is let's click here. As you can see here, this is from Dalek Evo. And this one here is the one which we add after we added the Luminar to the original plane. Now, we will start working on this on the wiring of luminars in the section after learning about the basics of autocat. 79. Replacing Luminaries Blocks and Preparing Lighting Legend: Hi, and welcome, everyone. Based on the last lessons, we have learned about panel schedule or not panel schedules, panel ports, and we have also learned about UBS, and we have seen how to size them. Now the real question here is that how can I define these loads? So for example, for the UBS, we need to know how much loads of lighting or how many power sockets that are being supplied by this type of panel ports, which is the UBS. So in order to do this, actually, when we design our electrical system in Autocad, including the luminars, the sockets or the power circuits, we will eventually learn how much loads do we have? So let's continue from the last section of the Dalek Evo. So on the DalexEvo we obtained this drawing, this design from DalexEv and we added it to our program, and this were the specs of our system. Great till now. Now, what I need to do right now is that I'm going to I'm going to use a lighting legend. This lighting legend is the simples that you will find in the distribution office that you are working with. So in any office, they will have their own samples. They will have a legend lighting legend in which we are going to use as simples. You can see this simple and so off using the simple, we will use another one from our office which I'm working with. So in this sample or in this legend, we will have different points or different lighting components that we are going to use. So for example, we will find here this is a normal distribution panel. The simple for a distribution panel at which we are going to supply our normal loads this simple representing an emergency distribution panel, this one representing a UBS distribution panel supplied from a UPS, et cetera. So these are the three main panels that we talked about in the panel ports section. Ubnrmal ads from the utility, emergency, which is supplied from a generator, and UBS, which is supplied from the UBS all the time for critical lots. Now, if you go down here, you'll find here this is the type or a simple or a notation for our different components. So for example, this one used in this office lead lighting luminar. So for lead lighting luminars and say mounted 60 centimeter, modulated by six centimeter, 60 for the width and length. 220 volt, 50 rts, the wattage or the power consumption of this LED, 3,800 omens. And the IB, which is 20 IB usually 24 offices or inside the buildings, and IB 44 usually four outside the buildings. And this is from Phillips company. And this here, which you can see in this part is the code and if you are, if someone is getting the components for our system or the luminars for our system, he can get this one from Phillips from this code or find an equivalent one from another company. Now, you will find that this is denoted by L one. Similarly, for this one, if you look here, we have this friendly one. This one is similar to this one. What the difference can see is same as L one, but it means from emergency source. So when I look at the drawing which I will have, I will see this simple. It means that this simple meaning it is sublit from the normal distribution port. And if I see this simple for the luminar, I will understand that this is exactly similar to this, nothing difference between them, except that this one is sublit from the emergency distribution panel. Now, another one here this one here, the third one here, which is same as L one, but with a pack a battery for 2 hours. There are some panels or not some panels, some luminars which have batteries inside them, which can give you power keeps working for 2 hours or dependent on the type of the battery. But it is much more expensive than the normal lighting luminars. Similarly for other types of samples, the same idea. You can see also these are different types of luminars and there are some switches here, lighting switches, which we are going to talk about in another lesson. So step number one, when I have this design here, I will just take this legend here. You will find it in the course lighting legend course. This is a file name inside the course files. So I'm going to copy all of this Control Shift and C, Control Shift and C, and then I'm going to take this is a pick a point like this and then get here and control V like this. So you'll see that this is our legend for our system. Great. Now, number three, that I should have done one thing here that I'm going to select this one like this. Let's look at these layers. This is a door. So I'm gonna lock it like this. And hmm. Let's look at these different types of layers. From here, L this one. Let's get back here. Columns, walls, go down here like this. So we will we will just look these ones, which I'm not going to use. Texts we don't need, stairs like this. So I should have done this at the very beginning, but no problem at all. We are just gonna look everything, as you can see here. There are some related to this one. I will see right now. So you'll see this or the legend, okay? So let's look at here the layers here. Takest detailed titles, okay? So test detailed titles, this one, which is related to this. I have this one text, okay, text. And this one is lighting, and this one is fire. Okay. Lighting and fire like this. This one is exotin if I remember correctly, this one. Yep, exactly. Let's look at this one, maybe this one, too. Okay, let's see. If you go down here, this one is sad. This one is lighting. Okay? This one is dash. Okay, so let's look at dash. And set like this. Okay. Okay, this one unlocked, okay? Okay, great. So we unlocked all of this, and we logged. This one is related to Daleks. Okay? We don't actually need all of this. We can look it for now. Okay. These are the windows from DialexEvT one. Yep, exactly. Okay, so now I can work. This one is text. Look like this. These two are on the same layer. So I'm going to do this, and I'm just going to take this and make it on the zero layer like this and then put this text here, unlocked here, so now we unlock it, and we can now control our lighting normally. This one, let's put it on text, which is the logged layer like this. Okay. Now, what I'm going to do is that I'm going to start. But before doing this, we have to add a new layer. So I'm going to click LA layer, and then I'm going to create a new one, new layer, lighting lighting fixtures. So this one contains all of our liners like this. So now we are working on this one. Let's make this layer has a color of maybe let's make it green, for example. Okay, great. Now, what I'm going to do is that we will start replacing each of these plugs with this one which we have here. But just one important part here. So we have one for emergency and one for the normal distribution port. So let's look at here. So any corridors any corridors, like you can see here and entrance, we will have emergency lighting. So any corridors, any entrance in addition to 25 to 30% of any room will have emergency lighting. So for example, all of the sensitis in the corridor and distance entrance and stairs, all of this will have emergency lighting. For any kind of rooms, we will have 25% of it will be 25 to 30% will be made of our friend emergency lighting. So let's start using the samples. Okay. So we will have LED lighting. Let's look at the first type, type number one. So type number one here is a TPS 165 like this. So we will just modify it like this. This one is a fluorescent. So I'm going to say fluorescent sent florescent, miner Fluorescent mers. Okay. Miners. This one type is recess mounted Yep. Is dimensions. This one is 60 centimeters 60. This can be obtained from the catalog itself. But this type here, this one, which is in the square form is usually 60 multiplied by 60 centimeters. 20 volt supply and frequency, how many Watt? You can see that the wattage here is 63 watt. 63 what? So I'm going to go here at the spot here and make it 63 what? And we can how many lumens. Okay, let's look at the lumens. The first one here has 4,800 eons, 4,800. So I'm gonna double collck here, make it 4,800. It's IB is 20. It's good Phillips PBS. Mmm. So I'm going to take this one here. Take this one here and go all the way here. So this one here, we can simply, let's lead this, add it here, paste like this. And we can take just this part here and put it here in this empty space like this. Skip, take this one, and delete the space here. So what I did is that I had fluorescent luminars it's mounting type. The dimensions 220 volt, 50 Ortiz, it's how much power does it consume? And it's good in addition to lumens and the company Phillips or equivalent. Now, for the second one, this is for emergency, same as one pot fed from emergency source. Okay, so if we double click on this one here, you'll find that this one is a block, okay? Now, what I'm going to do that I'm going to replace number one, this one, and I'm going to replace each one here from this one. This one here, one, one, one, one in the rooms. Great. Okay, however, you'll find that we have some rooms like here, the electrical rooms, we will keep the lighting on in the electrical rooms. And here we have in offices. All of these types is two. So what I'm going to do is that I will actually use only only. Emergency for L one. Why emergency for L one? Because you can see we have two electrical rooms, which I'm going to put it on the emergency lighting. In addition to all of this will be emergency lighting since it's the corridor and stairs in addition to entrance entrance is number two. So what I'm going to do is that I'm going to just take this one here. I'm going to copy it and start transferring it, and you will see right now what I'm going to do. Now, as you can see blazed it and you can see that we don't have actually any lighting from normal distribution poured for the first one. So what I'm going to do is that I'm going to take this one here. And this is number two. Okay, so number two, we can make this one actually number two. So let's put it here. Take this one up here like this. And let's take this one. And let's put it here at the end. From emergency source. Okay, let's just make it smaller. Okay, so I just extended this one, make it a little bit bigger so that I can add it here emergency source. So that's the first one. Second one will be L two. So I'm going to take this one here like this. And make it L two. So I'm going to delete this. Read this one alone. And L two is having the specifications. Okay, so we can take this one is an LED, so I can use this one down here like this, Control C and control V, and we can put it right here. M move and then it like this and put it here. Now, we can just take this one and this one and extend it like this a little bit more. Take this one up here. Take this one. And these two M like this. Take this legend, get it back here, extend. You want to like this. And we can just push all of this. Like this. And take all of this too. Like this. Just leave the rest of the table since we are just going to modify it a lot of times. So L two, L two will have this one copy it and go here, paste. And then we can take this part and control V like this. Like this. LD, I also resist mounted, 222 what? How many wattage? 25. Okay, so you go here. Make this one, 25. How many lumens, 2,800 Double click, 2,800 IP and the same Phillips Cod, take this one and move it a little bit like this. Okay, so this is the second one. Now, for the second one, let's see. We have an emergency and we have some from normal distribution port. So I'm going to say this one like this. Take this one up like this and just skip and control C, control V, so that they can make another one. Put it like this. Control C and control V, like this. Take this one up here, number three, and you can make this one, this one here as our emergency. So same as take this one here, same as L one. Same as L two. Skip double click. Same as L two, but But feeds from emergency source. Emergency source, like this. Sk. So I'm going to use this one as an emergency. Okay, so let's just copy it like this, Control C, and then Control V, go all the way here. Like this and then Control V. We will make this emergency. For this room, we will have 25%, will be 25 to 30% will be emergency. So I'm going to get it like this. I will make one here as an emergency, one right here like this. We can actually activate the OSNap once more and Control V and also make this one, for example, like this. So that one will be close to the door and one here so that we can give some lighting to the room. Another one here. We have how many one, two, three, four, we have four. We have eight luminars. 25% of them means by four means two luminars two. So we will just take the door, the door is here. I'm going to take one here like this. One like this and control V like this. So that we can light this door. Another one for the meeting room, one, two, we have three, six, nine, and 12. Quarter of it will be three. So where I can put these three, I can put them here. For example, I'm going to control Vin like this. Control V and like this and control V again, like this. We added this here, we have here two. Here for this one, we have eight, quarter, means two. I can put this two like this close to the door like this. Can make one here and one here so that we can have some lighting for the room. Two, two. So the one we have three, we have four, and we have five. So we have to do the same for these luminars, but first we have L two, the normal lighting, control C, LAD and Control V for the normal lighting. Just one thing that we have to actually modify like this. All of this is number two. The normal line. In the end, we will remove this original Delk EVO blocks like this, Control V, you can actually use the same block, the same block here, and for emergency, you can add beside it just a simple of E, which means emergency. That is another way all depends on the office that you are working in. Control V like this. Control V Control V. Control V here, too. So for number three, number three, number three is this one here. We can use this simple here and this one. Okay. So we don't have this type of lighting, so I can all I have to do is that I can actually take this like this and say goodbye to them like this. We can just disable this snap and then take this one and move. Take it from here. Just 1 second. We need this one, too. We need this this and this and this and this and this and this one. And say move, select the same base point as here, and then drag it all the way up at the same exact point like this. It's much easier, right. So LAD, this one is surface mounted. Yep, this one is a surface mounted. Turn 20 volts, 30 what? How much attage on number three? Number three is 11.4. Number three, right? Number three, 11.4. So I'm going to go like this and say, 11.4 what? Then how many Leomens number three, 1,500? So I'm gonna go like and say 1,500. Now, the code of the Phillips, number three, this one, let's start with this one here, copy it like this and go here, change this part. And then we will go for the rest. Copy like this, and then go here, double click. Control V like this. To add this Luminar, which is this one we need also an emergency. This one is L, L four. Remember, in this project here, I'm not going to use any UPS. So we don't need any UPS. So this one, which is uninterruptb distribution port, we are not going to use it. And the lighting control panel, we can just keep it for now. Skip Okay. And then select all of this and select all of this. This one, too. And then we can say move, select this point, and then go all the way up exactly here. So we just move it up a little bit. Now we need the same pot from emergence source, this one. So I'm going to select it like this, M, move, and this time, I'm going to take this point here, go all the way up like this. Make this one L five, five, same as L five, same as L four, which is the previous one but feeds from the emergency source. So we bid number three, which is this one, we add the code wattage, everything that we need. Okay, great. Now, what I'm going to do that I'm going to replace three. Let's start with the main one, this one, normal. So I'm going to say copy. Go like this CO and then enter. Okay, this one doesn't have the same dimensions. So what I'm going to do is that I'm kind of make it much smaller if I would like. So I can go like this. And we can actually scale like this, and we can do another thing, which is much easier, move it from here, and at the same exact point here. And then I'm going to scale subcfy this point, I'm gonna scale it from here. And then I'm going to do like this. Okay. Then I need to stretch it, so I'm going to double click on it like this. Okay? I'm gonna stretch it like this. We need to activate or th, F eight, these two or one layer, which is locked. This 1c77. Let's unlock it like this. And we can now move it here. Move this one here, and we can move this one here. Take this so let's just move this one like this, like approximately like this. Take this one, too. Move. Like this. And then we can extend like this. Nice. Laws. Okay, let's see now. Okay. Pretty close to the same size. Okay, so let's move it more. Okay. Now it is very convenient to use it. So what I'm going to do first, that I'm going to take this one here, copy first, take this one and disable this orthogonal like this. Okay? Forget about this one. We need to for emergency emergency, we can put in them at the door or one at the door and one maybe here. So here we don't have emergency like this. Okay, let's just do another thing which is much easier, copy pase and select this one, for example, at the pase point. Then Control V. Go like this. Control V here. Like this. We can make one emergency here and one emergency here. For example, and like this. So this to our emergency. This one here, say goodbye. Skill. Just like this. Okay, this one, these two are emergency, do we have any three? In the drawing? We don't have any three anymore. We have only this one, which is number three. So we need this one, too, so we control coping. In best point, you can see it's much larger. So what I'm going to do, double click, okay? For example, have its value. You can see that the one who made this legend put so many layers above each other. So F eight, meaning here. Um, so let's move this one here, too. So many lines. I don't know why it didn't increase its own sickness instead of doing this all the time. Okay. Now we can start hatching it. So hatch like this and let's select any pattern we would like. Let's say an eight, for example, like this like this, but let's make it 70. Let's see what will happen, like this. Close hatch creen, close block editor like this. So this is a block here. You can see that the other one must have changed. Let's look at it. Yeah, it has changed. Okay, we have two other points here. Let's get them Yep, another one here. Crazy points. Okay. So this is a one but from emergency source. So now let's replace the one what we have here like this, Control C, our CO for copy, and make this one to emergency. Okay, so what we did is just for this room. That's why when you are designing a system, it's better to use the lowest number of luminars. You can see we use the five types for this small plane. However, much better to use just one or two luminars which makes it easier for you when you are designing the system. So number four is an LED, number five, LED two, okay? Their samples are similar to this one. Here, this one will not be an emergency. There is only one. Here in the kitchen, we can, let's say, three of them. Okay? We can select one, two, three, like this or one, two, three, maybe like this, maybe much better. Okay, so let's just take it like this one. So we can say So what I'm going to do is that I'm gonna copy it two times, 14, three times, two times or three times three times, one for this one, and two for this one. Emergency and normal panel. Let's see this. Then I'm going to change these samples to another simple. Okay? So we have 45, 45, this one, four. These two are the first one for number four, and the second one will have these two. So I can just read this because I don't need it actually. Copy all of this or move it to be more specific M and move it from this specific point up here like this. So we have L four, L five. Now, this one will be L six, six, and this one will be seven, the normal one, and L eight for emergency. Okay, great. Now, I don't need any of this. We'll see this simple. Okay, we can use this one actually. We can move it like this and use it, for example, for this one. Read this. Take this one here. We can move it from this point like this. So now we need two samples, one for this one, and one for this one. These two are one which is L four, one which is seven, for this one, and finally for emergency. Now, what I can do that I can actually use a sample similar to this one. So let's see what I'm going to do. So now, as you can see, I have finished adding all of these luminars inside our system. This one should have an emergency. We have four. We have four, Matuas 12. We need three, so we can say, Okay, it is exactly this is the door. This is a normal one, so we can control C O, copy it like this. And we can actually past it like this. Okay, so we added all of the luminaries inside our system. What is the next step? Okay, next step that you are going now to remove everything related to dex. So you have finished your own work and we have done what what we need. Now we can say goodbye to this. So these two will not be helpful at all. Okay, 1 minute. Did we change the modifications? Six is number four, this one. So weight, 113. This is a one here. This one we didn't change it yet. So let's change it. This one is six, okay? L six, paste. And let's take the rest of the coot. L6w8 like this Control V. Okay, how many lumens, 2000 252,250 lumens for L six, L six is this one here. And its power is 16.4 W. 1,616.4 W. Surface mounted. Okay? The other one is also surface mounted. Last one here. Take the scoot and it is seven paste. Then we are gonna copy this one copy and then go all the way down here. For this one, too, like this. We need wattage, 15 what? 1,800 Leomins. Okay, 1,815 W. Okay. Great. So now we did what we need. Now we can delete all of this as we don't need it. We now add the description. We have our samples here. We can scale it a little bit more. Like this a little bit like this. Okay, same as seven. Okay, same as L four, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight. We have normal distribution emergency, fluorescent, LED, same as L two, same as L four, L six, seven, same as L seven, but fit from emergency. So now we added all the description that we need. Number two, we need to delete this Daleks layer, this one. I'm going to select it and right click, there's one trick here which can do is right click and select similar like this so that it will select all the similar linears and delete it like this. Then we can go here and select similar like this, delete, go here. Now, of course, I can I can make it much easier by doing all of this on one layer from the very beginning. If you remember from Daleks Evo itself, I can put Luminars on one layer. Or put them each one on a separate layer. So you can see that do we have anyone? Yes, this one, select similar delete. Okay, deleted. Okay. Now, these numbers select delete. All numbers are now deleted. Okay, Nie. Now, what I can do next is that I can go here. First, I can do Burge to remove any unused layers inside our drawing, purge oil, purge all, check the ice and close. Now, let's see if all of these layers. Yep, you can see Dalek Emve there is a Dalex roof here and objects okay. So we have this one. Okay. Now, we have windows coming from Dalek If I would like, I can remove them. This one I can select similar. Like this. This is for rooms. If I remember, we have for windows, so Dalexo. Okay. Any dialec let's put it on. Okay? This one is on Dielec apartment, se look similar. And let's see who selected this. Okay? Let. Now, we have a furniture. We will keep this furniture for now. Okay? We can use a perch again. Purge all, close, roof, object like this. Okay? So we have this one too. This was not on the original drawing, select similar, and then delete like this. Okay? Purge and then purge all, purge this item and close. So you removed another one. Dalek calculator, we removed it, okay? Now, what this one, this one was hidden, select similar. All of this will make the drawing much lighter, okay? Like this. And purge purge all Okay, so now we have only three remaining object objects, DLX four objects, roof, and hmm, okay. I think this is enough for now. We have now done that we add lo luminars. We have now this one, which is important. This furniture will be important, so I'm not going to remove it for now. And we have prepared the legend for this lighting with some emergency. You can see two emergency, normal panels, two emergency normal panels. Emergency. You can see three emergency, normal loads, normal emergency and et cetera. 80. Types of Lighting Switches and Installation Tips: Good afternoon, everyone. In this last one, we will discuss the lighting switches. So the lighting switches are used to turn on and turn off lighting fixture or a group of lighting fixtures. So in the first type, we have one way, one gang switch. So the one way one gang switch is something like this. What does this even mean? One way, it means that we can turn on and turn off or turn on and turn off the lighting fixtures or the group of lighting fixtures from one location. If it is two way, it means that we can turn on and off our lighting fixtures from two different locations or more. And one gang means that we have one switch on this part. You can see one gang, this one is used to control a group of luminous or lighting fixtures. So we will understand more about one way and one gang or two gang or three gang, it will be more clear on the next slide. For example, we can use one lighting switch on our wall so that we can control these groups of luminars. So let's look at this if we have a bedroom like this one, and we have six fixtures, as you can see here. Now, this our door opens like this, and this is the open location of our door. Now, we can use one gang, one way switch in order to control all of this, to turn them all together on and turn them all together off. So the sample of one way, one gang is like this. This one. You can see one tooth, as you can see here. One tooth and one segment, as you can see here. This is a representation or a simple for the lighting switch. As you can see, we put it when you enter this room like this. We put the light switch here as close as possible to the so that when you enter, you press the bottom so that you can open all of these or turn on all of these luminars. The second one is one way to gang. What the difference, it is exactly similar at the previous one. But instead of one gang, we have two gangs like this. So this one, instead of having just one that controls all of our lighting fixtures, we can have two gang switch, which can control. Each one will control a group of lighting switches. And this one will control another group of lighting switches. So for example, if you have this room as seen here, we can, for example, this one is a two gang switch, the first gang and second gang. For example, this gang here will control this group of luminars and this second gang will control this group of other luminars. In Auto cat, how can we represent it? The same bedroom as you can see here? And we added here another sample. This simple is representing a two gang switch. So you can see if we zoom in like this. You can see we have one, two. We have two Ts, and thus one. Two teeth here as you can see, one will control group of luminar. Let's call it A. And the other gang will control other group of luminars. So you can see one, two means two gang. If, for example, we have one, two, three, three gang, then it will be like this one, two, three, in this case, we will have A, B, C. AP means what? Means that one will control group of luminars with notation A, and another gang will control this group of luminars. Now, what about one way, two gang, one way, one gang switch in wet areas? So the previous one, this was a bedroom, office without any kind of wet locations or without any kind of frain or any kind of weather conditions. So when we have a wet areas like kitchens, for example, in outdoors, in bathrooms, in these locations, we try to use another type of gang called the weatherproof switch or weatherproof switch W or B. So this weatherproof will look like this. It will have a cover above it in order to protect it against electric shock. So this is another figure of it. And for example, of course, if you have a bathroom like this, if you bought this switch like this, you are going to die, of course, from this. Water will lead to an electric shock inside the bathroom itself. So you don't do this, of course. If you have to do this, which is, of course, not recommended by any way or any standard, if you'd like to do this, you have to add a weather proof, which prevents you or protects you against wet areas. Now, we know to cat when we have a bathroom like this one, we are going to the same. You can see one gang, exactly the same simple for one gang, one gang, but it is WB, meaning weather proof. Another type is called the two way, one gang switch. What does it do? For example, if we have a large corridor and I would like to control it from two locations. As an example for this, this is a two way. No one way, two way, one gang. You can see one big gang, as you can see here, not two gangs or three gangs. It's just one gang, but it is called two way. Now, let's see this. For example, if, let's say, another way that you are entering here. From the garage, for example, in your own house, and you have a door that leads inside the house from the garage. So this is our door. And then when you go here, you would like to turn on the light for the stairs so that you can go up like this and then enter your own house like this. So in a normal conditions, if you don't have a two way switch, then you will have to turn on from here, and then you go all the way up and you will find that you can't even turn off the light because there is only one gang or one way switch here. So instead of doing this, we use a two way. We have one like this here. And another one here at the end. So when I make this one on this one will be this light will be on, and if I click here, it will be off. So switching the butsion will switch the light condition. So anyway, you can control your own light from two different locations. Now, if you don't understand well what I mean by two way switch, you will see this more clearly in the next lesson in which I explain two way switch more precisely or with more explanation and how to wire it. Now we know to cad we use this simple indicating a two way. Now, if, for example, we have a door from here in an office and another door here or an office with two doors or a large corridor, different applications. Now, we would like when you enter this door, you would like a switch that you can turn on these lights. Or if you enter from here, you would like also a switch so that you can turn all of these lights. Now, of course, if you have one, you will turn it on from here, and if you enter from here, you will go in the dark until you find this other switch. That's why we use the two way one gang or two way two gang depending on how many luminars are you controlling. So this is used in corridors and in the building with several entrance. So if you have several entrances, then we can actually use two gang switch. So this is the application for a two way gang. So I hope you now understand these different types of switches. And of course, in the previous one, we discuss the weatherproof. Again, for this application for two way, we have also W for this one, WV for this one in wet areas. Now, this is another lighting legend different from what I did. You can see single gang switch, as you can see here, double gang switch. You can see this, but it's different from here. It changes from one company to another. So you can see one gang, single two way switch. You can see double two way switch. This one is filled here with a killer, indicating a different type as you can see, one way and two way. Anyway, here we have also another thing called the dimmer. What does the dimmer do exactly? I will show you right now. So the light dimmer switch is a kind of a switch that is used to change the brightness of a certain LED or luminar. This light dimmer actually works by changing the voltage of light to the lighting fixture. So for example, for this type, if you press this one for a long time or every time you press, the brightness of the light will increase. The brightness of the lighting fixtures will increase. And if, for example, double click, it will give us maximum brightness. Something like this, I don't remember actually the pospton one. I actually have in my own house, the one which have a rotating wheel which I'm going to show you right now. Now, of course, by using this one by each click, we increase brightness or one big click, we will get the maximum brightness. You can see we can change the brightness by using this light dimmer. Now, another way that we can have another type, instead of a push button like this one, we can have a one with a rotating wheel. I have this one at my own house, and this one when you rotate this one, you will start increasing the blight voltage to the lighting fixture and you'll find that its brightness will start increasing as you rotate this until the maximum brightness or a maximum voltage position. Another type can be in the form of a slider. When you push this one goes up, for example, its price will start increasing until reaching 100%. This one can you find in home applications. This is another application if the owner of the project would like these type of demos. You already know now it's a switch from Autocad program. And of course, you will find it in your own switch samples legend inside your own company. Now the last point, so we discussed all types of switches. Now we would like to see another point. Now, when I have a room like this, let's say this is a door of the room, and here I enter this room like this. Welcome to the room. I entered my own room like this, and I would like to switch on. So the first question here that I have here, my own lighting switch, which I will turn on the luminars and turn off the luminars. So when I enter, I would like to ask two questions here. The first question is that, how much height is this switch from the finishing floor? Second, the question is how much distance from the door? So for example, the door is opening in this position, like this. So the first question, installation height in all of these on all of these applications, installation height and distance from door, there is no standard like any C or any other electrical code that tells you exactly how much height. But there was a standard practice or a standard residential construction practice that we do when we install these lighting switches. So the wall switch boxes or the lighting switches, we usually put it at a height 48-52 " above the floor. Or if you'd like it in centimeters, which I do in my own projects, it will be 120 centimeters, which is close to 48 " which I just mentioned. So when I install it, I just put it at a height of 48 " or 120 centimeters. That's the first step. Step number two, how much is the distance from here. But before this distance, actually, we would like to see another part that this height like this is the nominal height with the height which we use in our applications. However, according to the ADA or the Americans with disability standards, they don't recommend a specific height, but they suggest that in order to help other people with disabilities, you have to put it at a height 15-48 ". Typically, you can put it in the range of 36 " or 9 centimeters at a lower height. If this location is prepared for people with disabilities, we will put it at a height of 9 centimeters or 36 ". Now, this will help people or residents with wheelchairs or sitting in wheelchairs. So we have now understand the mounting hot way. How about the distance here? The distance there is no standard for the distance. However, we should put it at 4 " from the door or about in a range of 10 centimeters. So this distance will be 10 centimeters from the door. Now suppose that our door is like this. So we have the same door like this. Like this. But instead of the door opening from this side, let's say it opens from the two sides like this, a door opens like this and open like this. So it goes like this and it goes like this. Okay? To double door. We call it the double door. So what you will do in this case, you will see, hey, how much is the weds of this door? So for example, let's say it is 9 centimeters, I will say, Hey, I will mount my own. This is the door itself. So I will mount. I will mount my own lighting switch in a distance of 9 centimeters plus an additional of 10 centimeters. So I will put at a distance of 1,000 centimeters, 90 centimeters plus 10 centimeters. So this is the standard of this is not a standard, sorry, not a standard, but it is a common practice. There is no specific values inside the code. So we learned about the different types of switches, and we learned about the difference in installation height and distance from door. Now in the next lesson, I will show you the two way switch and how are we going to use it or how can we wire it? 81. Wiring of Two-Way Switch Circuit: Good afternoon, everyone. In today's lesson, we will discuss the two way switch circuit. So the two way switch circuit is also known as the three way switch circuit. This is usually used or commonly used in residential and commercial lighting systems. Why do we use this in order to control a single lightning fixture, lighting fixture from one location or a set of lighting fixtures from different or two different locations. For example, if we have a large corridor and I would like to control the lighting of this corridor, when I enter this corridor at the beginning, and I would like to turn it off at the end. So I would like to control the light from two different locations. In order to do this, we need a two way switch circuit. The applications of two way switch circuit is that it allows us to turn as a light on or off from either the switch regardless of the position of the other switch, as you'll see in the next slide. This circuit is used in staircases where we have at the top and bottom of staircase in order to control the lighting we use it in hallways, in long hallways or corridors. Two way switches are used to control the light from different points along the hallway. It can be used also in large rooms, such as conference rooms, living rooms, and this will help us to control the light or lighting lighting from multiple entrances or different areas of the room. We also use it in the bedroom when we enter our bedroom and when I'm going on bed, and I would like to turn off the light without having to go again to the entrance of the room. We also use it in the kitchens, especially those which have different entrances or different locations. So this provides us more flexibility in controlling the lighting itself. So let's look at the components of a two way switch circuit. So for example, if I would like to use it in a staircase, for example, when we enter, I would like to click on the switch to turn the light on. And when I go up to the apartment, I will click to turn off the light. So how can we use this circuit? So in this circuit, you will need two switches. As you can see, it is called it is a specific type switches, called the two way switch two way switch here and two way switch here. And we need a power supply. Obviously, we need a power supply in every electrical source or every lighting system or whatever the electricity source, and we need the light fixtures or the luminars or whatever the type of lighting used. Now this circuit will help us understand. So we have two way switches. This is a two way switch, and this is a two way switch, specifically similar at these two. In these two, we have the line and neutral, which is our supply, right, neutral and phase supply. Now in each of these switches, let's say switch number A and switch B. Let's type it, switch A and switch B. Let's say this is a switch A, and this is switch B. Okay? Now, these switches has three terminals. Each switch has three terminals common COM or common and L one, Line one and L two, common, L one and L two. Similarly, here you can see L one and L two. Let's trip it. So here we have L one and this one is L two, this one, one, and this one is L two. And we have the common point. Here, this is our common point, common, and this 0.2. Okay, similarly as here. So what are we going to do? Number one, we are going to connect L one with L one and L two with L two for each switch. So you can see we connected here. Let's delete this. You will see that L one here, go all the way down to L one here. Okay. And LA two here goes all the way down to L two. Okay? So we have connected these two, which we call it the travel terminals, which connected these two switches electrically. You can see L two is L two, L one with LO. Okay? Now, the third part, which is common, this one is used to connect the supply with the lighting fixture. We will see right now. So as you can see what happens exactly that we are going to connect the line with the common over the first one and we are going to connect the second terminal of the lightning pulp with the common. Remember that in order for a light pulp or any lighting fixture in order to operate, it needs line and neutral. We always connect the neutral directly with our lighting fixtures, as you can see here, and the phase will be taken using this switch. These two switches connected like this, you can see common goes all the way to that line or the phase. Okay? So what happens here is that when we switch one, it will change the state. It will change the state. For example, if we click here and the light bulb is on, it will be off. If we click here, if it is on, it will be off, et cetera. So it is flipping or toggling the state of the fixtures. For example, if the light is off and you switch A to position A on to on position, the light will be on, and if we switch B to the opposition, the light will be turned off and so on. So let's understand how does this even work without much hassle. You can see here that here, one connected to one, two, L two, one with phase, common with phase, and another common with light. Let's look at this circuit. You can see the R on the same position, right? In this case, they are on the same position. So let's look at the current. So we have neutral and phase. Let's say that the current will go through phase like this through here like this, go all the way during the positive cycle, of course, of the AC supply, like this. So our light will be on right. Now, let's say I flipped any of these. Let's say I make this one instead of here, I flipped it like this. You'll see that the phase is connected to this bottom line. If we go all the way here, you'll see we have open circuit. This is an open circuit and this one is also open circuit because we flipped the switch. This light bulb will be off. This switch goes to this position and this one is still at this one. You have opposite positions, so this light bulb will be off. Now, if I go all the way, let's say I'm here, if I click on this switch, this switch will go and instead of here, we go like this, connected like this. So you'll see that the light is connected like this all the way to the face. So it will be on once more. So again, in the original position, on and on, they are having phase connected all the way to the light. If I click here or here, the switch will be flipped to the other side and the other side is open circuit, so it will not turn off the light. It will turn off the light. Okay? Now, when this one becomes here, and if I click on this one too, then the phase will go through this one. Okay? That is the whole idea. Okay. Similarly here, you can see that we are here, a command is connected to L one, L one is an open circuit with this command. So this light bulb is off. If I click on this one, this switch will be like this will be connected to L two. So the current will go like this through here all the way like this to the light bulb, our light bulb will become on once more. If I click on this one, so this position will be flipped like this. So you'll see that this is on L one, and this is on L two. They are not connected with each other. Okay? So in this case, this light bulb will be off once more. This is a whole idea of the two way switch. In reality, how does it look like switch like this, normal switch? Over it has three terminals, L two, and common. You can look at this figure here. You can see a normal lighting switch, one gang light switch, two way, you can see here, common. L one and L two. You can see the three terminals, one going to this one going all the way to L two, one going all the way to L one, and one is going to the common. Look at this one. This one is a gang gang, two way switch. To gang because we have one and two. So it'll be two gang and two way since this one is a two way, and this one is a two way you can see, L one, L two, and the common. Okay, so I hope this system was clear for you and you understand now how does a two way switch circuit work? 82. Adding Lighting Switches in AutoCAD: Hey, everyone. In this video, we will start adding our luminars or our lighting switches, not luminarsO lighting switches to our plan. As we explained in the previous lesson, we discussed the different type of lighting switches, and now we are going to add it in our Autocad program. So before we do this, you can see that we have we have created a layer called lighting fixtures, right? That's one which I created before. Now, before I do this, you will find that if I selected any of these like this one, for example, you can see it was on layer zero, and all of these have different colors. So I would like to make them on the same layer. So what I'm going to do that I'm going to go to this one double click here. And okay and select it like this and go here at home and make it on the lighting fixtures layer. And also, I will make it color green similar by layer, not by the color and then close and save. So now we have all of them are green, similar to our layer. I will do the same for the rest like this. Select this one, go here and make it by layer and choose the lighting fixtures. Set everything on the same exact layer. This one, two, double click on it, make it like this, home, select its own layer as lighting fixtures and by layer, and then close, save it like this, this one, too. Okay. Like this. Go home and by layer, and we will select the lighting fixtures, close, save changes like this. Now I'm going to do for this one, too. Double click. Like this, select it all home and by layer and select lighting fixtures like this. Save it changes. Okay, so all of our luma, you can see it is now much more coherent or much more appealing to the eye. So you can see all of them are now green, and all of them if you select any one of these, you'll find that they are on the layer called lighting. So let's select this select similar like this and make them on lighting fixtures and right click this one, two, select similar. All of them on lighting fixtures. Okay? This one, select similar, and lighting fixtures. We will see this one, too, this one, this one. This lighting fixtures. Okay, so if I close this layer, let's see if there are any, which are not turn the current layer off. All of them are on lighting fixtures. Okay, so can I return it back? So now all of our lumens on our lighting fixtures. Okay. Now the next step that you will find here other samples here. You can see that here, this one is indoor wall light. So what does this even mean? You can add this one at if you have an entrance, for example, for a residential building or house, for example, or an apartment, you can add on this door on the middle here. You can add this one here, take this one here and take this side and add it exactly here. Here you can find here a handler and you will find different types of lighting. And even you can find here an exit sign, this one is used to provide rections in order to give an emergency exit. So for example, you can this corridor. Let's say, for example, we have two exits or several exits. Here we have this one and this one, for example, just as an assumption. So we will put this exit sign, one here and one here and one here above this door indicating that the direction will be like this. So you can add these signs here. Indicating the direction of exit like this, okay? But I'm not going to this in this drawing. Okay, so let's delete this all of these elements. We don't need them. Take these elements two, delete them. And this one here, exhaustive and leave it for now. Now let's look at this. You can see that switch number one, two, three, four, five, et cetera. You can see here this is a one gang one way with a current rating of 16 a pair, similar to it, but with our proof here, two gang, two gang, with our proof, here, a two way switch two way switch. Here, this is called an intermediate Sir switch. Now, when did we use this or when do we use this actually? So let's say we have a large building, this building have, let's say, ten floors. In the first floor, I will put, let's say we have a stairs, and I would like to turn it on and off from all of these floors. So in order to do this, we will have at the very beginning a switch like this one. Here at the first floor and another one at the last floor. Between them, we would use intermediate stair switch, one, two, three, four, about eight switches. So these are used at the first floor and last floor, and between them, we use intermediate stair switch. Now in this example or in this specific drawing or this project here, we are not concerned with them, so I'm going to remove them from here. Like this. Okay, so the first step, we need some switching gangs. Okay? So one gang, one way switch. Let's look at here. So let's start, for example, with this room here. So this room is consisting of two emergency switches, and we have four normal loads which are connected which are obtaining it on power from normal distribution panel, like the transformer itself. So I will use here two switches. You can see this door open like this outside. So I'm going to add it here. I'm going to edit this switch here. In order to turn on and off when I enter this store here, I will turn on and off these switches. Now, there will be a switch for the emergency lighting and another switch, which is used for normal lighting. So we have two here. So I'm going to use one gang, this one here like this. All of it like this. And M, move and select this point here. Go the way up. Let's say F eight, orthogonal like this, and we can make it like this. Okay, so that is the first switch that we are going to. So I'm going to take it like this, control CO, copy F eight, which is orthogonal, I will remove it like this, and we can put it like this, then I'm going to rotate it, rotate base point from here around this point, and we can make it like this. Look. Then move it like this like this. This one is normal one. Now I'm going to repeat this, but I will take switch two, take this one, take this one up here, like this. I'm going to take these two CO copy and then paste it eight here with eight so that it can be aligned. We need another one like this one here. So copy and like this. Now we can call this one. Same as SW one, but feeds, but for emergency lights. For example, so this will be this switch, but for emergency light. Now I'm going to use another sample. All I can do that I can simply double click on it like this. Okay, or first explode, explode, E, explode. And then I'm going to add, take this one CO and Enter. Take this one here, make it E, E, like this and scale it to make it smaller like this. F eight. So we have a switch now for emergency. Now, what I'm going to do is that I'm going to select it like this. And before anything, let's create a new layer, a new layer for lighting switches. A layer specifically for light switch. Let's make it color to be yellow like this. And double click. So that is the layer which we are working on. Select the two, make the layer on lighting switches. Like this. One more cannot be updated. Okay. So this one is related to a blog, this one, which is called Light. Okay. It was copied this layer was copied before from the other drawing of what we call the other drawing, which is called the Lumars. Okay, another thing that we can select this one Pi layer. Okay. This one, too, we will make it on layer lighting switches and double click here like this. Select it all and make it also on a pie layer and put it on this lighting switches layer. And then close like this. So this one also change it. Let's make sure that this is in the same layer, lighting switches. Okay. So now we have same one, but for emergency lights. Now what I'm going to do is that I'm going to click like this and block and we will call it SW two for simplicity, like this. You can see one complete block. Now, let's copy this, for example, from here and then go here. Then select this one and rotate around this point. Let's make it like this and we can move it a little bit like this. Okay, so by logic here, we don't need to add A and B because we have two emergency lighting, and these two will be activated by this emergency switch. And we have three normal lighting. It will be controlled by this one, this normal switch. So we have two. We did what we need here. Now, similarly for this office, we have one, two, three, and four, and we have two emergency we can do exactly the same. So I can select them like this and copying and go all the way. So we have here, the door, I can install it here away from this column here, like this. Okay? So this means that two switches will be very close like this. What we can do actually took. You can also make them smaller if you would like, but I think their skill is pretty good. Okay. What else? We have two rooms here, one for this room and one for this room. Okay, we can control them by one switch. So I can take this one here and say copy like this from the samp point, this point here, and go down here, away from this column and from here, here we have a very small point, so I can put it exactly here. So this one would control these two and this one would control these two. Now, what about this one? You can see one, two, three. So we can use one emergency for them. This door will be opened like this. So I don't want it to be behind this door. So what I'm going to do is that I can actually install it here, away from this store and close to it actually. So I can put them here. So I can take one like this, copy, take this one here, and put it one here, skip, and then rotate like this. Like this. Okay. Then move, and we can move it like this. So this one we have only two luminars or three luminars and I can control them by this switch. Now you can see we have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine. So these are nine luminars. Well, I can take two switches or two gang like this one here in order to control it. So I'm going to copy this move and take them all the way up here. Switch number three, like this, take this line and move, move it all the way up here. Like this. And we can actually move it a little bit more like this. Okay, so we move this one now double click on it like this and select it and make it by layer, the color by layer, and select lighting switches like this. Save. So we have this one, which is a two gang, one way switch. Now, this two gang will have A and B. So what I'm going to do is that I'm going to take this one copy. But before I do this, very important, not forget put it on lighting switch. Copy. Take it like this and we will put one here and rotate like this. And move like this. Okay. Now I'm going to add A and B. So I'm going to take, let's say, this one here, double click. Okay. Copy. Sorry. Just Control C like this, close and control V so that we can have just this letter and go here and double click on it. Double click. Okay, let's just skip like this because there is sometimes some errors. A and B. We can also make it a little bit smaller like this scale like this, making it more reasonable, actually. And we can make this E actually more smaller by double clicking here. Skip first, double click, and we can make this one is pretty large and make it smaller like this and make it a little bit close to it. Let's see. Yeah, much more reasonable, okay, with respect to this drawing. Okay, so we can control here, A and B. Okay, now what I'm going to do is that I'm going to take this one copy, take it here. Let's fix it like this and say A. Okay. Skip. So let's say A, coping. Let's say the first switch will control four, maybe four. Yeah, one, two, three, four, and the other one will control these five. So we can say A like this, move it like this and make it here. So it will control these two, and we can make it also control this And control this. And then the other one P will be controlled here. Let's call it P. Remember that this part here is not a standard. You can do what you would like. You can make it a two gang, three gang, whatever you would like. So we will control B and B and make this one P and P like this, B and B. One, two, three, and four and five. These fives are controlled by the gang B, one, two, three, and four. These four are controlled by gang A, and the emergency will control these three emergency lights. Now for this room here, you can see we have a door here. We can add the switch not behind the door. We can make it actually here, for example. So I will make this one copy like this, two, like this. Okay? This one for lighting switches, for the emergency lighting. Now, the other one we can use. We have one, two, three, and four, five, six. We can put these six on just one gang or two gang. Let's make it two gang again. No problem at all. Like this close to it. And we can make this one A, we have one, two, three, and four and five. We can make these three and these three. So for example, I can say A will control. Let's say A will control this and this and this one. And for P, we can say it will control copy. Like this, will control this one and will control this one. So A will control these three and B will control these three, so we will have another P here. Like this. Okay, one for emergency and others, okay? So we added here. We added this one, this one, too. This one, we have here, one for a toilet. Okay? So we can use this one, which is the weather proof and move. You can move it all the way up here like this and take this one here and move like this. Okay. We can also extend this, extend, like this. Skip. Now, let's make this one S four, let's take it go up. So this is a four, similar as S one. Yep, similar as a one. Let's take this two and make it on layer lighting switches and make it color by layer. Sorry, this one here. Um let's make it this co as it is. This one is lighting switches. Same as 11 gangb for this one. Now, this one would be used for the bathroom bathroom, as you can see, and go here. You can see the door opens like this, so I can add it exactly at this specific point like this. Okay? Now, this is the kitchen. So we have how many we have one, two, three, three emergency, and one, two, three, four, five, six. Okay, so we can use one for emergency and one for the others. So we have weatherproof. Weatherproof, another one. Okay, let's make it as five and take this two and move like this. Move, move, move everywhere. Move, my friend. We can make it like this. Okay, extend like this. Now, this one will be same as okay, we will make this one for emergency. Okay? So we will make this one here, copy like this and move it here. So now what we're gonna do is that we would like to change this one into another form. So first, I'm gonna explode it. Okay? Explode so that we can have different parts and then hatch for this one like this and close. And then I'm going to take this two and pluck like this. And let's call it Swive. Right, w five. This one in lighting switch layers. This one is the same as same as S W four, but for emergency. So you can say this one, C O, copy it like this. And same as this exact one, but for emergency. We can say SW four. Okay, this one is exactly this one, but for emergency lighting. Now we need one for our first friend, which is here, this is our kitchen opens like this. We can put it here close to the door like this. We can make this one actually, can move it like this. And we can scale it a little bit. Okay? Can make it a little bit smaller because I think it's pretty big here. Like this. We can remove this as a one, take it like this, copy and put it here like this. So it doesn't take so much space, go here and change this 12 and leave this one here. Control X. Read this, double click. Control V. So now we have the other simple like this. Take this one, say goodbye, and close. Okay, now, this one, I will also copy it like this and put it here. So 14, 14. Both of these are weatherproof since we are in a kitchen, one for the emergency lighting, and one for the normal lightings or lightings from normal distribution port. Now for this one, we will do exactly the same. One for emergency and one for the lighting. I would copy these two like this. Copy this like this, the door opens like this. We can put it here close to the door right here. Okay, so we can rotate them like this. Okay. And move move this one too. Like this. So one for emergency and one for normal lighting. Okay, great. So mad for this room for this one, two, when we enter like this, when we enter like this, this two, this two, and this two, great, we did it for the bathroom. Now we need for this part here, the entrance and the rest of these lighting. Now we can do how many entrance do we have? We can go from here like this, or you can go up from the stairs. So what I'm going to do is that we will have two lighting. Two of this. One gang, two way switch. So let's move it like this. Selk this one, two, and this one and move like this. Like this one here. And copying from this specific base point and move it like this. Then they will click and okay, home, and we will make it by a layer and select the layer as lighting switches and close, okay? One gang, two way switch. Okay, one gang and two way switch. Now, we go so we can go all the way up to the next floor, so I can add one here if I'm coming from a next floor, so I can put one close here so that it can light all of these together, all of these luminars and one here which will control them too, if I'm entering from the main entrance. Okay, so I'm going to add two emergency. Not emergency, there is only one switch here, which I can use for this drawing. If I have one for emergency and one for normal, I will add it. So I can add this switch here, one close here, I will push it more to the right. And I will make one here close to the door. Now, just move this one closer to the stairs that if anyone would like to turn it on, this one, of course, will turn all of these, and this one will also turn all of these. Okay. Now, this one is related to the service panels. We will not we will ignore this completely. We are controlling these ones here. Now, for the entrance, if you would like to add one, we can add one for the entrance. You can copy like this and go all the way like this for the entrance and then rotate like this around this specific point like this maybe. And move it like this. Okay. So now we add switch for the entrance. We added a switch here for this corridor, we can control it from here and we can control it from here. Okay, what is the next step? We added all of our lighting switches. Great. Now the next step is wiring. Now, before I do this, I have to make sure that everyone here to gang with their proof I don't need it. For the exhaustive fan, leave it for now. Okay, so this part two. Now, let's just close this one to make sure turn the annel layer off. You can see all of the switches are on this layer. Okay, great. Now, before we end this video, we can actually find that there is an additional layer that's useless for us. This one here, for example, if I click on it, Dex continuous. If I click and select similar, you'll find this is from DalexE which I don't need, so I can delete it like this. This one Dalek roof. There's also Dalek roof, so I can select similar and delete it like this. So now we have our origin. You can see we have some opened rooms now, much more correct or the original plane that we have in the beginning. But now, let's just use perch in order to remove any kind of excess layers which is not input. You can see we have purged two layers from Daleks. Okay, so we have only one layer from Daleks now, which is a object layer. Okay, great. So now we have done the next step. The next step is wiring our luminars. So let's save this because I'm going to leave all of these files inside the course. 83. Rules of Lighting Circuits: Hi, everyone. And the next step, we are looking for the lighting circuits. So we'd like to prepare the different circuits of lighting, and we would like to see the different rules that we are going to follow in the next lesson. So first, we will find that we have different rooms like in our building or an apartment, and our goal here is to form these circuits. So what I mean by circuits. So if you look at any distribution panel like this, distribution port or distribution panel, you'll find that it is formed of different circuit breakers, right, as we explained before. Now, each circuit breaker Okay. Is used to control one lighting circuit or one power circuit. Power circuits is the next step, but for now, let's just think about the lighting circuits. So for lighting circuit, we can have one breaker that is used to control several luminars together. So from this circuit breaker, there will be one which will go out like this and go supply electricity to all of these luminars like this. Now, of course, all of these are connected in parallel. So for example, this one will go out like this, and this is, for example, the line, and there will be, of course, the neutral right coming from our panel. Now, the neutral is going to all of this directly to all of our panels. That is the first luminar, second luminar, third one, fourth, like this. Let's say all of these luminars are controlled by this circuit breaker. So the neutral will go directly to all of them like this. And for the line, one will go to the switch first, and then from the switch, which will control all of these, from the switch, it will go like this one from here and another one to here, another one to here, and another one to here. So all of them are actually connected in parallel, and all of them are controlled by one switch. So this diagram here, which you can see in our figure, we will have a distribution port. This is our panel with this figure. This is its own simple, and this is what we are going to do. So we are going to say, Hey, I'm going to wire all of this like this, we connect them using straight lines in the form of a U shape. So we do the connection using straight lines or curves. So for example, instead of doing this, we can make it like this, like this and like this. As you would like. So this means since they are connected, means that they are all on one circuit. And then we look for the panel which is closest to Luminar, which is closest to our distribution port. And then we will point at it. You can see we have a pointer here pointing to this one. And you'll see that it will have the same name of the panel, but with the number of the lighting circuit. So for example, you can see that here, this distribution panel will have this name, LPP F. So what does this even mean? LPB means lighting power panel, lighting, power panel. So it is used for lighting and power circuits panel f f here means first. So for example, if you would like to talk about ground, then you will you will say G. If you are talking about second floor, you will say as third floor, let's say T H, et cetera. You can also type the name as this third or second. There are different ways to do this. Now for our panel, this one is on our distribution panel for getting its power from this distribution panel like this. So we point at it, as you can see here at its location in our drawing, and we have the same name. You can see bp F, but slash one, which means the lighting circuit number one. So what you will find is that in our distribution port, we will have different breakers like this. And this will call one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, like this, et cetera, like this. So let's say one, it means that this is a circuit number one, which is controlled by breaker number one. And one here means circuit number one. Similarly, you can write it in this form, BB F L one, lighting one. Okay? Here we don't write this. We can do this LBB F, panel for first floor. Here we type bB F, but one, the circuit number one. Now you can type it in a different form. You can also say one slash Sd F sub distribution panel or distribution port. And you can see this is the name of the panel, and we added L one at the beginning, or you can add L one in the end. So all of these are different ways of typing or writing pointer or the name of the point or the name of the circuit inside our drawing. Now, this is a sub distribution panel, which takes its own power from the main distribution panel, which is in the ground floor, for example, so it takes its power from it. So that's why we call it sub distribution panel or distribution port. Both of these names are exactly the same. Great. Now, the arrow points to the distribution p the location as you can see here, and each lighting circuit has a maximum of 1,200 volt and pair loads, and the lumina not exceeding ten. So what does this even mean? So we assume that we assume that each circuit like this one here has a total maximum load of 1,200 volt. We should not exceed this value here. And we say that for the reliability of the system, we should not add more than ten luminars on one circuit. That are the two rules which I'm following. These two rules are obtained from my national code or my country called the Egyptian code. And in the NEC code, there is no specific number for this in the NEC code. Also we assume that a power factor for LED 0.95 and four fluorescent 0.8, because since we are talking about this rule of 1,200 and volt, 1,200 volt and pair, then we need to convert the wattage into volt and pair by taking the watt and voting by the power factor. As you'll see in the next lesson. Now in this example here, we will use a breaker or a fuse with a rating of five or six a pair. Now, where did we get this? If you take 1,200 volta and pair and divide it by our voltage, for example, 220 volt. And here in this example here for this breaker, I assume 220 volt. If you are from the US, you are going to use 110 volt, and in this case, you will have ten pairs, approximately 10:00 A.M. Pairs. So this number will give us 5.4 if I remember correctly. That's why we use a five or 6:00 A.M. Pair breaker. Now the same rule here, the same rule according to the British standard and which we obtained this values actually the Egyptian could actually obtained it from the British standard. In the British standard, this section specifically says that the maximum distance for a lighting circuit is 53 meters. So you can see we have a wire goes like this. The cable itself goes all the way like this, like this, goes all the way to the distribution to the final luminar. So we need to make sure the length of this cable does not exceed does not exceed 53 meters. This is according to the British standard. And also for the British standard, say that you use 1.5 millimeter cable for a circuit that cover the maximum disk. So usually, according to the British standard, you are going to use a 1.5 millimeter cable and a breaker of five pairs for one for each lighting circuit, and it has a maximum voltage, a volta am pair of 1,200 volta pair. So this is for British standard. However, in reality, you will not find this five amber breaker. I'm talking about my country, you might find it, then you can use it without any kind of issues. However, if you don't find this breaker, you can use a ten apre breaker, but you will use double the cross sectional area three millimeter square kab. Now, all these rules, you will understand where I get them. So we have some rules which we can. So for example, after getting the volt and bear of the circuit of the final circuit in the panel schedule, we are going to take this volt and bear and convert it into current. From it, we will get rating of circuit breaker and then rating of our cable. Okay, so don't worry about these rules. These are just standard rules. However, when we design our circuit, we will be able to know how the rating of circuit breaker and rating of the cable. Now, as you can see, 1,000 what for a ten a pair breaker and 1,500 W for a 16 and pair breaker. Here, according to the Saudi Arabia code, according to Saudi Arabia code, you are going to use a 1,000 Watt circuit maximum circuit, 1,000 W which is actually equivalent to 1,100 volt and par for a power factor of 0.9. This is for the Saudi Arabia code. So you'll use 10:00 A.M. Pairs for 1,000 Watt or 1,500 Wat. If the circuit is 1,500 W, then you can use a 16 ampere pick. So you can see different rules which can change from one country to another, and you have to follow what your country code says. So to make everything simple as you will see, what I'm going to do is that first, I'm going to say, Hey, our circuit will have a 1,200 volta and bear maximum. Each lighting circuit has a maximum volta and bear of 1,200 volt and bear. And the numers in this circuit will not exceed ten. Now, remember, if you apply this rule, you will find that here 1,200 volt and bear and we assume that our circuit is loaded only by 80%. We don't load it by 100%. We just load it by 80%, which you'll find that it is equivalent to 1,000 volt and pre close to this number. Now, as you can see, we say that, hey, luminires not exceeding ten. So what does this mean if you take this number and vide it by ten? It means that each luminire will have a rating of 100 volt and pair. So that is number one. So what I'm going to do is like as folks. Number one, I'm going to look for each luminire in my own drawing and find it's vault and pair. If it's on volta and bear, less than 100, I will just assume it as 100. For simplisty and making the calculations easy. So for example, if this one is 70 volta beer, for simplicity, I will just say, Hey, this one is 100 volta beer to simplify my own calculations. Now, if the luminir let's say, 120 volta and bear exceeding 100 volt, I will take it as it is. Now you may ask me why I do this because it will make my own calculations easy because if I assume each one of 100 volta pair, I will not exceed ten linears in each circuit. That is the first thing and the rest about breakers and cables. We will see this in the next part of the panel schedule after the power circuits. Okay, great. Now, you may ask me why do we have one, two, three, four, et cetera. You'll find that if you look at a panel, you will see these numberings here. You can see if you look at the rest, you will see one, three, five, seven, nine, 11, 13, et cetera. You can see odd number. For this part of the panel, and you'll find even breakers on this part. You can see six, eight, ten, 12, and four, two. So you can see all of this even and this one is odd. So what we do is that there are some panels which have this one can be like this one, two, three, four, five, like this, and others which can have odd numbers alone, and even numbers alone. So what I do is that when I design my circuits, I say, Hey, all of the odd numbers here is related to lighting circuits. So when I design my lighting circuits, I will say, Hey, L one, L three, L five, and for the power sockets or power circuits, you can say, let's say this is for power circuits, we use even numbers. So we can say, Hey, as two as four, a six, et cetera, like this. So when I design lighting circuits, I will use even numbers. And when I sign this way you can use odd numbers. Others you can say, Hey, one, two, three, that's a different way of design, okay? So it depends again on the office that you are working with 84. Wiring Luminaries and Forming Circuits in AutoCAD: Hey, guys, and welcome to another lesson. And this one we will start having port three, which is adding or doing our wiring for our circuits. Now, the first step is that we have two types of panels. We have one for emergency and one for main distribution port. Okay? One for normal loads and one for emergency. So for example, for this system here, we will have two types. We have emergency and we have normal loads. So let's look at our panels here. You can see we have normal distribution panel and emergency distribution panel. Lighting control panel, this type of panel is used to control lighting with push buttons contactors in a large building. When we have mini corridors and min sections inside our system or on our plan, and we would like to control it from one location, we can use a lighting control pattern. And this project, we don't have this, so I don't need it at all. So I'm going to delete it like this. Leave like this. And then I'm going to take this part like this, take all of this, and then take all of this, and then take all of this. Okay? And then I'm going to do like this, move, zoom in at this specific point, go up here like this. So you can see what I did, that I remove this and pushed all of these samples that we used in our plan. Now, what about exhaust fan? Exhaustive fan, we have two options here. One is this one related to power circuits, and we can use it also in lighting circuits. So these exhaustive fans are used in bathrooms. In this one, we can add one here for this bathroom and one for the kitchen. If it is related to the HVAC system, we can have it in a separate plan. In the plan of the power circuits. And others if you are working with residential building and each apartment is alone, you can use an exhaustive fan inside the lighting plan itself, the lighting circuits plan itself, and you can add it here if it is a residential building because it has a small load and you can connect it to the same circuit of the lighting. It is a different procedures. Again, dependent on the office. Here in this one, we are going to use only lighting so I don't need it actually. So I'm going to delete it like this. Like this and like this. And we can delete this. Now, what I'm going to do is that I'm going to move this one all the way up so that we can say, Hey, goodbye to our lighting plan. Or we can actually do another thing which is much easier. We can use trim like this, and we can trim all of this. Then we can delete this. And let's extend this one, extend, let's see. This one doesn't see it. We can take it like this and use F eight because here you can see it doesn't extend because you can see there is a small gap here. What I can do also is that I can simply extend this and extend all of this so that they can touch this part here. Great. Now we finished the legend of our drawing. Let's take it like this and move it down like this. Like this, okay? So we have one here, messing, which is this one, okay? So we can copy this. Move it like this. Okay, great. And save this one for part three. Now we need two panels, one for normal and one for emergency. So I'm going to take these two, copy them. Now, where should we place our panels? Okay, Our panels, usually, if you have a residential commercial building, you have a room for electricity or electrical panels, a room for electrical panels or another room called server Room, which contains light current components in which you can add also this electrical panels. Usually, if you have a transformer room, and this room is only specifically designed for a transformer. You can't add these panels because you need some clearance, and this room should not be accessible by anyone except electrician. Okay? So what I'm going to do is that you can add it in another location. We this location in the store room. If we have some space or clearance, you can add them actually in the storeroom. No problem at all. Now, let's say you are talking about a residential building. A residential pitting or let's say this is an apartment. For example, this is an apartment, and this is the entrance room of the apartment. If you have an apartment, you will put this panel here. So let me show you how. You will just take this panel here. If you are talking about what? If you are talking about a residential or an apartment, you'll put here inside the inside this part or inside this wall, F eight, like this. Okay. Take this one, move, and you can actually move it like this, like this. You can put it in this location. If this is an apartment, and this is the entrance of the apartment, and this is our door, you will put it behind the door. You don't want it to be easily accessible by anyone. If this is just an apartment. However, I'm saying that this is a residential building, a commercial building. So I'm going to put them in the store. So I'm going to control Z like this and control Z once more so that we can take it its own original position. Take this two, move like this and put it here inside the store. So you can put here one like this, take this one, two, M, and move this one here on the wall. This one, two, like this. Okay, so we have the two panels, one for emergency and one for main distribution port. So first step that I'm going to do is that I'm going to create a new layer, LA, one layer specifically for wiring. So I'm going to say lighting, lighting, wiring. Like this and double click on it so that it can be activated. And let's say the wiring will be, for example, in let's say so we have two wirings, 01 for normal. So we can double click like this. Okay, Rename layer, wiring and say normal Normal. Okay? Because we will have two separate wearing or wearing, yes, wearing, one for normal and one for emergency emergency. Like this. So we will start with the normal, right? So I'm going to take the normal wiring. Let's make it in let's say this pink color, for example, like this, and we will make the line continuous. Okay? And then for the second one, which is the emergency, I will make it. This emergency, this emerson, make it in red and make the line, for example, dashed like this, o, so that we can make it in a different form. Now, let's see what are we going to do? So we are working on lighting wiring. Now I'm going to add the name of these panels. So, what can we do? We can copy this, for example, like this. Like this, skip and call this one. We are now in the first floor. Let's say skip first so that we don't select anything except this one. So let's say distribution port. First, distribution port first. Okay? Like this and we can take this one and copy like this FA so that it can be in the same position, and call this one emergency. So we will double click, Skip first. Double click. Like this emergency distribution for first F means first. Now I'm taking this two, and let's make it in the layer of lighting wiring normally. For example, for making it clear. Great. Now, what are you going to do? So we have the two panels, the location of two panels. Now we need to do the wiring for our system. And remember, there is a wiring for emergency and wiring for original luminars. Now let's look at these loads here. So the first one, this one, a fluorescent lamp here, this one, fluorescent luminars. Okay, its power rating is four multi blood by 14. Okay, 63, what, as you can see here. So I will say, Hey, 63, W and 0.8. So it is approximately 78.75 volt and pair. So as we said before in the previous rule, we said that we are going to take it as for the lumins. We said that each one so that we not exceed ten, we will say that each one is 100 volt and pair. So the first one is assumed as 100 volta and beer, and this one is exactly, let's see this one. This one is, how many what? 25 what? Okay, very small. So we can also assume 100 volt and pair, since it is less than 100, okay? This one is 11.4. Okay, we can assume it the same. This one is an extent line. This 116.4, what? We can also assume 100 volt, okay? This one, 15, 100. Okay, so every one of these, we will assume it at 100. Now, you can say that, hey, we can actually add more than ten on the same panel or in the same lighting circuit. Yes, you can do this. But however, you have to make sure that we have more reliability in our system. We don't want to make it too much luminars on one lighting circuit so that if any problem happened with this lighting circuit, it doesn't turn off all of this location or all of this apartment. All of this commercial flow. Okay, so this is our panel here. Okay, so let's start with the first step. So we have here lighting wire. So I'm going to use polyline. Sorry, poly line like this. And we will start from here where the closest one, this one is the closest one. Okay. So what I can do that, like this. Okay. So we can take from here, activate the orthogonal like this, go all the way like this. Okay? And then enter Enter to repeat the same action like this. Take it like this. Okay. And then enter Enter. Remember, I'm working with the normal lighting. This is the normal lighting and this one is the emergency. So I'm going to zoom in like this, like this, Enter. So now we connected all of this together. Now I'm going to go to the next room, which is this one. I'm going to say Enter. Again, like this. Like this. Okay? So we have one, two, three, four, five umreso. Let's continue. So you want to go to this room, you can see how many in this room, one, two, three, four, five, six, and how many did we do? One, two, three, four, five. Okay, we can actually take the rest here. It doesn't matter because we have too much space in our um, in our design. Okay, one, two, three, four, five, six, okay? Here, one, two, three, mm. Okay. So that's the best option that I have, okay? So I'm going to click here, connect to this one. This, okay, Control Z and enter once more or pull Okay, let's redo this one. This one. Mm hm. Okay, so let's pull your line like this. Okay. Go all the way like this. Mm hmm. Mm hm. G here. This are emergency, this three are emergency. So this is fed from a different panel. Okay. Go here, enter, and then enter again. We can go like this, okay, pullly loin. We can go like this. Okay, so I can go like this. You are trying to find the smallest distance between two panels can go like this. Then enter. Okay, once more for this one here. Okay. So what we did is that these are emergency one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten and 11. Okay, we have 11. It doesn't matter. Why? Because these luminars are having a very low power rating. So it is this circuit here has a power rating less than 1,200 volta pair. Okay? So we can add more than actually ten because we don't want more than one circuit in one room, okay? Great. Then this one is the closest one. So what I'm going to do, look here at what I'm going to do. So I'm going to say pul line and then go here like this and close eight, make it like this. Okay. And then I'm select this. You can use you can use the MLD or the multi leader, which we explained before on how can I do this? Okay, pointing at our distribution port or you can do this trick. We can simply right click here and then properties like this, and then you can make the end segment like this, make it, let's say, for example, ten, like this. Okay. So you can see the end segment became much more thicker. And what I'm going to do is I will just zoom in like this, like crazy like this, and you will have a pointer, as you can see here. So I'm going to select it like this and say scale like this and make it just a little bit bigger like this. Much more reasonable. Select it and route it. Hey, go all the way like this. Another easier way than using this multiliter Like this point at our distribution port, like this. And then I'm going to add a line like this one from here, connected to this one, like this. Okay, like this. Okay. And then I'm going to copy this. Okay, go all the way here. And then this is the distribution port F L one, the first circuit like this, as you can see. So we added the first circuit, as you can see here for the main lighting. Okay, this is the main lighting, okay? As you can see, and we pointed to our distribution port DBF, and this is the first circuit one lighting one. Now I'm going to do the same for all of our plan. Now, you can see that we have how many one, two, three, four, five, six, and we have six here, Okay and one, two, three. All of this are emergency. Okay? So we have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten. Okay, so we can add all of this on one circuit. So I'm going to click like this Pul line, and this is the closest one to our distribution port. I'm going to go like this. Take it like this if eight orthogonal lines because this is in reality is more orthogonal. And there is another point that they do that they can make a fillet in this part. Let's just continue and I will show you this fillet, how it looks like, like this. Enter, and then enter once more, like this. And enter go like this, like this, okay? Okay. Enter again, take it from here all the way down here. Enter again, like this. Enter again. We go all the way like this. Okay? Enter again, go all the way like this, okay? And okay, this is the end, so we can do another thing. We can go like this. For this last one here. Okay, like this. Okay? So we have go all the way, giving electricity all of this. Okay? Go all the way like this, like this. Okay, so we have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, and ten. So I'm going to go to the very beginning here and make this one as number two. So copy. From here like this, without F eight, without the orthogonal, and go like this. Okay? We can point at this panel here like this. This is pointing like this. Okay? So we can actually make it a little bit smaller. Okay. What I can do that I can simply select this. And here, this layer, this one is okay, closed, okay? So I can select it like this and scale from this specific base point like this. Okay. And move. We can take it like this. Okay, so let's see. This is a reasonable size, okay? We can copy this, okay? And go all the way here, delete this. Take this one, move and specify this point. Make it here. Pointing at our distribution board. This one will be L three. The second one. We said that we are going to use odd numbers to indicate our system. Let's save this. Okay, now what is the next step? We have all of this. Forget about this one. This one, has its own distribution port from the service emergency service or the service distribution port. This is a separate distribution port that takes or this one takes its power from a separate distribution port that provides lighting for all of our stirs or all of the luminars in the steer. So this is a different completely different distribution port, and we can simply do like this. We can simply take this one here and copy and go all the way like this. Okay? We don't have any kind of wiring for this one. Okay, we can make it like this. Take this one, push it up here like this and call this one here emergency. Distribution port in ground. Okay? And we will see if we have L one or L two, three, all dependent on how many luminars do we have? So let's say if we have ten floors, then in each one, we have one luminar so the total luminars will be ten. So one luminar wall lighting circuit will be enough. If we have more than this, then we will have more than lighting this indicates emergency distribution port in ground floor, not in this floor, but in ground floor. This takes its power from a different distribution port. Okay, so now we have the from emergency. We have all of this. Okay. So we have how many one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, and we have here how many, one, two, three, and four and five and six. Okay. So what I'm going to do is that if I put it in one circuit, it will be 15. So what I can do that I can put them in two different layers or two different lighting circuits to be much more or in the safe side, okay? There is no problem in adding them on the same one because you have here, if you look carefully, a very low rating. You can put all of this on one lighting circuit. If you'd like, it doesn't matter, no problem at all. But for reliability of the system, we should put them on a different circuits. Okay? However, since we have part of it on the normal loud and one for emergency and part on normal loud and other in emergency, so no problem at all. We can actually add them all together. So let's make sure of this. If you look at this one here, this one is this 125, what? Okay, this one is LED. So 25/0 0.95 as a power factor, 26 or let's say 30 volt and pair. And how many do we have? We have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15. So if I multiplate it by 15, it will be 450 volta pre very far away from our 1,200 volta pre. So I'm going to violate the ten lows rule, and I will add all of this on one circuit because we have this one on another circuit and this one on another circuit. Okay, so let's do this bully line, go here at eight Here, okay? And then enter. Enter again. Do it like this. Okay? Enter again. Do it like this. Okay? Enter again, like this. Enter again, like this. Okay, Enter again, go down here like this. Okay? Enter again. Like this one here. Enter again. Goes away around this emergency distribution panel once more like this and enter again like this. Okay, so you can see, we added here one, two, three, all of these luminars connected it like this, like this. Okay. Now we have this one also remaining. So we need to do it also continuously. Okay? So you add another polly line like this. Okay? Make it go all the way around it like this one here, like this. And skip. So just let's move this one. We can make it much shorter like this. So that goes like this starts from here from this point. Okay. Okay? So we can actually we would like to start from here. So what I'm going to do is that I'm going to choose a polyline like this. Make this one, go here, okay? And then enter and once more like this, Make it go all the way like this. And this one, too, we forgot this one, so we will end at this one here. So you can see as if we have a continuous line moving through all of this, let's read this so we started here in a U shape, as you can see, and then we go to the next room. You can see like this. We covered all of this and got back here like this. Okay. Another way that you can actually go like this and go like this and go around and get back here. All our different ways, you will reach the same conclusion, okay? S different types of design. Okay, so we made the circuit, and now we need to add our pointer. So we have control CO or copy. Take this one here, disable this orthogonal, put it here for this one, and we would like it to point at this one here so we can move it a little bit up like this, or let's say rotate around this base point like this. Okay. Move this one like this. Call this one number five. And pointing like this. Let's make this arrow a little bit more convenient. A little bit like this. Okay. Let's see. Pointing Mmhmm. Okay. Rotate like this and up like this, Like this. Okay. Tate once more. Okay, we like this. Okay. Take this one here. Skip Okay, as if we are pointing at this one, let's rotate this one, make it just t, make this one much more convenient like this. Okay? Take it like this. Okay. So we are pointing at this one here, we have L one, we have L three and L five. Okay, so let's see if this what we just it. Now the only thing which is remaining is our main emergency distribution port. So let's start doing this. So what I'm gonna do that I'm going to go to the layer lighting wearing emergency like this. And then we will start. So we have how many, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight. We can make all of this on one lighting circuit. So I'm gonna say pulley line like this. And if eight like this, okay? And make it like this. Okay? First, before I continue, let's look at this one here and change the properties of this one. Okay, by layer, you go to layer itself, layer. This one, let's change it, for example, two. Let's see this one here. For example, let's look at it. Okay. Okay, so we make it dashed line. Okay. The next step that let's continue ply the line. Okay like this one here. Okay? Go like this to the next room. Okay? Enter Enter again like this and enter Enter, go like this. E nternter again, go like this. Okay? Enter enter, skip polin Okay. Make it like this, go to this one, and then enter enter again, and then go like this and then skip. All of this are on the emergency panel, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight. Okay, eight is a very good number because all of this is on this one. I'm going to go here and copy this like this and copy it from here. There's just one mistake which I'm going to show you right now. Okay, like this. Okay, and rotate around this point, go all the way here. Hey, say that this is here, and call this one EDB, EDB one. Take this one here and move it a little bit like this. Okay? So this is the emergence distribution board, first floor one, this one. Okay, where the problem here. The problem is that we should not cut it like this. Okay? We can make between them an arc like this. Arc, first point, second point. Okay? And the end of the arc will be like this, okay? Like this, giving a bridge. Now, we are going to trim trim this one. Skip, trim. Okay. This one is not actually touching. Let's make a touch like this. Okay? And then trim and say goodbye to the spot. So you have made a bridge like this above it. That is one way of doing it, okay? The other way that hey, uh hmm going like this. Okay, so we don't have any kind of another intersection. Now, the other way, I will show you in the next one here. Okay, so we have done our first one. Let's go and do the next one. Okay, so let's see here we have emergency one, two, three, we have four, five, and we have six, seven, eight, nine, ten, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15. So let's make this on two separate circuits. Okay? We can make them on two separate circuits or just one third. So since we have it like this, okay, we can okay, let's do polyline. Go like this. We have one, first one. Okay? Eight, go like this one, and two, okay? Enter again like this, okay? Mm hmm. Go like this, okay? Okay? So we have one, two, three, Okay? Enter again. We have these two, so we can take them on our journey. Okay? Now, let's take this one too. Pull the line like this. Okay? And then enter Actually, the thing that makes it much more difficult is the presence of. So we have one, two, three, four, five, one, two, three, four, five, Okay, five. Okay, and let's make the rest on one circuit, okay? Okay, great. Now we need here, we can add a bridge here or I can do another thing, which is like this. We can use a line like this and enter line and like this. And then you'll say, Hey, what I'm gonna do that I'm going to use trim like this, say goodbye to this and take goodbtes. So this is another way of doing a bridge. Awesome. Mm mm, mm, mm, mm. Okay. Okay, great. Now we want to save again, and then I'm going to take so this is EDB FL one. Copy. Okay? Like this F eight, here. So this is the beginning here. Okay? Close and then select all of this. Okay, rotate around this point, making it pointing like this. Okay? Pointing at this location. Nice. Now, the final circuit will be this one Pulley line, which you want is the closest one. Let's start from here down here. So this is an emergency like this, F eight, like this, enter enter, and then again, like this, enter enter and go like this. Okay? Enter, Enter, go like this. Okay? We can go like this and like this. Okay. So let's say bullying, line again, go from here all the way up. So we took this emergency one. This one, okay. Okay. Mm hmm hmm. Okay, so we can go like this. Go here all the way up once more. Like this, and like this. Okay, so you can see we go one, two, three, four. Okay, we can push this one down here. Like this and push this one. Take this point and push it here. Like this. So we have one, two, three, and four and five, six, seven, eight, Okay? Do we have anything remaining? We don't have anything remaining. I think we have done all of our luminarsEcept of these two, we forgot about these two. So what can we do? Mm hmm, mm hmm. Okay, we can go like this. We can do puling. That's fine. You can go like this. Bully line not polygon. Bullyine. Go from here like this. Okay Like this Enter again. Like this, Enter again. Go like this. This is the only way I think we can do it like this. There may be another way, but I'm just showing you for illustration. You can see we started from here. Go like this, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, and ten. Specifically, ten luminars on one line. Okay, which one is easier to reach, this one or this one? I think this one is much closer to this one. So I'm going to say, Hey, this one, copy like this. Okay, close F eight. So we have ADB FL one. This is ADB FL three, and this is L L five, number five. Okay? Like this. Take this one and move it up like this. And this one here, ADB FL one, ADB FL three, like this. Okay, so did we do all the wiring save? Let's finance legend ready. Wiring is done for all of these layers, okay, ADB, DBF, okay? Hmm. Let's just check if I met any of these wiring circuits. We have done all of them, okay? So as you can see, we have done the complete design for the lighting circuits. 85. Adding Wiring to the Legend: Hey, everyone. Now, just one more step that we are gonna do in this lesson that we are going to just say, Hey, this one is for emergency lighting, and this one is for normal lighting, o? This one and this one. That's what I'm gonna do, which I didn't do in the last one. So I'm gonna copy these two like this, Okay? Um So and enter and copy it like this, like this. Okay? And let's just extend this line like this and extend this one, two, and this one also be extended like this. And this one extended like this and copy this one from here, go like this. And we will make this one dash like this. And read this one too. Read this and this. Let's just copy this one because we don't have any sample for them. Then I'm going to take go to this one. This is for emergency light. Just to draw a line like this. And then I will go to the other layer for lighting normal and then line another line it like this. Okay. And usually, of course, this one can be also in green. No problem at all. So I'm going to say this one is four. So we will double click like this or skip first so that we don't select any other thing, normal lighting, wiring. And cup this and go here and make this one emergency lighting. Okay? Like this. And finally, we can trim all of this. Skip we can trim this two. And this one, didn't touch. Okay? So we can extend first, extend, all of this so that it can touch this one and then trim and now we can trim it. So we added normal lighting wiring and emergency lighting wiring so that the one who see this plan understand the difference between these two. And then save. 86. Types of Electrical Outlets: Hey, guys, and welcome to another lesson. In the previous lessons, we discussed the design of lighting systems. Now in this part, we will start talking about the power circuits. In order to do this, the first thing that we are going to learn the types of electrical outlets or electrical receptacles. So the first time that electrical outlets, receptacles, sockets, they are nearly similar to each other. So for example, for a single socket. So what I mean by sockets here, if you look at any room like this, you'll find here like something like this with two openings or more dependent on the system. And you'll find from this we can log in, let's say, our computer or our vacuum cleaner or our TV. This one here which we blog in our electrical equipment is called socket or outlet. Okay. So the first type is called a single socket. So let's see this. You can see this is a socket here, and this is another socket here or electrical outlet. That is just one for one component like this. Now, this one had a rating of 10:00 A.M. Pairs or 16:00 A.M. Pairs. It means I can go or withdraw up to 10:00 A.M. Pairs or 16:00 A.M. Pairs. Theoretically, okay. However, in reality and reality, when we have several sockets like this, each one we say that hey, let's say, for example, you are going to connect five sockets on one circuit like this, connect it to one circuit with one circuit breaker, and let's say the circuit breaker is ten and pairs. Thytcally let's say we have five sockets on one electrical circuit, similar to electrical panels. Then each of these sockets, we say that hey, each one will take ten and pairs, divided by number of sockets, which is five, which means each one will take theoretically two pairs. In reality, it can take more than this, okay? But an assumption when we design, and it will become more clear as we go in the next lessons. So what we do exactly that we say, Hey, when I design this socket, I don't know what kind of fload will be connected, right? It can be a TV, it can be a vacuum cleaner. It can be not washing machine for this type. Let's say, for example, a receiver we can connect a computer. We can connect, for example, a Brenner. All of these are different types of fluids, and each one has its own volt and pair, right? So in this case, they say, Hey, since we don't know what kind of fluid, we made an assumption. We say that, hey, each one of these sockets will take 180 volt and pair. Its loading is 180 volt and pair. If you are following the IEC good, or following the N EC code or the national electrical code. If you are following the European Commission code, EC standard, Eubean commission code, then in this case, you will assume that each one of these will take 250 volt and pair. So it depends on what code you are following. For me, I am following this EC standard, and we assume in my own designs that each one of these sockets is a 250 volt and pair for a single socket. And since this one, this type here is installed inside buildings, inside the apartments or inside the offices, this one doesn't need a high IB. It's IB is just 20. This is usually what the single socket can handle. Now, normal sockets, which is weatherproof exactly similar to this one. But I just have some cover like this, a protective cover, which means it has a higher IP 54, higher than a normal socket like this one, just one which is different, weatherproof. This one with a higher IB 54 is used in kitchens, bathrooms, and outdoors. So if you are having a room and you know this room is kitchen, then all of the equipment will be weatherproof. Similar to the switch, if you remember, from the previous lesson when we said that switch itself like this, switch itself is weatherproof inside kitchens, bathrooms, et cetera. So in our case here, since we are talking about a normal socket like this one, weatherproof, we use this one in kitchens, bathrooms, and outdoors. Now, this block has many shapes. In our system here, we don't design its shape. I don't care about its shape. Is shape, it changes from one country to another. So you can see here in Europe, in Russia, India, Mexico, US, different countries can have different shapes. So, for example, you can have let's say, this one, for example, a line and a neutral, another one can have a line and the neutral and airs for example, okay? So it depends on the system that is installed inside the building itself. And each sample in autocad will be this one which we are going to use. So for example, if I have a room like this, room like this, and I would like to install a socket here. So I would just draw it like this and another socket here, and another one here. Each of these samples means that we have one of these. This is our wall. So we call this one wall mounted as we will see later in the course. Now if we are talking about a weatherproof, exactly the same, simple but just add W B. The second type is double, so it's similar at the previous one, but just double or double. So you can see here, this one is doublX or two. It has exactly the same current rating. We assume that each one take ten and pairs or 16:00 A.M. Pairs and volt and bear rating 360 volt and Bar IIC and NEC standard 2500 volt and bear for the EC standard or European commission. Now, you will see what the difference is exactly in the previous one in single it was 180 volt and beer and 250 volt and beer. When you are talking about douleX or double, then you will just multiply by two. You can see one, two. So instead of 180, it will be 180 plus 180. It will be 360 volt and beer. And 250 double the value. So this is the difference between them. Its IB is exactly the same, and the wer proof exactly the same for double socket. And when we say normal sockets, when we say normal, this indicates that it takes its own power from the main electrical supply, not from UBS and not from an emergency source. It takes its power from normal electrical power from the grid. This one here, for example, you can see here a double here. This is a weather proof, put double socket, and this one you can see double socket to put weather proof. It's a simple auto cat. Instead of having this shape like this for a single, the double will just be two like this. And for the weatherproof, exactly the same, but just WB. Okay, so I hope you now understand the difference between a single and double socket. Just one important part here for single and doblex or single and double sockets. For the NEC code in this article specifically, it says that if a receptacle outlet, shall be calculated at not less than 180 voltam pairs for each single or each multiple receptacles on one yoke. So one yoke here is like this. So the yoke the cover that you will have like this. Like this for one receptacle, if it contains, let's say, for example, it contains one single like this or it contains like this, one or two, we consider these two as a whole, 180 volt empire. However, if each one of these is on one separate yoke like this and another yoke like this, then you will consider each 1180 volt and pair. That is four receptacles. And when I say receptacles, I mean this one receptacles, this one, and this one, two receptacles and two receptacles. So when we say receptacles, less than four we will look at the yoke. If we have one yoke like this, then we consider all of this is 180 volta pare. If we have two yok, it means that these two together will be 3160 volta pare. Now, what if we have like this? Let's say on one yk two, like this, all of these will be 180 volta pair. So a single piece of equipment sist of multiple receptacles. This one is for 180 volta pair for each single or each multiple receptacles on one yk like this one, like this one, 180 volt apre. However, you can see that a single piece of equipment consisting of a multiple receptacle compressed of four or more receptacles. Okay? So one yk a single piece, one yoke like this one. Like this one here, this yk is consisting of four or more, you can see all of this for less than four. If it is greater than four equal to four, like this, for example, on one yk, then the NEC code say that each receptacle, each one of these will be considered as 90 volta and pair. So each one of these will be 90 volta and pair, 90 volta pair, like this. So I hope you get the idea. If you have less than four, you will look for how many yoke and each yoke is 180 volta bear. If you have one yoke and receptacles four or more, then you will do you will have to do like this. Another example for this like this one, you can see this is one yoke like this, one yoke right, how many receptacles, one receptacle. It's 180 volte pair. This is one yoke how many receptacles two. Again, one yoke less than four, less than four, then you consider it as one outlet or a single outlet. Now, what if we have three? Again, three less than four, again, 180 volte pair. What if you have four starting from four each receptacles is considered as 90 volt empire. So 1990, 1990 360 voltapre. This is for our friends in the US. Another thing that we have to make sure of when I'm talking about offices and when I say Dublx, I'm considering them. According to the NEC, I will consider that I have two separate Yok, okay? So when I say Dublx, I will consider them as two separate Yok, okay? For the IEC standard and other canards, when I say also Dublix, I mean that we have two outlets like this, okay? Two, this simple here because we are going to use this a lot in our offices. Here is another example as you can see, one yoke here, 180 volt and bear, two receptacles on one yoke, again, 180 volt and bear. You can see here how many one, two. We have two yoksO here and another one here. Each one is a separate yoke. This is 180 volta par and this one is 180 volt and pair. We don't say five because they are not on the same yoke. Each one is 180 voltare. This is exactly the same two separate yokes, again, 360 voltare. I hope you get this idea. Another type of socket is called a switcht socket exactly similar as what we did, except that it has a switch. You can see a single socket like this, but just with one switch in order to turn it on and off as you would like. This one is Dublix like this and it has two switches for each one. Another one is called UBS socket. What the difference between a normal socket, normal, again, normal means it takes from a normal power, normal source, which is the grid. When I say UBS socket, I mean that it takes from UBS supply or the UBS or uninterruptible power supply. So this is our source, a different panel. And if I say emergency socket, I mean that it takes from emergency panel, which is connected to a backup generator. So you have to differentiate between these different cases. You can see it exactly similar to normal sockets, but supplied from a UBS for critical loads like computers. Because, for example, in our office, when we are working in an administration building, we have to make sure that our computers doesn't even turn off at any time. So the power supply must be connected all the time to our computers. That's why for each desk, so if I am someone who is working on this desk, you'll find that we will have for each one, let's say this is the wall behind me, I should have a doubx normal and doublx from UBS. That is what we do. So each employee, as you'll see in the next lesson, each one we give it a normal doublx or double sockets, and UBS double sockets. Why do we do this? Because we have to connect this UBS to our computers so that if the electricity goes off, this computer keeps turning on as it is doesn't turn off. And how does it look like? Exactly like a normal socket, but it has a different color. Usually a red color like this one. This one, as you can see, you can see here one, two, three, and four, you can see four Opia sockets, two normal sockets, and here we have two telephone outlets. You can see different types, as you can see here. And each sample which we are going to use, again, these samples, and I have to mention this once more. These samples actually change from one company to another. So it depends on what company you are working with. Now, what about power sockets? These are different types of sockets which are used specifically for a certain machine. Similar to Ormat socket, but this one is given to just one separate circuit. So what I mean by this? So we will have in our electrical panel with a circuit breaker it will be connected to. So let's say this is line one or circuit number one. This one will give electricity to this dishwasher, for example, or washing machine only. So it gives two dishwasher and another one with a circuit breaker. Let's say L two in the panel for washing machine, another one for air conditioning, another one for blah, blah, blah, different loop. Okay. So each one, each heavy load, specifically with the one with motors and high rated equipment, we will have a separate socket for it. It can be 16 and paired, 20 pair 32 pairs. It depends on what exactly it depends on the power rating of the equipment, which we are going to add the socket for it. So this type of sockets which you will find in the plan with this shape, it used for machines with motors or hyrated equipment like washing machines, dishwashers, refrigerators, microwaves, hand dryers, et cetera. Now, first, we will start in our course or in our lesson, we will start with the normal sockets, the normal emergency UBS first, and then I'm going to add power sockets for these different equipment, okay? So when we are designing our circuits, we know that we have a panel like this and we say, Hey, we have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, for example, a panel with eight breakers, for example, each one is considered with a circuit, right? For example, the breaker number one is used to supply electrical power to, let's say, five luminars. And this one, this breaker is used to supply electricity to let's say five outlets. Okay? This one is used to supply electro pow to just one power socket. Each power socket is considered as one separate circuit, as we will see in the next lessons. Another type is called the three phase sockets. Now remember, each of these equipment which we have seen right now is a single phase. So what I mean by single phase, it takes. You'll find it usually have this 12b plus E, which means we have line neutral, which is for any single phase system, and we have E, which is our Earth, white earthing system. So we have three wires going to our sockets or our linears. Now, for a three phase, we will have not just one like this. We will have one, two, three. We will have a three phase, which is ABC or red yellow blue or whatever you would like to call it in your own country or your own standard. So we have a three phase system, and we add neutral to it, and we also add the earthing system. So we will have five cables or five wires going to our equipment. Now, of course, we don't usually use this. You will find it in hospitals and factories. And again, it depends on the rating of our equipment or rating of the machines. So let's delete this. So for example, you can see here this one has a breaker and you can see one, two, three, four, five, five because we have three phase neutral and the sing. Okay? And this is the plug in for the equipment which goes here and this one. Now, we don't usually add this except if I already know the rating of the equipment, and I know that I need a three phase socket. Now in the three phase socket, you noted that. Now, if you remember, each breaker will give us line, and we will have a neutral coming from our circuit, a neutral comma neutral between all of this. However, for a three phase system like this, we will take line RST or red yellow blue or the three phase ABC. The three phase will go to this equipment. It will become more clear in the panel schedule. Here is another shape for the same three phase sockets. And this is its own simple. 87. Mounting of Outlets and Tips: Hey, everyone, and welcome back. And this lesson, we would like to understand the different types of mounting of our outlets and some tips for you. So the first type is wall mounted socket. So the wall mounted socket is a socket which we install on our wall. So for example, as you can see here, it is usually mounted at height of 30 to 40 centimeters above the finishing floor level. So you will find this sentence here. A AffL means above finishing floor level. So after having the finishing floor, after adding everything, we measure from it 30-40 centimeters. This is using the SI units or the standard international units. You'll find that we put it at height 30-40 centimeters. Now, if you are from the US, this is corresponding to a typical value 12-15 ". That is the range. Again, there is no standard value in a code that tells you, Hey, you must put it at 12 " or 15 ". Okay? This is just a range which is a common practice. In wet areas, we put usually at 120 centimeters in wet areas like kitchens and TV sockets. Because if you have a TV which is on the wall like this, let's say this is our floor and this is our TV, you usually will not put the socket here at the height of 30 to 40 centimeters because the cable of this TV here may not reach the socket easily. That's why you will find that for TVs, we put it at a higher level, like 120 centimeter like this so that it becomes easier to connect our TV. Now, this is also according to the practical experience. Now, in the US, this one can be explained in a different way. We can say that, hey, if you have a kitchen like this, if you have a kitchen, let's say this is a floor, and this is the countertop here, the countertop here, you are not going to install it as a third centimeter. You want to put it higher than the countertop like this so that I can plug in my own microwave or any electrical device, okay? Because in the kitchen, we have a furniture, right? So we need to put this outlet at a higher level. Let's say 120 centimeters or you can measure from here 15-20 ". So for example, here, this is the values that we talked about before in the previous lessons and for the outlet corresponding 12-15 ". And this is typically you can install it at a 42 " or 15 to 20 " above the countertop. Now, another source which is from local law of the New York City, say that if you have receptacles or outlets in general, you will put it at a 45 centimeters or 18 ". Okay, close to this value of 30 to 40 centimeters, and you'll find that here, there are receptacles in kitchens. You can put it at 1 meter or 42 " like here or 150 millimeters or 6 " above the countertop. So you can see there is no actual standard or the value that is followed everywhere. It changes from one location to another and one company to another. So there is no actual value in the code that says, Hey, you must put it at 120 centimeters. This is just a practical experience or from experience in the practical field. Since, of course, the counter itself can be installed at different heights, right? It doesn't must have shouldn't have the same level. Now, another way, which is also used in the US, and it's very good in putting this if you would like to, if you have a finishing, if you have a floor like this before finishing, and I would like to know the height of the outlet or where I can install it. You'll find that the 16 ounce hammers are usually about 13 ". So what they do is that they do like this. They put here like this. This is 13 " long and say, Hey, this is the bottom at which we will have our outlet. Since this one is 13 " and after adding the finishing floor, you will reach approximately about 12 " for the height of the outlet. Okay, as you can see here. So this is a practical way for those who would like to install it for themselves, okay? Another type, which is floor mounted. Usually we put the sockets on our walls. However, there are some specific applications in which we have to put it on the floor. Now, of course, the floor mounted sockets are much more expensive since as you can see, the wall mounted is 20 for IB has an IB 20 and the IP 54 in wet areas. In floor mounted sockets, we need a higher IP 67 because it is installed on the floor, very dangerous location. So why do we do this? Because it is used in offices or mini applications in which we can or putting the sockets on the wall is not convenient. We will see this later when we add this in Autocad program or software. So this is an example of the floor mounted sockets. You can see sockets, and this cover can be closed anytime. And as you can see, this one is a cover for these sockets and telephone outlets, as you can see here. Similarly here, for example, you can have a desk, and under this desk, you will have UBS, as you can see, U UBS or UBS, as you can see, UBS F, UBS first, and S 21 or socket 21 or S here refers to the circuit 21 for power sockets. It depends again on the company you are working with and how they write these samples. So you can have a UBS and DX, normal sockets, as you will see when we do this in autocat. And this is that it's a shape or its formula inside the program or in the software autocat. You'll find that is looking like a box like this, and you can see two Dublx or two normal sockets and two UBS. Just one important part. This box here, which you can see here can be used for two different employees, okay? So if you have a desk, like this. Let's look at it in a different way. Let's say we have one sitting here on a chair like this and another one sitting here on another chair, and this is a desk here, and this is another disk here. We can take this one and put it between them like this. You will see what does this represent? You can see two normal sockets and two UBS sockets for this first one and two normal sockets and UBS sockets for the second employee. We will see this in autocat Now, another one is called the furniture mounted sockets, and this one has a lower IV 65 compared to the floor mounted. Now, this is again, more expensive than the normal wall mounted sockets. This one can be installed like this if we have a meeting room, a large meeting table, and you would like to put the sockets on the table so that everyone can connect it too. Instead of putting it on the floor, this is another option that you can do. Again, it can depend on the owner requirement and how much he can pay for this. It's on budget. Another one which you can find in the administrative buildings, which is the column sockets. Like this, it can be a standing column socket like this one, and it can has different sockets. You can see different configurations for sockets. Another one which is the trunking sockets, and I have seen this in hospitals and surgery rooms. You'll find it like this. So if a patient inside a hospital, you'll find here this one, this long one. This is a vertical trunking socket. You can see if you zoom in like this, you'll find here different outlets. You can see here outlet here. This is from UBS. It may be usually when it's read from emergency or UBS and one which is normal socket. Another one for it, it can be like this a horizontal trunking socket like this. It can contain different sockets, normal UBS and even an alarm or a bell which you can ring if you would like anyone to help you. Another type of sockets for mounting, it is sealing mounted sockets. Like this, it can be on the ceiling itself for different applications and it can be used to provide cables for CCTV systems or the Security cameras, et cetera. So as you can see, different types of sockets. Now, let's get to the job and see the important part in our course. So on this one, we would like to say, Hey, how I am going to distribute these sockets? So in order to distribute them, we have some rules which are going to follow. Again, this is for us to help us in the distribution. So the first step, very important is that distribution of sockets depends on the furniture of the building. So if we have the furniture, you know, where the desk, where the computers, we can design based on it, where should we place our sockets? And I have modified our plan and added some furniture so that it can help us understand how can I do this? For example, for each employee, a desk, we will add a DX normal socket and Dox emergence socket or from the UBS. Okay. Let's say this, for example. You can see here that this figure here. Or let's just do this. You can see this figure here, which you can see in our plan as we will see later. You can see we have here one employee here, another one here, another one sitting here, another one sitting here, and similar to this one. Now, these employees the wall is very far from them and each one has its own computer and maybe Brenner. What do we do? So we say, Hey, each one, I'm going to install for it a floor mounted box, a floor mounted box. Now, why this? Because this computer which is installed here, I can't just take a large cable and go all the way to the wall. It's pretty difficult for these employees. So instead of doing this, we are just going to do what we are going to do is simply that we are going to install a floor box like this one, you can see. It contains doublx normal from normal supply and doublx from emergency or UBS. Usually UBS not emergency. And as you can see, you can see in the circuit, you can see this one, which is UBS is supplied from a UBS panel, and as you can see, PB means a power panel. UBS FR means first. And you will find here this one here can be supplied from normal distribution port. Okay, great. Now, another part which I want to mention before I continue that normally in our project in our small project here in the office, we have a panel 41 panel for normal loads or normal distribution port, one, which comes from the electricity from the grid, another one which comes from emergency distribution port, and another one for UBS. Now, my own design which you are going to see that when I designed the lighting system, lighting I added lighting to this distribution port and the emergency distribution port. Now, when I do when I do the power circuits, you'll find that I put the power on the same distribution port and on the same UBS or emergency. It depends on what I'm going to do. So you can see we have one distribution port which will take both of the lighting and power, one emergency which will take them and UBS, which will take them. In reality, in reality, if you have a larger project, a larger plane, each floor is a larger plane. Now, you will find that the maximum number of number of circuits the total circuits of power and lighting, summation of all of this should not exceed 42, including spare circuits. So the 42 circuit is my own maximum value. In our project, the circuits will not reach 42. That's why I have added lighting and power on the same panel. In other projects like this one which I'm going to give you in the end of the course, I will add this file. You'll find that we have a power panel power panel, power panel. And we have, which is PP. And we have lighting panel, L P. And we have this, so we have two panels. Instead of one distribution port, we will have PBDB, another one LBDB. So one distribution port for power, one distribution port for lighting. Another one that you will have for emergency, you will have power power EDB, BB or LB, EDB, so another. So an emergency lighting panel, emergency power panel. So in some projects, we can divide them and similarly for UPS. It all depends on how large is the project. Okay, so again, in rooms without furniture. So in the previous one, we said, Hey, if we have Oces desks, we can now add based on the furniture. What if I have a room without furniture? According to my own code or country code and other codes, you will find that we add a normal socket every 3.6 meters. And the distance between each outlet and the wall is 1.8 meters. Now, let me explain that. Let's say this is a wall and this is a wall, and this is our wall, o between the wall and the outlet itself like this, are 1.8 meters. And between each outlet and the next one, we will put it at 3.6 meters. Okay, 1.8 meters and here between these two outlets, 3.6 meters. Now in the US, we can say 1.8 meters can be converted into six feet between the wall and the outlet. We should not, and this is very important. We should not exceed six feet between wall and the outlet. No more than six feet. Now for the corridors, so if you have a large corridor like this one in the plan, large corridor, we don't actually need sockets. However, we use these sockets for services. So those who have vacuum cleaner, those people who are working here and would like to clean this corridor, they need to block in the vacuum cleaner so that they can clean this corridor or do anything with electricity. That's why we put in the corridors between each socket, we can put it at a distance between them six meter, and this is from the same coat. Now, another room which you don't have great usage or people don't use them a lot or don't enter them a lot like stores, electrical rooms, service rooms, we can just add one normal socket close to the door and one on the opposite or just sockets here as a service to this room. Okay? Because people don't commonly go to this room. In public bathrooms, bathrooms that everyone goes in, we need power socket, this one for hand dryer, and we need a weatherproof, normal socket for services. And weatherproof here will be beside the sink or close to the sink so that people would like to block anything close to the sink itself, we can use it. In private bathrooms here in private bathrooms, like a manager bathroom, for example, we will just add weatherproof, normal socket similar to this one, but just one weatherproof without a power socket. We don't need any hand dryer. In kitchens, we can add at least two power sockets, and it can be more dependent on how large the kitchen is. And if we know the equipment inside the kitchen, it will be great as it will help us in identifying how many power sockets, and we can just add normal socket on each wall. Now, for TVs and computers, at least, let's say at our home, for example, I'm talking about a residential apartment. We have to add a Doblex socket for TVs and computers because each let's say TV we need a DobxY because one outlet for the TV and one outlet for the receiver or any other equipment. For computers, again, of course, we need more than one outlet, one for a computer itself or laptop and one for Bner or any other equipment. Now, this is important, again, so all of this helps us in identifying how many sockets in a room and how to add them. The next step is that wiring these sockets, we were going to wire them. And when we wire these sockets, we have to add we have to add them into circuits, right? We have to make them into circuits. So we say that each circuit has a maximum of 2000 volt and beer. This is according to my country code, 2000 volt and beer. And if I'm following the EC code, which is 250 volt and ber as I said before, then how many socks I am going to use 2000 volt and beer divided by 250 volt and beer gives us eight Outlet, each 1250. Now, what if I have a doublx? DoublX it means 2000. Divided by each one, 500 means four sockets in one circuit. So as a guideline for me, I can add eight normal sockets or four sockets on one circuit in order to not exceed the 2000 volt and bear mark or the southern volta and bear limit. Now here, as you can see, I don't consider any drating factor. I just assume that everything working at 100%. Now, however, if you are in the US, you are following the NEC code, right? So in the NEC code, we say that a 20 and birth circuit will not have more than ten outlets. So let me explain why this so first step is the 20 amber circuit 20 and pair. With a circuit breaker, 20 and pair. Okay? So the 20 abr circuit and we know that in the US, we are looking at a voltage, a phase voltage of 120 volt, phase voltage. So let's look at the power that can be provided by this circuit 20 and bare maximum and 120 volts. So 20 multi blood by 120 gives us 2,400 volt and pair. Great. Now, there's an important part here that in the US, since you are falling in C code it says that, hey, each circuit should not be loaded more than 80% of its maximum value. So it means that this is a 2000 front volt and B, this is the maximum value. So we should not load it by more than 80%. So if you take the 2,400 and multiply it by 80% to 1,400 volt and pair, and multiply it by 80% so that you don't load it more than 80%, you will get 1920 volt and pair. Now, how many outlets outlets? So we'll say, Hey, take this number and divide it by each outlet. And if you remember, in the previous slides, we said that each outlet for NEC or IEC we said that it is 180 volt and pair. So if you divide these two together, you will get approximately 10.66 outlet. So we approximate it to the smaller value since we don't exceed this limit. So it will be ten outlets as you can see here. So this number here, ten outlets include the durting factor. That's why when you design ten outlets and each 180 volt amber, you would exactly put a circuit breaker of 20 pairs. Here, after doing this, after doing this, 2000/250 gives us eight. And when I design the circuit for this, you will find that I add the d rating factor in the end 1.25 as a rating factor. So don't worry about the design of breakers. We will understand this later in the course. Now, another important part, hey, if you have a pack to pack sockets. So if you have a back to back socket, let's say, this is a room like this. And this is another room. And for example, I bought a socket here like this. And on the same location, I bought another socket here. So one socket for this room and one socket for this room, you can see the other back to back. So you should you should, according to the code, you should not boot them like this, except that if you have a gap of at least 15 centimeter. So this wall has a gap like this, and you want install this one like this and this one like this, and the gap is at least 15 centimeter, at least. Okay, you can then install them back to back. If it is not 15 centimeters, you have to what you can do on this location. In this case, you can add one like this and those are one away from it like this, not back to back. This helps you to prevent traveling of sound from one room to another because in order to do this, you will have to open a gap in the wall like this. And if you install this one, you have to open a gap like this. Okay? So let me explain this. So when you have a when you have a wall like this, you will have to insert this one inside so you will put a pox like this so you can install this outlet like this. Okay. So we have to bury this one or flash it here. And if you have another one like this, you will have also to open or barry here or open or create an opening inside the wall. So this opening here can reach each other and help the sound from one room goes to the other. So if one is talking here, the sound can reach to the other room. Okay? That's the whole idea. So instead of going through all of this hassle, all you have to do is that you can just push it away from behind this back to back so. 88. Adding Sockets to the AutoCAD Plan: Hey, everyone. In this lesson, we will start adding our sockets to our plan, and then I'm going to wire them. So the first step that you can see here, I have added a legend. I prepared it for this lesson so that we don't waste too much time. So you can see in this legend before this legend, we have our plan, the same exact plan in the lighting, you can see here, the same exact plan, but I just added more furniture like this because it will be in the original plane, which will come from the architect. This will help you understand what I mean by distributing these sacts. So the first step that you can see here, this is our plan, and as you can see the same location of the distribution port, distribution port first. This is for normal loads, and this is emergency distribution port for emergency loads. In the same exact location, it doesn't change because it is the same panel port that we are going to take power from it. Now let's look at the samples from the legend. So we have normal distribution panel as before, like this, like the same one, emergency distribution panel, and UBS panel. So we will first take this UBS panel like this, and I'm going to add it to our plan like this. To make it more clear for you. Okay? So this is the first step. So the three panels here, let's just take this one too. Or let's take this one and copying or scap to prevent copying anything else and go here like this. And we will call this one or this friend here. UBS distribution pod first, like this. So you can see one from emergency, one for UBS, and one for normal routes. Great. Now let's look at our samples. Now, let's look carefully here. Number one, this is a single socket, single normal socket. And you can see P plus E means two phase or line and neutral plus s. So we have three wires or three cables, three wires, three cables, one for line, one or the phase, one for the neutral, and one for the earthing system. It works at a 50 Hortsen 220 volt, and this one has a rating of 16 and pairs. Now, similarly for double socket here, the same exact simple, but just two lines indicating double socked. Now let's look at these two. Here, this one, this simple representing the same but fit from emergency source. This one is exactly the same, but fit from UBS supply. Now, exactly for double one from emergency and one from UBS. Then you can see here the same exact samples, this like this and this one like this one, however, weather proof, exactly the same, but weather proof. Finally, we have a floor mounted group box like this one. You can see here double socket, normal socket, and double UBS sucked. You can see Doblx normal socket and Doblx emergency socket. Or you can call it UBS sucked like this, UBS sucked, okay because you are going to take it from the from the UBS supply. Okay, great. Let's make this one, add here in the end dot like, Okay. Okay, so let's start joining our system. So let's go with the easiest one number one. For the auxiliary transformer rooms here, these two rooms, I don't want to add any kind of sockets. Now, you may ask me why? Because I don't want anyone or any normal person to enter this room because we have a transformer here, and this transformer is working, and some idiots touch this transformer, they will die, okay? So I don't want anyone to enter this room. So I will not add any kind of sockets here to prevent anyone from accessing this room. This one is not easily accessible to anyone, okay? Now for the store, we said that the store is also a place in which not many people enter it. So what I'm going to do is that I'm going to add a socket here and another one, let's say, here. That's it. One normal socket here because it is not an important location. So I don't need to add much. Maybe I can add one here like this, one on this wall like this. Okay. And one here, like this. Now, how we can rotate and add it here or we can simply align like this, align, select the object and enter, and then select the first point. And the destination, let's make it here like this near to the same switch, okay? If you want to eat precisely, it will be on the same switch like this, end. No, don't scale it. Okay. Okay. Let's here, rotate, Okay. Okay, rotate like this. It rotate around this specific point like this. Like this. Okay, this one is aligned. What we can do that I can take this one, copy like this, take it like this, and then rotate like this, but I will activate orthogonm so that I can do it like this. Then I can delete this one and move this one like this. Okay? Deactivate or signal, and we can put it like this, okay? So one here, one here, we can put this one far away. We can dit, and we cannot edit. Both of them are possible, okay? So we can add it here like this. Okay? So one on this wall, one here, one here, one here. Another thing what you can do is that we can make these samples much smaller, okay? So we can, for example, scale like this, by this point and make it, let's say, by 0.3 like this or 0.4, like this. Okay, it became very small. So let's get it back. So let's select it. Again, scale. This is the base point, and let's make it 0.6, for example. Let's see. Okay, 0.6 is very reasonable. Scale select the same best point and make it 0.6, so that all of them became the same. This one also scale this point and 0.6, like this. Okay, now, we have this room for offices. Number one, I need another one like this friend. Now, you may ask me why? Because we are going to use this at a service sucked for this office room. So what I mean by this? If someone entering from here and would like to clean this office, we can use this one so that it can clean this office. You can also add another one if you would like, let's say, here, instead of back to back, I can add one here also as a service, one here. We can take this one like this. We can mirror, let's say here around maybe this line like this. No, don't erase it. Move. If eight, and let's look at the room. We can add it here like this. Okay. So that if someone is cleaning can use here or here or even here, we can add another one here, copy like this. Like this one here, like this and skip here, rotate around this point here, F eight, so that we can make it exactly like this. Move it upward like this a little bit. Okay. Okay, so we have one here, one here, one here. Okay, very reasonable. Okay? For this office here, we need to add some. Okay? What I mean by this, you can see someone is sitting here and would like to add for it floorbx consisting of this Dobxnrmal and Doblx UBS and similarly here, similarly here, here and here and here. So you have one, two, three, four, for each one. So what I'm going to do is that I'm going to take this one here, copy like this. You go all the way here. Okay, you can see it is pretty large. Don't worry about it. We can simply click like this. Okay? And we can scale it like this. Let's say 0.8. Let's see how it looks like, okay? Okay. We can. Okay and move. We can move it like this. Okay? So, this one, let's look at it away. Okay, very reasonable. Okay? So this one here, which you can see is a one. Okay, let's just a little bit rotate around this specific point like this. Okay? So you can see this for this employee, and we will do it for the other one. Okay. But first, let's just select all of this furniture here. And let's do this, lock it so that it doesn't make any noise with us, okay? Then we can copy like this. Don't worry. I will not be copied. Okay? And we can do another one here, okay, like this. But I'm just gonna rotate it, rotate around this specific point, like this. And move it like this, okay? So we can add it like this here. Great. So we add it for this too. Now I'm going to repeat this process like this, copy. We can select this as a piece point and F eight, like this. Okay. Let's just select it once more, copy, and select the piece point, for example, here, like this. Okay? Okay, let's make the second one here. You can see close to each other, another one here like this for these two, and for these two, like this. Okay, like this. And like this, okay? So you can see we add one, two, three, four, we add it for each one. This one has two Double socket from UBS, Double socket for normal panel. Okay? Mm mm mm mm. So we finished it. Now I'm going to do for this two here. So you can see we have similar to this one, we can do like this and copy it like this. There is one thing which I forgot to do, but no problem at all. Okay, the office moved with us. No problem. Just take this one and let and then select it from here. And look at. Let's see if any of these are logged with us. Okay. Now skip and then select all of this and rotate. And this around, let's say here, F eight, like this. Okay. So we have one, two, three. Okay. Now let's just try moving it more. Let's say, Okay. Like this. So we have four of these, okay? So we have two here and another two here. So let's move this. Select all of this and move. Move it a little bit like this. Okay. So we can between them like this. Okay. So this one will have these two, and this one will have these two, okay? Nice. Okay? Okay, in front of it. Okay. Let's look at this two. Okay, we can move this one too. Like this one. Okay? Move and move it a little bit like this and move these two, a little bit like this, okay? Like this. Okay? This one will have these two. This one will have these two. Okay? This one will have two. Okay, great. Now we will add also here for this room. We will add one for service. We can add it here actually, like this. Take this one and copy. If e like this, this, similar to the location of the switch. Okay. And we can add another one, let's say here. Okay, Lens. Okay. So let's say from here, we said between them about F eight, about 3.3 0.6 right, if I remember, 3.6, yep. So until this location here. So I'm going to copy this, like this and go down here. So the distance between them are 3.8. And we can another one here so we can copy it like this. Like this. Okay, so this 11 here, if it's working here or here, this is very good enough for this room for this office room. So we have here. So we have one here on this one, so we can add it on. So we need one here beside the door, first like this. Okay. And we need here for this friend here. We are going to add for it UBS and this is a wall mounted. This one is wall mounted. So I'm going to take UBS and normal, copy it. Take it like this. Go all the way here and don't forget to scale them, same as others. Let's make it point here, 0.8, like this. Okay, so that it becomes more reasonable. Let's look at it. Okay? A little bit higher. So we can size them more, scale. Let's say here, 0.8 again. Okay, very reasonable size, great. Now I'm going to take this one. Okay, a line like this line, first point. Take this one, add it here, and take the second point. And let's say dt here. And let's see. Okay? So you can see it aligned now, align for this one, too. This point, go here and second point go here and Enter, Enter, like this. Okay, so we added here, let's push it a little bit, let's activate the orthogonal like this and make them beside each other. You can see we added for this one, one for UBS and one like this. Similarly, we can copy this and add for this other employee like this. You can make it here. And for this one, um we can do another step. We can mirror like this and like this, No, and then let's copy this M and deactivate Octagonal and add it here like this beside this one. Like this. Okay? So we added one here, one here for this one, for this one. Okay, great. Okay. We added one here at the service. Now this is enough for this room. Okay, what about the meeting room? The meeting room here, we can add one with the UBS here. Okay? We can add it like this. Copying like this. Like this one here. Okay, one for with a UBS and one without, okay? And then for these people, actually, you can add one, two, three, you can add three floor mounted, or you can simply add one here, one here and one here. Okay? Maybe you can do as you would like, okay? So for example, because this one here can connect easily like this and here can connect easily here, we can add one here and one here. So what I'm going to do is that I'm just going to do this. So I'm going to take this one Remember that this is all design. Everyone has its own point of view, okay? So at least on each wall, you will add, like this. Since we are talk about with small rooms, you can see I don't have even two measure. A socket on each wall is actually enough. We don't need here UBS, because we don't have usually computers in the meeting room. That's why I added just one Doblx UBS, or even one. Instead of Doblx, actually, we can take this two like this. Sorry, this one and this one and decpy it like this. We can actually make it a single, not a Doblx. A single will be enough, actually. And take this one and this one and scale it like this by 0.8. Dead this two. We can make this two rotate. Let's make it like this. If eight like this, and we can move. Let's first select this object. Move, take it like this. And the other one can be beside it. Move without orthogonal and take it here like this because one is enough? We have one, two, three, we need to add one here, I can add one side here, this one. I can copy this easily copying like this. Like this. Okay, so you can see, hmm. Very good, okay. This one is finished. This one is also finished, this one finished. Now we have the corridor and this one. So you can see the corridor, we can do what we can do is pretty easy. Remember, not usually we don't use this corridor, so I can add one here, one here and one here. That is pretty enough. You don't need to add more. And if you'd like to check, you can simply copy this like this, okay? Select this one. For example, you can add one on the corridor here like this, and you can simply draw a line from here like this and activate orthogonal and then go like this, 3.6, okay. So 3.6 is approximately like this, okay? So what I can do that I can just drag it like this, move like this, these two like this. So we can add one here, one another, one here. Let's look at it like this. Okay? All the way until here. And then you can add actually here we don't need to add. If you move this one like this. Sorry, there's one problem that I have made that we said the distance between them is 6 meters, not 3.6 like the rooms. So I'm going to take like this and go all the way like this. 6 meters, you can see 6 meters all of this. Okay? So you can see we can move this one like this. We can move it like this and we can actually take these two and move it like this, make it more convenient, like this. So the distance between 6 meters here you don't have to add anything here. So we can actually add another one here, and this is completely enough, as I said in the very beginning. So I can add this one coping like this, if eight and add it here. Now for the kitchen and the WC, let's say this is a private room or let's say a public because there is no other WC except this one. So I'm going to use this weatherproof one like this, a single socket is enough, actually, go to the WC where exactly. Let's make it close here. Let's make it here, close to the rotate. Close to the door of eight like this and scale it. Scale like this, 0.8, and drag it here. Like this F eight and put it here close to the door near the switch is here, you can add it here with the switch, or you can add it here in the different location. Okay, better we should add it here actually. But you can see that this switch size is pretty big. So let's look at the size of the other switches. Okay, it seems pretty big to the switch. So let's move it like this. Okay, pretty big compared to the other switches. Okay? So let's take this one and scale it take it from the exact same point and make it like this, okay? And then move. Let's see how it looks like. Okay? Yeah, it will be enough. Okay? So we can move it like this, rotate. It's better to add the switches and the sockets with each other on the same location. You can add it actually here. Okay. So we added one for this one. Here, we need a hand dryer power socket, but we will discuss this in another video. So we are focusing now on the normal sockets which we use. Now for the kitchen, we need weatherproof like this. We can use a single like this one, close to the door or not this one. Let's use this one instead. Copying, go like this with the kitchen, here. Okay. And we can add another one, let's say, on this side here. So let's do this, rotate around this point like this, make it F eight, so it will become easier, move and put it here on this wall would be enough. We can move it a little bit more up like this, like this. Okay. And here, we can add another one, actually, no problem at all. We can say one on each wall like this because maybe we can need a lot of this, okay? Like this. And if eight, let's make it here, for example, okay? Like this. Okay. So this would be enough for this kitchen. So now what I'm going to do is that I'm going to add them on one layer called sockets, which we could have done this from the very beginning sockets like this. Okay? And let's make its own color to be, let's say, yellow, for example, like this. Okay? And what can I do easily that I can go here, select this, this one, and this one. All of these like this and right click and select similar. So it will select all of the similar simples inside our plan, and then I'm going to add them on sockets layer like this, okay? Now, in this example, till now, we have done all of our sockets distribution in the rooms. 89. Wiring of Normal Sockets: Hey, everyone. In this step, we are going to do so we added all of these sockets. Now the next step is that we are going to do the wiring of our system. Now remember each socket, each single socket is considered as 250 volt and beer and each socket here or each double is considered as 500 volt and pre. So let's start with the first one, L A layer, new sockets or normal Normal. Let's make it normal sockets, wiring. So what I mean by this, those which are taken from the main supply. And I will give them the green color, for example, okay? Like this. And then what I'm going to do that I'm going to use a polyline, like this polyline. And then I can how can I connect these together? We can connect it from here, like this from this point and go parallel to the wall like this or like this, go like this and like this. Or you can touch it from this part here, this line here. I prefer doing this, so I can do like this, okay? So I can simply take like this. Orthogonal, we are not on the Sackets layer, we are talking about the normal sacs wiring, this one. Okay, there is one thing that happened here actually. Normal sockets wiring, we will make it green like this. Let me just change it A layer and make this one as green. Okay. So we can do it like this. We have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, and eight. So we can take all of this on one, one circuit. So I can take it like this, pull your line like this and go like this. Okay, skip, control the Z, pull your line like this. Take it like this, go down here and and go like this, and go like here, okay. Like this. Like this. So you can go like this. I'm trying to find the best best wiring, the shortest distance, okay. So I'm trying to find the best way to reach all of these. Okay? So we can go to this one. Okay, so we can go like this. Go like this, like this and like this. Okay, let's say, Enter. So let's look at this. So we go like this, all the way like this, mm, mm. Okay, so one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight. So all of this on one circuit. Now, how can I say that this is circuit number one or two or three? So what I'm gonna do that I'm going to copy this? Pretty straightforward. So I'm going to say Control C like this. Okay. And go here. We use l1l2, line number 1992. Now here, remember that I am saying that here. I am using even numbers, okay? Because I said that in my design, I'm gonna rotate like this, okay? Let's see. Okay, very good. It is a main distribution port exactly and make this one L two. Now, why L two? Because we said before that we will use even. We will use even four power circuits and odd for lighting circuits. It is not a standard. You can do all of them, L one, L two, L four and continue or you can make lighting even as odd numbers and the power circuits as even numbers as you would like, as you would like, okay? So that is circuit number one. Now let's look at another one. We have two, four, six, seven, and eight. So we can add all of these on one circuit. Let's see. So I'm going to go here and say here, polyline, polly line like this and connect from here, like this. We go parallel to the wall, okay? Okay? So we go parallel to the wall. Now, here I'm going to go like this. Okay. Like this one, and we want to connect it to this one here. So I'm going to go like this. Go like this. Okay. Can I go like this and enter again and go like this. Okay, and enter. So we'll have from here, go all the way like this, like this away from this UBS. So we have two, four, six, seven and eight. Okay, great. Now I'm going to copy this and I will call this L two. F eight, were the nearest one. This one is the nearest one. So I'm going to get here, skip and rotate with this one, too. Okay. I can do actually another thing which I will show you right now. So it's pointing at this panel here, okay? Mm hmm. Let's just select all of this, move from here. Like this. We want to want it away like this. Et's mix smaller like this that give us some space. Okay. So this one means DBF, L four, L four. Okay. So we have done FL two, FL four, pointing at this one. Now let's look at this. We have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, Okay, so we can add eight on a one circuit like this. We can say polyline. Sorry. But before poline, we can select this one. I will tell you what I want to do and log this so that it doesn't make a headache to us. For this one, we can go polyline like this, starting from here, if eight, again, we can go like this until we reach the first one can go like this. In vertical lines. And then we can go like this. Okay? So let's enter again and go like this. Okay. And then we want to reach this one, so we can do it like this. Okay? From here like this. Okay, so we can in order to pass this part, we can go like this actually go like this. Okay. So we have one, two, three, four, okay? Just move this one a little bit down. Like this. Okay. And then pull your in again. Okay. Can move it like this. And move like this. Okay, we can move all the way like this, okay? And then go here. Okay. Okay, so we went like this one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, and eight. Okay? So we need this final one. We will go like this, okay? And like this, okay. Okay, so we added one, two, three, four, four, five, six, seven, and eight. Okay, so we added eight on one line, and we can call this one. Copy like this and clothe this orthogonal. Wear the nearest one. This one is the nearest one. So I can go here and say number six like this. Okay, skip. Wear this one here. Okay, it's poting a little bit. So let's push it upward. This one here. Okay, like this. Yeah, it's pointing at it. Okay. And let's see if everything is fine. Okay. Now, this one can be easier actually. Why didn't I do this? We can push it like this, okay? Like this. Okay? Um hmm hmm. Okay? This one, too can be, like, um like this, okay? Okay, trim like this as if it enters and goes out. Okay? Mmm. Okay, for this one here or this office first, let's see this one. So we have one, we have eight. And we have eight, and we have eight, and we have eight. So each one of these can be on one line alone. So I can just let's see first. So you can see these two sockets and the two are together. And these two are together gives us eight and this two, here we have double and double. Each double is 500, right? 505 hundred. Okay, so all of these together gives us one line because we have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight. So each of these is one complete line alone. So that's what I'm going to do is I'm going to click on them, polyline, and we can simply like this. We can connect this one F eight, like this. Connect it like this and enter again and like this. We don't need to enter the box, okay? Like this. So it means that this one, let's make it a little bit more convenient like this, okay? Let's see. So it means that this one, these four. So we start from here, enter here, and just one another point. Okay. Sorry, put your line, enter here like this and like this, ok? So it means that this one is connected to this one and this one connected to this one and this one connected to this one. Okay? And then we can start from here. So I can copy this. Copy like this from this space point F eight, and then go all the way. Let's make it here. Okay? Oh yeah, make it here. Like this. And we can take this one, move a little bit up here like this. Okay, and then what I'm going to do is that I'm going to repeat this for this one. So I'm going to select these two, select this one and this one and copy. Okay, from the same Base point, let's say this base point is here. I'm going to go all the way down here to the same exact point like this. And skip. You can see we added here and here and here as you can see here. Now, this one is FL eight like this, and this one will be number ten. Okay? Yeah. And connected them together. Now we need to trim, or not trim. Yeah, yeah, trim. So we need here line like this if e. So this path through this one, okay? So we can trim any one of these, okay? Enter and enter again like this, okay? And enter, trim, take this one and this one. So it means that this one path through this one like this. We need here another one. So I'm going to line like this, enter, Enter again, like this, okay? And enter and trim. Did it trim this and trim that like this, okay? We can push it like this and move this one to the metal like this, okay? Just to become more convenient. Okay, so we made here, made this, okay? Mm hmm FL eight and FL ten. Now, we need to do the same for this one here, too. So each box will also be like this. I'm going to do this, pull line, go like this. Enter, Enter, and then another poly line here. Okay, and enter again. And another poly line here and enter. You can see here we have one, two, three, four, four double sockets, all of them on one friendly layer. Okay. Then we will copy this. Copy from this base point. This is number ten. So the next one will be 12. Okay? Make it like this. Okay. Make this 112. And let's copy them too. So I can click like this and copy from this specific point where this one, like this. And then go like this. Okay. And okay. Okay. Go to the same exact point like this and go here to the same exact point. Okay, so 12, and this one will be 14. This one will be 16. And this one will be 18. 18. Okay. Now we need all of this are completed. All of this are completed. Okay? This one is also done. This one is done. The only one remaining these three. So what I can do that I'm going to collect polyline, go eight, go like this, try as you can to be parallel to the wall. Then again, you can go from this point here like this. Like this. Like this. Okay? So we go from here. These three are just on one lovely plane. Okay? Let's rotate and make it just if e. We want to make it look at here, like this. Okay. And just take this one and move it here. This one and move it a little bit here, this one, and move it a little bit here. This 12. Then what I can do that I can select this, select that, and this 12, delete all of this and just copy our friend, copy from this exact point like this. This. Okay. Now, of course, not all of them will be pointing at it. You'll just control Z. We can rotate it around this point like this, pointing at this friend here, push this one here. This one is exactly like it. Rotate around this point, y it pointing at this, okay. Like this. Okay, push this one, two, think this. Pretty good. This one is the one which is remaining. This is the closest one. So I can say, which one this one can be copied like this. 12, 14, 16, 18. So this one will be t. Okay, push it like this. Okay? And eall this one number two. Okay, so we have done the distribution port, okay? Everything. Yep, everything. Okay. The only thing remaining is the emergency, right? 90. Wiring of UPS Sockets: I'm going to create a new layer. Like this emergency sockets wiring or not emergency, actually. All of these are UBS. So say UBS and select it and make the color as let's make it red. And the line, let's choose a Let's this one. Let's see phantom. Okay, now we don't have any OBS here. Let's start with here. You can see one, two, three, four, exactly similar to it. So what I can do is that I can say polyline, okay? PyyerPyayer, and polyline. Let's see. Y dashed. Kay orthogonal, like this. And then enter again. So we connected these two. Now we will connect these two like this. Okay. And enter again to connect these two here. Okay, so we have here eight. Now we need also for eight. Let's do it here. So we will select this copy. And we go down here like this. Make the swan. Since the UBS, let's call it one for the UBS, UBS, distribution port first. You can see here, UBS distribution board first. Okay, L one and move the swan like this. Okay. Move if e deactivated. Let's make it here. Yep and make it up here, UBS, DBFL one. Okay. Now I'm going to select this like this. Select this one, this one, two, and then I'm going to copy it from where let's say this point. Like this and go here with the same exact point and go here to the same exact point and go here to the same exact point. So let's see. So let's move this one drag it like this. Okay? If eight like this, this one can we have one friend here, so we can drag this one a little bit more Kai Okay. A little bit like this. Take this UVSFe and put it up here. We can put it up here. It may be confusing for some people, so I'm going to do it like this. Okay. So we can push it a little bit down. And we can we can just select all of this and move. And let's push it away like this from our friend UBS, like this. So it becomes clear what I'm talking about. Okay, so this one here, this UBS, go up here, UBS is here, so let's rotate it, skip rotate it rotate. Okay, push it like this. Take this one down here. So this one doesn't intersect anything. This one doesn't intersect. This one, we can push it a little bit away like this. If it again, this one should be moved up. If it Okay. Okay, no intersections. UBS FL one, we can say this one, UBS FL two, we don't have any lighting on it, so I can just call it as I did right now, LL three and UBS four noise. So let's just see what we did. Okay, mm hmm. So we did all of these, these UBS sockets, okay? So we have one here, and we have for this one, one, two, three, four, one, two, three, four, okay? Okay. And we have one, two. So we have two, four, six, and eight. Okay, awesome. Okay. So what I can do right now, I will show you right now so we can say bully line like this. We can go from here like this, if eight and go like, that's okay. Go all the way down here. Kai, we can go like this. So what I did this one and reline and go to this one like this. Then I'm going to go loin and try again another loin and trim Okay. Mm mm mm. Or we can also add here. Line, not list line one like this, enter into again. And trim and trim this part, okay? Okay. This one here Mmm. Okay. This one can be pushed a little bit for, like, like this. Okay? And we can actually trim like this. So it here goes to the next one, okay? Mm hm. Okay. Okay, in. Try again. Trim. I Okay. We can also pass this column here, pull your line line between this point and this specific point. Okay? Right. So we did like this. Okay, we trimmed the sports. We have one, one, two, three, here, two, four, six, seven on this panel. So how many did we reach right now? We reach a UBS. Number four, okay? Number four. So I can do a eight like this. Okay? And what I'm going to do actually to make it easier, just read this and take this one, copy it. From this point and put it here. And I think this M and UBS five, right, five. Save, UBS FL five, okay? Mmhmm. Okay, everything is finished here. The only part which is remaining is this friend here. These two here. So I'm going to do them quickly. Okay, we can simply do like this. Let's do it quickly. Pull the line like this. Okay? So this one. Is connected F eight to the swan and to the swan. Then again, between these two, like this. Like this and once more between these two like this and enter. So we connect this to this and this to this, and this to this. Okay. Now, let's do it again for these two. Enter. Like this quickly. Okay. Enter again between these two like this, enter again between these two like this. Enter, and then I'm going to copy this. Copy of E for this one, and for this one, too. And then I'm going to go to this UBS, copy it. So let's see, I think that we reach it one, two, three, and four. And this is number five, yes, number five. And this one number six, okay? And this one is number seven. So number six, okay? And number seven. Like this. Okay, and safe. Okay? So now we added all of our friends. We made the wiring. We made everything. I think we have already done everything what we need right now. So I hope you benefit from these lessons and see you in the next part. 91. Introduction to HVAC System: Hey, guys and welcome to our course for HVAC systems for electrical engineers. This part of our course for electrical design, we will focus on the HVAC system. We would like to understand the different components in an HVAC system for electrical engineers. Now, you may ask me, why do we care about HVAC systems? Because as an electrical engineer, we would like to provide electricity to different components in each VAC system. For example, we will have fan coil unit, we will have air handling unit, we will have heaters, we will have pumps, we will have chillers. You'll see different components in an HVAC system. All of these needs power from electrical panel. They need circuit breakers, they need cables, they need disconnected switch. So all of these, we need to understand what are the components, and then we are going to design each of these electrical parts. So in this lesson or in the first one, we will start discussing the meaning of an HVAC system. What does it mean or the abbreviation of HVAC? So HVAC here is abbreviated as heating, ventilation, and air conditioning. So an HVAC system does three functions, usually, especially in a commercial building or in a large building like a hotel or anything. So for example, heating it provides heat. If you would like to in winter, for example, if you would like to heat the rooms in a building, then you can use the HVAC system to provide this. Second, the function, which is ventilation. And what I mean by ventilation is bringing a fresh air into the building or the commercial building. Or administration building, air conditioning, providing cooling to our building. So heating in winter, air conditioning or cooling, which is used in summer in order to cool the building, and ventilation is bringing fresh air to the building. Now, for example, if you look at your own house, we will find that we have an air conditioning system. An air conditioning system, one of each types is the split unit. As we will see in the next lesson when we talk about types of EgivAC system. This one is split unit means that it is the EchevaC itself or the air conditioning system is split. And what I mean by split the indoor and outdoor units, or it is split into two parts. You will see that we will have an indoor unit. And an outdoor unit. Now, let's see how an air conditioning is used to cool down a room inside a building or any residential place. So how does an air conditioning work or an EC work? So let's start. So we have the first component, which is called the compressor and condenser. The compressor and condenser, which is in the outdoor unit, outside of your own house, when you open the window and look outside, you will see an outdoor unit. This outdoor unit contains a compressor and condenser. So let's start what I mean by this. This is the outlet or the outdoor unit, as you can see here. Now in this outdoor unit, we will have a refrigerant, and what I mean by refrigerant is that a liquid or a gas that is used in air conditioning system or refrigeration systems. So you will have to understand that the concept of cooling in air conditioning system is exactly the same concept that we use in refrigerators in your own house. So first, we will have a liquid or a gas dependent on what we are talking about or what state we are talking about. We call it the refrigerant, the one that is used to cool the system. We have different ones or 22. All of these are different refrigerants dependent on the manufacturer and the application. Now, one of the common ones which you will have, which you already know about is called the freon, freon, freon, the free yon. So the freon is used as a refrigerant call to call a room or anything. Let's see how it does work at the very beginning. So in the outdoor unit, we have the compressor. So let's see. So we have in the outdoor unit, we have a compressor here, which will take the refrigerant. So it takes the refrigerant like this. And what does it do to the refrigerant like freon or any other refrigerant? What does it do? It compresses it. So it compressor, what does it do? It compresses this liquid or this one. So when you compress this one, what will happen to it? As you know from physics, when you compress a gas, it will become its temperature will increase and its pressure will increase. So when we do this, for example, the temperature of this freon or this resent will increase to around, for example, an 80 Celsius degrees or 176 fahrenheit. So that is the first component, a compressor that compresses this refrigerant and path it through at a very high temperature to a condenser. You can see these tubes, which is the condenser, and we have a fan around it. You'll see that if you look at the outdoor unit, you will see this fan, which is exactly this one. So what will happen is that this hot this hot refrigerant, it is hot, yes. After compressing it, as you can see here, we call it down by using a fan. So this fan will dissipate this heat to the outdoor or outside to the atmosphere. So this fan here, as you can see, it just dissipates and cool down this refrigerant after it is compressed. So, for example, if it is entered as an 80 Celsius degrees, it will cool down to, let's say, for example, 50 Celsius degrees. And when it cools down, since it is compressed at high temperature, it is entering in the form of gas. So the refrigerant after the compressor as its temperature increase, it is converted into gas. Now, when it cools down, it is turned to a liquid as it condensed. That's why it's called a condenser because it candnse the gas into liquid form. Now, what will happen next that we will have a high temperature, lower lower temperature, but with a high pressure as before, nothing changed at all. So as you can see that the hot high pressure refrigerant gas when it flows to the condenser, it gives its heat out outside air using this fan and starts to cool and the condensed convert from gas into liquid form. Now, the temperature drops to, for example, 50 Celsius degrees. So you have a compressed gas that is cool down to 50 Celsius degrees, and it is still compressed. It's still compressed. Now, what's the next step. The next step is that we have two components indoor called the expansion valve and the evaporator. So what happens exactly? So when you look at this one, this liquid entering here like this, like this, this one is the 50 Celsus degrees liquid form of our refrigerant. Now, we have this valve, this valve, what does it do? When this one enters and goes out of it, its pressure will be reduced. It expands this liquid. So since it was already compressed, when we expand it, what will happen by logic? When you expand this liquid, its temperature will drop significantly. So you will see that its temperature will drop to around 5 Celsius degrees. Now, you will ask me how it drops to 5 Celsius degrees we already when we. For example, what happens here that before it compresses, let's say it is 30 Celsius degrees. Now, you compressed it right, so it goes to 80 Celsius degrees, and then we call it down to 50 Celsius degrees. However, remember, it is still compressed. Now, when you make it go to the expansion valve, it turns from the compression into expansion as if it is before this stage. However, it is at a lower temperature. Instead of going back to 30 Celsius degrees, it will go now to a lower temperature, let's say 5 Celsius degrees. You have a cool refrigant. This is the principle that we use in the refrigerator and our air conditioning system. Then what will happen? Then this liquid, which is 5 Celsius degrees, what we are going to do is that we provide it to the evaporate. And ask me what is exactly an evaporate. So we provide it like this, so we enter it long tubes which you can see like this. This is what we call the evaporate. Why it is the evaporator, you'll understand right now. So we have here a 5 Celsius degrees cool liquid, let's free on A cool liquid of freon. And then what we are going to do is that we are going to have here fans here inside this indoor unit. This is the indoor unit which you always see in your own room that gives you cold air. So what will happen is that we have some fans here that will drag air warm air, warm air from your own room and pass it through this cool liquid. Pass it through this cool fence, okay or this cool evaporate. Now, when this warm air passes through this one, its energy or its heat energy will be transferred to this freon, right? So this warm air will cool down, and then we can pass it back again to the room as a cool air, which you always see in your own room. So the principle is here that we drag, we absorb pull a warm air from our room, pass it through this evaporator, and then it cools down and gets back to the room. Now, you will ask me why is this called an evaporator? Because we have here a liquid, we have here a liquid. Freon, let's say at 5 Celsius degrees. Now, when warm air passes through it, it transfers its energy or its heat energy to this freon, right? So its temperature will start increasing, the freon will start increasing until it converts into gas once more. By the effect of warm air inside our room. So you can see it converted from liquid form to gas form or evaporates. That's why we call this one evaporator because it converted it from liquid form into gas foam. So you can see that the refrigerant enter the evaporator, as you can see here, this evaporator and absorbs it from the room. The refrigerant will evaporate again and temperature can increase, for example, to ten sel degrees. All of these numbers can change again from one gas to another, one manufacturer to another. It is not standard. They are not standard values. Now after evaporating the refrigerant gas, we'll enter the compressor once more. So we have here a hot gas, hot gas of freon, and it will return back through another valve, get back like this to get back again to our compressor which will be compressed again and the cycle will be repeat. This is how a refrigerant or an air conditioning or a refrigerator works. This principle actually is used in almost every abeliance that uses the cooling principle. Now for the air conditioning system, this is a summary of what we have just said. You can see that we have a compressor that compresses gas. So we have here a cooler refrigent' very cool, a cool refrigerant. Let's say, for example, at a lower temperature, and then let's say negative nine degrees. Again, the numbers can change from one infection to another. All of these are examples. So we have this temperature here, and we pass it through the compressor which increase its temperature, you can see into gas form. And then using the condenser FN it will cool down. Hot air will go outside, and then its temperature will decrease. Let's say, for example, to 20 Celsius degrees. And then we will have the expansial valve that will expand this one since it is compressed and make it at a very low temperature. And then when it passes through the evaporator, its temperature will increase. Again, you can see from negative 18 to negative 9 Celsius degrees. So this is the cycle of air condition. Now, you may ask me so this is for cooling, right? Okay, this is for cooling. What about heating? Okay, I heating, we have in inside our air conditioning system. We have a reverse valve. We call this reverse valve. Now, what do you mean by reverse valve? In reverse valve, we reverse the cycle. Instead of giving after compressing the gas, we don't provide it to the condenser and release heat energy to the air. Instead, we provide it into the reverse direction. We want it to be hot gas going to this evaporateor. Okay? So we will have a hot gas here that goes directly to our room. So when we do this, we provide hot air to our room and we start cooling it down. So when we have a hot air, you will see that this expansion valve will be reversed. It will start reversing the process like this. So instead of going like this in our cycle, in our cooling cycle, we are going to do the reverse. We are going to go like this so that we can provide the hot air or hot gas to our evaporator, and then it will absorb all of the cold air from the room and heating it or increasing its temperature. 92. Direct Expansion System (DX System): Hey, everyone, and welcome back to the HVAC system for electrical engineers. In this part, we talk about the different types of HVAC systems. So the first type which we are going to discuss is called the direct expansion system or the DX system. So the direct expansion or direct direct or DX cooling uses the principle of thermodynamics transfer heat from one area to another through the evaporation and condensation of a refrigerant. Now, you may ask me what is even a direct expansion system? It is exactly the one we discussed before. Okay? You can see that remember the cycle which we talked about, how does an air conditioning work? In the previous lesson? It is exactly the same. This is the direct expansion system. In which we are calling in which we are calling using our freon or cold freon or our cold refrigerant directly to exchange with the atmosphere or exchange with the room with the air inside our room. In another system, we are going to do another thing that we are going to use, for example, a refrigerant or a freon in order to cool water and then using this water to cool rooms in a building. This is a chiller system, a different types of different type of an HVAC system. This one is called a direct expansion system. Now air conditioners, refrigerators and freezers using the DX cool in order to remove thermal energy from inside to outside. All of these use the same components that we discussed before inside an air conditioning system. You remember this cycle exactly the same when you compress the gas or refrigerant and then cool it down using a condenser by using a fan in the outdoor unit. And then bringing it in using the expansion valve, which will expand it and cool it down, and then using an evaporator to evaporate our refrigerant from the liquid form to gas form and exchange heat with our room, and the cycle repeats. This is exactly the one which we discussed before. Now let's look at each types. What are the DEXOsystems that we can see? These are some of the times which you can see in your own building or in different projects. So for example, we can have a window and ductless. Ductils it means that we don't use any duct in this system. So in the window type, which you may have seen before, in the window, we will have the indoor unit which contains the evaporator, and the outdoor unit which contain the tensator and compressor are attached to each other. One block inside the wall. We call it a window unit. Like this. Remember, inside this can be found in old homes. For example, you can have indoor unit, and this is the outdoor unit. They are stick to each other. This is what we call a window, and it uses the same principle which is the one which we discussed right now in the previous lesson, which is DX system or using the direct expansion system or direct expansion method. And this is another one. You can find it here, and the other one, you can see here there is a blag for this air conditioning system. And outside, you will find the outdoor unit behind it, stick behind it. So this is what we call a window without any kind of duct. Another one which can be found in modern homes or new systems other than the window type is a split systems. So the split system is that we can see in our house, in my own house and in many other house. You can find here that we have the indoor unit and outdoor unit. And why do we call it a split? Because you can see that it is not one block like window. In Window, we have the indoor and outdoor stick to each other, one block. However, in this type, the split system, the indoor and outdoor are split or they are separated from each other. Here is an example you can see here an air conditioning here and the outdoor unit. And if you look carefully at this drawing here, you will find that we have this weird box here. This weird box is our disconnecting switch, which we are going to discuss later how to design it. This disconnect switch is used to cut electricity from this air conditioning system or the air conditioning system in order to do maintenance on it. Another type of the ducts without any kind of duct is called the floor mounting and floor standing. You can find this. This one is found also in my own house. In a reception, you will find this one, which is a floor mounted, and there is also a floor standing, different types of systems which you can see. The cassette, there is another one called the cassette. What is exactly like the castte? It looks like this. This one, as you can see it. This is what we call a cassette that provides also cold air to our system, as you can see here. Again, the cassette is also connected with the outdoor unit. We have an outdoor unit and we have an indoor unit. This one used to provide a cold air to our system and connected to our outdoor unit. You can see that this outdoor un can provide two different split system, these two split system, and two cassette. Again, it depends on the design of the mechanical engineer. Now there is another one called the ducted or central split. So it is a split, but it is central. What I mean by central Central because it doesn't cool just one room. It can cool several rooms. It may be even one complete floor in a building. Again, it depends on the design of who of the mechanical engineer. Not my design. I'm not a mechanical engineer. The mechanical engineer is responsible for designing and selecting what suitable system is used and what values and what kind of horsepower. All of these are its own job. It's not my job. So the central plate here, you will find that, for example, we will have one big unit outside and you can see, again, the disconnect switch here. As you can see here, this one outdoor unit, and it provides cold air to the building to the house or home or floor using duct. And you will see what I mean right now. You will see that we have here what we call diffusers, that provide cold air. And there's others which take air. So there are diffusers that are in takes air, warm air, and others which we provide cold air. So let me show you what I exactly mean or how does this system works. So you can see in this, this is a house here, and you can see we have many, many diffusers here that provides cold air. Cold air to this house here. Now, let's see, so we have number one outdoor unit. Our door unit, which contains the compressor that compresses this freon. Okay? So it compresses it, and at the same time, you can see we have mini vans here, which cools it also down a little bit. And then we will see that this hot freon or hot refrigerant will go through pipes or refrigerant lines you call this refrigerant lines or pipes. And it goes like this through an expansion valve. We have an expansion valve. That will, you can see that here goes like this, and here we have an expansion valve, which will provide a cool liquid freon or refrigerant, liquid cooled refrigerant. Then what we are going to do is that you will find that we have another unit inside the house, which was called the plower here, this one. What does it do? You will find that it takes air from the building. You can see that we have some diffusers here or vent here you can see this vans here. It can be located at any locations and you'll see all of these ducts. You can see this one, it's called duct. What will happen is that by using this plower here, we take air from the rooms, hot air from the rooms like this. We take hot air goes all the way down here. So this one, this flower here, this one takes all of the hot air from the system. Okay, great. And then what? After taking all of the warm air from here, it will push it through the cold refrigerant. Remember that after getting through the expansion valve, we have here a cold refrigerant. And then when we pass this hot air through it, it will become a cold air, and then we will pass it through a duct, and then we provide cold air to our house. You'll see that these ducts, which will have warm air, it will be absorbed using this flour here, push it down here, and then it will push this warm air through that cold refrigerant, and then we will have cold air that will go through these diffusers or this vent. That is how a central split works exactly the same principle in other systems. So you can see we have duct here that will take hot air and other ducts which will provide cold air. There is another one called the Backage unit. So what does the package unit do? It contains everything together, everything inside it. And it is usually placed on the rooftop, like this one here, you can see it is placed on the rooftop of house, and then it will start supplying cold air through. You can see providing air air and cold air through the system. And we will also here, you can see we have a return air duct which will absorb hot, warm air, and again, provide it here to to the evaporator, which will exchange, air, which will exchange heat with it, and then we provide cold air. So as a package unit, contains everything together in one block. So these are the different types of the DX system operates on the same principle. You have a refrigerant that we compresses it, and then we expand it. And then after expansion, we exchange it directly with the air inside our system. Now, in another system called the solar system, we first use the refrigerant in order to cool down water, and then we use this cold water inside our building, as we'll see in the next lesson. 93. Chiller Water System: Hey, everyone, and welcome back to another lesson in our course for HVAC for electrical engineering. In this lesson or in the previous one, we discussed the DX system, and this particular one, we would like to investigate the chiller water system. So the chiller water system is used in applications that require significant cooling capacity, not small capacity like the one which we have used in the DX or the central split units. I'm not talking about this. I'm talking about the one that requires significant cooling. Like, for example, if we have a hypermarket, if we have industrial processes, if we have commercial air conditioning, like offices, factories, all of these. So when we have a large building and I would like to call it down, it is not economically good to use the split units. So what do we do in the chiller water system? So the chiller water system operates on the same exact principle like the air conditioning system. However, however, this time, instead of running refrigerant lines, we provide running water pipes. So what I exactly mean by this so we will have a large unit like a chiller here on the roof of the building. This one contains the components that we need, as we will see right now, but you have to understand that this chiller here, which you see in this figure operates only in summer. This is pretty important. Why? Because chiller provides cold water to the building. Now, this cold water is used to cool the rooms inside the building itself. That's why it works only in summer. In winter, the chiller is not in operation. So let's see what I exactly mean or what happens exactly in the chiller. So the first step is that as before. Remember that we have two units. We have the external unit, which is outside with its fan. If you remember the one which is outside with the fan, which we have compressor. First, we have the compressor that compresses the refrigerant like freon, and it provides this compressed freon to the condenser to the condenser, which equals a down by dissipating this heat using the fan exactly similar as the DX system. Then we will have this lower temperature, high pressure, freon or any refrigerant, and then we provide it into an expansion valve like this, which will expand it and we will have cool refrigent the freon. So that's the first step that we have here, our refrigerant or freon, for example, and then we enter it into the compressor that will provide it, and then we condensate it, call it down, forget about this. We will talk about how we call it down later. And then we provide it to expansion valve to have a cold cold refrigerant or cold freon, for example. And then what happens? If you remember exactly when we had our split unit, we had it like this inside indoor unit or the split indoor unit. The part which is indoor, we said that this one is our evaporret and you said that we have tubes like this goes like this, and it contain this called freon, and then we have here a fan that drags or pulls the warm air inside our room and then provide it with a cold air in the end. Now, instead of doing this, what are we going to do that this evaporator here, which you can see here, is that it will exchange its cold or the heat from water. What I mean by this is that I'm going to provide it with warm motor, warm water like this, normal temperature water. And then we have here cold, the free on, and they will exchange the heat. So this heat energy from the water will go to our free on. So when we have an entering warm water, we will have outgoing, cold water. So outgoing cold water. Great. Now, this cold water, we are going to use it to cool our building. Now, how are we going to do this? We will see right now. But for now, the cycle will be complete and the hot freon will get back to the compressor and then the cycle repeats itself. So instead of exchanging the evaporator, instead of exchanging the heat takes from warm air, and it with cold air inside like the DX system. The evaporator is exchanging with a hot warm water, and then we have cold water which will go through pipes inside our building. Now, let's see this in animations like this. You'll see, we have our chiller here. Now, this chiller will have a warm motor entering to it, and then we will have a heat exchange with it using an evaporator inside the chiller unit. And then we will have cold water that goes all the way down, as you can see, goes all the way down like this and supply to different units. These units, well it's called the air handling unit or fan coil unit. Now, what you are asking, what are these exactly? These are exactly like the evaporator inside our indoor unit. Now what happens at that Inside the evaporator, This evaporator will take, let's say like this and let's say like this. This evaporator will have an entering like this, entering like this to this evaporator, this unit, as you can see here, we will have cold water entering. Now, inside the air handler unit or fan coil unit, we have a fan that takes warm air from our room like this, takes the warm air like this. And then this warm air will exchange heat with the cold water. So all of the heat energy inside this warm air will go to this cold water. And then after it cools down, it will go outside like this as a cold air to our room. So as you can see, it is exactly an evaporator. But this time, instead of changing with the freon, we are changing with this cold water. And then after taking the heat energy from all of this hot air, we will have a warm motor going outside. Which will get back to our chiller. As you can see here, let me zoom in like this, magnify go here. As you can see here, we have our cold water goes down like this. Inside the air handling unit or fan coil unit, they are exactly the same, except that the air handling unit is used for more than one room or one floor. Fan coil unit is usually used for just one room. So as you can see, it enters it cold water, and then we have two diffusers here or two grills, one which will take air warm air from the room, and then exchange it with this cold water. And then we provide cold air to the room. And then when the water becomes warm, it gets back and goes all the way back to our chiller. Now, this chiller, of course, as you can see here, we have bombs. Okay? As you can see, we have a bomb here and another bomb here. All of these pumps are used to push this water to our floors and take this warm water from these floors and get it back to the chiller. Okay, so let's look at the types of chillers. Okay? So we have two main types. Now, you may ask me what is the classification based on? The classification is based on how this condensator works. Now, you may ask me what do you even mean? So we have here a compressor that provides hot, compressed freon or refrigerant, right, refrigerant. So what we are going to do is that when we provide it to this condensator, we would like to cool it down to reduce its temperature. Now, if you remember in the outdoor unit in the DX system, we used a fan that will give heat energy to the outside. This type is called the air cooling method. However, there is another way that we can use water to cool it down. 94. Types of Chillers: So you can see chiller types and obligations. So we have two types of chillers, one which is air cooled and one which is water cooled. Now, you can see that the compressor here provide the compressed freon, as you can see, and we have fans exactly like the outdoor unit in the split system or the DEXOsystem use fans to remove this heat energy and dissipate it outside and cool it down and goes through the rest of the cycle. Now, in another way, we can use a water cold. What do you even mean? We provide again this hot compressed freon or any other refrigerant, and then we have here not cold water. Let's say, for example, a normal heat water or a normal temperature water. So this normal water will go like this, like this inside the condenser. Now, it will absorb all of the heat energy inside inside this refrigerant or this freon and cools it down. So when we have a normal temperature water entering, we will have hot water going outside. Now, you may ask me what are we going to do with this hot water? We're going to provide it to something which we call cooling tower. What does it do? It simply takes this one and start cooling it down. So this one is hot gas, as you can see here. And then after when we cool it down using a fan, that dissipates heat energy to the outside, it will start condensing into water again. So the difference between these two types is that one which calls the freon using air and other which calls the freon using water. Okay, so as you can see, air cooled are commonly used installed on the roof or in outdoor areas. They use ambient air to dissipate heat from the condenser. So they need to be open, well ventilated spaces. Example, installing them on the roof is a practical way. Another one, which is water cooled, as you can see here, usually located indoors, often in a mechanical room or a basement. Again, this is the design of the mechanical engineer. It is not my own design. 95. Fan Coil Unit (FCU): Now let's go in depth and see these different elements, which we need to provide electrical energy to them, and we need to select a disconnector switch right for them. Now, the first one is the fan coil unit, which we discussed right now, it is similar as the evaporator, but just in different rooms. Now, I would like to see this in a plan, a mechanical plan and see how I'm going to understand it. Okay? So for example, let's see this. So if you look at any room, like in a commercial bending, you'll see this diffusers or we call it the grill. You can see this one. What does it do? One of them takes warm water, and another one can supply sorry, warm air, and another one supply hot cold air. So one takes warm air and one provides cold. Like this, for example, we have our cold water like this, and we have two grills or more dependent on the design. So we have a return grill that takes hot air. As you can see, it takes hot air from the room, like this one takes hot air, basing it through the cold water from the chiller, cold water pipes, and we will have cold air that goes through a supply grill, another one like this, but it will supply the cold air. Like this, for example, you can see that in this room, we can have, let's say, for example, this can be the warm air that takes the return grill that takes hot air, and this can be the supply grill that provides cold air to the room. Now, let's see this on a blend, okay. So if you look at here, we have chop number one hop two meeting room, meeting room. Now, let's look carefully at this. So number one, where do I get this? I get this from the mechanical plan. Okay? So if you look carefully here, you'll see that we have let's look at, for example, this room, for example, here. You'll see these weird signs. You can see this shape here. This one actually representing the duct, this one representing the duct. And as you can see, we have different views. You can see one like this, this weird pox here and another one with an X, another one with an X. And you'll see in the end B D like this one. So what are all of these? Number one, this one here, which you can see, this one with the blue killer, this one here. This one is actually our duct. That is number one. Number two, B D here, this part here is our split unit. Our what? Our split unit. In this project here, it uses a split unit or a central is split unit. Okay? So it uses a central split unit in this example here. Now, as you can see, we have this X, this weird chip. Each of these are the grill or the diffuser, the grill or the diffuser. One of them have arrows pointing at it, as you can see here going into it. What does this even mean? It means that the air enters here, enters through this diffuser here. And you can see another one which have an arrows like this. It means air goes out from it from here. This is number one. Number two, as you can see here, this one, this room here is CSU 03, and another room here, CSU 04. So what does this even mean? We will see right now what I exactly means. So this one is a split unit. This is used to cool down this room, and this one is another split unit used to cool down this room. And we have a duct here that is used to take and provide air. So if you look at this one here in the legend of the bland, you will see it cancelled. Split unit. So this one BD here is a split unit in this room and another one here. So CSU is simply a concealed split unit, concealed split unit. This one in our electrical engineer or as an electro engineer, I'm going to add here a disconnect switch, and we will see it's simple in the power plan later when we add disconnect switch to our project. So we have here at KNxSwitch here and I'm going to add another one here like this, another one like this. Each one is used to disconnect the unit from the power supply. This is, of course, not recommended. It is you have to do this according to the NEC or the National Electrical code. Now, you'll see another sample here. As I said before, this one provides air. You can see a supply sealing diffuser, and a return sealing diffuser. Supply it means it provides air and the return, it means that it takes warm air from here, takes warm air here. That is the difference between them, so you can see that. So for example, if I'm going to design, breaker, cables, disconnected switch, I should know the power rating of this split unit. I need to know the power rating inside this split unit. We have the fan coil unit, inside this unit here. So I want to know what the power of this one. You can see that this one here, as you can see, is CSU 03. And this one here, which is this one here, CSU 04. So how can I know their power rating? You have to go to the power schedule from the mechanical engineer. So let me just go it down a little bit. Okay, go like this. You can see, as you can see here, you can see DX. So the mechanical engineer used here, direct DX concealed units schedule. You can see, for example, CSU 01, CS 002, et cetera, each one application, quantity, and some information for mechanical engineers and supply ambient and blah, blah, blah. Now, let's focus on this so you can see that we have CS zero, CSU 03, this one. Now, if you look carefully, let's go like this, there is a quantity. How many of these in our project, we had eight of them. Now, if I go a little bit more, more and more and we look for power input, how much power does it take? So you can see that this one takes three kilowatt. So what I understand from this is that this unit takes three kilowatt as a power needed. Based on this, I will design my own disconnect switch, my own breaker, and my own cables, as we will see later inside our design course. Now let's look at the power supply. You can see the power supply, and this is pretty important too. I would like to know, hey, this three kilowatt? Is it a single phase system or a three phase? Does it need RST, R or S or T, one of the phases, or does it take three phase supply. So you can see that the supply here you can see, go like this, 220 and 220 in my country. 220 is a single phase, not a three phase. And as you can see how many phases one, you can see it is a single phase because it says phase one. And what the supply frequency, 50 hertz. This is important when I select the current reading. If you look at another one like CS 04, this one here, if you go like this at this specific one, you can see 380. 380 is line to line voltage in my country. And if I'm not sure if I'm talking about any other country, you'll see that the phase is three phase. 380 means three phase unit. So this is the fancle so you now understand this simple in the plan, and now you understand how can I get its power rating. Usually in the plan of the mechanical engineer, you will have DWG for mechanical engineer for the design of the HVAC system, and you will find also the schedule or the power schedule for the mechanical engineer, which will give you how much power. And remember, we are not talking about total CC. CC here means the cooling capacity. This is for mechanical engineers. What I'm talking about or what I'm concerned with is the power input, which I'm going to design my own system. Now let's look at this. You may ask me, Hey, if we are using a split unit, we should have an outdoor unit and an indoor unit. Yes, you have. If you look at here, we have a split unit as you can see here. And this is another split unit in each room. If you look carefully here, you will find a pipeline or light refrigerant light, which contain the free on or our cooling liquid. You can see it goes like this. So the lung goes all the way go all the way like this. And if you look carefully here, you'll find on the right side here. Goes all the way to different units. These units are the one which contain the compressor and which provide you can see, it gives away or dissipate heat to the outside. This is the splitude indoor unit and outdoor unit for this system. You can see it's connected to each other using pipeline. Okay, and as you can see, as I just said in the plan, if you are not sure, you can see it in the legend of the plan. You can see this one, Hey, this is a compressor unit if you are confused or you don't know what kind of this. 96. Fresh Air Handling Unit and Condenser Unit: Now this is for the fan coil unit, which we can see in our plan. Another one which you can see instead of the fancin is the air handling unit. So let's see it. So the air handle unit, as I said before, the difference between it and the fan coil unit, that it can be used to provide cold air to several rooms. Okay, so you can see that we have here grills, return air grill, and we have here the supply grill, which gives us cold air. So it takes the warm air like this using plower, as we have seen in the DX system or in centralized DX system and all of these are ducked. So it takes the warm air and exchange it with the cold water pipes, and then we provide again the cold air. This is an air handling unit. As you can see, we can have an air handling for several rooms, one which he takes, which is a return grill that takes from. All of this is a room, large rooms return return hot air from the room, hot air from the room, and then supply cold air from the other side. It dependent on the design itself. Now, the air handling unit can be also a fresh air handling unit. Remember when we talked before that we need ventilation inside our system. So if we look at any commercial building, if we don't provide it or we don't provide ventilation, and what I mean by ventilation is giving a fresh air to our system. So in order to do this, we have a fresh air handling unit, which you can see like this. Fresh air handling unit. And you can see it is located on ground floor, and it provides service to all floors. And we will see this right now, and it has a power rating for the motor 7.5 and provide this cooling to our system. So what I mean by this or why do we have a cooling system? Because because if you look carefully here at that, if we provide fresh air from outside, this fresh air is warm, right? Warm air. So if I'm gonna provide it to our system, and at the same time, the split unit is providing cool air, so you can see they are introducting with each other. So what I would like to do that, I'm going to take this fresh air handling unit. I'm going to take warm air from outside, pass it through like similar to this split unit. But this time, an air handling unit with a condenser, as you see right now, in order to cool down in our air or provide cool air to our system. So let's see this. If you look at the ground floor here in a building, you'll see all of this blue duct. You'll see that all of these ducts are actually connected together. If you look carefully here, we have this one, which is air handling. This is the symbol for air handling unit in our project, F AHU 01, which is this exact one. Now, if you look carefully here, this is the unit that takes fresh air from outside and provide fresh air to our building, as you can see here. Through a duct that goes through all of this floor, all of the ground floor. However, as we said before that, this duct provides fresh air to our system, we said or this fresh air handling unit, we said that it provides service to all floors. So how is this even done? If you look carefully here, we have this X sample at this specific location. You see this one here? I would like you to concentrate on this one. It means that it goes up or down. Now, what I mean by this, it will become clear now. If you look at this is the ground floor, if you look at first floor and focus on this part, you can see this part, this part, focus on it on the next floor. If you look at the next to floor, which is exactly like this, you'll see another X here. Look at this X at this close to this line here, this x here, if you get back here, you'll find that the exact X which I'm talking about. This X goes to the next floor. You'll see that on the first floor plan it says, Hey, two ground floor to ground floor, it means that this duct, all of this duct that is for the first floor is connected to the duct here in the ground floor. So it means that this fresh air handling unit is providing fresh air, fresh cold air to the first floor or the ground and the first floor. Now, since this one is an air handling unit, which means it is containing an evaporator coil. Or similar to the DX coil. Now you may ask me, if this one provides cool air, where our refrigerant comes from, or where our condenser comes from. Remember that we need, if you remember, we have an internal unit, indoor unit, and outdoor unit. The indoor unit, which is the fresh air handling unit or similar to as in our house, we have our evaporator that contains the cool refrigerant or the free on. And we have our outdoor unit, like in our house, which contain the compressor, denser, or we call this one compressor dicendenser. Now, this exact system here is a separate system from the original one. How did I know this? You understand now that this fresh air handling unit has its own condenser that cools down the freon and brings it back to cool air from outside. Now, let's see this. If you look at this is the air handling unit F AHU 01 that provides for all floors. Great. You'll find here a condenser. You can see condensing unit one of it called ACCU 01 in the first floor with a power rating 70 kilowatt, which means it needs its own panel. Or MCC motor control center, large panel that is used contains all of the overload breakers, everything that we need for a motor. Also, it contains a variable frequency drive, everything, okay? Now, if you look at the mechanical engineer tells you, Hey, there is a remark here. What is the remark? Exactly? It says it is connected to fresh air handling unit 01, which means that this large condensing unit that cools down the air or provides freon to our air handling unit, is used for the fresh air handling. L et's see this. So if you look at the first you can see the air condensing unit or air coil condensing unit dependent on what he exactly means by it, but in the end, it is just a condensing unit, as you can see here. You can see it's pretty close in an HVAC room, a room specifically for HVAC. And as you can see, it is pretty clear that this part is actually connected to this one, as you can see here. So by using the two together, we can provide a cold fresh air to our system so that we can provide ventilation to the system. So you can see that both of them are actually connected together. You can see that this is for air handling unit that we just say you can see fresh air intake, plus blah, blah, blah, plus a DX calling coil and a fan. So we have a coil, which is used for calling which it comes from the condenser itself. So you can see they are both connected together. Now, there is an important part here. What if I don't know if they are connected or not? All you have to do that, or if you would like to check if my own understanding is correct or incorrect. All you have to do is that you can contact the mechanical engineer and tell him, Hey, this one and this one are connected together or they are separate or I don't understand it well, can you explain what do you mean by this condensing unit and this fresh air handling unit? Or even by contacting him on email, you can get the same response, so that you can actually understand where are you going to put the panel if you are having a larger loop like this one here? This one is a pretty large late which means I can need, for example, a large panel like this called MCC Motor Control Center that is used to control this large machine. So in general, we will have an Ichvac system like this. We have normal water chiller which provides cold water, and then we will have a pump that pushes it to a fan coil unit or an air handling unit, as you can see, to different floors, as you can see, as we discussed before in the previous lessons. 97. Pumps and Loads in Different Seasons: So another component inside our HVAC system is our pumps, right, or our pumps. We talked about the pumps before and we said that they provide. So we have our chiller here, and we have pump here that provides water. You can see air handling unit. It provides this cold water to pipes through pipes to our air handling unit and fan coil unit in order to cool down our rooms, right? Chilled water pump circulates the chilled water from the chillers evaporator to the buildings cooling coils like air handling units or fan coil unit and back to the chiller. And it is responsible for distributing the cooling effect throughout the building. And remember, since we have bumps here, we need to design. Either an MCC or a motor control center that can be used to control these pumps or either designing disconnect switch for each bump. But usually, these are put on one big banel for controlling the motor. These are usually, of course, located near our chiller. Now, an important part which I would like to discuss when you are designing your own panels, as we will see later, when you are designing the panels, you have to say, Hey, I'm going to design the panels and the transformer based on what loads. So we have our chiller, we have pumps. We have our fan coil unit, we have air handling unit. So how can I design the loud? So what we found is that here we have our air handling unit or a fan coil unit. This is pretty important. You'll find that we have a return, right, return air. And we can have also fresh air, right? Return air or a fresh air. The return air and fresh air is used to or provided to our air handling unit or the fan coil unit. And then you can see that we have a cooling coil which contains water, for example, the cold water from our chiller, and then it will start cooling down and we provide from another gill the cold air right as we discussed before. Now, this is in what season in our summer, right in summer. So in summer, we need several components. Number one, we need chiller. Why to provide cold water. Number two, we need fan coil, unit or air handling unit like this one here, which contains a fan that takes air and then provide it to our room. And we also need bump, right? We need some pumps that will take cold water and provide it to the rest of the building. Okay, great. This is what in summer. What about winter? In winter, I'm asking you, do you even need a chiller for winter? Hiller provides cold water, right? We don't need chiller in winter. We need it only in summer. So the chiller doesn't exist in winter. We only need it. However, there is another thing inside the air handling unit or the fan coil unit. You only ask me what exactly exist. There is a heating coil. A heating coil. Really? Yeah, there is a heating coil. So we can have a heating coil that works by electricity using resistors. So this one needs a certain amount of power. So a heat or we can have a boiler inside our system. This boiler gives us hot water, which we provide through pipes, again, and then we can exchange with air and provide warm air. So it depends again on the design of the mechanical engineer. So let's say we are talking about a heater, okay? Great. And we have what also we have fans. So we have fans like before, fan coil unit or air handling unit, fan coil unit or air handling unit. Do you need the bump? You don't need any bump. Why? Because you just use this fan that takes hot, cold air from the room. And using this heater, we will provide warm air. So you can see we have two different loads right now, right? So in summer, we have fan coil unit or the fans of the fan coil unit or air handling unit. And we have booms and chiller, as I just explained. And in winter, we have the same fans, this two. And we have but we have heat. Okay, great. So let's look at this. So when we size, our electrical transformer for our system, we design it based on the summer loads and we cite the main distribution port on winter loads and not the main distribution board, exactly the sub distribution p. This is a mistake sub distribution port. Okay, I don't understand what you even mean. Okay, let me show you. So you can see that these are the lots. Okay, great. Now, let's see this. So when we look at our system number one, we have several floors. We have several floors. Great. All of these floors, each one contains a distribution port or a distribution panel. You can see distribution port, let's say from here, distribution port, AC, air conditioning, G, ground floor. Distribution port, AC, air conditioning, F, first, second, roof, et cetera. Now, all of these panels take from one or several passports that are connected to our electrical transformer. So all of this takes its power from transform. Okay, noise. Now, and we have a distribution port. Each one provides electrical power to our loads, including these fans and heaters inside our system or any component that we need. So let's look at each floor here. So, for example, in the first floor, we need what? Actually, if you look carefully, we need fans and heaters in winter. However, in summer, we don't need except fans. So let me explain this. As you can see here, let's focus on the loads on each floor only. Forget about chillers, pumps, all of this. Let's focus on each floor. So let's look at this floor first. Let's look at this. What components do we have in this floor? Well, we have fans. We have also we have heating coil or heater. Great. These are the components in our floor. Now, when do the work. So we have fans that works only in wet season in summer. Because we get the cold water from the chiller, and then we use a fan just to provide cold air. However, in winter, we use fans and heaters. That is the winter out. So when I'm designing the distribution port for this floor, I have to take the Worstys which is which one of these, which is the fans and heaters. That's why you can see that the distribution port is designed based on the winter louts that contains both of the fans and heaters. Great. So what about the roof? Okay? Let's look at the roof. So all of this contains fans and heat. For the roof, we have chillers and pumps. These are the loads that exist on the roof only chillers and its pumps. So when do the work? Well, actually, these work only in summer. That's why the distribution port of the roof is an exception, which we are going to design based on summer loads because in winter chill and bums don't work. So they work only in summer. So when I sign this distribution port in the worst case, I will look for summer. Till now, everything is great. So we have summer, we have winter. Now, my question for you when you are selecting the electrical transformer, transform, are you going to look for winter louds or summer louds? You are going to design based on winter or based on summer. Now, the answer to this question is pretty simple. I will design based on summer. Now, you will ask me, why do you design based on summer? So let's see. So in summer, we have chiller bombs. We have fans, fans, fans. This is the summer out. Chiller pumps, fans, fans and fans. Now, in the winter out, we have fans and heaters, fans and heaters, fans and heaters, and we don't have any chillers or pumps. So you will find that the chiller and boom is the largest load in the system. Very pretty, pretty much larger than fans and heaters together. That's why when I design when I design my tract transformer, I design it based on the largest load, which is during summer. When we have chiller and pumps in addition to the fans, this load is much larger than fans and heaters only. Okay? This is the criteria on which we design our electrical system. 98. Exhaust Fan and Pressure Fan: Hey, everyone, and welcome back to our course for HVAC systems for electrical engineers. Now, we discussed before several louds in our mechanical system. Another louds which we can find is the exhaust fan. This exhaust fan, which can be found in kitchens and bathrooms. So what are exactly exhaustive fans or how do you use these exhaustive fans? These are found in kitchens and bathrooms in order to improve air quality. Now, how do they work? They just drag or pull out or remove unwanted moisture odors and smoke particles from these places. So the exhaustive fan will be we'll have this shape inside a commercial building. And if you look carefully at a plan, if you'd like to see this in a mechanical plan, you can see it right here. So if you look carefully here, we have some bathrooms. As you can see here, let's zoom in or magnify. If you look like this, this is a pthroom here one, two, three, four, five and six. And as you can see, there is actually here, as you can see, duct, you can see duct another duct here above these toilets. Now, if you look carefully at each toilet at this one, one, this one, this one, and this, you'll see that there are arrows pointing inward to this sample here. Now, this sample, as we have said before inside the air conditioning system, it is called the return sealing diffuser. I just pulls or the air goes into here. So any moisture odors inside this toilet will go inside this duct. All of these will go inside this green duct. Now, if you look carefully, we are pointing at something here. What's exactly this. You can see that EX f07. What does this mean? Exhaust fan 07. In this location, we have an exhaustive fan that pulls or remove all of the moisture or air in these toilets. This exhaustive fan is inside our mechanical plan and we would like as an electrical engineers, we would like to add here a disk nect switch in order to turn on and off this lute. And also, we need to edit on a separate circut. Now another one here, you can see that we have also here in this electrical room. We have an exhaustive fan. All of this is not my own design. This is the design of the mechanical engineer. All my own job is to add a disconnect switch and put each exhaustive fan on a separate circuit with its own circuit breaker, as you will see in the panel schedule. Now, usually in your home or in residential building, you will find that in your own house like this. Let's say this is a room in your own house, and we have a window here for our bathroom. Now in this window, what are we going to do? In our house, we are going to add here an exhaust fan on the window itself so that we can take any smells or any odors or any moisture from this bathroom and kick it outside or pull it outside, similar to the kitchen exactly. Now, what are we going to do in residential buildings? We add since exhaustive fan is usually a small loud. For example, it can be 100 volt and bare. So 100 volta Br is pretty small to add it on one separate circuit or one breaker. So what we can do that we have here, the lighting system or the luminear and we can have, for example, another room here with a couple of luminars like this. We can actually, when we design our circuit as we learned it before, when we design the circuit for lighting system, we can add this exhaustive fan as a part of the lighting system. So since it has a very small lute like one luminar, we can actually add it as a part of the lighting system or lighting circuits. Not only this, but you can also add in the bathroom one switch like this, similar to the lighting so that we can turn on and off this exhaust fan. This is for small projects or in your own home. However, in plans for our system here or our mechanical system in a commercial building or administration building or a large project, we have to put each one on a separate circuit. So let me show you. So for example, if you look at the schedule for the exhaustive fan from the mechanical engineer, you'll find, Hey, exhaustive fan, exhaustive fan two and, et cetera, you will find that exhaustive fan number one, for example, it serves the toilets and there is only one of it in the ground, the floor, and its power which we are concerned with is 0.1 kilowatt or. We will say 100 what? Very small loot. And as you can see, voltage is 220 volt, meaning a single phase in my onset. So this is a single phase. As you can see, phase one. Similarly, if you look at the others, you will see the quantity, their location, the power rating of each, all of this, which can help you to design the disconnected switch, breakers, cables, and the sockets. Now, another one which you can also find is smoke exhaust fan, which can be found in generation room, a garage, stairs, all of these locations. So the exhaust fan or the smoke exhaustive fan, what does exactly do? It's simply used as a ventilation system. It is used to remove smoke, hot gases from a building. It can be used during fire, and it also can be used in office, mills, malls, office towers, hospitals, in the underground parking garage. And also we have the pressure fan, which is installed in stairs, mainly in stairs. So the previous one is smoke exhausted fan used to remove smoke and hot gases. Because in our generation room, we can have, of course, when we burn our fuel, we would like to take those exhaust gases resulting from the fire or burning the fossil fuels. We would like to kick it outside our building. That's why we use a smoke exhaust fan. The pressure fan has a pretty important role in the fire situations. Now, what's exactly a pressure fan? A pressure fan or pressurization fan is used in building safety systems. Why in order to control air pressure in specific areas? Specifically to prevent the spread of smoke during a fire. Now, the main purpose or the primary purpose of a pressure fan is to provide a higher air pressure in critical areas like stairs, elevators or refuge areas, compared to other places. Now, you may ask me, I don't understand anything. How can I use this? Let me show you what I exactly mean. So let's say we have exhaust fans, which takes the smoke and kick it outside. And as you can see, let's say we have a fire on this floor, right? And we have smoke here. Now, what does this fire would like to do? These are our stairs. Okay, we can call it the emergency stairs. Now, our smoke here or this fire here would like to spread to the stairs at which people will go will run outside and go from this building. So what I'm going to do or what I would like to do that I don't want this fire to be transferred from this room or this floor into the stairs at which people will run out of the building, right? So in order to do this, we have a trick which we actually do. You know, you know, that air moves from high pressure to low pressure areas, right? So here when we have this smoker, this fire, this is a high pressure area. And here we don't have any kind of smoke or any other problem. That's why here we have a low pressure. So in reality, what will happen is that this smoke will go from high pressure to this low pressure area. Now to prevent this from happening, we have a stair pressurization fan. So what does this actually do? Well, what does it do pretty simple. All what does it do that it provides a high pressure air in the stairs. So when we provide a high pressure air, this area becomes a high pressure or has a high pressure. So due to this phenomenon, what will happen that this smoke will not go from here to here? Why? Because we have a high pressure a preventing the smoke from going from this floor to the stairs. So the pressure difference here acts as a barrier and prevent smoke from going through these areas remaining ensuring that they safe and usable during an equation, during an evacuation. Now, another one here, as you can see, so we have a fresh air here. We have a fire in the floors, and order to prevent any fire from going here, what we do is that we have a pressurization fan, which is used to provide high pressure air so that we will have a pressurized stair well as you can see here. So due to this high pressure here, the smoke will not go from here to here. Okay? So this is the idea behind a pressure fan. Now, let's see this inside the mechanical loose or the mechanical plan. So number one in the schedule, you will see, Hey, you will have BF 01, PF 01, which means pressure fan, number one. Great. It is used to provide staircase pressurization, and its type is rooftop. So it is located on the roof. You can see on the up roof, and we have four of them in our plan. Each one has a rated power of three kilowatt. Great. And the R 380 volt and three phase. Rundte volt is line to line voltage, meaning that this load is a three phase, and as you can see, phase three. And this one is VSD fan motor control. So the control or motor control strategy used for this fan is variable speed drive to change the speed of the fan. Now let's look at this. So if you look at our plan, for example, for the mechanical plan of a building, you will see how many stairs, one, two, three, and four. So we have four stairs. Now, for each one, we will have a pressurization fan, one, two, three, and four. That's why we have four fans, each one for the stairs, for each group of stairs. Now let's look at it closely so that you can see here the sample in the mechanical legend, rooftop fan for this shape. And as you can see, rooftop fan for this stairs, BF 01, BF 01 for this one. So I hope you now understand the purpose of having a pressure fan. 99. Hand Dryer and Water Heater: Hey, everyone. We talked previously about different types of mechanical loads. Now let's talk about other loads, which we can consider them as a part of the mechanical plan or the power circuits. One of these is called the hand dryer, which is found in public bathrooms. So the hand dryer, as you can see, we all know what is a hand dry do dries the hand after hand washing, right. So we can consider it actually as an electrical machine. That requires a disconnected switch and also requires certain circuit. So we will add it on a separate circuit, and it is used in public toilets or bathrooms as an alternative way or as an alternative to paper towels. Now, as you can see, this is the sample on the autocad program. So what we do is that if we have a bathroom like this, let's say this is the door to this bathroom, and we know that the sink is exactly here, the sink here. So I'm going to add the hand dryer like this in this location. That's all what we actually do. Okay, another part, which is part of our electrical system with is the water heater. Now, why did I mention water heater right now? Because we will add it on a separate circuit. Again, one circuit for water heater because it has a higher power rating than normal loads. It can be found in kitchen and bathrooms. Now let's look at this. So we have here here, our water heater, as you can see here and look carefully at this because it's pretty important. Now, there are some types of water heaters which like this, which is in which there. To line and the Neutral is connected directly inside the wall itself, okay? So if I do this, if I have line and neutral or the two terminals of this water heater inside the wall itself, then of course, we are going to add here like this, disconnect the switch. So we're going to add here at disconnect switch like this so that we can turn it on and off, okay? This one. This is according to the NEC. We need a way to disconnect our electrical device from close to it and inside, in a maximum distance of 50 feet or 15 meters. This is according to the NEC. Okay? So if you have line neutral, connect it direct to the wall. So we need a switch so that we can turn it on and off. This goes all the way to our panel. That is one way. However, there is an exception. What this exception, you can see that we have here a receptacle or socket, right? Great. So we can actually connect this plug directly here, right? And if I would like to disconnect this device, all I have to do is plug this one out of this receptacle, right? So the NESC gives you an exception. If you have a cord like this one, a cord, like this one, and you can plug it inside a receptacle and you can remove it. Then in this case, you don't need a disconnected switch because this blug and cord acts as a way of disconnecting the device. Instead of using a disconnect switch, so in this case, what I'm going to do in our electrical system is that I'm going to add a receptacle, and this will be a special receptacle called power socket, which I'm going to add it on one circuit or one separate circuit. Great. So this is for water heater. 100. Sewage Pump, Domestic Pump, and MCC Panel: Now in our electrical system, we can have another types of loads, which is pumps. We talked about the pumps for the ECVAC system. This is used to provide cold water to our air handling unit and the fan coil unit. However, we have also the sewage pump. So what do exactly use the sewage Ju pump before? So in a building like a commercial building, if the sewage pump, what does it do? It's simply remove waste water and sewage from areas where gravity drainage is impossible. For example, in basements, underground parking garage, lower floors, then it can flow by gravity to the onsite treatment facility. So let's explain this. So let's say on the first floor or let's say ground floor. Let's say ground floor. We have this pipe that goes to the treatment facility, to the public treatment facility. However, we have a lower floor, which is a basement. Now, let's say we have like this one, this is the drainage. Which contain waste water and sewage from areas below this ground floor like basements, garage or any lower floor than the ground. Now, what I'm going to do is that I would like to take this one and use a bump a sewage bump that takes all of this waste water and sewage and bush it up to the ground floor pipe or the pipe at which it goes to the onsite treatment facility. So in this case, I would like a pump, which we call it the sewage pump, and this one requires electricity, right, in order to take the drainage from lower floor and push it to the level at which we will go to the treatment facility. Okay? This is the purpose of having a sewage pump. And also it has another function. It prevents flooding by ensuring that wastewater is effectively bumped out during periods of heavy use. There is an important part here that usually this bump or several pumps, which are used for other purposes, as we will see in the next slide. Usually, all of them are on one panel called the MCC. What do you mean by MCC, the motor control center? This one is used to provide indicators contain several components which we will see in the next slides. Now, usually, if this pump cannot can't take all of this water during heavy use. If it can't bump all of this one, all of this drainage water to outside, if the water increases beyond a certain level, we will have an alarm inside the MCC panel, which tells you, Hey, make sure that or look at the water level because we are going to have a flood inside our building due to this heavy use. Gives us a kind of an alarm. Similarly, this one is exactly like this one. We have a bump here that takes all of this drainage water and pushes it up to the next level so that it goes to the treatment facility. Another one which you can find also the domestic pumps or large in the large residential and commercial buildings. These pumps are used to provide clean water to our floors. So they are simply like this group of pumps that provides water to the high level. And what you can see in this image here, we have also different type of controller. These are actually an MCC, not an MCC, SD or a variable speed drive which are used to control these pumps. Now you may ask me, why do we even need all of these components? Because we know we need to have some pumps work for, let's say, 10 hours and then it be turned off, and another bump will start walking instead of it and et cetera. So not all of these pumps start walking together. So pumps work, and other one will have a rest and then they switch places as you already know. That's why we need components like PLC controllers with timers so that they can control these pumps. So what does a domestic pump do, as I just said, provides a consistent water pressure and provide a water supply to all fixtures throughout the buildings. And that provides water, especially in multi story building in which the natural pressure of water is not sufficient to reach our floors. Now, what about MCC panel which is used for motor control MCC motor control center? These are used to control multiple motors. So if you have many motors inside a building in one room like pumps or any other components, and they would like to control them. In this case, you will use a motor control center. Also, the motor control center is found in factories, if you would have lots of machines and you would like to control them. Inside the motor control center, we have PLC, we have circuit breakers, we have overload protection. We have contactors, we have relays. We have many other components, even we have measurements. Okay? All of this is used to control our motors. Even the starting procedure can also be found inside all of this on the motor control center. And this is the shape of the motor control center, similar to the normal panels. However, it has more features designed specifically for motors. For example, you can see here we have the three phase input or ST or red, yellow blue or ABC, the three phase, and you can see this black one, which is the neutral, and you'll see here grove of circuit breakers, contactors, and you'll see here some indication lamps. All of these are used for the control of our motors. 101. Types of Firefighting Systems: Hi, and welcome back everyone. In this video would like to discuss the fire fighting systems which are found including or inside the mechanical loads of our system. So we have some panels for firefighting, and these panels we would like to provide electricity using, for example, UBS synthesis are very critical routes and then we are going to use also pumps for bumping water inside our system. So all of these loads require electrical power. So the firefighting system are critical for protecting lives and property by extinguishing or controlling fires in various environments. There are various types of firefighting systems, and the mechanical engineer is specifically responsible for designing the system. This system depends on the nature of the fire, materials involved and the seating. So for example, if we look at the first type of firefighting systems, which is water based systems or the sprinkler systems. This type of system use water in order to extinguish our fire. What happens exactly in this system is that we automatically release water when a certain temperature is deicted. This system is commonly used in offices, hotels, and residential buildings. This type of systems or firefighting system is used for most common fires. Class A fires, this includes wood, paper, clothes, and other ordinary combustibles. However, it doesn't it is not very effective for flammable liquids or even in electrical rooms or metals. Now, let's see how it even works. So if you look at this system here, we have, as you can see, right here, we have palm group of pump. These pumps are responsible for providing water through pipes to sprinkler systems. So as you can see, we have a pipe here, as you can see, goes all the way like this. To, you can see the pipes, one, two, three, four, five, six, group of pipes. Let's say this is in one room. And inside these pipes, which you can see here, we have already bombed water. So inside this one, we have water, high pressure water, bomb it inside these pipes. However, you will see we have a small component here, this one. What is exactly this? This is the sprinkler. So our question is, how does even a water based system works? So let's look at these figures here. So what happens is that inside the sprinkler system, you will commonly find a glass pulp like this one. You can see this one inside it, there is a liquid. Now this liquid color, it changes based on the temperature as you can see here. So if we zoom in like this or magnify the glass, you can see that the color of this liquid inside the glass pulp, it changes based on the temperature inside the room. That is the first thing. Number two, what happens is that this liquid inside this glass bulb, when the temperature increases inside the room due to the presence of fire, as the temperature increase, this liquid starts to expand. And when it expands at a certain point, it will start breaking this glass. This glass bulb will break. And then in this instant, what will happen is that our water will go through this point here like this outside. All of the water will go outside. This is simply how a sprinkler system works, as you can see here. So we have already water here trapped inside these pipes. However, this glass bulb prevents water from spreading out. When the temperature reaches a certain value, this bulb will break down, and then the water will go through this and start extinguishing our fire inside our room. This is simply how a water based system works. Now, if you like to see this in Autocad program from the mechanical plan, you'll see right here a figure representing this. You can see this one. You can see all of this, this part here. All of these are pipes containing water. And this is the room that I would like to protect it or using this water based system. For example, here, a training room. As you can see here, we have these different circle filled with color, all of these circles here, representing one type of sprinkler. You can see here, a sprinkler here has this specific figure, which is this one. So when a fire occurs here, the sprinkler the glass pulp will break down, and then it will start extinguishing the fire inside our room. Now there is a very important part here that these, not all of them start to break down. So for example, if this one reach the specific temperature, it can break down. But it doesn't mean necessarily that all of these will break down. All of these will break down if the temperature in all of the room reaches a certain temperature. Great. So if we have a fire here in this location here, this one, its temperature will increase too much, and then the glass pb will break down, and then it will start providing water in this specific location only. Now there is another type which is carbon dioxide systems using the carbon dioxide gas, CO two in order to extinguish our fire in the rooms. The previous one is used for class A fires, including wood, paper, clothes, et cetera. However, the CO two gas or carbon dioxide systems like this one here, you can see we have several or cylinder filled with carbon dioxide gas. And you can see it goes through all pipes. So what happens exactly that this one carbon dioxide gas, this one release CO two throughout a protected area to suppress a fire by displacing oxygen. Now what happens exactly that CO two, as you can see here, it suppresses fire by displacing oxygen. Now, remember that the fire itself is or requires oxygen, requires oxygen so that it starts to increase or still exhaust. However, if CO two provides an aprire that prevents oxygen from reaching the source of fire, it can suppress it. So that is exactly what does it do? It simply displaces oxygen and prevents oxygen from reaching the core of the fire or the source of the fire so that the fire will not have any oxygen in air so that the fire will start going down. As you can see here, this is exactly a fire. There are cylinders here containing carbon dioxide and goes through here through the area which is protected. So there are two types here. For example, there is a total flooding system which release CO two through a complete area. There is also a local application system in which we direct CO two onto a specific hazard, like, for example, an electrical panel or machinery. So what do you mean by this? So as if we have a fire pump and we are directly providing it to the source of fire. Let's say if we have an electrical panel, that have a fire inside it. So we use a pump in order to provide CO two to this panel. However, total flooding is used for a complete room. If we have a room containing fire, we can release CO two throughout this room. Now, CO two is used for class B, flammable liquids and electrical fires. In this case, we use carbon dioxide gas. However, also it is also effective in areas with sensitive equipment like data centers, electrical rooms, industrial machinery. However, we have to make sure that we don't have any people inside these rooms. So carbon dioxide is not suitable for locations in which people can exhaust. Also, carbon dioxide is not suitable or not very effective for class A, which was used by water as sprinkler system because it doesn't cool the fire effectively for class A fires. This leads us to another type called farm systems. The farm systems here like this one, as you can see here. This is very ideal for class B involving flammable liquids like oil, gasoline, gasoline, and other chemicals. They can also be used in high hazard environment like chemical plants and fuel storage areas. Another one which is also used is called the clean agent systems or FM 200 or any other agent used. So what is exactly what does it do or when do we use even FM 200? Like this one, clean agent discharge, as you can see, like FM 200, this one is a gaseous system that suppresses fire without harming sensitive equipment. For example, the foam systems which we have seen in the previous lesson. In the previous slide, we cannot use it in rooms with computers, for example, or data centers because this foam can cause damage to our electrical equipment. However, this clean agent is a gaseous system that can be used in these rooms. Also, it can be used as you can see in data center, several rooms, museums, laboratories, where water or any other extinguishing system can cause damage. This is suitable for A class APC fires as we have seen previously. Now, as you can see, what happens is that we have cylinders that contain this agent, FM 200, and we have also pipes. And if you have a fire in this room, this clean agent will start providing it. However, there is a very important part here that this clean agent or FM 200 is not harmful for humans or people inside the room. That's why you can use it in rooms in which people exhaust. Unlike CO two, which can kill people because CO two will cause people to don't have any kind of oxygen inside the air, so that way, in this case, they will die out because of the leakage of oxygen or due to the lack of oxygen inside the room. Now let's see this inside our band. You can see this one, for example, in the mechanical engineer, as you can see here, and you can see we have a cylinder closet. This cylinder closet is the one which contain the FM 200, which you can see it is outside the room or very close to the room, you can see here, as you can see, and this is the server room and IT room. And as you can see, they are protected by 40 kilograms, for example, here, 40 kilogram FM 200 gas suppression system. So for example, if a fire occurs here, this fire will be killed by using the clean Asian system FM 200 or by releasing this gas inside these rooms. In the training room which you have seen, you can see, we have a sprinkler or water based system. Design this system, the mechanical engineer. The mechanical engineer, the one who decide clean agent or foam or gaseous systems like clean agent or water based system or any or CO two system. This is the one who design these systems. Now, in the end, if we have any system, what are we going to do as electrical engineers? If we have, for example, water pumps that need electrical power, we provide this power from UBS system. This is pretty important because this is a very important and critical load. We don't provide it from normal panel, we provide it from UBS because it's a very important or critical load. Also if we have, let's say, a panel for firefighting that gives signals and then activate the gas suppression system, then we need to provide electrical power to these panels using the UBS panels or UBS wreck system. 102. Introduction to Disconnect Switches: Hi, and welcome back everyone to another lesson in our course for electrical design. In the previous section or in the previous videos of our course, we discussed the mechanical loads like evac system, bombs, and et cetera. Now in this particular section, we said that we need disconnect switches. We need disconnect switches so that we can cut power from our motor or any other equipment during maintenance. So in this particular section, we are going to discuss. First, the meaning of disconnected switches. Then we are going to discuss the rules inside the NEC NEC standard, and then we are going to look for first rules. When do we need disconnected switches? That is the first thing, number two, then we are going to discuss the rules for sizing disconnected switches, for motors, and non motor applications. Of course, using the N EC standard. And also, we are going to look for the sizing for fusible which means disconnect switch with over current protection and no non fusible disconnect switches without any kind of fuses. Now, this will be a long section. However, you are going to learn a lot of rules from the NEC standard, and you are going to learn a lot about the disconnect switches, which, of course, will increase and strengthen your own knowledge in electrical design. Let's start first by understanding. Why do we need a disconnect switch? Disconnect switches in general, according to NEC, the definition is a device or a group of devices or other means by which the conductors of a circuit can be disconnected from their source of supply. What does this even mean? For example, if I have a motor like this one, motor. Let's say this motor is a single phase. This motor will have its supply from a panel from an electrical panel. Now we need this motor, we need to connect it like this to this panel. Now we need a device. This device is called the disconnect switch like this one will be like this. This one will help us to disconnect our motor or our device from the source of supply, which is our panel. This disconnection or way of disconnecting our supply can be in two different ways. The first way that it can be a device like this one. A disconnect switch like this one, which is on and off in order to disconnect our motor or any or each component from the supply. Or instead of using a disconnect switch, we can have a motor like this one with also the two conductors going to the panel. Inside the panel itself, we will have our circuit breaker, which is used for over load and short circuit protection or specifically short circuit protection to be more specific for motors. Now, this one here, also the circuit breaker can act as a way of disconnecting our motor from our supply. Now, the question is, when do we use this one? When do we add a device that acts as a disconnected switch, and when do we use the circuit breaker inside our panel as a way of disconnecting our loot? These are two different ways and each way has its own rules inside the NEC standard. We will see this inside the next video of the rules, okay? For now, why do we disconnect? This disconnect switch and sometimes called a pull out switch or a shut off switch is a device that ensures that the electrical circuit to the AC or air conditioning unit, for example, can be easily and completely interrupted. Now, also it provides power isolation during routine maintenance or repair work on your own unit. Now, for example, if you look at an HVAC system, the outdoor unit, for example, you can see it like this. You'll see a weird box like this, this weird box. You'll see that this weird box takes a cable going to it like this, like this one, and a cable going out of it to the H va unit, or the H unit or the air conditioning system. This device here which you can see is a disconnect switch. Which is used to. When we turn it off, we will isolate our component or equipment from the power supply. Now, the discx switch is needed for HVA components, water heaters, exhaust fans, hand dryers, and et cetera. Now, this one can be also a single phase or a three phase switch, dependent on what, dependent on the load which we are discussing. And we will learn also in the next lessons about the catalog or catalog of the Semens company. In which we are also going to size our components using this catalog, or we are going to select our disconnect switch from it. Now, each switch will be on one circuit or on one line in the panel. So in the previous lessons, we discussed the lighting design or lighting system design, and we added the wiring, we added the circuits. And also, we discussed normal sockets, and we added our circuits. Now, for the disconnect switches, since we are talking about a larger loot like a water heater, and v, an exhaustive fan. All of these will be designed based on one circuit or one line in the panel. So for example, if I have a room like this one here, and we have a heater here, for example. I'm going to install for it a disconnect switch. The disconnect switch will have a simple like this one, for example. This disconnect switch, when I say this will be on just one circuit or one line inside a panel, which means the water heater, for example, will be connected to one circuit breaker inside that panel. The circuit breaker only controls one component. When I call it, I will sll it dB first floor, L one, or line upper one. For example, We will see this in the next lessons four after we discuss the disconnect switches. We are going to see this inside the AutoCAD program software, so don't worry at all. Now for a three phase, so when we have a single phase, we say L one, L two, L three, line one, line two line three. Now when we have a three phase, then we will need three lines. We will need AVC, the three phase, three preaker, or 13 phase breaker. ABC or RST or whatever it is the three phase supply. In this particular case, we will say L one, three, five, l246, which means line number one, line three, line five, two, four, six. Now, why do we do this? Because inside the panel schedule, as we will see later again, inside the course. We will see that when we say L one here, representing phase A, and L three representing phase B, and five representing phase C. Similarly, two will be phase A and B, and C, as we'll sal it. When we say when we write it in this format, we means that it will take three lines, one from A, one from B, one from C. Now, the first rule inside the NEC say that all fixed appliances, which include air conditioning units must have a disconnecting means within site from the equipment and from the location at which all conductors enter a building or a structure. To be to summarize, all what you say, what does this even mean? It means that you see that we have here our component or equipment. The distance between a disconnected switch and the equipment should not exceed 50 feet. This 50 feet in the metric units will be approximately 15 meters. You should have a disconnect switch at a distance not larger than 50 feet. That is what it means by within sit. When I'm working on this air conditioning unit, I can see it is in my sit this disconnect switch so that no one can play with this one and kill me. Now, inside here means that there are no obstractions like walls that will prevent a view of that schic switch from the equipment location. Now, an example for a disconnect switch like this one here, you can see that it has an age capacity ambrage rating, how much pair it can with a stand voltage at which is operating a single phase or a three phase disking switch, and if it is designed for motors, you will find that it can be suitable for a ten horse power motor. We will see how are we going to select this and you can see it is from the non fusible family. It does not have an over current protection inside it. Now, the NEC also in 100 and t gives you an identification of a disconnecting means. When we are installing our disconnecting means, shall be legibly marked to indicate its purpose unless located and arranged so that the purpose is evident. The marking shall be of a sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved. Now, also the marking here should identify the purpose of each piece of equipment. For example, it doesn't just say motor, but just to give us more indication like motor water pump and not lights, lights for front lobby. So be more specific for the piece of equipment it is protecting. So for example, if we have a motor like this one, we have a disconnect switch here, right? So this disconnect switch, I should say, for example, protecting or use the for motor or protection of a bomb or whatever. I should indicate what does it do exactly unless this disconnect switch is located and arranged so that its purpose is pretty evident. You don't need to add any marking here to represent what does this disconnect switch do. Number two, you'll find that inside the NEC in 110.22 or Article 110, You'll find that this one is another rule says that in other than one or two family dwellings, the marking shall include the identification of the circuit source, that supply the disconnecting means. What does this even mean? It means that if you are in a one or a two family dwellings, you are not going to do this. If you are in a multi family dwellings, more than two or an administration building or a commercial building, one which contains several panels, more than one electrical panel. Usually in one or two family dwellings, you just to have one panel. That's why by logic, this disconnected switch will be connected to this specific panel, right? Because we don't have except one panel inside our family dwelling or one or two family dwellings. Now, if you have more than this, you will usually have more than one panel. You can have LPA, Lighting panel A or lighting power A, Lighting panel P, for example. In this particular case, you would like to understand where does our disconnect switch take its power? Does it take it from panel A or does it take it from panel P? That's why it says if you are in other than one or two family dwellings, when you have more than one panel, you on the marking itself, it should include the identification of the circuit source, that supply the disconnecting means. Which means that for example, here, you can see that branch circuit supply for disconnect originates at panel LPA. So what does this even means that the disconnect which takes its power from the panel called LPA. As you can see it's connected to panel LPA, as you can see. And also for panel LPA, for example, you can see it also says LBA originates at panel MDB or main distribution panel, which means that this one takes its power from main distribution port MDB. That just helps us to identify the circuit source. All of these information are used when installing these component inside our system. Now, what I would like to mention here, this is some rules which we have seen in the previous slides. Now, I would like to see how does a disconnect switch mean. This is from this YouTube channel, and I like this one, so I would like to mention some parts regarding this. If you look at this one, this is a central H Vax system, which is platonic, which we use as duct inside our house, and we have seen it before in the H Vax system videos. Now, this one has a disconnect switch, as you can see a disconnect switch close to it. So I don't need any markings because this one is actually pretty obvious that this one is used to control this equipment or this central H VAC system. Now, if you continue, let's look inside this one. So if you look inside this one, let's look like this. Here, specifically, if you open it, you will see here this part here. What does this part even mean? If you look carefully, you will find that we have two inputs and two outputs. For example, the electricity going here like this, line and neutral, from the supply from the panel itself, and we have here line and neutral, going to our H V component. Now, as you can see, it is already an open circuit right, Now, if you would, if you would like to operate our component, we need to connect the line with line and the neutral with the neutral. Inside the disconnected switch, we have this small component, which you will see right now, which makes a short circuit between line and line and line and the neutral and the neutral. Let's look at it. You can see this component here. Let's look at it like this. You can see it installs it like this. In this particular way, you have made a short circuit between the line and line neutral and neutral for our equipment, and now it is in the on position. Now, as you can see, we can see here, it is saying clearly on position, which means that this one is installed correctly and the electrical power is supplied to our disconnect switch. Now, as you can see, we can also reverse this one. If you look like this, let's look at this one here. If you take this one and invert it like this, if you look carefully here. Sorry, if you look carefully here, you'll see this is the o position. You'll see now when we inverted it like this, you'll see here and off position. What does this even mean? It means that when this one is installed in this particular position, it is in the off mode. You can make it in honor of position by controlling this one. Be this one here, let's get back here. Because what will happen in that win I inverted, it will be installed on this upper section. Look at here, look at this part, this one here, look at it carefully here. Like this, you can see that the metal part or the metallic part is connected to the lower part. Now, if you invert it, like this, you can see that the metallic part is connected to the upper part here at this particular pose, not in the lion and neutral and connecting them together, but connected up here indicating an opposite. You can see that there is an opening here. When you are connecting it here, it will be in off position. If you are inverting this one and connecting it down, it will be in the on position. This is one type of the disconnected switches. Other than this, there are others which use a knife in order to you drag it down in order to turn it on and off as you would like. You will see this inside the Siemens catalog. Now, the disconnect switch, you can also find this disconnect switch inside your own house like this one here near the HVA component or near the water heater. Now, for example, if you look at this one particular one here, you'll see that we have two inputs. Let's say, for example, line and de neutral. This one is coming from the supply or our electrical panel. If you look down here, you'll find that we have two wires here, one and two. These are the two wires, let's say line and de neutral, which is going to our H component or air conditioning system. Now, between this, this particular one is called a disconnect switch, a fus disconnect switch, a disconnect switch with an over current protection. Now you can see that where is exactly these fuse. This one here, which you can see this metallic part is fuse. This one is also a fuse, and you can see it enduring in installation. You can see all the electricity goes down here like this like this, and this one here, this one here. Now, between these two between line of blow and line of the air conditioning, we have a small metallic part. This thin metallic part and thin metallic part. These two metallic parts is a double pool or a two pool disconnect switch. In each pole here, you can see one pole, two poles, two poles, line and neutral, and in these two poles, we have this fuse here, which is used as an over current protection. When the current exceeds a certain limit, these we will pur and break down in a certain point, and then you would have to replace this fuse. Now, for example, for the exhaustive fan inside your house, you can have an exhaustive fan with a disconnect switch for it also in order to turn it on and off. Or if it is a very small exhaustive fan, you can actually use a unit switch like this one, a switch, a general use switch like this one, like the lighting switch in order to turn it on and off because it is considered as a small loot. 103. Requirement of Disconnect Switches: Hey, everyone. In this particular lesson, we would like to look at when do we need a disconnect switch, according to the NEC standard. Previously in the previous lesson, we talked about how the disconnect switches, how do they work, and why do we need them? Now, let's look at the rules for disconnect switches. In section or Article 422, specifically for 102.31, this connection of a permanently connected appliances. Now, in this particular sesion, if you have a permanent connected appliance, like, for example, if you have a refrigerator or you have a washing machine or whatever, which is fixed in its location. Now, let's say, for example, this particular machine is not over 300 volt empire. The power rating does not exceed 300 volt per or 1/8 horse power. How are you going to select the disconnect switch? Or do you need a disconnect switch first or not? According to the NEC, say that if you have permanent connected appliances, not over 300 volt or 1/8, then the branch circuit over current device, shall be permitted to serve as the disconnecting means, where the switch or circuit breaker is within site or loable in accordance with one and 10.25. Now, what does this even mean? It means that you don't need a separate disconnect switch. You don't need a disconnect switch for this device. In this particular case, you can actually use the circuit breaker inside your own panel as a way of disconnecting this device. However, there is one condition that this circuit breaker should be within sight. It means that within 15 meters from the equipment, or it should be loable. It means that I can add a lock on the circuit breaker, so no one can turn it on during the maintenance walk. Let's see this. For example, if you have a device or an equipment or appliances, then one of our 8 hours like the smator here, for example. In this particular case, you can use actually the circuit breaker, discecte mean, the circuit breaker inside your own panel. If it is within sight, if I'm within 50 feet, sorry, 50 feet, or 15 meters. With so I can see it without any kind of walls or any obstacles which prevents me from seeing this breaker. If you can't see it or there is a wall here, for example, all you have to do that you add a lock on the circuit breaker. Like this one here, you can add the lock on the circuit breaker for for a single phase, for example, in order to prevent anyone from operating the circuit breaker when I'm working on my equipment. This is the summary. If you have less than 1/8, you don't need a disconnecting switch. All you have to do you can use the circuit breaker inside your own panel in order to turn off your own motor, for example, and if it is within sight. If it is not within insight, you have to add a lock inside this circuit breaker. Now, what if it is over 300 volt and beer? If you have over hundred volt and beer, again, the circuit breaker can be used as its connecting switch if it is with inside or loable in accordance with 110.25. Like this, for example, if you have a device like this one, and equipment over 300 volt empire. If it is close to the panel, then you can actually turn on and off or use this one as a disconnecting switch. The circuit breaker inside the panel itself as a way of disconnecting this one. If for example, there is a wall like this one here from the device or appliance to the electrical panel. If there is a wall, for example. In this case, you need to add a lock here in order to prevent anyone from operating it. Grade. Now, what does lockable disconnecting in 110.25, you'll find that the lockable here, it means that we can we add a lock here on the circuit breaker. In order to prevent anyone from operating it, we lock it in the open position. No electrical power reaching our equipment. The third rule is that what if I have motor operated appliances over 1/8 horse power? What should I do in this particular case? If you have a motor, then you are going to need a disconnected switch. For a motor, you need a disconnect switch, and this disconnect switch shall comply with 4,000.109 and 430.110, or 400 and section, which is related to motors inside the NEC standard. Now, you can see that the disconnect switch must be within sit, that should be beside the device here. Or if it is not within sit, there is a wall, for example, then you can you must lock it in the open position using a lock. You don't use the circuit breaker inside the panel. However, you use a disconnect switch, comply with f 130 and for 30.1. Now, we will talk about this when we look at the sizing of disconnect switches. We will talk about these two sections. When we talk about the sizing of disconnecting switches for motors in the next lessons. Here, there's an exception. If you have an appliance, more than 1/8 horsepower and provided with a unit switch, the circuit breaker can be used to be out of site. Now, what does this even mean, un switch? Switch is, for example, like this one here. UN switch with a market of position that is a part of the appliance and disconnect all ground conductors can be used as a disconnecting switch as you can see here. What this even if you have, for example, a washing machine, a dishwasher, for example. This one has an on of post poten, for example, like this. A post pot, for example, that you can press in order to it on and off, or you have, for example, a switch, or you have a one like this one, which indicates if it is on and off, which is a part of our appliance, then you can actually use this one as a way of disconnecting your device. Here for motors, for example, as you can see, in motors, a disconnecting switch in article for hundred and set. Again, we are not talking about sizing. All of this, I'm just giving you general rules of window I need a disconnect switch, and window, I use a circuit breaker from the panel. It's say that if you have you can use a separate motor disconnect switch, which is like this one here. This one here with a knife, which you can turn it on and off by drawing this down or up, you can turn it and off this motor. This is a disconnect switch inside in 50 feet or 15 meters within the distance between it and this motor. You can use this one as a way of disconnecting. Or if you have a motor controller like a variable frequency drive or any way of controlling the speed of the motor. This one has a disconnection inside itself, right. The controller motor controller disconnect can also be used as a disconnecting switch. If it is if it is inside within sight from the motor location. You can use a motor Discon traits like this one, size it specifically for the motor, or you can use a motor controller. But the most important part that these two must be within site. There is also four in section 440, if you have a code connected equipment. What does this mean? If you have a small air conditioner or a refrigerator or a freezer or whatever it is, and you can plug it inside the receptacle and remove it from the receptacle. This bug and receptacle way can be used as a disconnecting means. What I mean by this, if you have, for example, and this will be the most case. If you have, for example, a water heater like this, this water heater will have a blug like this one here like this. And you can plug it inside the receptacle of the wall, like this one, for example, you can plug it in in and out from the wall. This way, which is called blug and receptacle can be used, can be used as a disconnect mean. Because you can use this one in order to disconnect the water heater completely from the wall. When we are designing the water heater with a disconnect switch, you can actually use a power socket in order to in order to plug in this water heater instead of instead of using a disconnect switch. Now, if you have a motor, for example, like this one here, you can see 100 horse power motor in a second floor and we have its control in the second floor. Then since if you are working on this motor, and you can see the disconnected switch, then this disconnect be capable of being locked in open position. It means that I can lock it in the open position and no one can turn it on when I'm working on this machine here or this motor. You can see all of the rules are exactly Similar to each other. You can see that if you have a device and and you have a blug and receptacle, you can blog it inside the receptacle and remove it. You can use this as a disconnecting means or a disconnect switch or a disconnecting way. If you have, for example, a motor within side, then you can add a disconnect switch close to it. If it is not w side, it must be locable so that no one can work. There are some exceptions for this rule that if you have if you have a location of the disconnect switch for the motor is impracticable, impracticable, or int, introduce additional or increase the hazard to persons or property, then you don't need to add a disconnect switch here, or any industrial installations with some safety procedures, then you should also you don't need to add a disconnect switch. However, in this particular case, you can use the circuit breaker or a disconnect switch not within site, but it must be locked. You can see again, you can see it must be logged in the open position so that no one can turn it on and off. Again, for code and the blog connected motors, exactly like I have said before, if you can unblock it from the receptacle like this one here, like a water heater or refrigerator or whatever, then you can actually use this one as a way of disconnecting your own motor. Now, if you have a motor stationary motor, more than 40 horse power, or 100 horse power AC, 40 horse power DC, or 100 horsepower DC. You'll find that the disconnecting switch shall be permitted to be a general use or isolating switch, where it plainly marked, don't operate under loot, like this one here. What does this even mean? If you have a large motor like 100 horse power, this is a pretty large loot. And if you are going to use an isolating switch like this one here, you should add a label like this or a marking saying that do not operate under load. So you should not even use this one as a way to turn on and off. Under the loot. When this one is operating on and off, you don't just close it like this. You can't do this. Why? Because the isolting switch is not capable of being used in these particular cases. If you look at isolating switch in our course for electrical substations, you'll find that isolating switches do not operate on the loot. They operate under then loot condition. It isolating switches are operating at loot condition. What I'm going to do in this particular case is that I'm going to switch off the circuit breaker first from the panel, and that the power is cut off from this motor, and then I'm going to switch it off. Then I will start doing maintenance on the motor as you'll see. Great. We talked about these rules. Now, we would like to see what I'm going to do for disconnect switch in motors, for example. In the disconnect switch of the motors, you will find that number one, we have a circuit, let's say this is a three phase motor. We need number one, we need conductors that are going to go all the way to our motors. We need branch circuit conductor, which are used to or the three phase wire that will carry all the current reaching to the moot. That is the first thing that we need to size inside our course. Number two, we need also to size our overload overload, which means that if our motor takes a current, more than what is designed for, we need to add an overload protection device so that it can disconnect our moot. Number three, we need also a disconnected switch in order to turn it and off and off when we are doing maintenance to our motor. This disconnect switch is not designed for protection. It is designed for maintenance, isolating our appliance or our equipment from supply. Now, this disconnect switch can be in two different ways. One with fuse protection, as you can see, group of fuses, short circuit protection or over current protection, and other which is fuse less or without any or non fusible disconnecting means without any kind of use. So the next videos, we will see, how can I size one with the fuses and one without fuses using the NEC standard, and also using the s means cattle log. 104. Disconnect Switch Ratings - Siemens: Hey, guys, and welcome back to our course for electrical design. And this lesson and the next three lessons, we will discuss the disconnect switch configurations, ratings, and other properties, which you will see inside the Siemens catalog. And by knowing this information, you will be able to strengthen your own knowledge in reading these catalogs for industrial about disconnect switch and their different definitions, which you can find inside the catalogs. So starting with the first thing that we can see all the time, the amber rating. So what exactly does mean? Inside the Siemens catalog, you will find that we have generally two types of switches, which is the general duty and heavy duty, which we are focusing here on that course, and there's also the polted pressure type, which you can see right here. Now, these are listed by the underwriters laboratories, U the underwriters laboratories is simply an organization that provide industry standards for new products that are being given to the market. So simply they are an organization that provide the standards for designing products suitable, for example, for our electrical engineering or our electrical applications. Now, for example, if you look at any of these, which is general duty or heavy duty, for example, each one has a specific by rating. What does this even mean? It means that the current rating, which can or the maximum continue was current, that it can carry without any causing any kind of damage or any kind of deterioration or exceeding the temperature rise limits. For example, if I have a disconnect switch of 60 pairs, it means that this disconnect switch can take this or handle this 60 pair continuously without any kind of damage, without any kind of reduction in its own lifetime. Now, general duty, for example, inside the assignments company, have a rating of 30 s, 60 pairs, 100200400600. When we are selecting our disconnect switch for an application, we need for us to find that we will need a specific current, and based on this specific current, based on the appliance, which we are trying to select a disconnect switch for it, then we are going to look for the nearest disconnect switch from these numbers. Now, the heavy duty type, also 30, 6,000, and et cetera, as you can see, higher ratings, and also te the similar ratings at the general duty. Your question will be, what are the difference exactly between a general duty switch and heavy duty switch? We will see right now. The last type is called the polted pressure which has found is in all of these higher ambrige ratings. Now, the second one, we have seen number one, we have seen the bare rating. Number two, we have seen or we are going to see. Right now the short circuit withstand ability and voltage rating. This will give us the first difference between the general duty and the heavy duty types. What does this even short circuit with standability even mean? It means that this safety switch will be able to withstand how much short circuit current or the maximum olt current that it can withstand. So in this type of switches, you will find that the general duty, for example, has a maximum short circuit current or with the standability of 100 k s. So it can withstand up to a fault current of 100,000 pairs without any kind of damage. However, the heavy duty has a higher short circuit with atadability of up to 200,000 pairs. So number one, when we are looking in our application, we look for B rating, and we will learn about the rules of selecting the ber rating of our application, and then based on this one, we are going to look for the disconnect switch, which is giving us this suitable ber rating. Then the second part or second property, which we are looking for is simply the short circuit with atandability. Usually in my own non industrial applications, we will have the general duty will usually be enough. Now, the third property which is voltage rating, and this is very important. What kind of voltage our switch is operating at? The voltage rating must be at least equal to the circuit voltage. For example, if I'm operating at 240 volt, for example, then I need switch that can withstand this voltage. If you look at the categories here, you can see general duty, heavy duty, volted pressure, volted pressure is not discussed here. It is in higher applications. My own concern in this course with general duty and heavy duty. Now, as you can see, general duty, for example, can operate at 240 volt AC and 250 volt DC. Now, for example, in other applications, if you have a 600 volt AC, then you can't use the general duty. In this case, you have to go to the higher level, which is heavy duty, which is having 240 volt EC, 600 volt AC, and 600 volt DC. Now, of course, this voltage rating, which we are going to select must be higher than the circuit voltage. If we are operating at 240, we can select 240 volt AC or 600 volt EC as you would like, but never lower than this rating. As you can see here, 600 volt can be used on a 480 volt circuit. But a switch rated at 240 must not be used on a 480 volt or an over voltage will occur on this type of switch. This one can be used 240, 480, no problem at all if it is selected for 600 volt EC, and we will see this inside the catalog later in the next lessons. 105. Circuit Configurations of a Disconnect Switch: Hey, everyone. Another part which is important we're looking at the disconnect switches inside our Semens catalog is the circuit configurations. What I exactly mean by circuit configurations? The circuit configuration, which means that how many poles is our loot required. What I mean by exactly how many lots, how many poles our loot needs. Now, you can find that we have different configurations like two pole, three pole, two poll, two wire, and et ce mini configurations which you can see here. And exactly what does this mean? It means that these configurations, which you can see right now are dependent on the loud itself, what kind of loud, and the supply connected to it. For example, a three phase module will require a three pole supply. Now, let me explain what I mean exactly. Like here, for example, if you look at this one, three pool, and you can see we have one, two, three, three inputs, we can say A, B, and C or the three phase or R, S and T, or for example, red, yellow, blue. Whatever you would like to call the three phase system. Any of these will be exactly the same. So we have a motor here like this one here. Let me show you, like this one here, we have a three phase motor that required a three phase supply. So in this case, you need three terms, one, two, three, or we call them specifically three pools, one, two, three. We'll see this in the next slide. You can see that they are connected to each other. You can see this dotted line, mean that all of them turn on and off exactly at the same time together. It means that if this one is on, then this one will be also on and on. If this one is off, then all of them will be off. You can see this dotted line means that they are connected inside the disconnected switch with each other. Now, for example, you can have a three pole like this one. This means that we have a conductor like this, and we have a switch, and then we have another conductor that goes to our moot. Now, in another one, we can have this weird shape. You can see that we have the same configuration here, this is the switching part, and you can find then this curved line. You can see this line here, this curved line. You can see this configuration a lot not in circuit breakers in electrical plans. You'll see this one specifically this curve this S shape. What is exactly, this one, representing a fuse, which is our over current protection, which means that this one is the three pool and having a fuse inside it. This one is fuseless, fuseless. Or a non fusible disconnect switch. This one is fuse or a disconnect switch with an over current protection. As you can see, a fusible three pool, as you can see, exactly the same. Now, this is for a three phase application like a motor. What if I have a single phase, for example, a line and neutral, for example, like this a two pool for a single phase motor. Like an H Vax system. You can see non fusible. There is no fuse here. However, we have here this curved line representing fuse. Now, these are not only the configuration, there are more configuration dependent on the application itself. For example, the 66 wire, for example, is used for a two winding motor. If a motor has a two winding insolid, we can use a six supple configuration. Now, let's look at the poles here. Again, poles representing how many wires, that a switch will disconnect at one time. If you look back here, you can see that here two poles and they are connected together because these two can disconnect all together. You can see three poles, they can be disconnected together. Now, a three phase like this one here, you can see here one, two, and three, three input or three phase, St, going to all of this is our disconnect switch, and you can see the three phase going to our motor like here. Between them, there is a curved line. The three curved line, which is a, one, two, three, you can see this metallic part. This is our fuse. Now, as you can see, as we said before, the three poles or the three circuits are mechanically connected together, which means that they connect and disconnect the line and lout simultaneously when the switch is operated. Now each pole, as you can see, is fed for over current protction and as seen right now. I hope you now understand the meaning of poles inside the disconnect switch and also the meaning of poles inside the circuit breaker. It is exactly the same concept. 106. Switch Throws of a Disconnect Switch: Every one, and lesson, we will discuss the switch throughs for a disconnect switch. Now, this is the third lesson in the Smenz catalog for disconnect switches. Now let's look at switch throughs, what does exactly mean? A through is a term, which are representing how many or number of a different position that's a switch has, which means how many different circuits, it can connect a given wire two. Now, we will see right now what I exactly mean. The switch can be a single through, double through or multiple through. Now, the single through that you can see right now is exactly what you see or what we discussed before we can see all of these. All of these are single through. Why? Because we have only one connection. It can be or two states on and off a state. This one is opened of a state and on a state, it will be connected to one supply. We don't have any other choices. We have on and off one supply and of position without any supply. Now, in the in the more complex one, which is instead of having single through like this one connecting to, let's say we have line or a supply like this. We are connecting to it like this. It is on by connecting here to this position, so that we will be like this, a short circuit, and this position, which is of position. Now, if we are talking about a single through, or a single pool, double through. What does this mean as if we have two supply like this one, like this one, and we have another supply, let's say supply A, supply B, like this, and we have this one like this, put it like this. And it can have several positions. It can be connected to this one or be connected to this one. I can have it like this. It can be connected to supply B, or it can be like this in this position, or it can be even in this position here. It has on of and on. You can see we have three positions. Double through here, it means it can be connected to two different circuits. If we have, for example, a three through or a triple, then we will have a cord supply like this with another point here in which instead of connecting here, we can go and connect like this. It all depends on how many different circuits do you have. Now, the same idea here, we can have a double pool double through DBT T. What does this mean? It means we are connecting two wires to two different circuits. This one here, you can see a single pool. Now, what if I have a double pool, like, for example, a line and the neutral from main supply? And we have another line and neutral from emergency so from emergency source. In this case, I need a double poll do through. Why? Because we have one, the first through and the second one. Each pool can be connected to this one or this one. This one can be connected here or here. As you can see, it can be switched. Both of them can go to, let's say, for example, this one, neutral one, and line one. This one is neutral two, and this one is line two. When these two are in the position number one, it connected to neutral one and line one for first supply. If it is in the second position, since they are connected mechanically, then this will go down here to the second supply. N two and two. All again depends on the application which you are working with. And as you can see here, other configurations, which you can see here, double poll do t, which is double through, which we are see like now. You can see double pool, which means we have two points like this one, two poles, single phase, for example, three t or triple through, which means we have three supply, one, two, three, one, two, three. There can be a three pool like a three phase motor, and triple through. We have one, two, three, one, two, three, one, two, three, three circuits for a three phase motor. Now, another 14 double through, as you can see here in reality, it will not be on and off only, like the single through which we have seen before. It will be three positions of position, not connected to any circuit, on position, connected to circuit number one, O position number two, which is connected to circuit number two. As you can see, double through are used to transfer loads from one power source to another. For example, if you have a critical piece of equipment which often needs a pack up power supply in case the main main power supply fails or needs maintenance. For example, this one is from the grid and this one form your own pack up generator or electrical generator. In this case, you can switch between these two by using this type of switches. As an example for a motor that connected from grid, supply a grid and supply B from the second friend, which is our electrical generator or backup generator or emergency generator. So you can see the handle can be in the middle position, which means that both of them are of this one. It is not connected. Handle in the center means like of position, not connected to A and not connected to B. However, if you do like this, if you handle it up on position like this, it means we are connecting to power supply A, and the other one is not connected at all. We have two ways to double through of the disconnect switch. One from going to supply E and the other one can be connected to supply B, but they are not connected at the same time. As you can see, we can connect to supply B, and this one will be in open position. If you put the handle down. Mechanically inside it, they are having an interlock between them. They cannot be power supply E and B cannot be connected together, one of them at the same time. Now, as you can see, double through switch can be used to connect a single power supply to either of two loots. For example, instead of having one supply, like here, for example, we have two supply four and one loot. The reverse can happen. We can have like this, loot number one, loot one or motor one and motor two, as you would like to call them, and this one have this position like this and this position like this. We have here, let's say we have here, our supply. You can see, for example, this is the single pool double through. You can see it can be connected to loot one or loot two, instead of connecting to supply one and supply two. 107. Catalog Number of a Disconnect Switch: Hey, everyone. Welcome to the last lesson regarding the disconnect switches using Siemens catalog. We will see here in this lesson, the catalog number of a disconnect switch, and you will learn a lot about this lesson. After this lesson, we will start learning about how to size the rating of disconnect switch according to the NEC standard, and also according to the Siemens catalog. The catalog number. Usually, you'll find if you look at the catalog number, you will have this weird configuration, HF, three, two, six, and et cetera. What does this even mean? You'll find that this one is composed of a different part, P one until part eight. You can see, then F, then three, six, four, n, and, et cetera. What does this even mean? Let's take it step by step. So Part one, what does this even mean? H. It indicates the switch type. So if you look at it by logic, means heavy duty. So according to the Catholic s, we find that we have LG, H, dt, dt g. So let's take them step by step, so you can have a general duty, and we said it can withstand up to 100 k pairs, and we we have seen heavy duty, which you can withstand up to 200 k pairs. We have DT, which is a heavy duty type, but with a double through, which can be used for two sources or two loots. This one is exactly the same, but the general duty, which can be used for two sources. Now, all of this, you may ask me how I going to select this dependent on the customer itself. What kind of loot it have? What does the customer requires. Now, the lowest one, which is L, what does this even mean? It is a general duty, ten k A IC max. What does this even mean? The ten k is a ten k pairs or amperage. I see representing interrupting capacity. This is the maximum short circuit current that this one can interrupt. It can interrupt up to ten k current. You can see it is a smaller one than the general duty, which you can withstand up to 100 k, and this one up to 200 k pairs as a short circuit current. Now let's look at the next one, part two which representing F, py logic means a fuse or non fused. If it is a fused one, it will be F simple and if it is non fused, it will be n f. Now, the third part here, it means three p. Let's look at it, indicates a number of poles, which means, as you can see here in the catalogs, it can be one, two, or three poles and a neutral, if required, is not included in number of poles. This is important. We have one, two, three poles. If you have a three phase and a neutral, like for example, a star connected motor with a three phase and requires a neutral, then it will be three poles, it needs a three poles, and the neutral will be needed on the side. It is not included in the number of poles. Now, part four, part four of the catalog number indicates the voltage rating, this one number six. If you look at the catalog itself, you can see voltage. If this number is one, meaning it operates this voltage here. If it is this number two, this one, two, 240 volt, six, 600 volt. This one, for example, a 600 volt, as you can see here. Part five of the catalog representing the switches current reading. Let's look at part 54. If you look at the catalog for party five, you can see the pridge here. If you are having number one, 30, 60, hundred, and et cetera, as you can see here. Part six here, which we have talked about, the neutral, whether a neutral is included with the switch or not. If no neutral is needed, then you'll find here nothing here. It is completely meted. However, if we have a neutral, you'll find an n simple like here, for example, which means we have a neutral here. Now, what about R and CU? Party seven representing type of enclosure, like this one here. You can see that r means type three r, outdoor type four stanss steel, non metallic industrial, all of this. And part e. Here the example indicates a safety switch in a NMO type three door enclosure. We will see exactly what I mean by this. For example, if you have a simple application, which does not have any severe conditions, then you can use this one for indoor applications and this one for outdoor applications. This one is used in industrial areas. This one can be used in marine marine applications, and this one can be used in the T communication applications. Again, the catalog itself of the manufacturer will give you more details about this. Now, you may ask, what does the Type one type three R type four, where does it even come from? It comes from NMA, which is the national electrical manufacturers association National electrical Manufacturers Association. Now, part eight of the catalog is used if this type of disconnect switch is used for special applications. For example, you can see all of these applications are special applications. If this use is needed for it. If it is not needed, then you will not find anything here. In our course here, we don't need any kind of special applications. Now, the general duty, for example, as you can see here, which we are usually organ to use, is a type one, which is used indoor use. Like this one, you can see a very simple disconnect switch, type one enclosure used in indoor applications, which is not suitable for any weather conditions. The general duty two pole and three poles are also having a type three enclosure for two and three poles, which is used for outdoor use. Why outdoor because it has higher degree of protection against a falling rain as you are going to see in the next slide. You can see in the door, it's type one according to NMA and type three R for Odor. You will usually find that the difference between type one, type three, and all of these usually dependent on the ingress protection or I B number, which are presenting the degree of protection against has two numbers, one for dust or mechanical stress, and another one for against the water conditions. We will see this in the next slide. Now, this one for Exam C is exactly similar to it. However, it has a higher degree of protection. This is for the general duty, which are most likely going to use inside our design if I go to select it from the Siemens catalog. Now, as you can see, this one is also be able to withstand some formation of ice on the enclosure without damage. However, it is not used for protection against dust or any other conditions like you have seen right now. Now, what about the numerating type one, type three R and all of this? You can see this slide summarizes all of this. You can see here merting one, which is type one, type two, type three R, which you can see here. Type four and four x, type 12, which you can see here. You can see, for example, type 12, it has a IP rating of 52, and this one is used for industrial use or industrial applications, which provides a protection from dust and non crusive liquid drip. And you can see that this one, for example, number one, which is used for indoor. You can see it has a very low IB rating because it is intended for indoor use. 43 and three r, three are here, general duty also. This is the weather resistant. IB 14 has a higher IB, as you can see, and I said of one, and in sad one and zero, one, four mechanical, and 04 liquids. You can see here or not mechanical, solids to be more specific protection against solids and the protection against liquids. You can see that the protection against Solid is exactly the same. That's why it is not suitable for dust. However, for the protection against liquids, as you can see, it has a higher degree of protection against liquid, that's why it can be used for falling rain. Now, as we can see in the other ones, we have others dependent on the application. When you see this ratings, NMA rating one, two, three, or whatever, you will understand that these are equivalent to different IP and are used for different applications and environments as you can see here. 108. Disconnect Switches for Non-Motor Applications: Hey, guys, and welcome back to another lesson regarding the disconnect switches. In the first lesson right now, we are going to start designing the rating for disconnect switches for different applications. In the first video, we are going to look for the disconnect switches for non motor applications. When I say non motor applications, this is very important. I mean that we can have a pure resistive loot, for example. Pee resistive load like a heater, for example. That is one of non motor applications. Another one which can be an air handling unit, which we discussed in the HVAC videos plus a heater. Y, this one can be considered as non motor applications. Now, you may ask me the air handling unit itself is a fan. However, when I say non motor application, I mean that the dominant loot is a non motor. You will find that, for example, in an air handling unit plus a heater. You can find like for example, a heater can be, for example, ten k what? This air handling unit can be two horse power, for example, which is equivalent to two approximately 1.5 kilowatt. You'll find that this is a combination of flutes, a resistive plus a motor. However, this heater here is more dominant. You can see ten kilowatt, much bigger than 1.5 kilowatt. That's why we consider this one as an approximately a pure resistive loud. We don't consider the starting current of this fan. Now, this will become more clear in the next to slides. So in the NEC standard, say that in section 424 control and the protection of a fixed electric space heating equipment. And when we are talking about fixed electric space heating equipment, we are talking about, for example, a heater inside a room, like a wall mounted heater or a ceiling mounted heater, whatever kind of heater inside a room. How can I size a disconnect switch for this heater? Or, for example, a heater, which has a higher kilowatt, much higher kilowatt, and in addition to a fan handling unit or a air handling unit, air handling unit, or fan coil unit? In this particular case, this one is considered as a fixed electric space heating equipment. Now, how can I cite this? You can see that according to the NEC, means or disconnecting mech be provided to simultaneously disconnect the heater, the motor controller, and the motor control here talks about the small fan with the heater itself. AN supplementary over current protection device ol fix and electric space heating equipment from all ground conductors and blah, blah, blah. If you have more than one source, then all of these disconnect switch must be grouped and identified as a multiple disconnecting mean. Now and each one should disconnect the grounded conductor or hot conductor that it controls. Now, the most important part here which I'm looking for is the m beer rating. The disconnecting means specified in this section here. Shall have an ember rating not less than 125% of the total load of motors and the heaters. Again, this motor here is pretty small compared to the heater, so we neglect the inrush current or the starting current of the motor. Because you will find that when we design it, you'll find that the motor itself or the disconnect switch can withstand the starting current of this motor, even if it is existing. In the end, what we learned, let's say, for example, I have a heater and a motor of, let's say, 15 kilowatt. Like this. This one, for example, a three phase loot, a three phase loot. What I'm going to do when I find that we have a to like this, all I have to do is that I get the current. The current in this particular case, I phase the phase current, which I'm looking for, will be like this, will be the apparent power divided by three, multiplied by V phase. Like this. The apparent power will be the real power P divided by the power fact. If we assume that this loot is a resistive loot, then the power factor will be unity. If I have the exact details of each loot of the resistive and the motor, then I will divide each one by its own power fact and get the current of each one and then add them in the end. Divide by three and V phase, we look for the phase voltage, for example, 220 volt as a phase voltage. From here we can get the current, Then after this, you will get rating. The rating of the disconnect switch will be 1.25 multiplied by i phase. Now, remember, this rule is used for fused or fusible and non fusible disconnected switch. Again, this is for non motor application. This is very important in motor applications. This will be different from this one. Now, why they are exactly the same because we don't have inrush current. Most of the loot is an electric heater, which again even withstand the inrush current, it doesn't matter if there is no difference in sizing between fusible and non fusible as you will see in the motors for example, you'll see the difference which I'm talking about in the neckest lessons. This is the rule. Again, if you have also another section for 125.19, if you have a fixed industrial process heating in a plant, for example, the same exact rule will apply, which is 125 of the two tt current. This is the design of a disconnect switch for fixed electric space space heating equipment. So for example, if you have a water heater and you have a disconnect switch for it, you are designing it using this rule. If you have, for example, an air handling unit with a heater, then you are going to design it with the same exact rule. Now, let's look at this example from the Siemens catalog. So the first step that you may ask me, where did the 125 rule even came from, According to the NEC, according to the NEC standards, all conductors, all conductors must not be loaded by, according to NC, all conductors, must not or shouldn't be loaded by more than 80%. This is also the rule for circuit breakers. Circuit breaks should not be loaded by more than 80% of its rating itself. For example, if I have a circuit breaker of 100 pairs, then this one at normal conditions, it should be loaded by only 80 pairs. Why? Because of the heating effect? Because the circuit breaker is inside the wall itself or inside pucks and this circuit breaker due to the flow of current through it, this will generate heat energy. That's why according to the NEC, we should not load it by more than 80%. This, in order to do this, what we have to do is do the reverse. For example, if I have a circuit of 80, then all what I have to do that I will take 80 like this and multiply it by 1.25 oversizing our circuit breaker. So that it will become 100. Then if I loaded it by 80%, I will get back to the original load of 80 pairs. That's according to the NEC. Also inside the NEC itself, it says all conductors, the conductor itself. The cable should not be loaded by more than 80%. That's why we also multiply the conductors by 1.25. Now, of course, this rule of 80%, there are some exceptions for circuit breakers, which I'm going to talk about in the circuit breakers section of our electrical design course. But for now, we will just assume that we are not going to load it by more than 80%. These condectors also include the disconnect. That's why when we multiply 1.25 by the foolot current, we are only loading it by 80%. That is the whole purpose of the 125% role. As an example, if we have a three phase heater, and it is operating at 240 volt, this voltage here is that three phase voltage. 240 volt. This is not my country volt voltage in a different country, other than my country. The current rating or the full loot current that it takes is 45 pairs, as you can see here. I would like to size my own diskin switch. All I have to do that I would say 1.25 multiplied by 45 s, like this. It will give us a switch that carry f six ps. Now, of course, in reality, we will not find 56 p, you will find a higher value. And also according to the place at which I am going to install this disconnecting switch, I found that this switch will be used indoor. And there is no unusual conditions like an industrial plant. That's why a tie one enclosure general duty is sufficient for this application. If you look at the catalog for Siemens company, you'll find that we have a 240 volt non fusible because the customer didn't require any over current protection, or we don't need any over current protection. Now here we can find that it can be a two pool or a three pool. For example here inside the catalog itself, and bear rating can be 30, 60, 100, 200, and et cetera. Now we need 56 pairs, which is 30-60. Now, of course, when we are selecting, we select always the higher value, which is 60 pairs. We are going to select this one, 60 pairs, and you'll find that we have no unusual conditions indoor, then I'm going to choose a general duty switch. That's why the first sample here, g, general duty. Number two, we don't need any fuse. That's why it's called nF, non fusible as we discussed before in the previous lessons. The third element is three. Three here means three pool, three pool, y three pool because we have a three phase heat. We need three pools. Then we have here two, and then another two. The first one indicates the voltage rating. Two, which is 240 volt, suitable to my own application of 200 and volt and 240. That's why we select two. And then we have the mpires, which is the other two, which is 60 empires, as you can see here. This one. Great. We learned about the design of most likely non motor applications or purely resistive load. Now, what if we have a fixed outdoor electric deicing and snow melting equipment? In some countries, they have this equipment in the outdoor location. In this particular according to the NEC 426.5,'ll find that all of these equipments should have a way of disconnection from all ungrounded conductors. Now you will find that here, if it is accessible to the user, the circuit breaker or the switch can be used as a disconnecting means. This one shall be of the indicating type and B capable of being logged in the open position. Here in this particular case, we don't actually need a disconnect switch. We can use the circuit breaker inside the panel, and we can lock it in the open position to prevent anyone from operating it. For cord and connected equipment, if it has a cord and blog or attachment blog, which we can or we can connect it to the receptacle. Rated data to in and pairs or less an 150 volt face to ground, then it can be used as a disconnecting way. We can use this one cord and blug, which we have seen before as a way of disconnecting our equipment from the from the electrical supply. Now, another important part, what if I have a cord and block connected equipment. However, I cannot access it. Let's say it is behind the wall. Then in this case, I can use the circuit breaker, and the same time, I can lock it in the open position. 109. Selection of Non-Fused Disconnect Switch for Motors: Hey, everyone. Now let's start discussing how we are going to select a disconnect switch according to the NEC standard. With an fused or a unfused disconnect switch or a n fusible disconnect switch. A disconnect switch for a motor without any kind of over current protection along with the disconnect switch. This is very important and I would like you to focus on these lessons because you are going to find a lot of rules regarding the disconnect switches for motors. Let's start by the first one. In section 430 inside the NEC standard and bear rating and interrupting capacity. You can see a motor and a disconnect switch. My own goal is, how can I side this one? How can I select a disconnect switch for motor? It says that the disconnecting means for a motor circuits, rated at 1,000 volt nominal or less, shall have an amber rating not than 115% of the full loot current of the motor. What does this even mean? The first step that I need is the amber rating. How much pre should I select this disconne how many pairs this disconnect switch can handle? The first one is i rating in pairs for the disconnect switch. How can I select it? All we have to do is 1.15 multiplid b, the ot, the fot current of the moot. Now, there is a very important question here. You ask me, where can I get this full loot current? This is a very important question. Where can I get this full loot current? You'll find that you have two ways as I'm going to show you right now and you should follow which one or which way according to the type of the moot. Now, let me show you what I mean exactly right now. The second, the property which I'm looking for, for a disconnects which connected to a motor is the horse power rating. The horse power rating, which is suitable for our motor. For example, if I have a ten horse power motor, then I need a ten horse power diskin switch. That is pretty simple. Now, there is an exception which is pretty important here. I have said right now that the rating, 1.50 motor bla by the fold cur. For example, 60 am which is suitable for this rule, and a ten horse power according to the horse power rating. These are the two components that I need from when I selecting my own disconnect switch. However, there is an exception inside the NEC say that if you have an unfused motor circuit. What does this mean? A motor circuit without it with an disconnect switch, a sce switch without an over current protection. This disconnect switch have a horse power rating, not ly then the motor horse power. For example, if this 110 horsepower, I selected at least ten horsepower disconnect switch. In this particular case, you can shall paper method to have an ampair rating less than 115% of the full loot current of the moot. It means that if you select a disconnect switch, suitable for the horse power rating of the moot, and you didn't satisfy this rule. You didn't have 1.50 motor blood by foot. For example, let's say, for example, this rating is 1.15 motorblo by foot, let's say it is 61 pairs. And you selected, for example, a ten horsepower and 60 pair, a disconnect switch. In this particular case, it is correct to do this, even if the disconnect switch carny does not satisfy the 1.50. Why? Because the NEC standard gives you this permission that if you select a correct horse power rating, you don't need to satisfy the 115% of the full loot cart. Now, you may ask me, why do we have this exception here? Because you will find that in reality in reality or in many companies, most likely you'll have a horse power rating and the current rating will be less than 1.50. Now, there is an important part here. Again, we have said this exception, and we said we need horsepower and 1.15 in general. Now, look at this rule here. No lead than 1151115 or 1.15% or 1.15 of the full loot current. Now, my own question for you, where can I get the full loot current? Now, one way say, hey, I can get the full loot current from the Im plate itself. For example, this, motor will have an plate like this, and it says, hey, the full loot current or full loot pair is, let's say 18 pairs. Then I will look at here, I will take this 18 pairs and multiply it by 1.50, and then I will select this connect switch. Now this actually is incorrect. Now, why it is incorrect? Because the NEC does not allow you to do this. The NEC say that. If if you have a motor, this is a general rule. There are some exceptions, again, but the general rule say that. In the NEC standard or the N NEC or National Electrical code, you'll find that there are some tables. So tables with full loot current rating, full loot current, and logged router current. You will see them in the next slides. These tables say that you can or you must in order to get the full current rating, all you have to do that. Let's say I have a ten horse power motor. I will take this ten horse power and go to the tables inside the MEC standard. Then I will look for the followed current from these tables, not from the name plate. So the national electrical code say that you have to size. You use tables for the full loot current inside the NEC, to size conductors to side, disconnect switch and short circuit and over current protection. These three we got them from tables, not from the name plate. Now you may ask, when do we use the nameplate, use the nameplate only when you are sizing the over loot protection. Why? Because the overload protection is specific for each motor, special for each motor. That's why you will look at here and see the sizing of it from the NEC or from the nim plate itself. I hope you now understand the difference. This is a general rule. Tables for conductors, disconnect switch, over current protection, N plate, for overload protection. But again, as you will see right now that the NEC doesn't make us rest in peace. Of course, we will have an exception. For example, we have a torque motors. In this type of motors, then you don't use the tables inside the EEC. You are going to use the motor name plate current in this particular case. It will be 115 of the motor name plate can. There are more exceptions that I'm going to show you in the next lessons. But for now, this is one of the exceptions right now. Now, you may ask me why torque motors are not obtained from the tables because torque motors are usually designed to operate at the stale condition or the locked router condition, which means as if they are operating at the starting current, always at the starting current of the motor. This type of motors have a large amount of current unlike normal types of motors. That's why when you are designing for them, you have to look at the current rating, which will be pretty large on the name plate itself. This is a special case. Great. We talked about full loot current and motor nameplate. In general, as I said before, the motor fu loot currant. Here listed in tables 430.24 7248, 250. All of these are full loot current. You may ask me what the difference between these tables, one for a single phase, 14a3 phase, 14 DC motors. For example, for 130.25 is for full loot, as you can see table 43.25, inside the C, full loot current, for a three phase alternating current motor or a three phase motor. As you can see here inside the stable, you will find the horse power, and you'll find that here, different voltages, as you can see here, three phase voltage, and this is for induction type motors like square cage and wind router, and this one for a synchronous type with the unity power factor. Great. As you can see here, what I'm going to do that if I have, let's say a ten horsepower and let's say ten horse power motor, and operating, let's say at 200 and let's say 240. What I'm going to do is that I will go to two horse power here, ten horse power, and then go like this, and I need 240. If I look here, we have two, 208, 230, and et cetera. Which one would I choose? I will choose this one? I know you will ask me, why did I choose this column here? Because if you look carefully here, you'll find that the voltage listed are rated motor voltages. As you can see, this current listed shall be permitted for system voltages, ranges of this to this, this to this, this to this, and et cetera. It means that for 115, it can be used for 110-120. The 200 volt is used for range 200-20, two, 240, just 1 minute. T 240 this range here, from here to here, this range. Now, the closest one to 240, which is this one is the 230 column here. Again, this one here, for example, is 440-480, and et cetera. Great. This one is the closest one, so I will go down ten horse power, go like this. 28 and pairs. In this particular case, I'm going to say that for a ten horse power motor, it will be 28 pers. This is a full loot current. I will take this one and motored by 1.15 to get the current rating required. Great. So this is how to use the tables. The tables are used for conductor sizing, the over current protection, the disconnecting switches. All of these are used using these tables. Now, the overload, again, as I said before, according to the name plate itself. For example, as you can see in this type of motors, you can see this is a three phase motor. As you can see the voltage, you can see 208 to 230, 460. What does this even mean? It means if you are operating at this range, then the equivalent equivalent current is this one. If you are operating at 208 volt three phase, then you will have 180 pairs, the full loot current. If you are operating at 230, then you will have 166. If you are operating at 460 volt three phase, then you will have this 83 pairs current. This is how you get the full loot current from tables. This one is used for over loot protection. Now, the exception, as I said before, one of the exceptions is the high torque, like a torque motors or motors that are held to be less than 1,200 RPM, low speed, or a multi speed motors, like fans. All of these must in which we will use them blade current like here, like this one. Great. Let's look at the NEC tables, which I said before about or talked about the three here. You can see 400 sty 25 is a three phase motors, full loot current for a three phase motors. 248 is a full loot current, but for a single phase motors, you can see exactly the same, but single phase voltage. If you look at the table, you can see for DC motors or direct current motors, as you can see here. Now, let's have an example before we finish this lesson. An example on selection of a non fusible disks with all of this non fusible. Let's say you have a ten horse power operating at 440 volt. Now, what I'm going to do is step number one. This is a three phase moot, great. And it is a ten horse power and the voltage 440 volt. Step number one, I need 1.15 multiplied by current rating rating like this. I need the current. Where can I get the current? I will get the current from the tables of the NC, from 103 phase table, ten horse power, 440. Let's look at this. You can see number one, ten horse power motor, induction type, ten horse power, ten horse power, operating at 440. Let's look at where is 440? There is no 440 you can see. 440 to 480 is represented by this one. 460 volt, as you can see here. I'm going to look for go down here, go down down down, go like this. You can see the equivalent one is 14 pairs, four under 6010 horsepower. I'm going to use 14 pairs like this. From the table, fold carat is 14 pairs. Now, apply our rule. It will be minimum switch carot is 16.1. And the horse power reading that I need is ten horse power, ten horse power. Now, how I'm going to select this, let's look at this table. Now, this is from the APP catalog for disconnect switch. Another catalog for disconnect switches. Non fusible disconnect switch. Now, if I zoom in to make it more clear, magnify like this, As you can see, we have 20 ampa am ating 20, 30, four, 60, and et cetera, and you can see a three phase or a single phase, what voltage you are operating at and et cetera. Now, number one, we are operating at 440 So the closest one is 480 volt, three phase 480 volt, horsepower. Now, I need right now 480 horsepower. I need at least ten horsepower rating because our motor ten horsepower. You can see for 480, you had ten, 15, 20, 30, 40, 2040, and 50 n, et cetera. If you look carefully here, for under vault, this one is stable ten horse power. Now let's look at the current rating, the current rating, if you go up here, to 20 MPS. What if this number is less than 16.1, it doesn't matter why? Because if you remember the exception inside the NEC, that if you have a horse power rating, it will be sufficient. This ten horse power and 20 is the one which I'm going to use. O6f3, which is this one. I hope you now understand how can you select a non fusible disconnect switch for a motor application. 110. Selection of a Disconnect Switch for a Combined Load: Hey, everyone, and welcome back to our course for electrical design. And on the previous lessons, we discussed how to select a disconnect switch, for a motor, and we said that how to select specifically a non fusible disconnect switch. Now, what if I need a disconnect switch for a combined loot? I will explain now what I mean, a combined loot, non fusible. Section d and 30 inside the NEC, for front 30.110, say that for a combination lots, more than one loot, where we have two or more motors. We have two motors or more, more than the three, four, five, six, whatever the number of mot, not just one, two or more motors. Or motors used together in combination with other loots, like, for example, a resisting resistance heater. Which means that if I have a motor with the heater. Remember here, when I'm saying this, the motor load is pretty large compared to the heater. Unlike the air handling unit condition, then the mb rating and horse power shall be determined as follows. We need two conditions here. We need a beer rating and we need horse power rating as we did in the previous lesson. We said that the B rating for a single motor is 1.15, multiplied by the current rating of the motor from the NEC tables, and the horse power should satisfy the horse power of the load. Now, what if I have more than one motor, how can I do this? Now this is very important and there are some steps that you have to follow in order to get the values. The horse power rating. The first step. The rating of the disconnection shall be determined from the sum of all currents, including resistive loot at full loot condition and at the logged root condition. The combined full loot and the combined loot current can be considered a just one single motor. Now you'll ask me, what does this even mean? Let's say we have a motor like this. Motor one, and we have another motor motor two. I would like to select a disconnect switch, four poses of them, one disconnect switch, that control these two. The step number one is that, let's say we have a ten horse power and two horse power. I would like to select a disconnect switch. Step number one, get the full loot current of motor number one. Get full loot current of the motor number two. Get the log dot current of moton number one, get the log root current of motor number two. Now, where can I get these values from NEC tables? We said before in the previous lesson, we talked about NEC tables in which we can get the full loot current. The full loot current can be obtained from NEC tables. I take ten horsepower, go to the tables, get full loot current. Take this horsepower, go to tables, get full loot current, pretty easy. What about the locked rooter current or what does even the locked rooter current mean? Locked router current is simply means that the current that the motor takes or withdraw when it is starting when it is in the starting condition. When the motor is starting, we are talking about the inrush current or the starting current of the motor. This type of current is called the locked rooter current. When we are designing this conecto here, we need this type of log d router current for more than one load. Now, you may ask me, where can I get them? There are tables for the NEC again from which you can get the log d router current required. Great. Then what is the next step that you are going to get the total full loot current by saying fot one plus i fot two, and get the locked router current, I log router one plus I logged router two. Then you are having now a full loot current and locked root current, and you can now consider both of them just one big motor. And then you continue that design process as I'm going to show you right now. Don't worry in the end of this lesson. I'm going to give you a numerical example on this sizing of more than one motor from the NEC. Let's continue. Let's say we have now the combined ft current and the combined locked or current. What I'm going to do that. You can see fot cannot obtained from tables, which we talked about before, and the log router is also obtained from another tables here for single phase and three phase from the EC. Great. Now, what if I two or more motors or as loots cannot start simultaneously. Great. Now, what I'm going to do in this case, then the largest sum of logged router currents of a motor or roof motors, they can be starting simultaneously. The full and the full loot can as current loot had paper method to find the equivalent logged router current. What does this even mean? When I get the loged router current, rating for the one big motor. When I have, let's say motor one, motor two, motor three. When I say log router one, log router two, log router three. When I add them together and have one big log router current, it means that I consider all of them, that there is one condition that all of them will start at the same time. All of these motors will start together. However, in reality, if you are designing for a system, and let's say the system gives you a maximum number of motors that can start. For example, say that the motor one and motor two the worst case at which they will start together. Then the locked router current will be I locked router of the first one, which will start and I router two of the second motor start, and if the third one is not starting, but it is already in operation, then you are going to add I ft three. Why? Because we don't consider it as starting with the other motors. That's why you can see that group of motors that can start together and the full loot cant of other current loots that can be used the summation of these two is used to find the equivalent log draw current. In the end, if you don't know, we just assume that all of these motors start together. Now, let's look at the tables for the log d router current. The two tables, one for the single phase, as you can see here. You can see single phase, locked d router current, for selection of disconnecting means. You can see here also a table four maximum locked router current, for disconnecting means. Great. Now, we now have a loged router current, we have full loud current. Now, what I'm going to do next, this is the question that we are looking for. The question for a disconnect switch for a group of motors, as you can see here, for a group of motors, then the pA rating will be 1.15 multiplied by the foot total. Similar to the single motor, but just we take the total foot current and the multiplied by 1.15. Now, there is an important part here. What if the small motors which is not found in these tables, let's say the NEC tables does not contain small motors. Now, how can I get the loged router current? For example, if I get back here, What if I have a small motor that is not existing inside this loged ro table, the rating does not exist or a very small horse power. What should I do? The NEC say that if you have a small root motor that is not found in these tables, you can just assume that the logged router current is equal to six times the full root cart? If you don't have this information here. Now, let's have an example to clear all of this confusion. This example is from the EC itself. It says that if you have any N installation consisting of one horse one, five horse powers, we have a five horse power motor, three horse power motor, and the two half horse power motors. We have two. Half horse power and half horse power. We have a ten kilowatt heat, great, ten kilowatt heater. You can see a group of motors and the heater, great. You'll see that all motors are designed B motors. Determine the size of the disconnect means required for this combination lot. Now, what are we going to do? Very simple, or what we have, you can see all of them are 240 volt, 240 volt, three phase, all of these loots. So what I'm going to do that, I'm going to look for each one from the NEC tables. I'm going to look for if loot, four, five horse power, three horse power, 0.5, 0.5 looked root or current. Four, 54 power, three, 450.5 0.5, and the ten kilowatt heater is pretty sample. There is no fold and the locked router. They are exactly the same because this heater does not have any starting current. How can I get its follow? Is a fold is exactly the locked router current. No difference between them. How can I get its current pretty sample? All I have to do is the ten kat, power, divided by three, O root three. If this one is a three phase, root three, multiplied boy, 240. Multiplied by the power factor. The power factor here will be unity since we have a heater, which is a PU resistive, and the power here is ten kilowatt. F here, we can get the full loot current of this heat. Let's see what I'm talking about exactly. As you can see here for the heater, T at heater. You can see ten kilowatt, which is 1,000, divided by root three, which is 1.732, multiplied by 240, the three phase voltage, and perfector unity, which is one. Giving us 24, which is a full loot current, and the loged router current. Great. Now let's look about our motors here. Let's start step by step. This is for the loged router current. Let's look at the locked router. All of them are three phase. This is a three phase, and you can see design B motor. Perating at 240 volt, 240 means I'm going to select it from here. Great. First one is 0.5 or half horse power. This one, half horse power, equivalent two to one apairs. Great. Let's look half horse power to one ampirs. For the loged root current, as you can see here. What about the three horse power? Go down here, three horse power. If you go like this, you can see 64. As you can see three horse power, 64 loged root current. Now, what about five power, five farce power is just the one Bu mined two amperes, Minty two. This is for the root current. Great. Let's see this. Then I will get back to the previous slide, full loot current. Full loot current for each one, half horse power, 200 and go down, 2.2. Half horse power, 2.2. The horse power, go down here, three horse power, flood current 9.6. Five force power, 15.2, let's delete this, 15.2. Great. Now if you add, now you have full loot current for all of them, log d router current for all of them. Now, add all of these values together, you will get 53. Add all of these values together, you get all of these. As if we have one big motor with a full loot current of 53.3 and log d router current of 220 pairs. Great. Now let's get back to the Bravo slash. The first role say that 1.15, the main role say thats connect switch for a motor, not less than 115% of the combined load. We will take this 53 for load pair. Multiplied by 1.15, we need 61.3 pairs at the rating for the disconnect switch. Great. Now let's continue. Now we have the minimum ember rating that we need. Now, what about the horse power rating? We have one big motor. Which we don't know how much horse power. We don't know it's rating. All what we know is that we have a locked router current, and we have a full loot current equivalent to this mot. I need a horse power for my disconnect switch. How can I do this? I will do the reverse process. What do you even mean by this? The reverse process that I'm going to look for, the horsepower rating equivalent to 53, and horsepower rating equivalent to 220. So Let's see this. For example, if we have 240 volt, this is our three phase rating. Then I need 53.3. Amtor is 53.3. I'm going to go down here. So you can see here, 53.3 amperes. This is the full root cane. What is that higher value, the higher value or the next serve is 54. 54 pairs is equivalent to what horsepower, go like this, equivalent to 20 horsepower. This full loot current is equivalent to a motor with a horsepower of 20 horsepower. Great. As if I have a motor with a horsepower, 20 horse power. Great. What about the log d rotor case, 220. 200 and volt, to sit the range again, and then I need 220, go down here. 202, 220 is here. 162-200 and s two, I'm going to select the worst case, and I will go like this 15 horsepower. This means that the log d router current here is equivalent to 15 horsepower. The 15 horsepower motor will have this log d router current and the full loot current 20 horsepower, motor will have this full loot current. Now, when I design my disconnect switch, I will select it based on which hors power of these two. This one or this one. Pi logic, I will select the higher one so that it if I select a disconnect switch for 20 hos power, it will extend the normal fold current and it will extend the starting current. That's why that one horse power is the one which we selected. Great. We need 20 horsepower and about 61 pairs four rated current, which is 1.15 multiplied boy 53.3. Let's get here. We can see 61.3 and 20 horsepower. Now let's go to the ABB catalog, which we have seen before. Operating at what condition, 240 volt, three phase, like this. What kind of horsepower rating, 20 go like this, m. This one is 20 horsepower. You can see that 20 horsepower has an emp rating of 80, which will satisfy that 20 horsepower and even this minimum emp rating. I hope you now learn it and onto, how to select a non fus disconnect switch for the motor and compind loot, which is consisting of motors and resistive loot. 111. Selection of Non-Fused Disconnect Switch for HVAC System: Hey guys and welcome back to another lesson regarding the design of disconnect switches, for electrical systems. In this video, we are going to discuss how to select an unfused disconnect switch, a disconnect switch without fuse, for each vac system or heat ventilation air conditioning system. Inside the N EC 440 for air conditioning and refrigerating equipment. It says that if you have a hermetic refrigerant motor compressor, this hermetic refrigerant motor compressor, the one which you see right here. This one, you can find it inside your own refrigerator. If you look carefully at the refrigerator at the back of the fridge, Down, you will find this component here, this one, contains the compressor that compresses our freon or refrigerant gas, and at the same time, we have a motor. Now you may ask me these two are enclosed together inside the same housing here. Now you may ask me what the benefit of the motor. The motor itself, the electrical motor here, converts the electrical energy into mechanical energy. Required for the compressor in order to compress our gas. That's it. If we have this type, now inside the hermetic referent motor compressor, we will find that we have several components. We have the motor or the motor end compressor, and we have also fan fan like this in an H a system or an air conditioning system. We have several components. That's why we cannot design based on the horse power. We have to design based on the name plate settings. Find that inside the NEC standard, say that for a hermetic refrigerant motor compressor, the rated load current. Mark it on the name plate. You can see that we use the name plate shall be used in determining the rating of disconnecting switches, conductors controller over current protection or should circuit protection and over loot protection. In this specific case, when you have let's say a slate unit or an HVAC system, and this one has many components. No just one, it has a fan, it has an evaporator, it has in the outdoor unit, the fan in the outdoor ion. The compressors, we have several components. You don't use the values inside the NEC tables as we did inside or as we did before for motors. In this specific case, you have to use the name plate. For example, this is for and H vac system, central cooling air conditioning system. As you can see here, you'll find that we have the compressor itself that compresses our refrigerant or our on, for example, and we have also the fan itself, the fan motor, the fan that dissipates heat outside or cools down our refrigerant after compression. You'll find that it operates at 230 volt, and if you look carefully here, a 60 cycles, here, this is the frequency, and you'll find here the two settings which I'm looking for. One, you'll find here the full loot current, full loot pairs, or the full loot current. And you'll find here L R A, which is a log router current. If you remember before, we used these two inside the combination of loots for motors when we designed our disconnect switch. Find here the full loot current. You can see for compressor and the fan motor. Compressor, you can see it has a full loot current of 27 pairs, and the fan motor takes 2.2 pairs. This is the two folut currents taken by compressor and fan mote. Now, when I'm dealing with our electrical machine, I'm dealing with the total current, all of the current that our machine takes. In this example here, you'll find that 27 plus 2.2, we have a total current, fot current from the nim plate, as we have just seen, 29.2 and pairs. That is the full loot current of our machine and the locked router current 140, this one doesn't have a locked router current because it's a pretty small and neglected compared to 140. Great. Now, what I'm going to do right now. Before I tell you how to design disconnect switches, I would like to show you or help you understand another thing here in this name plate. If you look carefully here, you'll find that we have the minimum circuit pasity here, this one, and you'll see we have a maximum fuse size. 37 pairs and 60 pairs. What are these values specifically? The minimum circuit ambit, this tells you according to the manufacturer itself, tells you the minimum minimum conductor required. The minimum cable that you need must withstand 37 pairs, at least 37 pairs. That is the minimum cable that you need. Now the maximum the maximum use that you can install for this equipment here, which is 60 pair, the maximum fuse. So when you have an H VAC system, it is pretty easy to determine the cable and pretty easy to determine the short circuit protection or the fuse size. And remember, when it says fuse size, then you have to install a disconx switch and a fuse for it. You need to install a disc switch. And I will show you how to do this also in the nest video regarding the motors, and now also Now, let's look carefully how I'm gonna or where did we get these value. Let's get out of this. Let me open my own calculator here. Number one, you'll find here that we have 27 and pairs and 2.2, the total full loot cannot is 29.2, right, great. Now, where did they get the minimum circuit and be the minimum conductor required? Now, the first rule in the NEC standard say that when you are selecting your own conductor, it must withstand at least 125% of the full loot current or 1.25 of the full loot current. In this particular case, if I click here and 1.25, like this, which is the minimum according to the NEC standard, you can see I equal to t 6.5 per unit, a conductor according to the EEC rules of at least 36.5, which as you can see if approximated, it will be 37 pairs. That is great. What about the fuse? For fuse, the problem is that when you have motors for circuit breakers and fuse, there is a different way of designing them. What is the rule exactly inside the NEC? It say that if you have and this one is the one which is used here, if you have a non time delay fe. Let me show you right now what I exactly mean. If you open the NEC standard and you go where exactly inside the coot down here to the over current protection. Let me show you where exactly. Okay. Let's go down. Here exactly. You'll see that here, maximum rating or setting of motor pran short circuit and the ground default protection device. So this is related to the short circuit protection or protection against short circuit. Using a breaker, you can see we have an inverse time breaker. We have an instantaneous t breaker. We have the dual element or the time delay and non time delay. Here inside this one here, Is this air conditioning system, they use the time delay fuse. Now, as you can see here, if you have a time delay fuse, and you'll find that we have an induction motor, square cage, as you can see here, you'll find that the rating percentage of the full loot cant is 175%. When you are selecting a fee for a motor, it will be 1.75 multiplied by the full loot cant, which is 29.2. If you multiply this two together, you'll find that we have 51.1. Now, you can see that the fuse here is 60 pairs. Where did get this value? I will tell you right now. Inside the NEC, you will find that we have two values. Let's just slit paint here. You'll find that inside the NEC, we have ratings fuses, which you are going to see in the next lesson. These fuses are one of these 50 pairs. There is also 60 pairs. There is nothing between them. Now, as you can see here right now, that when we selected it, it was 51.1. It is here 51.1 pairs. That is the few that we need. But should I select the 50 pairs or should I select the 60 pairs. Now, if you look carefully inside the NEC standard, let's go down here. You'll see down here a rule. It's say that exception number one, where the values of the short circuit and ground fault protective device determined by table for 130.52, which is the specific table here. If you get a value, which is not corresponding to a standard value, similar to my own case right now, it's say that Then what I'm going to do don't correspond to the standard sizes, then m m a higher size, a higher size, or rating shall be permitted. What does this even mean? It means that you are going to select the next to higher value, which is exactly what, which is the 60 pairs here. My own size is 60 piers. This is the size that is selected inside this manufacturer or this manufacturer designed it based on the rules which I have shown right now. Now, there is another rule actually regarding the fuses. If you look at the NEC standard, you will find that If you'll find that it's called maximum rating, gas. This is the maximum rating, but there are some exceptions here like this one here. There is another exception. If you look at here, the rating of a time delay fuse. Shall be per method to be increased, so it can be increased. Bad shall in no case exceed 225% of the full loot current. It is here, as you can see, 1.75, but the exception that you can go up to 225%. Now you may ask me when this exception occurs. This exception is allowable if this exception occurs. W this exception is say that where the rating inside the table is not sufficient. This is not sufficient for starting cart of the moot. If this rating, which is 50 like for example, here, 51.1 emp is not sufficient for starting of the, that is not sufficient, you can go up to 225, but does not increase beyond this value. 225, multiplid by 29.2 fu cant, it will be 65.7 amperes. It will be 65.7 pairs. Now, again, this is the maximum value, 225%. This is 17 5%. Now, in no case, you don't exceed this value. You go to the lowest lower value, the next lower value. The next lower value is the 60 pairs. You can see the two rules in the end gives you the same design, which is the 60 pair fe. We have learned some rules regarding this mice. Now let's continue. We now learned that if I have an air conditioning system, I look to the nam plate because we have more than one equipment. Great. Then I will take the rated loot current from mice. Now, you'll see that if we have on the nm plate, a branch circuit selection current and a rated loot current. Rated loot current is similar to rated loot and pair, whatever it is exactly the same. If I look at the name plate undefined that we have a branch selection current, and we have the full loot current. Then which one I select, I will select the branch circuit selection. This is the current that I should select. Now, another one, which is for a multi motor equipment. This is also in the same section. If you have a multi motor that have a shaded pool or a permanent split capastro type fan or a plower motor, any type of these, then again, you are going to select the loot current from the name plate of the equipment. Great instead of the horse power rating. We use the name plate current. Great. Now let's continue. We obtained the current. I looked at the name plate. Let's say we obtained 29.2 mp as we have seen in the previous slide. Now, what I'm going to do right now, you are going to take this value and then you are going to sell it based on the name plate root rated loot current. Then what you are going to do that the mper rating will be at least 115% of the name plate rated loot current. What I'm going to say that I rate I rating for the disconnect switch will be 1.15, multiplied by the full loot current to 29.2. This is the rated c rated current for our motor. Now, there is again an exception similar to the exception which we have seen before inside the motors, that if you select a horse power rating from tables corresponding to the equivalent horse power rating, then then the current rating can be less than 1.15. Don't worry, I will explain right now how can we obtain the equivalent horse power rating. How can you get the equivalent or s power rating number one? You have the full loot current from the name plate, right? Great. It is 29.2 pairs. What I'm going to do is that I'm going to go to the NEC tables. With this 29.2 pairs, and then from the NEC tables, we have first full loot current, and we have the logged root current, which was 140 pairs. We have full loot current, and we have looked rooter current. I'm going to take this one and take this one and go to the NEC tables and get horse power equivalent two to 29.2 and horse power equivalent to 140 amperes. Great. Then if this one is not corresponding to a certain horse power, for example, If you find that this one, ten horsepower, and this is 15 horsepower, this ten horsepower, let's say 25, and this one is, let's say 35. If it is between two values in the table, 29.2, then you are going to select the next to higher value, which is 15 horse parts. We'll say that 29 corresponding to certify similar as what we did in the combination of loots in the previous lesson. You are going to do this four. You can see these tables for the full loot current rated loot current or the branch selection current. And table this for the looked router current. You get two values of the horsepower and look at it. You can see that if not corresponding to the current shown in tables, then the higher horsepower shall be selected as I did right now. Great. We obtained the equivalent horse power rating, and we obtained the minimum current. Let's get back here. L et's say that the equivalent horse power, let's say ten horse power after doing these rules. This is the equivalent motor, corresponding to this full loot current and this log router current. Then what I'm going to do that I'm going to select a disconnected switch, which can be suitable for ten horse power. Now, what if the current is less than 1.15 motor blo by 29.2, it doesn't matter because there is an exception here for a non fused that it can be less than 115 if the horse power is satisfied. This rule we talked about it before in the previous lest. Now, there is two. We ended now the design of this type of system, air conditioning or HVAC system. Now I would like to show you in general from the NEC standard, when do you use table values for the tables inside the NESC and when do you use the values in the name plate. The tables are general values. You use the tables all the time, except if you have a low speed motors or a high torque motors or a multi speed motors. Another exception is that if you have a multi speed motor, let's say a than with a multiple speed, then you are going to use it using the nim plate values. Also, if you have an equipment that has a shaded pool or permanent slate capacitor or a plower motor, you are going to use again the name plate values. Also if you have a listed motor appliance that is marketed with the horse power and fold current, then you are going to again use the nim plate current, not the horse power rating. Now when you use the nameplate nameplate are usually or all the time used for overload protection. Because the overloading is specific for each motor, the overload can be between 1.15 to 1.25, so we can overload our motor pi 15%. Up to 25%. Also dependent on the value, you are going to select the overload protection based on this value from the code itself. Now, the name plate, all the time, you select overload protection device from the name plate because it is specific to each mode or unique for each mode. Now, where the motor is marked with an amber rating, rather than a horse power rating, the horse power is assumed to be inside the table based on the amp rating. Anytime if you have an amber value and horse power value, you take the horse power the amp rating and go to the NEC tables and look for the equivalent equivalent horse power. Now, the exception or the window use name plate values. Also we use them inside the torque motors, which are designed to work in the stall condition or the locked rooted condition because they take too much current at the starting and they operate at the starting mode all the time. They are special type of motors. Also, if you have an EC adjustable voltage motors, these are also designed based on the name plate, not from the tables, and also valve actuator motor as simples, also designed based on the name plate. 112. Selection of a Fusible Disconnect Switch for a Motor Load: Everyone. Now we would like to learn how to select a usable disconnect switch for a motel swi designed non fusible. Now, how can design a usable disconnect switch? First, I'm going to design it using the Siemens tables, and then or the Siemens catalog, and then I'm going to design it using the NEC standard. So I'm going to design it using two different ways. We have the Dual horse power rating inside the Siemens catalog. Now, you're asking me, what do you mean by dual horse power? They have two horse power ratings for motor applications. The first, which is known at the dual horse power rated. Now, for example, a switch can have a standard rating of ten horse power and the maximum rating of 30 horse power. Now, you may ask me what does this even mean? If you're going to select a no time delay fuse without any kind of delay, then you are going to select based on the standard rating like the ten horse power. Like this one here, you can see that we have a disconnected switch with the fuse a pole here. You can see this is the simple of the fuse. Anne, you can see we have the supply. To line and neutral going to our motor here, and then we have a disconnect switch, fus disconnect switch, non time delay fuse. Non time delay fuse, then you are going to select the standard hose power rating. I'm going to show you an example in the next slide. Don't worry about this. The maximum rating of certs power like here, it is used if you are going to use a time delay fuse. There is a non time delay fuse, and there is a time delay fe according to the application itself. As you can see here, time delay we, you will use maximum horse power rating. Now, for example, you can see we learned that we have two types general duty and we have heavy duty, and each one of them have their own voltage rating. If you remember that the general duty has a short circuit rating of 100 kilo and pair, and heavy duty can withstand a short se current up to 200 kilo m pairs. Now, the horse power rating the ratings for general duty according to Siemens catalog, and these are for the heavy duty. We will see right now how we are going to select it. But before this, let me show you this. Let's get this down a little bit. You can see we have here IEC, triple NC, as you can see tribal R N. You can see this simple, which you can see here, is the simple of fe. This one is also simple of fuse according to tribal E, and this is also a simple of fee according to the IEC. That if you see any of these, you understand that these are representing our fee. Great. Let's go to the next slide. Now let's select a fus disconnect switch for a motor load according to the Siemens catalog. Number one, we need a fus a customer say that I need a fus disconnect switch, 4480 volt EC, three phase, 75 horsepower, which does not require a neutral connection. Great. The customer said that it needs an R K five time delay fuse for a potential fault current of 200 k pairs. The switch will be located indoors with no unusual condition. Say is number one. Since it say is a fault current of 200, a potential fault current of 200 k and pairs, then you don't use that general duty. You need to use the heavy duty as we discussed before. We need a heavy duty disconnect switch. Number two, we need it file, so it will be F not F. Also we need it for a 480 volt EC and three phase. Three phase, it means that we need a three pool, so it will be a three pool. Also we need it from 480 volt EC, and this will have a certain number inside that catalog catalog as we will see. Great. It needs time delay. When we said before, when we need time delay, we select based on the maximum horse power. And it is indoor. You can see we selected an indoor type, indoor type, number one. Number two, we said that we have a single phase, and we have a three phase. Now, we said before, what are we going to select? We have a three phase motor. We are going to select from here. Great. Number two. This one is, are you going to select it from the standard column or the maximum column. Well, I'm going to select it from the maximum column. How are you going to selected from the maximum column? Number one, I will look to the horse power eating. We have a 75 horse power motor. Let's go from the max because we need x y, because we need a time delay. I'm going to go down here 15, th, 60. We need 75. 60-125, we have our 75. Going to select the lower value or the higher value. Py logic, of course, I'm going to select the higher value, which is 125 horsepower. This 125 is corresponding to this type here, which is a 200 and pairs fuss. Like this, you can see 480 volt EC, heavy duty, since we have 2200 south and pairs. Now, as you can see inside the catalog itself, we will get that 600 volt fusible switch. Now I will say y 600 right now. First, the horse power, as we said, we are going to select for maximum column, because it said time delay, as you can see, because time delay, if it is said non time delay, then we are going to select from the standard here. The switch is HF 364 is selected and rated 4200 b. This one is selected, as I said right now based on this horse power rating. Now let's look here. Means heavy duty, F means fusible, three means three poll. Now, what does number six mean? If you look at the heavy duty, we have 120 240. We have 240 volt. We have 600 volts. You can see. We need 180 volts, 480 volt, which is here. Which one is suitable? Of course, the higher one, which is 600 volt. That's why we selected a 600 volt, which has a um bar corresponding to six, which I'm going to put it right here. And we have 200 pairs and inside the catalog itself, 200 pair is number four. This one is the one which is discussed in the previous lesson of catalog numbers of the semens for disconnect switch. In the end, how did I select it, 75 horse power, time delay, go to the maximum column between these two, which is this one suitable, which is 200 pair. Great. This is according to the Siemens catalog. Now, what about the NEC standard? Great. According to the NEC standard, we need a fusible disconnect switch, for a 480 volt ec, three phase 75 horse power, not needing a neutral connection. It said the same exact thing, R K five time delay f for a potential fold cent of 200 k m pairs. How can I select this? Great. We said a moot, write a fus moot. When I have a fus motor, we need to select them, the properties or the current rating based on the tables of the NEC. Remember in order to design a, we need the current. Where can I get the current? I will take this 75 horse power? This lovely motor, and go to the NEEC tables. As we did in the non fusible case. Then I'm going to look for 75 force power motor, a three phase for 180, and from the NEC tables, I'm going to look, hey, what is the equivalent, full loot current, corresponding to this two. When I do this, if I open the NEC, current, as we have seen before, we need 480 volt. 440 to 480 is corresponding to this column here. 4180, we are going to look at this specific column here. How much horse power, 75 horsepower. I'm going to go like this, this, and go like this. Find that the equivalent current is 96 pairs. This is a full loot current within the worst case according to the NEC standard. Great. We have now 96 pairs. Now, what are you going to do? We have 96 pairs. That is a full loot current. Now, the customer said, I need a time delay fe. We have seen before in the tables of the NEC, that if you would like to select a usable a use for a motor application, we say that we need to. If it is a time delay, it will be 175% of the full loot current. It will be 1.75 multiplied by 96, like this. This is from the NEC standard, this one. This table I have shown you in the previous lesson. 1.75 multiplied by 96y because you can see time delay 1.75, F since it is a motor, then it is induction motor or 90% or 95%? It will be an induction motor, a square cage or and two rotor like this one. But in this specific one, we know that it is a square cage. For a square L cage, you can see 175. That's what I did. 175, 1.75 motor blood by 96 amperes. Give us 168 pairs. Now, your question is, what is the fue that I'm going to select? I need a fe with a rating like this one. This one, we don't have a few of the size, so we are going to select the next standard size, which is 175. Now you are going to ask, where are these standard de values? If you open the MEC standard in Table 240.6 standard amber ratings four fuses and verse time circuit breakers. If you look at this, you'll find standard ber ratings, and we need 168, if I go like this. 168 is 150-175. Now, you are going to ask, should I select this or this one? You are going to select this one. Why? Because we said before in the previous lesson. That there is an exception inside the NAC standard, say that if the values do not correspond if the values selected by table 430.52 which is this specific table, Do not to correspond the standard size or rating of uses or breakers, then a higher size or rating shall be permitted. That's why I selected the higher value of 175 ampers. Great. I hope you now understand how can we select a disconnected switch for different applications with a fe or without a fe. I hope this journey inside this section helped you understand it well. 113. Disconnect Switches for Capacitor Banks: Hey everyone, in this quick lesson, we are going to select a disconnect switch for a capacitor bank. How are going to do this according to the NEC standard? In NEC 460 Section 464 Article 464 capacitors. It says that if you have a capacitor, if you have a capacitor bank, then the capacitor circuit conductors and disconnecting switch or disconnecting means, must have an pasity, not less than 135% of the rated current of the capacitor. How gana select disconnect switch, all you have to do is 1.35, multiplied by capacitor, the rated current of the capacitor. Great. Now, y 135 because you will find that the capacitors are manufacturers with a tolerance of 0% to 15%. What does this even mean? It means that when I have a capacitor of 100 kilo var, like this one, 100 kilowa capacitor. When it is manu manufactured by the manufacturer, it is not exactly 100 kilov. It can actually between 100 kilov up to 115 kilowatt. It can be in this specific fringe. I don't know precisely what the value or the maximum current that this capacitor can take. Is it between 100 or exactly 100 or up to 100 and fif 15 or between them. When we design our disconnect switch or conductors, we are going to take the s t case, which is 115 What we are going to do that since it is 100 kilovar, we take this value and take the i capacitor based on this value, and then I multiply it by 1.35. In order to accumulate for up to 1.15 or 115 and an additional overloading. We don't precisely design it at 1.15, we've done it more than this to give it more space or more room for our disconnect switch and conductors. Now, if you would like to get the current corresponding to a three phase capacitor, you can use this formula here. I capacitor is equal to k, multiplied by 1,000, divided by root three, multiplied by v. Now you may ask where did we get these values? This is pretty simple. We have a three phase capacitor Q is equal to root three. Multiplied by V line, multiplied by line. If we have a capacitor bank, which is usually connected in a Delta connection like this one. What we need is that, we need to find the current taken here. This line current. Now, how can I get the line current? All I have to do is that, I will take Q divided by roots, divided by V line. Now in Delta connection, V line is equal to V phase. You can see Q, multiplied by 1,000, to convert from kilo v to O, divided by root three, multiplied by V or our voltage. Great. Now we have our capacitie. Now, there is an exception here. By taking this IC here, I capacitor, then I multiply it by 1.35. You will get the current rating. There is no motor here, so we need just a current rating for our disconnect switch. Now an exception is that a sever disconnecting switch shall not be required where a capacor is connected on the lo side of a motor controller. Let's see what exactly means by this. We have, we have a motor here. We have a disconnect switch and we have a short circuit protection. We have here or the disconnect switch and the short circuit protection, like a fuse, for example, which is used, all of this used for our motor. Great. Then we have here our controller, the controller of the motor overload protection. Then we have at the motor, we have the capacitor connected here. Great. Now, this capacitor here does not require a disconnected switch. Why? Because this one adds a disconnect switch for all of them. Great. Now, because the capacitor, as you can see here, is installed on the load side of the motor controller. If you look at the motor controller, we have the load side and the supply side, and it will become clear from this figure here. If you look here, we have again, our disconnect switch with the fuse, motor, and this is the overload protection and controller of the motor. Now, as you can see, instead of connecting the capacitor at the motor here, after the controller at the motor side, we connected the capacitor, as you can see here at the supply side here. Let's at this to make it clear. You can see instead of connecting it, we connected here at the loot side. This disconnected switch can be used for all of this. Great. Now, if you have, if you have connected like this at the supply side here before the controller, you need a disconnected switch for it. Disconnect switch with the f as you can see here. This one does not require sch switch because this one is after the controller. This one before the controller, it requires skect sore. This is the exception inside the NEC. 114. Locked-Rotor Indicating Code Letter – NEMA - NEC: Hey, everyone, and us last one we are going to discuss the log router indicating cod letter, according to the ema and NEC or ema? What does this even cod letter, which is provided by Nema co inside the NEC standard, you'll find some tables, which I'm going to explain right now. If you look at a motor like this one here, this one is a 75 forse power motor, you'll find a small code provided here. What is this code, you'll find here cod g. You may ask me what does even cod G mean. G, what does this correspond to or what does this even mean? If you go to the NEC article for 130, you'll find that we have a logged router indicating code letter, like cod G. This is a designation used by the NMA or the National Electrical Manufacturers Association to classify electrical modors based on their logged router KVA, pair horsepower ratio. Let's see what I exactly mean. Before we explain it, you know that the loged router current is basically the current that the motor takes when it is in the stationary or in the starting position. When the motor is logged, It does not rotate and you are supplying it it's full lod voltage. Then in this case, you will find that it takes large current, similar to the current during starting. This is the large current is called the logged router current because you basically lock the router or when the motor is starting, it is also considered as a logged root. Now, this is a pretty large current. Now, some manufacturer doesn't tell you what the current taken by the motor. We need the logged router current for some calculations like, for example, when we design the disconnect switches. We need to translate cod G, which indicates the looked router KVA per horsepower issue into a value that we can use. I'm going to give you an example in the last part of this lesson. This code, as you have seen in the brief line, is marked on the name plate to indicate the starting characteristics of the motor. Now, look at this table he or before the stable like this one here, this is aother motor here. If you look at this motor, we can see figure down here, cod. What does coot M two cot and cod G? We have a table, nice table from the NEC, table for hundred 30.7, log drater indicating code letter. We have these coots. We have M, which we have seen right now, G in the previous slide. What does this even mean? It gives you how many kilo volt and pair, pair horse power of the mot. It gives you a range. There is no specific value. There is a range. When you gain a select between this range, select the worst case, which is 6.29 or 5.59 or whatever it is. What does this number even mean? Let's say this one. This one could letter A means 3.14. Kilo vault and pair, pair horse power of our motor. For example, if our motor is, let's say ten horse power, and it is a cod A, then the power taken or the S apparent power taken during starting is 3.14, multiplied by how many horse powers of our motor, which is ten giving us 1.4 horse power. 31.4 KV, KV, not horse power, KVA. By taking this and translating it to current, you will get the logged router carrot or starting cart. Now, let's see an example to understand this from the NEC standard. Let's say you have a 20 horse power, grad f 160 volt, three phase has an plate K volt and bad letter G. It has letter G. Find the maximum log router current for the smote. We need to find the log router current. How can I do this? Let's look carefully. Code letter g from the table here is translating into 5.6 to 6.29, and we need maximum log router current. Maximum locked router current is 6.2 ne. This is the maximum value or the worst case. Here, this one has 6.29 kilo volt and pair pair horse power. Now, this one is at 20 horse power, then to 20 horse power, multiplied by 6.29, KvA during starting. This is the amount of cern that it takes during starting 20, multiplied by 62.9, kVA. Now, then I'm going to take this value and translate it into a current by saying current or S divided by root three, multiplied by V line to line, like this. Let's see the answer here. Number one, you can see from table maximum value, 62 point as I obtained. Then the logged root or or the amount of power or apparent power taken during starting of the motor is how many horse power of the motor, multiplied by this value so that we can eliminate this horse power. Like this, 125.8. Now, how can I get the current? All I have to do that I will take this one, divide it by root three, multiplied by the line to line voltage. Now, as you can see, put it in the KVA in k here, so we put this one in kilo volt. It gives us 158 pairs. What does this even mean? It means that the starting current for the motor with the G 20 s power, letter g according to the NEC, will have a maximum value of 158 pairs. 115. Sizing of Disconnect Switches and Forming Power Circuits: Hey, guys, and welcome back to our lessons in electrical design course. In this part, we are going to now add disconnect switches and power sockets to our plan. So we learned in the previous lessons how to design the disconnect switches according to the NEC. Now, if you look to this plan, what I did is that I added more samples to finish our legend to save some time. You'll see here we have a power socket and we have some disconnect switches. One of these disconnect switches are weather proof, single phase disconnect switch, as you can see here, another one, which is weather proof, a three phase disconnect switch, a three phase disconnect switch, weather proof according to what we actually going to need in this lesson. Okay? Number two, I added some mechanical loads. Like here, for example, you can see some split units, a central split unit, which does not use chillers. It doesn't use a chillers. It uses a central HVAC system or a central split unit system in which we will have outside some group of outdoor units that are connected to all of these units which contain the evaporator, to our system here. They are connected to the outside units using duct. So we are connecting all of this using duct, each one of these units as plate units is used to cool these locations. And as you can see, we have also exhaust fan for this store here, and we have exhaustive fan that connect this exhaustive fan for the bathroom and this kitchen here. We have an exhaustive fan connected using duct to this location here or connect to using a duct to there's a bathroom here in order to take all of the odors from these room. We have an exhaustive fan in the end here and another one here, and we have another two here. Now, what are we going to do? We would like to add power socks to our system and our disconnect switches. The first thing that I will have to do or before I do this, you'll see that here I obtain the mechanical details. You can see direct expansion system, DX system, and this is the units which we have here. And the specs, you can see their quantity and the input power that they take and if they are single phase or a three phase system. And similarly, here you can see the exhaustive fans and their specs. So let's start the design process for this power circuits or these power circuits. So step number one, do we need any power sockets? So let's take this one here, copy like this. And to go here. Now, the first thing I need, I need some power sockets for, let's say, a washing machine, a dishwasher, a fridge, maybe a heater or a water heater. All of these require power socket inside our house. I'm talking about a residential building. However, if we're talking about here like a commercial building, maybe I need a water heater, a power socket for water heater, and maybe another power socket for the fridge. So that's what I'm going to do right now. So I'm going to do like this and Okay, so let's reside this one scale like this. Make it like this, okay? So one for fridge and one for the water heater. So I'm going to add the fridge. Let's say, maybe here, it will be a very reasonable location. So I'm going to rotate like this. Okay. Rotate and make this one orthogonal if e to make it like this, okay? Great. Now, let's move it. And if it Let's see, it's pretty large. Okay, no problem. Scale it again and select it. Let's scale it from here. Let's make it more reasonable like this maybe. Very reasonable. Okay? So one for the fridge here, a power socket or one circuit, specifically for our fridge. Let's copy this one or let's make it. Let's make a mirror much easier. Mirror. Select this first point and if eight like this. No, don't release it, don't erase it, move. Take this one, go all the way here, maybe. Okay. So let's just take this. And, Okay, so we have here, this one. Let's take this one a little bit. Like this, we can okay. Like this, if it let's make it like this. Take this one here, and this one, let's make it here. And this one, too. Then I'm going to take this one alone here and move, and make it like this. Okay? So we have one power socket for our fridge and one for our water heater. Now, before I continue, I would like to do another thing. Now, you may ask me what are you going to do that here I'm going to leave this one, okay? Okay. And let's just move them like this. And if e, bring them down a little bit, okay, like this. Okay. And then I'm gonna copy this. Okay, copy. Okay, like this. Okay. And then um okay. Move this one down here like this and move this one too, okay. Like this. And like this. Now, you may ask me what I'm going to do exactly what I'm doing exactly. What I'm going to do that I'm gonna sorry, skip first. Double click like this, take this part here, weatherproof. Okay. Then go here because we are talking about a kitchen. So of course, we need to add a weather proof one, right? Okay, let's move this one a little bit like this and take this one here, explode like this, and then plug here, let's say, power sock it normal like this, okay. Okay? And then this one double click here like this or first go to this one here. This one, um and look like this. Control C, card, double click here and control like this. Save. Now, let's see. So this one is the weatherproof one. And these two modes must change. Okay, one weatherproof and one other one weatherproof since they are inside the kitchen. So let's copy it like this and then rotate because the merrow itself makes the swan weird. So leave the swan, take the swan here. Like this. Okay. So we did what we need for the power sockets. Now, do we need any power sockets? I don't think that I need anyone. Unless it is needed, then I'm going to edit. No problem at all. Now, each of these power sockets, the fridge and water here, each one is on a separate circuit. And both of them are on a normal distribution port. So I'm going to go like this and copy this one like this, if it Like this and this one too. Now, let's look carefully here. The last one which we reach it, I think distribution port, FL 20. Let's look carefully this one was the last one that we walk it with. Okay, distribution port, FLT, right? FL 20 is the last one. So the next one is 22. So I'm going to go here and say to 22, and this one here, to 24. Each one is on a separate circuit. So one breaker for this fridge and one breaker and one conductor for this water heater, separate circuits, one big glute alone one certain circuits. So let's say right now what we have done till now. Okay. Now the next step that we need disconnect switches, right for exhaustive fans. Now, exhaustive fans here, we need to think what category are they under, under which category? Are they considered motors or considered an HAC system or what exactly? Now, exhaustive fans, we can consider them as a variable or a multi speed motor. It is just a fan, but it can be a multi speed fan. We said before that we are not going to select for this one, a disconnect the switch. However, the multi speed fan, if we look carefully here at multi speed fan, we need to select like the torque motor, 1.15% of the motor, namely, this is the current rating, right? And then using the logged router and the full load current, we should select the suitable horsepower from these tables. Okay, so number one, let's take this here. Let's take it step by step. So we have exhaustive and number one. Exhaustive fan, number one, this exhaustive fan is 1.9 kilowatt. Now the problem here is that I don't know the power factor. That is the first thing which I need. Number two, I don't have an in plate. We don't have an inplate so that I can get the actual full load current and actual logged rooter current in order to select the suitable disconnect switch, right? So what I'm going to do is just estimation. I'm going to estimate some values in order to design this system because I don't have enough information. Unless if you have the catalog for this exhaustive end from the mechanical engineer, then you can design it more clearly, right? Because we need a name plate. So what I'm going to do that first thing that we have 1.9 kilowatt and single phase 220. Okay, so 1.9. So we have 1.9 kilowatt, 220 volt, single phase, right? So the current will be a the parent power divided by the voltage for a single phase system. So the apparent power will be real power divided by the power factor, multiplied by voltage. Now, the power here is 1.9, kilow and power factor, I don't know the power factor, so we assume that it is 85% assumption 220 volt. So let's do these calculations. I'm going to do it on my own calculator so that we can make it much faster. 0.85 multiplied by 220 since it's a single phase, it will be ten points 16 and pairs. That's the first thing. So the first rule is the current. Should be 1.15 of the ten points 16. So this will give us a 11.6 84p. So this is a rating as a current rating for our disconnect switch. Great. That's the first part. Second part that we need to find the equivalent horse power. So I'm going to go to the NEC single phase table. So flood current single phase. Okay, what voltage I'm operating at 220 volts. So we are going to look for this column here at how much value, 11.684. 11.684 is 10-12. So we are going to select the 12, which is equivalent to two horsepower. So I'm going to look for two horsepower. Now, if I'm going to select it from the APP catalog like this one here from this one single phase, 240 volt, similar to 2,220. The same category, but for a single phase. For a single phase, we need two horsepower, right, two horsepower and amp. So 20 amp and two horsepower is suitable for my own application, right? Two pairs and two horsepower for a single phase. Great. So let's go to our exhaust fan. Okay, like this. Exhaustive fan, number one. Okay, so I'm going to go like this. And go here, take the disconnect switch. We need a single phase, disconnect switch. This one, its location is inside this. It is located here inside the kitchen, which is connecting using duct to the WC here. So I'm going to use a one with a weatherproof since it is inside the kitchen or even if it is inside the bathroom. So I'm going to go and put it like this at this specific location like this. It doesn't matter it's a It's a size not its size. It's if it is like this or like this or like this, in the end, we just estimate its location. So we according to the mechanical engineer, the exhaust fan here, so I'm going to add it here. So I'm going to move it like this. Like this. Okay. In the end, I'm going to delete all of this. Okay, so let's make this one on a layer. Let's call it the Power socks. Okay, so we have to make a new layer first. New layer LA and new layer. Let's call it power power socks like this. And make this one green. Okay? Make it the current layer. So I'm going to select this one here and make this one on the power sockets layer like this. And also for this like this, all of these on the power sockets layer, okay? Okay. Let's make this, this on the lighting wiring layer, okay? So I can right click and select similar. So it selects all of them and make them on up our sockets layer like this. Okay, so all of them are now selected. Okay, pretty good. Okay. Let's save this. Now, what I'm going to do that I want to add the details, okay, for this power socket, right. So I'm going to go here and say, number one, we need t, This is the single phase, right? So I'm going to say two pools, a line Neutral, and we are going to also say how much voltage is operating, 220 volt, or the one inside the catalog itself, where it. Okay. Here it is 240 volts. I'm going to take the same value from the catalog like this. Okay? That's just rotated like this. Like this, okay? So now, what you did is that you added a power socket for this exhaustive fan and when am pair the rating and to pull 240 volt. This one is suitable to this exhaust fan. Okay, great. Now, what is the next? We need one for exhaustive fan number two, number two and number two. Now, what the difference exactly exhaustive fan number two is 2.2 kilowatt and 220 volt. So I'm going to repeat these calculations, but instead of 1.29, I will say 2.2. Let's look again, 2.2, okay? For 2.2. So let me do this quickly. So 2.2 will be 11.7 11.76 pairs. And this one will be blood by 1.15 will give us 13.5. So if you do the same exact thing for the single phase here, it will be between we need 13.5, right? So 13.5 13.5 is 12-17, right? So I'm gonna select 17, which is three horsepower. So we need 143 horsepower. And take a current of sorry, not 13.5 13.5 is the current rating, okay? The current rating which we need. However, when we look inside the NEC tables, we look with the full loot current. So the full loot current in this particular case is 11.76. So this one for the disconnect switch rating, but this one is the one which I use inside the tables. So when I open the table, I go with 11.7, which is exactly two horsepower as before. So this one is not three horsepower, but two horsepower as before. So we need two horsepower and 13.5. And if you look carefully, again, this one will be sufficient two horsepower and 20 pairs will be exact same thing. Okay, so let's get back here and do it. So I'm going to go like this. And take this one and copy it like this. Okay? From here and go to the exhaustive fan. We have an exhaustive fan here. Sorry. We are going to copy this, copy, and move it like this, go here. So we have one exhaustive fan exactly here, and we have another exhaustive fan here. So we are going to just put it on the wall, and we have another one here. So I'm going to put it like this. Don't worry, all of this, um HVAC components. All of this writing, I'm going to remove it in the end. So we added for these exhaust fans, mice. Great. So what else we have? We have here the DX components, which again should be which is considered as an HVAC air conditioning component, which we should obtain. It's a value again from the name plate, right? We should look for the rated current from name plate again, but I don't have this rated current. I only have the input power. So I'm going to work with this. I don't have any other choice. So first, so we have here some Okay, so let's do this. So the first one CSU or conceal the ont one, ok? What do we have? Conceal plat on it one. What do we have? We have 2.7 kilowatt. So let's just new 2.7 and single phase. So let me do it. So we have 2.7 kilowatt and 220 volt, single phase. So the rated current will be 2,700 w divided by sensitive single phase 2120 volt, multiplied by the power factor, again, assume 85%. Okay, we just assume a bad value. There are 90% or more than this for an air conditioning system, but we assume the worst case, even by oversizing it, no problem at all, just to make sure that we are satisfying the requirements. And then if you go down here for the Hva component, you need 1.15. So if I get back down here for HvaC you can see here Hva component, it should be, as you can see from the rated current on the name plate. It should be 1.15. You can see 1.15 of the name plate rated current. So the I rating will be 14.4 multiplied by 1.15. So 14.4 multiplied by 1.15, it will be 16.56 pairs. So I'm going to use this for a single phase in order to find the horse power rating. Now, of course, when we do this, we should look for full load current and logged rooter current. However, I don't have the loaded router current, so I don't work except with this value which I have here. So when I go to the tables like this, here we are looking for a three phase. So I'm going to go up like this, three phase alternating current. Sorry, single phase alternating current, 230 volt, and we need at least what, at least 14.4. This is the one which I'm looking for. 14.4 is between these two 12-17. So I'm going to choose the worst level, so I need a three horse power. So I need three horsepower. And this current rating for the switch. So if I go down here, again, 16.5 6:00 A.M. Pair and three horsepower. So this is the one which is three horsepower, and as you can see, 30 am pairs. So 30 am pairs, three horsepower is enough. So I'm going to select the 30 ampers, so this is what I'm going to do. This is for CSU one, right? Okay. So I'm going to take this one a single phase, right? So I'm going to take this one. For number one, where the number number one here. Okay? So I'm going to put it like this. Okay? Don't worry, we are going to remove it in the end. I'm gonna remove it as you see. So we need 30 pairs, to put 240 volt. Okay? Like this copy it and go to Ts one. So we have this one too, like this, and we have another one here. Okay. So what about the next one? The next one here is a single phase two, but three kilowatt. So I'm going to repeat this one, but for 3 kilowatts. I'm going to add this three kilowatt. So let's do it on my calculator, 3,000. It will give you approximately 16 pairs and 16:00 A.M. Pairs here. This one will be multiplied by 1.15. It will be 18.4. So we need 16:00 A.M. Pairs. If you go here, to this table here for a single phase, 16.4 at the rated current is 173 horsepower again. So we need three horsepower and 18.4. Again, the same exact rating will be enough 30 as three horsepower. So that's what I'm going to do here. That's for number two, and we have three of it. So I'm going to do it where this one, this one here. Like this. Copy, like this and put it for number two, like this, and for number two, where number two here two. Okay? Okay. What about the last one? The last one is the one with a three phase, 3.6. Okay, so let's see what I'm gonna do. So that's new. So it is now a three phase. Working at 380 volt, three phase, it's power rating. Let's look at it power rating is 3.6, okay? 3.6 kilowat? So the current in a three phase is S divided by root three, multiplied by V multiplied by, like this. So the power itself, 3,600 divided by root three, multiplied by 380 volt, multiplied by the power factor, right, because we want to convert from power to S or active power to apparent power. This will give us in the 3,600 root three, 3,800.85. This will give us 6.4 am pairs, 6.43 pairs. Okay? That's the first thing. Number two, current reading will be 1.15, multiblad by 6.43. So 1.15, multibla by 6.43. It will be 7.4 pairs. Okay, so let's use this one to look inside our tables. If I go like this for a three phase. The problem right now, if you look at these tables here 110-120, 220, 2004000280, that's 380 volt does not exist here. So what can I do in this about this problem, right? So I don't know what should I do? So if you look carefully here, the 380, which I want right here, is between these two values is 200-30 volt and 460 volt right. Now, you can see that 230 volt, 460. This one is double this value, right? So you can see, for example, that when you double the voltage at the same power rating, the current will be reduced to half, right? Because when you increase the voltage at the same power, you decrease the current. You can see that 2.2 double voltage. The current goes to half, 2.2 to 1.1, 3.2 to 1.6, so half of the value. So what should I do? What I can do that I can actually get values at 380 volt. How can I do this? You can actually do this. You'll get the ratio between 200 and let's look at here. This is 230, 230/380. This ratio will give you the value of current corresponding to each of these values. So at half horsepower, 2.2 will be converted into let's see right now, 230, the void by 380, the blood by 2.2 is converted to 1.33. And if you keep doing this, you are trying to find what I'm trying to find 6.4. So I can do the reverse to find the equivalent value. So I can take 6.43 multiplied by 380/230 to get the equivalent value in the original in the original column of 230. I hope you get what I'm trying to do. So it will be 10.6. So if I get here 10.6, which is actually 413.6 is between this and the switch is equivalent to five horse power. So 15.2, if you take 15.2, let me show you. If you take 15.2 and divide it by 380, Mult blood by 230, you will get 9.2, which is greater than what I need, which is, as you can see here, let's go like this, which is 6.43. So I need more than 6.3, so 9.2 is actually pretty reasonable. So five horsepower is the one which I see right now, like this. Now, if I would like to make sure I can do another calculation. Now, what is this calculation exactly? Let's look at the requirement. Here it is 3.6 kilowatt right, 0.6 kilowatt. So 3,600 and we know each horse power is 746. So you can see it is 4.825 close to five horse power, which I just obtained right now. Okay? So you can see our calculation is pretty reasonable compared to this. If I would like to get the exact values, all I have to do that I will call the mechanical engineer. Tell him, what is this 1 horsepower or the spec of this one specifically. I need the name plate. If I would like to make the calculations exactly as I want. So in the end, I need 6.4 I need 7.4 and pair as a current rating and five horsepower. Let's look at this from the tables. Or the catalog itself. So three phase operating at 240 and from the 80, I will operate at 480 volt. This is the closest value. So I'm going to go all the way like this and I'm looking for what? I'm looking for five horsepower. So I can use this ten horsepower and and bears. So this one can be 20 and pairs, three pools will be enough for this application. If there are other catalog that gives you lower values, maybe it is oversized, no problem at all. If it is oversized, no problem at all. In the end, you are trying to select a suitable one for your own application. Okay, so this is at pair, this one is number three. So I'm going to take this one like this, o and copy it. Like this, there will be one change I'm going to show you right now. So this one is for this number three here, like this. And I'm going to take the three phase, disconnect switch, copying, like this. Okay? And let's scale it. Okay? Sorry. This one, scale it. Let's make it like this. Tell this one, goodbye. Take this one, move it. Okay? So, this one is a three phase disconnet switch, and you can simply type here, three pull to 20 pairs, okay? 240 volt. No, actually, we said we are going to select a 480 volt. Okay? So double click like this, 480 volt. This one is pretty suitable for the application which we are dealing with. Okay? So now we designed for this, for the exhaustive fan, everything that we need. Now, what about the hand dryer? The hand dryer can be considered as most of the load. It has a motor inside ATS. It has a motor. However, the heater is much more kilowatt than or has a higher power rating than our motor. So we can consider it as a part of the fixed space heating. Which had this rule, if you don't remember, for non motor application, fixed electric space heating, most likely, which has the heater has a higher load. In this case, we are just gonna size it based on the current rating, which is 1.25 of the total kilo or total am pair or the full load current of our equipment, okay? Now the last step, let's save this one again and number one, this is in the HVAC system, so I'm going to hide it like this. And we did everything that we need. One last step which we haven't done yet is adding each of these disconnect switches on circuits. The last one which we have reached is distribution port F 24, like this. Let's copy it like this and go to each disconnect switch. We'll start from here. First one, okay. And this one, too. So one for here, one for this, okay? Great for this exhaustive. There's one, two. Okay, so one, two, three, we need one here. This one is different, and I'm gonna tell you why right now. Okay. Mm hmm. Go down here. Okay. So add for this one, this one. Okay? This one did we add? No, we didn't add. Okay. Mm hmm. We added everything that we need. Okay. We added here. Okay, pretty nice, okay? Now, what I'm going to tell you right now is that let's just save what we did. But before I save, I just go down here, take this one. We can move it down here. Okay? Okay, so what I'm going to do is that instead of working only with even numbers, I'm going to use also the odd numbers. Now, you may ask me, why are you going to do this? Let's open first our lighting plan. I will tell you now why. If you open our socuit here, you'll find that we only reached number five, okay? Now, there's number seven, number nine, 11, et cetera, which we didn't use. Okay? So instead of leaving them empty, since we have a very low amount of lighting circuits, we are going to get some odd number circuits for the power circuits. I will show you what I mean exactly right now. So what you can see that we have two, four, six, eight, ten, 12. All of the even numbers we have used a lot here. We have reached 24 and still we are going. So we need to add some odd numbers. Why? Because we have used only one, three, and five, seven is not used, nine not used, 11 not used, et cetera. So that's what I'm going to do. So I'm going to say that this one is number seven, because we are actually gonna need to do this. Number seven, okay? This one. Let's make this one. Number nine. Okay. Number nine, go here and make this 111 Okay. Make this 113. It will become more clear inside the panel schedule, which we are going to do 13, okay, where the air conditioning 13. This one is 15. Okay? This one is 15, make it 17, okay? And this 119 This one is 21. Okay? So 1921, 17 15, okay? This one is we reached 22, 21, then this one will be 23 23. Okay, great. Do we have anything remaining? Okay, seven, nine, Okay, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23. Actually, there is only one remaining, which is this one. Now, before I do this, there is another thing which is missing. There is one air conditioning here similar to this one here. Okay? So this air conditioning here is exactly here. So I'm gonna copy this like this and take it here. Okay, so its location is exactly here, like this. Okay, however, due to these components, let's take this one like this and take this one, move it like this, away from the wiring itself. Take this one here. Okay? Mm hmm. We can add it like this. Okay? Move rotate first. Let's give it like this. Okay? No problem if it is no pointing at the panel because we don't have much choice here. Just pointing that this is a number like this. Okay? So all of this wear a single phase, right? All of these wear a single phase. So what I'm going to do right now is that I need this is a three phase, a special one and this one is also a three phase. Now, for a three phase system, what are you going to do exactly? For a three phase system, you need to need three phase, right? You need R S and T or red yellow blue or the three phase, right? So each of these line representing one phase. Now you will see in the panel schedule that the three phase will be like this. So let me show you what I exactly mean. So you'll find that inside the panel schedule, you will find that. We will have R, S and T. You will find that circuit number one takes from R, circuit number three takes from S, circuit number five takes from T like this. And similarly, circuit number two takes a from R and circuit number four takes from S and circuit number six takes from T. So as you can see, what I'm going to do is that you can see one, three, five, one is R three is S, T or five is T. So if I have a three phase system, a three phase load, I'm going to connect it to one, three, and five or two, four and six, two connected to R, four connect to S, six connected to T, or two, four, six, or similarly, the next odd number. Which will be or 357, for example, or 468 or 57 and nine. Okay? So this is how you add a three phase load. So let's apply this here. So you can see that we actually completed our panel. We have added all of them until we reach it to 23, right, 23. So what I'm going to do is that I will take the 24, so I have two, three phase loads, right, so I'm going to take. So we reached line 23. All of them all what we before from L one to 23. All of them I have complete. I've used them. So I'm going to use L 24, L to 26 and the line 28 for the first one, and then L to 25. To 27 and to 29 for the second root. So you can see we use 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 28, 29. So this is the three phase or ST or ST. That is what I'm gonna do here. So let's go here to that plan here, okay? And go here. So let's say this is the first one. So I'm going to say to 24, to 26 and 28. This one to 25 to 27 and 29. Like this. Okay? So I can just take this one like this little bit back like this. Okay. And take this one and drag it like this, okay? So it means that I have used three phase line 25, which is RSNT. This one is two, 24, 26 28 RNT. Okay? So this is how we added a three phase load. Now, one last point, one last point, and one mistake which we have done. W W mistake? You can see this one is a weatherproofside the kitchen. However, all of this should not be weatherproof. They should be the normal one. So what I'm going to do right now. So what I'm going to do is that I'm gonna take this one here like this. Copy. Read this. Let's see if this one is exactly the same. Okay, this one is like this. Okay? So all of these have changed it, right? Okay. And then I'm going to go like this. Paste, save. Take this one up here. Take this one down here. Okay. Take this one. Copy. For that kitchen here. Scale like this. Does it need to be the exact size to just assemble to indicate the location exactly. Like this. We had the weather proof here and the others are now them all of them are non weather proof. Great. Great what we have done. So we have now finished the design of the electrical system. We have added our circuits, for power sockets, for lighting for everything that we need. Now, what the next step, the next step that we start designing the breakers and cables for these circuits. 116. Introduction to Distribution Panels: Hey, guys, and welcome back to our course for electrical design. In this section, we are going to start discussing the panel schedule, which is designing our electrical panel. So first, we have a single phase distribution panel. So this can be look something like this. You will find it in apartments, apartments or in small loads. So what you can see here is exactly if you are looking at any distribution panel, a single phase one, you will find that we have group of circuit breakers like this. As you can see here, all of these are circuit breakers. Each circuit breaker is responsible for one circuit. Remember the circuits which we designed in the electric in the lighting and power circuits, circuit number one, L one, L three, et cetera. Each one of these circuits is controlled by one circuit breaker. So this circuit breaker, let's say, for example, this one is connected to let's say a water heater to the power power socket of the water heater. Another one is that this one can be connected, for example, to a group of luminears that we have designed in the lighting system. This one, for example, can control a group of power of a group of normal sockets, et cetera. So each one of these circuit breakers is designed for a specific circuit. That's the first thing. Second thing is that you can find here in the same panel, you will find a large circuit breaker. This large circuit breaker is responsible to on and off or providing and disconnection of electrical power from the whole panel. So what happens exactly here. So when we have a single phase distribution panel, you know that we have a three phase system, we have like this. We have R, S and T or red, yellow, and blue, or phase A, phase B, and phase C. So for example, if we have a single phase Jon distribution panel for a certain apartment, what happens exactly that we have also here our neutral, okay? So we have three phase and neutral, right? So what happens here? So this is the main circuit breaker of our electrical panel that turn on and off power from the whole electrical panel, and it's responsible for circuit breaker. I responsible for the sot circuit protection for the whole circuit. So let's see what happens here. For example, we have an apartment here. This apartment takes its power from phase E. So from this phase, what happens here that we are going to connect it like this. We're going to take a point from phase A, like this. Round like this and enter our circuit breaker. So this is R or phase A, and then we are going to take a point from the neutral like this and go like this. So for our circuit, we have phase A and the neutral, right? Great. So the neutral will go like this to a pass par. Okay? So this is the neutral pus par. I will explain what I mean right now. Now, this phase A goes to the entering point of the circuit breaker and then it goes like this. This is phase, and it will go like this. Go to the first one, second one, third, fourth, like this, to each breaker. We are giving the phase voltage to each circuit breaker. And then what happens exactly? Let's say we have here a group of luminars like this. Like this. These luminars require two when we are drawing this line, this line representing a cable inside our drawing. This one can be, let's say, line and neutral or line and neutral and the errors, or it can be a three phase, whatever it is, it is just a representation of the wiring itself. So in reality, each luminar of this will require a phase and a neutral. Now, where does it take its phase? It will take its phase like this from one of these circuit breakers, like this. And the neutral, it will go like this without a breaker from this passpor direct like this. So what happens here is that when we have an overload or a short circuit condition, this circuit breaker will start operating. Let's say, for example, these luminars take normally 10:00 A.M. Pairs. And this circuit breaker is a ten apir circuit breaker. For example, what if something happened and this current increase to any condition due to any condition? Let's say it increases to 12:00 A.M. Pairs. Which one will protect us? This breaker will protect us by automatically going down in the off position and decuts electricity from our circuits here. So we have for each, this is what we call this one. This is called the incoming circuit breaker, the incoming circuit breaker or the main circuit breaker of this electrical panel. And each of these breakers that go to one circuit is called the outgoing circuit breaker, which goes to a certain circuit. Now let's see this in another way. This is from R Electric School, Facebook or YouTube channel. I take this image from it because I like it actually. So you'll find that here we have line and the Neutral going to our energy meter, like in our house here. This is the input power, and the neutral or phase and the neutral going like this. And this goes inside the meter, and the output will be also neutral. And here our phase, phase or phase E. Now, then they go the phase goes to this circuit breaker, MCP or miniature circuit breaker, as we will learn about them later in the course and how to design them. And this one is a two pull circuit breaker, similar to the disconnect switches, if you remember, two pull disconnect switch, which means we have one and two, one pull. This one controls R, and this one controls N. However, in reality, if there is any overload on any of these wires, this one will turn on automatically off automatically or turn on Pi hand. Okay? So in anyway, both of these are turned on and off together, okay? These are connected mechanically or interlocked together inside the circuit breaker. So this is called a two pool because it controls two pools, one for the line and one for the neutral. And then we go like this. These two mean power to single phase, goes to a certain type of circuit breakers called the residual current circuit break. This one is used to protect against earth leakage, and we will learn about it also inside the circuit breakers section. Now, let's continue now, you will see that we have the phase like this, right? Phase like this. Line or phase A, phase, B, phase C, whatever, each it goes to each circuit break like this. And then let's say we have let's say we have a water heater. Water heater. That requires a single phase. So what will happen, let's say, this one is related to water heater. So it will take line from here, phase. And then the neutral, as you can see, goes to a neutral puzzpr from which we take several lines or cables that will go directly to our load. So you can see we are protecting this load against short circuit using or overload, also using this breaker here, which is used as a protection against over current or over voltage and short circuit. Great. Now we have another one which is called the rs, which is for earthing system. We will learn how to design it. And as you can see, again, Earth's path spur, which doesn't go through a breaker, the only one that goes through a breaker is our phase, as you can see here. And then we will take one errors if we have an earthing system and go to our water heater. So in the end for a single phase, we have the line and the neutral, so we can say two pool plus errors. Or the line neutral and our ears. If we are talking about, for example, a cable, we need a phase neutral and an earthing conductors as we will learn also how to design them. Here in this part, I'm just explaining what are we exactly doing or what does the distribution panel looks like. Okay, great. As you can see, it's called one pull miniature circuit breaker. One pull because you can see it's controlling just one pole which is one phase. I like this one, two pulls because it contains controls the line and neutron. What if it is a three phase, like for example, A, B, C, AB three circuit breaker. For a three phase system. In this case, we will call it a three pool because it cuts power from A, B, C, or a three phase. This is for a single phase panel. This is how it looks like, and in reality, what happens that? In a building, we will have a riser of the building like this, go like this. It goes from the pillar, for example, pillar, a distribution box from the electricity company. We will have A P and C, the three phase system, three phase. And of course, we have also our neutral that goes up like this. So we have A, B, and C, and D. So what happens is that we have, let's say, like this. Like this. Okay? And like this, okay? So let's say this is floor, floor number one, floor, number two, floor number three, floor number four. And in each floor, we have two apartments. Apartment A, like this, A and B, A and B. A and B, as you can see right now. So these are apartment, two apartments in each floor. Nice. So what happened or what do we do? If these apartments are single phase apartments that single phase according to the electricity meter and according to the loud, then let's say, for example, we have a single phase apartment, okay? All of them use just one phase. So how does it work? You will see that it will have phase A like this and the neutral, like this. So it takes A and the neutral or a line and the neutral. For phase for apartment TB, apart second Let's say we are going to take from a different one. Let's say P, like this. So we take from a phase and we take from this neutral, go like this. So we provided for it a line and neutral for our system. This one or this one is exactly this one as if we are taking from line and neutral, going to Let's say this is our apartment, panel inside our apartment, go to the energy meter and then continue. These two came from this what we call riser of the building. Let's say the second floor, we are going to take from phase C like this. Like this. And from the neutral, like this for B, we are going to take again from A. We will start again from the beginning like this and then take from the neutral. It has a line and a neutral, et cetera. What you can see that why do we do this? Because we are trying to balance the loading on these phases. So we don't take all from A or from B or all from C. We are trying to divide our loads across these phases. We are trying to balance them and we are going to do this also for a three phase panel. Now let's say, for example, we have here, this one is a three phase panel. Let's say a three phase as a one which you are going to see in this slide. If it is a three phase, then it needs the three phase and the neutral. So I'm going to do this. I'm going to take from A, like this. So we have A, and then I'm going to take from B, like this, B, and I'm going to take from C like this, and I'm going to take also from the neutron. You are providing a three phase and neutron. So let's see an example for a three phase panel, but just providing three phase loads. It is not necessarily three phase lots, but it can also be more than this. So what you can see, we have the three phase, red, yellow, blue, and we have the neutral. This is from our building. And if you have an earthing system, then you will have an earthing cable as you can see here. This earthing goes to an Earth link or an Earth's pus pr, and also the neutral goes to a neutral link or a neutral pus bar, as you can see here. Now, these two don't pass through our circuit breakers. We are taking from them directly and Rs and the neutral going directly to our system. So for example, when we are expressing about this, any three phase load that takes a three phase, we call it three pool, plus neutral, plus errors. Three pool plus neutral plus Earth, as you can see here, three phase, neutral and ers. This is for any loud and we will see how are we going to design this. But we are trying to understand what does a panel looks like or how does a bannel looks like? So you can see that here, for example, this is a three phase panel that takes a three phase supply. So you can see red, yellow, blue goes to a circuit breaker. This type of circuit breaker is called the molded case circuit breaker. This is the incoming or the main circuit breaker. This one is similar to the one in the single phase panel that is used to control power in all of our panel. Now the same idea which I have did, you can see that we have three pass parts. One, two, three, we have red, yellow, blue, red, yellow, blue, incoming and outgoing cables or not cables. It will be pulse pars as I'm going to show you right now. Now, each of these loads here you can see that this is a three phase circuit breaker, three phase breaker, three phase breaker, four, a three phase load similar to the three phase disconnected switch. So you can see what happens exactly that this is the first one takes red, yellow, and blue. This one, red, yellow, blue, this one, red, yellow, blue, et cetera, in order to take the three phase power and go to our load. So this is basically a three phase distribution panel providing for a three phase load. Now, let's assume that we have a single phase. So let's say we have a breaker like this, like this one here. Let's say this is the single phase lute. So how it will look like it will take, let's say, from bread like this, like this. So we have the red, and it will take from the neutral like this, and it will take also from the ersing Let's say from here, it will take this Earth. So it will take line, neutral, and Earths. If we have another loot, like this, a single phase, then we are not going to take from red. We are going to take from another phase so that we are trying to balance them like this, great, like this. So we have taken yellow and we will take a neutral, and we are going to take an Earth like this. Here, how it looks in reality like this one here. So we will have, let's say, a circuit breaker like this one. This is the molded case circuit breaker, and it has red, yellow, and blue, red, yellow, and blue. Similarly, we will have the input, red, yellow, blue coming from the transformer or a pillar or whatever the source of electricity, like this one here. Great. Then what happens here, you can see that there's three phase breakers, similar to these breakers. And as you can see, red, yellow, and blue, red, yellow, and blue, red, yellow, and blue. And as you can see here, Let's magnify this. You can see that here, this is the red, right. So we are connecting one pap, one red pass pr between this one and this one, and they are connected to this pass pr at this specific point. So this point here means that the point of connection of this red one is at here. So it means that it takes phase red here and this one all take phase red. For the yellow, you can see the connection is here. You can see yellow goes to this one, to this one, blue to this one and this one. And for our loud you can see red, yellow, and blue go to our lots. If they are a three phase, if they have a neutral, then we are going to have a neutral going to it. If we have an earthing system, we are going to do the same. Now, this is, for example, a three phase distribution panel. You can see there is an indicator lamps, these lamps. What do they do exactly? They indicate if there is a current inside or a voltage on these phases or not. So you can see red, yellow, and blue. So this one is turn it on and on and on, it means that the three phase we are having electricity from the three phase, and all of them are healthy. Let's see another one. So this is exactly similar as the previous you can see that we have the main circuit Bica, but there is no connection here, okay? This is just for illustration from a company. So you can see we have the main circuit breakers, we will give a red, yellow, and blue from transformer or anything. And then we have the passpor red, yellow, and blue, and we have three phase breakers. You can see one, two, three, all of them, as you can see, they are connected together. And as you can see, red or blue, yellow and red. Whatever they are doing, they take the three phase here. Great. So this one, for example, is at 250 and pairs, 12 way three phase distribution pot. Now you may ask me what does this even mean? 250 Amber mean this is the rating of our circuit breaker here. Maximum current, 250 apairO the rating of the circuit breaker, 250 and pairs. And we will understand later what does this mean or how can we design this part. Number two, we have a 12 way. It means that we have a 123 phase loads. We can connect 123 phase load. Now, let's see what I mean exactly. So you can see one, two, three, four, five, and six. We have six circuit breakers here for 63 phase loads, and another 63 phase loads, which gives us a total of 123 phase loads. That's why it is a 12 way because we have a 12 ways or a 12 loads here. Great. If we look at the company description, 250 and pair 12 V, TBN distribution port. Now, you may ask him what does this even mean? TBN TB means triple pool neutral. So we have a triple pout, so we have a neutral. As you can see that goes, you can see this one is actually the neutral plus par, as you can see here. This is the neutral and triple pull because we have one, two, three, we have three pools, which is triple. That's why it's called triple pull. And as you can see, the incomer or the incoming circuit breaker, molded case circuit breaker, triple pull, one, two, three, or three pull. It's rating 250 a pairs. Now, outgoing here for this circuit breaker, you can see that they are outgoing. Triple pole or a three pole, one, two, three. Mature circuit breaker. The type of breaker is mature, and we have 12 pieces here, one, two, three, 12. And for one ampair to 63 ampirs, it means that you can install breakers from 1:00 A.M. Pair up to 60, 63 ampers as you would like. Again, this is according to your own design as we are going to see later. And the rated voltage here, the three phase voltage is 400 volt. This is another one, which is 250 and pair four way, why it's called four way. Because as you can see, we have four, one, two, three, and four. We have four louds and you can see also here one, two, three, and four. So it is four way and also 43 pulls and neutral, as you can see here. This one is the special type. Usually, you are not going to see this. You are going to see this one is you can see triple pull neutral, one, two, three, and neutral. Usually, you are going to see the three phase only, and the neutral is given directly to our lute. Great. Now, what about our panel? Our panel is going to be mounted in this form. It can be surface mounted, as you can see on the surface itself, and you can see all of the cables going outside since it is on the surface itself. These are going to our circuits. Each circuit breaker, the outgoing from it Ogon cable goes to all of these loads. This is what we call a surface mounted and you can usually see this inside the electrical rooms in a building. This one, which is mounted mounted here, as you can see here is inside the wall itself. And you'll find that the cables here is also going inside the wall itself. It is not exposed like this. And if you look carefully at this panel here, for example, you can see here one, two, three, four, five, six. All of these are circuit breakers as you can see here. 117. Adding Circuits to the Panel Schedule: Hey, everyone. So in the previous lesson, we discussed an introduction pet the panels itself or distribution panels, a three phase and single phase panels. Now, we would like to understand what does a panel schedule means, which we are going to work on the next sections. So the panel schedules lists all of the circuits, all the circuits you have, identifying the specific loads or equipment each circuit service using an Excel sheet or an autocat file, which I'm going to show you right now what I exactly mean. And each of these circuits has its own circuit breaker and cable. For example, you can see this one is exactly similar to what we discussed before. And this will be close to what I'm going to do in this next sections. You can see we have a main circuit breaker that takes A, B, C, or red, yellow, blue, the three phase, going to this incoming circuit breaker. And if you go like this, you can see red Buspar, yellow, and blue passports, three phase pass pars, and from it, we are supplying our loads. However, let's look carefully here. You can see that this one here, for example, this is circuit breaker number one. Or this one, let's say, L one, L one, L two, L three, L four, L five, L six, seven, eight, 910, 11, 12, et cetera, and it will be more clear inside the Excel sheet. So what happens here that as you can see, this is a single phase system, a single phase loud. This cable or this conductor goes to a certain circuit, let's say, a lighting circuit or a power circuit. This going to a certain circuit, each breaker goes to a circuit, we need to design this cable going to our load. What kind of cable do we need? We also going to need to design the circuit breaker. We would like to design what kind of circuit breaker suitable to install and what kind of conductor needs for our circuit. And as you can see, for example, this one takes its power from the blue phase, single phase. And of course, the neutral will go directly to our lute. This one also takes from blue. This one takes from yellow, et cetera. So we are going to design. What are we going to do in the panel schedule is that we are going to say circuit number one, what exactly its power. And then what kind of circuit breaker suitable for number one? What kind of cables out bool for circuit number one. And in addition to this, we are going to balance these loads. So we don't want to overload one phase over another. And I'm going to explain how are we going to do this. So let me show you what I mean by Excel sheet or autocat file. So if you open the Excel sheet like this one here, you'll find that this Excel sheet inside the files of our course. So what happens? This is a panel load schedule, as you can see here, in which you are going to type here, what kind of project you are working on the title of the project. Okay? Number two, you'll find here panel number, distribution port, let's zoom in. So you can see here, we have panel number and let's show you what I exactly mean. So if you look at the autocat first floor like this one here or lighting itself you can see in lighting, we said that we are going to design electrical panel called distribution first. This is the normal distribution port. So we need to design it. That is what we are going to do right now. So for example, you can see the luminars. You can see these luminiars like this, all of these, all of this, as you can see here, takes its power from distribution port, first one or line number one from our distribution port. So this distribution port was like this, say this is our distribution port, and this one is line number one, circuit number one, in which we take a cable going to all of O loads, goes to all of these goes from this panel goes like this to all of these like this, to provide electricity for them. In this case, we call this one line number one. So how can I translate this inside my Excel sheet or the panel schedule? You will do like this. Number one, panel number, it is distribution board first. There will be a panel schedule for normal loads for emergency and for UBS. You are going to design all of them with the same concept. So distribution board, it's a name, right? DBF Name. Okay, great. So this one is a three phase. So its voltage is 230 slash 400 volt, 50 hertz, 230 slash 380. Exactly, no problem at all. It will be exactly the same. So it means that this is the phase voltage, 220, so 180 or 230 400 volta. Any of them will be acceptable. So 220 the single phase slash the three phase supply. So line to line voltage, phase voltage, and the frequency which I'm going to work on. Ten now. Okay. So its location is in the forest floor, and it is let's say it's called, how I'm going to mount it. We can see if you remember, we can. It can be surface mounted or can be recessed mounted. Now in my own example, I'm going to make it a resist mount. So I'm going to copy like this and paste like this. Okay? And I'm going to save this one in the panel schedule. Okay, great. Now, forget about everything as we go to design this, but let's look carefully here. You'll find here number one, description, this description representing your own circuits. So for example, you can see that number one, you can see these circuits as you can see circuit number and look carefully about this. You can see circuit one, this is circuit one. This one. This one here is circuit number two, circuit number three, if this one, circuit number four, if this one, et cetera. So, this one is one, this one is two, and et cetera. Now, if you look at this Excel sheet here, you'll see it is exactly like what we did in the pass parse. If you look carefully here, you will see here you can see red, yellow, and blue. Look careful here. We have red, the first line, big line here, red, then yellow, then blue. Now, you can see that in the design here, you can see, for example, the first two take from blue, then let me explain it. Okay, like this. So let's say this is circuit number one, and this is circuit number two. So one and the two takes from blue. Three and four takes from yellow. Five and six take from red. Seven and eight takes off from blue, et cetera. You can see this configuration here exactly like this one here. You can see one and two take from phase A, you can see this dot here representing first phase means they are taking its power from A. Three and four take their power from B. Five and six take their power from C. Seven and A takes from power from seven from A, et cetera. You can see we are doing this for all of the Excel sheet. Great, great. Okay, so circuit number one, let's look at our Autocad. This is what I'm going to do. So I'm going to look for this is L one or lighting one or circuit number one. Great. So we are going to we would like to see. So the first circuit is lighting. So I'm going to type here. Lighting. Like this, description, lighting. Great. Is this one a single phase or a three phase. This one is a single phase. Number of phases, a single phase noise. Then what are you going to do? Then I'm going to do that I'm going to calculate our load. We need the load of circuit number one in KVA in kilo volt and pair. If we look carefully here, you can see this is phase A, and as you can see, we are typing in phase A or the red, as you can see, and this one also we are typing in red since it is connected to phase A. This one, three and four connected to B. That's why I type here in yellow section as you can see here. This one, five and six connected to C. So I'm going to add them in the blue. Okay? This is the first step. So let's start doing this. So we have number one lighting circuits, great. So I have my own calculator here and let's go like this. Okay, so this one here, this is the first one, right? Okay. So we have one, two, three, and four. Okay? One, two, three, and four. Four of this type. This type, which one? Let's go down here. Four, multiplied by 11.4. So let's type it here. Like this. So we have four multiplied by 11.4, right? So four multiplied by 11.4. This is in what, right? So what is its power factor? So it doesn't give us the power factor. This one is type LED. So I can assume that the power factor is 0.9 or 0.95. If I would like to get it precisely, I can look into the catalog of this company. So I'll just assume the worst case, which is 0.9. So these are the first four luminars, right? What I did here that I take the total power in what and divide it by the power factor in order to convert this into a parent powers in volt and pair. So this is what I did four luminous, one, two, three, four, multiplied by 11.4. Great. Then what do we have in the same circuit? We have this one too, this one. Okay? This one is six, L six. This one is also LED, 16.4 what? So I'm going to do the same. I'm going to say plus 16 point 4/0 0.9. This is the voltage divided by power factor, converting it into volt and bear. Then we have this friend here. So how many one of them? One, two, three, and four and five and six. So we have six of this one here. Six of this one. So this one is 15. W and also LED. So we have plus six multiplied by let me get this 115, what, right? 15, what, divided by the power factor 0.9. So now I have converted. Let me just check one, two, three, four and five and six. Okay, great. So now what I did is that I added all of the power volt and pair of just circuit number one, right? So let me do this on my own calculator and see the answer to this submission. So it will give us 168, 0.29 volt and pair. Okay? Or we can make it in the kilovolt and bear. We can go one, two, three, so it will be 0.16 89 kilo volt and pair, which is approximately 0.17 KvA. Very small load right 0.17 KA. So that's what I'm going to do. I'm going to go here, lighting, and I'm going to say 0.17 like this. Okay? So 0.17 Kv. So this is circuit number one. Okay? Let's continue. We have L one. We have also L three. Remember, distribution port, L three. Okay? L three, which is this one, right? So let's look at the circuit. So this one is connected to distribution part three, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, and ten. So we have ten of this one, which is this one here, ten of this one. So we have 25. What? Multiplied by ten. 25 volt multi blade by ten luminars and the par factor will be, let's say, 0.9. So it will give you 277.77, so one, two, three, approximately 0.30 0.3 KvA. So I'm going to say here in L three, you can see L three. 0.0 0.3 KV, 0.3, like this. And I'm going to call this one, lighting, similar to this one. Okay? So now I admit I added KVA for one, KVA for number two. Now, let's continue. Okay. So for lighting. Okay. So we need number three. So we have also here number five. Number five, as you can see, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, 11, 12, 13, 14. So we added 14 on one circuit L five. So I'm going to do this. Okay? 14, multiplied by. Each one is 25. 350 W divided by the power factor gives us 38, eight, one, two, three, we can say approximately 0.4 KvA.o circuit number five, 0.4 KvA. Okay? Copy this and go here and paste. Like this, and save. So we added one, three, and five. Do we have any circuits other circuits of lighting? Let's see carefully, L five, L three, L three, L five, Okay. The other ones are for emergency circuit or from the generator, okay? For emergency distribution, but this is a different banel, okay? Great. So we have done our lighting. Now, we are going to do the same for the bower circuits. Now, let me show you exactly how I'm going to do this. So let's start the boy number one. So distribution por FL here FL two. Okay, FL two. Now, why FL two? Because if you remember, here one, three and five are reserve it for our lighting sockets. Now, we are going to do the same, but for the rest. So we have here socket outlets, right how many Circuit number two. Number two, let's look carefully. We have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, and eight. So we have eight, and each one according to EC, it is 250 volt. And here if you are dealing with N EC standard, then you are going to make it 180 volt and bear for each socket. So it will be 2000 volt umber. So we have eight, 2000 volt and bear. Great. So I'm going to take this one here for circuit number two. Like this. And we have how much? We have 2000, so we're going to say two. Remember, it is in KVA. Okay, now let's continue. So this is L four. What about L two? What about L four? So where is L four. Now we can also use the find feature in order to find the circuits that I'm looking for. If you would like to do this, you can see FL four. You can see one, two, three, but remember, we have this is DublxT of them. So we can say two you can say two, four, six, seven, and eight. So it is exactly the same. So we can say we can say also eight So it's exactly like it. And we can say here. Also two like this, two KVA and save. Now, you can also say eight. If you want to make it more precisely, you can say we have one, two, three, and two. So we can three doublq and two single. So we can say here, three doubles and and two normal, for example, like this or a two single. Let's call it single outlet. Single out like this. If you'd like to do this. Okay? So what I can do that I can just take this one and drag it like this. And like this, okay? That becomes more appropriate. The doblks and two single outlet. You can see three doblks and two socket outlet. The doublk and two single socket outlet. Okay, great. So this is circuit number four. We need circuit number six, right, circuit number six. Okay? So let's go to number six. Where is number six? Okay, distribution port, FL 18, 14, 12, FL six here. Okay, so we have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, and eight. So we have eight socked so I'm going to say here, eight socked outlets, and again, since R eight, it will be also two KVA. Great. Now, let's continue. What do we have again? Remember that we here. We reach it until five here for this lighting. Seven and nine and 11, all of these, I have used them for power circuits. Okay? So I'm going to also get back to these. So we have number eight. Let's go first to number eight. So number eight, let's go. Where's eight. Now when we are designing, actually, we can do another thing that we can actually do them in a better way that we can say we can start here, one, three, five, seven, go in a certain order so that we don't just keep searching for them. So we have number eight here, right? We are looking for eight. We have done this. We need eight, okay? So for eight, let's look at eight. So eight, we have one, two, three, and four, four doublx which is also two K. So we can say four DublxOletF number eight, like this. 44 Dublx which is also eight, which is two KVA, as you can see here. Great. Let's continue. Okay. We have eight. Now we have number ten. Number ten is exactly like this, eight. So I'm going to say copy this and go here to number ten, right? Let me see. Number ten, yeah, exactly. Number ten is also four, and this one will be two, like this. Okay, great. We need 12. Okay, so let's look carefully at 12. So 12, 12. Okay, this is L two. Here we have 12, also one, two, three, and four. So 12, 14, the same exact thing, 16, 18. So until 18, we have the same exact idea. So I'm going to take this one, and I'm going to let's say, let's do this. Okay, it doesn't do this. And let's just select all of these and control V. And then I'm going to say two but Okay, like this for each space that we have. So until 18, right? Until 18. Okay, so what about two? So, this one is two. Okay. This one is connected here, 20 to this one. So let's see, one, two, three. Just having three, right? Do we have anything else? No, we don't. We have just three. Okay. So three multi blight boy. 250 will be 750. So 750, which is 0.75 for number 20, right, and the three single sucked. So I'm gonna say three here. Um so I'm going to say Okay, so let's just take this one, Control C, and Control V. So three. And we can make it a single so that we know the difference between them. I'm going to copy this go here, do it like this and go here to be more precise and safe. For circuit number 22 and 24, one of them is for the heater and one for our fridge. So I'm going to say here in 22 and 24, so I'm going to say here. Heater. Let's say, water heater, and the second one for the fridge. Now, if I have the exact knowledge about them, I can add their consumption here precisely, but I don't have their knowledge. I don't have any information about the components that are going to be installed. So I'm going to just assume that we have 2000 volt and bear, similar to one complete sock. Just for simplicity, because I don't have any knowledge about this point here, okay? Okay, so these are the 222 and 24, as you can see here, 22 and 24. Now we need to Wi six. And now, as you can see here, we have Wi four right. And if you go down here, you'll find that we have the next one, this one here, this our friend here can see 24, 26 and 20 cannot be the same circuit. You can see here 24 and 24. We need to shift it in another way. So I'm going to do that. I'm going to edit this and make it 26, 28 and 30 for this one. So we're gonna add this one to our plan. How can I add it? I'm just going to look at the original load here. So what I'm going to do is that I'm going to go to the Hevc like this and go like this one is CS 03. If I go here, CSU D. This one is a kilowatt, 3.6. And since I don't know it's power factor, you have two choices, either to assume, 0.8 or 0.85, whatever you would like, okay? This is just N assumption. So let's say 0.85, which will be 4.35 kilo volte bet. This is the loud, 4.5 kVA. Okay, so let's say 4.25, right? So this is our loud however, this one exactly this one, let's combine these together. Merge. Okay, like this. And we would like to so we merge with this one and merge with this one too, like this. And this one will also merge because it is a three phase loud, and we are going to also merge this one too. Because we are going to assume that all of this loud, which is and this our case is air conditioning, a DX let's just copy this to make it easier like this, the go here. Call this one D index. Dx can sealed units. This one is a three phase, like this. And what happens here this load here is a three phase loud. This one, since it is a three phase loud, it is going to be distributed across the three phase. So I'm going to divide this by three. So each one will take, let's say, 1.5 as an approximation. So let's say 1.5 and 1.5 and one point means that the lute is now distributed across red, yellow, and blue sensitive, the three phase loop. Now, forget about wild size and breakers, we are going to discuss them in details. We're just filling this table at the very beginning. Now I'm going to do the same exact thing here for the others. Let's just continue. So we need 13. So we now finished all of the even numbers until 30. Now we need to finish the odd numbers. So we need And we ended until here until number five, we need from seven. So let's go. So number seven. Let's go. So this is one number seven here is CS 01, CS 01, which is this one. CS 01, 2.7 kilowatt, 2.7 divde by 0.85, which will be 3.17 KvA. Let's say 3.2 kVA. So I'm going to go here to number five, number seven. Um 3.3 0.2, 3.2 KV. This one is the Dx unit. Let's go like this. Copy and go here. Number seven, right. Let's go here. Number seven. Okay. Then we need number nine. Number nine, this one here is exhaustive fan, 01, exhaustive fan, 01, which is this one here. Also a single phase 1.9. So we will take 1.9 kilowatt, divde it by 0.85 as a par factor, it will be 2.24 or 2.25 as an approximation. So we can say 2.25, and we'll call this one exhaust fan. So let's here take this one here. Like this. Skip go here, and call this one exhaust fan. Nice. So this is number nine. Now, let's continue. And number 11. Okay? Number 11, 11 where 11 is here this one, exhaustive fan number two. Okay, Exhaustive fan number two is 2.2 kilowatt, divided by p factor. Giving us 2.6. So we can say the next one is here, 2.6 like this and exhaust fan again. Like this. Okay. Now, what I'm going to do is that I'm just gonna copy this for now, go like this. So that I fill just this table like this. Skip. Okay? What else? Go to number 13. Number 13 is CSU two, CSU two single phase, and three kilowatt. So we'll get three kilowatt divdedPer factor. 3.529, let's say 3.6. So we can say 3.6. Here, again, we gain 3.6 to red. This is a DX on it like this. Now the next one, which is 15, go like this. So you will go like this, 15 here, exhaustive fan number two, Exhaustive fan number two, which is the last one we discussed, right, exhaustive fan two, this one is 2.6, so I can just copy this exhaustive fan and 2.6 like this. Great. This is our exhaust fan and 17 CS 01, which I just obtained before, CS 01, 2.7. Okay. CS 01 is seven. Okay. So seven, this one, so I'm going to copy this, paste it here because they are exactly the same. Take this and put it right here. Okay, we need 19. 19 1919. Where is 19 here, CS 01, exactly similar to it, okay? Nice. So I can just copy this and paste it here, copy this and paste it here. Okay, great. Then we have another exhaustive end and 21. So at 21, we have exhaustive en, right? To 21, which is this one here, at this location here. The same exhaustive end here. So let's copy this. Put it here, copy this, and put it here. Great. Now we need 23. So 23 here is CS 02, and CS 02 is 13. So 13 this one. Like this and the X unit, like this. Okay? And also, we can just make it exhaust unit, concealed unit, exhaust fan like this, not unit, just one unit. Like this. Okay, great. 25 27 and 29 is the end. And as you can see here, 25, 27 29 here this one, this one is exactly similar to the three phase one here, CS 03. And if you don't remember it, this is the one which I have just chosen right now. So I'm going to take this one. I'm going to copy this and paste it here like this. And then I'm going to select all of this and merge that we can combine them. Okay, like this and this one is exactly similar to this one. I'm gonna also merge these three, 25, 27, 29, all of these merge like this. Sorry. We are going to merge this only. Merge this and merge this too. Okay? We are going to delete this and we are going to delete this delete. Okay. This one is 1.5 and repeated three times. 1.5 here, 1.5 and 1.1. You can see that the panel itself is a mixture between the um between three phase and single phase. So you can see that our panel is consisting of actual, how many circuits, as you can see here, 30 circuit. This is the actual circuits that we have, right? 29 until 30. So I'm going to say here, actual number of circuits is 30, as you can see here. Now, let's get back here. So what you can see that all what I did is that I translated what is inside my own autocat files. Here, what I did from the design here of power and lighting and then I translated this into our panel schedule, as you have seen right now, right? Great. Now, the same exact thing at this panel schedule, there is another way which is this one. You can see this autocat file, exactly the same. You can see designation of the lot type of lute. You can see size of the wire, similar to the file. And here we are giving the phase loads in and pairs. And these are the details of the panel. You can see one for distribution panel, lighting panel, one for power panel, one for UBS. Here you can see sockets here and different loads. You can see down here. The loads that we have in demand factor, which we are going to discuss later also. And these are the size of the circuit breaker main circuit breaker and size of the circuit breakers, miniature circuit breaker that we are going to use inside the pan. And you can see red, yellow, blue. First, two are connected to this. Second, two are connected to yellow. Connected to blue, et cetera. You can see this simple here is a circuit breaker. Circuit number one has a 15 a pair circuit breaker, 15:00 A.M. Pair and et cetera. So it is exactly the same idea. You can use this one to add your own details and design as we are going to do, or you can actually use the Excel sheet, which is much easier as you are going to see. 118. Adding Spares and Spaces to The Panel: Hey, everyone, and welcome back to another lesson in our course for electrical design. In this lesson, we are going to continue what we have done in the previous lessons in which we have added all of our loads inside our panel schedule, right? So we have a spare and we have space. Now, what does this even mean? Inside our electrical panel? We need to add 20% as a spare and 10% as a spare of the total circuits. So let's see how I'm going to do this. So for example, if I have a 40 circuits when I complete the electrical design of my electrical panel, and I find that we have 40 circuits, right? So since I have a 40 circuits, I am going to add a 10% of it as a spare. So 40 multiplied by 0.10 0.2 as a spare. Okay, plus 40 multiplied by 0.1 as a space. So this is for a space inside our panel, and this is as spare. Now, you will find that this will give you a certain number, which is, for example, 52 circuits. So this include the spare and the panel. So 40 multiplied by 0.2 gives us eight circuits. So this is an eight circuit as a spare. And this one is four circuits as space inside our electrical panel. So we need 52 circuits in total. So 40 circuits, actual circuits, which we have already done in our drawing, eight circuits as a spare. And what I mean by a spare is that we will just add circuit breaker without connecting any kind of load. So it is considered as a spare or an additional circuit breaker. The space here, this is a complete space or an empty space inside our panel in which we can install a circuit breaker as we would like. So in the end, when you are designing your circuit, you don't design it specifically or you don't select a panel specifically, based on the actual circuit. You add some additional circuit breakers, which we call spare and we add some additional space inside our panel, which we call space. Now, let me show you what I exactly mean. So let's delete this. The 10% space means that we leave 10% of the circuit as a space. It means that you are reserving these slots for future circuit breakers without installing them now. So you are just leaving a space if you would like to install a future circuit breaker. Now, let me show you what I exactly mean. So this is here, any electrical panel, as you can see here, consisting of circuit breakers, one, two, three, four, five, six, et cetera. And you can see an important part. If you look at any of these, you can find that this circuit breaker, for example, is for the dryer. You can see it is a two pull circuit breaker for dryer. This one doesn't look clear. This one is for lights. This one is also maybe for lights. It's not clear what is written here. But each of these, this is the description of each circuit. Now, if you look carefully, all of these are breakers, right, great. Now, however, if you look at the panel, you will see an empty space here. This one is one space and another one. In these two spaces, you can install two breakers. You can see an empty circuit here. This is what we call a space. So we left some space inside our panel. If I have an additional load in the future, we can add a certain breaker like this. And another breaker here, and then we connect it to a certain loot, like this. If I would like for future expansion. However, they are not installed here. That's why it's called a space, empty space. Another example here, if you look at this one here, you will see one, two, three, four different circuits here. However, you will find here some empty circuits, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, eight empty circuits. Again, this depends on the design, but in general, you are going to add approximately 10% as a space. Now, what about with the spare? Spare here means 20% spare. It means that we are allocating 20% of the circuits as spares, which means that we are just installing a breaker in these slots, but we are not going to connect it to any loads yet. So let me show you exactly what I mean. So if you look at this one here, let's look at this. You can see circuit one, 15, 13, 16, whatever it is. And you can see, for example, circuit number one is for fridge, circuit number two here for microwave, circuit number five for a washer, like this one, et cetera. Now, if you look carefully here at circuit. You can see 15 until 24. All of them are lights and blugs. He puts them on one circuit. And you can see here there is a pair here. If you look at this one, 25 is a pair. So you can see that 25 here, there is an already installed breaker, as you can see here, but it is not connected to any circuit. There is no cable going out of all of these have cables or conductors going to different circuits. However, this one is just a breaker installed without connection to any circuit. So just a breaker without any input or any output. Okay? That's why it's called a spare. You will see that 26-30, which is one, two, three, four, five, one, two, three, four, five. All of these are space, an empty space, as you can see here. Now, are these values standard? No, they are not values. They are dependent according to your own knowledge or your own experience. Okay? So you can see that some electrical engineers may say that I'm going to take 20%, 10% is spare, and 10% space. Other engineers will say 10-20% as a space and spare, okay? Doesn't. It is not a standard values. These are not standard values. You can say 10% space and 10% spare. Okay? If you look inside the NEC standard, you would not find any values or any standard values for spare and space. Okay, so what you will find here is that, as I said before, that we can see that here. Let's look at this figure here. Here this one. You can see the actual circuits are from one until 24. So we have 24 actual circuits. And we have one spare and smaller spaces. Now, when I design my electrical panel, I add the circuits which I already have plus the spare, plus the space. And in the end, I'm going to add all of this to see how many circuits do I need? For example, here you need 30 circuits. So I'm going to look for a panel that has 30 circuits. So in reality, you'll find that distribution panels or ports. Can be found in the form of six breakers or six spaces or what we call six way, six way, 12 ways, 18 ways, 24, 36, 42, and 48. These are the configuration, typical configuration that you can find for distribution panels. For example, you can see this panel one, two, three, four, five, six, six, right, and seven and eight. This one is, for example, an eight panel, not typical included here. Again, these values can change from one country to another. So according to the supplier inside your country, you can find or from the catalog for distribution, panels, you can select the closest value to the one existing inside the market. Here is another panel here. You can see this is a two pool breakers. So you can see how many circuits, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, 12, one, two, three, four, five, six, so all of them total 12, as you can see here. And this one is our main circuit breaker. This panel here one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 15 breakers here and another 15 here. Some of them may be spare and some spaces. In total, we have cert circuits. So I'm going to select a CTI circuit panel. Now, let's see how I'm going to apply this to the Excel sheet. So we said that we need 20% spare and 10% space of the total surface. So let's do this. So first, let's start with the spare. So 20 20% spare, how many actual circuits, you can see that when I designed it, let's just make this one in the middle here. Like this. So when I deside my own system, I found that I have 30 actual circuits. So I need in addition to this, I need 20% spare. So I'm going to use a calculator here. To when you present spare of the actual circuits, which is t. So I need six additional spares. So what I'm going to do is I'm going to go like this. So I'm going to go here and type spare like this. Okay. And then we need six circuits, right. So I'm going to paste it here and paste it here and go here, we have spare another spare and another repair. So we need six spare. Okay? Three on the even numbers and three on the odd numbers. Now, of course, when we are designing it, we need to add here a breakers. Now, I'm going to do this in the end, I'm going to see what breakers I'm going to use here, and then I'm going to look for these breakers and then select some of them different breakers according to the selection from these systems, okay? So don't worry about this. I'm going to fill this with breakers for spare later in the course. Then we need space, right? So we need 30.1, which will be three circuits, three, which is 10% as a space. So we need sets. I'm going to say space like this. I'm going to copy this. Gonna make one here. And I'm going to add another one here. Now, of course, we have 39 circuits which is not standard. So I'm going to go like this and see what are the nearest the nearest standard is 42 circuits. Okay, 42 is the nearest stand. So I'm going to add an additional space, like this. 14 41 and 42, like this. Okay? This is the nearest value. This is the nearest value, 42 circuits, and this is what I'm going to save it like this. So I have 36 spares and six spaces inside my own panel. Also, if you would like to this is according to these rules, right, 10% space and 20% spare. If you would like to reduce the size of this panel, what you can do is another thing is that you can take 10% as a spare and 10% as a space. So it will be like this. 10% of circuits will be three spares like this and three spaces like this. We can take this and put them right here like this as a space. And you can delete this and you can delete this. Now, why I'm going to do this because you can see that three spares and three spaces leads to a total of 36 circuits, which is in the end. In the end, it will give us 36 panel 36 way panel. This is if you would like to reduce the cost. If you'd like to allow more expansion, you can add six spares and six spaces and you select 42. Again, this is according to your own design as you would like. Okay, so if I selected here, as you can see, set six, then I'm going to go here. You can see. Panel type TPN, which is triple pull because we have a three phase. Triple pull N, we have a three phase and neutral, plus PE, which is protective Earth. This is for earthing system. So we have three phase, neutral and earthing. So we have five different conductor three phase, neutral, and Earth. And we will going to learn how to size them later. So how many ways this panel this panel will be with the spaces and spare, it will be 36 ways. I'm going to go like this and say 36 ways. And then I'm going to save this. Okay? Let's just add the space here and save it like this. Okay? So this is the next step. 119. Balancing of Loads in an Electrical Panel: Hey, everyone, and welcome back to our lessons in electrical design. And those lessons, we are going to start working on the power balance. We added our loads inside our panel schedule or the Excel file. We added some spares and space and spares, spare circuit breakers inside our panel, and we selected the suitable panel for our system. Now, what are we going to do? Now, we would like to balance the power. What I mean by power balance. Now, you will see that our loads take from the three phase from phase A, B and C, right, some take like this and other take like this. Right, we see one, three, five, six, or two, four, and six, right. So what I'm going to do is that I would like to make these three phases balanced as possible. So what I mean by this, I don't want to make one phase more loaded than the other phases. So I'm going to show you how I'm going to do this. But first, the question is how much unbalance is allowed between these phases? Okay, so let's look at this to understand here. So you can see that here, for example, a three phase motor. We don't have any problem with three phase loads. Why? Because three phase loads actually loud that three phase similar to each other. You can see that let's say this is 4.5 kilowatt, then it will take 1.5 kilowatt if without the power factor, of course, we didn't mentioned the power factor. So let's say you take this one, 1.5 kilowatt, 1.5 kilowatt, 1.5. You can see it is balanced L three phase, balance at L. So it loads the three phase with the same amount. So for example, it takes to pair here, takes another to unpair here and another one to pair here. For example, okay? So it is pretty balanced. It is balanced, no problem at all. The problem comes from this single phase loud like a ceiling fan, fan, not fun, power socket, an LCD, a lamp. All of these are single phase loads. So for example, this one takes from phase A and neutral. This one takes from B and neutral. This one takes from C neutral, and then A neutral. Now, these have different amount of power. For example, this one can be 1 kilowatt. This one, for example, can be let's make it in kilovolt and bear. Let's say this one is maybe 750 volt and bear. This 11 KVA, this one, let's say, 210 volt and bear, for example. So it depends on the kind of so you can see these phases are not loaded similar to each other. Okay? Now, the question is how much power imbalance or unbalance allowed between them? So number one, these numbers are actually can change from one code to another. Okay? So what I mean by this? So for example, you can find one could say is, Hey, the allowable unbalance, and I'm saying about the lewd unbalance, okay? I'm focusing on loud unbalance. The allowable load unbalance between the three phases can be between 10% to 20%. Other codes say less than 10%, other codes say less than 5%. Again, it changes from one code to another. There is no actual standard value for loud unbalance. And the NEC doesn't mention anything about how much unbalance is allowed between these phases. So what I'm going to do is that here I'm going to use this standard specifically the NC standard or the American National Standard Institute. I'm going to use this one and this one has another one at current unbalance. I say that the current unbalance shall not exceed 5% from the average current in each phase in a three phase system. So what does this even mean? So let's say I have IA IB, C. First step that you are going to take I average, which is IA plus IB, plus C over three to get the average three phase current, and then you are going to look for unbalance between the three phases, so it will be like this. It will be I A minus I average, divided by average. Then I P minus I average, divided by I average. IC minus I average and void I average. Then you are going to look at these three and then you are going to look for the maximum deviation deviation from average value. For example, if this one gives you 3%, this one, 2%, this one, 6%, then I say that the unbalance in this system is 6%. Now, when I am doing this unbalance, I am working with load unbalance. Based on the NC, less than 5%. Now, you may ask me why this is four current unbalance, which is less than 5%. You are talking about load unbalance, which is V volt and pair. Now my assumption is that I assume that the three phase voltages are exactly the same. There is no difference between them. So I say that VA is equal to VB, equal to VC. So when you are looking for volt and pair, it will be like the syntheses are all similar to each other. So if you multiply this by V, multiply this by V, then it will be voltage multiplied by IA, gives you aA plus SP plus SC and this one will give you S average. So it is exactly the same rule if we assume that there is no unbalance in voltage. This is just an assumption in order to follow one of the codes, okay? So that's what I'm going to do in this one. So I'm going to do this for S average instead of getting the currants, which will be exactly the same. So if you would like, for example, if we have SA, SB and SC, and if you would like to convert them into Kern, so I'm going to take SA, divide it by 220 volt for a single phase, SB over 220 volt, SSC over 220 volt. And then you are going to get IA, IB and IC. And if you apply this rule, or if you apply it using load unbalance instead of current unbalance, it will give you exactly the same values. Try it and you'll get the same solution. So what I'm going to do that I'm going to take average, get the average KV, SA plus SP plus C divided by three. And then I'm going to look for the maximum deviation from average minus divided by S average, multiplied by 100. Now, what do you mean by maximum deviation? So when this will become clear if I give you an example from the Excel sheet of which you are going to work with. We will continue what we were doing. Now, of course, according to other standard, if you would like to find the voltage imbalance between phases, then you can apply the same format. So it will be Vmax from average minus V average divided by V average. So if you would like voltage imbalance, it will be like this. Now, in industrial applications, for voltage imbalance, you try to not exceed 1% voltage imbalance because this voltage imbalance has a great impact on the three phase motors. So what I mean by this, if you look at this durting factor, the efficiency of motors as voltage unbalance increase. You can see at 0%, we have 100% of our motor. As the unbalance increases, you can see that the durting factor increase means that you have to work with your own motor at a lower value. So what I mean by this? So if you are having a 2.5 unbalance between the phases, then you must work at least the 95% of the total power of the motor. So for example, if you have 100 kilowatt motor, and you have a 2.5 unbalance, then you have to date it by, let's say, 95%. So it means that you are going to multiply this by 0.95, which means you are going to work with the motor with a maximum Albo power of 95 kilowatt. You don't exceed beyond this. And I will explain right now why this happened. As you can see, unbalance increase, you are going to durate it. You are going to reduce the rating. Instead of working at 100% of the rating as unbalance increase for voltage, which is different from current unbalance, then you have to durate it. Now, let me explain why because if you look at the effect of unbalanced voltage on the three phase induction motor, if you have a 2% voltage imbalance, then the temperature rise due to this unbalanced carnsUnbalanced voltage will lead to unbalanced currents, right? They will lead to each other. So unbalancing currents will increase the temperature of the moot by 8% and two at the case of 2%. At the 3% volte imbalance, you can see 18%, at 5%, 50% temperature rise. So you can see that since the temperature rise, I cannot operate at 100%. I have to derate it operate it at a lower values or a lower current because to prevent the overheating of the motor or reduction of the lifetime of the motors. Okay? So this is a general information about regarding the voltage imbalance for induction motors in industrial application. Now let me show you how I'm going to work with this in our Excel sheet to understand this idea. Okay, so let's get back here. You can see that this excel sheet which you're going to find in the files of the course, you can see red, yellow, blue, red, yellow, blue. You can see what happens here in this Excel sheet? What does it do? It takes red here, this part here or this cell, takes the submission of all of this. Can see all of this, submission of all of this. If you look at this one here, you can see some mission of all of this, so it adds all of the lots on the Y or the phase B. And this one for the blur the red similarly here. Now, similarly for this, it will add all of this. This will add all of this. I'll just add this one, make it a numerical number like this. Okay? This one also make it okay number. Okay? This one that we can have a decimal point. To make it more precisely, to make it more precisely, number like this, and then save this. Okay. This one also for the balance, number and C. Okay. So the bus R or the phase A, will add this value and this value so that we can get the total if you double calculate this. You can see it added these two. Sum of this and this one. If you look at phase Y, it will be exactly the same submission of these two and phase B or the blue or phase C, you can see, also add them together. Nice. And the total KVA of all of this is 59.5 kVA. This is a total power of our electrical panel Nie. Okay. Now, this is the average. The first one which you are going to do is average. What does the average mean? Take this plus this, plus this and divod them by three to get the average q vacancy. B six, B seven, B eight, three, divided by three, to get the average KVA Mie. What about the unbalance? Here I have edited this Excel sheet so that it can give you the value of the unbalanced directly, Without doing these calculations which you have seen here. So you obtain the average and you are looking for imbalance by maximum deviation. Now let me explain what does this even mean? So let's take this one here. Let's take this, take it to the side here. Okay. So here we have the average, right? So average average is equal to 19.82 KvA nice. So what I'm going to do is that I'm looking for imbalance, imbalance or unbalance, phase E. So I'm going to look for the imbalance of A from the average. So it will be like this. It will be phase A, which is 19.292 -19.82, as you can see here. Maximum deviation, minus average, minus average average. This one will be phase A, then another one phase B, then another one phase C. And then we are going to look for the one which is had the maximum deviation from average. Like this, and divide by the average value, multiplied by 100 to get it as a percentage. If you do this on the calclature, it will give you approximately 0.5%. This is the imbalance in phase E. Okay, let's repeat this, but for phase B, Phase B 18.75 -19.8 2/19 0.82 multiplied by 100. It will give you -5.3 or 0.4%. Okay, what about phase C? You are going to do the same. Look for phase C, which is 20.8 -19.82, 19.82, multiplied by 100. It will be 4.94%. Great. Now, if you look at this value, you can find 0.5 -5.4 and four point you are going to look for the maximum value between the maximum absolute value, okay? So you can see that the maximum deviation or the maximum imbalance or unbalance is 5.4%, which you can see in this excel sie 5.4, as you can see here. Now, what I mean by maximum deviation here as maximum from average. If you look at here, at these three values, you can see these two values. This is the average. Phase is very close to average. This is phase B, and this is phase C. You can see that the maximum division, the maximum gap between a phase and average, this one, this is the maximum difference. This one is lower difference, but this one is higher difference. That's why I call this one, the maximum deviation, the maximum away value from the average, okay? That's what I mean by this inside our power panels, okay? Great. So here, what you can see that I have a problem. What the problem is that we have exceeded 5%. So how I am going to solve this, okay? What you are going to do that, you are going to switch between panels, okay? So let's look here carefully what I mean. You can see that here. This phase B is the one with the highest loot. And phase, let's call this phase. C is the one with the highest lute and phase B with the lowest loot? So you can see 4.9 and excess 4.9% imbalance. Were a reduction of 5.5% from average. So what I'm going to do is that I'm going to take from phase C and put into phase B. So how I'm going to do this, I'm going to switch loot. Okay, show me how are you going to do this. So you can see I'm going to take heavy load from here, a little bit load from here and put it in phase Y. So I'm going to switch two circuits. So let's look at here. So you can see circuit number three is 0.3. And circuit number five is 0.4, right? So this is phase B, and this is phase has a higher by about 0.1. What if I switch these two? If I put this here, 0.4 and put here 0.3. Like this. Et's look at the balance 4.91. But look carefully. What did I do? I replaced lighting circuit number three with number five. So I have to change this in my autocat file. So I'm going to go here to the lighting system. Here, we switch it three, three was five, right? This is pretty important. So this is number five, right? So I'm going to do like this and call this one number three and then look for number three. Number three. Shot this one. Like this, double click like this and call it number five. So this is what I did. I just exchanged the circuits. The was five. This one oh three became five, and this one oh three became five. When I did this, I also changed them here. I put five on the yellow or the phase B and put three on phase C. Okay? So you can see the unbalance now became less than 5%. Now the question is, can you reduce it more? Let me see. So we need to take a little bit from here and put it here. So let's see which one the closest value three phase three phase. Okay. So the closest two values is this one and this one. So what if I change them? Let's make this one, 2.6, and let's make this one. 2.2 0.2 25, right? Like this. So I exchanged this one with this one. What happened to the mpalance? It is reduced more 3.14. Great. So I exchanged 11 with nine, okay? So I'm going to go to the mechanical out, which is here. We exchange 11 with nine, right? So let's look where is 11. Okay, 11 and where is nine. This one is nine, and this one is 11. So I'm going to say nine and I'm going to call this 111, like this. I'm going to save this one, and this is pretty important. Any exchange, anything you change inside the Excel circuits, you need to change it inside the autocat file. You can see 3.14. Now, this is a bit little bit more than this, can you reduce it more. So let's look at this. What if I change it? This one with this one, for example, let's make this one, 3.2 and this one, 2.6. Let's see if the unbalance will increase. Yeah, the unbalance is reduced to 0.49. So what did I change? I changed it 15 with 17 white. So I'm going to go here. 15 with 17. So where is 15 and where Okay, let's go like this. This is 15 and 17. Nice. So I'm going to go here and make this 115 and go here and make this 117 like this, okay? Like this. And don't forget, save what you have done, okay? So I think 0.5 balance is pretty awesome, okay? And as you can see, we have finished. If you would like to make sure if this Excel is working fine, you can see the average is 19.82. This one is correct or working fine, I can look for the maximum deviation, 19.82, difference is ten, two, difference is seven. So this is the maximum deviated value from average. So I'm going to take it like this -19.82 divide 190.82 multiplied by 100. You can see approximately 0.5, close to 0.49. Okay. So great. So what I did now is that I added our loads, spare spaces, and we have done the unbalance for our system. Now, what is remaining now to do is several points. Point number one is selecting breakers, circuit breaker for each circuit, design of breakers, design of wire size, the sickness of the wire or the area of the wire itself. We also need to consider the demand factor, and we need to consider diversity load. Okay. Now, this one here, okay, demand, okay? Mmm. Okay, noise. And we also gonna look for the main circuit breaker, Mini switch, and we are going to look for the cable. So let's start learning about breakers and learning about currents in order to design these elements. 120. Demand Loads According to NEC: Hey, everyone. Before we continue and start designing our precurs and phases or the conductors or wires, I would like to mention the demand part. The demand and diversity factors, which we discussed earlier inside our course at the very beginning. So what does this even mean? If you look at this panel, for example, we have a group of outlets or sockets. We have water heater, we have a fridge, we have air conditioning units, we have exhaust fans, we have lighting circuits. Now, the first thing that we have to learn is that if you know that, lighting, for example, we have a group of circuits, right? We have lighting. Thus, how many lighting circuits, one, two, three lighting circuits. Do we have anything else? We don't have anything else. We have three circuits of lighting. Now, the first question, are these circuits all working together? Are they running at the same time? The real question or the answer is no, it is not necessarily that all of these circuits are running at the same time. That's why we take this one which we call the connected lot connected lute. Let's say this is, for example, let's say ten KVA we say that the connected load is ten Kv. This is the maximum load that we have, which represented by these three circuits. And since they don't work at the same time, we can obtain the demand load. So what is exactly the demand load? It's simply equal to the connected load multiplod by a demand factor. So what does this mean? It means that, for example, this factor is 0.8, it means that 80% only of our lighting circuits is operating. This is what we call demand load, and we apply this one to each type of loads. So we have HVAC system. It has its own demand factor. We have exhaustive energy you can consider as an HVAC part. We have also the sockets, which has its own demand factor. What is the benefit of doing this is that if you look at here, you'll find that the total KVA, the total connected load is 59.5 kVA. Now, by applying these demand factor, we are reducing our load. Why? Because this will help us to reduce the main circuit breaker, the main incoming circuit breaker, and the main cable. Okay? So this is the benefit of the demand factor. Now, this is applied individually for each type of fluid. So we have a demand factor of lighting, demand factor for sockets, demand factor for air conditioning and heating. We have demand factor for different types of fluids. Okay? Now, how are we going to do this? I'm going to show you right now. But in the end, you will find that we will have what we call the demand total demand load. So when we apply all of these factors to all of these loads, you are going to add them together, and you'll get what we call the demand loud. Now, let's see first how I'm going to do this. So this is actually a problem which is related to design or there is more flexibility in designing our panels based on these factors. So for example, if you get back to what we learned before, let me show you what I mean. If we get back before, let's start with the NEC standard, which I'm going to use in this lesson, and it is pretty accurate or not more accurate, but it is pretty straightforward. That's why I like using NEC to get the demand loot. So instead of looking at these tables, I'm going to look inside the NEC itself. So if you open the NEC standard, you will find that if you go down to Article 220, you'll find that demand factors for different types of flutes. So, for example, if you look at the first table, this one, for example, this one for lighting loud demand factors. So what you'll find is that if you have a dwelling unit, a residential unit, what are we going to do that for the first 3,000 volta and beer, you are going to use a demand factor of 100% 3000-120 k, you are going to use 35 and this one at 25. Now, what does this even mean or how can I translate this? Now, let me give you an example so that you can understand this concept. So let's say we have a dwelling unit, okay and the lighting circuits let's say we have five lighting circuits, five lighting circuits in an apartment or a dwelling unit in an apartment or a dwelling unit. We have five circuits, and when I added all of these circuits together, I have, let's say, for example, a ten KVA. This is the maximum load that I have or the total connected load for the lighting system, great in all of our apartment. Now, how I'm going to apply this rule. So if you would like to get the demand load for just lighting, what I'm going to do is that, you'll find that the NEC say that. So the NEC say that if you have a lighting glute for a dwelling unit, for the first 3,000 volta beer or the three KVA, the first three KA, apply 100% demand factor. So that's what I'm going to do. So we have ten KVA, so I'm going to say 3,000, multiply it by 100%, which is a unity one. Then plus, this is the first 3,000, how much load is remaining ten minus three gives us 7,000 volt a mirror. This is the remaining part, right? Now, it says 3001-120 thousand, use a 35% demand fact. So this is the remaining in this range, right? So I'm going to say 7,000 multiplied by 0.35. And then I'm going to do this. So let's do this on the calculator. Let's get it here. So we have 7,000 multiplied by 0.35 plus 3,000 here. You can see 5,000 here, 5,000, 450 volt and bear. You can see now instead of designing my own circuit breaker and cables, based on this ten KVA, I'm going to design it based on this 5,000, 450 volt mire. Now, of course, this is not alone, but there is still other loads like receptacles, kitchen, a conditioning, whatever it is. But what I'm just showing you right now is that you can see that I reduced the value from ten KVA into a lower value of 5,450 volt and beer. Okay? This is the design is not based on this value for the main circuit breaker, but this one beside the other louts, I'm going to show you right now what I exactly mean. So this is how you apply this from the code, okay? This is for dwelling units. Now, what about hotels and any other part you are going to use this 20,000, 60%, et cetera, warehouses, and all others. That is what I'm concerned with. Now, remember, what are we working with? We are working with actually a commercial building or an administration building, whatever you would like to call it, commercial building, for example. So since I'm working with it, you can see that all others, total volta and there is 100 as a demand 100%, okay? Great. So what I'm going to do that I'm going to go here and make it easy. First, description is lighting. Now let's look at where the connected load, okay? So what I'm going to do is that I'm going here. Delete this and we will say equal to, lighting, equal to what equal to this loot for the circuit plus this one. Okay, let me do this, this plus this one plus this one. This is our lighting root, right? These three circuits. And I'm going to press Enter like this. So it is point line submission of these three. Great. And we can actually do this like this to be more accurate. Like, it's okay. So that we can see the dicimal point. Okay? Great. So this is the lighting, the total connected lot for the lighting. Now, what is the demand factor one. Now, the demand lot, which is product of connected lute, multiplied by demand factor gives us this one. So I'm going to say this one equal to this value. Sorry, this one, multiploid by this one here like this and enter. So this one multi this one, as you can see, 0.87. Great. That's the first lute. Now let's get back to our um, here, this one, okay? This is for lighting. Now, let's go down here receptacles. That's the one or sockets which I'm looking for. Now, you can see that receptacles, other than dwelling units, you are going to look at the tables here. However, what about dwelling units? For receptacles, you can see demand factors for non dwelling, anything other than dwelling, apply this formula. So it means that if you have a receptacle loads, for TVA is 100% demand factor, and the remaining value is at 50%, okay? So let's al this. If you go here, we can ala this to our table, but before I do this, I'm going to do another thing, okay? Okay, let's go here. Here you can see for receptacles for dwelling. What about dwelling? This is for other than dwelling. If you go up here, receptacle loads. If you go here loads receptacle loads, caleta and codons, blah, blah, blah, given in table 220.45 or 220.47. So receptacles can be obtained from 220.45, this one or this one. So what does this even mean? It means that for non dwelling, you are going to get it from here. For the dwelling, you are going to get it from here. So what do you mean? It means that when I apply these rules, this one here, I'm going to add. I'm going to do this. I'm going to look for lighting and going to look for sockets circuits. Let's say circuits, six circuits, and then I'm going to add them all together and they get the total connected lute as if they are one big loot. And then after getting, let's say ten KV, I'm going to apply these rules here. Okay, I hope it's clear for you. Let me give an example. Let's say lighting is five KVA and sockets, let's say ten KVA as an example, okay? So what I'm going to do is that this is for the total circuits of lighting, all circuits of sockets in a dwelling unit, okay? So I'm going to add them together. It will be 15 KVA then what are you going to do that I'm going to apply this rule first 3,000, multiplied by 100% plus from this to this, 35%. I'm going to the remaining part is 12,000, multiplied by 0.35. Then you are going to get the total connected loot. Okay. Nice. Another part here, which is regarding the dwelling. If you go down here, inside where is laundry, like, for example, a washing machine. You'll find that here. If you go all the way, you can see this load for laundry, like a washing machine shall be permitted to be included with the general lighting and subjected to table 220.45, this exact table. So when you have a residential apartment, you are going to take lighting, sockets, and laundry. All of these three as one big lot and apply these rules. Okay? So I hope it is clear for you how you are going to apply this for apartment. Now, let's get back to our residential building or commercial building. For non dwelling, foresting KVA and remaining at 50%. So I'm going to do this. All I have to do is that I'm going to get all of the load of the receptacles. Okay, great. So I'm socket outlet. So I'm going to say here equal to, go here. Let's look at here anything related to sockets. Do we have any socks here? No. Here we have this. All of these are socks. I'm going to select this, plus the swan, plus the swan and plus the swan two. Plus this. And then plus this one and plus this one. This one, two, and this one plus this one. So we selected all of our socket circuit. Then I'm going to click on Enter. So we have 18.75 outlet. Okay, great. Now, forget about this demand factor. We are going to just delete this because we don't need it. Great. So this is our socket, 18.75. So what does the code say? It's say that here, let's get here. For the first TinkIV uplo 100%. I'm going to say ten multiplied by unity plus the remaining. So the remaining is what remaining is 8.75, right? 8.8 0.75 KVA. Sorry. Ten plus 8.75 multiplied by 50% like this. So it will be 14.35. This is for the first ten, 100%. Second, anything above ten is 50%. So I hope you understand how I applied this rule. So I'm going to base it right here. It will be 14.4. Let's see. Yep, exactly. Okay. Now, what about air conditioning and electric heaters? So we have water heaters, so I'm going to call it this one water. Heater for water heater and air conditioning. In this system, we are going to make everything is unity, and also the fridge, we have just one fridge. So of course, it is going to be working all the time, right? By logic. So I'm going to add the fridge, which is this one. This one equal to this value for the fridge. Enter for the water heater, we have one water heater, which is also two. This is just an assumption since we assume that it is two KVA. And air conditioning air conditioning include exhaust fans, DX units, everything, okay? So I'm going to say equal to select, so we have this plus this one, plus this one because, of course, all of them are gonna work, right, exhaust fans. Um plus this one plus this one, two, this one, plus this one. There is also another function which we can actually use. Let me show you what function. I totally forgot about it. This function is sum and open up bracket like this, and we can do this one, this one and control and depress on every component like this. Okay, this is much easier, right, than doing what I just said it. Okay? Now, we can see the total KVA this. Total KVA here is the submission of all of this exactly similar at similar to the one which we obtained here, just as a check for us. Okay, this one will be this will be equal to. This one, multiplod by this one. And of course, it is unity. So we don't have to worry about this. This one is also equal to this one, multiploid by, this one, and enter, and we can apply this by doing like this. Okay, so this is the total demand ud bear KVA. So we add lighting here, okay, demand factor unity, since we are in a residential commercial building like this, receptacles just put down only the receptacles, air conditioning, water heater, and fridge are exactly the same. Okay, so the demand ud is 55 and after getting this demand loud, you will see that we added a 15% as for future expansion. So this extra, 15%, which is greater than the actual loud, this one is for future expansion for these spaces and spare inside the panel. Okay. Okay, another thing that let's look at the code one more time. Clothes dryers in a dwelling units. How are you going to use this? You'll find that you are going to look at the stable. If you have demand factors for household electric clothes dryers. If you have 1-4 dryers in your house, then you are going to apply a demand factor of 100%. If you have five dryers in your house, you are going to you assume 85%, six dryers, 75%, et cetera. Okay, great. Here this is for more than this, more than 12 dryers. Now, if you go down here for kitchen equipment, other than dwelling, you'll find also some tables. You'll find your demand factors and looks for household, electric range, ovens, cooking units, and you'll see how many appliance you have inside your own kitchen and if it is its own rating, if it less than use this, if it is great between this and this, use this, not over 12, use this. So again, we have mini tables, according to the according to your own applicants. This is for the household for dwelling. This one kitchen for non dwelling units one, two, three, four, five and 600% demand factor. According to how many equipment do you have in your okay? So if you have five equipment at your kitchen, then you are going to apply a demand factor of 70% between them. Now, another one here inside the NEC, you'll find the number of dwelling units. You can apply a demand factor similar to the diversity factor. Or what we call actually in reality, the correct one is coincidence factor. The diversity factor is the inverse of, coincidence factor. The coincidence factor is less than one, and diverse factor is greater than however it is in many catalogs and many places you will find that it is diverse factor is used at the coincidence factor. Anyway, you understand how to apply this. When we talked about at the very beginning of the course. Anyway, you will find here, if you have a number of dwellings 3-5, you can apply demand factor of four 5% between them. This is for if you have a large panel, for example, providing many dwelling units or a large or a main distribution port providing several circuits, you can apply these rules. Now, this one is actually similar to what? If you go back here to this one, where exactly similar to this one actually, similar to how many consumers for apartment block, and how we are going to apply how much you can see it is simultaneity factor or coincidence factor. You are going to apply diversion between them. It means that all of these apartments or all of these customers not operating at the same time. Okay, four circuits here, another one, okay? According to the IEC standard, what do they say that you have, if you'd like to follow the IEC for this, it says that if you have a distribution board, and this distribution board these circuits. So for example, if you have 2-3, apply a diversity factor of 0.9, which means that all of this here, it means that all of these circuits, let's say if we have, for example, here we have 30 circuits, so I'm going to go here and look how many distribution circuits, more than ten, right? Then apply 0.6. This can be applied if you don't know about the loud itself. And actually, this rule also can be applied for main distribution board that feeds several sub circuits, okay? Usually we are going to do this when we have a large main distribution board that gives electrical power to several panels inside these different floors. We are going to apply between them 0.6, for example, or less dependent on this on how many panels do we have? Okay? Now, this one actually is similar to this. You can see that what happens exactly that they take, they look at the main distribution port, and they keep all of the connected load as it is. So what I mean by this is that they might design this panel, these panels like this as it is without any kind of demand factors. And then take all of these loads together. All of this is taken from the main distribution port. Like this, all supplies electrical power from main distribution port. Like this. When we design this, we are going to take. We will see how many panels, one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight. So I'm going to look, Hey, we have eight we have eight, so I'm going to apply 0.7, so I'm going to take this total loot and multiply it by 0.7. To size the transformer. Okay? And side the cables and circuit precar for mean distribution port if we don't have a transformer or even if we have, okay? In general, also here, there are some values here which you can also use. This is from experience. You can have if you have a commercial building, you can apply between 0.62 0.8 for this. So you can take this one, total connected loads and modulate by 0.62 0.8. Now, again, this one specifically or this topic regarding the circuits specifically, it can change based on the designer itself. So for example, it can say, I'm going to take demand factor. So they do this. So they say, Hey, I'm going to take a demand factor for each type of fluid like this. Okay? Each one, one, unity 0.8, whatever it is dependent on the code itself. And then after this, we have different circuits, right? So they take a diversactor between all of these circuits together. Another diversit effect. And so they take this one and metabolite again but another effect. So get diversified loud. Others does not do this. They take the demand load like this and don't do anything else like I do right now. This is according what I did right now is according to the NEC. If you are following the NEC, then you are going to do exactly as I did here. There are others who say, Hey, I'm going to take all of the connected load like this 59.5 as it is, and then I'm going to multiply it by a certain factor, 0.7 0.8 whatever it is. But I believe that this method here of using the demand factor is more accurate because you are following the codes in every step, okay? Now, after getting this demand value, you can design the feeder and the main breaker, which is suitable for the panel. So we're going to do right now. We are going to apply, we are going to design circuit breakers for all of these circuits and select conductors or wires, and then we are going to select the main feeder and the circuit breaker. 121. Principle of Operation and Selection of Low Voltage Circuit Breakers: Hey, everyone, in this lesson, we are going to discuss the operation and selection of the low voltage circuit breaker. How can we select the sizing or the current ratings for the low voltage circuit breakers? Let's start by the principle of operation of the low volt circuit breaker, as you can see here inside the circuit breaker itself. There are many types of circuit breakers, such as miniature circuit breaker, molded circuit breaker, air circuit breaker, and so on. These are used for the low voltage system. This inside the circuit breaker itself, it has two working mechanism. One which is a thermal mechanism, another one which is a magnetic mechanism. The thermal mechanism, what happens here is that inside circuit breaker itself, there are two pi metal material, due to the presence of current, as you know that the flow of current produces heat, which will cause the pi metal to expand with a different expansion coefficients, and in the end, it will lead to trading of the circuit. Another mechanism, which is the magnetic mechanism. What happens here is that we have coil in which our current will flow and which will produce a force or magnetic force, which will lead to trebing of the circuit. We have the thermal mechanism and the magnetic mechanism. If you don't know about magnetic mechanism, we have discussed it in another lectures about protection on our channel. As you can see here in the thermal mechanism and the magnetic mechanism we have relation between the time and the current. What is this time? This is the time of tribing. As you can see here, we have a value called I R, IM and ICU. As you can see here before, the I R, if the value of the current is in this region, it means that the circuit or the circuit breaker will not trip. For example here, at this point, for example, this value of the current, you will find that the time of trebing is equal to nearly infinity or a very large time. Starting from this one, from the value of I R, which is the value at which our circuit breaker will start trebling. At I R, you will find that the equivalent time is this value. As the time or as the value of the current increases here, for example, you can see that the value of the time. It will be this one. This one was the original time, at r, this one at a different current. As you can see here as the value of the current increases, the treading time will start to decrease. The circuit will tread faster. Now, as we go here, we have the thermal characteristics or the thermal mechanism. You can see it starts to, you can see here. As the current increases, the value of the tripping time will decrease. Until reaching a certain point, which is the Im. This value of the current. What will happen is that the time will be reduced from this value to this value. As you can see, it will start triving at a very smaller time here. You will find that here. We have two regions. The one which is the overload protection, which provides a long time overloading, for example, if we increase the current absorbed by our induction machine, for example, then we are working in the overloading region. It will take long time in order to trap. We are working using the thermal mechanism. If the value of the current reaches this value IM, it means that we are starting to working in the short circuit region or in the short circuit protection region. As you can see, short circuit protection region. Short time delay. The delay is with A not E. Anyway, you will find here it is working using the magnetic mechanism. In the magnetic mechanism, it has a short time. The magnet or the magnetic force will be very large, which will trip the circuit in a very short time. Then we have a final value, which is ICU, which is the maximum value of the current. If we see here, We will find I R, which is the rated current of circuit breaker at which it will start to t. This is the beginning of the treing region. Then we have the IM, which is the intendans short circuit current of circuit breaker, which means it is the value at which we start in the short circuit region. If the current reaches IM, it means that we are in the short circuit region. If we start at I R, it means we are in overloading region. Then we have ICU, which is the rated breaking capa capacity of the circuit breaker itself, in kilo bear, which is the maximum short circuit current at which our circuit breaker can withstand. The I R, as we can see here, depends on the kilo volt and be of our loot, the ICU depends on the imbedans of cables parse transformers or to be more specific, ICU depends on the short circuit analysis. This value is equivalent to the maximum short circuit current, which will happen in our circuit. How can we know this value. This value can be known by using short circuit analysis or short circuit calculations. We have discussed this in another value, the short circuit analysis, how can you do this using e tap and by using manual calculations. Now, what we are going is that we need to identify the IR and I of the circuit breaker itself. Let's start by the operating volt of circuit breaker for your knowledge. We have the low voltage from 1 volt to 1 kilo volt, is the low voltage range. There is one phase and three phase. For example, one phase, 223 phase, or 180 volts. This is values in my own country. These values can differ according to your own country. It's not a standard devalue. The low voltage can be a miniature circuit breaker or a molded case circuit breaker or an air circuit breaker. The medium volt starts from 1 kilo volt up to 66 kilo volt. We have an 11 kilo volt, 22 kilo volt, 6.6 kilo volt, 3.3 kilovolt. This medium voltage can be SF six and the vacuum circuit breakers. For the i voltage from 66 kilo volt to 500 kilo volt, we have 132 kilovolt, 222 20 kilovolt circuit breakers, 500 kilovolt circuit breakers, and they can be oil or Six circuit breakers. Now, for example, in our system here, for example, in the single phase, single phase circuit breakers will be used if we have an apparent power or S less than five kilo volt and bear. The three phase circuit breaker will operate an S greater than five kilo volt and B. These values are not standard values. Sometimes you can find a circuit breaker or a three phase circuit breaker, which have a value less than five kilo volt bir. How can we select the r, which is the first value in our curve here? This value, the rated current of circuit breaker. Let's start by giving one example here? Example number one. We have a cable connected to our single phase loot, which have a four horse power. First thing, we need to find the rated current of this loot. The first step is that we will assume that each horse power is equivalent to 1 kilo volt and bear. Where did we get this assumption? If we get the relation between S or the apparent power and the active power. The S or the apparent power is equal to active power over the power factor. The power or the active power here, which is in kilowatt, in kilowatt, each each one horse power, each one horse of power is equivalent 2.74, six kilo. This is one horse of power. Divided by the power factor, which is point 85. This is an assumption that the power factor is 0.85. This will give us a value of this one divided by each other will give us nearly one kilo. As you can see here that the horse power is equivalent to one kilo volta amber. This is just an approximation. The single phase or the parent power of single phase is equal to the voltage. Multiplied by current, and the current is equal to here will be s over V S over V In the single phase system, such as here. The lot, the current loot or the loot current will be equal to S, which is in kilo volt and bear, multiplied by 1,000 to convert it into volt and bear. Divided by the voltage or a single phase voltage is at 220 volt. This is, of course, in my own country as an example, will give us 4.5 multiplied by. This is just an approximation for 220 system. Simply, they say that the loot current will be 4.5 multiplied by k volt and beer or 4.5 multiplied by the horse above for a single phase loot. In this case, we have a four hos power, multiplied by 4.5, four, which is the number of fors powers, multiplied by 4.5, give us 18 and bear. This is what? This is the rated loot current. Rted loot current. What is the I R? How can we get the I R? The I R or the circuit breaker current, I R will be equal to a safety factor, multiplied by loot, which is the loot current here. I in and bear multiplied by a certain safety factor. This safety factor, according to IC and NEC, IEC gives a safety factor of a 20% of loot, which means we will multiply by 1.2. NEC allows a 10% of a load, which is 1.1 multiplied by the loot current. According to my own code, which is the Egyptian code, it says that 25% overload, which means 1.25 multi blood by the current. As an example, I will use my own code. It will be the circuit breaker current, will be 1.25 because we allow a 25% overloading. Multi blood by 18 and bear, will give us a 22.5 and bear. This is the circuit breaker current or I R. Now, let's go and see what is the available circuit breakers rating. This one is a circuit not circuit. We have the molded circuit breaker as a miniature circuit breaker, molded circuit breaker and the air circuit breaker in the low voltage system. From here to here, you'll find the standard ratings for the miniature circuit breaker. From here to here up to 1,600, you will find the molded circuit breaker. For the air circuit breaker from 630 up to 6,300. Since we are dealing with a low voltage and the low value of current, we will choose the miniature circuit breaker. We have a 22.5 22.5, which is 20-25. We will select that 25 or the higher value. We select circuit breaker of a 25 bar, as you can see here. Y? Because we don't have 22.5. The nearrest one between them is that 25, not the 2025. Let's have another example for the three phase loot, 50 hertz of a 50 horse power, and we need to find the rated current of circuit breaker or R of circuit breaker. As we know that the S or the three phase apparent power is equal to root three, multiplied by v multiplied by current. Root three, v here is line to line rms voltage. Line to line rms voltage. The loot current will be equal to s of root three, S over root three v, which is the three phase current or the loot current of one phase. The loot current will be S multiplied by 1,000 in order to convert it from kilo volt and bear to volt and bear, over root three, multiplied by s hundred 80. V s hundred 80. This hundred 80 is line to line M value in my own country. This value is not standard according to, of course, the voltage. For approximation, we say 1.5 multiplied by S, or 1.5 multiplied by kilo volt and bear or 1.5 multiplied by horse power, for a three phase loot. In this case, we have a 50 horse power, it will be 1.5 Mutablod by 50, like this. 1.5 Mute blood by 50 gives us 75 and bare of the rated current. Now, something which is really important, if you notice here that that the factor here is 1.5, but previously it was 4.5. Why is this happening? In this case, we have one phase, which is loaded by the full power. We have a factor of 4.5. But here as you can see here, we have a three phase. The power is distributed along three phases. If you divide the factor here, 4.5, which was the complete power on one phase over a three phase over this three phases, this three phases, then you will find to give us 1.5. As you can see here, 1.5, because each phase took third of the ****. Now let's continue like here. Circuit breaker current will be 75. This one, loot current traded loot current, multiplied by a safety factor of 1.25, give us 94 and beer. Let's see the table again. 94 here. The 94 is close to what is close to 100 pair. We will select a circuit breaker of 100 pair. Now, let's see more examples. The first one, we have 262.5 a circuit breaker R. 262.5, 262 here 250-400. 400-250. What value will you choose? I will choose a 250, not 400, of course. Because this value is close to this one more than this, there is a difference nearly 150. But here's the difference is 12 and beer, so I will choose this one. It will be a circuit breaker of a 250 beer. Another example here, we have a zero hundred and bere, zero hundred and bare between here, 200-50 and between 400. As you can see here, the difference is between here and here, 50 and bare, which is large value, and between here and here, it will be 100 and bare. What we are going to do, we are going to choose this circuit breaker of a 400 and bare, but adjust circuit breaker. It will be like this circuit breaker, 400 and bare and adjustable. What I mean by adjustable, you can choose value of the current. Let's see how does this happen. If we look at this one, we have a circuit breaker here, molded case circuit breaker, and you can see I R, IM, You can find here we have magnetic threshold adjustment, thermal threshold adjustment, the thermal one is the I R, and the magnetic is the Im. Here we need to control the I R. This one is a 400 and bare. And we need to control the thermal or the I R at 100 B. This is the value of the circuit breaker, which we need. We'll find here potentiometer, which you can control like this. If we take this two close here, you'll find IM, the magnetic and I R, which is the rated current of the circuit breaker. We need the I R, blood by I N. I N is the nominal value of of the circuit breaker. The I N here, this circuit breaker is a 400 beer, so the I N will be 400. Now, as you can see here, you will find a 0.95 0.9 0.85, 0.8, and so on until 0.4. You can't control the value of the current from 0.4 of the 400 and bare up to one of the 400 bare. As an example, we need hundred and bear. How can we do this? We need to multiply 400 by a certain value to get the hundred and bear. As you can see here to get the zer hundred and bear, the I R will be equal to 400, multiplied by 0.7 to give us nearly 208, which is close to hundred. What we can see here, is that we adjust this putonometer at this value, 0.7. When we multiply 0.7 by 400, we will get to 180, which is the closest value to 300 beer. We adjust the putonometer at 0.7. By adjusting it at 0.7, it means 0.7, multiplied by the rated value of the circuit breaker, which is a 400 gives us value close to what we need. Let's read this. Now the next thing is the I, or the instantaneous circuit current. As you can see here in this figure. We have three types of curves. We have a B curve, C curve, and D curve. When you select the circuit breaker, we selected the IR, or the rated current of circuit breaker as we did before. Second thing, we need to select what is the type of the curve? It is B or C or D. As you can see here, that P, which is three to five times n, the value of the circuit breaker current, and C is five to ten times I n or the rated current of circuit breakers, and D is equal to ten to 20 times I n or the circuit breaker current. You can select, for example, that the short circuit will start from three times the circuit breaker current. Three to five times circuit breaker current, or you can select a C, which means the short circuit level, in my opinion will start 5-10 times. Or if you select that D, it means that the short circuit level, in my opinion will start 10-20 times. You will ask me, how can I select should I select a B or C or D? How can I select this one? Simply, B curve, This one 3-5 times the in or the circuit breaker cannot is used in the protection of the static louts, such as lighting, heaters, and socket. If you have lighting, protection of the circuit breaker, protecting a lighting circuit or a heater or a socket, then you are going to use the B curve. Remember, this is really important. Second thing is that the C curve C curve 5-10 times the circuit breaker current. It is used in protection of the dynamic loots, such as motors, with high starting current. If you have a motor induction motor, with a high starting current, then you are going definitely to use C because it is used in dynamic loots. Why? Because if we selected, for example, three to five times, then it will be in the range of the starting current of the motor. In this case, the circuit breaker will trap and our motor will never operate because it will think that the starting current is a short circuit current. We will need to move the short circuit level 5-10 times. Now, finally, the idea when to use the dec, D curve is used in protection of equipment with a very high starting current, more than the induction motors, like what like transformers? Transformers have a very large starting current. If we see the circuit breaker will trip. Because there is a high level of harmonics at the beginning. The starting current is really high, which can fall in the range 5-10 times. In this case, C will not be okay for us because it will trap. It will consider this as a short circuit. In this case, we use the D curve D curve 10-20 times in order to prevent the circuit breaker from operating at the starting of transformer. We discussed how to select the IR, how to select the IM, and finally, the rated capacity of the circuit breaker depends on the short circuit level, or to be more specific, the three phase short circuit value. 122. Principle of Operation of Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker or Residual Current Circuit Breaker: Hi and welcome everyone to our video today. We are going to discuss the Earth leakage circuit breaker or the residual current circuit breaker. Let's start by discussing that we have in the arc leakage circuit breaker. We have two types, the single phase and three phase. What does the Earth leakage circuit breaker do? It protects us against leakage current. So if we have a leakage current inside our electrical machine in order to protect our humans or protect our machines, we need to cut off the circuit in case of having large leakage current. Let's understand how does the rS leakage circuit breaker work or the single phase work principle and the residual current working principle. For the single phase, as you can see here, we have the rS leakage circuit breaker. We have two lines, one which is the phase, and the other one which is the neutral. We have here a single phase loot. What happens is that the current will flow like this. If we see here like this from the source, bouncing through our liquid circuit breaker, then going to the ut, this is the phase. This one is the phase. Then we have the second one which is the neutral, it will go back inside the neutral, like this. Of course, we have here a single phase supply as an exam, like this. The current will flow in the post of cycle for example from here and it gets back. As you can see here, the Earthlk circuit breaker will have the int inut current and the but current. If the current going inside the thylqu circuit breaker, then comes back the same current, it means that there is no leakage current. Let's see an example. Let's see an example. If we have a ten b here as an inbut current. The ten b goes through here, inside the ut and if there is no leakage current, then we will have ten ber coming back inside the neutral, and here we have a ten ber. In this case, the Ibut current is equal to the but current. As you can see the single phase system in the single phase system, the Earth liquid circuit breaker compare the difference between the life or the phase and the neutral lines with the adjusted setting value. What will happen is that if the input current, if the input current is equal to the but current, the current entering the loot, is the same current going out of the loot or the current entering through the sligal circuit breaker is the same current going out. Then it means that we are in the normal operation. Ten and bear going through the earth circuit breaker to the alute, and come back inside the neutral. Now, what if we have a leakage current or a fault inside our machine? It is not necessarily a fault but a small leakage current, which can be harmful for machines or humans. As an example, we will have a ten and bear here. Entering through the slick circuit breaker to the loot ten and bear here. Now, if this lot, if there is a leak decurrent inside the loot, what will happen is that this enclosure usually will be connected to the ground like this. The enclosure of the induction machine, for example, or the enclosure of banel and so on. What will happen is that, we will have a small leak de current from the banal itself as an example two and bear. The current coming coming back here will be eight and bear. We have an input of a ten and bear, two and be likage current, and eight and bear coming back through the neutral. The Earth liked circuit breaker will have an outt current of eight and bear. In this case, we will have an Earth leakage problem because the inbut current which is ten bar does not equal the current going out, which is the eight bar. By comparing the inbut and out, the Earth circuit breaker will understand that there is a leakage problem. As you can see here, leakage current. This is how the Earth liquid circuit breaker work in the single phase. As you can see here, if I minus i out or the inbot current minus the but current equal to zero, it means that we are in the normal operation. As you can see here, if i n or the inbot current minus the albut current, take this one here equal to zero, equal to zero, it means that we are in the normal operation. But if it has a value has a value value Then it means that we have a leakage current and there is an A here. Here, we have an A, leakage, L here. Now, how does the three phase leakage circuit breaker work? As you can see here in the three phase system, assuming of course that the supply is a phase star connected supply. We will have r, S T, and neutral, or the three phase, and denute. The three phase entering the clic circuit breaker, I R, S t, Then the as summation of them is the current which is going back inside the neutral like this. What happens here is that. In the case of the three phase system, the earth circuit breaker compare the difference between the three phase current, R I S IT, not only a single phase, but the three phase current with the neutral current with the neutral current. According to the adjusted setting value, we will understand how we can set these values or what values we should set our circuit break. As you can see, this are the different probabilities or the different conditions or the different cases. If I r, r plus s plus I t equal to the neutral current equal to zero, what does this mean? If the summation of r plus s plus I t, or the three phase current equal to each other and having a phase shift of 120 degree equal to a neutral current, what does this mean? It means that we are in the balanced condition? Because if the summation of the R I S IT, the sum is equal to zero, it means that the a balanced loot. There is a balanced three phase loot. In this case, the current going back inside the neutral is equal to zero. If we subtract this value, from n, it will give us also zero in case of the balanced loot, so there is no leakage current. Another case, if we have unbalanced loot, if we have unbalanced loot. Then I R plus S plus t or the three phase current submission will give us n or the neutral current. In this case, this is an unbalanced system, this will give us a value here. As you can see here, this submission, is equal to the neutral current. What will happen is that this is of course, an unbalanced system, we will have a value. Now, if I would like to know the normal operation, what we are going to do is that we will subtract the three phase current, the three phase current. From n, give us zero. You can see r plus s plus t minus n, which is a neutral current, if we subtract them together, we will get the leakage current. If this current is zero, what does this mean that we are in the normal operation? However, if there is a value, it means that we have a leakage current. To make this more easier to understand, the three phase current submission is equal to the neutral current. Or if we sub subtract the three phase current from n, this will give us all with zero. When in the balanced condition. However, if there is a leakage current here, then I leakage, Then what will happen is that the current and subtracted from the three phase will not be equal to zero and it will give us the leakage current. Now we understand how a single phase arcade circuit breaker work, how a three phase, arth circuit breaker work. Now, what are the values we need? What are the stling values for the clic circuit breaker? When does our circuit breaker work? In order to protect humans, we will select the sitting value for the current, the value at which our circuit breaker will start or the difference between the Ibut current and but current, or the value at which our circuit breaker will start to operate or the leak current is equal to 30 milli mb. In order to protect a human, we will make the circuit breaker, if the difference is 30 mill be, it will start operating. Why in order to prevent or protect the humans against leak G current? If we would like to protect electrical machines, then we will set the current at 100 milli beer. The difference between the Ibo current and current or the kid current is equal to zero hundred milli amber in order to protect our electrical machines. In this quick lesson, we discussed the Earth quid circuit breaker, the single phase three phase. Finally, we provided the values needed for setting our Earth lic circuit breaker. 123. Selection of Medium Voltage Circuit Breakers: Hey, everyone, in this lesson, we will discuss the medium voltage circuit breaker. This will be a quick tutorial. About, how can you select the medium voltage circuit break? First, let's understand that the rated voltages are in medium voltage, which are considered as a medium voltage, are 3.3 kilo volt, 6.6 kilo volt, 11 kilo volt, and 22 kilo volt. These are different levels for the medium voltage. When we are operating at them, we are operating at the medium voltage. Now, remember that in the medium voltage level, usually that the rated currents will be from 630 bare 24000 b. This is the range of the circuit breaker available for the medium voltage. We have something which is called the rated breaking capacity, which we have to select. This one depends on the voltage level. As you can see, 11 kilo volt, 22 kilo volt, 6.6 kilovolts, this is an example. In 11 kilovolt, it is the rated breaking capacity in mega volta and bear salt circuit, 500 megavolta and bear, this one, 750 mega volta and bear, and 6.6 is 250 mega volt and bear. What does this actually mean? What does the mega volta and bear salt circuit mean? This simply means, this one, the low, the original low is this one will be equal to root three. Multiplied by V line to line RMs, R s or the line to line voltage, RMS or effective value, multiplied by, the short circuit current. This this rated breaking capacity in mega volta and bear, This representing the three phase power in case of the short circuit current. Root three, which is, of course, can be root three, V line to line RMs or three multiplied by V phase, V phase Rs. Which is representing the three phase power. Multiplied by the short circuit current. This larger value representing the rated breaking capacity of a circuit breaker, which shows exactly the short circuit current with respect to the line to line Rs. The line to line RMs here is that can be 22 kilo volt, 11 kilo volt, 6.6 kilo volt, 3.3 kilo volt. All of these voltages are line to line R mes. Now, remember that these values, this values depends on the power grid. According to the power grid, you will know what values for the mega volt and bear short circuit for each one. How can we know this? This one can be known according to the short circuit current. The 11 kilovolt power grid or the 6.6 kilovolt or a 22 kilovolt, We identify the short circuit current, the maximum short circuit current, and according to this, we will know what is the value of the mega volt ember. Usually, these values are a standard for each power grid. This is not standard worldwide, but it's standard for each power grid. This is, for example, in my own country. Now, the circuit breakers which are used in the medium voltage can be oil circuit breaker, can be air circuit breaker, can be SF six circuit breakers, and vai vacuum circuit breakers. The rated voltage, which can operate at the oil, as you can see, it can operate from 1 kilo volt up to 330 kilo volt, which means it can operate in the medium and in the high voltage levels. This is a breaking capacity of the oil circuit breakers available from 150 mega volt and bear, which of course is the rated capacity, which we discussed here. This rated capacity up to 2000 megavolt bear. Also the air circuit breaker can 1-15 kilo volt, which means it works only in the medium voltage level. Also the breaking capacity can be 5-500 mega volt and beer. For the SF six circuit breaker, it can operate from 3.6 to 760 kilo volt, which means it can operate in the medium level, high voltage level and extra high voltage levels. The breaking cavaty, you can see it is very high 10000-50 thousand mega volt by. Now, also the vacuum 11-33 kilo volt, which is in the medium range 250-2 thousand mega volt amber. Now, let's have a small example on how can we select a medium voltage circuit breaker. As you can see here, we have three phase motor. As you can see, we have a three phase motor of a two mega volt and bear power. This is of course the S or the apparent power and operating at 11 kilo volt. We have a three phase circuit breaker, and we would like to select this circuit breaker. This circuit breaker is of course a medium voltage circuit breaker because we are operating at 11 kilo volt. The first step is that we need to find the rated current of the motor similar to what we did in the low voltage circuit breakers. The loot current will be equal to the apparent power. Let's type the low so you can understand it easily. As you know that the apparent power S for the motor or any loot is equal to root three, multiply it by, V line to line S, multiply it by rated current. Remember that we are talking about rated power, not the breaking capacity. We have rated currents and we are talking about rated power of a motor or a loot. But the in circuit breaker, the breaking capacity is related to the short circuit current. The rated current of the motor will be equal to S, which is a parent power two mega volt and bear over root three, multiplied by V line to line arms, which is 11 kilo volt. The loot current will be equal to the power, which is two mega volt and bear, divided by root three, multiplied by 11 kilo volt, which will give us a current of 104 bar. Now, if we get back to the previous slide, we said that the rated current of the medium voltage of circuit breakers is 630-4 thousand and bare. In this case, as you can see here, this is the previous rating which we have shown before for circuit breakers. We will select the 630 and bare as a short or a circuit breaker rating. We can choose what type we can choose SF six from here, Let's delete all of this first. As you can see here, we are operating at 11 kilo volt, which means we need 500 mega volt and beer. The 500 mega volt and beer can be with air circuit breaker, as you can see here, or can be from oil circuit breakers, or can be from SF six or vacuum. Any of these circuit breakers will be stable according to the available breaking capacity. As an example, we will select the SF six, but remember something which is really important. All of this satisfy the 500 mega volt and beer, but we need to satisfy the 11 kilovolts. This one satisfy. This one satisfy 11 kilovolt. This one all satisfy and this one all sts fy. All of them satisfy the 11 kilvot. Any of these breakers will be suitable for our application. As an example, we selected the SF six circuit breaker and of course, we will need an adjust SF six circuit breaker in order to get it close to 104 beer. Now, the short circuit current, which we need to find, we need to find the short circuit current in order to identify the required braking capacity. Or ICU or the maximum short circuit current or the maximum braking of the circuit breaker or the maximum short circuit on which our circuit breaker can withstand. As you can see here, we have 11 kilovolt. From the previous slide, we said that it is having a 500 mega volt and bear a breaking capacity or a short circuit power for the 11 kilovolt e grid. In order to find the short circuit current, we said before from this law again. The S, which is 500 mega volt and bar will be equal to root three, multiplied by 11 kilo volt, which is the V line to line R M value. Multiplied by short circuit current because we are talking about the short circuit capacity. As you can see here, our short circuit will be equal to 500, multiplied by ten to 06, which is 500 mega volt and bear over root three, multiplied by 11 kilo volt, which will give us a short circuit current in the 11 kilo volt grad, which is a 26 kilo bear. We need a circuit breaker, which can we have a 630 and be? Can we stand 11 kilo volt? And have a short circuit current of a 26 kilomb or with extend this value. However, we have to consider a very important factor here. We said now that the short circuit current in case of this 11 kilo volt, we need 26 kilo amber. But since we have motor, which is really important. This is really important. We have a motor in medium voltage. For mega, medium volt, not mega volt, medium voltage motors, there are a contribution of currents from the other neighbor motors in case of the fault, they are feeding the fault. This contribution can range from 50% to 80% of this current. We need to consider this contribution. In this case, as an example, we will choose 80%. The capacity of the circuit breaker required will be the short circuit current, which is a 26 kilo bear plus the contribution from other motors, which can be 50-80% as an example, 80% of the short circuit current, which is a 26 kilo and bear. O plus 80%, which is 0.8, give us 1.8 motor blood by 26, give us a 46.8 kilo bear. The capacity required. Of course, we don't have this value, so we will choose the nerest available, which is 50 kilo bear. Now, again, what happened here, what exactly happened here. Let's make it easier. As an example, we have here our p, medium voltage pus powers, and we have a group of motors, not only one motor, we have a group of motors. This is a motor which we need to protect. This motor, which we need to protect. Here, we have a transformer as an example. A step down transformer, and this one get the power from the power grade, this is an 11 kilovolt here. 11 kilo volt. This transformer supplies electrical power to this motor. This motor, and this motor. Now, remember something which is really important. If we have a fault on this mot, we have a fault here. What exactly will happen? There will be a short circuit current flowing from the power grid to this, which is 26 kilo. The maximum short circuit current. At the same time, what will happen is that these are motors, which are taking power from electrical power grid. Now during a fault, there will be a moment on which our motor, will it change from a motor into a generator. Why? Because they have stored mechanical power. They will start providing electrical power back to the electrical grid like this. Since we have a short circuit here, so it will take all of the current, so we will have the short circuit current will be the short circuit current of the grid grid plus i of the first motor plus i of the second motor. Why? Because they are a moment on which our generators or our motors will be a generator. Because they have stored mechanical power. Now, this extra current from the motors is called the contribution here and we give it a percentage 50 to 80% of the rated or the highest short circuit current. That's why we need to add this factor because we have other motors which will contribute to our short circuit level. In this lesson, we discussed the medium volt circuit breakers. And how can we select them as a short circuit capacity or the breaking capacity and the different types of medium voltage of breakers. 124. Types of Low Voltage and High Voltage Fuses: Hey, everyone. In this lesson, we are going to discuss low voltage and high voltage fuses. As we know that fuses are used in short circuit protection or protection against short circuit current. In this lesson, we will discuss low voltage fuses or fuses which are used in low voltage level. And high voltage fuse which are used in high voltage levels. The first type which is used in the low voltage is something which is called the semi enclosed re fuse. This type of fuse, as you can see here, this one is called the Sm close rewiable fe. This one is similar to this one. This fe sometimes is called skit cat fe is used when low values of volt current needs to be interrupted. It is used in the low voltage level, or low values of volt current. As you can see, it's consisting of the base, this one is called the base, and consisting of contacts, the two contacts in which our phases are connected, the incoming and outgoing phases, and you can see this is the contact. This one is also the contact, and between them, there is a fuse wire. Here, the fuse y is inside this one, and this one is the incoming, for example, and here is the outgo. Let's draw it. As you can see here, we connect the incoming phase. Here, we connect the outgoing phase. For example, this is an phase A or the first phase, which is r, and this one is the outgoing phase A, or the outgoing r, r is the phase, as you know, the three phase, r t. As an example, this one is connected to the outgoing r, which is going to the Lute, and here is the incoming. The connection between the incoming and outgoing, there is between them a small wire. Here, which is connecting between the incoming and outgoing. This is a small wire is called the fuse wire, as you can see here. When a short circuit occurs, this wire melts and then this circuit is cut off. The connection between the incoming and outgoing is cut off. If we look carefully here about the composition here, this is the base, this base is made from porcelain and carries the fixed contacts to which the incoming and outgoing phase wires are connected. The incoming and outgoing phase. These are the fixed contacts. The fuse carrier is also made of porcelain and holds the fuse element, which is, of course, a ten copper wire between its terminals. You can see here a fuse carrier which carries this fuse wire, and also made from porcelain same as the base. The fuse carrier can be inserted in or taken out of the base wind desert. We can remove it from the base, remove it or int insert it again. When a fault current occurs, for example, this wire melts. If we would like to change it, we can take out the base or take out the fuse carrier, not the base, the fuse carrier, replace it with another fuse carrier which have a fuse. When a fault occurs, the fuse element is flowing out or melts and circuit is interrupted or cut off. The fuse carrier is taken out from the base and the flowing out fuse element is replaced by a new one with a new fuse wire. Then we insert this fuse carrier back, re insert it back in the base to restore the supply. Here inside here, we have the fuse carrier, which ocar a fuse wire. When a fault occur this fuse wire is blown out, we remove the fuse carrier and replace it with a new one, which have a new fuse or not a blown out fuse. The second type is called the high rupturing capacity or fuse or HRC fuse. It has a different types. This type is called the cartridge fuse type. This one is used in the low voltage, which is known as HRC car which is used in low voltage level. How it looks like this is a different shapes for this one, is similar to this one. This one is connected, as you can see here, the incoming and outgoing for example. The phases, the incoming, And outgo. As an example. We have two contacts here, one for the incoming, and one for the outgo. Inside it, you can see this is the shape of the cartridge inside it. You can see the contacts here, one here and another one here, fuse link contact here and here, which is this one and this one, and you can see here inside it, you have a fuse element inside this cartridge, which is made of porcelain also, and around it, you will see a powder here. Now, let's see or understand what happens exactly. It consists of a heat resisting ceramic body. This is a ceramic body. This one, which has a metal indicates. As you can see, metal indicates, this one, and this one. Which is welded silver current carrying element. As you can see inside this ceramic body, you will find the fuse element, which is made of a silver, which carries the current. That's called a silver current carrying element. And welded to the two contacts, as you can see to this contact, and this contact. This fuse element connected to both of them. The space within the body, surrounding the element, which is a fuse element here, this is base. This is base, and this is base inside this ceramic body. You will find it is completely packed with a filling bouder, such as marble dust. There are different types of bouders. As an example of them, the marble dust. What is the function of this powder? It acts as a cooling medium for the arc. As you remember that when this fuse element melts, there will be an arc formed between these two contacts, due to the breakdown of air. We use the powder here as a cooling medium for the arc or for the formation of arc. To prevent the occurrence of fire. Under normal conditions, that in breacher of the fuse is below the melting point or the fuse element is below the melting point, so it carries the normal current without breaking the circuit. However, when we are in case of a fault current, the current will be very high or increase beyond certain limits, and the fuse element will start melting. Before the fault current reaches its first beak. Before it reaches the beak value, it melts and cut off the circuit. How it melts? Remember that the current or the energy, the energy is equal two power, multiply it by time. The the time increases, the energy will increase, which leads to melting of the element. Also the power, the power itself is equal to i square multiplied by the resistance. As the value of the current increases, square increases or the value of the current increases, the energy dissipated will be really high, which leads to very high amount of temperature or very high dissipation of heat energy, which will lead to melting of this fuse element. The melting of the fuse element depends on two factors here. The first factor is the current as the current increases, the energy increases, or the heat dissipation increases, and also as the time passes, more heat energy will be distributed to also lead to melting of the fuse element. The heat produced causes the vaborization of the melted silver element. This fuse element, which is made of silver, will be vaporized or will lead to viborization of this element, which will lead to a vapor of silver. Due to what due to the very high heat energy? What will happen is that the silver vapor and the filling powder, such as the marble dust we said now, this powder will interact with silver vapor. The vapor which is formed from the melting of silver. This will lead to a formation due to the chemical reaction between them, will lead to formation of a very high resistant substance, which helps in quenching the arc or carrying the arc. That is the benefit of the powder here inside the cartridge fe. Now, for the high volte fuses, we have a cartidge of fuse, another one, which is different from the high rupturing capacity fuse. This one, Work is on the same principle, but it is different from the previous one. The difference, it has some extra features, such as number one, the fuse inside it is wound in the form of hex, y or it has a two fuse elements in parallel in order to prevent the corona effect at the higher voltages. The benefit of having two fuse elements or having the shape of a hex is that in order to prevent the corona effect. Remember that the corona effect appears in high voltage levels. 01 of the fuse element of these two fuse elements which are connected in barrel inside this cartridge. One of them have a high resistance and another one has a low resistance, which are connected in barrier. In case of a normal current or normal operation, low resistance wire carries the normal current. Since the R in barel, so most of the current will go to the low resistant wire, which blows out in case of a fault. Remember that we have a two wires in barrier. Let's draw it. We have a two wires in barrel. Inside this cartridge. One of them which have low and high high resistance and low resistance. In case of the normal operation, what will happen the current will go like here and see a low resistance and high resistance. The current will flow through the low resistance. Going to the loot, most of the current will go through RL and very low amount of current will go through the R high. Now, in case of a fault current, the current will be very high and also most of the current will go through R. Which will lead to what will lead to the blow out of the fuse. This wire will be blown out due to the presence of a high temperature, and now we will have only the r high or the high resistance. This resistance, what will happen is that as if we inserted a high resistance inside our circuit, which will lead to reduction of the short circuit current. Remember that the short circuit current for simplesty will be the V over that. That which is r plus jx l. In case of the low resistance, the short circuit will be very high, which will lead to blowing out of the blow out the low resistance. When we have the R high only then the resistance will be high, which will lead to lower short circuit current, which will reduce the short circuit current in case of a ft. Now, you will see that the high rupturing capacity, high voltage fuses, the cartilage type is available with a rating of three kilo volt with a rupturing capacity of 8,700 and bear. There is another type which is used in high level, which is called or high voltage level, is called the liquid type, high rupturing capacity. As you can see here. This one or the liquid fuse is used in case of high currents, which is related to high voltages. It's consisting of a glass tube, as you can see, glass tube, filled with a solution, which is contra chlorite, carbonite solution, and sealed with presses, at both ends here and here. The fuse wire is sealed at one end and fixed by a strong phosphor bronze spiral spring at another end of the glass tube. As you can see here, the fuse leng here is connected to one side here, and connected to a spring here. The fuse leng connected to one side, sealed to one side, and to the other side connected to a spring. This is spring. Inside the glass tube which is filled with carbon tetra solution. When the current exceeds the prescribe it limits or short circuit or for example, in a short circuit case, the fuse wire is blown out, this wire will be blown out. What will happen is that this wire was holding this spring. Let's see this wire, for example, this is a fuse wire and connected to a spring here. Now, what will happen is that when this wire is cut off, this bring will move two or as a fuse melts, the spring retracts part of it through the liquid director. You can see the liquid directory, it will retract or shrinks through liquid director. It will be like this. It will shrink. It will draw it well into the liquid. It will draw, it will the fe wire. It will take the fuse wire here into the liquid. The liquid here. Again, the fuse wire melts. This spring will attract this fuse link into the liquid, y. Because the small quantity of gas generated at the point of fusion causes some part of the liquid into the liquid director, and there the liquid acts as an arc extinguishing medium for the arc. So this fuse link when it's attracted to the liquid, which is a carbon tetrachloride. This leads to ex or acts as an extinguishing medium for the arc. The fuse flows out when the current exceeds the maximum lend. The liquid type HRC or the high rupturing capacity fuse used in the protection of the transformer and circuit breaker. Remember that the fuses are much cheaper than and simpler than circuit breakers. We can use a fuse in order to protect a transformer and circuit breakers. They have with the stand current up to 100 and B, this 100 and B is the rated current, normal current. Remember that of course, the current is reduced due to high level of voltages. High voltage means lower values of current, which means lower cross sectional area. Now, here, as you can see, can use up systems up to 100 sir to kilo volt and have a breaking capacity in case of a short circuit, 6,100 B. There are of course more types of fuses. This are considered as the most important ones, which I discussed in this lesson. So I hope this lesson was helpful for you and see you in another lesson. 125. Circuit Breaker Trip Curves: H i and welcome everyone to this lesson. In this lesson, we will talk about the trip curves inside the circuit breakers or to be more specific, the miniature circuit breaker. If you look at any circuit breaker, any miniature circuit breaker, you will find something which is really interesting. If you look at here, you'll find here this sample C ten. C ten. If you look at another one, you will find, for example, that two, Other types of circuit breakers, you will find P. Letter P, others you will find letter D, others you will find letter K, and so on. What does these letters mean inside the miniature circuit breaker? This is what we are going to discuss in this lesson. Let's start by learning at the miniature circuit breaker curves or the trip curves inside a circuit breaker. You'll find that this concept came from the IEC wold. The IEC standard, put these curves for the different types of breakers. You'll find that there is an alphabetic code to categorize the miniature circuit breakers. We can have B, C, D, K, and that, which are coming from the IC IEC standards. The trap curves are defined by the IEC standards. The standards, if you would like to read more about them. These curves or BCD K and that, representing curves with a two trip function. What I mean by this, the miniature circuit breaker, miniature circuit breaker is used in two functions. Number one, protection against over loot. Over loot condition, and also the miniature circuit breaker is used to protect against short circuit. These two curves or these two functions are defined by two mechanism inside the miniature circuit breaker. We have two mechanism, a thermal mechanism. And electromagnetic mechanism. The thermal mechanism is associated with the overload condition, and the electromagnetic mechanism is associated with the short circuit conditions. If you look at any trip curve, you can see here the trip curve for any type of circuit breakers. As you can see here this, representing the or y axis, representing the tripping time. T required to trip our electric circuit by the circuit breaker, tripping time. On the x axis, we will have n, which is the multiplier of the current. N means how much is our current with respect to the overloud current. For example, if i n equal two, it means that our current is two times the rated current. If n, for example, three, it means that our current is three times the rated current. As you can see here as the current increase, the circuit breaker time or the tribing time by the circuit breaker should decrease with time. For example, if this time, let's say here, is, for example, 10 minutes. A, for example, a current of 1.1. Our circuit breaker, if the current starts to increase, let's say two times the rated current, the tribing time will decrease. Let's say, for example, it will become 1 minute. The function of this curve, this is a thermal triing curve. Its function is that it will provide tribbing time depending on the value of current of the value of the overloading current. There is also another part, you can see here is the electromagnetic part. In this part, you'll find that the tribing time is very, very small, almost instantaneous time. For example, this will occur 3-5 times the rated current. For example, if the circuit current reach it four times or three times or five times the rated current, the circuit breaker or the mint circuit breaker will instantaneously trip the circuit. We have the first part, which is the overloading part, which is slow response. This means it response to overloads. It's made of Pi metallic strip, which will lead to tripping of the electric circuit after a long time. This response of the therma tribune is slow. For example, if there is an overloading of, let's say, for example, 20% overloading, it will take, for example, 2 minutes to trip. It its response to the overloading is slow response or takes long time. The thermo section is similar across all trip curves. B, C D, all of these curves have the same thermal tripping curve, as we will see in the next slide. The second part, which is this part, which is a short circuit part. This depends on the magnetic coil or that opens if the over current design limit is reached. For example, if it reaches 3-5 times, it will start to operate instantaneously using this trip coil. Of course, this response of the breaker will be in millisecond. As you can see, for example, in the overloading slow using the thermal part, which will take, for example, several minutes. However, in short circuit condition, its response will be very fast in milliseconds. How it does do this using the electromagnetic mechanism. As you can see here, a comparison between three types of curves, P, C, and D, so you can understand what is the difference between them. As you can see this curve. Here, this part, you can see this part is associated with what with overloading condition or the thermal part. As you can see here, this is the rated current, one I n. It means the rated current. As you can see the rated if you go upward, it will never trip. However, if the current starts to increase, let's say reaching 1.5, as an example, 1.5, If we look at here, if we go upwards like this, you will find it will take this amount of time to trip. Let's say for example here, 82nd, as an example, 82nd. For example, if they can't reach it, 50% or we have an overloading of 50%, the time taken will be 82nd from here to here. There is a range design range. According to the circuit break, it can trip in this region. Let's say for example, from 82nd, up to, for example, let's say 202nd, any number. Let's say if the current has an overloading of 50%, it will operate all trip between this range between 82nd and 200 seconds. Range, a design range. Which will differ, of course from one circuit breaker to another or according to the company itself. Now, what about B, CD, which are the part for the short circuit? As you can see here if the current starts to increase like this. Until reaching three x, three x is a current. F B, here this is a part at three x. After three x to five x, it will start reaching the short circuit state. As you can see at three second or at three x, the current, three times the rated current. What will happen is that if you go aboard here, it will trip at 0.0 1 second, very, very small time ten millisecond. As the current increase, it will start until five x, the current or the time taken, will start decreasing two. Now, what about greater than five x, any value greater than five x, it will be almost constant, very, very small time. However, if we have another type, let's say, for example, if I have a circuit breaker, C, it will take long time. As you can see, C will be like this, let's delete this. Let's say for example, if I would like to draw the curve of four P, it will be like this, this range like this. Until reaching this point, it will go down like this. Go down like this, very small current, and continue like this. You can see this curve will be also go down like this. We have a range for the breaking time. Similar to C, C will be like this, I will continue like this normally till here, and it will continue like this. Then start to go down like this. Is range will be also 5-10 times. D is the same ID. Now, if you look at the three or the different types according to IEC, B D and k, you will see each one has its own range or operating range. For example, the first one or the lowest one is that what does it do? It trips very fast at two to three times the rated current of the circuit breaker. It is used for highly sensitive application. For example, in the semiconductor devices. Now, also we'll find that we have also another category called the A. Instead of that, we have also a A also trips a two to three times the rated current, and it is used for highly sensitive application. We have Z and the A used for highly sensitive applications. Now, what about B, B will start tribbing very fast 3-5 times the rated current. Y 3-5, this is the values according to IEC. This is the range of B. It can be, for example, three times, it can be four times, it can be five times depending on the design itself or the circuit breaker design according to the company itself. This type is used in residential application, where we have loads which are resistive, such as lighting fixtures, domestic appliances with low surge levels. The third type, which is C, C starts operating 5-10 times the rated current. This type is used for medium in rush currents. Let's say, for example, you have a motor, For example, inductive loads or florescent lighting in commercial or industrial application, or you have a refrigerator, or you have air conditioning inside your home, then you should use the C type circuit breaker. Now, why should you use C type circuit breaker? Because at the starting of air conditioning system, or at the starting of the refrigerator, there will be a small in rush current. What does this mean? Let's say, for example, at starting of the refrigerator or the air conditioning system. Let's say, for example, the current, can reach for example, four x rated current, at the beginning or at starting. Four x is the rated current. If you have a C type, it will not operate instantaneously. It will take some time before operating. However, if you have type B or type that, it will operate instantaneously because four x is in the range of that, the fastest response of that and fastest response from P, which means at a very, very small time. We use this when we have medium in rush current, small motors, for example, or air conditioning system, refrigerator, and so on. You will find that in your home or in buildings, you will find that we use B and C, and most likely we'll find C, because if we assume any rush current, we use C to prevent triving. Now we have another type which is k, which it's range 10-14 times the rated current. And it is used for applications with high inrush current, similar to d, which is 10-20 rated current. This is used for high starting current application. Both of them the K K, and D. Both of these two are used for louds with high rush current. For example, transformers, large generators, large motors, large transformers, x ray machines. All of this have a very high rush current or a very high starting current. To prevent the tribing of the circuit breaker at the beginning, we start using this type of curves, D and k. As an example. If you look at a circuit breaker, for example, you'll find it called C 32. This is a miniature circuit breaker with C 32. What does this mean? It means that this is a miniature circuit breaker. One P means one pole, as you can see it has one pole here. This one pole has a short circuit current of six kilo mb, and we stand up to rate a short circuit current of six kilo mp. The type of the curve, you can see here, C 32 means this is a type of curve curve C, and with a rated current two pair. Another one C 25. This is a three pole or a three phase circuit breaker. It is a three pole. Again, C means C curve, and 25 means 25 ampair. In this lesson, we talked about the different circuit curves or the curves of the trip circuits. Now we understand the difference between curve B, C, D, k and. 126. NEC 210.20 - Overcurrent Protection: H, everyone, and welcome back to our course for electrical design. In this section, we are going to discuss the NEC standard for over current protection, for selection of cables, for selection of protection for our motors, overload protection and much more. So let's start in the Fest lesson by talking about the over current protection. So according to NEC to Article 210, specifically 2,110.20, talking about over current protection in general, I say that We have where a continuous end non continuous flutes. For continuous and non continuous lout among to explain now, what does this even mean? Were a branch circuit, a branch circuit here. Remember that we have an electrical panel like this. We have a group of circuit breakers, breakers breakers breakers inside our panel. Now each one goes to a certain circuit, like for example, a group of loins. Or for example, a group of sockets, like this, or a heat. Each one of these inside the cod is called a branch circuit. Okay. Now, there is also the main circuit breaker at which we will have the feeders coming in. These are called the feeders or the feeder to our electrical panel, the main feeder. Great. So how can I design this circuit breaker or this over in of rection? It say that where a brand circuit supplies a continuous louts or any combination of continuous and non continuous loots. The rating of over current vide shot be less than the non continuous loot plus 125% of the continuous loot. So what does this even mean? The word word continuous means that this loot is operating more than 3 hours. So the continuous, let's look at this in Article hundred, which is the definitions, I what the NEC say that continuous loot is a loot where the maximum current is expected to continue for 3 hours or more. So for example, if we have here, group of flutes, then how gaga designed the circuit, Perga say 1.25 multiplied by the full loot currant of the continuous lutes, which I working more than 3 hours plus full loot cant of non continuous loots. Which are not operating more than 3 hours. The total current here gives you the rating of over current to protection or the circuit breaker or fuse. Great. Now, usually when I'm in the design process, if I don't have any information about the time or the deoration of our loots, then I'm going to design based that all of my own loads are continuous. The general lo will be when I'm designing, I'm going to say 1.25 multiplied by the total loot current. Or the loot current, or the rated current. 1.15 is exactly the same rule which I have shown you in the previous section when we talked about the sizing of over current protection or circuit breakers, for example. Great. Now, this is where this rule came from, the one that I have used before in the previous section. Now, this circuit here, you can see a panel, you can see main feeder, which provides electrical power to the panel, which can come from a service equipment, from the government or can come from an electrical generator. Then it goes to, you can see group of branch circuit, one, two, three, as you can see, branch circuits. Great. This is the general rule for any loads, which I don't know about it. I will just take, which does not contain any motors. An motors. I'm going to say 1.25, multiplied by the full load current or the rated current. Great. Here is an example from the NEC. I say that, hey, if you have, let's say a group of loots here. We have four pairs, one, two, three, and four, these four loots take a total current of 16 pairs, and they are continuous loot, and we will assume this as for simplicity. I'm going to do it that I'm going to take 16 amper multiplied by 1.25 or 125%, gives us 20 pair breaker, suitable for my own application here. This is how you going to select the branch circuit of any component you have. Great There is an exception for this rule. Now you may ask me what is the exception exactly that it says, where the assembly, including the overcurrent device protecting the branch sector, focusing now on the overcurrent protection is listed for operation at 100% of its rating. The rating of the over current device shall be permitted to be not less than some of the continuous plus no the non continuous. What does this even mean? If you have a circuit breaker, which is on itself, it rested for operation at 100%. It can operate at 100%, doesn't need any dating for the continuous operation. In this case, you are going to say circuit breaker will be current of the continuous plus current of the non continuous. We are not going to say 1.25 multi blood boy continuous anymore. This is if the breaker itself is for 100% of its rating, like this one. This is a breaker of eating company, fill down in here where exactly you can see for 100% application, 100% application. What does this mean? It means that this circuit breaker can operate for 100% or at 100% of its rating for a continuous duration without any kind of durting factors. So this one is equivalent to dating of 0.8%, the 1.25, as if the breaker operating at 80% of its rated value. Now, look carefully here, the the node here. You can see that this one, it says use only 90 celsius wire with ambasty based on the 75 celsius rated conductors. Now I'm going to talk about this later in the course inside the conductors section for the NEC, okay? Just remember this as we are going to look at it once more. I hope you'll now understand if it is a normal circuit breaker, then 1.25 multiplied by continuous plus nine continuous, and we said that we are going to assume everything is continuous. I'm going to say 1.25 multiplied by continuous. Now, if it is 100%, then it will be continuous load plus nine continuous without any oversizing. Now, in my own design, also, I assume that all of the breakers are 80% breakers, or they don't operate at 100% of their own rating. The standard 80%, if you have a stand 80% rated breaker, then non continuous, plus 25 of continuous. For 100% rated, then non continuous, plus continuous, as you can see here. Now, last thing that we are going to see here in this lesson, so we obtained the general. I'm going to take 1.25 multiplied by the rated current. I assume all of the lots are continuous and assume all of breakers are operating at 80%. What are the standard values for fuses and inverse time breakers. The breakers I'm going to use and fuses. You'll find that inside the NEC table 240.6 A. It's say standard umber ratings for fuses and inverse time circuit breakers. Inside the NEC, you'll find that these numbers are different from the numbers that I have shown you before when I was using the IEC standard. If you remember in the other one, we had 1016 pairs to 20 to 26 if I remember, 32, 40, and et cetera. There was different ratings like this four circuit breakers. You can see there are some differences. For example, you can see instead of 16 pair breaker. In the US, there is 50, instead of 26, there is 25. Instead of two, there's 35, 40, and et cetera. You can see different ratings. If you are from the US, you have to use this table to select the suitable circuit breaker. Last point, which I would like to mention in this video, that number of pools of circuit breaker and ungrounded conductors. What do you mean by this? If you remember from before for disconnect switches, there are circuit breakers which have the same feature. What feature I'm talking about, exactly, the feature of number of pools. So if you remember, there is a single pool circuit breaker, double poll, a triple, what does this mean? A single pool, which means it cuts the electricity out of one wire, double pool, it means that it cuts out of two wires. For example, line and the neutral. There is also triple, which you can cut electricity out of the three phase. So how can I select these number of pools? According to the NEC, say that The basic rule in 240.15 say that the circuit breakers are required to open all grounded conductors or hot conductors of the circuit when they trip automatic operation in response to over current or are manually operated as disconnecting means. What does this mean? Let's see an example from the NEC. You can see that this one here, this is the single phase grounded system. We have line and neutral. The line and the neutral. This is the line and neutral. You can see there is no grounding for the neutral. You can see that I didn't add any grounding here because it is ungrounded neutral. In this particular case, you have ungrounded conductor, which is phase and ungrounded neutral. In that case, you need circuit breakers are required to open all ungrounded conductor. This one and this one. That's why in this case, they use a two pool circuit breaker, as you can see here. Another example, you can see a three phase. A three phase, none of them are grounded. Of course, they are not ground, three phase, ABC. That's why you'll see that we used a triple pole circuit breaker because all of them are on ground. Now, let's look at this. This is a three phase four, y grounded system. You can see we have phase A, phase B, and phase C. The three phases here are grounded. The phases itself. You can see pole fo phase A, a pole four phase B and the pole four phase C. However, the neutral itself is grounded. So you can see I don't need any kind of pool unlike this case and here. And any other one. However, you can see the neutral here is grounded. That's why I don't need to add any pool to our circuit B I need a three pole circuit breaker for this system, or to be more specific if you are talking about a single phase louts Like this one is a resistance like a heater, for example. You can see it requires line and neutral. You can see a breaker, a single pool breaker, and the neutral goes directly to the loot. This one is the lamb, for example, you can see a breaker for or a pool for our phase. And no pole here for the neutral. Similarly, for this single phase motor, you can see phase C requires a pool or a pon poll breaker, and neutral here doesn't require anything since it is ground. I hope you understand this point regarding number of pools. 127. NEC 430 - Overcurrent Protection - Motors: Hey, everyone, and welcome back to our course for electrical design. Let's now discuss the overcaran to Ptction for our motors according to NEC 430. So let's look at this number one. The MEC say that, how are you going to size there over can protection, like for example, a, a non time delay fee, a dole element or a time delay we in instantaneous breaker, inverse time breaker. How are you going to design this? You have this special table for 130.52, which gives you maximum rating or setting of motor Brench circuit, short circuit, and the ground ult protective device. Let's say you would like to design, you have a motor, with an b rating to 20 pairs. You would like to select a breaker. Let's say an inverse time break, inverse time breaker. As a over caran protection, for this motor. How are you going to do this? You are going to look for hey this motor, what type of motor? Is it a single phase motor? Is it an EC square cage synchronous, wound rotor, DC, what type of motor are you going to use? Let's say, for example, I'm working with a square cage induction motor. And I'm going to look for inverse time preker. You can see 250% of the full loud current. If I would like to design it, all I have to do is I will say 2.5 multiplied by Twine and pairs. And get the equivalent current rating for the circuit break. Great. What about the fe? If I would like to say use a dual element and this is pretty common in disconnect switches and for air conditioning systems. If you'd like as an over current protection for motors. Usually you are going to use this column here. Not the non time delay, usually the dual element time delay fe. In this case, you are going to say 1.75, I'm going to say 1.75 multiplied by to 20. That is pretty simple. Now, you can say that hey, it says maximum rating or sitting of motor prin circuit. Let's say 20 pairs, multiplied by 2.5 gives us 50 pair. Now, there's a use in the NEC standard, that is circuit breaker, that is equivalent to 50 pairs. Nice. What if I multiply, let's say, 21 pair, multiplied by 2.5, and I obtained, let's say, for example, a 51 pairs. How I am going to select the Precor. 51 is between two values, 5060 piers. Which one I'm going to select, I will select the higher one or the lower one. Someone will say, hey, it says maximum rating. I should select, I should not exceed 2.5 or 250%, I shouldn't exceed this table. I should select 50 pairs. Now this is incorrect. Now why it is incorrect despite saying maximum rating because there is an exception inside the NEC. Say that if you obtained, if you apply these rules, and the current rating is not corresponding to corresponding to a standard value, then the neckst higher value shall be used. So in this case, you are going to select the SCT circuit breaker. Okay. This is one of the exceptions inside the MEEC. So you can see here, the first exception. As I said now, where the values of the brand sex circuit determined by this table do not correspond to the standard size or rating of uses, blah, blah, blah, blah, a higher size, the shall be permitted. So a higher size shall be permitted, if it is not corresponding to a standard value. That is the first exception. However, for motors specifically, there are many exceptions. Like what, for example, if you look at here exception number two, where the rating in the table or the rating modified by exception number one is not sufficient for starting of the motor. Let's say, for example, I selected a pricer to. For my own application, based on the 2.5 rule. And when I started this motor, this breaker starts to go down or starts to turn off, it doesn't start. It just a trip every time the motor starts. So you can see that this breaker is not sufficient for re starting of the motor. As the motor starts, it trips. So what should I do in this case? The table, the NEC limits me to these numbers. I cannot exceed them. However, there is an exception if the rating does not allow the motor to start. What is the exception exactly? The first exception is that the rating of an on time delay fuse, not exceeding 600 p. So if you have a fuse that is not great as an 600 a pre based on these rules, then the fuse had p permit to be increased, but shall in no case exceed 400% of the full loot current. You can see for non time delay. You can see the limit is maximum value, er hundred percent for non time delay. I say that hey, you can actually go from hundred percent to up to 400%, but never greater than 400%. This is the rule that says. It gives you more space to oversize the non time delay f. What about the other the time delay, for example? You can see 175. You can see it can be does not exceed 225, so you can go from 175, to up to 225%, but never greater than this. You can be in this specific range, but never greater than this value. What about the instantaneous Instantaneous is the one that trips immediately if the value reaches eight times? So if you have a circuit breaker in instantaneous of 100 and beers, if the current reaches 100 and beer, it will instantaneously or greater than 100, it will instantaneously trip. That is the instantaneous trip. Inverse time which you will have, like this one, have delay as according to the over current value. So what about instantaneous? You can see that the exception here, the rating for an inverse breaker shall be permitted to be increased, but never exceed 100% of full current of 100 and beer or less. It talks about the inverse time brick. It can go from 250% to 400% for full loot cants of 100 and pairs or less. If the full loot 100 and pair or less, you can go up to 400%. However, if it is greater than 100 and pre, then you will go to 300%. You can see this is the range, the extra space that the code gives you. For the rating of use 601-6 thousand. What does this mean? You can see that here, you can see on time delay, not exceeding 600 peers. So we apply to up to 400%. However, if it doesn't exceed 600 p less than this or sorry, greater than 600 and per two, 6,000 per, then you can increase, but not more than three 100% of the full loot current. Here it say is a use of 600,000 gives you that doesn't specifically say if it is a on time delay or a double element. It gives you a space that you can increase this one or this one up to greater than zero hundred percent. You can see there are some which is 151 75, so it gives you more space to up to 300%. Now, what about the instantaneous. Instantaneous breaker, also known as the motor circuit protectors. If if you hear the word MCP, means motor circuit protectors, which means an instantaneous trap breaker. Like this one here. You can see that we have an overload protection and then instantaneous. The instantaneous breaker itself has only this part, the instantaneous part. That, let's say, for example, it can be like this. Let's say rate it at a 100 and pairs, If you exceed 100 and beers, it will go all the way down and trip immediately. That is what's meant by instantaneous. This one of a loot and then instante, this one is an inverse time break. However, if you have only this part, then you are to about instantaneous time break. Now, what about them? The exception here is that it say that if this one is not sufficient for starting, then it shall be premet it to be increased but shall not exceed 1,300% of the full loot can for other than design B. You can see here for design B, other than design B, other than design B, which is this category, 250%, you can go up to 1003 100% in the sizing of the inverse breaker. However, no more than 1,000% of loca for design B. You can see design B here, you can go from 250 to up to 1,700%. Now, these are the rules for over current protection. You can see there are many exceptions for each type of these, but this table gives you the starting point. The Stott 50% and 175% for time delay and inverse time breaker. Now, I know that you have a question here. What your own question will be about design B? What does this even mean? NMA has a motor design classification, which is what exactly design E, B, C, and D. If you look at this motor here, for example, you can see duction motor. I figure here at this one, you'll find that here, DT, continuous. What does duty continuous mean? It means that this motor is designed for continuous operator. This one is gana be operated for more than 3 hours, like the continuous classification we talked at before. The one which I'm concerned with is the Nima motor design classification. Where this, if you look here, this one, NMA design B Name Zig B. I would like to understand what does B even mean inside the design category. If you look at here, the letter indicates this letter indicates that the tok is bed characteristics of the mood. If you look at these types, we have design A, B, and C, and D, each one has a slip value maximum slip. Each one has a different types of starting current, high to medium, los starting, los starting, los starting. You look if you look carefully, you'll find the logged router torque and many differences between them. This classification is based on the characteristic to speed characteristics of the motor. For example, design, A, you'll find that used for applications that fans and palms. This one is used for high initial starts, this one is for cranes, this one for H V components, and you can see. Each one has its own classification and own properties. That's what I would like to mention that when you look at design B, you understand that this one is related to torque is B characteristics. Also when you see this here, This one here, Design B, and even in the tables of the NEC like design B, C, and D, then you understand what does this even mean? 128. Examples 1 and 2 on Motor Overcurrent Protection: Hey, everyone, Let's have the first example on the design of the over current protection for our motor. Let's look at this, select the suitable inverse time circuit breaker. For a two horsepower, 230 volt, single phase motor. Great. Step number one. What do you need? Number one, inverse time circuit breaker. The first step that I need that I would like to get the Fuld current, right? So how can I get the full loot cat? If you remember, similar to the disconnected switches, similar to disconnect switches. If you have a motor, how many horsepower, two horsepower. How can I select the disconnect switch? The first step of taking the two horsepower and go to the NEC tables to find the highest or the worst cant, right? Similarly, that's what I'm going to do. I'm going to take the two horse power here and go to the single phase foot current inside the NEC, like this one. Remember the table that we have used before in disconnect which is exactly the same tip. Great. So the horse power, how many horse power, two horse power, Mice, and 230 volt, single phase, single phase here. 230 volt, go to this column here. So which one I'm going to use? I'm going to have 12 pairs. The full loot current for a single phase this single phase motor will be 12 pairs. Great, great. Then what the next step, getting the inverse time circuit breaker? From the table that we have talked about before, this one, inverse time circuit breaker. For a single phase mode, this one is an induction motor. It will be 250. Sorry, not induction motor single phase motor in general, 250, as you can see here. It will be 2.5 multiplied by 12 pairs, like this. It will give you 30 pairs. Now, of course, I have a circuit breaker of 30 pairs, so I'm going to select this one. As if you remember, standard pre ratings, we have pairs. Pretty straightforward and easy. Now, let's talk about another example. In this example, select the suitable inverse time circuit breaker again for 7.5 horse power 230 volt three phase. What I'm going to do that I'm going to use the NEC tables. 7.5 horse power, and three phase, so I'm going to go to this one, the three phase alternating current. Number one, three phase induction. Number two, 7.5 horsepower, go all the way, 7.5. I'm going to go to this row here. 230 volt, 130 volt. I'm going to go all the way down like this, go all the way down like this. We have a 22 pairs. Let me zoom in if you can see it. You can see 230 go down, 7.5 to 22 pairs. Nice. The fold current, 22 pairs. Great. Now, what are you going to do? We need inverse time. It will be 2.5 multiplied by 2.3 phase square kg, 2.5 multiplied by this, 2.5 multiplied by, 22 pairs. I will give you 55 amps. Great. What is the next value, I need to find the standard value. Let's look at the table. Hey, we have 55, we have 50, and we have 60 pairs. 55 is between them. So what should I do? Remember, exception number one. If this one is not corresponding to a standard value, then shall be permitted to use the higher value, which is six pair. The circuit breaker will be 60 pairs. 129. NEC 430.32 - Combined Overcurrent Protection and Overload: Hey, everyone. Now I'm going to discuss in this video about the combined over counterprotction and overload. So I would like to discuss overload and at the same time, combined over counter protiction, and this will help you understand what did I do in the design of motors in a previous section? Why did I use the 1.25% rule? Let's see what I'm talking about. Remember in the previous section of the course, when I obtained from the book of doctor ad Mam haben, this one provided inside his book when he designed the horse power, when he designed circuit breakers, for motors. If you remember from the B section, I said, hey, 1.25 multiplied by the rated current. However, in the same section or in this specific section now in this one which I'm discussing, with that before the inverse time preker. Is designed based on 2.5% of the full load current. How did you design one point how did he select 1.25? Where did he get 1.25? That is a pretty important question that you are asking me and I'm going to give you the answer. Inside the EEC in 430.32, combined over contradiction. What does it say? It says that the motor branch circuit, short circuit and ground fault to protection, and motor overload protection shall be permitted to be combined in a single protective device where the rating or setting of the device provide the overload protection satisfied in 430.32. Before I explain this, I would like to mention something which is pretty important. Now, you have an infos line breaker. We have a motor like this, And we have a breaker for it. Let's put the breaker here. This breaker is designed at 2.5 of the foot current. Let's say this one is at ten pair, then this one is ten, which is a 25 pair circuit break. Now, this is, this is for short circuit protection. Short circuit protection. Now, the first question that you must have asked me, which is, when you are designing this circuit breaker, the 2.5, you selected 2.5 because the NEC theses, and they said this because of the starting current. Now you will ask, what about this motor, this poor motor. What if the current increase, let's say 215 pairs? 15 pers is 1.5 multiplied by ten or 50% additional 50% loading or overloading on our motor. The motor will burn, right This circuit breaker will never sense that this motor is going to die because this 15 is way less than 25. That's why inside our motor, we have the overload protection. We have here it has this weird sample, something like this, if I remember, but it has a dash like this. It is similar to the shape of the fuse, but it is different as I'm going to show you right now. Anyway, this one is called the overload protection. This one is designed at 1.25 of the rated current or 1.15 of the rated current, and I will explain when do you use these. In the end, what happens exactly? In the end, you will find that This overload will protect the motor against overload against increase in the current. Like if it goes to 15, it will just cut the electricity out of the motor and protect it. This one is designed for over current protection or chow circuit protection specifically. Now, the rule that you use 2.5, and, if you have a separate overlook. Use 2.5 or 1.75 for fuses or anything. If these two are separate from each of. What if I combine them? I I would like to take these two together in one device? That is what we call combined over can protection. It say that if you have moto short circuit protection like this breaker and overload protection like this one, and if they are combined in a single protective device, if you are going to select one break, that do these two functions, overloading protection and short circuit protection. Then you are going to use the rating or setting, provide the overload protection specified in 40632. I'm going to this one for selection of breaker or fuse or whatever it is. Now, you are going to ask me what this rule exactly. Let's see what I mean right now. So let's say that four continuous DOT motors, separate overload. So if I would like to design the overload alone. So I have overload alone. Then what I'm going to do that I will look to the name blade of I or root of my own motor, and find that if it has a service factor of 1.15 or greater or motor with a market temperature rise, 4 celsius or less, any of these then overload is 1.25 motor blade by the full loot, not the f cannot, full loot and pair. This one is on the name blade. I don't use the N EC table. This is pretty important. You don't use the N EC tables for the overload protection. You use the name blade for overload protection because it is specific for specific for each type of motors or for each motor alone. Now, what if I have a surface factor other than 1.15 less than 1.15, let's say one? Or does not mark temperature rise greater than 40 celsius degrees, then you gana design 1.15 multiplied by full load and bear. This is for what? For overload protection. Now, similarly, if you are going to select a breaker that do these two functions together. So sac protection and overload, then you are going to design again as it is, using these rules. That's why in the A section, doctor H D MM Cavn used 1.20 54 this H. Assume that these motors are w have a service factor of 1.15. Okay. Great. I'm going to show an example again understand what I exactly mean. For a continuous duty motors, typically have a continuous loots where the full loot embed there is a difference between full loot current and full loot empir. Full loot current is the one in the NEC tables. Full loot and pair, is the one on the blade of the motor itself. Continuous duty, similar to the continuous definition inside the NEC, which is 3 hours or more. Now, the service factor, what exactly a service factor representing the overloading of a motor. It is a multiplayer, which when applied to the rated horse power, the motor indicates aber measurable. Horse power loading, which may be carried under the conditions satisfied for the service factor. I representing overloading. Let's say if we have a service factor of 1.15, it means that you can overload the motor by 15%. It is allowable to increase it by 15%. Now, what if I select an overload device? Great. Again, let's separate what I just said right now. Number one, what we learned in this lesson that you can use 1.25 rule, tib by flood and pair to get to select the breaker as an over current protection or short sec protection and overload? If you are going to combine these two in one device. If you are going to separate them, then you are going to use the previous rules, which is 2.5 or 1.754 fuses. Number two, if you're going to design for overload protection, then you are going to use this four service factor, use this rules, for overload protection. Now, what if I would like, what if I find that, when I design my overload device at 1.25. Okay? And then let's say service factor 1.15. Then when I start my own motor, my own motor doesn't start because the overload protection keeps tripping. What should I do? Is there any exception, is there any way? Yes, there is. You can see that with the sensing element or sitting or sizing of the overload device, selected by this for one cir two A one, and B one, which is this one. Okay? Is not sufficient to start the moot or carry the loot. Then what should I do? You'll find that here, the higher size sensing element can be increased. However, it shouldn't exceed the following values. What values? Instead of going to 1.25, you can go up to 140. You can see that I can size between 1.25 up to 140%. But never greater than 140%. That is the maximum overload. If you have an overload and there is no one corresponding to this value, then you select the lower value. Similarly for the fd salsis or less and on other motors 100-15 can go up to 130%. You can see this one can considered as minimum, this one can be considered as maximum value. Similar to breakers or invest breaker 152 400%, or for the fuses, 170 5%. Time delay fuses, two, 225%, which we have talk before gives you, a range you can work with. Okay? Now, before we continue, I would like to mention one important part, which is continuous, as you can see here. Now, let me correct this as I have said something wrong here, if I get back here, and this is corrected inside the slides. Here. Continuous duty motor does not mean more than 3 hours. Continuous load means 3 hours or more. However, continuous duty means that this motor can operate 24 hours throughout the week without it overheating. It doesn't need any kind of rest. However, a non continuous duty motor, this one operates in intervals and requires cooling. For example, a group of pump, one operate for 8 hours, then take a rest, then another one will work for another 8 hours, then the other one will start working and the switch places. However, the continuous operates 247 without any kind of overheating. Now, let's look at this. This is a name plate, for example, 1.15 service factor 1.15. That's why you can use 1.25 rule. This one has a service factor one, which means I should when I select the oversizing, it will be 1.15 of the name plate current. An example for this. If we look at this motor here, 570 pair, if I would like to select the overload ptction, it will be 1.25 since the service factor 1.15, multiplied by full load currant, 570 pairs. Here what I'm talking about, you can see this simple here. This one is four overload. Let me magnify this. You can see we have diski switch, which we discussed before, use of diski switch. The conductors that we are going to discu it later, how to select them according to the NEC, and you can see motor controller and overload. This is the simple food. Last point which I would like to discuss also inside this video. You'll find that when we are looking at the name plate, we can find here insulation class insulation F. What does this indicate? This also according to the NMA. The F here on selation, gives us the maximum allowable temperature. Let's look at this. You can see that for the class A, B, F and H. You can see F here, for example, gives you maximum operation temperature allowed, which is 155 csi degree. This is the temperature for the motor itself, not the ambient temperature, of course, 155 for maximum temperature for this motor. The ambient temperature, this one. Four cells degree, this is the maximum ambient temperature. Now, you can see that here, for example, for this, you'll find that if you have a surface factor of one, factor 1.15, you'll find that temperature rise equivalent. For example, for this one is F, service factor 1.15, F surface factor 1.15, it means that the allowable temperature rise is 150. That is the allowable temperature right. That's why if you look at this one, 115, add to the 40 Celsius degree for this one, the submission will give you 155 Celsius degrees. 130. NEC 430.44 – Wye-Delta Motor Overload: Hegaz and welcome back to another lesson. In this one, we would like to discuss the overload protection. In the case of we have y Delta motor form, or what I mean by this, if we have a y Delta connection or starting at the y, and then converting into Delta as a way of starting our motor. Let's see what the NAC for 130.44, say regarding this section. I say that y we start. Y Delta means that we start as y, and then we run as a Delta. For a Y start Delta run connected motor, the ambasity of the branch circuit conductors on the line side of the controller shallot be than 1.25 of the motor current as determined by fn 0.6 A one. The ambasity of the conductors between the controller shant be then 72% of the motor fold current as determined by. A Y start delta unwinding configuration is the method of providing reduced voltage starting for a polyphase induction motor y winding. During starting, the windings are arranged in a Y configuration, the Y configuration results in reduced starting voltage of one of our roots three or 58%, which leads to a 58% starting current and one third of the normal starting torque. Once the motor attains the speed, the windings are converted into Delta giving the full voltage to the individual winding. Now, let's explain what does this mean in the beginning. Let's start step by step. The first thing that we have, our motor right. We have two types of conductors here. There are conductors, which are the line conductors coming from our supply, and there are other conductors which are in the over loot section. I'm going to show you a figure that explained this. So if we are talking about the lines itself, we are going to size it as 1.25 of the full loot current from the name plate, of course, Fu loot current. Since not the full lot current of the name plate, fut current from the NEC tables. We are talking about conductors here. We are talking about branch, the conductor, so we use the tables in this case, 1.25 of the full loot current. There are other other configuration or other wires which inside the motor itself or the phase wiring itself. The phase wiring itself is designed as 1.25 multiplied by 0.58 of the full loot current. This is the summary of all of this. Now why do we do this? I will explain this right now. Let's see this figure here. Number one, we have a supply here. This is the supply, the three phase A, B, C coming from our supply. Great. Now, this one, one, one M here, this one and this one, this one, are group of con tectors, two M, contactors here, these these three. There are other conttors as these conttors, close close? When we give them some signals. When we give them a signal by a relay, for example, they close. This here as you can see as a y delta motor. It means that this phase can be connected as a y or a style connection and it can be connected in the form of delt. I'm going to explain how does this even work. You can see let's take this one here and look at the beginning. This is a y delta motor. It starts as y and then convert into delt. Let's look carefully here. Let's say that during start contexts one and S are closed, and the contexts of two m are open. Now let's see this. These contexts two are open, I means that this one is an open circuit. As if there are no wire here, as if we have a dot like this, nothing here. Great, great. Then contacts one M and S are close, this one is a short circuit like this. This one is short circuit, this one short circuit, this one is short circuit, and this one is short. This is during the starting period. Now let's see what happens. Look carefully at phase A, goes all the way like this. Here at this specific point, we have phase A. Similarly, this one go all the way like this. And this one is closed. This one will be phase B, go all the way down here, like this. We have here phase C. Let's look at these windings. We have our windings like this, like this, we will see it's connection right now. This point is connected to phase A, this one is connected to phase A. Now, this point here, which is, let's look at here. This point here, this one here. This one is connected to C. This one, this one is connected to B, this one is connected to B. Now let's look at the other ones. Here, this is an open circuit, so nothing will go through here. Great. Now let's look at here, so we have this point this point. These three points are connected together. You can see a shot circuit due to the close of this contact here. P these contacts are close together. Let's look at them. Let's go this point here, and this point here, and this point here are connected together, which means that this one. And this one and this one, all of these three are connected together. If you look carefully here, let's rearrange this. It like this. You can see this is the first part and go all the way to A like this, and this point goes all the way to C like this. The question is, what do you see right now? Well, I see that this one is connected as a star connection, great. This is the star connection. Now look carefully here. Look carefully here. When we apply our supply, we apply three phase. So this is there, V supply. Now, the current here current flow is I line equal to I phase, is equal to what valve equal to v phase over of the winding itself. V phase itself is equal to what equal to v supply, which is a line to line voltage, V line, divided by root three of that. What we can see that now, is that the current going here, I line or I phase, which are similar to each other, you can see it is a reduced the current due to this factor, one over root three. Now, focus on this one here. One over root three, you can see V line divided by root three. The phase voltage is reduced, which means that when the phase voltage is reduced during starting, the current is reduced by this factor, one over root three. That's why if you get back here. You will see that during starting, the windings are in a Y configuration. The Y starting results in reduced starting voltage of one of root three, this one of root three due to the Y connection or 58%. Remember this value as we are going to need it. You can see that the starting current is 58% reduced due to the one over root three. Now when the speed of the motor increases, when it reaches speed and the curss to go down, we start configured to go to Delta connection, giving full line voltage to the winding. Let's look at here at this specific point. Now we understand how this one lead to star connection, and we have seen that the star one of roots V line. Remember this reduced current, noice. Let's delete this. Let's look at the run barot or during the run bi contact one and two are closed and contact SR. These are open like this, Nie. Two M and one are close. This one are closed like this. And this one is also closed as you can see. Great, great. Now, let's see what happens exactly. We have phase A, B and C, and we have the winding. Let's draw them like this. We have the winding and we have this one. Let's look. Phase A goes like this. This point is phase A, Then this one goes all the way down here to this point here. This point here is also A. Now let's look at b, b like this. To this point. This point is B and also go all the way like this to here. This point is also B. Now if you apply for C, you can see that C goes this. This one is C, and if you go to the other way like this, this one is also C. What can you see that this one has phase, phase A, B and B, C and C, which means that I can actually connect them like this? Right. We can connect them like this. This one, which you can see is equivalent to this, which is A, B C, which is the Delta connection. Focus now on this point. Now we are applying what? You have said, what are going to apply. We are applying the phase voltage. Phase voltage or the line to line voltage, exactly the same in the Delta connection, phase similar to line to line voltage. Here we have our V grate. Now the current is not the same. This current is line. This current is phase. Now, what you will find that phase, is equal to eye line divided by root three. What can you learn from this that we have this factor, one over root three. For these windings, for the current here, we have all this factor, one over root three. Great. This one is higher. I line is higher. That's why when we design, this conductor, this is the main conductor. We design is a 1.5, multiplied by the full load current. Or for the conductor. We're not talking about overload yet. We're talking about conductors. We use the NEC table values. Full loot conductor 1.25 multiplied by full loot conductor. Great. This is for this one. What about this one? This one is similar to this one here. Which is always having the 58% or one of root three. In the star, it had one of roots three due to the reduced voltage. Here in the Delta, it has also this factor due to the star or Delta connection. When we are designing this conductor, it will be exactly like this, 1.25 multiplied by full loot current. However, multiplied by 58 or one over root three. Why? Because this full loot current, which you will see on the name plate or in table, is a li in current. What I need for this, I need to size this conductor. We call this one the phase conductor. I need phase current for this one. How can I do this? I simply take this full loot cant and multiply it by one of root three or multiply by 58%. That's why you can see conductors of the terminals, as you can see here, are sized at 8% of the full loot current. Great. Now if you get back here, you will find that this factor here, you can see. The Delta connect is 58% of the rated loot current line current, and the dex size at 125. We take 58 multiplied by 125, so it will be 72% of the full loot current. When you multiply these two values, you get 72%. Now, this is how can you size condectors, according to the C four, the Y Delta starter or the motor that assts as y and converts into Delta. Now, what about the over load protection? This one here also explain the idea. You have a line to line volt star. Since we have the voltage here, which is a phase voltage will be line divided by root three. You can see the current is reduced. Let's say 10:00 A.M. Pairs. For example, when you convert into Delta, you'll see that this current is still reduced by one over root three, compared to the line current. That's why you can see this one size based on the highest current. 1.25 multiplied by full loot current. However, this one is size based on the reduced, 1.25, multiplied by full loot current, multiplied by 0.58. What about the overload? Exactly the same. However, you can see that the overload, where are the overlo load if you go like this? You can see it is similar to the phase current. When we design the overload here, we design it based on the phase current, not the line current. That's why if you have a Delta connection like this one here, you'll use this current. You can see this one Delta, 14.4 and pair. This one on the name plate is a line to line current. I take phase current 14.4 divided by root three or 14.4 multiplied by 58% in order to get the phase c phase current. Then after taking this one, I'm going to look at the service factor. S one duty, S one means a continuous duty. Just a small loot here on the side. Here you can see that this one has a service factor of one. I'm going to take this one and I'm multiplied by 1.15 f over loot. Let me summarize. You can see full loot and pair. Sorry, not full loot current, full loot and pair because we use the one on the name plate for over loot. The name plate used for overload. We use the full loot pair for the over loot. We take it and the multiplied by 0.577 or one over root three to get the phase current, this current at which the overload will pass through. Then we are going. After getting this value, we are going to multiply by 1.15 for a service factor less than 1.15 service factor less than 1.15, and 1.25 for service factor 1.15 or great to get the overload sizing. 131. NEC 430.62 Feeder Overcurrent Protection for Motors: Hi and welcome back everyone. This video we are going a size the feeder over current protection for motors. Let's say we have a motor group of motors. Let's say one motor like this, another one like this, like this. I would like to size the main feeder. I'm not talking about each of these motors. I want a size the over current s over current protection, the main circuit breaker that controls all of these motors. The NEC 4362, say that a feeder supplying a specific fixed motor loots. And consisting of conductorss based on blah, blah, blah, shall have a protective device having a rating or sitting not greater. Focus on this not greater than largest rating of the branch s and the ground fold protective device for any motor supplied by the feeder plus the sum of the full loot cents of the motor of the group. What does this mean? We look like this. Like this, or let me type the role. I say that all that you have to do that, take largest circuit breaker. We have a group of motor. Let's say this is a ten and bare circuit breaker, this one, 15 and bare. This one is a one and bear. Group of motors. Step one, take the largest circuit breaker, which one is the largest to 20 m. Then add to it the full loot current of the rest full loot current of the rest. For example, if this one is, let's say five pairs, this one, seven pairs, then I'm going to say 75 plus seven, and then get the circuit breaker. No greater, important, not greater. It's pretty clear right. Let me show you what I'm going to do right now. What is the size of the feeder? O current to protection, use inverse time breakers with a 60 Celsius terminals and conductors are required for the following two motors. Now, conductor itself, I'm going to explain it in the conductors section. Don't worry about this. I want to size inverse time breaker for the following two motors. Motel number one and mot number two, 20 horse power, ten horse power from 63 phase. Step one. These motors what do you would like to size? Well, I would like size over canter protection. What are you going to use? Are you going to use the name plate, or are you going to use the NEC tables? Well, I'm going to use the NEC tables because the only way or the only method or only condition that I will use namlate, is when I'm doing overload or any of the exceptions inside the NEC that we talked about in the disconnect switches. I'm going to use in C. I would like table 480, maybe. Let me remember. 430 point 2002543 phase motors, fot car. Now let's look at here. We need 460 volt. This column here. Three phase, this is the three phase table, 20 horse power, ten horsepower. I'm going to look like this. H 20 horse power. And ten horsepower. Now let's see what the equivalent, go like this, 14, go like this, 27, 14, for ten horsepower, 27, for 20 horsepower, 14 and 27. Great, great. This is step number one. Get the full loot current. Then what are you going to do? I'm going to size the over current of protection. We said that we need inverse time breakers. Inverse time breakers is 250%. This is the rating for inverse time breakers. I'm going to do 27, multiplied by 2.5 14 multiplied by 2.5. Like this, Let me show you. 27 multiplied by 2.5, 14 empirs multiplied by 2.5 gives us 68 and 35. First one, 68 ampairs. Go here 68 ampirs. Now you can see, which one should I do this one or this one? Now, remember, the NEC say that an exception, if this value, this rule from the previous table is not corresponding to a standard value, use the neckst higher circuit breaker or fe. That's why we used the 70 break. The second 13535. Great. Now, I would like to find the over current protection for the feed. The rule, as I just explained, largest motor circuit breaker plus submission, some of all fut currents. How I'm going to do this? Were the highest breaker? 70 or th five, 70 ampairs. I'm going to say 70 plus some of all other fult currents. Where are the other fc? There is this one. The full loot current of ten horsepower is 14 ampers like this. Giving us 84 pairs. Let's go here, 84 pairs. Again, the question is, should I select 80 or should I select 90? Now, remember, what are we sleing? What are we selecting in this what breaker we are selecting? We are selecting an inverse time breaker. For what for feeder, for the mean feeder. Which one are you going to choose? I'm going to choose this time eight? Eightm circuit breaker. Now, I will explain why right now, this one. Because if you get back here to the rule, let me show you, you can see that having a rating, not greater than. This is the maximum rating. So you have to go to downsize or the lower value. That's why we selected here. The 80 pairs. The first one is for each branch circuit. When the value is not corresponding, you selected then next to higher value. No problem. However, the feeder itself, not more than, not greater than breaker plus tromission of others. 132. NEC 215.3 - Overcurrent Protection – Feeders of a Panel: Hey, everyone, we would like to discuss how to select the over can of prediction for a feeder for a certain panel. Now, the previous one, we talked about a feeder for a group of motors. What if I have a panel and I would like to select the main feeder? How can I do this? When I say mean feel, I'm not talking about size, I'm talking about sizing of the over current, the circuit breaker or fuse. Remember, these are the standard de values. Say that feeders shall be protected against over current in accordance with blah, blah, blah, where a feeder applies continuous loots or any combination of continuous underlying continuous, the rating of the over current device shall not be le then the non continuous loot plus 125 the continuous loots. What are you going to do? I'm going to do 1.25% of the continuous loot, plus non continuous loot. As if I'm sizing a normal circuit breaker, similar as we did before. However, there is the first exception, exception that where the assembly including the over current is listed for operation at 100% of its rating. Remember the circuit breaker, which we talked about before, that is operated at 100% of its rating, a special type of breakers, these breakers here are 80% type. Which needs to be d rated. However, the hundred percent of its rating this type, we will just gonna take continuous plus non continuous, similar as we selected the normal breaker. Let's look at this example inside the NEC. This one will help you understand some concepts on how to select the main fe. The first one, we said that 1.25 multiplied Pi, continuous plus non continuous loots. This example here is for an industrial location. It's say that hey, the non continuous loots according to the NEC, For example, the receptacles is not considered as a continuous loot. The welder loot is also non continuous lots according to the NEC itself. What the NEC do, that it takes all of these and add them together. However, look carefully at this, we are talking about what, we are talking about the main feeder. When we size when we size the main feeder, we take into insidion the demand factors. Here what you can see that the three welders, one operating at 100%, The other is at 100%, this one at 50 85%, so they take this one. To light by 85 gives us this value here. This loot is the demand loot for this non continuous part. Great. This is the first one, non continuous. Second loot is the motor loots, a compressor, and et cetera. What they do, it added all of these together to get the motor loots. However, you'll find something which is interesting. That for motor loots, what they do, it took the largest motor, which was this one, and added an additional 25%, so take 25% of the largest motor. Now, where did we get this, you'll find that there is an part in the NEC for maximum loot. For circuit supplying loots consisting of motor operated utilization equipment that's fastened in place and has a motor larger zen 1/8. In combination with other loots, the total load will be based on 125 of the largest motor loot plus some of the other loots. If we take this one, 1.25, which is one plus 25. Plus the other loots. This one is four maximum loot. K Great. We have this non continuous, we have mot loads, now add them together, so we will have this value here. Now, what about continuous loots? The lighting is considered as continuous loots. These are in the application here, three industrial process dryers are considered as continuous loads in this application. They added them together, and we obtained this continuous total continuous load. Again, non continuous load after applying the demand factors. Here also if you have demand factors, we are going to apply it, and then we add it to 25% for largest moot. And we obtain the continuous loads. We have total continuous loot. We have this one which is non continuous loads, motors plus non continuous. Now, how are we going to select the overcan? It will be 125% of the continuous loot plus non continuous load. What we did that we take 1.25, multiply it by continuous loot, which is the lighting here and dryers, 56 this value here. And non continuous loud, which is 38 and in hot this value here. If you look at the code itself, what did it do? I simply added these two, like this and obtain this value, and then add the 25% of the 56 here. It is exactly the same as if I take this mat 1.25 plus this value. We'll give us this finer value. Just divided it in a different way. But in the end, just 1.25 of the continuous plus this value will give you the same exact value. This one is considered a the demand loud of the bana. Now, how Amgana, this is the three phase, of course, a three phase. Now what I would like to do, I would like to get the over current device. I need the rated current. What we have to do that this is a three phase, S over root three, multiplied by, the line to line voltage, line to line voltage. This application here, S is this value, and the line to line voltage in this application is 480 volt. It obtained 132, pair for a circuit break. If you get back here, 132 is 125-150. We select the next higher value, which is 150 pairs. You will find that in the panel schedule, as you will see in the next lesson maybe in the next lesson or after a conditioning, I'm going to do you have two options. One that I can take 1.25, multiplied by the current from the demand loot. And assuming all of my loads as continuous. If I would like to follow the NEC exactly, I'm going to say, Hey, I'm going to look for lighting loot and multiply it by 1.25, and then I'm going to look for the largest motor, multiplied by 1.5, and then add the rest. Of course, all of this, we are going to multiply by the various demand factors. I hope you get what I'm just trying to do if I'm following exactly the NEC. However, in that design process, I'm just going to assume that everything is continuous, and I'm going to apply 1.25 without any issues, 133. NEC 440 - Air Conditioning Overcurrent Protection: Hey, everyone, and this lesson, we would like to learn how I'm going to size the air conditioning over current protection. NEC 444 air conditioning. All of these are name plates for different refrigerator or a conditioning systems. All all of them are actually air conditioning systems. Now, how I'm going to select or size the fuse or prick. For a hermetic refrigerant motor compressor like for the refrigerator or the fridge, the rated load current on the name plate is employed. We use the name plate cont. We don't use the NEC tables. This is used in disconnecting switches, conductors. Everything is used by the name plate. Again, air conditioning, look at the name plate, right? Great. Also according to NC Article 110 point s listed or labeled equipment like this one shall be installed and used in accordance with any instruction, including the listing. What does this mean? If you look at this here, we said that number one, we are going to use the nim plate current. Great. However, there are some which gives you instructions, like what, look at here, minimum circuit abs, seven, the minimum conductor that you should use. Have current rating of 37 pairs. Maximum e. Maximum we used with this one is six. You have to follow these manufacturer settings. Similarly here, if you look here, minimum circuit am busty, let's magnify. Minimum circuit, 29.4, minimum cable must take this value. Max circuit breaker 50 pairs. If you go here, minimum fee or breaker, 35 US or Canada. Here also maximum few gives you minimum and maximum S 35. That is according to the manufacturer. Minimum circuit amps is 22. You have to follow pretty straightforward. For example, for a chiller, you'll find a name plate that tells you, hey, maximum use is at 100 pairs. What do the engineers do when they are designing this? They take the same value. So for example, if let's say maxi 60 peers, they install fuse of a 60 piers and they relax. They don't give themselves any kind of headache. Here, similarly, 50, I'm going to put a 50 break. That's it. We any conditions listed by qualified electric conditional laboratory with impate that maximum fuse size. The listing restricts the use of this unit to fuse protection only. What does this mean? If the manufacturer tells you a maximum size like this. Without any mention of circuit breaker, it means that the disconnect switch to it connecting to it have fe. You can't use circuit breakers. This is completely different from the panel. Panel has its own breakers. I'm talking about fuses here. Whether you choose a fuse or a circuit breaker as a skinnect switch and does not cover its use with circuit breakers. If the air conditioner has been evaluated for both fee and do circuit like this one here, fuse breaker. It means that you can use a fuse or a breaker on the panel itself. For both feels and HAC R like this one, HCR type circuit breaker, what does this mean? Heating air conditioning refrigeration. This one is a special type used for these applications. The protective device. Now let's say that I don't have anything on the manufacturer. If I look like here, everything is clear, what kind of use, what kind of ee, what kind of prick? What if it doesn't tell me? What if I have these current ratings only? What should I do? You'll find that the NEC tells you, hey, protective device having a rating or setting, not exceeding 175% of the motor comopressor rated lot cannot or branch selection, which one is great. Shall be permitted. If the prediction is insufficient for restarting, you can reach up to 225. What does this mean? Give me the summary. Here it's talking about fuses. Remember when you said how two size fuses for motors, how do we size fuses for motors. When I said before f for motors, 175 for a time delay f and we can go up to 225 if the motor can't start. Remember this rule exactly here, 175 and 2025. Exactly like motors. Nothing special. Now, where matic refsion motor compress, the largest loot connected the circuit, the rating or setting shall not exceed the value in this one for the largest motor compressor plus sum of any other branch circuit. What does this mean? If for example, if you look back here, like this one, if you look at here, we have a compressor and fan. If we have a compressor alone, then a 1.75 multiplied by the rated current f loot and pair of this compressor. What if I have a compressor and fan motor, for example, how I'm going to sit this? It's say that take the largest de current, which is 27. Multiply eight Pi 1.75 plus any other currents, 2.2 like this. That is what it does mean. As leave this. You can see that here, three correct alternate wiring configurations for satisfying the restriction that the equipment protected by fuse on like here, like it says here, Maxi fuse, it means that only protection is fuse. These are several alternatives for this. You can see an air conditioning unit. We have a disconnect switch and circuit breaker in sold per panel. This is correct disconnect switch, fuel disconnect switch. What if I use a fusele? If you use a fuses here, you must have a disconnect switch with a fuse to protect this one according to the manufacture, can't debut it like this without a fuse. You have to add a fuse, even if another location. What if I have a circuit breaker? Again, if you have a circuit breaker, this does not satisfy the condition. You have to add a fused switch B the manufacturer forces you to do this, even if you have a circuit breaker at the disconnect switch. Okay? Let's have some examples on the A conditioning over to protction, so that you can understand this concept. Let's start with this one, this one, which is compressor FN motor. It's say that hey, max if you use sexti empires. I would like to know how did the manufacturer even get this value. Remember that for a hermetic refrigenant or air conditioning component. What I have to do is that if you need a fuse as an over counter prediction, all you have to do that you are going to take. We have two ampares here right. We said we are using the M plate, not in tables, for air conditioning, nice. Then the rating will be what will be 1.75. Multiplied by the highest current, which is 27. Plus any other one, which is 2.2. Look at this one. At the same time, motif, this fuse which I select is not enough for starting then. You are going to size it as this 2.25, multi by 27 plus 2.2. You can see this is the range. Now, let's see what these values are equivalent to. Let's look like this. Rating of use 1.75 multiplied by 27 plus 2.2 gives us 49.45. Now let's look at the fuses. We have 45, and we have 50. Which one should I choose? I will choose 50? Why? Because if this one, not corresponding to a standard value, select the next value. 50 apairs. Great. That is the first value. What if this use is not enough for re starting of our air conditioning? What are you going to do? I'm going to use that 2.25 like this. It will give you 62.95 apairs. Now remember, here that 225, we say that this is the maximum, you cannot exceed it. 62 is 60-70. Which one should I choose? You have to choose the lower valve, which is 60 and bare feel like this one. You can see you have two options here. 50 and bare fee, 60 be. This is the range 50-60. That's why the manufacturer gives you maximum f to be 60 and bas. Because he want you to hey, this will exceed 2.20 so don't even choose any fuel greater than this value in order to not violate the NEC standard. I hope you now understand where did we get this? Let me give you another one, Let's look at this one here. Like this. Here this one. Here you can see compressor and a an moot single phase. Doesn't matter since we are looking at the name plate. R L A 22.1 F L 1.8 full loot pair, rated loot pair, rated loot mp. Similar the full loot pair. How I am going to design this? I'm going to say 1.75, multiply largest value, 22.1 plus the other one, 1.8 The next one, if it doesn't allow starting, then I'm going to do the same part for 2.25. Let's see this values. First one, as you can see, gives us 40.4, a, I'm going to selate the next higher value. At the code size. This one is insufficient for starting, then use this one. 51 50-60, then choose the lower value, since we don't exceed 2.25. I'm going to select 50 pair feels. You can see between 45 minimum, maximum. This is the range. Now, as you can see if you look at the manufacturer, maximum 50 and pairs. I hope you understand where did this manufacturer obtain these values. Another one, minimum use or breaker 35. Let's apply these rules. Again, where the current rating here, we have compressor motor 16, and we have OD motor here outdoor OD outdoor motor, 1.3 full loot and bear plus 1.3. What are you going to do? I'm going to take 16 tib by 1.75 like this and look at the fuse rating, or 2.25 as a maximum fuse rating. Let's apply these rules here. The first one gives you 29.3. The next higher is 30 pare, and for the second 12.25 gives you 37, t seven is 35-40, so I'm going to select 35, which is 37.3, 35 pre, if the lower value, like this. Till now everything is fine. Great. We have 35 is the maximum fe, 30 and the minimum fee. That's why you can see here, minimum fee, 35 and the maximum fe cert f. He selected both of them at this maximum rating. I hope you now understand if you have an air conditioning and they would like to design over C to protection. I think you now understand how can we do this. 134. Selection of Breakers for the Panel Schedule: Hey, everyone. We are going to now continue what we have done in the previous, I believe the last three sections or something like this. We would like to design the incoming and outgoing breakers for our panel. Remember these breakers, each one which goes to a branch circuit, this one which we are going to design called the outgoing breakers, and this one which is the main circuit breaker, which is the incoming circuit breaker. I said that the incoming is the one that controls the whole panel or the entire power supply coming to our panel and provides the overcar protection and also works as a disconnect switch for the electricity from the panel. Outgoing breaker is each one which controls the various circuits which we have. So each one protects a certain circuit and also acts as a disconnect switch if we would like to disconnect it from here. So now let's go and start designing them. So let's get back to our panel schedule after a very long time. Now let's start designing them. So the first step is that we have some socket, lighting, exhaust fan, DX concealed units. How are we going to design all of this? Okay, so let's start with the easiest one, which is non motor applications. For example, we have lighting socuits like these, each 1.17 0.4 0.3. So let's start designing them. So all of these are a single phase, right? And all of them are in KVA in volt and pair. So I'm going to get my own calculator. Let me get it right now. Close all of this. Let's just get a new one. So let's take the first one, for example. This is 0.170. This is the vol tempere of the first one, 170. VolepreT is in KVA. Divided by the phase voltage. I pencil, if I would like to get the current for a single phase system. For a single phase system, we know that the rated current will be the supply itself, which is S divided by V phase, right? So this is our current and circuit breaker design is equal to 1.25 multiply by continuous load. Plus non continuous as we learned from the NC. I said, I'm going to assume everything is continuous. So I'm going to say 1.25 multiplied by the continuous loot. Great, so 1.25 multiplied by the rated carret or the continuous cant. So how can I get this by taking S divided by V phase? Phase voltage, I'm dealing with is 220 volt. So let's apply this, I'm going to get back here. So first 1.1 770/220, gives us 0.77 pairs. Okay. And then I'm going to multiply this by 1.25. So the current is one and pair. Great, great. So do we have a circuit breaker of one and pair? No, we don't have. So I'm going to use not the MEC standards for sizing the breakers, I'm going to select the breakers in my country, which I'm going to follow this pattern here. So you can see the minimum circuit breaker is ten and pair. So I'm going to select this minimum one, which is ten and pair. And sometimes in the market, if you don't find ten and pair, you can go to 16 and pairs. So let's say I'm gonna sign it based on the ten pairs like this. Now, how many lighting, one, two, three? So let's take this load the highest one, and do the same calculation. So for 100 volt divided by 220, this is the phase current, current make current, and then multiplied by 1.25. So it will be 2.27, which is, again, the same breaker. The nearest one is ten pairs. So I'm going to say ten pairs and ten ambers like this. So this is for the lighting circ Now, leave anything with motors single phase. Okay, four sockets here, the maximum, you can see, all of them have 2000 volt and bear except this one. So all of them are 2000 volt and pairs. So let's select a suitable break. 2000 volt and pair divided by 220 volt gives us nine pairs, blood by 1.25, which is the NEC for continuous load. There is one important part here, which I totally forgot about. Here we are when we are dealing with sockets, according to according to the NEC standard, the receptacles are considered as non continuous loads. So when I'm going to design, I'm going to take instead of nine pairs, I'm going to take 10:00 A.M. Pairs. If I'm going to follow the NIC standard, that these are non continuous loads. Okay? However, in the design here, I assume that these are continuous loads. We assume that for simplicity, that all of these are continuous loads. So when I'm going to design, I'm going to just add 1.25 like this, that it will be 12 and pairs. Like this, 12 a pairs or 11.36. The nearest one is the 16 and pair breaker, which is the one here. All of these are 16 and pair for all of these sockets. Okay. Great. Now, this one is different since it has a three, but no problem at all. I I select 16 and pair for the same socket here. No problem at all, okay? Great. Since the socket rating itself, each one has a rated current of 16 and pair can take up to 16 a pairs. That's why I added here this 16 and pair. Okay, so what about the water heater? Water heater is 2000 volta pair, again, multiplied by 1.25, gives us 11.3 similar at this, same calculation here, which will lead to the same exact breaker 16 ampere. For fridge, this one would be different. Why? Because the fridge has a motor inside it, right? So when we design for a fridge or a hermetic refrigerant motor compressor, we need to look at the name plate itself and look at this one. And see the rated current. And based on the rated current on the fridge itself or the manufacturer maximum use or breaker, I'm going to design it. However, I don't have the name plate. So I'm going to get the full out current by doing this, by taking this volta pair and divide it by 220. So it will be 9:00 A.M. Pairs. However, since we have a fridge, this fridge has a starting current because it has a motor inside it. And since I'm selecting an inverse type circuit breaker, I'm going to select it based on the motor application, which if you remember from the NEC tables that we take the full out current, multiplied Pi or the full out and pair. Multiply it by 2.5 or 250% for the starting of the motor of the fridge. So I will have 22 point 7:00 A.M. Pairs. Now let's look at the nearest standard, which is 25 amperes. So I'm going to select it for this fridge. Since it has a motor, it will be 25 amperes, like this. Okay, great. So what about exhaust fan? Now, exhaustive fan here, I assume that these exhaustive fans are continuous loads, operating all the time. So I'm going to look at the exhaustive fans and apply the 1.25 continuous. Okay. However, there is one trick which I forgot about that these exhaustive fans are motors. So we have to design it, same as what we did for the fridge. So it will be 2.5 multiplied by the full load current. So let's look at each of these exhaustive fans. Do we have anything here? No, we have exhaustive fans here. This is the first one. So I'm going to go like this. 2,600 like this, this exhaustive fan mul divided by this is the single phase, 220. Give us 11.8, and since it is a motor, so I'm going to multiply it by 2.5. So we need 29.5 a pair as a 29.5 breaker. The closest one is 32 apairs. So I'm going to select the 30 2:00 A.M. Pairs for this first one. This one will be 32. Let's apply this rule for 2.25. So 2,250, divide it by 220, 10.227 multiplied by 2.5 to 25.5, the nearest one, 25.5, 32 again. So this one, two will be 32. Exhaust fan here, 3.2, apply the same rule, divided by 220, multiplied by 2.5, 36 amper now the nearest one, 36 amper, we need 40 amp. So I'm going to select for this one, 40 amp. Like this. Okay, DX DX exhaust fan, 2.6, similar to this one, 32, so this one will be 32 like this. Do we have any exhaust, any additional exhaustive fan? No, so I'm going to save it like this. Now, what about the DX concealed unit? Now, air conditioning systems, you know that they have compressor inside them, right? Now, these compressor take rest, they don't operate continuously for 3 hours. Now, why do I mention this or why do I mention this factor? Because when we are designing the main breaker, we need to look at this. We need to see what continuous loads we have and what are non continuous loads. So the air conditioning system is considered as non continuous load, because it doesn't operate all the time, it takes rest. Even if the device is on, however, the compressor itself does not operate or it is not on all the time. So how I'm going to design DX unit, as we said before, for air conditioning, we have to look at the name plate full load current or to be more specific, the maximum fuse or maximum breaker on the name plate. However, we don't know we don't have this information, right? So how are you going to design it? I'm going to design it based on the motor rule, the same rule, which is 2.5 for the inverse circuit breaker. Similar as the exhaust fan and the fridge. Since it contain motor inside it. Now, of course, if designing a fuse for this type, we are going to use 1.75, which is the rule for the time delay fuse. However, in this panel, we use only circuit breakers, as you know, and we are using an inverse time circuit breaker, so I'm going to do this. So 3.2 similar at this exhaustive fan, 40 a pair, like this. Okay, let's continue dx on it. This one, 3.6, similar to, not similar to anything. So I'm going to calculate this. Divided by 220 like this, 16.36 multiplied by 2.5 40.9, so we need something greater than 41, which is 50 amp. So I'm going to select for this one, 50 amp circuit breaker. Great. So, mm. Okay, 40 am. This one is 2.6, similar to this exhaustive fan, it will be 32. This 13.2, similar as 14. Great. This 13.6, similar to this, it will be 50 amp. Okay, now, before we go to the three phase, is there anyone else we would like to design, no. So we need that three phase. So how are you going to design the three phase? Okay. Let's remember. So for the three phase, we need the current. So the current will B S divided by root three multiplied by V line to line. And this system, we say that the V line to line is 380 volt. So I'm going to do this divided by root 3108, okay? So, this one is exactly similar to this one. Now remember, the three phase power is 4.5, the submission of all of these power. So I'm going to do this. It will be 4,500, which is the three phase power divided by root three like this, and then divided by the line to line volt 380 gives us 6.8. That is the rated current. Now, multiply it by 2.5 to get the inverse time circuit breaker. So we need a 17 and pair. Now let's go here 17 and pair. The closest one is amp. So I'm going to select for this one to amp and this one to one amp. Now, I know you have a question right now. So you may ask me this DX unit has a 4.5 KVA. This DX, for example, has a 3.6. This one should has a much higher power. Why did you select a smaller breaker? Because here we have the power distributed across the three phase. So each one take 1.5. Unlike this one in which one phase take all of the power. That's why the single phase breaker is much bigger than the three phase breaker rating because the power is distributed here and we are designing the current based on the phase one. Okay? So I hope it's clear for you. Remember that this rule this rule can be like this or current can be equal to S divided by three, multiplied by V phase. So it can be exactly similar to this one, but you can see divided by three, since the power is divided across A, BC or the three phases. So now we have designed all of our breakers for our panel. Now, the only thing remaining is that we need the main circuit breaker. Okay, so how are we going to design this? So you can see that we have all of these loads, right? And we apply the demand factor to each of these loads. Sockets, for example, we reduced it. And then in the end, we had a demand load of 55 instead of the original 59. Now, I know that the difference is not large because this is a small office. If we are dealing with a larger and actual administration building or a commercial building, you will find that we have many offices in this building. Which will lead to more circuits for sockets and even more reduction in the total QV after applying the demand factor. So when we are designing, we can do this. We can take the demand load like this one and get the actual current. How can we do this? All what we do is that we take this S, divide it by root three, multiply it by service voltage or the line to line voltage, which is done here in this Excel, you can see that what does it do? I simply take this value, multiply it by one elvent and then divide it boy. Let me just show you. So what does it do? Let me show you here. So simply takes the demand KVA multiplied by 1,000, divide by root three, multiplied by the line to line voltage to get the total demand current or the maximum current of this banal. And then as you can see here, the total current is 83 and pairs for this bunnel. And then what then you are going to select a circuit breaker. How by doing this by using this rule, 1.25 multi blit by 8,383.708, which will be 104.635. Let me show you the circuit breaker. So 104, you can select the hundred and pair. Like this. 100 and pre. And this type will be molded case circuit breaker, like this. We are not going to select the higher value, but just the lower value in this case. Now, this is how you select the main switch or the main circuit breaker. However, if you would like to follow the NEC correctly and exactly, what are you going to do? Step one. We have our loads, right, different loads, lighting, sockets, air conditioning, water heater fridge. Step one, apply demand factor. You can see lighting, we apply demand factor of units and it is a commercial building and obtain this sockets we applied first ten KVA, then we applied 50%, as I remember to the rest and we obtained this, and we applied for all of these component. That is the first step. Step two, you need to classify them. What do you mean by classifying them? You need to classify them into two categories. The first one is that what loads are considered continuous and what loads are considered non continuous. So according to the NEC, for example, this one is non continuous load, and this one is continuous load. And the air conditioning, we consider it as non continuous as it is not operating all the time. It takes rest. Water heater, which is considered as a Again, as a continuous load. For fixed fixed heaters inside the fixed space heaters, they are also considered as continuous loads. Fridge take rest, as you remember, when we block it, it takes rest, so we can consider it as non continuous load. So what will happen here that we are going to take we are going to do like this. We are going to say, Hey, lighting is a continuous fluid, right? Okay, what else is continuous? Well, nothing else is continuous. We consider these as non continuous. So I'm going to say lighting KVA which is 0.87. I'm going to multiply it by 1.25. Why? Because this is a continuous load. Then I'm going to say, plus non continuous load. What are the non continuous loads which are here? All of these are non continuous. I'm going to add them together without the 1.25. Okay? Now, this is not the end. When we have a group of motors, like here, we have a group of exhaust fans, we have the air conditioning, all of this. What are we going to do that I'm going to add an additional 25% for the largest motor we have. Then you are going to add all of this to get the demand lute or the lute used for sizing breaker. So when you add all of this together, you are going to divide it by root three, blo by 480 to get the current rating of circuit break. Now, you would like to ask where this exactly in the NEC. If you get back here, let me show you what I exactly mean. If we get back here to feeders, where exactly feeders here. You can see that non continuous loads. So when they select the breaker here, minimum size of current breaker, how did they select it? What did they do? They simply take the receptacles, the receptacle loud, non continuous lute, which is non continuous at the power at the sockets here, similar to the sockets here. Okay. As non continuous, lighting is considered as continuous. And then we have group of motors non continuous, and you can see take 25 of the largest motor. So look at your own panel where the largest motor here, exhaustive and DX, where the losmus and add 25% of it. Okay. Then in the end, we have continuous and non continuous loads. Then what? Then the continuous will be multiplied by 125, non continuous, not multiplied by 125. Okay? Then after adding them all together, you will have this number divided by root three multiplied by the line to line voltage, and then obtain the overcurrent size. Now, there is one point here that when we selected this one, I selected it as 104. I should select the Nicks to higher one as we learn it. So I'm going to select 125 as a service, not 100, but 125 amp like this. Okay. Great. So we selected this breaker and you can select it using this rule. Four circuit breakers, if you are going to follow the NEC, exactly. However, most of the designers that I have seen when they design these circuits, they just take the load and just divide it by demand loud and just divide by root three, multiply by line to line to get the current, and then multiply by additional 25%, which means that they assume that all of these loads are continuous. Okay? So I hope you get this point and hope you understand how can we size these breakers. 135. NEC Standard – Important Notes - Conductors Part 1: Has and welcome back to another section in our course for electrical design. This one, we would like to discuss how to select the conductors for a specific application using the NEC standard. This is pretty important because you will find a the conductors specifically in the NEC that we have many many rules which we have to follow and be careful because there are many many tricky questions regarding this part. So let's start with number one, which is the ampacity tables. What does this mean? Now, any conductor with its own type of insulation has a current rating, current rating, or what we call the ampacity of the conductor. What does this mean? How much current it takes continuously without any problem? So for example, if it is a ten, it means it is rated for ten pairs without any issue, can take ten s for a long time. Now, the problem here that you will find in the N EC standard, that we have classifications. Number one, we have type of conductor itself, the conducting material which carry the current. It can be copper, or it can be aluminum aluminum or aluminium in British aluminum in the US. We have copper and aluminum. Copper and aluminum are the difference between them, the copper, as we said before in the previous section, that it has more ms, it can carry more current bare meter square, pair cross sectional area, compare the two aluminum. So for example, if you look at the size of the wire, let's say take an eight gauge wire, like this one, 60 Celsius degrees, it can carry 40. For copper. Now similarly for the same section, for aluminum, it can carry only 35. You can see number one, it carries more current bare meter square or per cross sectional area compared to aluminum. However, aluminum is lighter in weight. In our design here, we are going to use, of course, the copper wires. This is the first points, we are going to use copper wires. Number one, number two, You'll find here classification of these cop, for example, several classifications. Classifications here or categories based on what based on the temperature rating of the conductor. What other the temperature rating of the conductor, the maximum ampient temperature at which it can operate. We will find here here, for example, 60 celsius degrees, 75 celsius degrees, 90 celsius degrees. O the difference between them, you will find under it different types of insulations. You can see TW is an insulation, you have a type of insulation, T TN, here, TN two or THW N two, TW two, and et cetera. So we have many many types of insulations and each one has its own application. The difference between these columns is that if you are going to use an insulation with a 60 celsius degrees, then you are going to look at this column here. If you are going to use one of these insulation, then you are going to look for the 75 celsius degrees, 9 celsius degree this column. Now, this is the insulation maximum temperature that the insulation can with the stand or maximum operating temperature. Great, great. Now, this is the first part pretty clear, right? So as you can see, for example, for higher insulation rating, you can see it carry more current for the same gauge, for the same size. You can see 40 for 60 celsius. 54 75 because we can more current, which means more losses I squared r. So you can see as the current increase, more losses increase or power losses increase and leads to more heat dissipation. So this one can withstand only 40 M for this size. Now, this one can withstand 50 because more heat dissipation, it will not reach close to 75 celsius degrees. If it is 55, then it can withstand more p as you can see, and it can reach higher temperature than 75 Celsius degrees. Now, if you look at this table, this one is pretty commonly used, 110.16, and there is one important part that these rating they are not the only rating. There are other ratings, if I remember 105 or higher. You can find it in other tables in the NEC code. NEC standard. Here, you can see table 310.16. This is the one which you are going to use. It's called the amass of insulated conductors with not more than three current carrying conductors in a raceway cable or Earth. So what does this mean? If you have a raceway or, for example, a conduit, then you are not going to have more than three conductors inside a carrying conductors. The conductors that carry current, and I'm going to explain this later in this list. But for now, these abates here. If you have one, two, three, not more than three, then you can assume that each one is 40. If you exceed, let's say one again, five, for example, in one conduit on one raceway or Earth, then in this case, you will start dating this cable. Similar to the dating factor of groping inside the previous cables in the IEC, which we talked about before in a previous section. Okay, great. Another part here that this is again at a 30 Celsius degrees. These current ratings for all of these different types of conductors is at 30 Celsius ambient temperature or infern height, 86 Ferren height. Other than this, you ad then there are temperature correction factors or derating factors for temperature. Now, this one here, what does AWG mean? It means American American wire gauge, which is abbreviated usually as gauge. We say six gauge, four gauge, three gauge, and et cetera. There's also K mel. KC ML here, K means Kel circular, C means circular, and mel is, if I remember, 1/1000 inch, something like this. It has a certain definition. But in general, you can say that these two gauge or when you go up beyond these values, all of this is called KCl. Okay. Now, we would like to see what are the different applications for this. When you open the NEC code, let's say 42023. If you go down here, You can see Article 310, and you'll see here 10.4 conductor applications and insulation rated 600 volt. Now, if you look at here, you can see type letter, all of these letters, which you have seen, like t N, this one t N, which is and this specific table, like this number, T N. Each of these numbers is corresponding to n insulation. For example, you can see this is then insulation, it's trade name and the letter used inside the NEC. Here you can see each one of these insulation has a maximum operating temperature. What is the maximum temperature it can withstand? That's the first thing. Second thing is that gives you an application for each of these types. Now, there's one important part here. If you look at T H W here, you'll see that it says that it has two ratings or dual ratings. On which is nine cylsus degrees in dry locations, and 75 clsus degrees in wet locations. You can use it in dry and wet. Now we will see that we have and double. Now usually when we have and double, double means greater heat resistant, greater heat resistant, higher resistance, than this one can resistant more heat than the normal one. If you go down here, usually is a the that when you have two, as you can see here two, it means that this one is suitable or has 90 celsius degree rating in Dry and width location, like this one here, nine cylsus degrees, in Dry and width location. Without it dash here, it will only have 75 celsius degrees like TH W N. And also W here means that it can be installed in wet location. Now if you go down here, there's one which is also commonly used, which is T T M. This one here. You can see nine clsus degrees. However, there is no WH. It is not suitable for wet. However, they say here 9 celsius degrees used in dry and damp location. Dam here means that, moderate moisture locations. Locations with a little bit of moisture. Okay. So if it is in a dry location or a little bit of moisture, then you are going to use mine celsius degrees as a rating. If this one is installed in wet locations, you will find that this one will go down on another level. It will be having a maximum temperature of 75 celsius degrees. Again, it depends on each table and their applications. Okay. Okay, great. Now, what are we going to do next? These are the tables, which you can read about different applications. Now if you go down here, here in the same standard number one. Go down here. This one here. Here, say that these tables, which I have just shown you right now, the tables here, is at, let's say, 30 Celsius degrees, as you can see here. For other temperature than this, then we are going to go to 310.15 B, and I'm going to show you this right now. However, if you would like to get at any temperature from equations, you can use this one here. Can see this equation here gives you currant rating, and then you are going to look for new ambient temperature and old to one and then find the new currant rating for any cable. Great. If you'd like it to get it using an equation. But usually, we don't do this. We go to this table here. Trond t 0.15, which is this one here. You can see that here, ambient temperature correction factors based on 30 celsius degrees. All of this rating, let's take any one of these like this one here. Let's say 48 gage 40. Then If you are operating at any other temperature, let's say instead of 30 Celsius degrees, we are operating at 40. Then I'm going to go down here, ambient temperature 6-40. Then I'm going to look for this range here. For the 60 celsius degrees cable, then what durting factor, it will be 0.82. What does this mean? It means that we will take 0.82 multiplid by. This one, which is 40. Which means that instead of having a 30 celsus degrees, we can go up to 40 flowing inside the conductors. However, if the temperature reaches 40 celsus degrees, we have to derate it. By how much, we should now run maximum current of 32.8. We cannot exceed this at the temperature increase. This is for the temperature correction factors. Another one here, there's another one for 40 celsus degrees, another one for four cylsus degrees, this one for 30 celsus degrees. Figo do in here, there's one here for adjustment factors. Remember that when we said that if we have a raceway or a conduit, and we added more than one conductor inside it. So when we add more than one conductor, we have to date it. So we have to derate it. By how much, if you are going to look at here, we will look for number of current carrying conductors, number of conductors. If the conductors which carry current and solid a conduit or a raceway is 4-6, then you have to derate it by 80%. For example, you are going to take. If each one has 40 b for example, then each one will have a maximum current of 32 due to the heat effect of the other conductors. All of these conductors produce heat which affect all of the other conductors. Now, you'll find a number of conductors here, which is done here, the total number of conductors in the raceway or able, including spare conductors. So if you have any spare conductor that does not carry conductors or for future expansion, then you have to include them. Now, you may ask me why they don't carry any current. That's true. However, in the future, they will carry current. That's why since they are in the future, will carry current, then we have to include them. In our calculations here. So this is the second table. Let's get back here. We have the first one here. According to type of table, we are going to look here for the rating itself. Now another important to which I have to remember that four branch circuits, this is important, branch circuits, the code allows you to have the minimum gauge required. F a branch circuit is gauge. You can't go below this number. You can't use 16 gauge or eating gauge for a branch circuit. Now, why this because the 14 gauge, you can see the minimum current of it is 15. Now you may ask me, what does this number even relate to this node here. You'll find that in the standard fuses and breakers from the table to 140.6, if I remember correctly. This table which gives you, you'll see that the circuit breakers in the NEC start with 15. Since that the circuit bricks is 15, then by logic, the minimum conductor should have a 15 m. That's why we'll find that could say that hey, the minimum one should use is 15, that 14 gauge. This is the minimum conductor that can be used for branch circuits. Now, this are the correction factors which we talked about for temperatures at different temperature. Don't worry, we are going to have some examples on these, so we will understand how can we apply these rules. We are just understanding what does the cod say about these rules here. Now, the question which you may ask, what does a current carrying conductors? Current carry inductor, the conductor that carry current in normal operation. Now, you may ask me like what, for example, of course, the ungrounded conductors unground conductors carry current. What do you mean by ungrounded conductors or like hot wires? What do you mean by hot wires, like phase currents? Like phase A, B, C, all of these carry current in normal operation. So we count them as a current carrying conductors. That is the first one. What about grounded conductors? We have conductors that are connected to, for example, the metallic enclosure of our equipment, these grounded conductors do not carry current. They carry current during fault conditions. The normally don't have currents, they are considered as not current carrying conductors. If you have a conduit like this, So this conduit, you have how many conduct let's say phase A, B, C, and you have the grounding conductor. Then when you are applying this rule, do you consider them as four or three? You consider them as three. Y? Because we have three phase, which are current carrying conductors. However, the grounded conductor is not a current current conductor according to the NEC, and the p logic it doesn't carry any current except in fold conditions. That's why this one is not a current carrying conductor, we consider them as three when we apply this, so we don't have to apply any derating factor. The last question, which is the neutral conductor. Do we consider it as current carrying or not? Now, the reality says or the code say that you sometimes count it as current carrying conductors and sometimes you don't count it as a current carrying conductors. I'm going to show you what cases or circumstances in which we have this one as a current carrying conductor. Let's relay this. Here before I say about this one, I have to mention one important part in 310.15, selection of ampsty. We more than one ambasty applies for a given circuit lens, the slowest value shall be used. Now, what does this mean? Let's say you have a room like this one here, like this. And we have, let's say, ion it inside here. An equipment like a motor, for example. This one here goes from here, from inside this room, a cable goes like this, two outside. Like here, until here, let's say there is a panel here from here to this panel. Now, this conductor here moves in a different allocations inside the room and outside. Let's say, for example, inside the room, we have 30 celsius degrees. Let's say we have outside the room or in the ambient temperature of the air, which is exposed to sunlight. Let's say, for example, is 40 Celsius degrees. Now, as you can see, that the question is, when you select your own cable, for this application, let's say, you need 40 M conductor. Should I select the 40 M based on the ambient temperature of 30 celsius degree or based on the 40 celsius degrees. Now, if you remember that when the temperature increase, we d rate the cable. The cable here, this part has the lower absy Then the cable inside here. Because this one is exposed to more temperature, so we have to derate it. That's why I say that if you have two, one cable like this is one cable, part of it is exposed to higher temperature, which means deting and one exposed to lower temperature, which is doesn't mean we don't need any durting factor. So what are we going to do where more than one abaste applies for a given circuit lengths, we have to select the lowest abast which means I'm going to design based on the worst temperature, which is 40 celsius decree. However, again, our NEC doesn't leave us like this, gives us an exception. The exception is that where different a best applies to portions of a circuit. The higher avestia, p permitted to be used. For example, we can use this part in case of one condition. If this portion of the circuit, this part, which is the lower ambast does not exceed three meter or ten feet or 10% of the total length of the circuit. It doesn't exceed 3 meters or less than 10% of the total length. If this part is not 3 meters or represent 10% of or greater than 10% of the total length, then in this case, you can use the higher and best of 30 celsius, and you can neglect this small portion. Why? Because it consider it as a small part like this, compared to a larger conductor inside tm. This small portion here doesn't affect the mpacity so much. Here is the example for the spare, as we said before, how many current conductor one, two, three, four, five, six, these are six current carrying conductors, and we have three spares, and we said that we count spares, then what are we going to do? We will have how many conductors or how many current carrying conductors, it will be three plus six, which is nine. Seven to nine means that we are going to durate them by 70%. Okay. Great till now. What about the neutral? The neutral is a headache, but I'm just have to explain it. A neutral duct, the first rule inside the NEC, the neutral ductor, that carries only the unbalanced carrot from other ductors of the same circuit, shall not be required to be counted when applying the provisions of 310.53 A, which is the table here. This one is not a current carrying conductor, now, you will ask me, what does this even mean? When m balance a current from the other conductor of the same sect. An example for this is a single phase like this one here, a single phase three wire. A single phase three wire system like this one here, you'll see that we have this neutral here is grounded. Let me just zoom in like this. To make it clear. You can see that here we have this transformer here, single phase transformer, and the midpoint is grounded. This midpoint, we have a line here, which is our neutral. Now, let's look carefully. We have a loot connected between this point and the neutral. Loot here, and another loot here between the neutral and the other terminal of the transform. What happens exactly? Let's say we have two loots, two exact loots, each one is 0.1 pairs. How the current will flow in one instant? Of course, it is an AC, so it is a changing, but just to in one positive cycle. It will be gone like this through the loot and get back in the neutral right Similarly for this one, it will go like this and get back like this. Because this one has a higher potential than this one, so it will go in this fall. Now, let's look what happens exactly. It's say that, this one takes 0.1, as you can see here. This one also requires 0.1. So by logic here, you'll find that the current will go from transformer like this, like this, and then it will not go through the neutral. It will go like this, like this. The current through the neutral is zero. In case of these two lots are equal to each other because it goes like this, the 0.1 will go here, not back to the neutral, but it just go down here and get back like this. Now if we'd like to know why this happening, it is pretty straightforward. If you apply a KCL here, KCL at this point, you'll find that submission of equal to, submission of out. What is the inter con? This one is the inter 0.1 plus what are the outgoing we have? Equal two, the outgoing neutral plus this current going to the other loot. What you can see that neutral equal to zero. You can see a neutral conductor that carries only the unbalancing current from the other the same circuit like this, Can not be required to be count, so it is not counted here. Now, what if they are different loots? Let's say, for example, 0.2 m like this, and this is 0.1. This one will be 0.2, and this one will be 0.1. It takes the unbalancing current 0.2 -0.1 gives us neutral current of 0.1. You can see it carries the unbalanced current 0.1. Also here, it doesn't require to be counted. Now, another case, if we have, which is one which we can find in our installations, single phase two wire. In a single phase two wire, the current in the hot wire phase wire is the same as the neutral wire. Be the current goes here and it gets back to the supply. In this case, in the two wire circuit, it is counted. You must count it. If you have a single phase like this one, and goes to a single phase loot, then of course, the line, the phase and the neutral has the same current because there is no other way for the current to go back. Now, let's see another one if we have a Delta connection, and one of the phase of the Delta is midpoint like this, like this one here. This part here, and in one condition, that this one is zero, phase B is zero. If you look at this configuration here, phase, phase and neutral, phase, phase and neutral. We can consider that this part exactly similar at this configuration here. So it applied the same rule, neutral is not counted. Now, in another one which you say is H, in a three wire circuit consisting of a two phase and the neutral of a four wire three phase, y connected system. A common conductor carries approximately the same current as the line neutral. Load currents of the other conductor shall be counted when a line blah, blah, blah. What does this mean? Let's look at this one? We have a four wire three phase, y connected system, four wire one, two, three, and four. That is what we call a four wire three phase because we have phase A, phase B and phase C. In this one here, if we have a three wire. We look at this 13 wi, consisting of two phases and the neutral of this system. What does this mean? It means that we took two phases, one and two, and the neutral itself, also we take, we take two phases and the neutral, one, two, and the neutral of a four wire of this system. This one does not have any current zero current. You'll find that if you apply equations of the neutral, that this neutral would carry the same current as the phase value. That's why we need to count. It has the same current or current carrying conductor. Now you may ask me, why does this one has the same current S phase, right? Now, if you look at this equation here for i neutral. If you would like to get neutral in general, it will be root one square plus two square plus s square minus I one, two, I two, three, I three, i one, and like this. Let's upl this rule. We have this one has 30, this one has 30 m. Let's upl this I one, 30 square plus 230 square plus I three, I three does not have any current, zero. Now I 30, zero, so we only have this one, which is one multiplied by two, 30, multiplied by 30. What you can see here that this one will go with this one, leaving us with root 30 square, which is m. That's why this one has 30 same as the phase, it's considered as current caring conductor. What if it is unbalanced at 3040? 30, for example, and 40, if you apply the rules, it will be 33 or 36, something like this. In the end, it will have a significant amount of current, same as phase current. So we must count it as a current carrying conductor. On a four wire, three phase, y circuit where the measured portion of the loot consists of non linear loots harmonious cern presenting the neutral, then the neutral must be considered as a current caring conductor. What does this mean? The same configuration, which you have seen the Y configuration exactly the same as it like here. Over, we are using the three phase and the neutral. Now, when you have non linear loots, and this is pretty mp non linear loots like floors and lambs, power electronics, UBS, rectifiers, power electronic circuits, all of these are non linear loots. The non linear loots gives us non linear current form, which will lead to formation of harmonics. These harmonics does not have the fundamental component, but its frequency is multiple of that fundamental frequency. Instead of having 50 hertz, it will be three multiplied by 50 herts, nine multiplied by 50 herts, 15 multiplied by 50 Herts these harmonics, all of them are added together, which we call the triple harmonics are added together and the flow in the neutral of this one. When we have large or measured portion of our loot as a non linear We have to consider neutral as a current carrying conductor because this one has the triple harmonics. This is what does it mean? What if it is a three phase four wire, but it does not have non linear louds or low number of non linears, then you cannot consider it as a current carrying conductor. The last one a pot grounding, as I said before grounding or bonding conductor grounding, our bonding shall not be count because it does not normally carry currents. Like this one here, these are grounding conductors or bonding conductors, as we are going to explain what does this mean later in the course. But anyway, these conductors are not counted as conductors because they don't normally carry any current. 136. NEC Standard – Important Notes - Conductors Part 2: Now let's talk about the criteria which we use when we are selecting our conductor. Now, I'm not talking about the bare rating. I'm talking about the 60 Celsius, 75 or 9 Celsius. Now, what if when do I the first equeion, when do I select 60 or 75 or 90? Again, it depends on the application. Yes, great depends on the application, but I need a general formula. I need a formula from the NEC itself in a section 110 14. Which will give me the criteria which I can use in order to select the suitable cable. In this one, the first rule in this part, let me just put these rules altogether like this because we are going to need them. Now, the first thing that in this particular one, say that the temperature rating associated with the ampasity of the conductor shall be selected and coordinated, so as not to exceed the lowest temperature rating of any connected termination conductor device. What does this mean? So Let's look at these two examples here. We have a circuit breaker. This breaker has an insulated rating or a maximum ambient temperature rating of 60 Celsius degrees. Great mice. And we have other termination for our components here. Any component, any load here. Again, has a 60 Celsius degrees termination. Now, since we have these two 60 Celsius degrees, what are we going to do? We are going to select a conductor with a situs degrees ambas. Now what does this mean? Let's give it shot here in order to understand what I exactly mean. So let's say we selected a cable of T W. We need 50. We need 50. What I'm going to do that, hey, 60 Celsius, all of our component, the lowest temperature, which is the one that make the lowest temperature here, what I mean by this, that I look for the weakest one in my own components here, because this one if this one is 75, it can withstand up to 75. However, this one cannot withstand higher temperature. I just have to account for the weakest one in my own design. That's why here 60 salsus, I'm going to select for 60 solsus. Let's say TW for now. When I look for T, I need what? I need 50 M, I'm going to go down here. We have 40 and we have 55. I'm going to select the higher one, of course, which can withstand this. I'm going to select a six gauge wire TW for this application. Nice. However, look carefully at this because it is pretty important. What is it? If you look at this one here, What if I selected T H N, like this one here. Let's say we have, for example, any reason that we have used the nine Celsus degree. Let's say this. Then what are you going to do? Look carefully. We need what? We need 50 M. Now, are you going to go like this? Are you going to go like this? Which is 50? I'm going to select eight gage. This is what are you going to do? Now this one is actually in correct. Why it is incorrect. Because if you add, if you apply 50 M to this sable here, the temperature will increase, let's say, to a close value to nine c, not very close to it, but lower than this. Let's say, for example, 75 c degrees as an exam. At 50 M, let's say 75 or let's say 70 degrees. Due to the flow of this current in this sable. 70 celsius degrees, no problem at all for this 9 celsius degree. However, if you look carefully at at other components, they cannot withstand this. Why? Because you can see that the 60 celsius degrees, maximum one is 40. When you add 50 to a 60 cus degrees to other component, they will overheat. You cannot apply this. That's why they could say that You have to look for the weakest point here and apply according to these component. What does this mean? Just give me what do you mean? Let's say t M and I need 50. The lowest one is 60 Celsius degrees component. I'm going to look for 60 celsius degrees and look which one can give us 50. I'm going to go all the way down. I find that it is a six gauge wire. I'm going to select six gauge wire for this application here. Now, give me another example. The loud, let's say this one here. We have 75 celsius degrees terminations, 75 celsius degrees, and we have conductors here. We have used 90 celsius degrees conductors. We have nine census degrees conductor like T, for example, then I'm not going to look here. I'm going to look in the 75 celsius degree. I'm going to look for which is the weakest one, and I'm going to use this column when I design. Let's look at these nodes here. You can see that the loudon and eight gauge T and nine ci degrees is limited to 40, we connected to a disconnect sit with terminus a 60. Let's say nine cerus degrees. We have eight gauge wire. You can see 60 40, 75 50, 90 55. It has a rating of 55. At nine c degrees components. However, since we have a weak component here like 60 celsius, I have to go down and I cannot exceed this 40. As you can see here. The same conductor is limited to 50 if you have components, 75 celsius degrees. This is one of the nodes inside the code that you have to limit the rating of your own conductor based on what or not ambient based on the termination rate temperature ratings. When we look at 90 cells and say 55 M, 55 M can be withstand because it will cause more heat dissipation, higher temperature, which means that this insulation can withstand. However, other components in your system will not be able to withstand. That's why you will need to go down and look at the same lowest temperature rating of your own components and design based on it. Okay. Let's look at the rules which we are going to need. Another rules in 110.14, it say that hey. Your first question is, which will be, window I use 60 and window I use a 75 Celsius degrees column. You'll find that it says, hey, termination provisions of equipment for circuits rated, 100 and pair less. If you have 100 and pair, current rating for a circuit or less the current is less than or equal, 100 M then what should I do or market 414 gauge through one gauge, from this to this, this one here. Then what should I do? Then you should use the conductors rated at 60 c degrees. If you have a branch, branch circuit with a current rating than 100, then you can use this cables or these conductors for your own design. However, another note here is that What if I didn't choose the ones, and I decide to say, Hey, I'm going to use the 75 celsius degrees one, like TW, I'm going to use this one. Then what are you going to do? If you are going to choose a higher temperature rating, then the ampacity of such conductors is also determined based on the 60 apacity of the conductor size used. What does this mean? It means that if you even use the 75 celsius degrees, then you have to look for the ratings at the 60 Celsius column. Now conductors with higher temperature ratings, if the equipment is less than fight for use of touch conductor. Let's say if the equipment itself is let's say 75 ces degrees, even if it is less than 100, then you can use the same ratings here. It is dependent on your own application. Now, one important part here, if you even have less than 100 and you have motors. Look here, motors with design letters PCD, then conductors having an insulation rating of 75 ce degrees or higher shall be permitted to use provided that the embasty does not exceed the 75 ce degrees. What does this mean? It means that You have the equipment, 75 celsius degrees motor, which will be usually like this if it has BCD design litter. Usually motors or 75 celsius degrees insulation. Then what are you going to do in this case? Then you need to match it. You have to use a conductor of 75 or a conductor of 90 celsius degrees, right? At least similar to the lowest one, which is the motor here. Then what are you going to do? Then if you select 75, then you are going to look for the ratings here for the 75, or if you select one of the 90, then you have also to use the same column here. Again, you are restricted to the circuit itself. If the circuit is 60 degree, lowest temperature, even if you is 75, if you 90, you have to use the ratings in the column here. Now, what if the circuit more than 100, then you can go to the next level and select 75 celsius degrees. For 100 pairs or more, then you are going to use this column here. Conductors use high temperature. Provided the pas does not exceed 75 of the conductor size can be used or up to their ampacity, if the equipment is less and fight for use, such conductors. What does this mean? Let's say you have more than 100 pairs. Then you have to use this sable or these conductors. You are going to look for these ratings. What if I decided to use 90 celsius degrees? Again, you have to match the lowest temperature. You are going to look for the ratings here. Unless length the equipment itself can go up to nine c identified for 9 celsius degrees. Then in this case, you are going to use the same column here. The summary of this All of this is that number one. You have less than 100 pairs, you're going to select conductors 60 celsius degrees or the column of 60 celsius degrees. If you have more than 100, you are going to use conductors of 75 or column of 75, if you are going to use 90 or 75. However, motors always 75 columns or even if you select 90, then you are going to look for the same column here. Great. Now, you will have a question. Why do I use 90 even if I have 75 Celsius degrees? This question will be answered the later when I give you an example on feeders selections. Another note inside the MEC 240.4 B, and this is pretty confusing one. Now, may say, Hey, I have a conductor here, that can take 60. Et let's say 60. Let's say we have a breaker here. One breaker here. Now, one may say by logic by logic that I'm going to select a breaker less than the 60. Let's say that breaker if there is 50. I believe there is 55, if I remember, if there is no 55, then it will be the lower one, which is 50. Why? Because this one will protect this cable, right by logic. However, in reality, you can actually do the opposite. What do you mean? I mean that if I have a cable of 50, I can protect it by a circuit breaker of 60, a higher standard break. Now, this may sound wrong, but actually the code allows this. You can have a breaker greater than the cable size. Even if the cable has 55, greater than its rated ambity, this breaker will do nothing. However, the code allows doing this and under some conditions. So let me show you what does the could say. It says number one. If the breaker here that you select a 100 s or less, you can apply this rule, which is saying that the next higher standard over cannot device above the ambas of the conductor being protected shall be permitted to be used. For example, if you have a cable of 50, and the breaker that you selected is 51.2, then you are allowed to go to the next level, which is 60 for exam. Even if the break are greater than the ambassador, as you can see here. However, under some conditions, the first condition is that conductors being protected are not part of a branch circuit, supplying more than one receptacle for code and the blood connected portable los. It means that if number one, if you have a circuit, Circuit breaker like this providing for a prn. If it has more than one receptacle like this, then you cannot use a higher standard breaker greater than the impasity of this sable. However, if it is just one red cord and blood receptacle, then you can actually do this without any issues. Now, let's go to the next one. The abasit of the conductors not correspond with a standard b rating of a fuse a circuit breaker. Without of trip adjustment above its rating shall be permitted to have other trip or rating adjustment. The next one next to higher standard rating, does not exceed a 100 ms, and if the over current device is an adjustable trip device installed with these conditions, it can be permitted to have a value that does not exceed the next to higher standard above the ambas of the conductors being protected. L et me give you a summary of this. Number one, what does this mean, as you can see here, the first one and passive conductors no crespon the standard pair, what shall be made to have blah, blah, blah. What does this mean? It means that if you have a ductor, let's say 100 per ductor, and there is 100 per preker, then you must use the hundred and B must match it with the ductor. Not only this, if you have an adjustable. Rip circuit, then you can adjust it to match to match our conductor abasty. Or if it does not match, we can go higher level or greater than this value, but shall never exceed the net higher standard break above the ambassador of the conductors. As an example of what I'm saying, you can see neckt higher can be selected if the first the ambassador of conductors not correspond with a standard and be rating. Let's say we have a conductor of 100 mp, and we have a fuse here. Now, if we are looking in the market, for example, in this case, we have or a circuit breaker, we have 100 and bere break, right? We have to match it. We have to add 100. We cannot exceed it. However, if f, for example, if we have 90, like this 90 conductor, Now, there is a standard there a standard one? No, we cannot match it. We don't have a 90 breaker. For example, we don't have a 90 breaker. Then what should I do? I am allow it to go to the nest highest and. I can go to the closest next one, which is 100. So you can t two cases here, one which is 100, 100 pairs, 90, then I will go to the next level since we don't have a breaker matching it. The next one here that if the next to higher standard rating does not exceed 800 s, it means that this is the maximum breaker size, 800. If the loot greater than 800, in this case, you can't use this rule. You have to down size it. This rule here talks about an adjustable break if I have a circuit breaker that I can adjust. For example, let's say we have here a loot, of 90 Mm, and this one is 100 breaker, but it is adjustable. I can change a little bit e sittings. So if I can go it down and match 90 m, it would be great. If I cannot this, I can go to the next sitting inside it. Let's say 95 m, and I would use it. So I'm trying to be as close as possible to the conductor size. However, if this one, if let's say we have 400 loot. Let's say we have a 500 breaker. This one can be adjusted, let's say from 452 500, let's say we have in the market 450 breaker, then I will not use this one. I'm going to use this breaker here. 137. NEC Standard – Conductors Selection: Hey everyone. In this video, we are going to study the rules for conductors selection. How can I select the mpecty according to our lout? So let's look at NEC, 210 conductor selections. Now, before I say this, remember that in the previous sections of the course, I was talking about the three phase as red, yellow, and blue, right? So we said that we have a red phase, which is phase A, and then a yellow, which is phase B and blue, blue, which is phase C, and I said that the neutral is a black wire. Now, this is, of course, in my country and many other countries in the US, and since we are discussing the NNC, Phase A is a black one. Phase B is red, Phase three or phase C is blue, and the neutral wire is gray or white, and the green or the grounding conductors are green. Now, let me show you an example for this. If you look at this panel here at mesom in, You can see that here, we have phase A, phase B, and C A, B, C, the three phase, and the neutral, which you can see here, the white here. Now, if you look carefully here, all of this goes to this group of bus parts which are hidden down these circuit breakers. And you can see that each circuit breakers has a wire going out the conductor going out to the branch circuit. This conductor here, this is a black one, which indicating that this one is fed from phase A, this one, feed from phase B, C, A, B C, ABC, and et cetera. Now we can see that we have for each breaker, each breaker goes to a circuit, and each conductor goes and feed current to this circuit. Now, we have this white, which is a neutral wire. Now we can see it goes to pulse part like this. This one here, at which we start taking branches of as you can see neutral wires. You can see each neutral goes to a circuit without a breaker. Only the phase has a breakers, so these are single pole breakers. Similarly for the ers, you can see that the ars itself, or grounding, can see we have one side for it or one p for all of these sing that goes to our equipment. Now, we are going to learn how to design these grounding conductors later in the course. But for now, I'd like to understand, how can I design these conductors for a branch circuit? The branch cc conductor shall be size to carry not less than the larger of A or B. We have two rules here. We are going to apply them and we select the higher one. Example, the first say the minimum brand circuit conductor size, shall shall have an allowable ampacity, not than the non continuous loot plus 125% of the continuous loot. An example for this when we remember before, and selected circuit breaker, we said 1.25, multiplied by continuous loot, more than 3 hours plus the non continuous loot. Remember this rule. The minimum brand circuit conductor size, similar at the circuit breaker, 1.25 multiplied by continuous plus non continuous. Now, the second one, the second rule. Again, we have A and B. This is the first rule which we are going to apply. The second rule is the minimum prime circuit conductor size, shall have an allowable ambasity, notly then maximum loot to be served after the application of any adjustment or correction factors. What does this mean? You can see that here we are going to look for our lot continuous loot, and a non continousut, and apply this rule. We are going to get an ambridge rating. Great. Using this ambridge rating, we are going to select a conductor. That is number one. Number two, the second rule that we are going to look for our loot. What is the maximum loot fit by this circuit? So Let's say I have a certain loot, I L which is a maximum loot. This load in order to get the minimum prin circuit conductor size, what I'm going to do that, I'm going to take this maximum loot and divide it by the correction factor or adjustment factors. Like what, for example, like for grouping or having more than three arrant carrying conductors, and also the temperature correction factor. Then I will get a certain amperage rating. So I'm going to compare these two and see which one is greater, this one or this one. If this one is greater, then I'm going to size our conductors using this current rating. This is the main role you apply these two and then see which one is bigger. There is one exception for this rule inside the say that, hey, for this one here. If you are going to use, if you are going to use circuit breakers which are operated at a 100% of its rating, then you are going to select it using 100% of continuous lout plus 100% of the non continuous. Similar at the breaker. If you remember for the 100% breaker, we add continuous plus non continuous without any oversizing, or without a 125% factor. Now, grounded conductors that are not connected to an over current device shall be permitted to be sized at 100% of the continuous and non continuous loots. Now, what are these grounding conductors? Here, it talks specifically about the neutral. It says that the neutral can be sized because here the neutral is not connected to an over current protection. It can be sized at 100% of the continuous plus non continuous loot in NEC 250. Okay. Now, let me explain this. Remember this one, 100% of its rating. Now, there is one important part. Remember that this circuit breaker, which is 100% circuit breaker, which we discussed before in the breakers section. Now, if you remember, this is 100% application. I say that use only 90 Celsius wire with ambasity based on 70 75 Celsius rated conductors. We have also use copper only or aluminum nine copper terminans only. Now, let me explain what does this mean? First sentence here, use only 9 celsius degrees wire with ambasity based on 75 celsius. If you remember that we have our table like this, for Copper, for example, We have several degrees, 60 celsius degrees, we have 75 clus degrees, we have 90 Celsius degrees. It says that was 9 celsius degree wire. I'm going to have or force it to use this column here. Or the wires which have an insulation rated at nine cells degree. However, when you are selecting the current rating, you have to look for the 75 ces degree. What does this mean that when I say, hey, eight gauge wire, AG. Let's say this, I would like a certain current rating, I'm going to look for the 75. Let's say here, We have 20 m as an example. I will select the current rating needing from this one here from this column here. But when I buy the conductor, I'm going to a buy it with a 90 celsus degrees ampit nine celsus degree insulation. I'm going to say eight gauge rated at 20 based on 75 csus degrees column. Here we are despite having 90 degrees conductor, we are going to select based on this column here. Why? Because that's mean that our components have a rated or the lowest temperature among the terminals or motors or whatever circuit breakers is 75 c degree. We are forced to do this. Now, let's see what this catalog say. It's say that UL or underwriters laboratories, say that provides additional explanation about the conductor size, where it say that the conductor must be applied using nine ceilsa degrees, based on the 75 ces degrees column, when you are going to use the 100% rated breakers. In other words, nine cls degrees is sized, similar S 75 ceil degrees for the required ampacity. Example for this, if you have a zero hundred and 80 amp, in 100% rated application, the choice of a conductor would be 90 census degrees 500 kc mel conductor, not nine ce degrees 400 K me. Now, let's see this. So we have s hundred and 80 per, right. And since we have 100% rated circuit breaker, so we are not going to oversize. It will be 100% of the continuous loot plus 100% of the continuous loot, which is here will be 180 per as it is without any fact. That's number one. So if I get back here to this table, We need 180 amp. What I'm going to do is that I'm going to look for this table here. I'm going to go all the way down. I need what s hundred and 80 goes down down down. You'll see that serve hundred 80 at this one. This one is stable, which is equivalent to 500 KML, 500 K CML. However, when I'm selecting it, I will say 500 KML, 90 celsius degree rating. I'm going to select. For example, this insulation, which has a nine cs degrees, and its size will be 500 gauge because I'm selecting based on this column here. I'm not selecting based on this one, despite being nine c degrees conductor, I am selecting based on this column here, because the lowest temperature of our component or the manufacturer of the circuit breaker, say that use this column here. Because if we have a sir hundred and 80 ampere, and I'm selecting based on this, then if I go down here, you'll find that the suitable conductor is 400 SML, smaller one. However, due to the components or the terminas that are rated at 75, I enforce it to use this column despite having a larger insulated or a higher temperature insulated conduct. This is what does this mean? All of the sentence here. Like here. You can see here, 500, we are going to select it, not 400 KC mel. Great. Now what does A nine copper mean? Or aluminum nine copper or copper aluminum on the lg. So what does this mean? It means that it is suitable for use with either copper or aluminum conductors. So you can see it can be used with aluminum or copper. Now, not only this the number nine, it means that the lug itself of the circuit breaker has a 90 celsius degree conductor temperature rating. Now we are going to ask, what does a lug even mean? This one. We'll see that we have a circuit precle like this with the switches like this. This is a three pole circuit breaker, and we add our conductors like this. Phase A, phase M, and phase Z. We enter it inside this hole here, and then we add the screw here. So you can see that this part here, which you can see here, this one is called the lug. According to the manufacturer here, use only copper or aluminum nine copper terminus. It means that aluminum nine copper or copper that with stand 90 csi degrees. Nine here means it is using nine seals as a greek induct temperature rating. All of this doesn't have anything with the normal design. This is information for you if you have encountered a situation in which you are going to use 100% circuit break. However, if you look at the circuit breaker and you find that we have AL seven CU or CO seven aluminum. What does this mean? It means that what is listed for covenant aluminum. However seven means we need 75 Celsius degree temperature rating conductor. Okay. Now, as you can see here, this is what we just explain. Now, let's have some examples to understand how can I apply these rules. 138. Examples on Conductors Selection: The example number one on the design of the conductors for a branch circuit. This example, it say that hey, determine the ampacity of a two gauge T N copper conductors to be installed in a raceway in an ambient temperature of 50 salsius degrees. What if there are six of the able in a raceway? What will happen? Great. Number one, we need the ampacity to understand how can we apply correction factors for a two gauge TN copper inductors. What are you going to do? I'm going to look for the table here. We have a two gauge. I'm focusing on this one here. Great. To be installed in a raceway in an m, and it is also TN. If you go here, TN insulation. Focusing on the 90 Celsius degrees column, great. Then now everything is fine. The ambasity of this one in normal conditions or a 30 Celsius degrees is 130. This one in normal conditions, 130 at 50 at 30 Celsius degrees, you can see here, 30 celsius degrees. Great. Now, it is overrating in a 50 celsius degrees. What is the de rating of this cable? I'm going to look for the table, this magic table for ambient temperatures. So number one, we have a 50 celsius degrees. So let's look at here, 50, 50, 50, here. And what conductor t n, which is nine cells degree, so I'm going to look like this and apply this factor, 0.82. The rating will be 100 ct, multiplied by point e two, de rating by a 18%, so it will give us 106.6 pair. This is the current rating, the maximum current can flow in one cover conductor when it is at 50 cs degree. Here we did consider that they are in a raceway. If we consider that it is in a raceway, then we are going to look for this factor right now. Now, what if there are six cables of this one in a race way? Great. What is the ampacity of one of them? All of them around each other will generate heat. So we need to derate due to the grouping factor or due to having more than three current carrying conductors. I'm going to use the stable adjustment factor for more than three current carrying conductors. So we have how many in the raceway, we have six cables. So 4-6 like this. So what kind of factor, 80%? So all I have to do is that we have the effect of temperature, sorry, effect of temperature, yes, at 50 degrees. Now, if I would like to take the effect of the number of cables, I'm going to multilate again by 80%. So you can see 85 dot to 28 a the maximum curt. So you can see two effect one due to temperature. And one due to the adjustment for having or having the grouping effect or more than one kductor in the ase way. Now let's have another example. In this example, assume that you have a three phase four wire feeder. To a panels applying 200 and pair of a non continuous florescent lighting loot. Assume that these kindactors will be in a 40 Celsius ambient temperature and terminate in an equipment of with a 75 Celsius termination. Find the suitable cable for this application or kdtor. So let's look carefully here. What kind of float do we have? Well, we have non continuous float. Awesome. What how we are going to design? I'm going to say i cable. We be 1.25 multiplied by 200 M. If I apply this to my own calculations, I will get approximately 250. That is the first rule if I apply the first rule. Now, what about the second rule? If I'm applying the second rule, I'm going to say, Hey, I will be It Divided by derating factors, derating factors or adjustment or correction factors. So I will be 200 divided by correction factor, due to two conditions. One, due to the 40 Celsius degrees, and due to having four wire. Now we are going to ask why this one, we are going to apply a rating factor. Because you can see that this one is the three phase, four wire feeder. We have three phase one, two, three, the three of them carry current, carry current. Now, what about the neutral? Now, look careful here. Flourescent lighting loot. Flourescent is considered as non linear loot. So since we have a non linear load, so we have harmonics or triple harmonics inside our neutral, leading to having to size or considering the neutral as a current carrying conductor because it has current or it has triple harmonics. This one or the neutral is also current carrying conductors. We have a total of four inductors. We have the effect of groping and effect of the temperature. Let's see what we are going to do right now. Let's look at here. We have four inductors this way leading to 80%. Where did we get this from here? The first factor 0.8. Multiplied by factor of the 40 celsius degrees. 40 celsius degrees, now we can see that equipment with 75 celsius degrees termination. You can use the 75 celsius conductors or nine c degree conductors. I'm going to use the 75 c degrees since it doesn't mention any specific type of insulation. 75 ces degrees at 40 celsius ambient temperature, leading to 0.88. I'm going to say 0.88. The first factor due to growing, 80%, second factor here 0.88, as you can see here. Now, this is if you selected the 75 cesus degree cable. If you selected the 90 celsius degrees, then you are going to apply 0.91. Okay. So let's see what will happen. If I apply these factors, I will have a current rating of 284 M. If we compare these 220884 and the first one, which is this one here, which one is bigger? Remember that we should apply these two rules. This is a 1.25 for continuous plus non continuous, and the other rule for the durting factors, this one and this one, and then we compare them together and see which one is higher. Of course, as we can see, this one is higher. So I'm going to design based on this rule. Great. So 75 cesus degrees cable. Now let's look at here, 75 cesus degrees cable, and the termination is 75 cesus degree. So I'm going to look at the same column here. We need 284. If I go down here, 284, 284 is between these two values, 255 and 285. W one you are going to select this one here, which is equivalent to two, 300 KC mel. So as you can see, that 300 K CML copper has 75 c bastio of 285. This is if you select a 75 cesus degrees. What if I apply the other one, which is this friend here? How are you going to design it? I'm going to say? Rated current, 200 divided by d rating factor 0.91 for this one here, for 9 celsius degree, and for having four current carrying conductors, it will be 0.8. I'm going to look this. Let me see as you can see. It is 274.72. Now, if you compare this to this to the 250 M, you can see again this one is higher value. So gooize based on it. Then what are we going to do? Now, look carefully here. This is pretty pretty important. Now remember, when we said that we design based on the lowest temperature. We said that our termination here is 75, so I should look at the 75. Now look carefully here, when we design based on or after ale correction factors, we look at the same column. Which means that when I design nine c degree. Even if I have a 75 c degree terminations, Then you are going to look at this column here. There is another condition. I'm going to tell you right now. I'm going to look at here and if I go down here for 274, 274, this one is enough, which is the 250 K CML, having at nos degree, 290. Now, this is not the end. There is another important property, which you have to check before you do this. What are the next two property that you are going to take the rating that you selected, and apply the correction factor that you already obtained, 0.91 and 0.8. Let's look at eight. Let's look at it. 0.91, 0.8, by the car as gives us 211. This conductor here will carry 211 maximum at the derated conditions. Now, you have there is an important part in the code that say that in EC 2,310.15, the temperature correction and adjustment factors shall be permitted to apply the ampato for the temperature rating of the conductor. If the corrected and adjusted ampait does not exceed the ampait for the temperature rating of the determination in accordance with provisions blah blah. What does this mean? It means that When you apply these factors, which you are already selected, and gives you an ampacity here. If this ampacity not exceed does not exceed, the ampacity of that temperature rating of the termination. Now the determination are 75 c degrees. Now the equivalent ampacity at 75 c degree for this sable is 255. As you can see here. Two, 55, as you can see here, is greater than 211. After correction, this value does not exceed this value. Which means I can do this. If it exceeds, you have to go to the higher conduct. I hope you get this point. This is a special case when you have a cable and you are going to use adjustment factors. You are going to select it from its column. However, you have to make sure that after applying again for the selected cable, the adjustment factor, its ambasity les than the ambas equivalent to the termination, which is 255 amperes. This is what the code says regarding this. Now, you may ask me, why do I even do this? The termination is 75 cesus degree? Why just I don't select a 75 cls degree insulated cable. Now, if you look at the same example here, we selected what we selected a nine clus degree and 75 cus degree. Now look carefully here. You'll see that When we selected nine cells degree, we selected a 250 k SML, which is this one. However, when we selected a 75 ces degree cable, we selected a 300 k SML, which is this one. So what can you learn from this? I can learn that when I used a higher insulated one, I reduced the size of my own conduct. I have now a smaller inductor. You can see 250 k sim at nine c degree compared to 300 at 75 degrees. That's why, as you can see, reduced by one, this is the primary advantage of using nine c degree inductors. I know it's a little bit confusing, but I hope you get the idea, and where did we apply this from the ot? 139. NEC 430 - Motor Conductors Selection: Hey, everyone, and welcome back to another lesson. This one, we are going to discuss NEC 434 motors, or specifically would like to understand how can I select conductors for motors? For a single motor, pretty straightforward in a continuous duty application Continuous duty, if you remember, 24 hours, seven days, different from Continuous ****, which is 3 hours or more. The conductors shall have a basting, not less than 125% of the full load current rating as determined by this or not less than subsified by A through G. A through G gives you different types of applications for motors, and each one, you will have different sizing for ductors. For example, if you have a rectifier, or a bridge rectifier, then you are going to select in in a certain way. If you are having a half bridge rectifier, you are going to select in a different way. If you have, for example, a Y sto Delorn motor as what we learned in the breakers before, and I have mentioned this part before in the compressor part, it's say that the ampasity of the conductor on the lines side of the controller shall not be less than 125% of the full load current. In general, it will be 1.25 multiplied by full load current. And this is for general mot for a single mot. F a Y star delorn. You remember that we have a cable like this, L one, L two, L three, and then we had group of contactors, if you remember, going like this to several windings of the motor. If you don't remember, get back to the compressor lesson. Okay. Now, what happens exactly that in the y s delta connected motor, the pasty of this wire, these mean wires or the line. Wires shall not be less than 1.25 again of the full loot current. However, this one takes the phase current, and in the motor itself or the table the C full loot current is the line current. If you remember line current means, what are you going to do? I'm going to say line current and we have phase current, so we are going to take line current. And multiply it by 0.577, which was one of root three. This is what we discussed before in breakers, for air, for motor compressor. This is the phase current. When you multiply this phase current by the same rule 1.25, which is this exact rule, this multiplication will give you this. We'll give you 72%. If you don't remember this, get back to this motor compressor part in which I explained this part. Now, the most important part here is that again, four motors, four conductors, four short sect protection and ground for protection. Four disconnect switches. All of this, we have to use the NEC tables for getting the full load current. We only use the name plate, for over current protection. Sorry, overload protection. And also we use nameplate in different scenarios, like, for example, the torque motors, which we have talked about before. So if you don't remember this, you have to get back to the previous sections of the course. Okay. So let's have an example so that we can understand how can I design for a motor. Select the suitable 75 Celsius degree wire. And remember, we said that motors design B, design C D inside the NEC, I consider them as 75 Celsius degrees termination. Select the suitable wire for a 7.5 horse power, 230 volt three phase motor. What are you going to do? I'm going to say, Hey, like this, first, get the full loot current. I'm like this, we need 7.5 horse power to this one, 230 volt three ps, this one. Now, what is the equivalent goes here 22? Now, let me zoom in that you can see it. You can see 7.5 horse power, 22, 230 volt. As you can see, the intersection gives us full loot current of 22. That is number one so the full loot current is 22. How are you going to select the conductor 1.25 multiplied by 22 m. It will be like this, 22 Multiplied by 1.25, which is 29 pairs. Then what are the next step? Look at the table. Sorry, look at the table. Yeah, surrounded and 10.16 or surround 10.16 Exactly. We need 75 degrees, I'm going to look here. And we need 29. I'm going to go all the way down 29 between these two. I'm going to select this one. It will be ten gauge wire with a 35 and bare rating. That's it, pretty straightforward. Let's have another one. Select the suitable 75 degree again for a two horse power, but this time single phase. Then what are you going to do? I'm going to get the full loot current from the single phase table of the ANC, which is this one. So I have a two horse power. We have 230 volts, single phase, this one. So if I combine them, we will have 12. Let me zoom in like this, 232 horse power, 12. The full loot current is 12. Now I'm going to multiply this by 1.25. It will be 15 pairs. Now I'm going to look at here. Let me magnify or before magnifying, we need 75. We need 15, go all the way down here. You'll see a 20 now, right? 20 here is suitable for this application, which means 14 gauge wire. Let me zoom in, as you can see here, 75 to 2014 gauge wire. Like this 14 gauge wire with 20. Remember that the 14 gauge wire is the minimum branch circuit wire. 140. NEC – Feeder Conductors Selection for Motors: Hi, and welcome everyone. In this video, we are going to learn how to size feeder conductors using the NEC. In the NEC here, we are talking it specifically, and I should have mentioned this. We are discussing the NEC here specifically for this lesson, sizing for several motors. Or motors and other loots. So we look for the main feeder that is supplying electrical power to motors and other loots. So the MEC says, Hey, if you have motors and other loots, then that should have an pasty. No then the submission of each of the following in 430.24, theses, what are you are going to say? Add these together. So let's look carefully. Number one, 125% of the full loot cannot of the highest rated motor. It will be 1.25 multiplied pot largest motor. Plus some of the full loot currents of all other motors in the group. I'm going to say submission of full lot current of other motors, plus 1.25 tib boy, none no motor, loot p one plus the non continuous loot. As if we are making a mixture between the previous rules. The main rule for conductors that we are going to look for, 1.25 multiplied by no multiplied by continuous loot here continuous, continuous, 1.25 multiplied by continuous loot plus non continuous loot. This is the main rule for sizing a conductor. Now, not only this, if you have a motors, then what you are going to do, that you are going to add to it, the full loot cent of all other motors, plus 1.25 of the largest one? We look for 1.5 of the largest motor and ful card of the rest of the motors. This is just the rule that you can apply according to the MEC to get the main feeder. Now, let's see an example for this. What is the size of feeder of current protection inverse time breakers with 60 celsius terminals, and conductors required for the following two motors? These two, forget about the folut current form. So we have two motors here. 20 horsepower, ten horsepower, three pages motors. Step number one, what are you going to do? I'm going to get the full loot current from the tables of the NC as we learn it. Motors get and your sizing conductors or breakers, you have to go to the NEC tables. So I'm going to look for the three phase. First one, for 160 volt, this column here. First one to 1 horsepower and ten horsepower. I'm going to look for ten horsepower. And this one here. If I go like this, it will be 14 M. That's why here, 14 for the ten horsepower. T 20 horse power, go all the way like this to 27 to 27 M, like this. Great, that is step number one. Step number two, apply the rules. The rules say that 1.25 of the largest plus submission of full loot cart of the rest. So which one is the largest, this one, 1.25 multiplied by 27 plus 14. If you have non motor loots continuous and non continuous, then 1.25 of continuous plus one multiplied by non continuous. If you look at this role here, like this, 27 plus 1.25 multiplied by 1.25 plus 14 gives us 48. This is the feeder that we need that's applying to these two motors. Now, 48 and look carefully at this information here. Get back here. The first information which you have to focus on that these are two motors. Great. We learned that motors design B, CD in the NEC specifically, most likely, the motors will be 75 celsius degree, will be 75 celsius degree. And we have breakers with a 60 clus degree termination. What conductor I'm going to select, I'm going to select is or a 75 cus degree conductor or a 90 sulcus degree conductor. However, when you are selecting the 75 c degree conductor, you have to look at the 60 cus degree column. Why? Because this one is the weakest one, the weakest, or the lowest temperature termination. Let's see how I'm going to do this. So number one, we have a 75 cegree one, and we go all the way down. We're not going to look at this one. We're going to look at the 60 celsius degree column, 48 mp. I'm going to go all the way down, 48 between these two, I'm going to select a six gauge wire. I'm going to select a six gauge wire. 75 celsius degree rating or insulated rating. You can see six gauge wire, rated at 55 at six cellus degree sin this is the lowest temperature point or termination. That's why I selected it. 141. NEC Air Conditioning – Conductors Selection: He and welcome back everyone. In this part, we would like to discuss the NEC air conditioning conductors selection. How we are going to select conductors, for air conditioning components. For a hermetic refersenan motor compressor, which we talked about before, the rated load current marked on the name plate of the equipment which the motor compressor is employed shall be used in finding the rating or ampasity of the all of these disconnect switches as we did before. And conductors and over current protection. Great. If there is no rated load, then the rated load on the compressor name plate shall be used. Now we learned how to design fuses breakers for air conditioning systems. We also we learn where does the manufacturer obtain these elements? We learned from the circuit breakers section, how to design the fuses here, where does the manufacturer obtain the maximum fuse, these ratings here. Similarly, we have the minimum circuit ampacity. Now, we are going to learn where does our manufacture for this one obtain it. Let's go step py step. Number one, how are you going to design the cable? It's say that. If you have a single motor compressor, we have a compressor without any other component, a compressor here, no fan, no other components. How are you going to select it? It will be 1.25 multiplied by the full load pair on the name plate itself. The motor rated load cart or branch selection carrot on the name plate. Cho not be then this. For example, if you have a compressor only has a 27 pair full load amp, we are going to say 1.25 multiplied by 27. That is the first rule similar at the motor, 1.25 multiplied by fol loot current from the NEC tables. Motor compressor with or without additional motor loots. If it has more than one, it has more than one compressor for any reason, then how are we going to design it? It says. Some of the rated loot or brand selection current, whichever is greater of all motor compressor. If you have compressor, one, two, three, you are going to add all of these current together, Floot of all of them. The sum of full loot current of any other lots, F loot current of any other loot you have other than motors. And then 25% of the largest motor compress or motor folut current in the group. Now, if you look carefully or you think about this rule, you'll find that it's pretty pretty close to the feeder selection of group of motors. In the feeder selection, we said 1.25 multiplied by largest motor plus submission of the folute current of the rest plus 1.25 of continuous plus one mutabilit boy, non continuous. This is for non motor loots. Here what you are going to do here. Here what you are going to do that, as you can see, all of this, consider as group of motor compressors. It focus on this part similar to the motors. 1.25 largest motor plus full loot current of the rest. Now, this is exactly similar to here. How it is similar, you'll see that some of the full loot current of all motors, and here to 25% of the largest motor, and some of the rated load or brand selection current of all motor compressor. So you have motor compressor, we have motors and 25% of the largest one. It means that this rule for a group of motors plus motor compressor. You are you are going to deal with them. They have all of these are motors, and they are going to take 1.25 of the largest plus the rest. Now, forget about this rule. Now, what about y star? Y start Delta run. Again, similar as what we did in the y start Delta run for a motor. Remember, it is 72% of the motor rating, which is a full current or the line current. Similarly, for air conditioning, exactly the same Nothing change it at all. If you understand the previous lesson, you understand this one as well. Because as you can see 58% and multate by giving us 1.25. Now, let's understand this one. For example, here for a motor air conditioning system, and you would like to design and know the minimum circuit ampacity. We need to find suitable a conductor for this application. Number one, we said that motors are likely 75 celsus degree. I'm going to focus on the 75 celsus degree column. That is the first thing. Number two, how are you going to design it? You can see we have a compressor. We have a fan. It's say that submission of ft caran of all compressors plus submission of full loot current of all motors plus 25% of the largest motor or compressor. So this is exactly as 1.25 of the largest thing we have, which is the compressor, plus submission of the rest, which is the fan motor. This rule which I'm just explaining is exactly this one here. All compressors, all motors, 25 of the largest of motor compressor or largest one. Great. Now let's look at this here, Sirt seven. Where did this third seven came from? Okay Let's al 1.25, multiplied by 27 plus 2.2. I alo this one, I'll give you approximately ir six p, which is close to the manufacturer value of thir seven. Now, the manufacturer most likely took 1.25, multiplied by 29.2, which will give you approximately 3.6 something like this, pretty close to this value. So Anyway, it doesn't matter so much in this application as it is have a minimum effect on our application, but I'm just applying the code precisely as you can see. Third six or third seven, how are you going to select the able, 75 degree. Let's go down in here between these two. I'm going to select an eight gauge wire for this application. Now let's look at another name plate. Here, it says 29.4. Now, where did they get? You can see here, compressor, third motor, 22.1 and pair, 1.8 and pair. So 1.25 multiplied by 22.1 plus 1.81 0.25 of the largest motor plus the rest of the motors. So when multiply this rule gives you 29.425, which is exactly similar to the manufacturer value. Minimum circuit past, the lowest conductor that you can use. Nice, great. Apply this table, if you go like this, you need to win nine. If you go down this one here between these two, the minimum one is a ten gag wire. L et's have another application. This one here. You can see where the current here compressor motor, 16 mp and outdoor motor 1.3. I'm going to say 1.25 multiplied by 16 plus 1.3 like this gives you 21.3. You can see that the minimum cm pass accord the manufacturer to 22 close to this value. If I like to select eight, I'm going to go to 75 cel degree column 20-25, we are going to select that 12 gag giving us 25 enough for this application. 142. NEC 230 - Service Entrance Conductors Selection: Hey, everyone. In this video, we would like to discuss how to select the service entrance conductors for an application. We are talking here about the main feeder that is coming from the service equipment or th an electrical generator into our panel. How are we going to do this? The service entrance conductor according to NEC 230 f two, service entrance conductor shall have an embasit of not ly than the maximum loot to be served. You can see that here, conduct shall be sized to not let than the largest of E or one or A two, which are these, as you can see here. So number one, where the service interest con ductus apply continuous louts or any combination of non continuous and continuous, the minimum conductor size shall have an allowable pasity, not le than the sum of non continuous plus 125% of the continuous. That means that 1.25 multiplied boy tine was lu plus one multiplied boy non intine was exactly similar as I did before. That is number one. Number two, the sum here, the minimum service introns conductor shall have an pasty. Note ly then the maximum loot to be served after application of any adjustment or correction factor. I are going to take the total loot max loot, and then divide it by correction factors like temperature correction and the adjustment factor for grouping. This is what the NEC exactly these. The NEC does not prohibit sizing the grounded conductor, simply by using the same size at the ungrounded or hot surface conductors. What does this mean? Mean that it doesn't prevent you from sizing grounded conductor here, it refers to the neutral. It doesn't phab you from sizing the neutral with the same size as the phis conductor. Now, here we have these two, this one, and this one, as we did before, if you remember, for any loot, and we compare between them and see which value is the highest and then design based on it. Now, the exceptions here look carefully at grounding conductors that are not connected to an over current device shall be permitted to be sized at 100% of the sum of the continuous and non continous you can size grounding conductors which are neutral at the rating at the sum of the continuous plus non continuous. Second exception here that the sum of the non continuous lout and continuous flute. If the service entrance conductors terminating an over current device, where both the over current device and it's as simply are listed for operation at 100%. What does this even mean? Remember that when we said that we are having circuit breakers, that operate at a 100%, then you don't need to apply the 1.25 rule. You can simply say continuous plus non continuous plus without the 1.25 rule. Now, of course, these exceptions are related to this one here. Great. I hope you now understand this. What I'm going to do that I'm first going to apply this rule because I assume all of the breakers are 80% rated or they operate at 80% of the rated value. And also gana take this one, I max and apply the durting factors. And then compare between these two. However, I have to mention one important part regarding the servers intrans conin ductors. Now, when we are looking at loot, I can apply the demand factors. Remember the demand factors, which we talked about before, that when we take first receptacles ten k, multiply it by 100% and the rest by 40%, and all of these loot demand factors, you can apply it here. Now, don't worry, I'm going to give you two examples right now, which will explain how are we going to apply these rules from an example from the NEC itself. But before I do this, I would like to mention an exception in 230.29. This one may not seem to help a pba just, I would like to mention it. It says that if you have two to six circuit breaker inside your own panel. Then these can be used to provide the over loot protection to the panel itself. Now what does this mean? You can see that you will find that the sum of the ratings of circuit breaker or uses shall be permitted to exceed the ambasity of the service conductors. Provided the calculated loot does not exceed the ambasity of the service conductors. What does this mean? Let's look at this here. This example about this point in the NEC. You can see we have breakers, 60, 60, 808070. If you add all of these rating together, you will get 350 pair for the combined breakers. November here, we don't have any. We don't have any what. We don't have any kind of main circuit breaker, just provided directly. We are discussing that this will operate as a short cc protection and overload for the whole panel. So it says as if you have two to six circuit breaker, you can. These are allowable to have ambasity, gray or current rating greater than the service conductor. Now, this breaker is used to protect a calculated load for this panel of 305. This is the maximum load. Great, great. Now for this loot, I would like to select the main feeders. Now here, what are we going to do after 305 after applying the durating factors or 1.25 multiply by the load gives us 305 in the end. I would like 305 a a size. When we look for the 75 Celsius degree column, Why did we look for the 75? Because if you remember, greater than 100 M, you have to go to the 75 cell degree insulation rating. Hundred and five, let's go down here. 310 will be enough, which is equivalent two, 350 K CML, which is like this. This one has a rating of s hundred and ten, as you can see right now. This is enough for the calculated loot after applying some factors, Now, what you can see right now that the circuit breaker, 150 amp. However, the ambasity here surround the ten less than the breaker. It is allowable if these are two to six breakers here. This is just note on the side, which I have seen inside the NEC, so I would like to mention it just for this video. Now, let's go to the examples on the service intrasdtors. So look at here, we have a group of flutes, non continuous louts and continuous loot in one panel. These louts contains for a shop, receptacles. We have lighting, we have some kind of flouts outside sign circuit, several louts here. Okay. What I'm concerned with is that you can see inside this example here, take some mission non continuous loot, which is receptacles, considered as non continuous inside the loot. You can see it oli demand factor of 100% for the first ink and obight for the rest at 50%. Great. This is the commercial application. That's why you do this. Now, for lighting, for example, it applied here demand factor of one or considered it as a continuous loot, and the operating all the time, demand factor one, since it is a commercial application. If you remember from the demand factors which we discussed before. Okay, great. So we have non continuous loots after blowing demand factor and continuous loots after blowing demand factors, so the total is 1200200600200. So how I'm going to select the main breaker that supplies for all of these loots to the maximum demd. It will be 1.25 multiplied by continuous loot plus non continuous loots as we remember. Let's look at this. Here, non continuous loots. Here, 1.25 multiplied by the continuous loot, give that this value. Their submission is 32 450. This one is supplied by a single phase supply, 240 volt gives us 135. 135 pairs. Now, what I'm going to do that I would like here, 175, greater, greater n, 100 s, which is according to the code, I'm going to select the 75 celsus degree insulation. Let's do this, go to the 75 celsus degree, 105. Let's go the way down between these two values, one and 150, which means I'm going to select the next one, which is one, one. It will be one gage, As you can see, one gauge copper with a 75 celsius degree termination. Nice. This is the first one, if I apply the 1.25 rule. Now, do we have, what about the second rule in which we take this maximum loot without any 1.25 and divide by derating factor. In this example, we didn't do this. Why? Because there is no durting factors, there is nothing to date, there is no risk wave, for example, and we just apply this rule directly of the 1.25. The next example, I'm going to compare between these two between applying the 1.25 rule and the durting factor rule? L et's look at this example again from the EEC. Here we have a group of non continuous loads, mot loads, and we have continuous loads. Continuous loads here, as you can see, lighting, for example, some dryers. All of these are continuous loads and demand factor of one. This is the continuous loot, total continuous load. For non continuous, we have a group of receptacles, which are non continuous. Welder, some of them have different demand factor, as you can see, in the end when they add them together, we have this non continuous loots. Four motors, if you remember, if we would like to get the maximum loot. Four a motor 1.25, multiplied by largest motor, plus the rest. That is what it did. It simply took here. We have one, two, these two, and it took to 25% of the largest one. It's similar as 1.25 tib by this plus the other one, exactly the same, which gives us this value here. Since, you can see the moto louds and non continuous are combined for their maining calculations. We combine them together to have this value here. And the continuous loot is this one. Now, what are we going to do? First, we are going to apply the normal loot, which is 1.25 multiplied by continuous plus non continuous loot. So you can see what happens here here, continuous. Non continuous loot, and then after this, we added an additional 25 for the continuous loot. That is what they code did to give us in the end this value. Now, this is exactly similar as 1.25 multiplied by the continuous loot plus non continuous, exactly the same. So we have in the end the max loot demand loot is 100 and line, 700 v. Now, the loot here, which is used is actually a three phase loot. That's why the max current or the current, which you would like to get is simply S divided by root three, tied by V line to line. So the apparent power is 109, and line to line voltage. This example is 480 volt. So by doing this, we obtained a current rating as you can see here, 132. So the breaker itself is the next standard one, which is 150, this one is not corresponding to a standard size. That's why we went to the next level. Great. This is for the breaker and I believe that I mentioned this before. But we are talking about that able. Let's take this value and start designing based on it. L et's go like this. Let's take this stable. Number one. Some information are included regarding this one. It says that all distribution equipment termination are table 470 5 celsius degree connections. I'm going to use a 75 celsius degree cable or higher. For this application. Now in this example, the code forces you to use this type of insul two, which is this one here, which is a 90 csi degree rating. Now, what happens here? What does the example say? It say that we have two Two industrial buildings or two buildings. Now, these buildings, we have a raceway, like this. This way, take the cables needed for the first building and the cables going to the second building. Now, what are we going to do? The built two buildings have the exact configuration or the same exact lot. We want to design this feeder, which I am discussing right now. And say that here the steam raises the ambient temperure around the power raceway to as much as certify. There is an industrial location and this raceway goes close to this industrial location with steam. Whatever this application is, what I want to mention that we would like to design the conductor. First, I'm going to use the 1.25 rule, which is this one, which is already applied here when we obtain this over current protection. And then we obtain this current rating. Now, what do you want? I want to you this table, which is this one. But look carefully. We have a termination of 75 celsius degree terminations here. It means that despite using this cable, I must look for the pair from this one if you remember, because we are looking for the lowest temperature. I'm going to look for 132, go all the way down. 132 between these two, so I'm going to select one from here, one gauge from here. One gauge with a rating of 150 amp is suitable for this application. So 10 gauge, using a 75 ampacty column in this table here. Now, don't be confused. Table 300.15 B 16. This is in N E, 2017. This table is exactly as table 310.16 in 20 2023 NEC. They are the same, but just different number. This is the first method. We obtained one, three, two using and we obtain this wire gauge. Now, let's apply the second method. What is exactly the second method? Let me get back here. Second method that we take x loot or max and divide it by the durating or correction factors. Now, Max, where can we obtain x by simply taking the continuous and non continuous loads without any 1.25 and get the rated current. The correction factors here will be one correction factor for having temperature of 35 degree and another correction factor for having common raceway? Now, let me explain this as it is pretty important. Now, you said that I have two buildings like this, and we have one common raceway. Now, these two are three phase loots. Each one needs three phase and neutral. We have one, two, three, four, for the first building, and we have one, two, three, four, for the second building. Right. We have four conductors for the first building, three phase neutral, and four conductors for the second building. Now, the first question here is that how many c carrying conductors inside our raceway? We have three phase for the first one, three phase for the second one, and two neutral. Now, if the neutral considered as a current carrying conductor, yes, it's considered as current carrying conductor. Because here we assume that we have a lighting loot and this lout contain the florcent lamps, which means that we have triple harmonics, which means the neutral will be current carrying conductors. That's why we would say 332, means that we have eight conductors in the common raceway. We have a grouping effect or dating factor for having eight conductors inside the way and 35 cs degree dating. Let's do this. We would like to add non continuous and continuous loot together. Then we would like to apply the drating e factor. Let's look at this. Number one, we looked at these two, added them together, gives us, as you can see, continuous and non continuous, gives us 95 than and 500, which is this value here. Now, if you take this value and divide it by 480 volt and root three, you will get the max demand de current. And then you are going to take this one and divide it by the durting factor. Number one, we have 35 celsius degree. And remember, what cable are you using. Look carefully, Cable, we are using the 90 celsius degree cable. I'm going to look for here this column, go all the way down. It will be 0.96. I'm going to divide it by 0.96 durting factor for the temperature. Then how many one in the conduits, in the raceway, we said eight. I'm going to use 70% 0.7. As you can see here, what did the code, it simply took this submission first, and divided by the same dating factors, and then in the end, it divided by root 480 volt and root three, exactly the same, there is no difference between them. In the end, we have a larger ct one, seven, one pair. Now, we would like to see what kind of cable used for this. Let's see, let's zoom in like this and ask ourself. We are using nine celsus degree table. But remember. When I'm looking here and we have termination 75 ces degree. When I design the cable, I'm going to look here. Despite having 75 c degree termination. Why? Because the code tells me if you are applying pasit correction factors, you look at the same rating. Then you do another step which I explained before. Now let me show you what I'm going to do. On 71, go down here, 171 between these two, I'm going to select 2020 gauge. I'm going to select two gauge, which is based on the nine degree column, as you can see here. Because y? Because we applied the derating factors. Now, there is one more step, which is that we shake. We should take the rating here of this 20, o2o, which is 195, and multiply again by the rating factors, which is 0.7 and 0.96. If you do this, like this, let me do this for you. I think I have done this in the slides, but let me make sure it will be 13,010.04. It means that at this condition, this one will carry 101. Now let's compare it to the termination rating, which is 175. You can see it is less than 175, You can see it is acceptable to use this one. If it is greater, then you have to use the larger size. You can see two from this method of dating and one from the 1.15 continuous plus non continuous. Which one you are going to use? I'm going to use the larger size, which is the worst case since the could tells me to use the larger of the two values. As you can see here, the same step which I have just shown you right now. 143. NEC Ch.9 – Conduits Selection: Hey, everyone, and welcome back, we are going to now discuss the conduit selection. How can you select a conduit for your own application? This conduit part is found in Chapter nine Chapter nine NEC. Let's see what are we going to do? Number one, if you have a conduit, and there are many many types of conduits. And it contains conductors like this or cables. Then if you have number of conductors or cables. If it is one, then the fill ratio. The fill ratio is 53%. You are allowed to only fill 53% of the conduit itself, and the rest is empty. If you have two, then you are going to have 1%. If you are over two, then you can only fill 40% of this conduit. This is the Table one, Chapter nine, which gives you that general idea. However, there are two questions. How can I design a conduit for my own system? So the first thing that you need to know how many conductors were going inside this conduit, and by knowing how many conductors, you are going to use a table inside the MEC to tell you the equivalent cross sectional area. And by knowing this, you can also know the fill ratio, and also there are other tables. Anyway, I'm going to show you in this lesson or in the next one, but just to continue for now. And what I mean by this is the conduit, metallic conduit. That contains, you can see group of three conductors as you can see here. And remember, it doesn't matter if it is current carrying conductor or not carrying conductor. No current carrying conductor. All conductors are counted. Now, in the informative x C inside this NEC standard, you'll find some help of all tables regarding conduits. Like for example, for this conduit, let's look at here. Here are the electrical metallic tubing, EMT, like this one here. This one here is one type of conduits. Now we will find that not only table C one, you'll find like 13 other tables. What does this do? It gives you number one type of insulation that you are going to use for your own cable and the gauge that you are going to use for the cable. For example, if are you going to use 14 gauge wire with an insulation of the type, then how many conductors I can add. You can see that for this conduit, let's just magnify this. If you look at this table, trade size for conduit. You will see we have 3/8 inch, half inch, 3/4, 1 ", 1/4 inch, 1.5 inch, two inch. This is the size of the conduct which you are going to use. Now, let's say you are going to use 1 ", and you go down here. One in this column here. If you go down here, it say that if you have 1 " and 14 gauge of this type, you can add to 25 conductors inside it. This one is pretty straightforward. I gives you how many conductors you can add in any of these tubes. That is number one. You'll find other tables for many types of conductors, many types of conduits. There are other types of conductors is called the compact conductors. These conductors are like this from the electrical license renewal.com and this website gives you the concentric stranding, and this one is a compress stranding, and this one is a compact stranding, different types of cables. Now, you can see that for the compact here, you can see it has smaller diameter compared to this concentric stranding. You can see the voids here The gaps here are eliminated from the cable giving it smaller size for the same current treaty. This is what we call the combat combact cable. So conduit selection. Table one applies to complete conduit or tubing system, and not intended to apply to sections of conduit or tubing used to protect exposed wiring from physical damage. What does this mean, the table that we have seen, which is 40% or 30% or whatever. This one applies for a complete conduit from panel to panel, pox, to pox, whatever it is, cannot be applied to just sections. In sections, we are not going to do this. Like this one here, you can see this one is not a complete conduit, not complete tubing, just one part of a conduit and the rest is exposed to air. This one here you can see part, which is a conduit, and then we have our ws. This is not considered as a complete tubing. We don't apply this table. Now, equipment grounding or bonding inductors where in installed shall be included in calculating conduit tubing fields. Mean that any grounding or bonding conductors, which we are going to see later. Any of these are also included. I have said before that any conductors inside these conduits are counted toward the filling ratio or the filling ratio. And the actual dimensions of the equipment ground or bonding must be used in the calculation. Okay. Now, another node inside this chapter that we conduit or tubing nipples, having a maximum length not to exceed 600 millimeter to 24 inch so if you have the tubing neples or conduit small conduits that don't exceed 24 ", then The Naples here can be allowed to be filled to 60%, 60% of its total cross section instead of 30 or 40 or whatever inside the tables. When we have a conduit Nipples, we can actually fill up to 60% of its cross sectional area. Also another important part regarding these Naples, that adjustment factors for cables or correction factors do not apply to the conditions. Let me show. This one is conduit or a tubing nipple. This one here is a nipple, for example. You can see that a small small part, you can see wires going out and wires going in. But this one is having a small lens, less than 24 " or 600 millimeter. This one also for a panel. You can see wires, and we have our panel. This one is considered as conduit or tubing Nipples, less than 24 ", if it is less than 24 ". Now, what is the important part that in this, we can fill up to 60%. That is the first thing that we learned. Number two, if you have conductors flowing through these Naples, then you don't add any correction factor. For example, for adjustment factor of groping or the current carrying conductors, you don't apply this factor because it is very short. Great. I hope you learned till now what I would like to say. Now in Chapter nine, also we have area of conduct. Now we are going to say, Hey, how I'm going to get the areas? There are tables inside Chapter nine. Like this one here, dimensions of insulated conductor and fixtures wires. For all installations, for all gauge, you'll find the approximate area in inch square and mime square. Now, I'm focusing on inch square because our conduit is in inch. We are going to look for inches square and compare it to our conduit, and this is the rest of the table. 144. Examples on Conduit Selection: Now, let's have example on selection of conduits. Determine the minimum size, RMC, one of the conduits types, allow it for the ten mixed conductor sites and types as described as follows. So we have ten types of conductors with different size. I want to know the minimum conduit size, RMC required for these conductors. The example from the NECA that 12 gauge TW N, quantity four, eight gauge TW 36 gauge T three. Now, the first step that I'm going to do that, I need what? I need the cross sectional area of these cables, right. I'm going to look at these tables here. This one for the gauge, the insulation type and the approximate area. So number one, we have t let's see t N TN here, what kind of wire, it is a 12 gauge, 12 gauge. The 12 gauge one, What is its own size? Let's look carefully inch square. If I go all the way down, it will be 0.031. Now, let's magnify this. You can see DH to 12 gauge, 0.013 under this column of inch square. That is the first wire. We have also T eight gauge. If you look carefully here. We have TW, and where is eight gauge, T eight gauge, is not presented here. It is in another table. I'm going to get back to it. TW TW and six gauge. TW, six gauge is 0.726. Let's mark this 12. This one, two, and this one. Let's see this two, so 0.031 and 0.0 726. This one, I'm going to show you in the next slide here, t, t here with eight, T eight gauge. Now let me just zoom in. TW, eight gauge, approximately, this is the inch square, go down here, 0.2 0437. You can see 0.437. This is the equivalent area for each wire. Nice, take e one and the multiplier eight, four multiplied by this, three multiplied by this, this multiplied by this. To get the total cross sectional area. T the area is 0.4 021. Now, what are you going to do? This is the area that we need, We have ten conductors, leading to a FL ratio of 0.4, 40%. I need a conduit in which the conductors here fail only 40% of it. What I'm going to do that I'm going to take the area of these conductors and divide it by 0.4 in order to oversize it or find the size of the conduit. Let me do this. If you do this, you will get the size of the conduit or you can go to these tables, table four, and for RMC conduit or RMC, you'll find that here for over two wires, it gives you values directly for 40% over two wires, 60% in the nipples or the short one, 53% for one wire, two wires 31%. Now, 40% and what do you need? Well, actually, I need at least our 40% and fill this part, 0.4 021. If you go to the inches square, go all the way down here, you can see the neckstolarger value is zero point. 610, which is corresponding to one and a quarter of an inch. You can see one of a quarter of an inch is because the 40% of one of a quarter inch area is 0.61, which is enough for this one. That is what it means. If you look carefully here like here, for example, 40% of it is 0.61, 60% will be 0.916, as you can see here. This value is here representing the area of the in which you can add your own conductors. Okay? That is the first example. Now, let's see another one. Determine how many ten gauge TH and conductors permitted in a trate size 1/4 r MC. We need to know how many ten gauge wire. We first need to find the equivalent area of a ten gauge TH N. TN, which is this one, ten this one, its equivalent area is 0.02 1 ", this one. That is the first thing that we learn it. Now, how many can be fitted in a 1/4 RMC? Now I'm going to assume that we have more than two conductors, which means I'm going to use a fill ratio of 0.4. So I'm going to take this 1/0 0.4, as, why did I do this? Because you can see that over two wires, it has an area of 0.61 RM, 40% 0.6 is way greater than this. Then what I'm going to do, that I'm going to take 0.61, divided by 0.211, gives us 28.9 or 29 conductors. Now, I know that you will say, 28.9 or 29 conductors. Now, you can see this one if you divide them together 28.1 gives us exactly 40%. However the 29 gives us less than 40%? Now, the question is, does the code allow this small difference or not? This is the point because 29 means that the field ratio is greater than greater than 40%, which exceed what the code says. The could say is another important note here regarding this example, when calculating the size for a conduit or tubing, permitted for a single conductor, one conductor, shall be p so we can add an extra conductor. When the calculation, as you can see here, results in a decimal greater than equal 0.8. You can see that the decimal here is 0.9. If it is this decimal is 28.8 or greater, you can go to the next size, which is 29, which means you can allow more conductors. If it is, for example, 2.87, then you can't do this. You have to go to 28. That's what the code says regarding the dismal points. Now, there is another way. What is the way exactly? So we have the same conductor here, ten of one, sorry, ten gage TN and 1/4, same same type of conductors. Now we can use this table. If we look at this table here, let me show you. So T, which is this one, ten gage, which is this one. You can see ten gage, TN. Now we can look at what condo you are using, 1/4. So I'm going to say 1/4, which is this one here. And we have tn ten gauge. I can go like this, and you can go like this. You can see their intersection is 29. You can see the code says 29 exactly similar as what we obtain in the previous slide. This is another way if they are, if you have the same type of conductors, then you can use the tables here in order to look 1/1 and 1/4 inch, how many conductors can it take from this type? 145. Adding Cables to Panel Schedule: Hey, everyone. In this video, I'm going to discuss or continue the design for our components or the feeder and the branch circuits size. Here I'm using the IEC standard since I'm obtaining the feeder sizes in millimeter square, and if you are from the US, you already know how to design using the tables and the grating factors and the different examples that I have shown you before in the previous lessons. So now I'm going to design it based on the wire size. So how I'm going to do this number one. You are going to take, you can see that we designed circuit breakers, right? So I'm going to take the circuit breaker size and then apply the durting factors. So that the cable at least at least can withstand the circuit breaker atings itself 16:00 A.M. In addition to any durating factors that affect it. However, there is one important part here that I I don't know what conditions I have my own cables or how they are going to be installed, I can just assume a rating factor of 0.8. Or if I would like it exactly, I can go to the catalog here for El SWD, this is one which I'm going to use for the design. Then I can go all the way up here at page 19, starting from here, you'll find here, for example, the rating factors for BVC cables and XLBE at a different air temperature. The ambient temperature at different temperatures, you can see at 30 Celsius degrees, and at other temperatures, you can start dating your own cable. And if it is in ground, there are the ground temperature. If it is pared in the ground, here we have also the parile depths for durting factors, the depths of laying our cables, and also single core or a three core or if they are in a duct duct buried inside the ground. Here we have soil thermal resistivity, and remember before, we apply these factors before when we talked about the cables, if you remember. And also here for the different formations. And if you remember, we applied several examples on this. Now, I'm going to install these cables. Let me get back. All of these cables for the system is going to be installed in ducts. So all conduits, each one will have its own conduit. So I assume that, for example, for the single socket, for example, it will have the line neutral and Earth. So we have three conductors inside it. So we will start by designing the lighting circuits. So as you can see here, we have lighting. The circuit breaker is 10:00 A.M. So I'm going to go like this and say 10:00 A.M. Divided by durting factor. Now, the durting factor, you can look inside the tables for the catalog and then select the suitable durating factor according to the conditions. However, there are many offices or distribution that say divide by 0.8 as a durting factor for simplicity. So I need a cable that withstand 12 point 5:00 A.M. Pairs. And at the same time, I need my own cable or what conductors do I need three conductors, one for the phase, one for the line or the neutral, and one for the earth, right? So we need three conductors. And if you remember our rules here, if the cross section of the phase less than 35, then the neutral can be the same size. Here, for the Earth, if it is less than 16 millimeter, then the earth can be the same size. So I'm going to start applying this. So let's take a look at the suitable one so we can use three single core cables. If I go here to this catalog which you'll find in the files, you can see indoor wires, 450 slash 150 phase on the line to line. And I'm going to use, you can see here, BVC. This is an insulated BVC cable, which is enough for my own application. Now I'm going to install these wires inside conduits or pipes. So I'm going to go down here and you will see current rating in here and pipes. So I'm going to look at this column here. What current rating I would like 12.5. So if I go down here, 12.5, the nearest one is 15 millimeter square, as you can see here. So I'm going to use 15 millimeter square. Let me look 1.5, sorry, 1.5 millimeter square, 1.5. So it means that three single cores, one for phase, one for the neutral, and one for the friend or friend, which is the Earth. All of them are similar to each other. This is for lighting. So what about the sockets? The sockets here have a circuit breaker of 16 amp. So I'm going to take the 16 amp, divide by drating factor to am cable. So I'm going to go here. And I need to Winem so I'm going to go down here to wine, you'll find that we have 2.5 and three millimeter square. Both of them can be used. So I'm going to use that 2.5 millimeter square. So I'm going to go like this and say, here, 2.5, again, they will be the same size as you can see here. Select all of this and base. Now, what about the water heater exactly like them since it has the same size as a circuit breaker. Now, forget about concealed units. Okay, so Okay, let's start by these elements. So these elements, all of them have contain motors, right? So I'm not going to design based on the circuit breaker because the circuit breaker is designed based on the starting current. So how I'm going to design these? Number one, look at the fridge fridge here. Is 2000 a pair thousand volt and pair, divided by phase voltage, which is 220. It gives us 9.09, so I'm going to multiply by 1.25, same as when I select the circuit breaker and divided by that rating factor. So I need 14 amp cable. So if I go here, I'll find that the 14 amp cable, the nearest one is 1.5 millimeter square as well. So I'm going to go here and 1.5. Why? Because this one is based on or this one based on taking the full load current, multi plod by 1.25 so that we don't load it by more than 80%, and at the same time, we divide it by the rating factor to get the stable wire and you can see that the smallest one even is 1.5. Okay, so what about the other loads? Let's look at here. So leave the three phase for now, let's look at the single phase. We have this one dx 3.2 so I'm going to say 3,200 volta pair, divide it by 220. Give us this full loot current, and we are going to multiply by 1.25, and then the rating factor again. So it will need 22 point 7:00 A.M. Pairs, 22 point 7:00 A.M. Pairs. So I'm going to look here 22.7. It means I'm going to use a three millimeter square. So I'm going to go here for this type. I'm going to say three, like this. Do we have anything similar? Yes, this one is similar, so I'm going to say here, three like this. And then what do we have else? Do we have 3.2? This one is also 3.2. So I'm going to say this one is three like this. Let's continue. What do we have else 3.2? We have these exhaustive ends, 2.6. So let's see, 2.6, 2,600, divided by 220 single phase, 1.25 divided by any derating factors, gives us 18.5. So 18.5 means also 2.5 millimeter. Okay, so this one here, 2,600 is 2.5 as well. What about 520 multipla by 1.25 divided by the rating factor. It would be 15.9. So let's look at 15.9 again, 17 millimeter, which is two millimeter cable. So for this one, I can use two millimeter, as you can see here. Like this. So this one, this is the DX unit 3,600. Let me get it too. 3600/220 and by 1.25 and the derating factor. To 25.5 h I'm going to go here 25.5, which is this one here, four millimeter square. So I'm going to use this 14 millimeter square. Now, this one is three like this one. This one is 2.5 like this one, this one like this one. Okay, this one like this and this one like this one. So this one will be four millimeter square. Okay, what about the three phase loud? So what I'm going to do for three phase loud, they are exactly the same. So I'm gonna say 4,500 divide by root three, Okay, divided by 308 in order to get the phase current, multiplied by 1.25 and divided by the rating factor, which is 10.68, which is about 11:00 A.M. So 11 a, I'm gonna look here, which is the minimum is 1.5. So I'm going to say this one is 1.5, four, multiplied by 1.5, and this one is four multiplied by 1.5. Now, you may ask me what are these fours? The three phase and the ers. Okay? These are motors, Delta connected motors, or we don't need except the three phase and the Rs. That's why I add four multibli by 1.5. Now, what about the spare here? So let's look at the spare here is four breakers. So let's see here. So we have one, two, three, so we have three spare. So I'm going to choose 116, for example, and ten, and we can see that we can choose also, let's say, for example, 32. So we added here three spare components, four breakers as a breakers, okay? Okay, so what is the thing remaining now that we would like to design the main feeder? So we have here 120 5:00 A.M. Breaker. So I'm gonna say 125 amp breaker. Take it divided by 0.8 like this at the durting factor. So we need at least 156.25. Now, this one will be multi core, which is four core plus a reduced or four core with reduced neutral and Earth. So where are you going to get this? I'm going to go down here. Now in Big 88, you'll find here multi core with XL PE insulated BVC she's. Okay? Now, we need four core, three phase, neutral or reduced neutral and Earth. So I'm going to go down here. Four cours and reduced neutral, let's look at the current rating. We said that they are coming in duct, and we need at least 156. So 156, it means that we need this current rating, which is corresponding took 50 millimeter square. And the reduced neutral will be 25. I'm going to use 50 millimeter square like this, I'm going to say four or 153, multiply it by 50 plus one, multiplod by 25 plus one, multip by 25. Now, let's look at the errors first. Okay. Let's make it like this a little bit on this one. Okay, we can do another thing actually. I can simply take all of this and merge. Okay. Millimeter square. Okay, and go like this a little bit. Take this one like this. Okay, so we have three motor blood by 50, millimeter, the three phase, reduced neutral, as you can see in the catalog 35, 16, 50, 25, 25, the reduced neutral. Okay? And the errors. Let's look at the errors. You can see here for neutral, greater than 35. It will be reduced as I have just seen. If it is greater than 50, it will be also half of the phase. You can see that greater than 35, again, earthing will be half the cross section A of any of the three phase. That's why it is one multiblod by 25 millimeter square. Now, what about the rest? So we have here, this for the ars Copper BVC Earth now for the first one, Copper XL B, BVC a selected. As you can see, triple pull neutral plus protective rs or three phase neutral plus protective errors. 146. Single Line Diagram of Industrial Area and Riser of the Residential Building: In this video, we are going to discuss the riser of the building of the residential building and the single line diagram or SLD. First, we will discuss the riser of the building which we made the panel schedule about. As you remember that the panel schedule was nearly 24 kilovolt and bear. For our building, this is our building. It consists of ground floor. First floor, second floor, third and fourth floor. In each of these floors, we have two apartments, one, two, one, two, and so on. In the ground floor, we have also two apartment. Okay. Now at the entrance of the building, we have MDB or the main distribution board. This main distribution board or main distributor panel supplies power to all of this apartment. This main distribution board gets its power from the transformer. So we have here each of these apartments is 25 kilovolt and bear as an approximation. We calculated it in the panel schedule and found that it is nearly 24 kilovolt and beer. We assumed it is at 25 kilovolt B. You'll find here also in that description. We have here. This one is let's zoom in so you can see Mmhmm. Okay. Now you'll see here kilowatt hour, which means the meter of each apartment. Meter used to measure the consumption of electricity. This one is the circuit breaker. We assume that our apartment have a circuit breaker of 40 and bear. This 40 and bear can be a molded case circuit breaker or miture circuit breaker according to the short circuit. Now, we have here the cable of this apartment. We found in the panel schedule that the power of 25 kilowatt and bear, we will need a a cable of four multi blood by ten is three phase and neutral plus the Earth of course. Four multi blood by ten plus one, multi blood by six millimeter square. For each of these apartment, have the same specifications or the same values because we assumed here in our building that all of these apartments are identical to each other. Now you'll see here that for the main distribution board, we supply a large cable or the riser of the building which contains three phase, the neutral and the Earth for the four apartment. Here, for the four apartment here and another one for the four apartment here. We have here one, two, three, and four, we have 100 kilovolta and bear we will take this power and multiply it by 1.5 to get the maximum current or the load current and then multiply it by 1.25 and another 1.25. We get the current and then we choose our cable from the cable catalog which we provided in the previous video. Same here. But this one just the same cable because on the ground floor, the main distribution board is on the ground floor and also these two apartment in the same level. We'll use the same cable here, which is format blood by ten. This is what's called the riser of the building. I will provide you with this file on our drive so you can download it any time. Now, let's see what is the single line diagram. This is what's called a single line diagram. We assume that we have a large industrial area. This area consists of number one residential building. This is a cheap residential building. This one is luxury or expensive residential area. This one is an administration building. This one is factory, the lighting of the factory, and then is a group of motors in the same factory. We have here four boards. This one for the residential building, we assume it is a 50 kilovolt amber after doing the panel schedule. This one is the main distribution board for the residential building number two. 150 kilovolt and bear, where did we get this value? We simply go to the riser. We know we have one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, and ten, which means that we have a 250 kilovolt and bear as the total load of our residential building and we can assume diversity factor as we said before, from 0.6 to 0.7 if we multiply by 0.6, we will get 150 kilovolt bear. The hundred and 50 kilovolt and bear is this one. The same for the residential building number one, diversity factor of 0.6 to 0.7, the administration building is the same. The factory, we assume that it has a diversity factor of one. Since nearly all of the loads are connected together and for the commercial, as we said before in the PowerPoint slides, we said it is from 0.8 to 0.9. Now, we have here the load for the essential one, two, administration, factory lighting and sockets. This one for the machines or the motor, the induction motors in our factory. This is the first step. Second step, we will choose our cables. We have a 50 kilovolta and bear so we need to choose the cable. We simply get the 50 kilovolt and bere and multiply it by 1.5. Again, multiply by 1.25 and another 1.25 as we did before in the panel schedule. Then we choose our cable and then also we choose our circuit break. Now let's see the cables or the catalog and how to select them. Again, just for yourself. Now we have our cable here and I would like to find the values of the circuit breakers and the value of the cables. So first, let's see the 50 kilovolt and bear. So we'll see here 50, multiplied by 1.25 multiplied by 1.5 to get the value of the circuit breaker, which is the nearest one is 100. Where did I found this value? From here. We have the miniature circuit breaker, ten, 16, 20, and so on. So the afternne three is 100 and bear. And you will choose a miniature or molded case. I will choose molded case to provide higher short circuit level. Now for the cable, multiplo by 1.25 and equal, it will be 117. Let's see the cross section required. 117, the inest one is 35 plus 16. This one can withstand 120, 35 plus 16. Car and BBC and BBC. We use in the distribution area, we use car. But for the high voltage and medium due to large distance, we will use aluminium. Because the aluminum is cheaper than car, but it has a lower conductivity than car and higher resistivity. We'll use the aluminium large distance like high voltage or the medium voltage. We use a car in the distribution part. Now for the 150, 150, multiplied by 1.5, to get the maximum loot current, it will be 225 multiplied by 1.25 to get the circuit breaker, it will be 281 and the nearest the value here, 281. The next one value is 400 ambar. We'll choose a circuit breaker, molded case circuit breaker, 400 and bear. Now for the cable, we will multiply another by 1.25 as a dating factor. 351. 351, let's see what cable can withstand hundred 51. The nearest one here, fifth hundred 45 and 351. The nearest value here we will choose 240 plus 120. It is very near to this value. Four, 240 plus 120. Now for the third one in the administration building, 500, multiplied by 1.5 to get the maximum current 1.25 to get the safety factor to get the circuit breaker, 937 and the nearest one is, of course, air circuit breaker with 1,000. Okay. So 1,000 air circuit break. Now for the cable, 1.25 equal. We need 171 and bear. What we can do here, let's see the cable, you will find here the maximum value here is 500 and can withstand 499. What we can do, we can see this value and divide it by, for example, three. Okay? You will see a z 190 and bear. We can get three of zero hundred plus 150, three of a zero hundred plus 150. Or you can design another thing. Now for the and this one, I don't know where did this come. This one is for the factory. Factory is 50 25 kilovolt and bear multiplied by 100. 1.5 for the loud current, 1.25 safety factor. 46.875 for the circuit breaker. The nearest value is, of course, 50, molded case or miniature, 15. Now, another 1.25. We will get 58.5 for the cable. Let's see what can withstand 58. This can withstand 120. Let's go back. Mm hmm. We need 58. 58 can be standard by 60 and bare by a ten millimeter square, ten millimeter square plus one Mtblad by six. Okay. Now for the motors, now we need to find factory, the circuit breaker, and the value of the cable. Remember that our motors here are connected in Delta connection, not like the factory or any other parties like administration or residential building. All of the, the other loads are connected in star connection with a neutral. But this one since we have induction machines, they are connected in Delta connection. In order to find the current, we know that the current is equal to S over three multiplied by V O since we are talking about the line current, then it will be equal to 297/1 0.7 3/380, then equal and multipli by 1,000. So the required current or the load current is 451.77. Now for the circuit breaker here, the situation is different. Why? Because you have induction moton. The induction motors have starting current. So I just multiply this by 1.25, then the circuit breaker during the starting of the motors, the circuit breaker will turn off or cut the circuit. In order to bus this, we will just multiply the loot current by a factor called 2.5. Why? Because we have here a starting current. We have starting currents in the induction machines. This will be equal 1129. This is the current required by the circuit breaker. Let's see the values of circuit breaker, which is nearly 1,600, 1,200 1250. 1,000 1250 and at the same time, we will choose here air circuit break, air circuit breaker. Now we found our circuit breaker. Now for cable, we will just not define it by the starting current, but we will define it by of course, normal load. This is the load current and we will do the same as before, 1.25 multiplied by one point, 25 again. We need a cable of 705, 705. Let's see. 705, we don't have any of them. Let's divide it by two. So we can use two of 242 of 240 cover and of course, PVC and another PVC for the insulation. Now we choose different. Here's the different values of the circuit breaker, the different values of the cables. Now we would like to find the value of the transformer required. How we can get the value of the transformer, we will just sum the total loads. Mm hmm, 297 plus 25 plus 500 plus 150 plus 50 kilovolt beer, and then equal. We'll have here 1022. This is a total connected loads. Now all of these loads are not working together, so we'll assume a diversity factor between them. The diversity is multiblod by 0.8. So our connected load is 817.6. We need a transformer to withstand this value and remember that since we are using here an oil transformer, not dry transformer, we are using here oil. Therefore, what does it mean? It means that our transformer must be loaded by 80%. In order to do this, we will have a transformer of 1,000 kilovolta beer or one mega volta and bear. If we have a transformer, 1,000 kilovolta and bear, Mm hmm. And we have a load of 817. Okay, so 817. Divided by 1,000. Then the loading of the transformer will be equal to 81% or 82% which is acceptable for the transformer. We choose our transformer again by summing all of these loads and multiplying by demand factor or a diversity factor, and we have finally 817 and then we will choose the highest or the higher value of transformer and at the same time, the loading of the transformer does not exceed 80%, except by small value. Now we'll see here that we have here a pass bar. This pass bar can withstand 1,600 and bear. Where did we get this value? I will tell you now. We have all of these loads and the demand is like this. We need to find the main circuit breaker for all of this system after the transformer. We'll go to 817.6 and multiplied by 1.25. Again, by 1.5. The nearest value to 1533 is 1,600 and air circuit break. 1,600 and air circuit break. This is the first step. Second step, we need to find the cables. Multiply this by 1.25 again. We need a cable to extend 1116. We can divide this by four it will give us four cable, which you can withstand for 179. We need the value of a current for 179, we choose 19 on 6.25, we will divide it by 499 we need four cables of the 500. We'll choose four cables of the 500. Let's add this four cables of the 500. Now for the half of the cable, 240 240. We have here for the phases and the three phase and the neutral and one for the ears. We said before that we choose the neutral the same as the phases because we have large loads, large and unbalanced loads. These loads are unbalanced on the three phase. So choose our transformer Delta since our grid is Delta connection to eliminate the harmonics and we don't need, of course, the neutral and here we connect as a star with a neutral because we need here a three phase or a star connection plus the neutral. Now in this video, we selected all of this value and we discussed also the riser of the building. Now we need to discuss. In the next video, of course, the tap, how to draw this in E tap and identify the voltage drop and the short circuit in our system. 147. Voltage Drop In Low Voltage Distribution System And Manual Calculations: Hi, everyone. In this video, we would like to discuss Z voltage. A drop calculation inside our power system. So what is the voltage drop vaulters, Rob? Simply It means that if we have a supply like this 1 120 evolved a scene. This is our import supply voltage. And we have a wire connecting between this supply and our loot. So between our supply and our load, there is a conductor or a cable. This K will have a specific resistance and specific reactions. So this means that this resistance or this inductive will cause a voltage drop. So if we have an input voltage 120 volts, a C Z vaulted, which reaches our load is 112 World A see why the difference between 121 112 is considered as a voltage drop inside our sect. So we have a difference off aid vault is this A vault is a vaulters drop due to the presence off our cable as we remember that the voltage drop in any circuit from the circuits. If you don't understand, what is the electric circuits or anything about the literal circuits. You can inject my own course for electric circuits, so the voltage drop across any conductor is equal to the current. Multiplied by that that is the impedance off our conductor or that equal to the square. Root off our square that resistance square bluffs, ecstasy, square, ecstasy, excel, not ecstasy. Exhale L. A Square is the reactors off due to the presence off induct ins off the conductor. So the vault's trump having you toe the presence off that off the wire. So in our power system, we would like toa calculate the vaults trope. So on our course, we discussed how toe calculate using Z E tab program. In this video, we would like to discuss how to do this but using the manual calculations. So before we start going to two z calculation, part Win would like to understand what is the effect off having a ball to drop inside our system? Number 14 electric motors. Remember that from our course for electric and machines, that's the torque is directly proportional to the square off the supply voltage. So you see that supply was 120 world, but the voltage Richard toe Z load is 112. So we have years. A torque is reduced by square, off the value due to the presence off all troop. So the reduction in the voltage will cause that starting talk Toby decreased the torque off the motor. Toby decreased maximum torque will be decreased. All of this will affect our at moat. Now another thing that four lambs it will that reasons off the vault drop will cause the light intensity or Z beam becomes weaker. Also in the electronic against our very sense stuffed ozy voltage variations. So the vault's trouble will affect them. Very, very. Hi. Now, as an example, what is the value off the accepted vulture drop? So if we have a low voltage system taking, it's a power from the public utility utility, okay? Or the public low voltage distribution system. And if we have a low voltage instal installation, but it is supplied from a private low voltage supply. So I fought waas from a low voltage distribution system, or itwas from a low vote private supply, my own supply, a generator, for example. Then if I if you are using it for lighting, then The accepted value is if you are taking from the public utilities and accepted values 3%. If we have a private level supplies in accepted value 6%. Now, if we are talking about a general use or a general usage in our system, then if we are taking from public utility then we will have ah, 5% Walters drop only. But if we have from our private supplies and it is 8% so generally wouldn't we're talking about our system. If we have Z system 5% we already take the wardrobe as a 5% from our supply. Okay, we usually when you are talking about eater, for example, we would like to make the votes drop less than 5%. Now as an example, what is the exceptions tothis i e. C. Room that previous values are according tothe e i e. C 60 64-5 dollars 52 stunt. So what is the exceptions to this rule? Number one. A greater whole strobe may be accepted for number one electric motors during the starting period. For us, our electrical equipment having high in rush current such as the transformers, have high and rush current. So is this can cause higher votes drop, but it can be accepted. Why? Because it is for a very small time but provided that in most cases that the voltage variations should remain in the limits satisfied in the relevant equipment standard. So what does it mean? It means that our equipment should have a specific under voltage and specific over voltage . Okay, so we have a specific limit, according to Z, that a sheet or according to our equipment, so this limits would not be exceeded. Okay, according to Z equipment itself, now is the following. A temporary conditions are excluded from the votes rob restrictions. So what is the example of this? Number one if we have a vault is transient. If there is an increase or over voltage or under vaulted uto switching as an example. If we are adding glued, then devoted will be reduced the four and specific time or if we are removing glowed so the voltage will express over voltage. All of this are considered as a vaults transience which are just a for a few moments or a very small time. So this values are accepted from our I e c standard also the voters variation you toes the abnormal operation. Okay, You toe any abnormal conditions in our persist Now, how to calculate divorces rope in our system simply the boss's office The cable is calculated from by obtaining a value called these evos drop percentage or votes Trouble from our catalogue This is found from the cable itself You're finds that the cable was drop is equal to many vault Baehr and Baehr berm it Okay, so we can take the type of the cable then goto our catalogue and get Is this value for the voltage drop as well See now that percentage off divorces rob what she cannot exceed 5% is equal to the actual value The actual voter of value in involved over the base voltage for example, If we are talking around a single face system then it will be for my own country 220 volt as an example If it is as three face system then it will be the lyinto line Voltage, which is 180 vaulter for my own country multiplied by hundreds will give us a certain percentage This percentage representing Z voltage drop inside our system which you cannot exceed 5% if you are taking the power from our public utility. Now let's have an example. If we have supply vaulter like this one frequency called 50 artists voltage equal 400 vault . And we have here are motor three phase motor off a 75 horsepower and we have a cable connecting between this supply and the small. Remember that Z 5% is from the supply. Does the load OK, so if we have a passport having other loads then we should have is evil or calculated was dropped from his e supply itself Does the load OK, so if we have another cable, then we will take it in consideration. Now as an example, if we have a passport like this and we have another load here, another one here, then the vultures rope we have here our supply and here a cable and on other cable here. So we have to calculate the balls drop here Blust divorce rob here and adds them together to get the total votes drop which should not exceed 5%. So is the vase drop is from the supply to our looked OK. Now we will have a simple example if we have a supply and a loot. And between them. This cable, which is three, multiplied by 70 plus one month. The blood by certified Okay, three face plus Z neutral. Three face off a 70 millimeters square and the neutral 35 millimeters square. The conductor Time Discover and Theo Insulation, BBC and the She's is also BBC. The lens off this cable is 120 meters. So what, you are going to go first? We have a cable off three multiplied by 70 plus one month the blood by 35. So we should go toe the catalogue and they get the ball to drop off this scale. So let's goto the cattle look now as an example, we have this cattle of four else with the cables. We would like to get the value off the voltage drop. So will goto the catalogue all's rosy catalogue and search for divorce trope. Okay, so we have here of also dropped Let's zoom in so Voss rubber for a single call levels. Here we have a three phase or a multicourse three months. Three core or multi core plus neutral. So let's search for this one. Miles de corps. Okay, so this one is the multicourse Now is the montecor we have here at BBC installation and be vz BBC. She's across Long kit Police Selene, and we have here another one. But what is the difference between them? Okay, let's see what is the difference? You'll find that this one discover conductor and this one is aluminum conductor. So we said that we have a copper conductor off 35. Let's get back. We have a value off 70. Okay, 70. So let's to get back. Okay, so we have 70 cross sectional area 70. So for BBC inspiration, be busy. She's vulture. Drop is equal to 2.5 to 4. So the vault's drop value from the catalogue or 40.5 to 4. So now simply you have got to Z. You went to toes, depart for the catalogue off the wall, strope and you take the cross section 80 off 70 and you know a discover BBC BBC. So we will find that divorce room is open 5 to 4 and mainly vault. Baehr and Baehr permit. You will find that this value is written inside the catalog, as you have seen Now, in order to convert is this waltz drop toe Z actual value. Then we will multiply open 5 to 4 by temper. Negative three to convert. Dizzy mainly vault toe walked. Okay, So this part representing Izzy a voltage. Okay, now this is the voltage, but it is bare. Impair their meter. So in order to convert it to vault only we will multiply by the current and the multiply by Zealand's so lenses given as 120 meter. And this is a story fear system now is the I rated how to calculate the irate. The I rated is the current which absorbed by our lord, which is 75 horsepower. So how to calculate this? Remember that from our Corso said that Z current rated in case off a three face system is equal to 1.5 months blood by kilovolt and bear or 1.5 multiplied by horsepower. Okay, we say that we have said that inside our courses that the kilovolt ampere is nearly equal to with the horsepower. So 1.5 month blood by 75 will give us 112.5 and their 75 is the horse power. Now, if you don't understand where we go to the 1.5, let's remind you now, remember, that is the kilovolt and bear. We said that Z one horsepower is equal toe. How many? What? They photo seven for six wattage. Okay, so each one more support equal to this value off wattage. Now, if I would like to convert Izzy Power or the active power, which is 746 what do the value off Z kilovolt? I'm there. So we divide by power Fact. So the power factor assumed in our system is 0.8 divided by point it, you'll find that it's equal mine city 2.5, which is nearly equal toe one okay, or unity. So we say that each horsepower is nearly equal toe one kilovolt ampere. So that is the first thing Second thing would like toe get Z current. Remember that the current is equal toe s Okay, let's write it now. Remember that the current is equal to Z current from our system senses. This is a star connected motor Since the current is equal toe s over three multiplied by beef is okay or wrote Three month obliged by and we face or a rotisserie multiplied by relying tow line. Okay, Both of them are correct. Now, if we have our supply, here are supply. Here is 400 volt or 180 volts. Is that the Francis for Walter's drop? So we assume that here that motor reaches is 780 vote as a lying toe line. Voltage off course. So we have city motto Blood by the face. Now, this three phase will be equal to 220 volt. Okay, we face, but the line is 180 volt. Now s here is given ask you of all time beer. So in order to replace is this s which is involved on bear us in kilovolt on birth. And we will have to most of light here by Tim Parsing. Okay, so we can both 75 kilovolt and their motto Blood by temporal three. Okay. To give us the vaulted and bear. So temper city over city multiplied by 220 will give us nearly 1.5. Okay, which is this value? So what did we obtain this value? Remember that the current is equal to with the apparent power s over three months, the blood by the face or roots remarked the blood by relying tow line. So V phase is 220 or line to line 380 volt. Okay, remember that 400 is a supply and devoted reaching A to Z motor is 780 vault. So that division off Tempo city over three Monta blood by 220. Give us 1.5, which is this fact? Now we have our current and we have our lens, which is 120 meters. And we have the balls drop value 0.5 to 4, multiplied by timber. See, so we can get divorced. Rob is 7.74 vote Okay, is this is the voltage drop in our system here. Now, in order to get the value as a percent sensitivities as three phase load isn't that percentage balls drop is equal to 7.74 over the 780 vault, which is the line to line voltage multiplied by hunted, give us 1.861% Okay. Is this percentage representing busy vaults drop in our system here from this supply toe here. Okay, so you will find that 780 volt here. We assumed it is the vault in which reaches e moat. Okay, if you take for hundreds and it will give us a lower voices drop now how we can solve the problem off divorce rope. Remember that the resistance off the conductor or the cable is equal to roll or the resistive ity motto. Blood by silence over the area. So number one weekend in trees. The cross sectional area. If we increase the cross sectional area off, the cable isn't the resistance will be lower. Therefore, the voltage drop will be lower. This is the first solution which we always do. Second solution. Increasing number of parallel cables Increasing number off parent cables means that the torta equivalent resistance will be reduced. So if we have one cable like this, offer resistance R and we added on other cable imperil with another resistance. Goldar So the submission off the total resistance will give us our over two. We have a two para resistance. That sort of solution. Is that a reduction off the distance so we can reduce the distance from the supply to zeroed if we can. This will cause the daughter resistance, Toby reduced and in doctors to reduced, which in the end will cause the total votes dropped to be reduced. But usually is that the solutions are increasing Zach Cross sectional area. Then, if we exceed, or Richard the maximum cross sectional area, then we will choose to cables off lower cross sectional area, which is the end of radios. That oughta resistance, which will reduce the voltage drop. The last defector is the perfecter correction. By adding capacitor banks, we can supply a Q or reactive power to our system so it will reduce the theme the X or Z reactors off course, or the effect off the inductions and in the end, will improve our voltage a profile. So in this video we discussed is the voltage drop. It's effective how to calculate it and the solution off the vulture drop 148. Short Circuit In Low Voltage Distribution System And Manual Calculations : Hi, everyone. In this video, we would like toa understand dizzy short circuit analysis using the Manuel calculation. So what is a short circuit means? So if we have a single line diagram like this one, we have here our supply supplying power toe a passport through a different circuit breakers this circuit breaker off course, then this bus bar will supply some roads. One of them is this one which is having another circuit breaker. This one have another circuit breaker, this one having another circuit breaker supplying a pass bar. And this was part supplying two loads with their own circuit breaker. So of course, circuit breakers are used for protection. So what is a short circuit mean? If we have our supply voltage E, which is 400 volt and we have, for example, here and equivalent set. Okay, they said, which is connecting from the supply toe, This passport is it representing, for example, the cable and dizzy resistance and in doctors off the circuit breaker so that the year representing Izzy's at off circuit breaker Blust visit off the cable. Now, if assault circuit Okay, what does a short time circuit means? It means that if this point this bus bar as an example is connected to the ground. Ah, fault. OK, jazz a single line toe ground the fault line. Tow line, toe ground fault three lines together or cell lines to ground. All right, if all of this are considered as false this inside our power system. So if we have a faulty years in instead of the current going this rosy passport is in supplying our loads, No, all of the current will fit our fault. Okay, Current going through circuit breakers in those e four and the no current will bus here is this current is very high end is considered as a short circuit current. If we did not clear this fault or removes the open circuit or clear this fault off the short circuit, all of our passports are goingto be burning and fire will occur and very very problems are going toe care to our parole system because off course is that short circuit current is very high in kilo and bear, which you can damage Our passports can cause fire in transformers such as all transformer having electric arcs and so on. Social circuit is a very very bad phenomena inside our poor system. So your circuit breakers, in order to clear this short circuit for So this current is equal toe the supply voltage overseas that okay, supply voltage as a phase voltage overseas. That which is from the supply toe the a point off fault. Now, another example. If we have ah, fault King here, for example, at this point, then the that will be from the supply going here that off the BuSpar, then does it off this cable. Okay, so the search short circuit will be lower. So as we go away from our supply, short circuit current decreases. Why do toe the increase inside that said Orza, impedance. As we approach closed toe, the supply is the short circuit current will start to increase. Now, why do we do a short circuit analysis in order to select number one circuit breakers which you can withstand this huge short circuit current and we should select US passport, which again with stand for a few moments off course, this high short circuit current and this passport and so on. So this passport will so stand Ah, high sorts of current. But this one is lower. Why? Because that distance from the sublight were is higher and more impedance are found now how we can get the short circuit current. So in order to get the short circuit the current we need the voltage over these That okay Ah vaulters over the equivalent. So the industry faced system you'll find as a short circuit current is equal to the voltage over that as the voltage as a phase voltage over that. Or is the voltage as, ah, lying toe line, voltage or face to face voltages Line to line. Overrode three. This which is lying toe line off Route three is equivalent toe really face. Okay, so the short circuit current is equal toe V phase over that daughter where that the total is the square root off are square or the total resistance inside our circuit blesses a total inductions are second from the point off supply. So the point off for so we have in tow some all of the resistance and all of the actors in our system. Now that most important thing is that number one we need to understand what is the resistance and or the what is the impedance off the network itself is the equivalent resistance and induct ins. What is the equivalent Resistance and the inductions off our circuit breaker. And what is the equivalent of our passports? The cables, all transformers? All of this we need to understand. Okay, in orderto get an accurate result. So starting from our grid or zee network is the impedance off the network having the following simplifications Number one if our network having a short circuit kilovolt and bear off 250 to 150,000 kilovolt and bear, which is at 250 Mega vault and bear and 500 ming of Alta and bear. In this case, we will have our short circuit or the resistance equivalent and ex equivalent will be for these values. OK, as we remember that in Etem who are going to use these values inside Z Thebe program itself , you will find that inside the program it requested the X over our issue. Okay, so we can use this values in order to put it inside the program. Now what is a short circuit kilovolt and they're mean. It is equal toe road three multiplied boy V line to line lying to Ryan. Voltage multiplied by Z are short circuit. Okay, so the power or the s or the apparent war produced by a short circuit current is equal toe this value OK? Or this value. Now you will find that said, or disease that the base which you are saying or the off this network in order to get it your funds that that is equal toe every square over being. So what is the square? The square assembly is the faced off. A is no load low voltage or the face to face voltage. Okay. Or lying Toe line. Voltage. Relying tow line. Okay. And the be here is representing. Izzy s a short circuit. Okay, this is the apparent short circuit power. A parent short circuit power. It's called the B in orderto prevent. Is that confusion? But this s is representing Izzy three phase. I've all three for a short circuit fault delivered, expressed in kilovolt ampere. This is representing is the power equivalent to this short circuit current now in order to Brooks assembly, you know that's the s or the apparent power is equal toe V square over that three V square over that where V is the phase voltage or we can say that it is equal to the square over sent when we are talking about what we as a lying toe lion Voltage. Okay, so we are talking here about lying toe line, so it will be the square over. That now is a three facial circuit fault is expressed in Q on Bare Z are short circuit or in mega volt amber, as you see here. 250 mega volt amber. So it is supplied by the Power Supply Authority. You don't assume this values or you don't adjusted the Does some calculations for this value? No. You take this values from the utility itself. Okay, You asked for this information and you can find also the equivalent impedance also from them. Okay, Now, as an example, if we have an 11 kilovolts network, then the S equivalent orgy Short circuit power. It's 500 mega volt and bear. If we have 20 talking evolved network is in, it will be 750. Mega vault and beer. Now we said about the impedance off the network. Now for the transformer, we can get those It very somebody. How? Remember that the event we said that it is the Reliant Line. Oversee power. Reliant Line square over the s apparent. Okay, this representing in a power system. It's called Z Zed. The base. Okay, is the based impedance. Okay, so this is a quantity inside the power system, okay? From the bay's values, such as the S, a vase or dubious. A parent power V base, that is voltage. All of these values. I discussed it in my own course. Four symmetrical faults. So we multiplies Is value boy the that percentage or the short circuit impedance a voltage off the transformers. This value is found from the data sheet off the transformer. You'll find NZ data sheet for the transform money or fine, this value as a 4% for example, Okay. Or 5% or five or 6% and so on. So this value is obtained from the data sheet for the transformer itself. You take this value and what it by 100 the multiplied by Is that debates which is relying Tolan Square over Z power or the apparent power, which is that rating off the transformer? Okay, Is the apparent power s which is the rating off transform. So you get the head off the transformer. Now we need to get that resistance and the reactors so the resistance can be also obtained from the data sheet For the transformer, you will find that the Kabul losses inside the transformer is equal to three. Since you are talking about a three face system multiplied by Z current square which is a full load current nominal flute, current martyr, blood by the resistance. So this power can be on 10 from the data sheet and dizzy current. It can be obtained also from the data sheet or it can be equal to the S or the apparent power over Siri motto. Blood by the face. So as a street fair system. Okay, very somebody getting dizzy for low current so you can get that resistance from here and you obtained already size it off the transformer. So the X will be the square root off the square minus are transformer square so we can get the X, and we can get is er now as an example for veterans former impedance your funds that if we have a transformer, kilovolt and bare 50 100. And so on. 500 kilovolt and bear will find that Z is that the percentage off it is 4% girlfriends. That, he said, is simply 4% 4.556 and so on. So as a rating increases your funds, that is that the percentage increase you will find also that in the data sheet, Z are equivalent and ex equivalent for each time and disease it daughter. Okay, this is off course for the oil and Mercer transformer. And this for the cast arisen. Transform. Okay, this is depending on the type off the transformer, and it's a kilo vault and bear. Now, what is the impedance off the circuit breaker and the passport? So in low one circuit, the MBI agents off the circuit breaker upstream off the fault allocation, which means that it is a near Tosi supply must be taken toe account. The reactors value is assumed the 1.15 many own bears beer, each circuit breaker. Why is the resistance off? It is neglected. So we have an X equal to 1.15 many own for each circuit breaker in our pass. Now, the possible resistance is also neglected. So that's the impedance is practically all reactive. So it is excess him as the circuit breaker, and its value is equal to 0.50 million pairs meter off the passport, okay. And doubling the spacing between the passport increases every act and supply about 10%. So in the end, you will find that this value is 1.50 million home and appoint 30 million is a very small venue off resistance. Okay. Very small value. Very. For someone. Value cumber, the tool that resistance and the impedance off our cable and our transformer. Okay, so you will find that usually instead of just getting them into our calculation, we neglect Izzy prosper impedance and circuit breaker impedance. Okay, because you are very small. Remember that neglecting impedance inside our circuit provide this more safety. Why? Because the current remember that the short circuit current is equal toe V We over that. So as we decree, is that Zeb? Okay. As we decrease that, then then we assume ah, higher short circuit current. So you provide more safety to our equipment so that cable impedance is given as that resistance is equal toe roll over as the area okay, or S, which is a cross section of any off the conductor. Zero is the resistive itI and assumed as 22.5 men leave home a millimetre square per meter . So silence here is in meter. The cross section area is in millimeters square and dizzy value over the resistance or tent is in mainly home. Okay for cover. It will be a lower resistive it off 22.5 and aluminium off certain. Six, mainly on Zealand's off. The conductor is in meter cross section in millimetre Square. Okay, so we can get that resistance assembly now. 4 30 Actimates your funds That it can be obtained from the manufacturers, for example, is a cross section ity off less than 50 millimeters. Square reactions can be ignored, but in the absence off information we usually use or going toe it mentally or member meter , this is eerie. Actimates Gary Acton's or 0.8 million number meter for 50 Hurtis system and all point online. Six. Mainly Orme Burr meter for 60 yards system. So in the end is the X is equal toe open toe it many own bear meat also multiplied by Zealand's for 50 earth system and open toe online six mainly on bare meter for 60 hertz system. Now remember that these values are for that Serena faced system. So for that three for system we use or point or eight mainly on bare meter. But for a single first system will use or pointed wife usually is a circuit breakers in a torque and prosper impedance are neglected. Neglecting it means I are short circuit current, which means more safety and design. So now let's have an example on the manual calculation off the short circuit. So, as an example, we would like toe get the short circuit on the passport. Okay, Is this WASP or if it has a short circuit, I would like to find its event. Okay, short circuit here. So we have here our grid, which have specific impedance, is that R and X, and we have an old transformer off 500 killed. Walt, I'm bear 2020 to kill evolved over 400 vault as that. The percentage is four and the passport is in a circuit breaker. Is then Z original passport. This passport, of course, is in some cases instead off using a world so we can use past bars in order to connect. Okay, so how we can does this first we need toe. I neglect is the send off the circuit breaker circuit breaker is the upstream network this network and bus bar impedance. So all of this Syrian business are very small Come Bertuzzi transformer. So their value will not affect entirely our short circuit analysis. So we are going toe get only these that off the old transformer. So from that a sheet or data sheet having the following off the transformer number one, Aziz, that the percentage off the all transformer is 4% and 500 kilovolt and they're all transformer. Having a WC WC is considered as a couple loss wattage. Okay, couple losses inside Z transform or 55.5 kill What now? We need toe identifies the X and disease resistance. So if we need a short circuit at a media be or them in distribution panel. So these it off the transformer, as you'll remember, is that the percentage which is four off 100 this is four, okay. And the multiplied by said the base is that the base is relying Tow line, line to line Voltage, which is 400 vaulter. Since we are talking about short circuit in the low voltage decide Okay, Here and dizzy s is the apparent power off the transform. Okay, which is at 500 kilovolt and bear 500 kilovolt ampere. So we have all of our components. Now we can get that that the transformer is equal toe. Well, we're going to eight million. Ok, remember that as you said before that the circuit breaker of US 1.5 million home. So it is a very small value can be neglected. Now we can get that resistance off. The transformer remembers that the resistance of from the gallows were discussed is the couple losses which is 5.5 Kill What? This value, Mata Blood by temple 35.5 kilo. Multiply by timber three Over three months, the blood buys a full load. Current followed. Current is simply equal toe s or the apparent power over three multiplied by V face. Okay, where is the S separate? Boris? Why Contra kilovolt and bear the defense assembly. Quito 400 volt over route three. Okay, so we can get the current and we have the couple losses. Then we can get that resistance off the transformer, which is 3.52 Medley on. This is an ultimate our own, but mentally Okay, it should be by but as many Now we have the X off the transformer is equal to the square road off is that the transform square minus are transform a square, which is 12.3 million own. So you can say that the short circuit is equal toe V, which is the voltage line to line voltage over roots three. Most of blood buys it. Okay, so you can say at two parts number one, you can say V over roots three multiplied by. Is that the daughter? Is this is that okay? And at all for going to eight million on or you can say that route RTR square plus 60 are square. Okay, this square blocks this square is giving us this value. Okay, so they're square road off their square is equal toe said transform. Okay, So is this a step is just to get the resistance only ends in doctrines only. Or that the actors only okay, now with the short circuit in this part is 18 kill on bear. So it in kilo amber is at this point, So we don't have a passport which can withstand this value. So we got a passport off a 20 kilo and bear. So we say that we short circuit at immediately or the main distribution panel is equal to 20 kilo and bear now, this was the first time is now the second dimension in order to get the short circuit current off the transformer. Since we don't have anything except the transformer, we can say that z a power transformer. Okay, The short circuit power off the transformer in Case also said is equal toe the apparent power over that the present. It okay s aerated over that. The percentage this is another law is this 500 over or going to afford will give us the well over 5000.5 mega volt amber, which is the short circuit power off our transform. Okay, Now, having Z power, remember, that's the s is equal toe Road three relying tow line multiplied by the current so we can get the short circuit current easily. So the sold circuit current is equal to 12.5 Mega Volta and Bail Overrode City, which is 1.73 multiplied by the voltage lying toe line, which is a 400 volt. So we got the short circuit again, the same value 18 kilo and there. So the short circuit is again 20 kilo. Unfair. So we got here the short circuit at Z passport here or the means tributes in port. Now we would like to get the short circuit at at this point, for example, at this panel, which is 50 kill of want. And so the difference is that we have a circuit breaker and Z cable. We will neglect to circuit breaker as usual. So neglecting circuit breaker upstream and torque and possible impedance the transformer. Having that seemed that a sheet, which is the percentage four and 5500 watt, and we obtained the that the equivalent or the resistance off transformer and Ex Transformer as before. Now, to get the short circuit at this point, we need to get Z's it off the cable. The resistance ends in doctors, so symbol is a resistance office. Cable is equal toe raw senses. This part is made off cover. So the resistive ity is 22.5, multiplied by row. L Z lens. This lens is 20 meter over a row. L over the cross sectional area. So we chose here cable off 50 millimeters square. So finally, we have a nine mainly on. Okay, this is that resistance off our cable. Now the inductions off our cable, we said that the X or their actors is equal toe open toe eight month of blood violence, so X off. The cable is equal toe open toe it since it is a Salafist systems remote about my 50 blocks in neutral. So this one is a three phase system. So we'll use or point or it if it is a single face, then I will say or point to 12. So your point Oy, it must blood buys a lens, which is 20 meter will give us 1.6, mainly home. So we have the resistance and we have the X off the cable and we have the resistance off the transformer and ex off the transformer. So we can some the resistance together and the X together, So our total is equal to 12.52 million Exit total. Served important tonight, mainly on which is from the point here from Sigret. Does this point if a short circuit occurred here. So this representing art or extorted from here to here. So the short circuit is equal to V which is 400 volt over rotisserie toe. Get it as a face multiplied by Wrote our total plus execute Okay, which will give us 12 vehicular on bears. Who will find that here? The short circuit is 12. Vehicle on bare lower than before So the standard value is 15 kilo and bear, so we can get here. They're panel. That's tribute from Beneteau Wizards Stand 15 kilo Unfair. And this main distribution banning can withstand 20 kilo on bear. So this one is a 20 and this one is 15 kilometers. Ok, so this is the first message off. Obtaining is the second part. So at the beginning we obtained Is this so circuit here by your Zynga's E V over that? Now if I would like the short circuit here or here or here, Do we have another missile? Yes. We have another message. What is this missile We can use tables, toe tens, the value of sorts of hell. Okay, let me tell you so this one is a 20 kill on bear and this lenses 20 meter and its cross sectional area is 50 now going the two z cable add to the table. Sorry, not cables. The table itself will give us the value of the short sick. So the 1st 1 is that the cross sectional area off the conductor? What is a cross? Section it off? The conductor we selected from the main distribution border tool Z distribution boat or D V one. We will find that we talk city multiplied by 50. So this is a cross sectional area and Water Zealand's. We said that Zealand's is 20 meters, So let's move like this. Moving, moving or find no value 11 or 21. Okay, so 11 or 21. And we said that we have a 20 meter so the clothes are value is that went to one. Now, what is the second step? We will go down one like this. Okay, so we said, Let the 21 go down. Now we have this line which will go like this now What is the upstream short circuit? What is the short circuit? Add the higher level, which is a 20 kilo amber. We said that it is at 20 kilo Mbare, right, 20 kilo Amber and the job history. So moving as a to indicate on Berlin. This moving, moving, moving. Okay, lie exist. And this one is coming. Okay, so we'll have a value off 11 kilo. Amber, this is the value off the short circuit at zero or value Now in gives What is this case in case off a fusing at 21 meter. Okay, so this is that war. Stick it as the best guess off two into one, which means lower short circuit current 11 kilo on there. So we have an option off 11 kill on bear. If which was the previous 1 11 then we will have a short circuit level off 40. Ok, so 14 kilo and bear is the highest short circuit level and 11 Killer on bear is the low short circuit level. So we can use instead off this values. We can say that it is 15 kilometers, so we find that here who said that the short circuit is 12 icky Noam Behr and from tables by 20 meter or 21 meters. We attend 11 Colombian. So in both cases we are close to the 15 kill on. Okay, but the value is accurate and close to the one which were obtained from here. Now let's have another example If we have this circuit as before or the single line diagram and we have the short circuit here a Sertic, you on bear. This is the main distribution and we have here. We need to find the short circuit here. So how we can obtain this. We have a 50 millimeters square, a cover 11 meter and the upper circular Amber. So let's ago delete all of this. So we have what is the cross sectional area? Cross section of 50 millimeters square. So 50 millimeters square. What is the lens? 11 meters. So going like this lens off cable 11 11 11. So we have your our 11. So this is ing lying. What you are going is room and what is the short circuit levels for certain iss Sertic, Yohan bear so served tqm bear So going like this moving like this. Moving, moving, moving and this one woman goes like this and this goals like this so they will intersect at a 19 year on there. So this is the downstream short circuit living 19 kilo and bear. So you will find that it is very easy to obtain the downstream using the table instead off calculating Izzy Cable and finding its values. So I hope this video help you understanding is the short circuit and how to do the manual calculation off this world sucked. 149. Voltage Drop And Short Circuit Calculations Using Etap: Now, in this video, we are going to transform our single line diagram in tow eat program in order to find the voltage drop in our system and the short circuit level. Okay, so the first thing you should know that they wanted a drop in our system, which we designed the before should not exceed 5% as a fall as a voltage drop. Okay, so the first thing we will goto e tab I'm using here eat up 12. All of them are nearly the same. Except that Senor versions e higher on more effective version then before. Okay, So the person who will click on file and then new project we'll name this one as a voltage drop and short certain that's short sucked. Okay, His in. You'll find years the unit system in my arm. Country. I used the metric. If you are in another country which use English, you can select English. Okay, Zen more. Click on. OK, now you'll find years. He was a name. And for name and description and the access level permissions. OK, I will just take all of them because they I am the only one here. Then we'll click on. Ok, ok, now we'll maximise this window in order to put our elements. So the first single should know is that we will collect on project okay, and then you will find their information. If you are having as subsisting project in a company, then we can Both these details when we export our final document so we can brought the project of items educations. The contract is the engineer re Marcus and comments. Okay, this is the first thing. Second thing is that we can click on Project on. Then we can click on standards. Okay, So, Sears that according again, you to your own carting are you are using at 50 hertz or 60 or 100 frequency or a 250 artists or 400 so on. So in my own country I used the 50 Hertz system against the own insisting English or metric . I use metric. The standard in your own country are you are using the icy or I or the dancing system. Okay, I'm using the I easy. So see here that here we have the different elements of what you are going toe design that single line diagram you will find here we have a C components and here's the measurement part, such as the potential transformer, current transformer and so on. Here we have the D c component. So this all of these temples are based on the I C standard. If I change it to you and seeing OK and then click on OK, you will see that all of this symbol it change it during using the standard, which is the dancing could. Okay, but since I'm using is the I. C. I will change it back toe easy. Okay, Okay. You will see that all the symbols are back here. So the first thing you will see that single line diagram you will find Here we have a transformer and this transformer taking its apart from a great Okay, So the first thing we will draw Izzy. Great. So with this one is called the power grid, you will collect on it. And just like this, you will find the air you can about it anywhere. So I'll just click here Now I am having my own power. Great. Now we'll double click on this. Great you'll find here it's anymore. Z names the connections three face or a single face off course. It is three face and you'll find here more information which will can find the from sea power grid in your own country. Okay, so you see, the transformer is getting it's a ball from a power grid. You find this information from the government about, or the electrical distribution company about the power. Great. And then you about this information. For example, here you will find that rated kilovolt in my own at Zion year we use than 11 over or 110.4 . Kilovolt 11 is the vaulted, which is in medium voltage from our great. Okay, so I will both here the rated Walters as 11. Okay, Now our it is balances or on balance, it I will assume it is balanced it because I don't have the information off the imbalances . This information are talking from the courses, the distribution company again, or from Seapower Grant. Now we will see is the short circuit Okay, you will find here Mega volt and bear short circuit. Okay. For this off course again from the border it on my own country for the 11 kill of world, the mega volt amber Short circuit is 500 and the X over our issue is 10. Okay, I'm talking about my own country in case off 11 kilovolt 11 and my own country, which is easy. Okay. According to our own power grid and this information, you can open it from the government or the electrical distribution company. Okay. These values on you don't preserve them in your own mind. Use us to get them from the ad distribution company. Okay, Then we'll click on. OK, now we have a source for our power, which is a power grid, which has a 500 mega volt ember short circuit and operating at 11. Kilovolts is the first step. Second step. You'll see it. We have a transformer. Okay, this transformer is 11 over. Opened for Delta store grounded, and you'll find 11 overall 110.4 kilovolt. Okay. And so let's and one mega vault and bear. So let's get that transformer you will see is a symbol of the transformer is here the winding transformer and it like here. And just to connect it from here toes egret. Okay. And of course, all of this are one note and this is called as a connection between them with Abbas. OK, so in orderto make it saw or showing zing. And plus, we will right click on this or the bus and then you'll see. Here, Take owns the note. We will remove it. You will see is that we have us part here now, at hearing and you'll see here also the voltage beside it. 11 kilovolt. Okay, now let's go to the transformer. We have here a transformer at the winding transformer. This transformer has of course, if if you have a substantive claim for systems for money but it year is a standard. Answer your eye easy and you'll see here as the different types off the transformer shell. Or course remember for them if you have this information. Okay? Now the important thing is your rating. Zero. Eating off the transformer you'll see, is a voltage rating. The primary is 11 kilovolt. It took this value from zing. A power grid senses the primary is connected. So this a great So the program automatically body living kilovolt in the primary, off the transformer, the secondary is opened for kilovolt. Okay, Now is the power rating for the transformer is one mega volt and bear. You can change also from Mega Volt Lamberto. Another value, which is kilovolt ampere, as you would like. Okay, Now you'll see here that we have the impedance for the transformer. Okay, you'll see that. Typical as it and X over our article X over our this the program or eat up has he that are based for a different types of transformers? Okay, we'll see. Is that it is one mega volt and bear I easy liquid transformer, which means oil transformer. Add 65 freezers degree. Okay. You can change all of this from here. Okay, You can see here on the shelf or in your event, or you can also Blais in this. See things they will find here. For example, as the type liquid filled or it is all right. Transformer, we'll find use a term brittle rise, Zeke. Losses. Okay, the subtype. All of this information you can fight according to the transformer in which you will buy for your own distribution or industrial area. Okay, so let's get back to the impedance. So we will say that we don't have the values, so I will take a typical set on X over our. So our program will automatically both values from its database or library about dead on X over art. Okay, now we will find years. He tabbing. Okay. Normally, we don't use the tearing except after Wednesday voltage decreases or the voltage increases in our area. OK, so we're normally, but it zero here. Okay, Then we would click on. Okay, so now let's make sure that our transformer is Delta star connected. How we can do this. Okay. You will see here a menu, this play options and yours here for each type off elements. You. But in this you can choose whether you have the idea rating kilovolt and bear Delta store connection or that. Okay, so Forsett Power Grand. I would like to see its kilovolt the motors off course. Kilovolt on Dizzy. A bus kilovolt. Okay, is in order. You can say kilovolt tool. Now, let's go to the transformer. Okay. I would like to see it's the connection delta y stabbing. Okay, Andi kilovolt. Okay. And for the cables weekend forget about them and then we can click on OK, You'll hear that all of the values would like Toa find. You will see we? It is now beside our element. For example, transform a delta. Why and one. Okay, so it is connected, That's why. Connection. Let's get back toe The grounding and you'll see is that is our primary is delta connection and the secondary is why and solid ground it. OK, you can't change from Delta Tau. Stop. Okay, now we have our transformers. The next step is that we have here cable. Okay, here we have a cable. Four cables for motor blood by 500 copper PVC be seen and four months or about 100. Okay, so we have here. Forget about the earth in this voltage drop calculations. Okay, so what we concern in a row? It is these values. Okay, so we have Here's before the three phase and the neutral having a 500 millimeters square. And do we have four off these values? OK, so for each phase, we have four for the primary or 44 cr 4 40 s. Four cables affords ET and four cables for the neutral. Now let's define these values OK or both. Is his values into our program. So the first step we will goto cable. Okay, and click like this. And the connected does the transformer and you'll see your our past. We can right click and transform a toe wound and then this cable double click on this cable . Okay? And you're seeing different times a number off conductors able phase. Okay, so we said here is that we have four conductors for each phase. Okay, this four means r s city and the neutral for means that we have four off r and S t and the neutral. Okay, RST and the neutral. We have four of them. So the number off conductors, the bare face is four. Okay, For each phase, we have four cables or four wives. Now, for the lens will assume assorted meat that that's just an example in the actual place or the actual industrial plant he will find. And the measure this actual distance. Okay, now we all find years the library. This library will give you a different types of cable. You'll find the year different types on the front, the numbers off course according to your own design, you can select which off them. Okay, So for our thing, we are using their believe a mile right, which is BBC, and at the same time, we are using greater than off course point for kilovolt. Okay, We'll find your 0.0.5 point seven and the cross sectional area is 500. Right? Let's see. Restriction and area is 500. Okay, So you will find here that the one which is selected automatically. Where is it? This one having a cross sectional area upto 35. Okay, so it's not meant for us. Okay, we need 500. So let's sees your 0.7 here. The system 0.7 has on Tel 506 100 self. Okay, that's a pretty good. Okay, so will he choose this 1 500? We have your cover 0.17 vault, which is okay, since our watch point for. And this cable can withstand upto 0.0.7. Okay. And the bullet vermeil as we require, or as required. Then we'll click on. OK, so we have a cable off 500 copper and 0.7 kill vote. And at 50 hertz, which we are operating on now, let's go to same Beaton's for the impedance you will see here is that we have if you have the values you put them or if you don't have them, the program automatically. But them from the library. Okay. Then we'll click on OK, okay. So we boots the values for our cable. Now let's go to another thing. We have year after putting this one, we have here a passport. Okay, so let's draw this past bar. Ah, bus. Then lie exist. And then we click on it and drag, click and right. Okay. Now we will. But like zest toe connected between them. Okay, so now let's see homes or thing we have the first still would. Here is 50 kilovolt and bear 155 100 so on. So and as you know, that this one is a residential area. OK, so we have way have dynamic loads and we have static loads by and I'm includes means that we have motors and we have a static loads like Lamberts and things which does not have or absorb starting current. Okay, So our loads are not be your resistive or of your inductive here or here or here, or even here. Okay. The factory lightening and power socket is the administration building residential building one and the two. All of them does not have a view resistant or Buren Inductive. Okay, so zeroed. What? You are going toe, but it's called lumbered alone. Okay, you'll see. Here. Lumbered load. Okay. This lumbered load means that our Lord is makes it between a resistive and inductive. Okay, so we'll double click on it and they will find here some information will goto a nameplate is the mega volt and bear. Here we have 50 kilovolt and bear so we can change this toe kilovolt. So click on 50 kilovolts. I'm bear. Now we'll find there another thing. Ziebart factor We assumed in our project 80% okay. And you will find the loot type. You'll find your Afghanistan tickling, kilovolt and bear and the constant that Constanta kilovolt amber means we are talking about the dynamic loads. This one means the static lutes. Okay, so most off our Lord's here in this fourth things or the four different ludes are called. Of course, 80% off them are static loads. We don't have much motors here, so we'll click on here and drag it to 20%. So that means that we have 18 20% kilovolt amber or dynamic loads and 80% constant loads. Okay, then we'll click on. OK, so now we draw our first loot. Second thing, we will do our cable game. So our cable here is a form of blood 35. So cable, my exists connector between them and between our BuSpar here. Right click Morzine Haute. Okay, double click on cable. We say that we have a 35 right? Okay, So a number of conductors is one. Since we have here one for each phase and is in neutral now, let's seems are like, very okay. We have this type political. I'll again 0.5 kilovolt. Okay. And we need 13 5 then. Okay, so we have here for and 35 Millimetre Square Zealand's. We will assume 14 meter. Okay, we'll assume 40. Okay, then. Okay. So draw. Now we draw our cable and our first true. Now we can assembly select all of this on the right click. Ok, And copy. Okay. And then right click and best. Okay. Like this and or control v apply exists best. We have four loads. Andan other one best is then we connect. Ally exists when nectar like this and the move it like those on Uh huh. Okay. Okay. So now let's see each of our Lord's. We have here 150 under 500. So this 150 100 15 Okay, on this one is 500 and play it 500. Okay, this one. Okay, this one, this one is 25 which is asserted one that seem okay when he five. Okay. And the last load is 200 mine seven. But remember something here? Door mind seven. Okay, but here our lost loot is ese industrial motors or induction motors. Therefore, all of these loads are dynamic loads. So will it change? Zero type toe 100% toe dynamic loads, okay. And zero static clothes. Because all of this 297 killed Walter, Amber is made off and motors or induction motors on Lee. So it collects on. Okay, like this. Okay, now we will change the cables. Let's see this one. This one is 214 millimeters square soul. Just to go toe library 240. Okay, we can find this in 3.7. 200 for okay, then on Dylan's is 40. Let's make it 30. Okay, Now, this one is a four month blood by 703 cable. So we have three. And we said, That's 700. Okay. So, like, very again is in Wardle 0.7 on the 300. Okay, Now let's goto this cable. It is. I remember there as then, okay? For months ago by ton. So then Okay, We can just take it from here then, then. Okay. Now is he lost one here. Battery, Boeing seven. Now, let's see. It is a stream of blood by 240 the to okay, 240 don't. Okay, so we have to then. Okay, now we drew our single line, their grand in E tab. Now we would like toa find the values for our voltage drop and short circuit and analysts. So the first thing you'll find here that this point or this pencil means that we are editing our single line diagram. When you are doing is the load flow analysis or the float flow? Of course. Tosi Z direction off the active underactive power end at the same time, we see the vaulters drop. We will click on this Now we have the low voltage or seeing load flow analysis. Now we will click on this run road flu as in Okay, you will find the year different virus. Let's move it like this. Okay, so we'll find the Is this value us off B and Q and you can find this from this. Screens play options you will find. Here. Is that a scene for the different saying this light transformer. Who would like to show the kilovolt? Okay, the power grid kill Walt. Is he more toward Okay and cables and all. We need passport. Kilovolt. Okay, Now is the result is here. You will find that the bus voltage each off this percentage represented the bus voltage and I would like to see as actual values. So I will click on vote. Okay. You can also choose to see the magnitude or is here or the angle or both of them. Okay, Now we'll find. Here's the powerful, these values. OK, we'll find here P and Q finding A and B plus Jake, you the active and reactive power you can change. And as you would like, you can choose and bear what only Or as a key. Only answer. Okay, now we can click on. OK, now we will find that here is the values. Change it for zero flu. One year we have the MBA tear 11 kilovolt on the past bar and also throws a transformer. Now, for this passport, you will see that we have a voltage offs around 38.5 Walt. Which means that the most off the voltage drop is on the transformer from 400 to around 83.5, which means nearly 16.5 vault voter drop on this transformer. The cable has only vote. Drop off a three. You'll receive the difference between them. And finally 20 to have surrounded 77 runs, 76 So on 77 answer. So we have You will see that here. Do toe the large impedance off the transformer. You will see that all of these values dropped the residents around 80 volt. Okay, so again, the 5% vultures rub in order so that from the Alberto Transformer dozy load we need at 0 to 180 vote. Okay, so find his at the voltage drop is greater zone 5%. So do what we can do. OK, we have two choices. The first thing is that we ended this transformer. Okay, double click on it and then it changed the tapping off the transformer. Okay, you know that when we are dealing with a transformer high volt side, which is 11 kilovolt and the second secondary or went for we will change the having off the primary. Why? Because adds the high voltage is a current is lower, which means we have lower sparking. But if we change the tailing from the secondary or Z low voltage since the current would be high and see as spark will be Okay. So we changed the timing off some transformer from Z Brian money side. So the changes it having abroad in negative 2.5. What does it mean? It means that we change the number of tennis. We decrease the number of Turness by negative 2.5 is actually dizzy secondary of the transformer toe increase. So we'll click on OK, Zin will click on run load flow analysis. You will find here that Z voltage increased. You will find its around 87 on the 86 87 88 7 and so on. So the voltage here increased. Okay, so that is the first and second message we can do is that that's indeed exists. Uh huh. We know that the induction waters or forcing industrial blend the bar factor must be at least a point of mine. Okay, if it is, listen, going to Ryan's, then you will have a banality your toe having a low power factor. Since our bar a factor here is a point it we can do something instead off. You know that this transformer supplies current. This current carries is A B and Q the active and tractable. If we adhere a combust auto supplies e active bar. And since the current absorbent buzzer transformer decreases, therefore the voltage drop on the transformer will decrease. What? I mean, let's get back towards the editing and act investor. Okay, like this and we'll both the value off the combustible. For example, 200 Walter and beer in the information rating. Okay, 200 king of all. Okay. Now we for your on Ziebart clue, you'll see that the voltage here increased. Okay, No greater sensor on the 80 again exhausted by adding this cup a store. We improved dizzy power factor by adding Zizka Pastor and providing Zack you and decreasing . Zack, you provided from the transformer. Therefore we were able toe decrease the voters drop on the transformer and increased all of this voltage and instead off. And the timing was a transformer is the same zero. Okay, so this are the total solution. If you don't need to change the transformer, we would like to make it zero tabbing Zen will but era Cabestan orderto improves about factor and decreasing the voltage drop again. Okay, so that is a second thing. Okay, now let's of the just. Uh huh. Now we learn until now, have toe design or identifies have also dropped. Now let's go to the short circuit and narcissistic this one in the short circuit and anuses you will find here that grant sitting you can do OK, we'll find here as three face fault. You will find there a single line toe ground fault you will find here line, toe, ground line to line toe ground CVS faults and so on. And you will find here on trans central circuit Run arc flash According toa I easy and so okay. And of course, here we have the ability options, the display you can display as a big or written squares. The important off us is the root mean square value off the current Nazi beak. Okay, so now let's is the worst type off short circuit is the string face Short circuit. So we design our short circuit, or is the capability off our cables, motors or everything? Bus bars on the three face short circuit, because it is there are wars pipe sort second. Okay, So where are we going to do the folks? Okay. We need a fault on this passport, right? Clicked and then click on fault. We need a fault. Here. Here, this one and the Let's see what will happen. Okay, Now, if we're on the city face short circuit test. Okay, You will find here the short circuit current in case so far, short circuit on the past bar, you will find that the current is 28.8 kilo on bear. So our passport must always to stand a short circuit value. Greater then this value okay off course before our short time. Not is the short circuit rating off the passport must to be greater than 28.8 kilo. You will find that this value is 24.897 from the source or sigret 2.5 60 kilo on bear from the induction motors as emotive, transforming toe generators enduring trans entry off course during the short circuit here opened all for five or 28 mine mine or went 071 or goingto nine Kahlo. And they're OK for the short second, for example, here you will find on this past bar you'll find 17 and bear coming from all over the other components and 2.7 from the motor itself. 20 kilo and bear. So this one must withstand 20 kilo on bear. Okay, this 1 to 1 71 bear this one I went to 1.5 kilo on bear 15.8 7.4 kill on bin. So muscle design our elements according to the short second or the wars to case. Okay, we consign all of this as a 25 kilo amber and this one as a 30 kilo on bear. Okay, so finally we will click on report the manager and then you will find. Here's a possible click like this if I would like our results is the summary and everything about what we did now in the short circuit analysis and we can. But it has a video ward or any four. And then we'll click on OK, now for the load flow analysis, we can run it again. Then we can click on report manager and dozing. Same. Okay, Bdf or anything? Okay, By doing this here, we can find the the front things we have done in this broken. Okay, so now in this video, we learned about when voters drop and how toe can create the short circuit level using e. 150. Effect Of Current On Human Body: hello and welcome everyone to our videos for the Earth thing system. In this videos, we are goingto discuss Z meaning off nursing system, Z types off nursing system and how to design the arcing system. So first we would like to understand the effect off the A C or a D. C. Current owns the human body is the reason for this We will understand. Is the effect off A C or D? C? Then you understand. Why do we use the nursing system? So the effect off an easy or D C current on human body depends on three main factors. The 1st 1 is the amplitude off the current, the value off the current, which, as a human is exposed to number two the duration off the current browsing through the human body, the time in which is the current of passing Strozzi Party and the frequency off the current bossing it is D C off zero frequency or a C with 50 Hurtis or more and no more force of direction or the pass off the current. So let's start by discussing each off these factors. So the 1st 1 is the effect off the electric hazards or the or the current on the humans. For example, if we're talking about the a C current and its effect on the human body So for a current one million bear, you will feel or a slight sensation off the current. Okay, you will feel a small current hear from until from one million bare toe five million bear five member representing Z maximum current, which is still harmless towards the human. Okay, so five mil amber, you cannot sense it or you cannot even have any harmful effects from 10 to 20 million bear . You will find that in this case, the loss off muscle control. In this case, you will not feel you cannot control your hands muscles and you cannot let go the electric suck. OK, so when you are, the electricity captures you and you cannot leave it. So at 50 million bear, you'll find that there is a difficulty off response oration from 100 to 300 million bear Z praising stops and eventually it would lead toe Fattal authorities Fattal, which will lead toe this from 1000 to 6002 million bear and above. Of course, the internal organs and tissues starts to burn in the human body. So where we have the value of Z current and the effect off off it on the human body. So now let us see the effect off the current with respect to time. So if we have a current from zero toe 00.5 milion bear and providing it for continuous time , then it will have no effect. So from 0 to 4.5 million bare toes, I hear my body does not have any effect for any range off time, starting from 4.505 million and bear continuously to your finds that involuntary muscle contraction but no harmful effects on the human from 5 to 30 million and bear now if we happened that the human is exposed to this amount off current four minutes, then this will cause muscle contraction and difficulty from separation off the circuit or difficulty off separation from Cirque. You cannot let go of the circuit now if the current increase to 30 to 50 million bear for just two seconds, this will cause difficulty in praising and loss off consciousness for more than 100 million and bear and exposed to more than 20 milliseconds. This will finally toe this. So in this table we see is the amount of current and the time exposed to it and its effect on the human body. So we'll see that in the nursing system. We need toe protected the human against this values off current and all. See that how the Earth Inc will effect or protected the human from this amount off current . But first lets us easy maximum current that the human can withstand with respect to time so approximately we can say that the current in which is a human can withstand was respect to tow. Time is equal to 116 million bear over the square, root off the time in second. So, for example, if we have our time off 10 seconds and would like to Megsie human or the amount of current that the human can withstand in a time of 10 seconds, so we'll take 10 and substitute here. So 116 over road then will give us the amount off current that's a human can withstand. During a 12th without any damages served 6.68 million bear So if a human exposed toe this amount of current for just 10 seconds, the human can withstand. But remember that 12th is the maximum current. Okay, so this formula can help us toe get the time or the current that the human can withstand was respect toe by So I the effect off frequency off current. So a C or D C current most off them can cause damage to the heart at high enough levels. But Z at a C is much worse. Zanzi d. C. Why? Because for d c. For a C, we will need 30 Millie and beer as a road many square value as on our investor value at 60 hertz. OK, but for d. C, we will need at several 100 to 500 million bear off D C. Current toe produces the same effect off the 30 million bear off easy, so you will find that the EEC is more dangerous. Zanzi d c as you'll see that the amount of currently need here is certainly amber only, but in case off this you will need some 100 to 500 mainly on bear. This means that more d c current is required to produce the same effect off the A. C Z. A low frequency A C current is more dangerous. Ascents high frequency easy. So the 60 Hurtis a C current is much worse than one kilohertz a c about now, the effect off that direction off current the current campus through the human from foot to foot. Okay, from that left to right or the right to left and the compass from left hand right hand, for example, and come bus from left hand toe feet. One was a feats and kind boss from the right hand toes defeat. But the question is, which one of these is a Waris? The case? The worst case is hand to hand, for example, from left to right. Why? Because from left hand, right hand or right hand to lift at the current bosses through the heart and Z. Also, another case, which is the worst, is from the left hand Does defeat Why? Because from left hand to defeat the current world pass so rosy heart. So the worst case is hand to hand or left hand toe feet, as both off them will pass through the heart 151. Types Of Electric Hazards: So what are the types off the electric hazards, which is a human exposed toe? There are two types. The direct hazards, which is a result off direct contact with the life parts and indirect hustles. As a result, off the insulation failure and deleted, you can't. So if you look at this, if we have here are bus bars Z line 123 or red, yellow and blue. Okay, that's three phase and the neutral. Okay, So if a human touches this Gaspar, then the current will go through Z BuSpar and passing through the human and toothy ground. So here, z a hazard or the electric hazard or the electric shock. It's called a direct because the human touching Z passport or the life part and the current bosses through it through the ground. Okay, Now another type is called the indirect hazards. For example, if we have an electric motor here, supplied boy as three face okay, For example, it is a delta connection motor. Now you will find that this part or this body the enclosure off See, motor itself does not have any current normally, but in case off insulation failure. Okay. For example, the insulation failure off phase number two, then Z current. A small leakage current will boss through the body off Z at machine itself. Okay, the body or the enclosure off the machine itself. Busy outer surface off the machine. So when a human touches this surface, the current will boss or the record you can it will pass through the human and throws the ground. So this is not called a director. But it's cold in director because it is as a result off insulation failure and leakage current. So how we can protect its human against Z like chocks and against and artichokes for the direct choke. So we can first we have toe insulate the life parts. Okay, It's the passports should not be easily exposed to tow the human because anyone who touches it will die from Chuck. Okay, so we have toe insulate our lifeboats. Number two, we have to protect the the human by putting the barriers between Z or enclosures in between the human and the life parts. And we can also protect the human against a direct to contact the boy something called a residual current device. All our CD This result world current voice it sounds is the leakage current OK, when's the leakage A current exceeds zine for example 30 million bear which is the value of current which will be harmful to humans Then Z residual current device will trip the circuit. Okay, so protect is a human Now is a prediction against indirect chokes Baeza Usage off, er thing which you are going to discuss in this videos. So what is nursing her? Think it's simple, Easy process off Transferring the immediate this A chores off the electrical energy directly towards the earth. Boys help off the low resistance wire. Okay, so we simply take Z leakage current and give it a pass throughs. Ears Boy is a usage off a low resistance. Why? To prevent dizzy current from flowing into the human, we allows the current toe pass through the earth by the usage off low resistance wire The electrical er thing is done by connecting is in on current carrying part off the equipment . For example, see enclosure which should not have any charges or the neutral off supply system to the ground as we'll see in the different er sing systems, the metallic frame or the enclosure off the machines is connected. All stores ears. Because any charges which is at for Mitt or any static charges which is for Mitt on the party off the machine should be dissipated. Toe the earth, so protect off course. Any humans from the shock. So we need toe compare between that usage off everything and was out using Earth. So first we have here our equipment. Okay. And we have here a leakage current. Okay, so this wire and we have here a livewire and the neutral wire, the live wire carrying current and we have here and insulation failure. So leakage current will boss through the surface off or the enclosure off the electrical equipment. So when a human body touches it, then what happens? Z current flows through the human like exists, as you see here, then goes through the earth's and then get back to is a neutron. Okay, because it wants us toe return back toe the life. I Okay, we have here. See, for example, is the beginning and the end. For example, during the post of psych. Okay, we have a sea off course, but we are discussing dizzy positive cycle as an example, so do your exam. Postive cycle is the current goes here bossing here and some leakage current goes through the human and back toe the earth throws in neutral and then goes here like this back to the life Ryan. So the current will use the human as a passed over the ground. So this is an electrical system without with er thing and the causes off course, shock does the human body. Now, as an example, we will use the electric system with, er thing. Now. When everything was said that we will this is the enclosure or the metallic frame. We will connect. Is this frame or C None current carrying apart with ears. Okay. With the dosage off law. Resistance. Why? So we used the here. If we have a leakage, a current, for example, here are fault. Then he can It will boss Rosie body off the machine. But the human body have a resistance. For example, one kill home, okay? Or it can be higher as an example. Of course. One, kiddo. So the current has told direction easier to go through the human since Rosie Earth's and the back here. Same as here, Or it can chews Togo through Z everything. Resistance. Okay, so it chooses the Earth thing systems since this resistance is from two five or listen five home. So when's the current Cesaire five own Parenteau. One kill home. It it chooses off course, is the five home. So most or 99% of the current will go through the five like this and get back through the ground, then two z life wire So the human will be protected, boys, A usage off earth. So this is the benefit off you that using off the earth thing because it protects our human against electrical shocks. 152. Classification Of Earting Systems: So, what are the classification off? Nursing systems. We have as many men types off er sing systems. That 1st 1 is tne system. 2nd 1 is DT system Answer. The one is our I T system. So what is the difference between them is the first example representing is the connection off the supply neutral with the ground. Okay, War with the earth. And the second simple representing the connection off the neutral or the enclosure. This will depend on type of system with the Earth thing system. Okay, so the 1st 1 is related to the supply. The second simple is related toe zem loot as an example. The first Alor letter is for source relation with the Earth thing. If it s t, it means that the neutron off the supply, for example, a store connection this neutral is connected towards the Earth thing or the ground Z I here in case off our I T system means that we have no connection with our things in Notre is not connected with the arcing system. The second letter is representing their relation off zeroed or the relation off the enclosure. If it is d, it means that this enclosure is connected to the Earth thing system. If it is n, it means that the enclosure has a relation with a neutral and we will see in case off the end system. So the first type off systems is that titi system here t means that our sources connected toe the earth. The neutron is connected to the earth. Anti here, which is representing the enclosure, means that the enclosure is connected to the Earth thing system. So, as an example we have this system which is D T system. So we have here at Delta Connection, for example, then toe a store connection. So in this, a star you will find that we have here is an your turn. Okay, we have the stiff is Z his number one off. It's A and D and we have here is a neutral. Okay, we have the three phase and the neutral because we have a store connection Now D means that the neutral here is connected to the ground. As you see here, this line is a neuter, okay? And this one is a neutral. So all of this is connected toe the nursing system or we say is a ground. Okay, Now you will find that here we have seen three phase and the neutral going it to the front lutes. Now, for example, we have this load. Okay, This one is a star connected, lewd with us three phase, which is connected to the three phase here and the neutral here connected with a neutral here. Now we will find something that the enclosure itself, which is this. What is the enclosure off the machine is a teen. What does that he means? It means that as this in closer is connected to the ears. So we have year and the goals Rose ears. Okay, so this one Okay, let's delete all of this. So is this one. It's connected to the earth through our arresting resistance. And this one is connected. Toe the earth through an earth through an earth resistance or er thing resistance. Okay. So have to understand this simple things because it will help you to understand the difference between systems now assumes that we have a fault on this face. Okay? This face has a fault. So which is the same face here? Okay, so the current goes here. Rosine Machine and some leakage current will boss through the outer. Okay, this line is on the outer surface or the enclosure off the machine on the metallic frame from Zambia. So what happens? Does the current is he can't want us to go back. Does this face okay? This face has an insulation failure. So is this part has insulation. So it's connected toe Z enclosure. So the current goes here and will go through the Earth's my exists. Okay, This frame is connected toe the earth so without resistance are as an example. Okay. And this one is our to So the current will possible. See frame itself, then goes through the earth's or the ground isn't it goes like this through the earth It wasn going back Do Z fares which has default or having an insulation failure So it finds that it goes from here through the enclosure. The central is that first are Zeng Gong's was a second or so the fault. The current in this case will be quite to v Fayez for this face For example, at 120 volt 20 vault over ze resistance or the total resistance which is r plus R it will be equal to off as an example, we said that the resistance, for example, will be lets them five phone. So we'll use at five homers an example, So we'll have no matter. Blood by five, which is then 220 over 10 will give us at 20 to and there. Okay, so is the current here, or the current passing through here is at went Ito and bear, the circuit breaker will not feel this amount of current so circuit breaker off the face will not tripped the circuit. Okay, so in this case, we will need here and are sitting okay, a residual current device in order to senses amount off current so 22 bear as a liquid you can. It is a larger value. So in this case, the RCD will have a relay which senses this current and finally will causes circuit to trip . So in this system, it is the simplest solution to design and install. And at the same time, we have to use our city because without our city, we will not senses this amount off current. Okay? We protected the human because if a human touches this enclosure. No current will bust through it as the current will boss through the ground. But we need our city in orderto sensitives Current in orderto tripped the circuit due to the basins off a fault or insulation failure. Now let's this easy second system we have tienda system and we have two types off the tee. Any system we have a t Any seeing Which is mean the combined system and TNS which is that the end separate system. And there is Acti and CS, which is a combined separate and will not discuss it. But anyway, that TN combined system lets us yet at first here T means that Z neutral here is connected to the ground or the earth's. Okay, the end, it means that What does it mean? It means that zem enclosure itself is connected to Z neutral. Okay, so let's see, we have the three phase here going through the machine and you have the neutral off the machine, the neutral off the machine. You will see that it's connected here. Does he in closer which is at the same time connected to Z neutral here through the Earth thing system. So again D N c here we say combined because we combined the neutrals together. So he means that the Neutering here is connected to the ground and means that NBC means that the neutrals are combined. So we'll see that here's a neutral here is combined with the enclosure combined with zing neutron here. Okay, so this is the first type off DNS system. The second type here is Tien, but seven it. Now let's see the difference between this and this tea is also connected to the ground and we have the three fears. And then you turn. Okay? Just notice what we are doing here. The three phase here is connected to this reef. Is here is a neutral here. Okay. Is this neutral? It's connected toes and neutral here normally. Okay. Same as here is. I knew to run here. This is a neutral is connected. So the neutral here. Okay, Now notice why it's called separate. Separate because he in closer itself having a separate line. Okay, The enclosure itself is connected through alliance, then dozy ground. Ok, so we'll find here. Is that this line off The enclosure is connected toe on earth thing line, then through the ground. OK, but this one it's connected to Z neutral Is that toe? Neutrons and Z ah enclosure are all connected together in one line. Okay, all of them are combined. But here you will find a separate line. We'll find here Want to see for four lines that force one which is the neutral and at the same time the one which combines all of this and in closer. But here you will find 123455 Flying's the faves One is a separate one for the Earth thing off the inclusion. Now let's see what will happen if we have a fault. So assume again a fault in phase number two here. So current will go here like this, then goes through the body or the metallic frame or the enclosure off the machine itself. So where it will go? It will go through here. Okay, so it will go lie exists isn't going here then going like this through Z faulty face. Okay, so the current goes here through the fourth face, then through the metallic frame or the enclosure, then goes here through the line here and goes back. So in the end. It does not go to three years. So what will happen in this case? Now see that Z fall to current here will be quite to that voltage, which is, for example, at 120 vote over the total resistance. So where is the resistance here is that resistance in this boss is only their resistance off Z faces. In this case, Z face itself having a low resistance, for example, in Milli on. So, as an example will say Attenborough negative three own. So is a voltage, Which is that his voltage over that resistance off this poss, which is a very low resistance since it is a wire, so it would be equal to a very large amount of current. Okay, not at 22 vault. No, not 22 bear as before. It is a very, very large value. So what will happen in this case in this case, is the circuit breaker weather senses the faulty current and trips a circuit. And this is this system will also have the same amount off current. Okay, this or this. Okay, but the difference is that we separate the earth alone. So in this system we need No, our city is required because the circuit breaker will senses e fall to current. And in this case, the circuit breaker will trip. Okay, They really off course while senses and gives a signal toe circuit breaker to trip. Okay, But before the circuit breaker does not sense any current. And we needed our city here in orderto senses the fault account. But here's the current will be very high. So circuit breaker Well, trip. Okay, But we will need our city if z k Poland is very, very long. What? I mean, wisest remembers that the resistance is equal to roll l over z area. So in this case, you will find that the lens as violence increases, then the resistance off the wire will increase closings, the current two to decrease. Okay, but this will need are very long lens. For example, Toby, more subservient a few kilometers. Okay, will cause the resistance Toby High and will cause the current Do not be sensitive. Boise in circuit breaker and in this case will need our city. And in this configurations at the end systems a circuit breaker. Well, trump c circuit. Okay, now Let's see that lost conflagration. The this conflagration is called ICTY. Oh, you as we said before, when it is t, it means that the neutral here off the sources connected to the ground or the Earth thing system. But I mean that Z neutral is not connected to the ground. You see that here is the line which is an ultra, and between them again does he or the ground? So this neutral is not connected to the ground and a T means that our in closer is connected to the ground. Okay, so our inclusion here is connected toe the ground. Now we will see that in this case we have that's reefers entering our load and let's see the effect off the fall to current assuming that the fault in this face as before So the current will go here and a leakage current on the surface, or the metallic frame or the enclosure off the machines. This is the outer surface off the machine or the body off the machine. Do you tow current will boss or Alec into current? It will pass due to insulation failure Now is the current here will go through here is in going through the earth as we did before. And then we'll go back here. Okay? This is an assumption. And I will tell you worry. You cannot goes here and then wanted to return it to this point. But you will find something that this part is open circuit. So the current will never get back toe is the source here. So what does it mean? It means that despite the reasons off, yeah, insulation failure here. No current old boss. Why? Because you cannot will go here, then toe the ground and the cannon. Go. Cannot get back. Does in your truck. Okay, so no current will pass. So in spite the presents off our installation failure, the machine will still continue toe operate. Now the question is what will happen or why do we use the party system? That solution here offering the best to contain 20 off service during the operation. As an example for this, it is used in hospitals. Okay. For example, enduring Z when a doctor is doing an operation on that patient Z, we don't need we don't want is in machines. Toby, turn it off due to faults. Okay, so in this case in case off I t system. Despite having insulation failure, Z machine Will is still operating despite this insulation failure. So this can be used in hospitals where the machine will continue to operate until the doctor and this its operation and all See, how do we do it, Detective Z fault here. Now the problem is, let's see if we have ah fault here on this face. Okay? And a current will not past due to the presence off a ground. But assume that has this machine also by accident. This machine was also having a problem and having insulation failure as an example on the same face. So what will happen is the current will go here, then go to the ground. Then what? It will go here. So the same part? No. Okay. Because you are connecting the same face. For example, we are connecting two points together, okay? Over the same face so nothing will happen. So if the current here connected to the ground and this one is connected to the same point so no current will flow between them because they have the same fears. But if we have a different face for examining for abscess phase has an installation failure and this one has an installation figure. Remember that This one representing this face and this one representing is this fees. Now notice that win this one. It's connected to the earth. Okay, Leakage current. So this fears it's connected toe this point and this fierce it's connected to the same point. So what does it mean? It means that is this phase and this phase are connected together. So what does it mean? It means that we will have a short circuit are lying toe line fault. So that's why we cannot leave one of if we have a problem with insulation. We have to fix it after doing the operations, for example, in hospitals in order to prevent this sort second. So again, this fears it's connected with this phase with the nursing system so lying Klein fault will . Okay, so we would have toe use Zine and Z I m ity, as we will see now, our committee which is this equipment in orderto detectives he falters in our circuit. So I m idi or the installation monitoring device is used toe the tech dizzy insulation failure So how this I m idi injectors current with a different frequency. For example, if our machine is operating at 50 Earths or Secretariat is zero will inject a current at two hertz, for example. So this inject this current So the current world bus here, for example, If we have a fault on this face like this and going like this so the current will go here Rosie, 45 years Zentz Rosie frame off machine, then going through the nursing system. Then this point will go here back. Does the i m. Iti so he can't injected will go back due to the prisons off a problem here on silly or insulation failure. So the insulation failure help. It's the current injected by I am ET toe get back to our committee. So the immediate gives a flesh that there is a problem here or inspiration. Video. Now, in case off, no problem. This humidity injects current like this for examining this fees. Then it will go through the machine and cannot go through the nursing system because there is no insulation failure. So it will justice stop inside the machine so that installation monitoring device help us us toe detectives e insulation failure inside the machines. So those are the different types off the Earth thing systems used in our er thing equipments now in Jennings the video. So we will discuss more about the equipment or the components off the nursing system and how toe designs the Earth thing systems. 153. Components Of Earthing System: in this video, we would like to discuss Izzy components off the Earth thing system. So our nursing system is consisting off a few components which are really important. And in this an extra videos we are going to discuss help toe design each off them. So starting with the first component, which is the earth in conductor, you'll see that here, for example, this is a TT network or tt er thing system we said that we have here is the enclosure off our equipment Then this in closer is a connected through air conductor and electrical conductor and the two and earth's or toe the earth throw another component, which is the earth thing electoral. Then finally, all of this is immersive inside z soit Okay, so again, another picture or another image of for this you will find years. This is an hour, er think a cable. Okay, Our earth in conductor. It takes the earth in conductor going through an electrode and this electrode is immersive inside a soy. Okay, so is that first component is the earth in conductor. Second component is the er thing electrode which is this one? Okay. And finally the type of soil, which is our component immersive in tow or our roads immerse it in. And another thing which is the off course, is the connection between the conductor and the electrode, which is known as the accessories termination fittings, bonding, wilding gets and other materials. So this are the main components off their thing system. We will have toe identifies the type floy, then how to design the nursing electrode. And what is the material made off and the Earth thing conductors. So at first, let's is he here is that we are talking now a powered Z Sawyer. Is this white itself having a specific resistive ity or O meter? They resisted pretty off the soil affected. See nursing resistance. OK, so as you remember that from our previous videos, we said that we would like Toa obtain at 205 home as a resistance or off course Listens is so in order to produce a very low resistance. So we have to select a Z electrodes and designs addict roads, the conductors and all of this components together in order to produce a low resistance so the soil plays a critical role in the earth existence Okay, you will find that that resistive ity off the soy is a factor inside the equations off the resistance off the conductors or the resistance off their electrodes. So we have toe identify that insensitivity off the soil. So there is a video of the song Depends on many factors. The 1st 1 is the composition off this way is the soil itself is clay or moist, or it is as handy or a limestone or etcetera. OK, so each time off this soil exactly the sand Z limestone. All of this have a different resistive ity. So this is the first thing which it blames an important role in the restive ity effect. So, as an example, your finds that the clay have a low water sensitivities ends at limestone. The reason for this exactly, or things type off soy, you'll find it has a large amount off salt. So as the amount off Soltis inside destroy itself increases, the resistive ity starts to decrease. So as a percentage off, the salt content increases the safety off the soaring decreases. Okay, so this is the first thing so one of their components or one of the solutions available for us to decrease the earth existence is toe both more soldiers inside the soy. Okay, so this is the first defector. Second factor is the moisture content off this way. So as the moisture also in much on percentage increases that raises devotee off, the soil starts to decrease. You will see that here as 10% 20% and so on until 100% You'll find that rest if t decreases or change it from as an example from 6000 toe Lizin 100 for example. Okay. So as the moisture off the soil increases zem reserved over soil decrees, another thing is the temperature of the soil. As the temperature off the soil increases that raises a Vitti starts toe decrease that depths off the soil. As we go deep bar inside the soil, you will find that the rest ft off the side starts to decrease. So here you will find here at a depth of one meter, 1.52 meter, 2.5. As the depths increases your finds that the festivity starts toe decrease. Okay. And you'll find here 1 41 curve for the dry soil and 1 40 weight. You know that the wet off course is having a higher percentage off Meishan off course. Zan zar dry so see wet is having a lower resistive. It is Enzo Troy. This one is a dry on this one. Is the at wit so fine? Here's a wet at 0.5 depths 1000 and this one is nearly 2000. Okay. As an example, of course, and another thing which it changes them. Er thing. Resistance is the number off electrodes use as the number off electrodes used increases. Zen Z er thing. Resistance will start to toe decrease because this electrodes are connecting in all connected in parallel. So as the barrel connection increases, Zen Z sold receptivity starts to decrease or the total er thing. Resistance starts toe decrease. So that sort of safety, for example, for the moist soil is a 30 0 meter for a clay soil 100 meter and increasing. You'll find that other dry soil 1000 home meter and at rocky Ground you will find that it is a 30,000 resist empty. So that Morse, the difficult one, is the rocky ground in this rocky ground is very difficulty toe reduce the grounding system . It's very costing. So how toady Crazy sores, safety in the poor soil. For example, If we have a soiled with a high resistive ity so how we can decrease it. So assembly We can do it by using chemical treatment off soil by adding soldiers to the suede. Off course is the salt is as you know, that it increases that conductivity off the material. Okay, this hold in water is there is on four conductivity OK, so increasing Salter's in water increases the conductivity off the water or here, this way. So we form holes at a distance 10 centimeters from the anecdote and at the lips off certain centimeter, and will start ending this sorts. We feel this holes with soldiers such as e copper sulfate, the magnesium sulphate or sodium chloride. Okay, or in a C l. All of this helps to increase the conductive soil, which in the end leads toe a lower soldiers festivity. And again, that's auras. Lefty is a really critical and important factor. NZ and the resistance off the electrodes and the resistance off the conductor inside Z s Oy 154. Design And Resistance Of Earthing Electrode 1: So now when this video would like to discuss is the earth thing electrode. So what happens here as we remember that we have our conductor going to exist, then going toe one off the electrodes? Okay, that electrode, which is immersive inside Aziz way. So this is our soy. Okay, so this part our soil, this one is our electrode. And this one is the conductor coming from zee Earth Sing part. Okay, so this one is a single electrode. So what happens in real life, we will have regret or a grounding egret. Okay, like this one. Okay. Like this lying on a line, you will find this in a tap. When we discuss it in another video, you will find that this rent is designed in a tap. Okay, So what happens? We take the conductor here and toe this Great. Okay, so this great is this one? This part is a conductor. This one is another conductor Ersin conductor. This one is an arson conductor on other on earth, in conductor and so on. So all of this is a conductor. All of this is immersive inside the soil at the specific depths. Okay, so this one is considered as our grounding. A great okay. Advent is forming off only conductors. Now, if we would like toa decrease the total resistance, we start adding in extra words. For example, we will add electrodes here. Adds the edges. Okay. Like this? Like this. Okay, all we can increase number off electrodes and the intersection points like this, Like this and like this and so on. Continuing all of the great and all of this immersive inside this way. So we have here all of this is a conductors. And this one is er think electrode this one every single throat And this one is er thing electrode. So we'll find that all of this form or all of this components are parallel to each other. Okay, as an example, here is the current or the short circuit current is entering like this is NZ. Current will be going through all of this conductor. Okay, then it will be divided inside the electrodes so we'll find that Z conductor itself is barrel toe the electrodes. Not serious. Okay. The current can go through conductor is then go through the air, Single throat or continuing other conductor does the ground to the electrode. Okay, you will find here barrel combinations. Okay. So you will find that the equivalent resistance is the resistance off the conductor and barren tools. The equivalent resistance off the electrodes. Okay. So we can form a grounding grid off only conductors or form a ground Great off electrodes and azeem conductors. Now, in this venue we would like to discuss is the er thing electrode so that material off this electrode can be made off a galvanized iron or copper or any highly conducting material. Okay, because would like toa conduct it all of this toe take the current A to Z ground. So it must be a conducting material. The material of the Earth's indirect roach would be the same as the arson conduct. Okay. What does it mean? It means that this conductor and the earth thing electrode and the conductors here in the grand our should should have the same er thing conductor. Because why, in orderto revenge, dizzy corrosion off our electrodes or our conductor do toe the connection off a day front of material, but it uses that potential difference between them You will find us up with is a voltage. Normally off the conductor here is there front of from the voltage normally off this conductor, for example, for having a galvanized iron and cover as they are having at the front of voltage or a different potential difference between them. So this will cause the corrosion off one off this conductors or the arcing electrode or the conducting er thing conductor. So all of this should have the same material. So the question is, how toe calculate the resistance off fire? An electrical wrote or er thing wrote. So the earth in growth having this equation? This is the resistance off only one road, so the resistance will be quite toe raw, which is here the soil resist Efty. So we'll find years that the resistance off the conductor itself or the Earth single ECT wrote, is ah, function in salt is devotee. So as thesaurus activity increases, the resistance off our electrode increases. That's why you should have a low soiled resistive ity during the ground. Overtop i l where l is Ellen's off the road in meter, Log it and which is Zealand's off zero over D, which is the diameter off the road, minus one So by substituting in this equation, we can get the resistance or the Earth thing. Resistance off one electrode. Now, there is a different methods in boating the electrodes. Okay, we would like toa reduce the minimum value off resistance. Okay, we said that we would like to produce, for example, five own. So in order to reduce our five all, we have to connect a lot off electrodes in batteries. Okay, so we have a different combination for this. Electrodes. This electrode can be in the form off a whole square or can be in the form off, equal it or a triangle, or can be in the form off. L can be in the form off T and so on. So there is a different configurations for the earth, Ingrid. So, as an example, we are going to discuss this the whole square, and they call it right. So for the whole square, we have this one, and it means that whole because inside it there is nothing. Okay, you were found here. We have electrode electrodes, electrode, which is the red one. And between them are conductors, the black one connecting between them inside. This way. So in this one. We will have number off electrodes in one side is equal to four in minus one. So for end minus one. Representing the total amount off electrodes. Okay, inside a hole. As an example, if I would like. Here we have. 123456 If I would like six egg electrodes bear site, then ourselves. Stood here by six minus one will give us five. So five months, blood by four Give us 20 electrodes used. So if we want to 3456789 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1920. Okay, so all of this are 20. And the one side we have six. So six minus 155 months. Will it forgive us? A total 20 electrodes. So now we'll have to see that resistance. That resistance here is equal to the resistance off one electrode. Okay. Which we obtained this brave use formula for it. One plus lambda a over in. So we have here in is representing the total number off electrodes. Daughter number off electrodes Okay in the square. And we have here Lunda and a London. They are two factors of which he we did not discuss before. So see that here Lunda is obtained from tables. Is this table which is effective? Lunda? You'll find the number off electrodes along is this side of the square? So we have here. 123456 six electrodes on one side. So we'll go here at six electrodes. We will have a factor off 6.663 six of 16 feet. Okay, so is this one for our example? Here were our London. Okay, Now our factor e is equal toe role, which is the soil resistive ity over two pi r Are is the resistance off one direct route. Martyr blood by S s is distance between two adjacent electrodes. When you are doing this, any tab according Toa Tripoli, you'll find that the distance between two electrodes should not exceed 2.5 meters. Okay, This is a need that should be not be greater than 2.5 meter or greater sent 22.5 meters. Your finds this any tape. So as this is the resistance in case off a whole square. Now, another one. If we arranged our electrodes in line. Okay, Like this electrode, it brought electrode and connected between them with a conductor's. Now, in this case, we have number off electrodes and 123 So we'll go here. Three and 1.66 Then our resistance will be the same as before are one plus Lambda a Lunda over n n is a number off electrodes Lunda from table A from row over to buy R s as before. So this if our electrodes are arranged in line now, if our electrodes are arranged in the form of equality training. Okay, so this is our equilateral triangle where the city sides are equal. We have here as three electrodes as the Vergis is off the equality tranq. So that, er thing resistance will be one of our three to look it over. The were l is Ellen's off the road, zealots off the road. The is the diameter off the road, minus one minus one plus toe. Unless where l Zealand's off the electrode and s is a lens off one side or the distance between two electrodes. Silence off one side or the lens or the distance between two electrodes off course. We don't have here any lumber, because in the equilateral we have only as three electorates. Okay, so this is how toe calculate the resistance off. And in truth, okay, in a different system such as the whole square or equilateral tranq. 155. Design And Resistance Of Earthing Conductor 1: now in this video we would like to discuss is the Earth thing conductor. So our thing conductor, which we said before it can be copper or aluminium or steel and galvanized iron or galvanised steel is a good choice. Why? Because our parrot pipelines and sea building structures are made off state. So, in order to prevent Izzy corrosion off the material, who said that the earth in conductors and the electro should have the same material? Okay. And you see that this wires off this conductors, bosses, Rosie building structure. So the all should have the same Ah, value off Z resistance, okay. Or the same material. This combination will not cause collusion. Do toe this similar metals. So most of them are when we are using a galvanized steel for all of our materials. Then there will not be any corrosion, do toe non reasons or due to the absence off their fronts in potential potential between them. So how to select our er thing conductor? So I have here. Yeah. If you subsist Occassions would like to discuss, would like to select our sim conductor According toe, it's a cross sectional area. Would like toa identify Z cross sectional area off the earth in conduct. So we have Here are formula for it. You will find that s which is the cross sectional area. So might be should be at least greater than or equal I rooty over key. So I is the war. It's the case current We are war stick a short circuit current And when we're talking about the worst case who are talking about the three phase short circuit current Okay, so this'll cable or this earth in conductor should at least withstands this short circuit current for a specific time, which is team the is the time which is a conductor. Cancel stay in this short circuit current before the circuit breaker operation. So as an example, if a three phase short circuit current cares and you assume that all 30.5 2nd until circuit breaker switches off the circuit so well. But here's a time equal 0.5 2nd and the current is the worst case short circuit current which obtained from eat up Or if we know that the value of the transformer we can get the short circuit count over the key where K is a coefficient. How to get zk This game is equal toe another constant decay or sometimes called Alfa the Square root off Lenti two plus Peter over t one plus beat. So according to the metal, it is copper aluminium misty, we have the constant decay which is in a bear per millimetre square. And we have that coefficient pita in Silesia. Okay, this case, or sometimes called Alfa okay, are given in this stable. So according toa copper, we have these values and a mediums. Values steals his values and so on. It is ah, large table so we can substitute with the gay. Let's point on it. We have this value from the table and we have here Z beetle from table and we have t one entity toe, the one representing initial temperature and Tito's a final temperature, the initial temperature. It means that the temperature at which hour cable or our conductor is installed in, for example, we will assume our war. It's the case off 50 citizens degree as an example in my country z the bridge or is a 36 degree. But we will assume a 50 degree for the worst case. So this one is a 50 solutions degree and final temperature is the maximum term rituals that is this conduct or can withstand. So we can both here at 1003 years degree if it can withstand okay, off course on seven cylinders degree in a certain time. So during that short circuit current. So I assume 1000 successively and we can get a Z factor K. Then we substitute in this equation and we get a value in Millimetre Square, which are representing Z cross sectional area. Then we get a larger value by 10% or the next larger value. As an example for this, you will find here Cal Karenzi Cross sectional area for unearthing conductor used the for nursing 1.5 mega vault and there. So I have here are transformer off 1.5 mega volt and beer, and we have the expertise on it for the transformer or point off life. Very On it we have the line voltage 380 vote find and that initial temperature 52 seizures the final time, Rachel 240 is the Alfa or six Logic 826 beat out 234.5 now would like to find the area. So in order to find the area we need see current We need C k. We need the time. So first, let's find the current. So we have the mega Volt on there and we have the expiry on it for the transformer. So we have our relation. In short circuit analysis tells us that mega volt and bear short circuit is equal to the mega volt and bear base over the expiry on it. So mega vault and bear base is at 1.5 make of all time bear and expiry on it is given as all going toe five. So dividing most of them will give us the mega volt amber short circuit which is a 13 mega volt Gambia. Now, in order to find the current, you know that see, current is equal to s over road three about the blood by evey lying. Right. So the current short circuit is equal to Omega vault Amber short circuit, which is 1.5 not 1.5. The 30 make of all time bear Okay, is this is a mega volt amber short sick. So 30 mega volt Ambien overrode three re line off course in kilovolt, which is points three it in Ginna vault. The vining. Most of them give us a 45.58 kilo and bear as a sort second. Okay, this is the short circuit current. So have the short circuit current, and we assuming here that our circuit breaker will operate after or switches off the circuit after a t ake 1.5 2nd 0.5 2nd Okay. And the key can be calculated from Z function, so we know that the area it would be great. Or zan We said theory. I short circuit what the blood boy wrote the time t move on key so gay will be calculated from this. Factors substituting in the rivers equation. We can get sticky. And we have almost a blood by roti where t is or 0.5 2nd warty. Okay, we assume the here out one second. Okay. Never mind. Okay. We assume the in one second and I short circuit is assumed these as 45.58 killer on there and we have year affect off six. What does 60 million one over K after creating Zeki and one of our key will give us six hours of you. So this will give us at 173 point for it millimeters square as an area. So by going to Z catalogue and searching before an area greater present value, we will find 100 millimetre square as a nearest standard, the Houthis. So this is help to select our er thing conductor from the Prospect, or see from the point of view off the cross sectional area. Now we would like to understand a zine value off the resistance off the Earth thing, Doctor, so that resistance off the Earth in conductor is simply equal toe our conductor equal toe raw over to buy El Len and square over 1.85 HD where role is again the resistive et of the soil. So you will find that here the Earth's in conductor, depending on the shortest if t so find that sort of safety is a critical value or a critical turn. Which affect is both off. The are saying conductor and is the er thing electrode l Zealand's off course off the conductor, and it is the depths off the electrode, okay. And the is the diameter off the conduct. Okay, remember that each year is the dips off the electrode, which means that we are talking about regret itself. Okay, as we remember that that conductor here and another one here, all of this are electrodes. Okay, Grobe, off. Electrodes connected by conductors. Okay, inside Z soy. Okay, So this one is both at a dips off etch, which is the depths off the electrode. So the depths blaze a critical role off also inside their resistance off the contact. So after creating the value off the resistance off the conductor and resistance off the road, we can get the value off the resistance off the system. Remember that both of them are parallel to each other. So the resistance of the system is one of our our road plus one of our our conductor. And the result will be the embers. Okay, So if the resistance is listen five home, okay, then it would be accepted. Or sometimes that we will would need lower values. And this we can require our one on, for example. Okay, this is the burning on Z subsidy occassions required. So it gets off that resistance is greater sends a requirement. Okay? It was a resistance graters and five home. What should we do? We can increase the lens off the electrode. Remember that increasing violence off the electrode means that the lower resistance off the electrode increasing diameter off electrode also decreases that resistance in grazing Z number off electrodes. More electrodes means more parallel combination or more resistance where more or lower equivalent resistance off electrodes. So crazy number off electrodes well, decrees that resistance and members of the resistance is inversely proportional. Toe one over in. Okay, as it is, walls a function in end adding salts to soil. This is that we can add a copper sulfate or in a C l in order to decrease or decrease the festivity or increase the conductivity off the soil. All of this belleza critical rule in decreasing czar soil resistance 156. Measurement Of Earth Resistance By Megger and Three Point Method: So the question is how toe measure that Earth is deputy or disorders Deputy, so are going to measure it. Boy, the four point measured four point message or the mega missile, which is the most famous and most accurate missiles. So have our maker or the auto air sister consisting off a 4 10 minutes. Okay, or four electrodes. This electrodes are married to the ground and between them, fix it. Resistance core, fix it. Distance called a. Now we have to current electrodes and the two potential electrodes. So the measure assembly injected a current Ciroc one and C one the current to go through the soil and then back to see to okay, and we have a potential difference between B one and B two. So what does that make her do? That maker measures is the potential difference between B one and B do, which will give us, for example, V and measures a current flowing here through electrodes C one and C toe Give us got on the only. So dividing is the voltage over the current and give us at resistance. Okay, This resistance is not Sarah's sensitivity, but that resistive ity will be equal toe to buy a lot of blood by the resistance Resistance , which is obtained here. Yeah, representing once the distance between C one and two B one or B one and B two or B toe and see toe. Because the distance between them are equal, so raw will be going toe to buy a car. Give us the value off the festivity off the soy. This is one of the most common message. Another method is the three point to mess with. We have here three electrodes and we have Here is the 1st 1 x y and z it This one is called dizzy grounded electrode on the test. The 2nd 1 is a potential electrode or the potential spiking toward Final One is the current spike anecdote. So have your ex, why and that. So we apply a current between X and set. So our current flows here goings was the ground Does the current spike. Okay, I'm back, does the device. So we measure the current X that and also we measure the voltage between X and y. So, um is our Here's the current Oh, boy. Meter is the vaulted year by vault meet After doing this, we can get the Resistance boy dividing Zia voltage here over. The current flowing here will give us the grounding resistance. Okay, so this is a mother method which is used off course toe tensy resistance off the ground. 157. Design Earthing Or Ground Grid Using ETAP: Hi, everyone In this video, we would like to discuss how toe design and er thing. Great using Z e tape. So the first step we have here, our e tab we are going to goto file is in a new project. And all name this project for example, as or sink. Let's get back, er thing. Great. Okay. Now, in my own country, I use the metric units. OK, so according to our own country, then I will click on OK, okay. Yes, save. Okay, so now I opened a new project in a tape. Now I'm going toe maximize our editing window. Then I'm going here. You will find a here ground great or unearthing egret. Okay, so we'll click on it, then brought it here. Okay, so we have here regret which you are goingto design in our project. Now I'm going to double click on it. Then you will find here study modern using the trebly Mehsud or a finite element methods. So for me, I am Rausing is e ar attribute e message. So I'm going to click on Ok, now let's see our here. The concession off our ground. Great system. So the first thing you'll find here. Here is a spark. Representing is the soil type here, representing Z figure or the shape off our grid you'll find here are rectangle adding an L and equality trained. So as an example for our video, we are going toe discusses E Rick Tank. So I'm going to click on it, then click here. So now I am having here at Grant which are not designed yet. So the first thing I'm going toe see is that I'm going like here is in double click on it. Okay, so this representing our rectangle on great you will find here in Z editor or the options will find Here's our conductors which he can be added or and dizzy number off roads which you can be added in the regret. So the first thing Z conductors you will find here is that great size So the size off this great. How much how much lens and how much wins, or how much lens in the exit direction and how much lends in the Y direction. Okay, this is depending on the space available for you when you are designing your own grant. So, as an example we will say a 50 meter in X axis and 50 meter in. Why accessible about this as a 15 minute Now we will find another option you will find here . Number off conductors. How many conductors in X direction and how many conductors in why dykes. So, as an example, I will assume here at two in X direction and four in wide Alex. Okay, Now we all find here is the depths off this Conductors the depths off this conductors inside the soil or the inside See Grounding credit. Okay, so find here. This is the shape of the swing. Okay, which we are not. We did not edit it like now. So you will find here this representing Z conductors inside the greatest conductors. Okay, Enzian a plan view or in the innovation view, to be more specific is like this under a specific depth. This depths is controlled from here. So as an example I'm going to tow boat. Is this great? At the tips off two meters you can choose off course is a size off the conduct. Okay, which are going to be used? Another thing is the type off the conductor you will find here at their front types off conductor and each one have its own conductive ity. The alpha factor which we discussed before. Zk not factor Also, it's caused before the using temperature off our conductor the rest ft. Off our conductor and see Sir Malcolm S T. So as an example, if we click on this one, we will have this values. Now if I chose for example and medium, you'll find that the conductivity is 61 lowers NZ cover and alpha factor keynote, fusing temperature and so on. So for our when you are going to truth is the best one which is covered and kneeled Soft drone So we chose our number off conductors as we desired. And of course, here you can change the cross sectional area off the conductor used off course is this will cause the number off conducted to increase or decrease. Okay, if we chose ah higher cross sectional area, this will cause a lower number off conductors as we'll see. So this is our conductors now for our roads will assume that there is no roads there for now. Okay, so you will find here. Is that the arrangement? No, ground roots in order to see how the red looks like. OK, now click on. OK, so you will find Let's zoom out. This is our great Okay, this is an assumption you will find here 123 and 44 conductors in Z Y direction and two conductors in the X direction. So let's see if I double click on it. Uh, like this soul, see, toe conductors in X direction is this is the X direction. He's a horizontal line. So we have one. We have to in the X direction and the four in one direction. 123 and four. Okay, this is 50 meter. This one is 50 meat. Now click on OK, so this is our example off a grounding. Great. Now let's see easy pipe offside existing. So I'll double click on this you'll find here is our soil editor here is that surface matillion which are goingto both on the upper layer off our soy That usage off this layer in orderto isolate between the person or the human and the grounding grant off course is the grounding grid takes is the leakage current or C sold circuit current losing ground so I wanted to isolate between the human and this grounding bread which she carries the short circuit. So when I am standing on ze ground went, I'm not affected by attach a voltage, Okay, because there will be on isolation between it and the ground lit. So, as an example, we will choose here gravel. And it has arrested pity on meter off at 8534. Okay. And we can choose its steps here. We will find that tips off 0.5 meter. Okay, We can keep it like this or increase it. Then we will have to values here for our sweet. These values are attended by the usage off maker. We will see the highest sensitivity off the soy and is the lowest receptive for this way. So I would say that that top layer is a type off moist soil and the lower, for example, a dry sweet. And you see that here Z program itself changes the values. Okay. And you'll find here also the depths off this layer. So, as an example, we will say five meter dips. Okay, four, we will say that here at a Serie meter for example to see the difference here. So this is the grounding. Great. At a distance off a two meter and three meters representing dizzy top layer off course. Now let's see. What if I change it like this? You can say that this one is a dry and this one is the moist. Okay, nothing will change. Then I'll click on. OK, you will see that here representing Z dry soil depths. Okay, we said that this one is a three meter and this one is at a to meet. Okay. And to find here's that revel and the dry soil NZ moist This way. So now we have designed for now designs the great. Now we're going to click on this in order to study our great to see if it will be effective or not. So we'll click on this case, which he calls study. Then you will find here that the weight off the person standing on sigret as an example we will choose at 17 kilograms and will choose that ambient temperature as a force Reasons degrees is a temperature. Where's the person exists now we're finding out the front of missiles are a tribute e 82,000 and so on. So I am using the are terribly 82,000. This is depending off course on you. Now is the faulty duration. You'll find years at full time clearing time and that settling time forcing a circuit break . So I'm showing that this fault will exist only for half second or 0.5 2nd as it is now. Is he drowned in the short circuit current. So the short circuit current, we will assume according to our calculation, from Tab or according toe the value of the transformer, we will assume 45 kilo and there x over our depending on the ratio off the grant. Okay, Not the ground. Great. But is in power grid itself. So, as an example, would say 10. Now, here we have the great current factors. This factors representing the amount off current off the short circuit, entering sigret okay or entering the ground. Great. So we assume that our current will not cause a short circuit current will not be divided before it reaches a great. So 100% means that the 45 kill on bare, all of it going to regret it will not be divided before it. Then I'm going to click on. OK, so this is our study. Now you will find here when I click on this in order to see the analysis. If our great will be effective or not, so I click on it is in. OK, now we will see that here. Ah, lot off Eros. And of course, this is logic you'll find here. Is that calculated Voltage is Itachi voltage when you touch is a machine Are you goingto be shocked or not? You will find that the touch of voltage is the one which is allowable is 2857 But the calculated by the usage of this great during short circuit will find that it is a 212 volt Kino vault, Of course. So this is a larger venue. So human touching and electric machine, which having a short circuit will, of course, get talked. And of course, here that's the voltage is at 1000 and here's that Tolliver. Terrible value is a 10,000. So, of course is a step. When you are stepping on this great, you will be off course shocked. So the maximum touch of voltage exceeds that rubble limits and the step vaulted seem. And our founders of spacing between battered conductors is a smaller cento 0.5 meter or graters and 22.5. So this is another area. Okay. According to the I Tripoli standard, you should not be lowers and 25 or greater than 22.5. So let's understand this. You have here one, 23 spacing okay in the x axis. So if I get my own car Creator, let's move this. And we sent that 50 over as three is basic. This will give us a 16.666 And if I look at this one, for example, we have here one conductor don't conductor. Okay, so the 16 is allowed. Of course we have 123 This is spacing is allowed. But let's look at the Y direction. We have one to this basing between them. This 50 meter, which is great, Tarzan at 22.5. So this one is not allowed. So what are we going to do? We have to change. Is this values is on a boy going here. Double click is in editing as an example, we can change the number of conductors and the number of conductors in my direction. Okay. Or I am going to do something which is much more simpler. The program itself allows toe calculates the optimum conductors and optimal number off roads. So as an example here, you will find here is this one is conductors only. So if I click on it, you will tell you that the off demise the solution for this grant is not achieved. Why does a limit off 2.5 meters spacing or 40 conductors in one direction so should not exceed our 40 conductors and as a spacing should be at least off course, 2.5 meat. So if I click on OK, you'll find that in this case, the optimum solution is 21 conductor in X direction 21 conductor in why direction and the resistance will be highly annoying and the voltage off course will be, of course, high. So this off course does not solve our problem. Okay, so we cannot use this time use Another solution is that we can add roads. If I click on this one, you will find here is the optimum solution by using I regret and roads Okay, you'll find there's a touch of voltage. Is Liz Enza terrible value and the step also. But I will use seven conductors in X direction and seven conductors in my direction and that 2243 roads with a grounding distance Aito So find here at 2000 roads. This is a very large event. Okay, so what we can do, we can at first we can. It changes the amount off his base as the great size increases the number off conductors required will decrease. So as an example, I will see 100 and the 100 and I'm going to choose a higher cross sectional area as an example 240. Now I will click on OK, using words out. Now I'm going to see the optimum number off conductors. If I click on it, you will see that again. The optimized solutions not achieved due to limit off 2.5 spacing or fourty conductors in one bikes. So let's see, if I use are 41 conductor and 4 to 1 connect with the resistance will be lower than before , but again see maximum and dizzy. A step will be exceeds the limits and the number of power conductors will also accept Syrian. So in this case, we don't have any choice except by adding growths. So we can add at 25 in X direction 25 why direction and a large number of fruits. So how we can improve this again? Okay, lets the thing cook together. OK, we can double click on this and we see here if I change is the size of the conductor to 400 . Okay, we said that during our rivers and answers we said in order to withstand this short circuit was sent at 300 and we can say ze rods. We'll see a grounding the growth we can say at the front selection or a different arrangement. So I'm going toe chills the roads, NZ corners off the bread here, here and here and here. Number off roads ist for zero amet our Zealand's off it. You can choose as you would like and the type of the copper and kneeled off course and its values. Now let's do another thing we can increase. Here's the number off conductors. Example six, and it then I'm going to click on OK, so we have here our get with the roads in the corn. Now let's see if I can have a lower value. Okay, you will find here at two home and you'll find here. That's the problem. Is the only that torture value exceeds the terrible values, and we'll find here is a step is lowers and see limits and the resistance is low Now if I asked, the program toe reduces the optimum number off road. The end Z when doctors will find here, is that the optimal number off exit direction is six. Why six and a larger number of roots and often on opened five home. This is according to the program. Now let's do again. What if I change this to as an example then and another thing. Okay, let's see if this will be allowed to or not. If I click on this, you will find here against the touch. Voltage is our problem. So if I increases Z, our cozy, optimum amount will find here a large number off roads. So what if I change it? Seen or improved? Dizzy layer off soy so Let's see if I double click on here and the boat's E read at an example, Air five meter dips does this will cause a change or not? Ah, now this is N. C. You will find years of torture voltages again. Hi, but let's see if the optimum will change. The optimum is again a large number of frauds. So what if I edited again? That's, for example, choose a type of soil, moisture soil or according to our measurement. For example, it waas and then or let's see 70 and another 100 with this course that changed on. So if I click here, you will find here is that the soil is the one which effective. That's why we sent before that there is definitely off the soil is really effective in our analysis. So when we choose at very low resistance, we produced on a very low resistance. Boy, is that a safety officer soy So actually 170 is actual values, not an assumed the violence by me. So if this one is ah high value, then you will need a larger number off roads. As you said as you seem before 1000 throats in order to produce and all values or in order to reduce it to rubble, voltage and in case off his touch and step voltage. So this is our example on how toe designs the arse. Ingrid, using Z anytime. 158. Light Current Fire Alarm System Part 1: Hi and welcome everyone to our course for light current. So what are the different light current systems or zeolite current components? Number one, we have Z telephone system, Z fire alarm system, the MATLAB system, the data system, Z cctv system, and sound system. So those are the system which are going to discuss in our course. Let's start with Z, fire alarm system. What is the benefit of the fire alarm system? What is the purpose of the fire alarm system? Number one, early detection of Z fire and its location. So we use the fire alarm system in order to detect dizzy fire early before Z disaster happen and we identify specifically its location. This is the first benefit of our fire alarm system. Second thing, alarming people in the building to leave as soon as possible by using, of course, horn or a bell or a stoplight In order to allot, maybe it was at a fire occurred in the building and you have to get out as soon as possible. Number three, operating Z firefighting system. For example, if I would like to operate Z Bombay, which contain water in order to extend our fire or end our fire in the building or, or fight our fire. So this is second benefit, of course, of 40 fire alarm system also or weddings or doors automatically. It means that when the door is opened, it will remain open so that bevel goes out with immediately and we'll understand how we can do this. And opening Zai elevator in nearest floor in order to get people out of the building as soon as possible. Now, what are the components of z fire alarm system? Number one, we have in boats to our fire alarm system, such as the sensors and detectors. Sensors and dictators are used to detect Z. For example, this smoke inside our building, heat inside our building, or at multi detector which does z2 functions together. Or it can detect gas, for example, or carbon monoxide or other functions, as we will see now. Our boats Wednesday fire alarm system found, is that fire occurred or do we have a smoke or do we have a problem here? Then it will use the belts or sounder in order to alarm people inside the building. Control systems such as that relates, we will understand what is the benefit or Z control system. Also Z fire alarm or control Bannon, which is considered the brain for Z fire alarm system, which in which our sensors are connected to it and our outputs connected to it. And more than this, okay, We will have a separate lecture for z, different types of the fire alarm control panel. Finally, z wires used and conduits inside our fire alarm system. Let's start the Boise inputs. Number one, it is selected according to type of z place to be protected. And it's a coverage area. The coverage area, of course, for the detector itself. First, let's see z smoke detectors. We have two main types of the smoke detectors. The first one is called the Z ionization is smoke detector. This type of the smoke detector are more responsive to flaming fire or faster fires occurring inside our building. Also that dermal flaming here refers to fires resulting from flammable liquids, would obey Bar is starting on fire. This type of fire reduces a lot of flames with a limited amount of smoke. We now understand that Z ionization and smoke detector is responsive to that flaming fires or GFS the virus are getting such as from Z flammable liquids. What Babur, this one have a limited amount of smoke. B2 is a lot of flames. Now let's see how does this, I know this one, smoke detector workers or the principle of operation. Over z ionization detector. Now we will see that Zach ionization is smoke detector, is consisting of two electrodes, we can say the Arctic Rhodes, boasted and negative between them is connected to a DC supply is the first thing we have. Second thing we have at radioactive material. That radioactive material but reduces alpha particles. This alphabetical, of course, contain energy. And the Wednesday pass through the air between the two electrodes, the molecules of air itself, or electrodes as the electrons itself. We'll take energy from Z alpha particles. Okay, So when's the electrons, again energy, they will be ionized or ZAP molecules itself will be ionized or the atoms will be ionized. What happens here due to the presence of the energy or the alpha particles of Z radioactive material, Z gas or air between the two electrodes is ionized. So what does this mean? What does the meaning of ionization of air? Ionization of air means it's the air becomes a conductive. What happens here when the DC voltage is applied, an electric current will bars between the two electrodes. Why? Because the air here becomes ionized. Now Wednesday smoke enters our smoke detector or ionization detector. What happened when the smoke enters our detector here? What will happen? This will cause the current to be reduced because it will cause Zach radioactive, whereas the alpha particles to be scattered. So what happens here is the currently between the two electrodes will be reduced. So we have here a current detector, which fields is the current flowing in this circuit? When the current is high, it means that we have no alot of me here, no smoke. When the smoke enters here, this will cause the current to drop an a lot of well, okay. So this one will give a signal to our fire alarm control panel. This device use as more radiation source, which emits alpha particles that ionize air molecules between two electric charge that electrode's positive and the negative. With the application of a DC voltage to z electrodes, small ionization current flows within the chamfer between this air and flowing in. So I just circuit as a smoke enters, a decrease in ionization current, where a result, the current here is converted into a signal or a voltage is signaled by a trans impedance circuits. This one is used to convert the Z guarantee here into an equivalent voltage is signal. The detector itself. When signal voltage or voltage signal the ropes, the below at preset level. This and this time the alarm or the detector itself. Well understands there is a smoke. Why? Because the current dropped. So the voltage dropped or the signal voltage dropped. So Z a lot more will be produced. This type is currently perhaps it in many countries. Why? Because of course here we use radioactive material which emits alpha particles. This is perhaps in many countries due to the presence of radioactive material. And Zach, radioactive material is of course harmful to our environment. That's why this type of ionization is decaying for a lot of time. What is that change or what do we can use instead of this type of ionization smoke detector, we can use another type called Z for two electric smoke detector. This one can be used in instead of z ionization smoke detector. This detector is widely used in the fire alarm system. In zoos, the slow fire, such as in 1D and B bar stores, not used in places containing dust or smoke such as kitchens and Poissons. Why? Because, for example, in kitchens, we have already smoke from cooking. For example, the smoke coming from our cooking. This smoke will enter a smoke detector and activate it. That's why it's a smoke detector is not placed in the kitchen. That smoke detector, I mean, the ionization or the photoelectric is not used in science that kitchen, but we use another type, which is a heat detector, as we will discuss now. This one is not used in kitchens because they already have vapor or smoke. And the bathrooms that because for example, in having a shower, you will know is that zeros available is produced. Vapor is produced due to the presence of boil the water sources. One will also activate the small detector, or for example, in a accompany that EMBL Louise inside z bathroom. Some of them is smokes. So in this case it will activate the smoke detector. That's why it's a smoke detector is not used in kitchens and the bus fumes. And instead of Z heat detector in kitchens and bathrooms to detect fire. Principle of photoelectric detector. How does photoelectric detector works? This works on the principle of light scattering. Principal, principal, and the principal on bubble Bronzeville. Smoke sensing shampoo contains an infrared LED source. We'll see that here. This is our photoelectric detector and this is the equivalent diagram for it. You will find that it contains n for a red LED source. This one produces infrared and it is reflected and the goal is to add photo cell. So the amount of Z light reflected is very small, very small amount entering his photo cell. In this case, no, a lot of more will be produced. But in case of a smoke entering Z photoelectric, what will happen? The light will be more scattered or more than afflicted. Reflected light on Z smoke itself will go to the photo cell. So this is equivalent to more current or more voltage of reduced. That's why in this case we will have an alarm. So during an osmotic condition, only light reflected from the chamfer walls here exists, enters our receiver and shows up as a small photo current. As a small bar tickles enter Z sensing shambles and the cross the light beam of LED, more light reaches the receiver due to scattering like here. Receiver converted this photo current into a voltage signal, ends at detector Wednesdays voltage reaches app preset level. An alarm will be produced. Now we understand the Z heat detectors as Z smoke detectors, such as the ionization and the photoelectric. And we know that Z ionization is not used, or perhaps it in many countries due to the presence of radioactive material. Z photoelectric detector is the one which is commonly used. What is the coverage area of the smoke detector? We need to know the area in which our smoke detector will cover. This depends on the catalog ozone detector itself or the datasheet of the detector itself. But as an example, we will assume that we have a detector of a coverage area of 7.5 meter as our radius. 7.5 meter as a radius, 7.5. Now, we use overlapping between smoke detectors by using a distance in-between detectors less than 7.5 meter. As an example, five meter to prevent the reasons of any gaps. So what does this mean? Let's see first is the case of having a radius of 7.5 meter. Here we have a smoke detector and we have another one here. Another one here. Let's write the distance in between them. Okay, Ben, this one is 7.5 meter. Here. From here, this radius is 7.5, and this one is 7.5. This one is 7.5, and this is one is 7.5. So the distance froms our center here to here is 15 meter, 7.5 plus 7.5. So 15 meter. So if we make the distance between two detectors, double Z coverage, then you will find that zeros here as small area, which is a gap between them. This gap is not predicted against a smoke, smoke or gerd. Here is S for a small detector, we're not since it in, instead of using GAS 7.5, we will use at five meter or we will make the distance between them ten meters as if each one of them is five meters instead of 7.5. So that reduction in the distance in between those smoke detectors, what will happen? The two detectors will come close to each other. Unlike here. Like here. That distance between them 10-meter and zeros and overlapping between them. This will, what will cause this will better event is abrasions of any gap because this one will come close. This one will come close. This one will come to the right, this one to z left. No gap will be occurred. If we have a 7.5 meters, then we assume that five meter, we reduce that distance in order to prevent is abrasions of any gap between them. Now in z coordinate, for example, here we should have the distance between smoke detectors and this is 0.5 meters. That this area becomes the cover, the Windsor distance from here to here, five meter like here. Okay, So this one is z corrected xi1, this one is Z incorrect design. Remember is that as the height increases, the coverage area also decreases as the smoke scatters as it goes up. 159. Light Current Fire Alarm System Part 2: Now let's discuss Z heat detectors. As a heat detectors are used in places which normally have a smoke. Dust. Variables such as the kitchens, generator room, and boilers. Use here to the deck dizzy heat in place. So there are two types of it. One which is called z fixed it heat detector and donors are one which is called rate of fries heat detector. The fix-it heat detector when the temperature exceeds a certain value. As an example, if we reset z heat detector at 60 degrees laziness, then when it exceeds this value, it will provide a signal to the fire alarm control panel. For example, we would like the Xunzi transformer temperature not exceed 60 degree or 70 degree or whatever degree. We use heat detector to detect the heat of the surrounding in order to know if zeros are fault or not. Another type which is used as the rate of rise he detector. For example, if we are using the kitchen, the temperature may increase above a certain level. Okay. So there may not exist any fault or any smoke or any fire. But due to the presence of cooking, is that M Bradshaw goes high greater than a certain value. If we use that fixity detector, then it will operate. In this case, what do we use? We use rate of rise heat detector. It operates on Z, rapid rise in element temperature of six hundred one hundred seventy degree to 8.3 Celsius degree or 12 to 15 Fahrenheit increases per minute irrespective of the starting temperature. What does this mean? It means that if our temperature in the kitchen, for example, increases for, for, for example, seven degree increases, seven degree bear minute. So each minute that temperature rises seven minutes, seven siliceous oozes degree, seven cities as degree. When it feels this above as certain we can also select is at temperature as a starting temperature. When it increases beyond a certain branch on and z increases, for example, seven cities as degree per minute. Then what does this mean? It means that there is a fire here and the rate of rise heat detector will operate. This is called rate of rise because z Delta t, delta of z temperature over delta time, or d t over d t. Is that differentiation or their France interpreter wizards, big difference in time. Consider the rate of rise, the amount of temperature increase, bear minute or in a certain time. Rate of rise, d, d by d t, Okay, sorry, it means that d by d t from mathematics. Now, what are the, what is the coverage area of our smoke detector? Z hint detector? It depends, of course, on the catalog of the heat detector or the data sheet. But as an example, if we have a heat detector of coverage, a radius of 5 sitting meter, then we would make the distance in between two detectors, eight meters or four meters for each detector to allow overlapping between them similar to smoke detector. Remember that in smog detect total, we said that we and reduce that distance or makes the distance in between them ten meter instead of 15 meter y in order to allow overlapping. Similarly here that he detected each of them 5.3 meter. So this should be 10.6 meters, but we reduce this distance though, eight meters to allow overlapping between two heat detectors. Now of course, in the corner we will make the distance from the detector is the coordinate for meter, because each one here is four meters. Now another type called the Z multidivisional. What is the multi detector? It can be used to detect both heat and smoke adds the same time. It is used in blazers such as a transformer room, motor room, and etc. It can cover a radius of four meter, which value also according to the catalog itself. Again, Z four meter is the coverage area for one he multi detector. In order to allow overlapping, we can make the distance between them as the coverage area for each one to 105 meter as an example, or sorry, meters. So we will reduce this radius, which is a four meter, 2.5 or three meters to allow the overlapping between detectors. Another type is the dark the detector, we know that we have h of x doctors fire may occur inside it. So we need to boot an detector. Instead of using, of course, he detected, we use duck the detector which is blazed here at the entrance of Z duct in order to detect the smoke or Z fire inside the HVAC and ducts. It provides early detection of his smoke and broad acts of combustion by presenting air moving through the HVAC ducts. It is presented at the entrance of the air ducts in order to detect the Z, smoke or detect disease early fire. The fire occurring inside the ductus cannot be detected by his smoke detectors. It can be detected by the usage of Z dr detector. Another type used in the fire alarm system is that beam detector. What is that beam detector? Beam detector is used, of course, in instead of z and the smoke detector and heat detector. What I mean by this, when we have a blaze which have very large height or very high, in this case, we cannot use a smoke detector or heat detector because the distance or the height will be very high. So scattering off smoke will be very large. So in this case, we will use that beam detector, where we have two parties of 81, which is called Z transmitter. And the answer is a receiver, okay, between them at beam, beam, which is provided by the transmitter. And the smoke will cut this beam so we can detect the Z fire. It is used in places which are very high, like shopping commands, farms, open areas. It is based on the walls at a height two from 2.2 meter so that humans don't cut it up to 25 meters as the height from the ground forms the floor itself, from 2.2 meters up to 25 meters. And the Windsor small guts is a beam. It will be able to detect z reasons of fire. Z transmitter can send from 5200 meters in distance. So the distance in between the transmitter and the receiver, or reflected up 200 meters. It can be a receiver or it can be transmitter then reflected back to Z and metal unit. Okay, so when z is small cuts eight, you will find that the amount received will be reduced. It can cover a width of 7.5 to the left and 7.5 to 0. We have another type which is called dizzy gas detector. This detector is used to detect as the gas leakage. For example, used in gas pipes, gas stations, kitchens, gas fields, or petroleum fields. We have another type of z detectors are called the Z carbon monoxide detector. This is very important Victor, and you will understand why use the in places which have a probability of a mention of the mono or carbon monoxide gas or CuO. This gas is produced from Z cars or Z motorbikes and its other Z Carson produces combustion. Combustion itself will have a gas called the Z carbon monoxide along with other exhaust gas as the carbon monoxide. If the value of it exceeds a certain limit, then this will be not good for the environment and to humans. So this carbon monoxide detector is usually found in z garages where a lot of guards installed and do we have to detect exam carbon monoxide presented exceeds a certain level? Used in garage and furnaces, covers a radius of four meters or four overlapping. I'll find that four meters and at the same time overlapping betweens carbon monoxide detectors. Now we have another component in our fire alarm system, which is the man will break glass or coal points or manual stations. They are all the same thing. What does this do? It assembly if we have if someone found that Z fire occurred. Or a smoke or any problem. And the fire alarm system did not start yet. A human can break this gloss and the breast or bottom, which will give N, a lot of methods. If an alarm systems that as a fire occurred, you will find that use the by individuals by breaking the glass and the pressing Z port on weekend operate, the fire alarm system. Are pleased at x0 corridors as you see in this image. And the close to the emergency exits and the stairs. So that's a human can break it and click on the bottom end. Runaway rosie emergency exits. It is placed at a height of 120 to 160 something meter. So that's a human can brace it is Lee and can reach it. It is at a maximum width of a 30 meters. You will find that the widths 30 meters from the human. Break glass in order that the human can go quickly to it and breast. As a human can reach it greatly. The maximum distance between units of a 45 meters, you will find the distance in-between, break gloss and another of a maximum of 45 meters. Now, let's have some important notes. Number one, if we have our light fitting obstruction or we have along near d or a diameter d is the diameter of it is D. Now, if we have a d, then the distance in between our detector and z luminaire itself must be greater than two d. The distance x should be greater than 2D to prevent smoke from coming into this area and stuck in it without going to the smoke detector. Now another note, if we have a void, void like this one with width or a height less than 100 millimeter. So in this case, what will happen? You will find here we have a smoke detector for example. And this one, it does mommy detect the smoke. For example. If we have a fire can go like this. Going here. Those is void and the collected inside z, void here. And Wednesday fire increase to a very high value. The smoke will be very large until it will go to this two detectors. In order to take this if or early, we will both here on Amazon smoke detector in this point. In order to win Z fire or the smoke won't goes to the void, we will detect it using another detector because when they fire goes or the small goals to this void, this TO detector cannot detect date, so we will need Amazon detector inside the void itself. Now another thing that the brake loss, it is fitted along the z exit or does that emergency exit remembers that adds the exit Z fire alarm should be blessed at the opening of the door, you will find this door opens in Z and Z right here. So as the fire or Z break gloss should be blessed here besides the opening of the door itself. But not here. Not here, for example, because that person will go and the brake Xin go back and go to the door, which is illogical. So in this case, we both Z break gloss besides the door itself so that the individual can break the glass and press a button. And zinc goes through 0. 160. Light Current Fire Alarm System Part 3: Now let's discuss X0 outputs of Z fire alarm system. So z fire alarm system consisting of inputs such as Z sensors or XY detectors, which detect smoke or the gas or fire or whatever. They provide signal towards the fire alarm system and z fire alarm system or a control banana itself, as we will discuss them in the next lecture. They Z fire alarm control banner provides a signal to outputs to our robots inside our building. Robots such as the bell or Z sounder, or Z horn, or a strobe light like this one. All of these are considered as output. So for our system, in order to allot, maybe able to fire or guilt, we have Z bell, which is this one. Sound alarm when located at z exits and emergency exits, It's a sound DDB or disable depends on the noise in place. As we will see inside z apart for the sound system inside our course, you'll notice that z sound system or the speakers used or DBA required in a place depends on that blade itself. For example, z dB in an office is different from 0 dB inside the arrow airport, or the DB inside the factory and etc. So according to the IDB, you'll select the Z type of speakers and z dB required in place to a lot of maybe even if anything happened. Now Zyban itself, it has IDB and disable require depends on Z noise in xy-plane. In order to allot, maybe we'll insert place and be himself is can hear the difference between normal noise and the alarm bell. We have honors of type which is called XOS drop light bill, this one. What does this do? It provides sound and light here. So it provides a sound alarm. And the light or from Andy through also use the for Z depth which can here, which cannot hear sound and dump be bored that the zeolite itself and the z sound when the world gives him an alarm, fire occurred. Another type is the horn. But you will see that the whole nerve provides an ADB higher Zamzee alone my bell, and of course as a strobe light, same as zebra about having a high decibel sound. This is used in very noisy places such as the airport. And factors in order to warn people or online may be able to set our fire occurred. Decibel 40 alarm should be at least 65 dB so that the human ear GAN, understand or feel the difference or the high DB or does the alarm itself. Now we have another component in our fire alarm system, which is called design control units, or modules or relays. So we have two types here and certainly one we will discuss in the next slide, control module and z monitor module. So what does this two components do in our fire alarm system? Z control module, it is used for doing some functions such as stopping elevators, the United States floor, stopping, zip rhombus or winnings or doors, or predicting a cuvette fans to get rid of smoke and etc. Simply, Zach controlling module takes is a signal out from the fire alarm system and translate it to an action. To our promise to our opening the door, control system, z operating HVAC system and so on. All of this is done by using exact control module. Zach control module is usually used when we would like to provide an address for any part which is not addressable inside the buildings such as belts. Now, let's understand this point. You will find that there are different types of Z fire alarm control panel. As we'll see in next lecture, such as the conventional type and address I will type. There are components in our file alarm system which are not programmed, such as what? Such as the bells. Bells itself is not programmed. Is the conventional components. Inside Zim z cannot be programs. They don't have an address or a zip file alarm system cannot identify a number for them. Okay, so in order to do this, we add a control module Tuesday pen, so that it takes is a signal from Z fire alone Control Panel and provides it to z belts. That control module is connected to zebras in order to provide an address for the address for the bell is identified now by the fire alarm or Control Panel. So for example, when a fire occurred in certain num certain room, for example, room number one. I would like to be able to inside that room number one by using a control module in room number one, zack control module itself has an address. By giving a signal to this control module connected to the bell, Tsar Bell will be operated. Rebel itself is not addressable. We don't have an address for it and I cannot identify it in our fire alarm system. So in order to identify it, I add to it a control module which gives an address to this spot or in your component, which is conventional or does not have an address, such as zeppelins. There is another component which is our monitor majora. So what does this component do? This one is used for monitoring some process, such as the floor or folder for firefighting system, braces of water, fire alarm control panel condition, damper, flow switches and etc. So what does this do? This simply is the reverse of the control module. What I mean by the reverse. Let's exhibit and at this point, the fire alarm control panel here, fire alarm control panel. We have here Z Bell case. This one is a belt, for example, connected to this control module, the fire alarm control banner. We would like to operate this spell. It provides a signal to the control module, okay, which will cause the operation of the signal here coming from the fire alarm or Control Panel and going into our belly or controlling bell. Now, here is our monitor. Majority will do the reverse. We have the fire alarm control Bannon, fire alarm control panel. We have, for example, z flow of water control system. For example, here this is flow rate of water. This is used in order to understand or know the condition of the flow of water inside the pipes itself. In firefighting system, I would like to provide water in order to turn off z fire or NDC fire or kills the fire or whatever or fight the fire. So this is done by using Z water or CO2, whatever Z usage or the method of firefighting. In order to make sure that our firefighting system is operating, we have to make sure that the water is flowing inside the pipes, fire fighting system pipes. We have here AC component which measure z flow of water. Now, I would like to, this component is convention and what does this mean? It means that it does not have any address. So I would like to know the condition of this or the rate of flow of water. So by using the monitor module, we will connect this, this component at two or monitor module, then monotonic module connected to the fire alarm Control Panel. So this one would provide a signal to z monotone module and the monitor majority will give a signal to the fire alarm Control Panel. We understand the nouns that in order to from the fire alarm controlled by two z bell or any convention or any part I would like to operate. I will lose a control module. It is obvious control means I would like to control it. But here, Monitor module, it means that I would like to monitor z condition of a component inside our firefighting system or our fire alarm system. So we give a signal from Z floret to the monitor module. And this monitor and module two, the fire alarm Control Panel and of course control module provides an address for this component, for example, a bell or a horn or whatever. Here is our monotone module will also provide an address for our flow rate component or any component in our firefighting system. Now we understand the difference in between. Z control module in our firefighting system and the z monitor module, there is another component, but before this, it's simply give us z indication for the conditions of our component, as we said now that from the from the flow rate through the monitor module and monitor maturity translates as a signal to a signal suitable for the fire alone control panel. And the fire alarm control balance knows that this signal is from the flow rate system because we have monitored module with a certain a programmer will address or code. Now we have another component in our system, the electromagnetic door holder. This is what is called an electromagnetic door holder. What does this do simply in our system? You will find that this one is used. The four are small metal here. This small part is attached to the back of the door. And this was positioned to come in direct contact with the electromagnet. We have here this electromagnetic door holder consisting of two components, this component and this component. So what happens here? Let me tell you something here in our doors or the emergency doors. We have here our door. Let's see here. This is, for example, our door. I'm bad at drawing because I am an electrical engineer. This is our, for example, and this one is at all now. This is one is closed. Now behind it, I bought, I bought this small metal blades. This small component is both at Z back of zeros. When someone opens the door, adds emergency. Or in the fire case is the allotment case. Z electromagnetic door holder operates. What does this mean? It means that when I open the door, the door will be attached to Z wall itself using this small component, the door itself, this door, this door, this door will be attached to the wall itself so that people will go out with from the emergency exit immediately and not everyone would like to open the door, adds the emergency case. Tsar door itself will be attached to the wall, buys the usage of the electromagnetic door holder. This component adds the back of the door and there will be a test to this component of z electromagnet. So that's the door will be opened to remain opened in the case of z emergency. When energized. In the fire case Z system itself or the fire alarm control panel will provide a signal to Z electromagnet or electromagnetic door holder so that when the door is closed, it will remain attached to it or hold the Z metal blade to Z electromagnets who's at the door will remain open by providing a signal to close relay contact so that z voltage, for example, 24 volt, will be connected to this electromagnetic and the make or remain or megs, a door being opened all the time. In case of course, in case of emergency. Now, if I would like to open the door, if the emergency now is ended, I will simply click this red button so that Z door holder will be released. Or for example, when I click here as the contact will be opened so that 24 volts across z electromagnet will be removed. The door will be opened. Normally. We understand the nouns at the electromagnetic door holder simply by using the fire alarm Control Panel. It provides a signal to Z electromagnet so that it makes buret the relay so that the electromagnet remains attached or metal blades remains attached, the two z electromagnet, so that's the door will be opened all of the time during emergency exit. There are also some extra components inside our fire alarm systems, such as number one auto dialer. When a problem is detected inside our system or inside our building, it will instantly communicate the problem to z correct on coal personnel with a recorded message so that it can be quickly rectified or can be used the two cone fire with recorded message. What does this mean? Simply, the auto dialer inside the fire alarm, control banner, Windsor fire alarm or Control Panel, senses braces off a fire or a smoke or any fire inside xy-plane. Zen auto dialogue will communicate with the fire company or the fire alarm or firefighting system, firefighting system company that will communicate with them without recorded message, with a recorded message that we have now a fire occurred inside our building. And its address is, for example, address the street, the building itself. And you should come as soon as possible to fight this fire. Order air cold, someone which is responsible for the fire alarm system, components and science. The fire alarm control band is the power supply battery battery charger in order to operate the banner for at least 12 hours. Why? Because of course, we will not supply our panel from z normal power supply because the fire may burn is the wires and cut all xy electricity from Z building. That Z of fire alarm control panel should be separate from Z. Fire alarm control panel supply should be separated from the main supply. Also, we will use App rental for fire reported, Zia fire reports over the fire occasions where the fire occurred or Wednesday fire occurred. And it can be used for recording false. It's a date and time. Even when testing the fire alarm system at z. At first time. Now we discuss the main components of our far alone and Control Panel or the fire alarm system. Now in Xilinx, the video or in the next lecture, we will start discussing the different types of the fire alone control panel and the difference between Zen. 161. Light Current Fire Alarm System Part 4: Hi everyone. In this lecture we would like to discuss the different types of Z fire alarm control panel. We have here four main types of Z far alone controlled Bannon. Number one, we have the conventional type. We have z analog addressable, Z addressable type, and z wireless type. We have in Z fire alarm control panel for a main types of Zim. Now let's go and discuss each of these types. The first type is the conventional fire alarm uncontrolled manner. This type of panel used in small applications with limited budget. So you'll have to remember that Zack convention at is sheep. It is used in applications with unlimited budgets, such as in a garage for the protection of the garage, or hangars or open areas. So those are the three main areas where we will use, or the three main applications where we use z conventional. Why? Because they are open area. As fire can be located easily by just looking at the blaze. And at the same time it is used when we have a limited budget or low amount of money. Just notifies us that fire occurred without telling us that location of the fire in the addressable or in the analog addressable. We know that each of our component, such as a smoke detector, detector, multifactorial, or any type of detectors will tell us or give us a signal. Telling us is that a fire occurred in my own location. And I know that this type or the INS addressable type or is the analog addressable, this detector will have an address, so I will know exactly where the fire occurred. But in conventional type, all of our components here does not have any address that we cannot know that location of the fire, but the convention is divided into zones, as we'll see in the next slide. This type is conventionally not addressable, which means that we can not detect exactly where the fire occurred. As fire alarm me detectors does not have any addresses or don't have any addresses. That system means that conventional is divided into zones. For example, we have zone number one with 20 detector, zone number two with 50 detector and so on. So Zona per one, when any of their detectors, for example, detect two, number two, or detect on number four or whatever is detected or here, or braided or found smoke, then we know that the fault occurred in zone number one. We know that a fault occurred in Zona heroin, if any of these detectors are great. But I don't know which of these detectors was the cause of the fault. Okay. Now, again, let's say a business that's all number one contains a 20 detectors. So if any of the detectors operated or any of the tech tools, if I went to heat or smoke or whatever, then we know that Z fire alarm control panel knows that a fault occurred in this zone with two contains 20 detectors. But we don't know which of these detectors operated. If a fault by any of the detail towards the end zone, number one, we will have an alarm hazards fire occurred in the zone. But not knowing which a detector or which Rome have Z fire. We have to add end of line resistance at the end of each zone in order to prevent the Z short circuit. And all understand this in the next few slides. The inputs and outputs are both of them are in separate zones, they are not together. The inboard such as Z detectors, smoke detectors, heat detectors, the break as the manual breakpoint or cold point. All of these are considered as inputs to our system. So as you are alone in a zone or in multipolar zones, but the outputs will be in a separate zone alone. Now, let us see a small example on the conventional fire alarm control Bannon. So here we have our fire alarm control panel. Is this is our fire alarm Control Panel. And you'll find here a system, a system reset. If we clear the default, we click on z proton in order to clear the alarms here, we have Zoom number one a lot. This is for example, Zoom number one. This is, for example, zone number to its other. So for example, this is, for example, fire alarm circuit, fire alarm, fire detection zone number one, fire fire detection zone on part two, and etcetera. Here, Z a lot of means that the output is the alarm or what gives us the alarm, which is the outlet, such as the horn or a bell or a stoplight or whatever. Number one here is for Z, alarming means the outputs zone on B2. If we have another zone for the output zone one fault zone to a fault here, for example, zone one and zone number two. Now, the most important thing for us here is the end of London resistance. What is the benefit of this resistance? This resistance is in kilo ohm and we connect it at the end of Z line. Now we have, for example, for the smoke detectors, for example, we have a group of small dictators and to call points, you will find that here two wires Going out of fire alarm control banning. This one representing zone, this zone containing 1233 detectors here or two detectors and one called point. Now two inputs, two wires coming out of the fire alarm Control button, going into Z, smoke detector and better into it, another detector. Let's use the laser pointer. Here. One wire and another wire entering the z first detector and honors or two wires here going into the second detector and etc. So all of them are considered. The ads in parallel are connected in parallel. Now at the end or the end of the zone, we both an end of line resistor. What is the benefit of this resistor? This resistor is used to make the fire alarm control panel differentiate between the short circuit case and z open circuit case. What does this mean? Let's make it clear for you. Now. Assume that we don't have and offline resistance. So this terminal, and this terminal is open circuit. If for example, what gives this wire cutoff? Assume that this wire is Scott by any problem inside the building, that this one is cut off. If I click on z core point, not saying go reach that far along control banner. Because Z wire itself is cut off and the fire alarm control panel does not know that this one is cut off y because z normal condition is open circuit. When this one is cut off. Also we have open circuit, so the fire alarm control balance does not see any problem here. It is an open circuit case. So in this case, what will happen? We use or we add an offline resistor of a kilo-ohm. A small current will pass, a small current year passes. That Z fire alarm control balance knows that we are in Z normally state. But if this wire is cut off, Zen, no current will pass. The fire alarm or control panel will notice that there is an error or a problem inside our circuit. That's why we use the end of line resistor to differentiate between short-circuit or open circuit and fold the case. I think it's clear now. Now here's an example of a conventional or a larger conventional system. We have here on two lines coming out, which is called as zone two lines. They are going to group of smoke detectors, heat detectors, and etc. And at the end we have a resistor. Is this resistor of in kilo ohm here, for example, 4.7 kilo ohm. Smoke detector, the detector, smoke and heat detector or multi detector, a smoke detector he detected and etc. And you will find here another zone, four detectors and including of course, manual cold point with an end of line resistor. And another zone here for the outputs, zone for the hours and Endo Florida systems, for example, ten kilo ohm, bell, bell sound, stroke or sort of light and its other. Now, there is something which is really important here. And I would like you to notice it. Now, if I would like to have a conventional system similar to or close to addressable system. What can I do? The addressable Let's see me or let me know exactly where the fault occurred. But the conventional will tell me that this complete zone have a fault. In this case, some b will become smart about this. And the ad and remote LED light close to z smoke detector, for example, existence smoke detector operated, then this LED light will be turned it on z, for example, if this smoke detector operated, that remote LED will be operated. And at the same time, Z fire alarm control banner will notice that there is a fault inside Z zone, the complete zone number one. But in order for me to know, whereas exactly default and without going into each of the detector I assembly go to Z LED light and see which of these slides is on. So I know now when this one is on, I know that the problem is in this room. Are you in this smoke detector? By using here, I improve this act conventional to become closer to the addressable. But the addressable here, the addressable is much more better. Why? Because it will tell me from the fire alarm control banner is that a problem occurred in Ron number one, number two or number three or whatever from the fire alarm control panel, I will know exactly where the fire occurred. But in the conventional, I will have to go to each room to know which one of these smoke detector operated. Now it is clear the difference between Z S smoke detector as the conventional detector, and by adding LED, it becomes a closer too. X0, x0 addressable type, as we'll see now. Another single find here is there is an output here, 12 voltage DC for example. This one is used, affords them magnetic door contact. According of course to the voltage or the type of z electromagnetic torque contact. I will know which I would, I'm going to give it. You will find here at resettable DC 24 volt output, non-recyclable DC 24 volt output. This tool is used the 40-watt. Let me make it clear for you. Now, the smoke detector, we have two types of detectors. Detector, which can be two wires, such as in this case, two wires. Where do we connect the Z Farallon control panel to it, to wire through the smoke detector. That this wire well carries a signal of operation of a smoke detector when a fault OKRs and at the same time provide power to the smoke detector. So this two wires is used for power and at the same time provide the signal of z operation of the smoke detector. In this is in case of a two wire smoke detector. Another type, for example, a four wire, a smoke detector, water for wire detector, two wires, which is from the panel and to other wires for Z supply of the smoke detector. So for example, if we have, if we have smug difficult like this one, this is a smoke detector. So this one will have 1234 wires. Wires, forums, the zone itself. Going here as a zone announcer, two wires for what? For the supply. Get it connected here to the supply voltage here, which is at 24 volt or at 12 or voltage for example. According to the smoke detector time knows that we understand that now is the benefit of this outward in order to provide power for four wire alarm or a four wire detector. Now we will find another output here. But before this, we know that we have are resettable and the non resettable. What's the difference in between them? That resettable by pressing a button, we can reset our smoke detector. And another type, we have xenon resettable, which means that we have to cut off z electricity from the smoke detector in order to reset it. Now we have also here a group of our relay outputs alone relay output, which is for example, for the bell, sounds, syrup or whatever. And the fault relay out, supervisory relay out all of this. What is used, for example, they are used for different functions. For example, we can use them for making subtle open such as the electromagnetic Contact or Contact, stopping dizzy pumps inside that building. Rhombus four, which provides power, which will provide this water to the HVAC system. Contexts which operates fans of the age of excess them. Contexts which will make the innovator come closer to stop in the nearest floor. So this really I was used to make them do different functions according to what I wanted to do in our system. I hope now is that Zack conventional type system is clear for you. 162. Light Current Fire Alarm System Part 5: Now we have another system which is called the z analog addressable system. So what does this system do? This system is different from the conventional because it is addressable, which means that each component have an analog addressable number. It is used in blazes, having a low number of floors and low number of sensors. As a small hotel or a small building. It consisting here of loops, not zones about lobes, as we'll see now, which means that it goes through the detectors and get back to z panel. Unlikes and so on which it goes through detectors and ended by end of line resistor. This panel is addressable, which can tell us exactly where the firewall or which detector operate. In this systems at detector sense, it's conditioned Tuesday panel and since abandoned designs with RZ, a lot of them existed or it is a false alarm. This system can be subjected to errors. Why? Because the signal providers by this type of detectors is analog signal. If more than one detector provided AC signal or analog signal to the panel, the fire alarm control banner becomes a confused and don't don't know if it is a false alarm or it is an actual a lot. That's why it's the analog addressable is not usually good because it has or is subjected to errors. But it does not require Endo flying resistor because it consisting of lobes, as we will see now. But it's of course, is of course higher than the conventional because it tells us exactly where the fire occurred. Now it is an example of a loop. You'll find here a smoke detector, multi-actor Ionization Detector, multidivisional and so on. And here we have the core point. We start here from the beginning of the loop. And the goal is throws us move through our detectors, then get back to our system. Unlike z, z, z previous time, which is the conventional type, we had two but at the end and end of London resistor. But here we start from the panel itself and goes through the doors and they get back to our planner. You will find here Z Alberts here Z bolts, and we have the arbitrary layers, for example. So here is our wood itself can be at zone. We have an indoor flying resistor or it can be a loop. This depends on z analog addressable type, or depends on z catalog of z analog addressable type. So according to the data sheet or z analog of z or z, catalog of z and fire alarm control panel. You will know that there are types which again be have an end of land resistor or it can be zones, whatever. You can control them as you would like. I mean, the outputs here. Some of them can have an end-of-line resistor as a zone for the Alberts or can be a lobe which does not have any offline store. And there are types which can accept the boost of their solutions. According to Z Farallon control banner, you will understand at which it as on or is it a loop or it can be both. What is the difference between the analog addressable and z conventional? You'll find that it's in the analog fire alarm system. We have a loop. We start with our wire, going through Z detectors and get back to our system. Of course here, see both of them and the negative. Now another tribe, which is the conventional fire alarm system, we start by giving zones. We started here this line representing as on. And they can be one detector or a group of detectors. Okay, So here in ZAP, conventional group of zones or a group of zones about here in the analog, we use addressable, of course, we use loops. Now let's have Z addressable type or Z served the type which is addressable, this one is z1 is commonly used along with the conventional time. Use the MBB places which having lots of divisions such as the hospitals, hotels, and demands. What I would like to know exactly where the fault occurred. So cost is higher, of course than the conventional. Each detector here have an address. The provide these here are binary signal to a fire alarm control banner. Unlike the analog, WHO provides an analog signal, error in this case, is lower as lower than before, because the signal here can be 0 or one primary signal about z. Analog addressable had an analog signal. So if more than one and Detector provides a signal, z Farallon control panel will be confused. But here, if more than one detector provides a signal, there is no problem at all. Because Z system itself will know, well differentiate between different signals. Easy. Because the signal here is binary. But obviously the analog have an analog signal, z far along them. Control balance takes the decision of operating a lot of fire fighting system similar to the analog addressable, consisting of lobes similar to the analog addressable would she can contain both in boots and elbows together. Here we can add the inputs and outputs inside the addressable together in one loop. But in zones, for Zack conventional, the embassy was in separate zones and the outputs are in other zones. The inputs and downs cannot be in the same. Xun's does not require end of line resistor seminar to the analog type. Now how to address z detectors or how to add an address to that detector itself. We'll find is that there are different types of detectors. One which you can have behind it and address like this one. So what does this mean? You will find that here, Z downward line or that Otto is downward and tie bit on. What does this mean? It means that when I bought this one, moves this bottom downward. It means that it is operated. This one is not operated, not operated, operated, operated, and etc. What does this protons represents? This is a binary address. What I mean by this, if you are understanding from Computer Science that address or Z binary values is two power 0. Tube R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, to borrow 72 more eight and its other aisle finds that here Z binary to power 0 is one. Power one is two to B2 is for two bar, three is eight, and etc. When I move Z line that wouldn't work. It means that I am operating this number. So this one is one. And we have to, if we have this only to operated, means that we have one plus two, which means it is address is three. But here we operating one, we are operating two, we are operating 3246. So one velocity to plus 32 plus 40, say ABB 64, give us nine to nine. So the address of our detector here is 99. And the Farallon control panel well-known that the address here is 99. By a changing is a support once I up and down, we can control is the address of our detector itself. So let's clear all of this forest. Now if we have seven bit binary della switch up to 128 detectors. If we have seven bet, you will find here we have 1123456, 789 bet here. So C9 bet here can give us a very large number of detectors. By switching this on-and-off, we can know how many times that we can get or how many detectors that we can get. Now for example, if I would like to see the number of detectors in which I can get from this two protons only. We can get exists two are up. Then I can give it an address equal to 0. Or I can give it an address equal one when I exhaust move this art board. Or I can give it. And moves this downward and upward. So we can have addressed to or can have address by operating this top button. So we can have address city. We can have 0 when this tool buttons are up. We can have one. When this bottom is only operated. We can have to win. This bottom is only operated. We can have city when boss bottoms are operated. So we can have here four conditions or four detectors. So this means that we can have two power n detectors, where n is number of bits, number of Betsy here. So for example, if I have one switch only, we can have how many detectors to power one, which means to detector. One can have 0 address and the ulcer we have one address or address number one. If we have seven, bet Zimmerman who will have two parts, seven, toolbar seven, which is 128 detectors. Now, as an example, if we have, for example, two to the power line, through the power lines. For example, in this case, those double line representing the total number of bits. In this case we have nine bits, so we can have two power line detectors. Now another type of addressing detectors, which is called automatic according to their physical position. So according to that distance in between the Farallon uncontrolled manner and dizzy detector itself. We can know detector or given address automatically. Do that detected, the fire alarm control panel will give an address automatically. Another method is that decimal added switches up to 99 detectors. This is that this email address images. You will find that we have two rotating wheels, one for z tense and one for z on it. So by changing this, we can have addresses up to 99 detectives. This can be behind the detector itself. For example, we both hears that dense as 0. And we bought here is that you wanted to add city. We have a number equal to, equal to. So we have 0. We have sitting this address of detector itself, the rest sitting. Now if the tensor, for example was six, the units was nine. So what does this mean? We have six and Z dancers and dynein add Xeon, its symbolism, mathematics. We have an address of 69. By rotating these two wheels, we can change the address of our detector. Now how we can prevent the Z short-circuit inner loop. If we have a short-circuit, how we can better advantage. It's happening inside D control lobe of Zinn as the loop of Z fire alarm controlled manner, obviously addressable type. We started from here. We have a group of detectors in fraud number one or first floor, Zen group of detectors in seconds the floor then grove of detectors in the third floor, growth of detectors in the force of law. And then we get back to the fire alarm control Bannon. We have here a group of detectors in first floor, second floor, the floor and force of Lord. Now the isolator itself, we add an isolator to isolate our fault. For example, if our fault occurred in one of the detectors of first floor, I will use the isolate or at the beginning and at the end or to isolate this part. Now someone will tell me how can I send the signal to the fire alarm control panel? Simply, you will find that our detectors here for example, is this detector. If they take this problem, it can send it to signal to the far alone controlled Berlin. From here, from itself. Going like this, like the fire alarm Control Panel. Or it can send design signaling from here. Like those if our lawn control panel, that's why it's called the loop, we can send it from this direction or in the other direction. Now, if a fault or care, if a fault or curved in our system, you will see that I bought tier an isolator. If a short-circuit occurred here, I bought an isolated or adds the beginning of this floor and at the end of this floor. In order to isolate here, this one cut off the circuit from here, and the cutoffs the circuit from here so that the remaining globe will operate normally and sends its signal to the fire alarm control panel easily. We add an isolate or adds the beginning and at the end of our at lobe or our floors. After, at 20 detectors or after detectors in each floor, we add an isolated to isolate the circuit from remaining loop. If we have a short circuit here, we isolated by you by operating this one and this one. If we have a short circuit here, then we will operate this one and this one. Whereas this detector will provide signals through here. And those detectors old provide from the A-bar direction. Some detectors in now include isolators in signs himself is if you have a short-circuit 0 surface will, whereas the isolator itself inside them well orbit it and isolate the detector itself without isolating z, complete zone or complete part of z loop. 163. Light Current Fire Alarm System Part 6: Now let's discuss that rebuilt or panel. It is used in addressable system when we have a control room, control room at a large distance from z fire alarm control panel. And would like to see what is happening in the fire alarm Control Panel. We use repeated panel connected to the main panel in order to see what is happening in the fire alarm Control Panel. And sometimes we can do some functions or controls in that main fire alarm controlled manner. So in the end example, we have the fire alarm control panel in the middle of our place, whereas that distance between it and z detectors is not large or we have Z maximized or optimized, is that distance in between the Farallon control balance ends at detectors. Now, we need to see what's happening in that, in this place. So on. Instead of going too far along controlled manner itself, we will use RB2 Urbana at our own, for example, or a security role, for example, to see what is happening. This repeated Banner would be connected to the main fire alarm Control Panel. This rebate or takes information from the Farallon Control Panel and transmits it. Those are a bit off so we can see what is happening there without going to Ximen fire alone control banner. Also, we have two types of the repeater panel. Number one is called dizzy passive repeater panel number two and active radiator panel that repeat our panel is used the two displays at men fire fire alarm, Bannon information as well as a user can control some parameters from it. Now, if sorry, beta only information but does not provide any controls of that main fire alarm control banner. Then it's called the passive. Passive. It means that it just to show with what's happening on Zara Beta been without it been being able to provide any controls on the fire alarm control banner. On a meter can provide information as well as controlling desire or controlling some of the parameters of Zen main, fire alone control panel. Then it's called dizzy active repeat or panel. Again, we have two types, passive and active. Passive. Use the tool show only what's happening on the Farallon Control Panel. Active, it means that we can control some parameters. And at the same time we see what is happening inside our control panel. It is used also when we would like to add lobes or extension for our fire alarm system, but at the same time, our fire alarm control panel reaches its full capacity. So each far along Control Panel have a specific capacity or number of loops, number of and detectors. Now, what if I would like to increase the number of lobes or have extension? What I can do in this case, we have two options. One is two-pi, fire a lot of them control panel, another one, which is expensive for us instead of doing exist. So we will add R0 beta, beta, which you can add or increase the number of lobes in our system. We use repeater to control an area with its slopes and send information to the fire alarm Control Panel or Z main banner. That the fire alarm control banner is the main bundle or Z master which does everything ands or a Beta results to control the sum loops. And since it's information back to the main control panel. Here's an example of three banners from my three different companies. For example, we have z co per panel, notified panel, and General Electric panel. You will find here is a different information about them. For example, by mentions number of lobes. For example, Cooper, six loops, maximum of six ropes, this 110 lobes, then this one is stained lobes of what each CPU. It means that we can add several CPUs in order to increase number of loops. The capacity here you will find 200 device balloon. That device means Z control modules or monitored modules or that injectors itself. All of this are called the devices. Here we have in each lobe, or the total number of lobes here. Total number of detectors is 159 detectors blast 159 modules. So what does this mean? One hundred, five hundred nine detectors such as Z, a smoke detector detector and et cetera. 195 materials means that we are talking about what Z control modules or Z monitor modules. Here in xij General Electric we have 125 detectors. Blas 125 modules, bear loop. Now the screen here, different types of the screen. Z ***** here, it should be addressable inside the loop itself. Here it is our conventional, here is our conventional and it has separate loop, separate low for this separate lobe, which is conventional for this horn time. That here it is, fixed it inside the loop as advice, so we can put it inside a loop. Repeat our panel. Here. We can both it has fixed it but at a separate, new separate loop for it. For that repeats itself. Here our loop for rebuttal itself. But here we can put that rabid as apart of the loop, including all of our devices. Here you will find that isolated, for example, you'll find every device has a short-circuit isolated belt in. Here you will find that we install an isolated device every 20 to 25 devices. Devices means that we have that control modules, the detectors, every one is called a device here, similar to it and install one isolator bear or every 20 to 25 advices. Here, for example, is that network upto secretes three panels, up to 99 panels, up to 64 panelists. This is the network or how many loops which can be bought in a network. Addressing of their components here, automatic software from the Bannon. So we have an automatic software for the panel itself, which again give address for each component. Here, rotary switch off from each device. You'll remember that we said that we have two whales, tens and the units where we can buy a switching it behind that device itself, we can. And it gives the address for the device. It can be electronic here addressing was no need to have switches. Here relate to a 120 voltage AC. Different types available three and bare maximum, not available only 110 volts AC. Not available only 24 volt AC. Now with the brand or okay or neglect. Neglect is S, this is adult holder, for example, working at, at 24 voltage E C or 220 volt AC, 24 voltage DC, or a 110 volts AC, or 24 volt AC, 120 volt AC, whatever it is, the door holder, it should be have this specification according to the type of z panels. Now Amazon type of z panels, which is the last one is the wireless panel. Here we don't use any wires in-between balance or detectors. It is used in the ancient buildings, museums, and the blazes, which is difficult to Fault, breaking the walls to add wiring of detectors. We said that xhat detectors is connected to the conventional or the addressable using wires. Now it is difficult for us to those in ancient buildings or museums. In this case, we use z wireless, which does not have any wires to connect between Z. Wireless panel ends at detectors. It is, of course, is the most expensive type of panels. It has a limited range of one kilometer square as an area, and it decreases with braces on concrete obstacles. It identifies automatically detectors, wireless, wirelessly, which is presenting inside that blends itself. Now we can connect an addressable panel with a conventional or a wireless panel. We can also have one main banner ads as a master panel and other auxiliary panels in other buildings. Panels which Greg, control building. Okay. We have one panel for each building, for example. And the one main benefit which receives the information from all of the other patterns. We can have one main bundle into security rule and each auxiliary panel control one building. Now as an example, we have this addressable file alone Control Panel connected to smoke detector, heat detector, straw Bly it, a horn, and so on. So all of them are in one loop. So the smoke detector here is addressable. So we don't need any module. He detector is also addressable, does not need any module. But for example, break point is also at as cold point is also a manual cool point is at addressable here. So it does not come in, does not need any module. So it's connected to Zillow and the other terminal is always for operating it. Strop horse also have two wires inside the loop and other for operating the horn and z store blight. We have here a conventional smoke and heat detector or a conventional multidimensional. In this case, that conventional detector cannot be connected to fire alarm controlled manner because it is addressing mode. So what I can do in this case, I will use a control module here which receives the information from Z multifidus vector and the converts it to z addressable fire alarm control panel. So the one which have an address here is the control module itself. As a control module is connected to the lobe itself. And that module connected to that conventional smoke detector. You'll find here a conventional manual code point is also connected to the small as a smoke detector. So both of them, when this one is breakdown or as a smoke detector, both of them are controlled. Buys this in both module, this one given address, representing both of them on venture smoke detector or the multi-factor and the man while Cole point that smoke detector connected to it and entrance LED in order to show the LED light when the smoke detector is operating. Also, the bell here is of course is not it is not addressable or conventional type. So in this case, we would need an output module in order to provide a signal to it in order to operate. So this one is also included inside z lobe itself as apt module, which are representing Zi Ben here. Now what are the cables used in our fire alarm system? Loop should not exceed lens mentioned the inside that data sheet to avoid voltage drop, of course, we should not increase that distance or a very long, so that's the voltage will decrease and z and smoke detector or our textures will not operate as a signal will not reach z fire alarm control panel. Z cross-sectional area used in that wiring. In our wiring of Zao, fire alarm control balance as rows as detectors and all of our components are positive and a negative multiplied by 0.8 or two multiplied by 1.5 or two, multiply by two to multiply by two bond five or tomato Blood by four millimeter squared as a cross-sectional area. Usually, we use that to multiply it by 1.5 millimeter squared. Is the distance exceeds a 500 meters, we use a higher cross-sectional area S to multiply by two or two, multiply by 2.5 y in order to decrease as the voltage drop. Remember that as cross-sectional area increases, current or z and z and z volts robo will decrease. Why? Because that resistance in this case will be lower, Susie voltage drop will be lower. The cable can have two types. It can be a fire redundant cable, or it can be fire resistance scalar z, fire downtown the cable can always extend the temperature up to 105 degrees celsius. Or fire resistance, which again will stand up to 750 degree or 950 series is degree or one hundred, ten hundred and fifty degree Celsius. This is a difference between result on redundant type and resistance time. The retard on the type have a lower degree Zanzibar fire resistance flame retardant on the cables. This one, up to 105 degrees celsius, resistance as bread or fire into a new area. So this type of cable is used to prevent the spread of fire into another area. Whereas the fire resistance subtype, which I have seven hundred and fifty, nine hundred and fifty or 1050, is a cable use the tomb maintains a circuit integrity and the continuing to work for a specific time and dark defined conditions. So this one of cables, they can withstand the fire for a long time. And at the same time we'll provide that signal, keep providing z power to the end, to the detectors. And at the same time will provide the power to provide signals back to the fire alarm control panel. This type is used for operating for a long time. The fire resistive here continue to operate in the presence of fire and are sometimes quality one hour or two-hour fire rated cables because he can withstand fire for a long time and the fire with a higher temperature. Now here's an example of a fire alarm system. We have one addressable fire alarm control panel containing two lobes. Now Z number of addressable smoke detector views. The year is 103 detectors. Addressable manual fire alarm station or Blake glass or manually break glass or manual called 0.30 to manually code point, addressable fire alarm sound or with a strobe light. This one would have 32, number of bits, 32. You'll find here is that fire alarm system network was all materials have a fire resistant cables. So in this case, we use that fire resistant decay one, we choose a standard high temperature, 715 on a hundred and fifty, one hundred, ten hundred and fifty and etc. We should have one quantity of the auto dialer, firefighting control panel, one Bannon, The one each of excess. So here's an example of the fire alarm system. We discussed in Z fire alarm system. Z types of penance use such as the conventional addressable, the analog addressable, wireless. And we'll discuss dizzy type of cable used. And we have here an example of the fire alarm system. 164. Light Current MATV System Part 1: Hi everyone. In this video we would like to discuss Z MATLAB system or Z muster antenna system. What is M muster antenna TV system? First, assume that we have a hotel which are consisting of 1 thousand rooms. And we would like to provide a satellite and the TV channels for each room or each apartment. We have 1 thousand rooms and would like to supply for each one satellite and the TV channels. In this case, we would need one cells and satellite dishes. And the one cells and tenderness. And the one thousandth receiver, one satellite dish for each room, 110 now for each room in order to get xy TV channels and one receiver in order to convert the Z signal into a video signal, video and audio signal need 1 thousand satellite dishes, 1010, one-thousandths receiver. Now as soon as that, if we have, for example, mindset and hot bird or Astra, we have two different orbits. In this case we would need to. So it was on satellite dishes. Each dish for each different satellite or for each satellite. In this case, we would need a large number of satellites. In this case, we will use something which is called MATLAB system or the muster and Telnet TV component, TV sustained. To use. In this case, we will use the MTV. Why? In order to use the least amount of required cables, receivers, satellite dishes, and tennis, and we will have more channels. Now what are the components of z MAT being number one, z dash and antenna satellite dish. Antenna satellite dish for receiving Z satellite, for example, mindset or Astra or hot birth order. Whatever in your exam or upset or whatever, which is used to get Zee TV channels. Z control units as switches or matrix switches, launch amplifier or launch amplifier, according to the American or British accent. Z satellite outlet cables. Those are the four main components in MATLAB system or the master antenna TV system. Let's discuss each of these components in details. Matlab, frequency range. Number one, this value, it changed or Z values of Z Frequency, as we'll see now, it changed it from one country to another. So according to your own country, you will understand what is the range or the frequency engine for TV channels. For the satellite we will know now. So as an example, in Egypt, we have on RF or radio frequency of TV channels. It ranges from 47 to 862 megahertz. This value will change accordingly to your own country, from one country to another. Z are divided into VHF or very high frequency channels, which ranges from 47 to 700. Remember that all of our channels for dv ranges from 4762. And apart from this, from 47 to 0 megahertz, is there VHF or Z high frequency, very high frequency channels. We have ultra high frequency alter, high frequency channels, which range from seven hundred, eight hundred and sixty two. So from 47 to 100 is that VHF from Sarah? A hundred and two hundred tickets. T2 is the ultra high frequency. We have a generalist in this range and the channels in this range. We will need, in this case, two antennas. One for z, VHF and UHF. This is a UHF, and this is a VHF. So we need two antennas. One which is UHF to get or receives that frequency from city one hundred and two hundred and sixty two megahertz channels and VHF to receive from $47 or a 100 megahertz. Now for the satellite, in this case satellite dish. For satellite, which is called IF or the intermediate frequency. It has a range from 950 to 2400 megahertz. This is a frequency of the channels of satellite. We use a satellite dish, B plus lnb. Lnb, to receive this channels, you will find here this is our satellite dish, and this is our L and B, which is fix it on the dish itself. Lnb, which is this one, is an abbreviation for low noise block, which is mounted on a satellite dish, as you see here, as this part is mounted here. It collect the z radio waves from the dish itself. And the convert this into a signal which is sent through a cable to receiver inside z building. So let's make it easy. Symbol Z waves are received or that radio waves are received on Z satellite dish itself. The lnb collected this radio waves and the converts to a signal which moves us through a cable. You will find that z LNB here having a Ford parts, it can be one or two or four plots. In MATLAB system we will need four ports. Why? Because we need to receive four different parts. Number one would need to receive high and the low band, vertical and horizontal, a lateralization. What I mean by this is there is our horizontal, high, horizontal, low, vertical, high vertical load similar to the receiver itself, when you started doing desert sittings inside the receiver itself, you will find horizontal high, horizontal or vertical high and vertical loads is representing a range of different channels. That's why I will need one to study for each of this one representing one horizontal, one horizontal, one vertical, one vertical load. This is for one satellite dish. Now we use one satellite dish to receive one satellite only, such as Z mindset, hot birth, Astra, upset or whatever cetera. For Z, UHF and VHF. And then we will use something, our device called Z poster or VHF slash UHF combiner. You want it to combine all the RF signal to get some assembly. This is, for example, n cubed by combining unit, this simply takes his UHF. Let's draw it. For example, takes that UHF and takes VHF and the combine them into one signal coming out from here, four channels. We cannot use one rotating satellite. Someone will tell me why I don't use one dish and make it rotate with our motor in order to get a Z and autonomous or time hood birth and autonomy, sono time, Astro. Because Zara answer is very simple because if you are considering a hotel, in this hotel zeros for example, one thousandth rooms. And in this room there are different people's watching the frontage channels at the same time. For example, someone would like to use z mindset. Another one would like to use the hotbed in another hotel room. This satellite dish will only get z and onset or heartburn. We have to use two separate satellite dishes in order to provide null set and hot birth at the same instant. Now another component in our system or MA TV system is the launch amplifier or Z launch amplifier. What does this do? Assembly is a strength of the signal at any point should be in the range of 55 to 80 db or decibel. This is the strength of the signal which should be received at our receiver. Our signal should be in this range. Remember that if we are talking about what the hotel, hotel will have a large distance from the satellite itself until reaching our room. So our signal will be exposed to attenuation or it's GDB will start to decrease. So in order to do this, we simply do with the same concept of power system. Involved system. We step up the voltage in order to increase the voltage in order to decrease zeros in our cable. So similarly here we step up z dB, for example, up to 110, for example, in order that when it exits, suppose the two attenuation or losses adds the end or adds a receiver. We will have 55 to 80 DC Bell. Z launch amplifier is used to amplify our signal. We use the launch amplifier for amplifying input signals for transmission. You will find here in this is an example of z launch amplifier. You will find here Z dominant TV or TV terminal, which comes from Z, UHF slash VHF combiner, is that combiner itself will give us one hour would go in here, z OS and one, we have four terminals here. One, you will see that here, horizontal law, horizontal high, vertical law, and vertical high. We connect the z4 terminals here from Z L of Z satellite dish. Here we are considering one satellite dish. The output will be amplified signal over the five input signals. Now, this is an example of a launch amplifier with a five input. Now let's see this one. This one is at nine input. What is the difference you will find here? This is a terminal for that TV. One terminal for the TV, and it comes out from here. Another terminal here you will find low band vertical, horizontal, vertical, horizontal. Similarly here, low band vertical, horizontal, hi band, vertical, horizontal. Now What's the difference is that we have an extra vertical, horizontal, high and low. We have this four here. And the now it is repeated Y AND gates of we have more than one satellite dish. If we have additional, like this one and another additional anchor, this one, this one which is on I'll set will provide from the lnb z4 terminals like this. This 14 terminals like this. Like this. We have four terminals here. Four terminals here for Z mindset for example, and one for us throughout or upset, for example. The outward here would be amplified signal for this dish. Here is the amplified signal for the other dish. Z amplified signal for it is that VHF, UHF combiner. This is considered the heirs Nian, a board or a line input launch amplifier. But this one is five in both launch amplifier. It takes for signals of VH, VL H, H H N vertical, high vertical, low horizontal, high horizontal law. And signal from Z VHF slash UHF combiner unit. It transmits the signal two switches, or Z matrix is switch or the cascaded matrix is switch, as we will see now. 165. Light Current MATV System Part 2: Now another component here in our system Z matrix is switch. What does the matrix is switched at all? It takes is Z four in both, x4 in what we have here, Z launch amplifier for example. This launch amplifier will provide signal, it's outward five signals. Assuming that we have one satellite dish, Z5 signals here, like this or this one. Let's delete. Arrays are saying this one, since it's, the arrows are in this direction. So the mode here, phi of terminals or input from here, which is coming from Z launch amplifier. Now, five input here is combined together. One going here. Like this. Each of this one representing a dominant or a point. This one is a point, this one is a point, this one is a point, and so on. Here, another point, another point on that point, and another point. So what does this point represent? For example, receiver number one in a specific rule, receivable number two in row number two, number 345. This five points or five terminals. Each of these terminals is supplied to our own. Now let's see this one. Similarly here, five terminals, each one will go to a room. Now z5 input here will bypassed to here. It will continue. For example, this one representing z first floor or the fifth floor. And this one is the fifth floor. Fourth floor. Again, we have 0 for which contains our satellite dish, Zen from 0 full supply. The floor if we have a building or five floors. So this is the fifth floor. Fourth floor. It comes up from z launch amplifier going to z matrix switch or the tab. What happened here? If z here is 110 dB or decibel, then it will provide signals going into different apartments or different rooms. Add, for example, 80 db. Why? Because it will travel a small distance until it reaches their own. Now here, this is called dizzy tab. What does the type do? It will provide a signal similar to the embolus here. 110 dB, z, five terminals in both, which is that vertical, high vertical law, Horizontal, Horizontal, low-end TV in bold here are the same signals which are going out here. And this one is called zeta, which is the same DB. That's the same time. I'm going to provide here signals of 80 db going to different receivers at the different apartments. Then in that negates the floor, we would have another matrix switch or another tab, which will take the input as a 110 dB. And again, we'll provide a 11088. I hope you get the idea. The matrix is switch, receives a signal from the launch amplifier and distributes them to a different bones inside the system. Example, if we have a matrix of five in it out, what does this mean? It means that it receives signals from the launch amplifier and reduces four hours. So four points in our system. It has a different ratings. For example, five in, for our mine in eight out, 1313 in eight out, 176 out, 17 in our 1712 out and etc. What does this do? You will find here is that what is the important for us is the input five input for which are representing one satellite and the plus one which are representing our combiner. This one is for from one dish and the forward from another dish. And one for z TV combiner. That's 13, would represent at three additions for 44 plus 1 fourth, that UHF and VHF combiner five is four plus one minus four plus four plus 1134 plus four plus four plus 13 additions and one combiner, do dishes, one combiner, one dish of plus one. A combined nine means that we have for from one dish and forth forums the other dish and the one which is from X0 combined unit, we have four n plus one, where n representing the number of dishes. We bought it here, one, then we'll need five in, slash whatever out. If we have two additional Zen, it will be 93, additions will be 13. And so on. Disgust scale, which means that instead of use it for other switches and at the same time for yours or you will find that this is a matrix switch. Let's show it. This is a matrix which is on, this is a matrix, a switch. And this one is Amazon matrix is switch, and we connect between them. So a distributed is for z, another matrix is switch, and at the same time distributes for z different users. Now Zika is given matrix switch or the tab. You'll see that here an image. You will find a launch amplifier providing for an matrix is switch which distributes to the front users here and as symptoms attributes for another tab or matrix switch. Then after this point we will have at launch amplifier again. Why? Because as we go from Z first launch amplifier to z, going through the floor, so you will find that the signal starts to Athenian weight. In this case, we would need launch amplifier two strands signal again. After two or more tabs, we should add an amplifier, two strengths as a signal due to losses in transmission of n cables and transformation in losses inside the switches itself. Now, there is another component which is called disaster splitter. Let's understand the difference between Z tab and split. What does the type do? Simply, we have here a tab and we have here as per letter Z will find here is going to call it the tabs depth steps. And we have n and out. So as the n, for example, a 110 dB, then the output will be a 110 dB. Provide the steps are for our system, which is 80 db. That's just an example. These points will distribute to different users. Here we have split on it's a split or what does it do? That input signal from the debt will be divided to several. I would signal with the same db. What's the difference here? Z-test is used when we have a different distance. But the splitter is used when we have similar distance. Someone who will ask me now, I have been confused and out. When do I use the tab and when do I use a splitter? Let us see is this symbol, single line diagram for our system. For example, we have an input here, signal from Z launch amplifier of 110 dB. Now this signal goes to the tab itself, or Z matrix is switch and provide the points to our system. Entering 110 DB provides 80 db and honors or 80 db. And Albert 110 dB will find these. Db produced our difference in case of Z dab off or Z tab time. Why different DB's? Because this cable will move a small distance on the reaching 0 ohms. Okay? This one will move a small distance on total reaching 0 ohms. But here this point until it reaches z as our floor still going to distribute. Then when we need the same input signal to be output here. So this step will provide a DB accordingly, Tuesday distance, since this is a small distance, will provide a smaller dB. But since this is our large distance, or provide a higher DB. Similar here, 8080, this is the last one in our system. Now this DB or this step, we'll go through the floor, going and finding a split or better, we'll move a small distance or similar distance. This dB, ten dB here representing Israel losses, and 30 dB here representing Zillow says 110 entering and 80 out after losing 30 dB. And we will, we will bypass z is this step by another signal, 110 dB. Now as a splitter will subject the 210 dB. So the output of it will be 70 dB. 70 dB, for example, for this, but letter Z m, What is 80, provides. Different outwards over the same dB, 70 dB. This one will be provided to TV or are different areas or different rooms. The tab is used to provide different depths or different DB. Db for transmission or continuous transformation towards the neck. Just dab or matrix is which and just split that provides similar dB for different rooms in our hotel. And I hope it's clear now. Z satellite outlet and the cables in our room. Now Z, Z outlet itself receives a Z cable and once it into signals, you will find the satellite number one, number two, and z dV, which is a thing which is important for us. Starlight outlet receives a one cable from the splitter or the switch. Split our orders switch, the converts it into multi-output. You will find here is that the input is one cable and what into satellite one, satellite to dv. A satellite one subtle I do TV and radio we will neglect is a radio for now. We use RG live in cables to connect two switches together. Z matrix as switches are connected together by RG 11 and you'll find it is as sick cable more than our G6 because it carries Z signal or z larger signal, which is going to distribute along the z building. We use our G6 to connect between that metric switch, satellite outlet or between Z split off and the satellite outlet here. You'll find that disease cable is smaller in size. Zr G6 and RG 11 are coaxial cables, of course, to protect is a signal and protect it from electromagnetic interference. Z, another conductor here inside z are G6 or RG 11 can be covered, or ccs or copper clade steam. It contains a shield or bread which surrounds the cable, which again meet and minium or cover. Zk was of course it can have a range of from 47 to 2400 megahertz. Why? Because this range is the range of TV ends the range of the satellite channels. So as a cable itself should be able to carry this frequency range, because from 47 to 2 thousand thrombus inside it, we have that frequency range and z IF OR z intermediate frequency ranges for the satellite. Now here's an example of a TV system. We have one fixed it the Dish Antenna, or fix a dish antenna. Now with quadro LNB as perspex, you will find here z quantity is two. What does this mean? Well, it means that we have do additional two additions with LNB. It doesn't do what does this mean? It means that we have one dish, for example, for mindset, and another dish for Z, astron, VHF and UHF. And then now we need one of them. One quantity of z, z multi switchers. We're complete with amplifiers, power supply located at the floor. We need three of them. What does this represent this and representing z matrix switches, along with the launch amplifier, along with their own, was bled on and so on. That TV outlet here with coaxial cable are G6 is this one are G6 from the multi switch out to h of socket in conduits of 20 millimeter or cable three. G6 is the one which connects from Z multi switcher, Z socket or Z satellite outlet. As we discussed before, we said that our G6 is used to connect on multi switcher, two outlet or each socket. And you'll find that quantity is 22 of them. This is an example on TV system and according to our system, you will know how many digits you will required according to number of satellites. How many launch Amplifier required according to number of floors, after two tabs or after two matrix, which will add a launch amplifier. And according to number of rooms in any floor or number of apartments, you won't know if you need a split or not. Or you can take directly from Z matrix is switch. This video which caused the components of z and MATLAB system. Different types, frequency range, Z, launch amplifier, matrix and switch. Your HF and VHF antenna frequency, z type of the cables used and z outlet. And remember that we use here. But z outlet itself as a switch X0 satellite outlet connected by argc cables between us, which ends the satellite outlet. Remember that this one is called the RG. And here RG 11 cables is a cable. But you will find that later in science telephone system that zeta is our J 1111 representing z socket or the outlet for that telephone system. Recognize the difference between r and r j. 166. Light Current Telephone System : Hi everyone. In this video or in this lecture, we would like to discuss Z telephone system. So as the telephone system have two main types. Number one, z traditional telephone systems, such as in our home and in many buildings. Number two is the IB telephone system. What is the difference in between these two types? Zee traditional telephone system assembly is similar to normal telephone systems, such as in our home. Or it can be centralized or At Babbage system inside our home, as we will discuss now, the IP telephone system is different from traditional ZIP telephone system using Z Internet in order to transfer the voice or coal or the voice calls. And it has more features as Zanzibar traditional telephone system. That traditional system having several components. What are the components of z traditional system? Z traditional telephone system consisting of Z telephone itself, which we are going to do our goals or make our goals very logical. And we have Z telephone and its outlet, which is called the odd j 11. You will see that here. This is our outlet, Z telephone outlet, which is called RJ 11. And you'll find zeros. A difference between RG 11 G and R J 1111. Is it representing the outlet in which a week and neck to our telephone to it. But RG 11 is our type of cable which is used in other types of light current, as we will see in the next two lectures. The blades of the RG 11, Z blaze of Z telephone RG 11 or is the outlet depends on the furniture of the buildings and the owner design. For example, if we have an office, I showed both Z outlet or Z 11 outlet, outlet next to Z. Each of the office or each of Z where Z disc exists us or our telephone exists. Okay. So it depends on, for natural inside our building or for example, in our home, we can have more than one telephone. And it is, all of them are one line. Okay, We can use more than one telephone according to my own desire. This is in our home. Now the telephone conductor itself in which we connect from here to here, can have a different diameter. It's laughter can be 0.4 or 0.6 or 0.8 millimeter. Z1, which is frequently used is the oboe and six millimeters. This is the one which we usually use. Each telephone requires one bear, positive and negative. So what does it mean? One bear means that two conductors, one bed is equivalent to two conductors. So two conductors, one conductor which is abosDF, and another conductor which is negative. So our telephone will need one bear. Bear is divided into two conductors. One which is representing z positive and the ozone which are representing z negative. Z cable, of course, which carry all of our forebears. It can be one bear to bear, 100 bears, 100 bear 1 thousand, bear 2 thousand better, and etc. Here's our number of births, a representing the number of telephone. So for example, if I have 100 telephone in our building, then I will need 100 bare cable, where each bear is our connection to our telephone line. Z. Other component in our telephone system, we have here the RG 11, which are connected to Z telephone. Now the RG 11 is having its connection or is connected to sub distribution frame, telephone box or the IDF intermediate distribution frame or SDF Z sub distribution frame, which is this one, is the one which is apply as Z signal to Z RG 11. Okay? This is just to add and use the full arrangement or use the Ford collecting all of Z telephone lines in our floor or in a specific area. It can be found in each floor or each area, each RG 11 having a connection here. For example, number one here representing auditory number one, RG 11. Number one for telephone number one. This one is for telephone number two in another room, for example. Three is for Amazon in Rome and so on. So this one is used as an arrangement or collected Z cables or the bears inside our floor. This is a diagram for it. Now we will find that each of our telephone frame or telephone box or IDF, or is the F distribution frame. It's consisting of a group of modules. You will find here we have one module, module here, and another module here. Each we have here in some distribution frame, we have 1233 modules. Each of these modules is consisting of Ten Bears. You will find years. This is an example of them with you all. And we'll find here 123 modules. You'll find here 12345678910. We have here Ten Bears. We can get out of it and go towards the RG 11. Each of this module can carry Ten Bears. You will find the yield to maturity, which means it is at when t bear the f. This one CD modules, which means it is at 30 bear SDF. It is identified by how many birds, such as then burst or at when t beers or assert the bears and etc. Now, another component is that we have at the beginning telephone connected to the RG 11, RJ 11, not RG, RJ because RG is a cable connected to RG 11. And the RG 11. All of the RG 11 inside our floor connect S2, Z, S, D, F, or Z sub distribution frame. And all of the sub distribution frame goes to Z Men distribution frame or main telephone books. It's called Z MDF or the main distribution frame where all of Z SDF cables or all of its bears out. Of course it is a cables which are getting all of the pairs of Z and Z sub distribution frame itself. All of them are collected enzyme means distribution frame. It collects all of the cables from the SDF or Z IDF intermediate distribution frame or the telephone boxes in all floors. It is a boat adds the introns or in front of z buildings. It is identified by a number of pairs. It is at ten bear 20 bear certain 100 Burr, and so on or etc. So you will find here the number of bears in this subdistrict exists main distribution frame depends on the total number of bears inside our building. Z, total number of cables inside our building. Now Z Men distribution frame is connected to the WebEx or Z buybacks or the private branch exchange. Okay, here we are going to take all of our cables or all of our main distribution frame. Bears or cable, goes to school and also EBV Babbitt's or the electronic private branch exchange or E buybacks, electronic private branch extra change. All of them are the same meaning or representing these as same sinc squared. This assembly is central inside our building. Now it is used in Z internal telephone systems such as in accompany, if I would like to make ZAB evolved in the company, have a connection between them or make telephone calls between them. Then we will use z publics in order to our magazine arrangement or provides the arrangement between all of Z telephones inside our building. It allows the communication between telephone lines in the building. By programming this publics, we can identify which telephone lines would have an external line from telecom company itself. What I mean by this, simply, we have, for example, a 100 telephones inside our building. This 100 telephones will be able to communicate with each other internally inside the company itself by using Webex or the private branch exchange. By programming it, we will be able to communicate with each other inside the building itself or inside the company itself. Without the need of any external lines from Z telecom company. It is done internally or between each other. For example, if I have a telephone number one and I would like to communicate with someone having a telephone number ten. Then I will type a certain code inside that telephone to communicate internally with. This was someone who is this one or telephone number ten. Now for example, if the manager would like to communicate with someone in the company itself, then it assembly will be connected using z by x. But whatever is the manager would like to connect or communicate with someone outside the company. In this case, we would need an external line from telecom company from or reusing the same wire connected to the telephone. Weekend, make calls inside our company itself. And I can provide or communicate as a manager with someone outside the company. So as an example, z by itself it can be ten hours slash 100. So what does this mean? It means that ten lines, ten lines, which are external lines from Z telecom company. And then we have a 100 lines over a 100 telephone lines, the total telephones for internal communication. So then I would slash 100 means that we have 100 and telephones inside our building. I weight of this 100. We have ten, which is connected to external line. We have ten be able or telephone, or ten telephones inside our building, which deck or communicate using external line in order to communicate or someone outside the building or outside the company itself. Okay. Now another thing is that Babbage can be identified by the backup battery for operating it for how many hours? Does at symbol as diagram or a simple single line diagram for our traditional telephone system, you will find that we have our Babbitt's, which is used the tool may allow the communication between all of the telephone lines in our building. Buybacks who would receive from the telecom company at certain number of external lines. For those who would like to communicate outside the company. If we have five people which is having a Z communication or would like to communicate to something. Someone outside. Zeno will need five external lines from our telecom company. Now, zebra WebEx will be connected to the main cerebral frame, will provide all of the cables to Zemin distribution frame. And Ximen distribution frame will be distributed among different SDF or sub distribution frames, where h is the F representing an area or representing a floor inside our building. Now from each SDF, we are going to distribute our pairs. Though was the RG 11, RJ and event not RG RJ 11 Zim from RG 11, RJ L11. We will connect the two hour telephone. You will see that this is a simple diagram for Zack telephone system in our company. Now we have another system which is called the ZIP or volume system. So what does this mean? This one is different from Z traditional system. That VOIP phone do not use a traditional twisted pair copper wire is they don't use that road. It's not toasted bear coupled wire which we discussed before. Both the USB cables, such as the data cables. For example, there is certain at cable phone are connected using the same broadband internet connections that blacks into our computer or rafter. Here. Z communication or communication or voice calls between people inside the company is done using the Internet connection. Note using traditional wires. Voip phones convert the Z calls into digital signals Within the phone itself. And they don't rely on their physical exchanges that line landlines do. Here. In our company, we will have a two system. One which is traditional system, traditional telephone system, and the Azar data system or dataset step. Now, instead of having two systems, we will use one system such as the data system, in order to provide the Internet connection and allow the connection between different companies or different telephones inside our companies. And at the same time, we are going to use for data communication between vehicle itself or Z employees inside our companies itself. The VOIP phones convert dizzy calls into digital signals. Note, by using a traditional, we would have one system which can be used for data and at the same time can use the for making phone calls. Now, the void itself stands for z voice over internet protocol. Okay, so you will see that it is used by, it is done by the usage of Z Antoinette communication system. This is a business communication technologies that allow us for making and receiving goals over the Internet. Again and again we use it buy. Or we do see communication here by using Z Internet connection. Or we make the phone calls by using Z Internet connection. Wiped service providers are able to offer a wider and more useful features that enabled businesses and their employees to be more productive and efficient to 0 day to day communication. Now what are the advantages of z or IB or vibe system over z traditional system? Reduce the IT infrastructure. We have now z data system which can be used for both of these features. It can be used for the telephone system and at the same time, we can use it for communication system or data system. It can also be used to eliminate the need to obey a phone company for traditional four lines. So we don't need any technicians in order to install our traditional four lines. We don't need any. Bear. Now, we will, we will understand this when we go to the Data System. Save as much as 60 to 70% on phone belts. Enjoy advanced features that are not available with the traditional business phone system, such as the alternate goals, which are of course are mostly free. Most of the phone calls, which is done Rosie intranet communication itself is free, of course. In this lecture, we discussed the z, z traditional or the telephone system z different type of telephone systems such as Z traditional telephone system and the VOIP or the IB, than a phone system. 167. Light Current Data System Part 1: Hi everyone. In this video or in this lecture we would like to discuss z data system or is that data system? What is a data system? Data system is used the tool link between the front end buoys in the same company. As example, if we have a company with several 100 employees, let's use the, There's a pointer. I assumed that accompany condenser a 100 employees and we would like to chair with Zim news files. New news such as the engagement or Z marriage of someone in the company, or news related to the work or files or folders. Or for example, if we are talking about with an electrical company, we would like to share that AutoCad files. For example, zeros and mechanical engineer and the electrical engineer and the most of them are working on a project along with of course is at several engineered and all of them would like to see Z AutoCad in order to and see what the others are doing. For example, exam mechanical engineer was in storing z, each VAC system and design electrical engineer as going to have Z lighting system. So both of them, or electrical engineer, for example, makes the lighting does not intersect with the A-Check system. Is that so why is that? Electrical engineer, for example, showed see your words. A mechanical engineer is doing similar tools at several engineer, if it is boating column, for example, in the middle of 0 ohm, I showed not both lighting or and sockets at this point. In the end, both of them would like to see as you walk off or Chaucer. Here we use a chair files, folders new such as the engagement or the manager of someone in the company, news related to the work. And of course, we use z outlook to send the mail to everyone in the company. In order to do this, we need at data system or data system according to the British or American accent. Announcer function of z data system is that we can create a common folded between Z in buoys BC. The MBA luis can add files to this folder. For example, their AutoCad files, in which all of that different employees or the different engineers can see this folder. And see is I chaired the files inside this folder. And of course is the admin who created this common folder, is the one who can have the right to remove or delete this folder. We can also have a contract with a communication company in order to provide internet access to all computers inside our company. Of course, who are not going to provide internet access for each one, we need to make a contract or have a contract with our communication company in order to provide internet access using z data system to all the computers in the company. Also CIT engineer can view all the computers in a server room. He can also block or allow certain websites on their computers itself. Each computer will have a cable with a certain IB for H of them, cable from z data system or from Zara lack of zeta system, as we will understand later, each computer will have a certain IP for this computer. Now, beginning at the office where I have my own computer or I have my own printer, I would like to have the Internet access. So first I will need z data system outlet or the socket for the data system. So this is the image or the picture for z data system outlet. This is called RJ 45. So the data outlet for data system is RJ45. And remembers that RJ45 is different from RG. Rg is a cable such as RG 1159. But RJ is that I would get socket outlet for z data system, for H computer or each printer where all of the employees are using it. We would need RJ45 48 device. Example in each office room, we have one computer. We need one RG 45 outlet in this room. Enzyme reception. We have one computer for that receptionist. And we may have a printer. Which is used the tool brand to buy all their employees and z company or in a floor. This printer should have its own RJ-45. So one RJ45 for the computer, one RJ45 for Z printer. So we need to 451 for z parameter and the 1 fourth the computer and RJ45, not RG, RG. Remember that z effects, effects uses at telephone outlet, But Zebra printer uses data outlet. As there is a difference between them is defects. It uses at telephone outlet as we discuss the inside telephone system. But the printer uses data outlet. Now ZK will use for Z connection between Z computer and this outlet or between Z socket outlet to z direc or from the socket outlet to Z SDF. But here it is not called the SDF, but it is called Z Bannon. As we'll see in the next two slide. Z data cabling used can be copper as Ethernet or can be fiber optic. We have two options of the cables used. The copper as a subnet or fire power of tick. What is the difference between them? First, let's discuss zs on it. And then we will discuss Z fiber-optic. So net, as you'll see in this image symbol, use the insert distance of 90 to 100 meters. So this is called as small distance, not a large distance. In this one we will use z, SO net or Z cover type. It is afford pair cable. And what does it mean for bed? For Bear means eight wires. Forebear of wires. Pair means two wires. Four multiplied by two gives us eight wires on. It actually uses four wires only. Or we can say it uses two pairs out of this four bears, uses two pairs of Z4 bears or uses four wires. I would have eight wires for transmission and receiving. Z OS or four wires you can use the foreign phone connection or as a backup. We can neglect this sentence because it is not important for us. But in the future in gigabyte connections, as they say, is that Z4 pair may be needed or all of the eight wires will be needed to provide this fast data transfer. Sees that the gigabyte connection, what is Z value of Z connection here in this, in the case of the sonnet on net can be GetString. Get for Cat5, get six, gets 70. Answer is other types about the RZ mostly, most commonly used. Arquette streak at forcats get 67. Of course. Z cat is abbreviation for category. Okay? So gets three means category three, get four means category four, and so on. Do we have two types of Z cables, UTP or Z unshielded twisted bear and STB, which is shielded twisted pair, was the difference between them. It is unshielded, UTP unshielded is to be shielded. The unshielded is sheep and usually used unless z power connectors are close and causing interference. What does this mean? It means that if our gables for the power z power cables, which for example, which contains z, the 120 volt. If it is close to our light current system, Zen, we will not use z OTB. We will use the STB in order to provide a shield to provide to prevent the Z interference similar to z m a TV cable or Z coaxial cable which you have as shield in order to prevent as an interference inbetween Z. Signal of Z is subnet or the signal of the cable with the power cables. But in cases that if the cables are away from Z, the light current cables are away from the power cables is an ink. In this case, we will use UTP or the unshielded because this one is sheep and usually used. But this one is used to prevent as I interference in case of z, power connectors are close and causing interference because they produce electromagnetic waves. They produce interference within data signal. Now, we understand the difference between YouTube and STV. But what is the difference between gets three, get forecast five, and so on. Here we have the different categories. We have categories three, category five, and the girl five, categories 667 and et cetera. You'll find your cable type. It can be UTP or STP. Utp, five-year TB, TB, you OTB or STP, STP, STP, okay. Now, here we understand that the difference between them is that we have YouTube or STP. Now, another thing about Z category, that Z maximum data transformation is VDD. Sources bead here is measured in similar to our Internet connection. Zack category S3 can provide as bit of ten megabyte or mega beds bear second. Ten megabytes per second, not bits bytes. So it provides a ten megabytes per second. You will find that the category five can provide ten or 100 or 1 thousand megabytes per second. Similar here, as we increase the category Z, amount of transmission is bid, increases. Now the bandwidths of z, the front cables, it can be 16 megahertz for category 300 megahertz for category 500 megahertz, 45250 megahertz is four categories, 6500 megahertz, four categories, 68600 megahertz is for category seven, will find the years. This is that bandwidth of our cables or our data transfer. And this one is the maximum is bead of the transmission of the data itself. So you will find here is at the front the categories and the difference between them according to the shield itself, it is unshielded or shielded. And that is bead of transmission and the bandwidth of the cable itself. Now, the one which is usually used is that category six. Now we have another type which is the fiber-optic as well. Remember that z fiber optic, similar to the cctv system, which we will discuss, is that Z fiber optic is used in very large distance here. That certainly it is used in distance of 90 to 100 meters, but in a longer distance, we use z or fiber optic, use the in the distance in kilometer Z. It has two types. One which is a single mode, and another one which is the multimode, single mode such as escapable and multimode. What's the difference between them? Single mode can travel at very large distance, but it can transfer a lower amount of debt. But z multimode can travel a shorter distance, shorter than the single mode, but at the same time can carry larger amount of data. Okay? So according to the distance, according to the data, you can choose between single mode and the multimode as an example for their application, the single mode can be used in delicacy or z, which is a telecom company, Cat TV or Z, cable TV companies and universities. So this is a three application for Z single mode. For the multimode, it can be used in RF or RF, a broadband signals, or radio-frequency broadband signals, audio slash video LAN applications. So this is an application for the multi-mode, and just our applications affords a single mode. In the end we have two options. Without being confused. We can use that certainly when we have a small distance. We can use small distance, which is unusual, used inside the buildings. Online two to 100 meters. And we usually use the CAT six and we usually use the UTP. Our list, we have z power connectors are close. Xinhua News that STB for the fiber-optic Z fiber optic is used when we have larger distance in kilometers. 168. Light Current Data System Part 2: Now we have another component in our data system which is the batch Chapin. What does the patch panel to do? Now assume that we have a floor, one floor which contains a lot of office or a lot of rooms containing a lot of data cables. This data cables will be collected or arrange it inside a batch abandon. This patch panel is found in each floor. You will find here 123456. And each of this number representing a room or a computer. Now 123, we connect, for example, the row number one. We will connect the cable from here, going into Z outlet or Z computer outlet or the data outlet going into number two, total number two, for example, and so on. For example. This one is used to collect all of the cables in our floor, similar to the SDF or Z sub distribution frame. Inside that telephone system. In the telephone system we had SDF, but in data system or in beta system, we have Z batch panic, which I collected all of the cables or all of the data cables inside our floor batch when it existed in each floor or each area to collect all of the data lines. It is used to arrange. And the nominal rate, each data point in our system. The batch when it itself, it can have 1224 or 48 ports. For example, this one is at 48, we have 123456, we have 12345678. So eight multiplied by six, it gives us 48. This one is a patch panel of 48 ports. And if it likes this, these two only, then it will be at 12. If only this line, that first line, then it will be at 24 ports. And each board representing a data point in our system. Now with the batch panel similar to Z, as Deaf is connected to a switch in Iraq by using patch cables. Okay. What does this mean? Z batch minute itself. Well, go from it and go to our wreck of the data system. Zyrtec of the data system is similar to z by x inside z telephone system. Now let's see Zyrtec in z data system. But first, let's see a small example on z data system. Example we have here our box, which is the batch funnel. We have incoming five cable, gets six UTP, which means it is an ordinate or a subnet for pair. Now, this is the entering into our box. We have five cables. So what does this mean? Five cables, that means that we have five points in our system. This box will be distributed one cable for cat six UTP, the data outlet number one. This one will go and provide this to S2 data outlets. So we need two cables for pair similar here. One coming here to cable for Bear Cat 61 of them will go to the first data and the other one will go to the other data. So this cable, one cable for pair. This one is two cables for bear. Two cables entering. One for the first data outlet and the second for the second hour. Now, going into an important component in our data system, it's called Z wreck. Xerox is the main component which is similar to a Z-Pak peaks inside our telephone system. In their data system, we have Xerox system. You will find here we have this unit. This is a unit. And the second one is ionic. This is another unit. Let's market or use the pencil. This one is ionic. This one is another unit. And this one is honest audio on it. And saw on our wreck, our Rec itself is consisting of a group of what? Group of units? 1234 and it's solder. In data system, we start with direct, similar to or the telephone system with. We started with x0. Ipv6 is consisting of a group of units. Can be 57 minus 11. Until 42 units or more. Trek shelf will have one unit. This unit is both insight at shelf. We can see that our AC system or our Rec is consisting of a group of shellfish. And each shelf will be one unit, Zyrtec and be wall-mounted or floor mountain. Now let's see this one. We have here, Bard of our Rec in data system. This is apart of one is switch. We will understand now what is the meaning of this? First, we have the incoming two core fiber optic. Where do they come from? They come from Z communication company remembers that we would like to send the data to the communication company and receive data from the Communication Company. This use the four z to core to core or two wires. Fiber optic use the fourth one used for sending the data to the Communication Company. And the other one use the full Rizzi receiving data from the Communication Company. We have here Into Course and Z2 course here are fitted on fiber optic batch benefit. This is usually two fixes. The cable, that incoming cable or the incoming corps do Xerox system exists. Fiber-optic Patch Manager is considered as one unit in our Rec. Another unit is a switch. A switch or ZAP, for example, two in default port switch, this one. This one is called a switch and we'll understand its function now. This switch will be connected using copper patch cord due at 24 cup out of patch panel. Now it seems confusing button you will understand every single now. Let's draw it so you can understand. You'll see that here. This is considered the ***, our patch panel, right? Our patch panel inside z versus the floor, for example. Now our batch abandoned in each floor. For example, this is at 24 batch manner. For example, each of them will be connected here to 0 to z, 24 port cupboard patch panel. Okay? We will connect each of them towards the sports at 24 to this one. Now, this one is the one which we fix our cables inside our building. Now betweens a swan, we have another thing which is called the switch 24 board, switch, that connection between them. So Google finds that this one is similar to this one. But a switch will have a certain function which we will discuss. The switch receives the ZIM, two cables, the fiber optic cables connected to this switch. You will see that the auto connected to this switch. And at the same time that 24 cables are connected to this switch. This switch is, consider the connection between the fiber optic and Z 24 board or Z copper cables, which simply takes z data from the carbonyl batch vinyl and send data as Rosie fiber optic. Or it can receive the data from the fiber optic switch and then send it to data to Z cup out of batch abandon. It is similar to a connection, or it is used as a connection between Z fiber optic cables and Z port or the carbonic batch banish. It is as an intermediate point between Zen doc or goes to the switch and this 24 port connect this tool Z 24 compiler patch manner, which is used to connect it to batch mandolin for example, flow number one. Okay. Now ZK was the connecting between C2H4 board switch ends at 24 ports cover batch manner by using a cable management. Here we have a fiber optic batch panel. We fix on it Z cables. Here we fix his eye cables on a carbonyl in our cable management, which is having its own unit, ends at 24 board. The cover batch manual connect his betweens at 24 board and it by batch court. Again, we have fried butter batch code which connects between z and fiber optic. And z is switch between the switch and as the batch panel we connect to using a cup or batch code. You will see that Zach, okay, Well itself is fixed it here on the fiber optic Patch Manager for the fiber optic cable management for fixing on this unit between a switch and Zika per batch planet assembly. It is just an arrangement process. We receive our data from their communication company using the Z fiber optic batch Savannah, consisting of two code bear switch. So we have here, which was its own carbon a patch panel. This is switch, for example, representing floor number one. For another floor, we will need announced that switch and Amazon patch panel and on Azar cable management. But z fiber optic, we would need another two cores for this switch. So we have two cores, bear switch, one receiving end, the one sending for each switch. For example. Let's make it clear. If we have, for example, here as which switch, for example, then we would need another two courts going into Z, fiber optic patch panel or two cores here. Fiber-optic going into this switch, going into this switch. That do here is use the for this switch. This to course are used affords this switch. The store are used for sending and receiving data for this switch. And this two are used for sending and the receiving for this switch. This switch also have its own cable management, gable management here. For fixing. Z cables. Have its own also copper batch by batch panel. In the end we understand now is that each switch needs one cable management and one carbon patch panel and the one unit for itself. The fiber optic patch panel is common among all of these switches. It contains all of the fiber optic. For all of these switches we have we connect optic batch panel two switches by using an optic badge code, which is this one. This is more wire. We connect the switch to a batch panel by cupboard patch cord between the switch and Gabor patch, men and boys, this is small code. Switch. It can be 48, 121824 ports. Now, in data system, we said that each of this one, let's use the laser pointer. This one is ionic. Switch is another unit. The cable management is another unit, Z copper patch panel is ionic. So each switch would require fiber optic. Patch panel is switch itself plus cable management plus Gabor patch panel. Fiber optic patch panel is common along our among all of z switches, we have indirect system. We have only one fiber optic batch. Number of units required equal to number of switches multiplied by three plus one fiber optic patch panel. Why? Because number of switches multiplied by, sorry, Why? Because we have this switch, for example, this is an example of one switch. One switch require you wanted photos. I switch itself. I owned it for cable management. I owned it for a cupboard batch of Anna. We need three units multiplied by the number of switch. We have two switches. Then we need three for z switch number one and another three for the switch number two plus one fiber all take batch-level common between them. So if we have four switches and we need four multiplied by three, because each of them needs three units plus one for z fiber optic batch manner. We need in total 13 units. If we have three switches. Zen, ten units will be required because serine multiplied by three equal nine plus one equals ten. Now, Z switch itself can have two types. Number one, it can be power or BOE or power over insulin. It all is the difference between Zim, if it is power switch, what does this mean? It means that this type where did require a power in order to do is switch to put it in order to use a switch to operate or send and receive data or to provide internet access to our and computer itself, then we have to supply power to the switch itself. If the borrower is cut off, Zynga switch will not operate and the computer will not be in San network ends are computers, so we're not be able to see Chaucer. Z-bar is used to provide the power, requires a power in order to operate and in order to connect to that computer, to the network and send and receive data. That BOE or Zan by one over is certainly a subnet or Z. So net is different from z power. What's the difference? In this type? It does not require a power source. It receives its power by connecting zs on net to Zach computer itself. Switch will take power from this computer and or breaths normally. So this is similar to what? Similar to your own mobile USP. If you connect your own mobile phone to Zach computer itself, you will find that your own computer, your own pile will have power because it receives its apart from their computer itself. Similar to Power over Ethernet. You will find that when we connect this is on a Tuesday computer. You will find that z computer, it's unfold, send the power to switch in order to operate. This one does not require external power, receives its about from Z connecting the computer itself. If one home-built or only from Z, 20 for both, for example, one computer only operates, then the switch will operate automatically. Now we have another two times of the switch, switch management and switch non management. That switch management in this type, we can control the switch. We can turn on and off Zach devices or Zach computers. We can allow or block websites and etc. So we have a lot of features which you can do as an IT. In this system. We can control the system mode. But in SAS switch on, on management, in this type we have no control on the switch, which means that we cannot turn off or on a device allow or block websites. We can only turn it off by removing Z wire from Z or removing executable of z computer from the rack itself. In this video, we'll discuss dizzy data system z, the front two components of z data system, z, different types of cables used, and the type of switches. 169. Light Current CCTV System Part 1: Hi everyone. In this lecture, we would like to discuss cctv system or the closed circuit television system. What does cctv? Cctv or a closed-circuit television system? It is a use of a video cameras TO transmit a signal to a specific place on a limited set of monitors. What does this mean? Assembly, we have a group of cameras in our area or in our place. And we received this dominant signals, that video signal to multiplexer or something which is called Z. That video recorder DVR, or our quadrature. And you'll understand this later. Then we'd say Blaze is signal on a group of monitors or one monitor. That is the meaning of a cctv system, a group of camera. We take that signal or transmits a signal through a cables to set DVR or quadrature or whatever. We'd splay and z video signals on our monitor. The CT cctv system consisting of in both such as Z Camera group of cameras, outputs such as the monitor where we can display z video signal. And the management of our systems such as the quadrotor, DVR, multiplexer and metrics is switch. Let's discuss each of these components that cameras and its types, that DVR multiplexer, matrix switches, quadrature cables use the and so on. First, we have two types of our cctv cameras. What RZ types, which is used? Number one, we select our camera depending on Z owners, a budget and according to the consultant or the electrical consultant specifications. We have here two factors affecting the selection of Z Camera. Number one, the owners of budget and is equal to salt on specific cations. Now let's see what the Zak owners a budget. The camera itself is similar to buying a mobile phone. You'll know that zeros are different or there are different types of mobile phones and all of them, however, different features. And the more you provide money or the Maurio Bay money, the more features and more and probe artists you will have in signs, XAML moped. For example, when you are buying at node five, for example, is different from node 1010. There is a difference between them NZ specifications and their power and their RAM and Zehr processor and so on in their quality of the camera itself. According to her own budget, the old boy mobile phone. Now, similar to cctv system, Z camera itself, it can be HD 1018, it can be 728, can be 480, and so on as we will see now. So according to the budget you have, you can buy a higher-quality camera. Okay, So according to your own budget, now as the camera can be fixed or can be movable or BTS at betas, that is the abbreviation for ban dealt zone. So it's a fixed camera. What does this mean? It means that our camera is fixed it inside the buildings at the corner of 0 ohms in order to see the whole room. Our camera is fixed it at the corner of the room, which you can see the whole room it cannot move. However, Z beat is at or Z movable type camera is used outside the buildings, such as in banks. Z band. What does the band mean Ben means that our camera again rotate, sir, 160 degree in the horizontal line. Again, rotate. 160 degree zone means that it can zoom in and zoom out with very simple zoom in, zoom out dealt what does a 30 minute means that it can move in the vertical direction, can move up and move down. This part can rotate upward and downward. At ban means that it can rotate around the 60 degree or rotate in the horizontal direction. Zoom means that it can zoom in and zoom out. Now, our camera can be at wall mounted or ceiling mounted or surface mounted. For example, here it is a surface mounted here, a surface mounted here at wall mounted, I would cite camera or Z moveable camera is usually our old mounted as you see here. Inside the building, such as this one or this one, is usually ceiling mounted or surface mount. Z camera can be normal, which means that it can capture everything normally in daylight. But at night everything becomes dark and cannot see anything. For example, it's similar to the human eye. You can see everything normally, or you can capture anything normally during daylight. But at night, you cannot see anything because everything becomes dark. So you cannot see anything. You have to provide light in order to see what is happening around you. The camera here, which is is called normal, It cannot see except during daylight or in the basins offline. In order to fix this problem because sometimes a Z saves, try to steal a bank at night. So we have to make our camera. You can see in the dark how we can do this. Simply. We can use a camera, which can be day, night, which means that it can capture everything normally at day and capture every single normally at night. But how? By using Z infrared waves. As this type can be used in banks for security at night. This camera is called a 0 lux camera. Why? Because it can capture everything in 0 lux or completely dark area. As you remember that we discussed in our course for electrical design, we said that Xerox is the unit of measuring of Z light intensity. Zi light itself when it becomes 0 lakhs, it means that we have no light. It is completely dark. So the camera is called as 0 Luxe camera because it can capture everything and see everything in the dark or in 0 lakhs. How by using Z infrared waves. Now as a cctv camera, of course have a different resolution. Cctv can be resolution can be high or can be low. We can have the highest quality, which is one hundred, ten hundred and ATP resilience and pixels at 1120 multiplied by 180. Or it can be 720, be a residual, or can be d1 resolution, or can be CIF resolution. Or queues have resolution. Of course is that you want 1080 pixels. You will see that it is the highest amount of pixels or the highest amount of pixels, and the QSIF is the lowest amount of Pexels. So this one is that lowest amount of resolution. This one is the highest amount of resilience. You will see that 1120 multiplied by 108. What does this mean? It means that our TV, or what our screen consisting of TV lines or TV LTV lines. More, we have TV lines, Zao more resolution we will have. So the camera can be classified according to TBL or the number of TV lines. As the number of TV lunch increases, the more resolution is reduced. So as you see here, there is a difference between, or the difference between different DV lines. You will see that 420 TV lines, four hundred and eighty, six hundred, seven hundred, seven hundred here, having a higher resolutions ends at 600 and TV lines, that 480, having a higher resolutions ends up 420 TV lines. So as the TV lines increases, such as in 1080, greater than 720 and so on. It means that more resolution or higher-quality we would have. You'll see that here. This is 180 bucks on. This is an SD, which is another type of resolution. Besides this five resolutions, this is safe and this is cuz Have you will find that this one is the lowest quality and one-thousandth ATP is the highest resolution or the best resolution currently. The TV lines, it can be 480 TV lines, 540 db lines on 1200 and TV lines and etc. Now another thing about cctv cameras itself. It has a different resolution or not resolution, but the focal lens. What does that focal lens mean? You will find that the camera itself has the images and sold which capture zeolites and the lens, and the lens that distance between them is called Z focal lens or f z focal lens such as 80 millimeter, 24 millimeter and so on. The camera focal lens determines how far the camera can see. This is, for example, an 80 millimeter lens. Here we have, this is the maximum zoom in for z camera. Now at 284 millimeter, 24 millimeter can zoom in and zoom a little bit. Zen 80 millimeter, 35-millimeter can zoom more than 1824. As we increase the focal lens, you will find that 105, for example, can zoom in and sees a house. Unlike the 18 millimeter, which she cannot zoom in more than 175 is better than 105 and so on. So 100 millimeter you can see the difference between certain 100 millimeter and 18 millimeter focal length. These are Henri can zoom in very high and see the house. Z bigger Zeff focal lens, Z farce or it can zoom in, as you see here is that surrounded millimeter is the highest focal lens. Rods are Zamzee 18 millimeter. You can use the focal lens in order to identify as the distance between two cameras, between two cctv cameras. Indoor site range for the camera itself, it can range from 30 to 45 meters. It can see away or at a distance of 30 to 45 meters, z camera itself or the indoor camera. This value, of course, it can be obtained according to the data sheet of Z camera. So according to the data sheet, you will know that focal length 4D camera, you will know the distance in between two cameras. Inside the data sheet itself. We assume that the distance between the two consecutive cameras equal to z site range in data sheet for retailer reliability or according to the data sheet distance if exhausting. So for example, if our camera can see upto certain meters, then I assume that that distance in between two cameras, 30 meters, y, in order to provide an interference or overlapping between the two cameras. Let's accept blame this point. So what does this mean? If I have a camera, for example, like this one, and another camera like this one. This one can see up to 30 meters. This one can see up to 30 meters. Now, I make the distance in between these two cameras 30 meters Y, in order to provide the interferons in-between these two cameras. Similar to the fire alarm system, where we use is at the front two components such as the smoke detector and so on. We provide at 30 meter or we make the distance between two cameras, the site range or centimeters, for example, here in order to provide overlapping because if I can, Brock did not capture something at a specific moment. The other camera will be able to capture this. 170. Light Current CCTV System Part 2: Now the cctv management system. We have a different management system for the cctv. For example, the quadrotor management. What does this do? Assembly, it takes four cameras because it's called that quadrature. Divide is that monitor or the screen into four parts or four quadrants. So it takes four cameras, inbuilt dozer quadrature management system. And the Albert goals towards the camera system or the monitor, Nazi camera system to the monitor. So it takes his signal number one, I'm coming on number one and number two from common on number two, signal number three from carbon number three, and signal number four from camera on number four, this four signals go to Z as an input. Those are quadrature management system provides that signal or connected to the monitor and the providers z different video signals on that monitor. Camera number 1234, quadrature or the co-ed management system receives a four cameras and as blaze on the monitor, it is divided into four regions. Now, another thing, and instead of using a quadrature, if you have a large number of cameras or larger number of cctv cameras, then I'm going to choose something which is called the multiplexer. Multiplexer is similar to cctv quadratic. So what does the multiplexer do? It takes a group of cameras as an input and disbelief signals on that monitor. Seminar two is equal to Rachel. If we have 16 cameras, for example, then the other input to the multiplexer and demultiplexer. We'll provide cable, those the monitor and I believe 161616 cameras. So it divides into 16 parties where each representing one camera segment. Now, the first thing is that Z multiplexer. This one which is a multiplexer. Each channel has a camera in both and the video layer lobe output. So you will see that we have 123456 until 16. This is called the 16th Channel multiplexer. Because it's seen, you will see that here we have a 16 number 16 of Z channels. So you will find that here it has two parties. One which is called the Z camera in both from one to 16. And the second one is video loop output. What does this door number one, Z camera in both for receiving the camera segment. So it receives the Z Camera signal at the channel number one, of course. Number two is the video loop, Albert, why it is used for dating app particular video signal and display it on a monitor. For example, if I would like to zoster show channel number one or is the camera signal number one. Then I will connect this terminal to monitor where I can see Z video signal for Z channel number one. And of course it receives as the other at z Azar channels 23456 and so on. You'll see that this one is used to show our particular signal on monitoring. And you'll see that here we can use the output in order to disbelieve that 16 a channel together. Is that video loop I would use the for one monitor or user to provide or shows the signal of one monitor. And the output here is used to provide Z. Z total signals or 16 cameras together. Multiplexer have a different types. It can be for channel, AT channel 90, channels, 163264 channels. Now, another type of management system of cctv. So we discussed the Z quadrature, the multiplexer. So both of them are used to display Z camera signals. Now we have another component in our cctv management system, which is called Z DVR, or is that digital video recorder. So what does this do is simply use the tool, record the camera signals or zip video signal, and at the same time is a multiplex. It receives a different cameras or a different video signals or Z cameras. Then at the same time record is the signal for a specific videos such as seven days, ten days or whatever according to the capacity of Z hard desk, do you have And z at the same time used as a multiplexer to this blazer video segments on zap monitor. It basically views the cameras on the monitor and at the same time record the videos of the camera signals. It needs of course, a hard disk or DVD for storing the videos and size of their videos. Of course, it depends on the quality. And the quality, of course, depends again, on the camera itself according to its resolution. Or it's a quantity. Z heart disease can be used for storing four weeks. It was high-quality, according of course, to a Z storage or the capacity of the hard disk. That DVR or a digital video recorder can be 48162432 channels. Now another thing that we have in our management or the cctv management system, we have something which is called the Z matrix switch. So what does the matrix switches do? Simply is a matrix switch assembly an arrangement for our system. So what does this do assembly if we have a large number of cameras in our system, such as 90 cameras, we need to divide this cameras into a different DVRs. Why? Because for example, if we use one DVR for this 90 cameras, then our monitor will be divided to 90 parties, which makes it difficult to see each of the video signal. So in order to solve is this, In this problem, we will use a several DVR. For example, here we use as 60 DVR each. It will take 16 cameras, are connected to a monitor. Ends or DVR. We'll divide each and monitor in 16 parts. My auntie cameras are divided into 60 DVR, where HDB ATO will take up to 16 camera. Now we can see each of the video signal normally. And at the same time we have reliability as we divided our video signals to the front DVR. So the matrix which is used for z management between a group of DVRs. So assembly takes all of the cameras in both and divide it into the front DVRs. If we have a project of 90 cameras, if we connect them to one DVR only, we use the 1D, we are only. Then we would have a monitor divided into 90 parts, which is really small and acceptable. And Emboss evolved to see each camera signal or each video correctly. We'll use our group of DVR, so connected to monitors, as you will see here, DVR connected do is monitor. Each of the VR is 16 channels. So when you as a metric is switched to receive from Z line to cameras, the connect 60 DVRs, two monitors, very symbol. I think it's very simple and clear. Now. Now what are the different types of cctv cables? This is a very important part. We have two types. We have z fix that camera, and then we have the moveable camera. Now, z fixed camera, of course, has affected only we need two cables. One for z power in order to provide power Tuesday fix-it camera, and one for z data in order to send Z video signal. But z movable we will need one for the data, one for the power, but an additional one for controlling the camera motion. In order to control how is the camera will move. If I would like to rotate it, pan, tilt, zoom or whatsoever, you will need a cable in order to sing. Control signal. Now, for the data, for both of the types fixed or movable, for the data, we will use RGL, E11 cable, or argc, or RZ 59. Different type of cables. Different type of cables is the bending according to the distance traveled. Of course, if it is from 225 to 705 meters, then we will use the alternative 59. If it is from 705 to 457 xenon, we'll use our G6. If it is Forum greater than, of course, for under 57 up to 610 meters, then we will use RG 11, usually is URG 59 is X1, which is commonly used in the cctv. Of course, if our distance was greater than this value or in kilometers, then of course, we will use the fiber optics similar to the data system for long distance to prevent the Z signal at, in which this is of course a Ford's effects it. And the four z moreover one, now the power cable for fix it and the movable assembly two cables or do single core, 2.5 millimeters squared. So we have two of a single core of 2.5 millimeters squared. One is the line and one for the neutral. Because of course, as the camera is a single phase load. Now, the camera itself, for example, is supplied from the UBS or directory from the AC source or power supply forum UBS such as in banks. Why? Because in bankers, if x0 see if they would like to steal money from the bank, then in order to steal in the dark, they will deactivate the camera by cutting off the electricity from the building or cut off the electricity from the bank. But of course, since Z police know about this, then we added a UBS system to the bank in order to supply power to Z camera. Always supply power to Z camera. And if I save that, we'll able to cut off the electricity. We will have also the camera being determined on their usage of the UBS from the UBS in banks and the UBS location in bank is unknown for, except for some people inside Z bank. Now, the cameras are usually DC, so it contains our charger, which if we are having from power supply, which is an AC power supply, then this a charger, welcome, invert this AC to DC for Z camera. Or it can take DC power directly from the UBS system, or it can be AC from the UBS and the convert it using surcharge, whatever. This is, of course, for z fixed camera and for z moveable camera. Now, our management system and the camera in case of the fiber optic is they don't deal with fiber optics. They use only the cables such as RG 11 hours, T6, T5, T9, normal cables. They don't deal with fiber optic. What can we do in this case? In this case, we will use a converter, BTU before the camera for transmission of the signal. The converter before the management for receiving signals. And all see in sending. So slide what I mean by this. This is of course, for zinc exit and the moveable camera Z control cable. It's usually one bear of 1.5 millimeters squared. Za cable, which is used the tool provides a signal to control the camera is simply one pair or form 0.5 millimeters squared, which of course similar to Z, one pair or for more than five millimeters squared of z sound system. Remembers that zeal light current cables should be at a minimum distance of a 20 to 25 centimeter from z power cables. Why? Because of course a sensor power cables have electromagnetic waves. It will cause interference of the signal. Interference with the signal, but provided by the camera or any light current system. Now what do I mean by the reasons of fiber-optic? Our camera, and our management systems such as the quadrature multiplexer and so on. Don't they deal with the fiber optic? Daunted deal with the fiber-optic. What I can do to use the fiber optic. After the camera, we will use a normal coaxial or G11, for example, cable. Before the converter. The converter takes his signal, the video signal, off the camera, and the converts it to a signal suitable for fiber-optic. Okay, So this is called the transmission converter. It is used to convert the Z signal provided by a coaxial cable or provided by the camera itself, and convert it to a light signal suitable for Z fiber optic itself. Then after moving for a long distance. Before the management system, we will add another converter. This is called receiving convert. This converter converts Z fiber-optic signal. A signal is suitable for the coaxial cable or for z management system. Then we will connect exact co axial Tuesday management system. You'll see is that we start to buy a small coaxial cable with a small coaxial cable. And we have to convert our Z transmission converter and receiving convert between them, the fiber optic, which will carry the signal for a large distance. Now, you will see that here, that fix it camera and the moveable camera, z fixed camera, we will need Bower and similar to as immovable camera from UBS panel, we will need at 21 multiplied by 2.5 millimeters square power cable, similar to the moveable camera to one multiply by 2.5 millimeters squared power cable. And Z output of z fixed camera or the moveable camera, which is that video signal, is transmitted using a cable, coaxial cable, RJ45 and for example, or RG 58 or whatever. And one cable coaxial RG 11, similar here for the mobile camera. But what is the difference? The difference is that we have an extra one pair, 1.5 millimeter squared, which is Control K. One, finds that the movable similar to as if exit, but do we have an extra one for control cable or Control Z Camera? If we would like to move it. Zoom-in, zoom-out and so on. Now here's our CCT visual drawing example, symbol illustration of this one. You will find that here. We have our UBS panel. This is our building, for example. And we have three rooms or four rooms, as you see here. You'll be S. And we have zeros for our cctv system where we receive our cameras and displays them on z monotone. Now we will find that Z you'll be as system provides power to camera here. This is number three, line number three, C3 slash UBS. Ubs because both of them are on the same line. Z are provided from Z UBS, and also online for the three cameras here, S4 slash UBS, C4 slash UBS, C4 slash UBS. And this one goes here, provides power to this one. And this one, s2 is slash UBS, s2 slash UBS, which means line number two, line three, line four, and the headline number one. Us supplies power to the outdoor cameras, store outdoor cameras. And these two outdoor cameras, this is our one line C1, you'll be SC1 us, similar to that. Lines inside that lighting the design or the power sockets, a design and whatever. Here we have a different lines. Now, this line assembly at two multiplied by one, multiplied by 2.5 millimeters squared. Kappa. Of course, this is used to provide power to Z camera. We have here, zack coming out of the UBS is four multiplied by one, multiplied by 2.5 to four. This camera. And the tool for z as our camera. This is two, this is four lines or two cables. Each cable is, for each camera cable, which is two multiplied by one, multiplied by 2.5 millimeters squared. And it is rooted in a BBC conduit. And this corner is at 20 millimeter diameter. In order to provide an area or a space for our cable. And the protection, of course, for our cable. Now looking into z and wreck itself, you will find here at the front lines, which means the received Zach camera signal from each of these cameras. From Zach for cameras here or the three cameras here? From the two cameras here. From the outdoor camera's going here and here going to two hours or cameras. In the end, all of the cameras provide signals to Z wreck. You'll find, for example, that this one, since it is a cable for the outdoor the outdoor cameras or movable cameras. It is one cable, RG 11 plus one cable control and one pair, 1.5 millimeter, which is that cable control or controlled keyword. You will see that z direc goes out from it to control cables to cable RG 11. Z RG 11 is for receiving radio signals from two cameras. You will find this camera, and this one is this one. And this one are taking from this cable. This line is consisting of two cables, RG 111 for this camera and one for this camera. To control cables, one for this camera and one for this camera. So z, I would go in or entering into z direc. Entering. What I mean by entering is a two cable or the two video signal cable. I'm entering Z Req, one from this 11, from this one to control going out from 01 to this 11 to this one. And we'll fund years this line representing this camera only. So it is one cable on 111 cable control one bear 1.5 millimeters squared. So in this video, we discussed the cctv system, z components, z management system. There from the types of Z camera, matrix, switch and z shop drawing exome. 171. Light Current Sound System Part 1: Hi everyone. In this video we would like to discuss z sound system. First. What is the sound system? Sound system is of course, used to take inputs such as Z, CD player or Mbc three player, or a mike in both from a reception, for example, or as security office in order to give a message to someone. For example, if we have a problem in CFR alarm system or a fire occurred. So we have a recordable message for everyone in order to leave the building. All of these are considered dies in both to our sound system. Cd player, MP3 player, radium, Mike, record the board message from Z fire alarm system. All of this, our input, this in boats go to Z wreck of the sound system. Z attack of the sound system consisting of our components which is used in, they can use the ambits and the producing the outputs. For example, z. We have veered eight multiplied by eight. Or dramatic superpower. I mean, if our system Kaltura, so what does this do? Assembly it takes it in boats and the provides eight outputs. We have here eight inputs. So we will have for C, D and Mbc three player. We have here for in boats. And do we have here 22 in both switches at reception and security office? We have here 1234. So we have here four of the CD and MC, the player dollars that reception and security office and fire alarm system. And do we have here also in Boots to Z control system, what is it? It is called remote control inside z different rooms. So what does this door, this is considered the ends and Athena waiter or volume controller in order to control Z volume inside z room or does the volume of the speaker inside z Rome itself? Here is the outlet. We have four outputs here and Donald's or four hours here too. And amplifier. And all understand each of these components, such as the attenuator, the speakers, and amplifiers. In the next slides, we have here our sound system consisting of number one, consisting of inputs such as the mike, CD player, or I recorded about fire alarm and message, etc. We have z management system, which is the rec, which are consisting of matrix switch, power amplifier, and we'll discuss them later. We'll also have an order contains a Z as the output or which is speaker gazes Baker, which you can be at wall mounted speaker, or can be a surface mounted speaker. Similar to this one. We have another diagram for this sound system. We have here that rack system which contains z and in boats, which is going to it such as Z MP3 player or the CDF layer radio recordable message Mike and so on. We have, is the outward going to z power amplifier. We have here two power amplifiers, z power m. But if ADH is used to step up Z signal or increase the volume of the sound system. Or to be more clear, it is used to amplify the signal. From H&M power amplifier. It means that it amplifies a z sound signal. You will find that this amplifier provide this power or provide signal dual 123 zones here. And number four, this 14 zones and this 11234. So this one we provide is power TO four zones. And this one is on us are four zones. So what does this mean? It means that this one is a zone consisting of two speakers. It can be our own, for example, such as the restaurant. And we have another two rooms or another two speakers in another room, which it can be coffee power. We have another two speakers, which it can be inside at lobby. The weekend have two unknowns or two speakers in a meeting room, for example, this one in a swimming bowl and so on. So each of these zones can represent a room, or it can represent the malt tablet number of rooms. Let's see each of these components and discuss them. First, we have Z speaker. It can be two types of number one, z surface mounted speaker. Number two, wall mounted as beaker. As you'll see here, is that surface mounted speaker, consisting of a group of speakers, have a distance between them called D, which is the distance between two speakers. And do we have here an angle for H of this beaker which are representing the distribution angle or the angle of loudspeaker emission. It is similar to the distribution angle, this representing the angle of distribution of z sound. So of course we should have an interference between this is bigger, this is bigger so that all of 0 should be showed here is that same sound or have the same DB or the same decibel for z sound. How we can calculate the distance between two speakers. We have a law called D, or the distance in between those because equal to two multiplied by x minus one. Where HE here, representing the height of 0, in which we input our speakers, minus one multiplied by Dan alpha over two. Then alpha over two. Alpha here is z distribution angle or the emission ankle. How we can obtain this angle? This angle is simply obtained from the data sheet of Z is beaker itself. Somebody D is the unknown. Here is the distance in between two successive, as speakers, equal to two multiplied by h minus one, where h is the height of 0 minus one. Then alpha over two, where alpha is z emission angle, which can obtain that from the data sheet. So you can get z distance between two successive speakers. The surface mounted type is used in the administration building. So because it has a small height, unlike in factories or in urban areas, Z height is very high, so we don't use z surface mounted. The measurement of the sound strengths or the intensity of sound is measured in db? Or is that DC Bell? Sometimes in datasheet, D is given directory. So you'll find that the distance between two successive speakers, given directory and z, that actually it, you don't have to get z alpha and substitute in 0. Z data sheet itself will tell you is that the distance between two speakers, for example, two meters, three meters, and five meters and so on. As the height increases, as the height increases, we will use a higher wattages beaker. Why? Because it will cover a higher area. As the height increases, we will use a higher wattages speakers in order to supply higher dB, which means that it covers a higher area. But at the same time you will find that the distance between two speakers will increase. Why is that distance will increase? Because if you see this low as the height increases, the distance in between two speakers increases. Why? Because as height increases, we will use a higher wattage speakers, which means that they will cover higher area. Again, z is b. You are here, for example, at one meter or a height of one meter, the distance will be two meters. This is an example. If the height increases to two meters, then I will use a higher voltage, which means it will have a higher Alpha or a higher angle of emission or a higher distribution angle. Therefore, the distance that required will decrease. Let's draw it. For example, if we use the higher voltage is n z distribution Angular will be like this. Okay? Higher distribution and we will use another beaker like this at a higher distance. Like this. The distance d between them from this center to this center will be higher. Why? Because we used a higher wattage or a high, What? A higher voltage is m before speaker. Therefore, Z Alpha or the emission angle will increase. The distance required the will increase. We can distribute our beaker at a higher distance. Z high alpha can be as high as 70 degrees. 70 degree is a good Alpha, 70 to 120 degrees. And a low Alpha can be as low as 2030 degree. Low Alpha. If we have a low, all unfollow exists. I exist, for example. Then we need to move it like this in order to intersect between z. Second is weaker, so the distance will decrease. Why? Because lower alpha means that we have a high attenuation of salad. Now second thing, z wall mounted speaker. The second type of z speakers here. We have z surface mountain, which we discussed, and we have Z wall mounted, which we discussed now. Now Z wall mounted as beaker, you will find that it is mounted on a wall. Z have a distance between them called D, similar to this transfer between two speakers or surface mounted speakers, which is also D. But what is other Francaise? The difference here is that Zillow used, we use a law called SPL, or the sound pressure level required equal to SPL maximum. The maximum pressure or the maximum sound pressure level. And all understand what does it mean? Minus 20 log d xat SPL, or the sound pressure level is measured in db or in decibel. So what does this represent exists representing DB output from each speaker. For example, our speaker in data sheet can produce at 70 dB or 90 db. So this is the SPL maximum. The maximum db, which again reduce the from our beaker. Z SPL are required. This is required DB in our area. For example, in an office we need at 50 dB. 50 dB is the pressure or Z, dc. Inside this row, we will use a higher value, which is in order to hear the difference, we will understand what I mean. Minus 20 log d d is the unknown. We can solve this equation by knowing SPL are required in the room is barely maximum, which you can produce the from our speaker, minus total 20 log d. D is the distance required. Wall mounted is used in areas which are very high, such as the factories. It is mounted on the wall at the height between 1.522.2 meters. Z SPL here means that sound pressure level and it is measured in the beam. Or they see pal. Z SPL are required. It is the amount of dB required in an area such as in an office, in a kitchen, in a factory, and so on. The SPL maximum is the amount of DB which is produced from our speaker and it can be obtained from z data sheet. The ISP car, what did you can be 56 watt then what? 21 and its other. Now let's have an example. This is a table of z sound, the personal level in our different reasons. For example, if we have a general office environment, then in this office, we would have at 50 dB. 50 dB in our office. Now if it is at Basie office, then we will have 70 dB in this office. Now as an example, if we have a pneumatic drill at a 10-meter, Xin, DB will be 100. At a jet engine, it will be 120 dB and so on. By knowing the required area, you can use the sound pressure levels. For example, if we have a general office environment, therefore, you will find that 0 dB in this office, Z noise or the sound in this obvious is 50 dB. So this representing z SPL, sound pressure level inside this room. So when I say Is that required, I will choose a higher value in order to hear the difference. Or our human or our ear as a human can distinguish the difference between z dB of the normal noise and z dB, which is required from our speakers. We will choose x0 required in an area like this or 50 dB, we will choose 55 or 60 dB. So as an example, if we have a general office of 50 dB, Zenzele required sound pressure level from our speakers will be 55 dB. Why? In order to hear the difference between general noise? Between noise or is that dB given from our speak with short provide FFT five dB in order to here it says beaker and language it from there from the noise. If we have a speaker of a 70 dB sound pressure level, maximum will be seventies. This is z, sound pressure level or the DB, but reduced from our speak. By substituting in the formula required, the distance will be 5.6 meter. The formula before which is the SPL are required is equal to SPL maximum minus 20 log d. We have as required as BL maximum. And we can get the required meters or as I require the distance, this distance CD between two speakers. If we use at lower dB speaker. So for example, here we have here as 70 dB, 70 Db Db produced from our speaker. So if we use the, for example, 50 dB or 60 dB, then what does this mean? It means that the distance will decrease, which means that we need more speakers. So as the water jobs as VKC or increases, it means that the DB produced increases. The distance in between two speakers will increase because the alpha increased. But here, when z, at z, when we use our lower dB speakers, lower dB, lower wattage means that we will need more speakers. So the distance between two speakers will decrease. 172. Light Current Sound System Part 2: Now we have Amazon component in our sound system, which is z power amplifier. What does z power amplifier Do? You will see that here. This is our power amplifier that we have here, our speaker. This power amplifier takes its power from that 220 volt supply, or on how to understand volt according to her own country. And according of course tools, these type of z power amplifier. And we have here the input signal to the power amplifiers such as the mic. Record that message as the CD player, radio, and so on. What does the power amplifier do? Number one, it is used to amplify sound signal. It is very obvious from z name of the power amplifier. It is amused to amplify or increase that dB over the sound signal. Number two, it also supplies power to the speakers at the same time. Simply takes a z sound signal from the mic, amplifies it. And since it goes a speaker, and as the same time it provides the Z power for that speaker itself. The wiring here, Z, here, the Z signal of z power and signal of z sound. Sound itself. It has a rating of 30 sixty one hundred, twenty, one hundred eighty, two hundred forty and so on, 640, and so on or etc. For the wattage, wattage of z power amplifier itself, depends on the number of speakers connected to it. Or do we can say is that Z zone? How many speakers in this zone? Depends on z, number of speakers who connected to the amplifier and the future expansion. If you are going to add more speakers in the future. Therefore, you have to use a higher voltage amplifier. Now let's have an example on z power amplifier. I assume that we have number one as certainly speakers. Each officers, what? 50 is beakers? Each of our six watt. 12 is Baker's h of a 10-watt. The total voltage in this case will be 30 multiplied by 30 watt, 15 multiplied by six watt, six, not 6660. And the 12 multiplied by 1012 multiplied by 1030, multiplied by 30 is 950, multiplied by six hundred, one hundred. Nine hundred is one thousand, two hundred and one thousand two hundred plus 120 will give us one-thousandths at 121. This is the total voltage of one of the speakers. The summation of the speakers which is used in our project file, and it'll be 1320 watt. We will assume at 10% the losses in the wires, because you will know that these beakers, the wires get is the power signal and sound signal. The power signal will cause power losses. We will assume a 10% losses. That required the voltage will be of z power amplifier will be 1.1, which is a safety factor here, which is considered as for Z losses or 1 tool if you would like to make it more safe, multiply it by z, total voltage found, which is one-thousandths around and 20. So the total voltage will be 146,550. What is representing the total wattage require the from our power amplifier Z closest available one in the market is 1500. And what is that? What does this mean? It means that we are going to choose AB power amplifier 1520. Or instead of using one amplifier for our project, we can use AML tableau number of amplifiers in instead of one in order to increase safety in our project. In case of one of the amplifier is off, the other amplifiers will work normally. We can use an amplifier power amplifier, which is found in your market or 480 watt. For under 18, what that required, the number will be 1400s, 50 What? Over 400 and data which are representing z value of voltage on one, on building fire. So it will be equal to 3.02. Which means that we will need a CD amplifiers by approximating this. Instead of using one amplifier of 1500 and what, we can use three amplifiers of 480 watt. Now let's see, wreck in sound system. Xerox in sound system is z1 similar to z data Xerox and data system, telephone system and so on. This is used to take all of the components or combine all of the components in our system. We have here is a wreck consisting of CD player, radio, Z matrix switch, the power amplifier 123 we have here as three amplifiers, for example, in our system, ends are recordable message for our fire alarm or Control Panel or the fire alarm system will find that for C power amplifier number one is connected to zone number one. This zone is consistent of a group of speakers, then is beakers here, each of a certainty what the parliament far too similar to it, or the front for me to whatever is consisting of group of speakers. And power amplifier number three, consisting of a group of speakers. This is considered as, as zone, okay, the power amplifier supplies sound to all of these rooms together, or all of these beakers took us on. Power amplifier number three is similar to it. Bottom-left, number two can be like this, or it can be redundant, or for safety. Or in case of one of these two speakers have a failure in it or out for maintenance. Now we will find that z k will use the here is one pair shielded twisted cable of 1.5 millimeters squared y. This cable can be used the tool send disease sound signal and the sand is z power signal. At the same time as the power signal and sound signal, you will find that it is rooted in 20 millimeter BBC conduit, Z conduit, which contains our keyword 20 millimeter of course, in order to, as a diameter, in order to provide is best for our keyboard, similar to the conduit in z power as Bauer panels or Z circuits such as the lightening is the sockets and so on. All of them are content inside of that are congruent, similar as before. Now, Z, CD player, radio and recordable message or considered as he embodies. This in boats, goes to the matrix switch, similar to the microchip, goes to the matrix switch. The magnetic switch connected to the output, which is the power amplifier. Now, you'll find that that recordable message is coming from Z control module of Z far alone control panel. Because in order to connect in-betweens, if our alarm control panel and a z sound system here we will need a control module. Now we will find that Z matrix which acts as a logic gate. What I mean by this, this means that it can take one in both only. Here we have Mike, radio, CD player, recordable message, Mike, and so on. So it takes one of the input as one, provided one and turn us off all of the other signals. For example, it will make the radio on and turns off CD player. Mike record the whole message. Or if I would like to say something to everyone or someone in zone number one, then what I will do, I will make Z signal here, one for the mic and the other is equal to 0. The mathematics which is used to manage between the inputs such as Z, redo, CD player, etc. It operates only one of them to avoid the operation of several sounds at the same time. Because if I would like to say something, I don't want to see radio or the CD player to be on at the same time. Number three, it also manages between the outputs, such as the power amplifier, to select which amplifier to operate. What I mean by this, if I would like to, for example, say something to Rome number one and the row number two. Row number one and number two are on Z zone number one of z power amplifier number one. So I can select the Z power amplifier number one only using the metric switch and turn off power amplifier number two and the power amplifier number three. In order to provide the message to the zone only, we will use one pair of 1.5 millimeter squared. Because one for the positive and one for the negative shielded twisted cable, which is used to provide Z power. And sound signal at the same time. We will use at twisted and shielded. Why? In order to again provide power and sound signal. Now, z component, or the component here is the atomic weight. What does this mean or what does this do? Similar to fn, you notice that the when you can rotate a wheel in order to select his speed of the fan. Or as, as vidoes XFN, of course, by controlling or rotating this wheel. What does this? We'll do this. We'll simply changes the voltage input two our speakers. By switching it, we will change resistance here inside it, which well, it goes to change as the voltage across our speaker. As we increase the voltage is z, wattage outward from Z. What edge inward to the beaker will increase. So z sound 11 will increase. Will see is that here we have z power amplifier I'm providing to those vehicles or without adding a waiter. Then it goes towards the attenuate or end. We control Z at an winter in order to control the volume. All of these beakers will see is that here we have z box or Z. We can say that distribution box or direc. It provides a Zoom number one which has a volume. This volume this volume is connected to the box or direct and control disease zone. Similar tools is volume switch or this at and whether controls, this is zone, this volume switch or the volume control controls exist in Zoom. So if we get back, back again to the first slide, you will see that here something very good. What is it? You will find here is that we have our remote control or the attenuator. We will find that this atom waiter goes back to what goes back to our Rec system. And C power amplifier provides power tools, that is Toronto or z, or the front rooms. So that control signal gets a back towards the power amplifier. So by controlling year, we can change the voltage across Z as bigger than we can control Z volume. Let's go forward. Now it is used to control sound delivered in each room. Simply Control Z amount of the voltage entering this as beaker, which will cause, or will it changes as somebody in Tennessee and z room. Now here's an example of the sound system. You'll find here. And in both three cables, 1.5 millimeters squared. Shielded twisted pair, wrote it in at 20 millimeter. Bbc conduit. This is the input to our books, our bookstore or hour at distribution box or our wreck, whatever. What happens here. First, it provides this. We have how many zones? So we have Zoom number one, which are representing this rule. You will find the speaker number one is slash zone one is big on number two slash Xun, one, bigger number three slash zone one, and so on. And here it goes to Z zone number two. You will find speak on number two. Zone three is bigger. Number one, zone two. Both of them are in zone two. This is Zoom to node three. We have here is B economy per one, zone three. Bigger number to zone three. You will find that the m, what is a sea cables from our main wreck. For example, three cables, 1.5 millimeter. Each cable is used for each zone, will find that Z zone has a cable 1.5 millimeters squared. Two wasted behave. Similarly here, 1.5 millimeters squared, twisted bit. Similar here, H zone representing a room. We can of course add a volume switch. Although we can add an add-in waiter or volume switch in order to control Z volume of sound inside this room. So in this lecture, we discussed the z sound system, its components such as Z power amplifier, Zm, such as MIX CD player, radio and so on. We'll discuss the X0 outputs such as Z power amplifiers or the app was twosies beakers and discussed the different type of speakers such as the wall mounted and surface mounted. And discuss the Z matrix switch and the Xerox system.